17C-278 (2) LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
fK C. Conduit shall be fished and cleaned and dry before pulling wires and shall be suitably
protected against entrance of dirt and moisture during construction.
D. Ends of all conduits shall be reamed and all joints made waterproof. Connections to junction
boxes shall be double locknut and bushing,using insulated bushings on all conduit 1-1/4"or
larger. Grounding busing shall be provided at all panel connections.
E. Conduit connections to motor fi-ames shall have a minimum of 18"of greenfield to eliminate
vibrations and noise being transferred to other parts of the building,with cable jumper across
greenfield and fittings.
F. Run conduit to avoid low pockets which might collect water. During installation,cap open
ends.
G. Maintain conduits in position during the pouring of concrete.
H. Electric metallic tubing will not be installed below grade in areas subject to severe corrosion
conditions or embedded in concrete. Approved conduit no larger than 1-1/4"&2"may be
installed on the centerline of concrete slabs on grade,respectively. Conduit larger than the
above may be embedded in the slab,provided the slab on grade is thickened accordingly.
Where conduit is run below slab on grade,conduit will be corrosion protected.
I. Support exposed conduit in a firm and substantial manner by means of adjustable malleable
hangers of approved design.
J. Permanent electrical power shall be scheduled for availability for use to make tests of
mechanical equipment prior to the installation completion date.
K. All penetrations through fire rated walls shall be sealed with 3-hour fire-rated caulk or putty
"3M"or equal
3.5 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Verify mounting heights of switches and receptacles with Architect before installation. The
Electrical Subcontractor shall check with Architectural and Structural Plans for interference.
B. Junction and outlet boxes,where exposed to weather and wet locations,shall be of the
threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket.
C. Pull boxes shall be adequate size to accommodate the conductors installed therein without
excessive bending of the conductors,which would damage the conductor insulation.
D. All outlets installed in masonry shall be so set that their outer edges are I/4"in back of finished
surface.
E. Outlet boxes shall not be supported by the conduit. Suitable means shall be provided to
support the outlet box to take the weight of the fixture.
F. Fixture outlet boxes used as junction boxes or outlets not used,shall be provided with cover.
ELECTRICAL 16000 43
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
,'"%k
70- 100 #8 (#6)
110-200 #4 (#4)
225 -400 #2 (1/0)
500,600 *2 x#1 (2 x 2/0)
700, 800 *2 x 1/0 (2 x 3/0)
1000 *3 x2/0 (3 x 4/0)
*Adjust quantity(if needed)to match number of conduits in run.
**Where phase leg conductor ampacity exceeds over-current device, increase grounding
conductor as if the overcurrent device size matched the phase leg ampacity.
S. Grounding electrode conductor and conductors used for bonding on the supply side of the
service device shall be sized in accordance with the following table:
SIZING OF GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTORS AND MAIN (AND SUPPLY
SIDE OF SERVICE)BONDING JUMPERS
SERVICE CONDUCTOR GROUNDING ELEC-TRODE BONDING JUMPER
SIZE CABLEBUS CONDUCTOR
SIZE--------CU SIZE-- CU CU
#2 100 #8 #8
3/0 max. 200 #4 #4
500 MCM.max. 400 1/0 1/0
2x350 MCM.max 600 2/0 2/0
2x500 MCM max 800 2/0 2/0
4x350 MCM max 1200 3/0 250 MCM
5x400 MCM max 1600 3/0 400 MCM
T. Connections of ground wires shall be in accordance with the following:
LOCATION GROUND WIRE CONNECTION
Main switchboard Switchboard ground bus
Junction box at which Metal body of junction box
non-metallic conduits
terminate
3.4 CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. All conduits shall be installed so as to provide the straightest possible run with not more than
the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in a single run. Where more bends are necessary,the
Electrical Subcontractor shall provide suitable pull boxes.
B. Electric metallic tubing with approved fittings will be accepted in lieu of heavy wall conduit
where so approved by the National Electrical Code.
ELECTRICAL 16000-42
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
L Provide grounding bonds between all metallic conduits of the light and power system which
enter and leave cable chambers or other non-metallic cable pulling and splicing boxes.
Accomplish this by equipping the conduit with bushings of the grounding type individually
cross connected.
J. Bond metallic conduits containing grounding electrode conductors and main bonding
conductors to the ground bus service enclosure and/or grounding electrode at both ends of
each run utilizing grounding bushings and jumpers.
K. Provide grounding bonds for all metallic conduits of the light and power system, which
terminate in pits below equipment for which a ground bus is specified. Accomplish this by
equipping the conduits with bushings of the grounding type connected individually to the
ground bus.
L. Provide supplementary ground bonding where metallic conduits terminate at metal clad
equipment (or at the metal pull box of equipment) for which a ground bus is specified.
Accomplish this by equipping the conduits with bushings of the grounding type connected
individually by means of jumpers to the ground bus.
M. Each grounding type bushing shall have the maximum ground wire accommodation available
in standard manufacture for the particular conduit size. Connection to bushing shall be with
wire of this maximum size.
N. Provide a#6 AWG in 3/4'minimum conduit green insulated copper ground wire connection to
cold water pipe or other main building service grounding electrode for the main telephone
equipment room.
O. The central equipment for the fire protection alarm system shall have its grounding terminal
connected to the nearest metallic cold water main by means of a #6 green coded insulated
conductor,run in 3/4'threaded metallic conduit. Utilize a ground clamp of a type specifically
manufactured for the purpose.
P. Conductors utilized for grounding and bonding shall have Type "TW" or better insulation,
color coded green.
Q. Bonding conductors on the load side of the service device and equipment grounding
conductors shall be sized in relation to the fuse or trip size of the overcurrent device supplying
the circuit in accordance with the following table:
R. SIZING OF EQUIPMENT AND RACEWAY GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
AND LOAD SIDE OF SERVICE BONDING JUMPERS
OVERCURRENT DEVICE GROUNDING CONDUCT OR BONDING JUMPER
FUSE OR TRIP SIZE SIZE--CU (AL)
(AMPS)**
15 -20 #12 (#10)
25 -60 #10 (#8)
ELECTRICAL 16000-41
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
G. In areas where finish may be of a different color,the Architect will advise on finish.
H. Electrical equipment,such as junction and pull boxes,controls and apparatus shall be made
accessible.
I. There shall be no splices in new wire except where circuits are branched.
J. Make splices for#10 or smaller conductors with U.L.approved solderless connectors based
on MMM Co."Scotchlock"Type S,M,or L,Buchanan,or T&B"Stakon". Make splices,
cable taps and terminals for#8 or larger conductors with U.L.approved bolted pressure
conductors of bronze or copper construction equal to those manufactured by T&B or Burndy.
3.3 GROUNDING
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall famish and install all material required for the rounding
and/or bonding in the building of all equipment,power and lighting systems.
B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall make tight and proper all metallic components and
equipment to one another and to ground,using a positive foolproof system of connections.
Provide and install bending and grounding conductors with approved termination where
required,conforming with latest National Electric Code,M.E.C.O.and other applicable
specification standards.
C. A#12 AWG insulated equipment ground conductor shall be installed in each length of
flexible metallic conduit connecting to motors,recessed lighting fixtures and other equipment
components for continuity. Positive ground connections with ground wire shall be made at
each outlet box,lighting fixture,motor and other equipment components by means of
positively secured ground clamp in each.
D. Size ground connections according to Code. Ground connections shall be copper,connected
with code-approved brass or copper clamp fittings. Do not use soldered connections in
grounding connection.
E. Make ground connection and taps from equipment with as few connections as
possible. Make connections with approved type solderless connectors,protect from
mechanical injury and support rigidity.
F. Clean contact surfaces thoroughly before connection is made,so as to insure a good metal-to-
metal contact. Ground connections shall be readily accessible for inspection at all times.
G. Ground all systems and equipment in accordance with best industry practice and the
following:
H. Establish a ground bonding connection from structural building steel to each cold water main
entering the building. Each bonding connection shall consist of green insulated conductors
run in threaded steel conduit, and sized as indicated hereinafter for grounding electrode
conductors.
ELECTRICAL 1600040
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install all disconnect switches, thermal protection
and starters for all heating and cooling and plumbing equipment except where such are an
integral part of the equipment.
B. Provide required electrical connections for the building mechanical equipment. Wiring shall
be as necessary to provide proper operation of the equipment including power and
temperature control and as indicated on the plans.
C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall,before energizing any motor or other piece of mechanical
equipment,verify that it is proper voltage,properly lubricated,aligned and/or ready for proper
and safe operation. Motor rotation shall be checked and corrected,if necessary.
D. Make connections to other building equipment as required. Data on the drawings of
equipment actually purchased before starting this work of its rough-in. Each piece of
equipment and each motor shall be provided with an approved disconnect and over-current
protection as required by Code.
3.2 WORKMANSHIP
A. This Contractor shall endeavor to layout and perform his work in such a manner as to cause
no delay in the construction work by other trades.
B. This Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall be responsible for the correctness of
same. No allowance will be made for differences between actual measurements and those
shown on the plans.
C. If,in laying out his work,this Contractor finds that the work of other trades might interfere
with him,the Architect/Engineer shall be notified at once. The right is hereby reserved by the
Architect/Engineer to make reasonable changes in arrangement of equipment,piping,etc.,
prior to roughing-in,if interference is found,without additional cost to the Owner.
D. All work shall be installed in such a manner as to be readily accessible for maintenance,repair
and operation. Deviations from the plans must be approved by the Architect/Engineer
without additional cost to the Owner.
E. The locations of outlets,apparatus and equipment are approximate only and the runs of
feeders,mains and branches are not necessarily to be made exactly as shown on the plans.
The exact locations of such work shall be determined after full consideration has been given
to work of other trades and without changes in the design of the systems. The entire
installation shall conform to the latest issue of the National Electric Code and local inspection
authorities.
F. Verify exact circuit breaker,feeder and outlet requirements and locations for mechanical
equipment in accordance with manufacturer's wiring diagrams.Incorporate any changes
necessary in design to accommodate such.
ELECTRICAL 16000-39
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
personnel and fire department response teams on the operation of the system.
Field Quality Control
The system shall be installed and fully tested under the supervision of a trained manufacturer's
representative. The system shall be demonstrated to perform all of the function as specified.
Each individual system operation on a circuit by circuit basis shall be tested for its complete
operation. The procedure for testing the entire fire alarm system shall be set forth with the
consent of the code enforcement official,the Engineer and the manufacturer.
N DOCUMENTATION AND TRAINING
The contractor shall compile and provide to the owners three(3)complete manual on the
completed system to include operating and maintenance instruction,catalog cuts of all
equipment and components,as-built wiring diagrams and a manufacturer's suggested spare
parts list.
In addition to the above manuals,the contractor shall provide the services of the manufacturer's
trained representative for a period of four(4)hours to instruct the owners'designated personnel
on the operation and maintenance of the entire system. An EST2 End-User Training Video
shall be included as part of the system documentation.
2.20 CATV SYSTEM "
A. Provide Simplex type 5160-9939 TV connector in a Wiremold series 5744 stainless still box
and plate at each CATV location. Box shall be flush mounted in the wall at the height as
shown or as directed by the architect in the field.
B. Provide RG6 Cable from each CATV location to existing CATV entrance near Telephone
equipment in the Mechanical Room on First Floor.Cables shall be run in conduits/sleeves.
2.21 RELAYS
A. Furnish and install relays as required to wire Fire Alarm System Smoke Dampers, Elevator
Recall,and other low voltage systems. Relays to be in ventilated NEMA enclosure.
2.22 POWER INTERRUPTIONS
A. All interruptions of power shall be coordinated, and shall be considered to be done
in strict accordance with approval from Lilly Library Academy only.
ELECTRICAL 16000-38
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
performed by skilled technicians under the direction of experienced engineers,all of
whom are properly trained and qualified.
F. Wiring
1. All wiring for the system shall be in accordance with Articles 760, 725, and 800 of
the National Electrical Code and local electrical codes.
2. Provide complete wiring and conduit between all equipment. All devices shall be
mounted upon and splices made in UL listed boxes. Wiring splices and transposing
or changing of colors will not be permitted.
3. All junction boxes shall be painted red and labeled as`Fire Alarm System'with decal
or approved markings.
4. Fire Alarm control systems and equipment shall be connected to separate dedicated
branch circuits, sized as required for proper service. Circuits shall be labeled 'FIRE
ALARM'.
G. Final Tests/Warranty
1. The system shall be fully tested in accordance with UL guidelines and NFPA
standards.Each and every device shall be tested.
2. A copy of the final test report shall be submitted indicating proper functioning of the
system and conformance to the specifications. The test shall be performed by UL
certified and factory-trained qualified technicians. Each and every device shall be
tested,and standalone operation of remote panels shall be verified.Final testing [and
UL certification] shall be performed by the same company that will hold and execute
the Test and Inspection contract.
3. The manufacturer shall guarantee all system equipment for a period of three(3)years
from the date of final acceptance.
4. The contractor shall guarantee all raceways and wiring to be free from inherent
mechanical or electrical defects for one(1)year from the date of final acceptance of
the system.
5. Tests shall be performed by a UUJS company. Reports of any field testing during
installation shall be forwarded to the Engineer.
Each individual system operation on a circuit by circuit basis shall be tested for its
complete operation. The procedure for testing the entire fire alarm system shall be
set forth with the consent of the code enforcement official,the Engineer and the
manufacturer.
H. Training
1. The contractor shall provide the services of the manufacturer's representative for a
period of 4 hours, during normal business hours, to instruct the owner's designated
ELECTRICAL 16000-37
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
minimum sound output of dBA required under NFPA.
4. System Accessories
a. Digital Communicator: - Provide a digital communicator in panel and connect to a
telephone main service board on first floor mechanical room by four pair Cat3
cables. Provide Two RJ31X Jacks inside fire alarm panel. Meet all applicable code
and requirements of Northampton Fire Department for reporting.
b. Sprinkler System Devices: The electrical contractor shall coordinate the following to
ensure that the required installation and wiring of all waterflow and tamper switches
is accomplished in a manner that will result in a complete operable and tested
sprinkler system.Each device shall be monitored as a separate and distinct point.
-Waterflow will activate the alarm sequence.
-Tamper OSY U2A will activate a supervisory trouble.
C. Terminal Cabinets: Provide fire alarm terminal cabinets where necessary. The
cabinets,which shall have a removable hinged cover with key lock and red finish are
intended to house analog/addressable modules and facilitate field wiring junctions.
d. Remote Alarm Indicators: Provide remote LED indicators for sensors located behind
locked doors.Provide a permanent label on each indicator identifying the device type
and actual location.
e. Exterior Strobe: Provide a flashing weatherproof strobe with a minimum 150,000
candlepower output where shown. The strobe shall be properly installed on a
weatherproof backbox.
f. Auxiliary Power Supplies: Where the power requirements exceed that which is
supplied by the FACP, provide distributed intelligent power supplies (EST model
APS or BPS) where shown or allowed. Power supplies shall communicate with the
FACP via data communications, whereby each power supply ground fault, loss of
AC power or Battery Fail, and each notification circuit served shall be individually
supervised.
g. Door Holders: Provide 24VDC magnetic door holders (EST model 1501, 1504 or
1508) where shown and required. Door holders shall be powered by system power,
but are not required to operate under standby battery.
h. Key Repository: Provide a Knox Box key repository where shown and required in
accordance with local requirements.
i. Provide Fire Alarm 120V Red Beacon, type as required by Fire Department,mount
on wall above Knox Box at a height of minimum 12 feet a.f.g.or as required by Fire
Department
E. Installation
1. Installation shall be supervised and tested by the system supplier.The work shall be
ELECTRICAL 16000-36
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
contact. In the event of an addressable loop communications failure, devices shall remain
capable of initiating an alarm sequence.
a. Photoelectric Smoke Detector: Provide analog photoelectric smoke detectors (EST
model SIGA-PS)where shown and required.
b. Analog Heat Detectors: Provide Analog Heat Detectors,EST model SIGA-HFS for
fixed temperature operation, or model SIGA-HRS for combined fixed
temperature/rate-of-rise operation. Analog heat detectors shall be rated for 70 foot
spacing and will cause an alarm when the temperature reaches 65 degrees above
ambient. The fixed temperature rating shall be 135 degrees and the rate of rise shall
be rated for 15 degrees per minute. Where otherwise required,provide conventional
heat detectors (V280 series) in lieu of analog heat detectors. Each conventional heat
detector shall be individually addressable via an intelligent input module.
C. Analog Duct Smoke Detector: Provide analog photoelectric duct smoke detectors
mounted in air ducts where shown and required.Each detector shall be supplied with
duct mounting plate, remote indicator and sampling tubes sized according to duct
width. Provide the required auxiliary relay outputs or addressable relay control
modules with each detector in order to accomplish the required HVAC control and
override functions.
d. Intelligent Manual Pull Stations: Provide intelligent addressable manual stations
(EST model SIGA-278B)where shown. The station shall be double action type with
screw terminals,toggle switch,and integral addressable electronics. The station shall
be constructed of red Lexan with white raised letters and a key reset switch. The
station shall be keyed alike to the FACP.
e. Monitor Module: Provide addressable input monitor modules (EST model SIGA-
CTl, WTM, or CT2) to monitor related systems or integrate conventional initiating
devices onto the addressable loop.
f. Control Module: Provide addressable output control modules (EST model SIGA-
CC1, CC2, or CR)to supervise and control conventional devices(indicating circuits,
AHUs,door holders,etc.)over the addressable loop.Control modules shall provide a
supervised output rated for 1 or 2 amps @ 24VDC,as required.
3. Primary Notification Appliances:
Flush mounted combination Audio/Visual signaling appliances where practical. Stand alone
devices may be used to augment combination units when necessary. Specific audible and
visual characteristics shall be as follows:
a. Visual Signals: Furnish and install self-synchronizing xenon strobes in compliance
with NFPA 72 chapter 6 and rated per UL 1971 testing. Strobes shall an effective
intensity rating of 15 candela in corridors and other areas up to 20' x 20', 30 candela
in areas up to 30'x 30' and 110 candela in areas up to 50'x 50'.
b. Audible Signals: Provide Horns in Audio Visual Devices. Each Horn shall have a
ELECTRICAL 16000-35
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
control switches for system status scrolling, alarm acknowledge, trouble
acknowledge,reset, and system drill. The unit shall have LED indicators for
Normal Power Status,Alarm,Supervisory,Trouble and TesVProgram.
d. Addressable Loop Interface: Provide an addressable loop interface card for
each addressable signaling line circuit. Each circuit shall support digital
communications with up to 196 addressable field devices, with loop
distances in excess of 6,000 ft. The addressable loop interface shall support
the following features and functions:
1) Provide full digital communications with analog field devices.
2) An integral alarm relay which will support alarm operation in the
event of a failure of addressable loop data communications.
3) The interface card shall support the retrieval of the following
information from each individual analog system device:
-Device serial number
-Device address
-Device type and personality code
-Date of manufacture
-Hours in use
-Number of alarms and troubles '
-Time and date of last alarm
-Amount of environmental compensation left/used
-Last maintenance date
-Current detector sensitivity values
-Diagnostic information(trouble codes)
e. System Power Supplies: Integral system power supplies shall provide 6
amps of 24VDC operating and emergency power to each panel.Each supply
shall contain brownout,low battery detection, system ground fault,and LED
indicators for loss of AC or CPU failure.
f. Audio Control/Amplifiers: Audio amplifiers shall provide 30 or 50 watts at
either 25Vrms or 70Vrms, with a built in (backup) tone generator and
automatic switching to a standby amplifier in the event of a component
failure. Amplifiers will provide 2 channel audio, and shall communicate
their status directly to the FACP.
2. Intelligent System Devices:
Provide intelligent analog devices where shown and required. Each device shall retain
operating characteristics in non-volatile memory and conduct algorithms to distinguish real
fire conditions from unwanted nuisance alarms. All analog devices shall provide dual LED
indicators,a green LED shall flash to denote active communication,and a red LED shall flash .
to denote an alarm condition. Devices shall be interchangeable with twist-lock bases which
shall provide a supervised remote LED output, fault isolation circuitry, or an auxiliary relay
ELECTRICAL 16000-34
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
and status conditions from any related systems or conventional devices.
b. Addressable control modules or relays shall provide auxiliary control
functions.
C. Addressable loop wiring shall support all devices shown and allow for a
minimum of 25%spare capacity and be wired in a Class B,Style 4 fashion.
d. As a minimum,power supplies,amplifiers and notification appliance circuits
shall operate all devices shown plus 25% spare capacity, and be wired in a
Class B, Style Y fashion.
e. Audio and visual signals shall be circuited separately to allow continued
operation of the visual signal in the event of a silencing of the audible signal.
D. System Components:
1. Fire Alarm Network Control Panel
a. Provide and install an EST-2 Fire Alarm Control Panel(FACP).The system
shall support 380 analog/addressable devices,expandable to 1900 points in a
true peer-to-peer network (multi-panel) configuration. The FACP shall
provide the following functions:
1) Monitor all initiating devices, report to each network node,
annunciate the alarmed device and its' location, capture elevators,
conduct smoke control functions, and initiate the audio/visual
evacuation signaling and control sequences as described herein.
2) Conduct municipal notification as described herein.
3) Initiating devices shall respond with their condition. Control relays
shall be individually addressable by the system to respond
automatically in the event of an alarm of related sensors. Manual
override of control relays shall be individually addressable by the
operator.
b. Control Configuration: All fire alarm control portions of the system shall be
housed in locking, semi-flush mounted enclosures. All panel initiating and
control status indicators shall be visible through a clear Lexan window.
Access to the control panel shall be by keys issued to the Fire Department
and authorized personnel.Each panel shall incorporate an operator interface,
CPU, addressable loop interface cards, audio control/microphone,
amplifiers, power supply and batteries to perform the system operation as
described herein.
OW C. Primary Operator Control: The FACP shall provide an operator interface
module consisting of a 160 character backlit LCD display to display all
system alarm,trouble and supervisory conditions,and shall provide common
ELECTRICAL 16000-33
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
f. Visually indicate the alarm initiating device type and location via the LCD
display located at the FACP.
g. Automatically shut down affected Supply and Return fans, and control
HVAC equipment to initiate smoke control functions as required. Manual
override controls and programmable relay interface shall serve as an
interface to the Building Automation System.
h. Operate prioritized outputs to release all magnetically held smoke doors and
magnetically locked doors throughout the building.
i. Activate the exterior weatherproof beacon.
C. General Requirements
1. The fire alarm system shall be designed and UL and FM approved for Fire,Audio
Evacuation and Security applications.The system operational characteristics shall be
stored in non-volatile EEPROM memory,shall be field programmable and capable
of being edited with no factory involvement.
2. The system shall utilize broadcast polling techniques and microprocessor-based
detectors to minimize the required response time and possible false alarms.
Individual initiating and control devices shall retain pre-programmed response
characteristics,history logging,and support electronic addressing.A system-wide
response(alarm sequence)to an alarm condition shall take place within 3 seconds.
3. The system shall support analog sensing techniques to monitor individual devices
which enables the user to set sensitivity parameters.All inputs shall be subject to
multi-level alarm verification.The system shall be capable of reporting the status and
sensitivity of each device and vectoring this information to a printer.The system
shall automatically identify any detector which becomes dirty(maintenance alert),
prior to false alarming.
4. The system shall be supported by standby batteries.In the event of a loss of primary
power,batteries shall support 24 hours of full supervisory operation followed by 15
minutes of alarm.
5. The system shall be capable of nine levels of alarm prioritization,and allow control
by event,and may include cross zoning,stepping,and/or logic statement inputs.
6. All equipment shall be new and unused.All components and systems shall be
designed for uninterrupted duty.All equipment,materials and accessories covered by
these requirements shall be provided by a single manufacturer,or if provided by
different manufacturers recognized as compatible by both manufacturers.
7. Circuiting Guidelines.Each initiating device and indicating circuit shall be
electronically supervised and individually addressable.All wiring shall be as follows: ..
a. Individual addressable modules shall be used to monitor waterflow,tamper,
ELECTRICAL 16000-32
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
e. Provide calculations to support the size of standby batteries notification
circuits and power supplies submitted.Calculations shall demonstrate proper
current draw, voltage drop, wire size considerations and spare capacity
allowances.
f. Confirmation that the equipment supplier will provide on-site project
management and supervision during system installation,and perform system
testing and instruction.
12. Conform to all UL standards for testing and provide certification of the completed
installation by a UL approved testing company.
13. The equipment supplier shall conduct the initial programming of the system and a
complete rack/test of hardware panels prior to delivery to the installing contractor.
14. Provide copies of Operating&Maintenance manuals with the request for final
inspection.O&M Manuals shall include the following:
a. All of the information submitted in the shop drawings.
b. As-built documentation which incorporates all modifications to the system,
whether made as a field change or by a change order.
C. Include a copy of the final test report, [UL certificate]and test contract.
B. Sequence of Operation
1. The operation of a manual station or activation of any automatic alarm initiating
device(system smoke,heat,waterflow)shall automatically:
a. Initiate the transmission of the alarm to the approved Central Station via a
Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter(DAC 1).
b. Sound a code 3 temporal evacuation signal over all audio circuits, unless
noted otherwise.
C. Flash all visual signals throughout the building in a synchronized manner.
d. Flash an alarm LED and sound an audible signal at the FACP. Upon
Acknowledgment, the alarm LED shall light steadily and the audible shall
silence. Subsequent alarms shall re-initiate this sequence.
e. Upon alarm initiation by an elevator lobby smoke detector or other
designated recall device, recall all elevators that serve the floor of
initialization to the main egress level. If the alarm initiates on the main
egress level,return the elevator to the alternate floor as directed by the local
authority having jurisdiction.Provide for shunt tripping over elevator power
as shown and required by applicable codes.
ELECTRICAL 16000-31
ON
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
Engineer at the time of bid.
7. Provide automatic and manual,closed circuit,multiplex fire alarm communications
according to the contract documents,wired,connected and left in first class operating
condition.
8. Final connections,testing,and adjusting of the system shall be done under the direct
supervision of the system supplier.Provide NICET certified and factory trained
technicians to demonstrate the system to the satisfaction of the Owner's
Representative,and make all additional adjustments to the system operation as
required by the Owner's Representative.
9. Provide equipment manufactured by Edwards Systems Technology/EST. This
constitutes the quality and performance of the equipment and system to be furnished.
10. The system design and installation shall conform to the following standards:
a. All equipment shall be UL listed for it's intended purpose.
b. NFPA standards 70,72,90A,92A,and 101.
C. BOCA Basic Building Code-Latest Edition.
d. Current State Building Code.
e. The Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA).
f. All requirements of all local authorities having jurisdiction.
g. Provide appropriate labels on all fire alarm devices and main control panel
as required by local fire department.
h. Provide fire alarm zone directory,and graphic representation.
11. Submit 6 complete sets of shop drawings to include:
a. Complete point-to-point riser diagram showing all equipment and size, type
and number of all conductors and devices.
b. Large scale drawings of each panel showing module placement and spare
capacity allowances.
C. Address listing of all field devices shown on floor plans for coordination of
LCD message text assignments.
d. Original catalog data sheets for all items to assure compliance with these
specifications. This equipment shall be subject to approval, and no
equipment shall be ordered without prior approval.
ELECTRICAL 16000-30
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
role of lead crafts persons,will be able to provide leadership and technical resources for the
remaining crafts persons on the project.A minimum of 30 percent of personnel shall be
BICSI registered telecommunications installers. Of that number 15 percent shall be registered
at the technical level,at least 40 percent shall be registered at the installer level,and the
balance shall be registered at the apprentice level. A copy of their registrations must be
submitted in the Vendor's response to this RFQ.
G. Testing
Testing shall conform to TIA/EIA TSB-67 Transmission Performance Specifications for
Field Testing of Unshielded Twisted Cabling Systems and ANS/11A/EIA-568-A-1,
Propagation Delay and Delay Skew Specification for 100 ohm 4-pair cable. Testing shall be
accomplished using level 11 field testers.
Test each pair and shield of each cable for opens,shorts,grounds,and pair reversal. Correct
grounded and reversed pairs. Examine open and shored pairs to determine if problem is
caused by improper termination. If termination is proper,tag bad pairs at both ends and note
on termination sheets. Perform testing of copper cables with tester meeting TIA/EIA TSB-87
and ANSYIIA-568-A-1 requirements.
Submit printout for each cable tested.
Submit 3.5 in.disks with test results and program to view results.
Where any portion of system does not meet the specifications; correct deviation, and repeat
applicable testing at no additional cost to the owner.
2.19 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A. Scope
1. Provide complete analog/addressable fire detection,alarm and control system in
compliance with all specifications and drawings.The system shall interface to other
building systems to conduct monitoring and control functions as described herein.
2. The system shall be a microprocessor fire alarm system which will integrate
peripheral devices onto the system via digital data communications.
3. Evacuation notification shall consist of audio evacuation tone Sound a code 3
temporal evacuation signal over all audio circuits,and visual(strobe)signaling.
4. Each initiating device shall have full analog detection capabilities;will maintain
operating characteristics stored in dedicated EEPROM memory,identify its'exact
location,and shall operate as described elsewhere in these specifications.
5. Work in this section,as shown or specified,shall be in accordance with the related
contract documents.
6. All exceptions,variances and substitutions of operating capabilities or equipment
called for in these specifications shall be listed in writing and forwarded to the
ELECTRICAL 16000-29
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
sensitivity control, replaceable circuit board, silent operation, adjustable time delay, and a
Five (5)year warranty. The switch pack shall be heavy duty type with zero crossing circuit
for high inrush current loads, isolated (dry) contacts, 120/277VAC operation and a Five (5)
year warranty. Switch-pack shall be UL listed and be by the same manufacturer of the
occupancy connected to it. Switch pack shall be Watt Stopper or approved equal, and
Occupancy sensor shall be Watt Stopper or approved equal. Where the sensor is shown as a
slave sensor (in the corridor) the sensor shall be connected to the switch-pack for the other
sensors serving the area.
2.17 TWO COMPARTMENT WIREMOLD RACEWAY ASSEMBLIES
A. Furnish and install as shown on plans,two compartment non metallic surface raceway system
consisting of back divider and cover.
B. Furnish and install in these assemblies all appropriate fittings, elbows, couplings, devider,
covers etc.for a complete system with all devices such as receptacles and data jacks as shown
on plans.
C. Furnish and install and conductors and all wiring devices as indicated.
D. Approved manufacturer:Wiremold Access 5000 SAl Series, finish to be,as approved by the
architect.Approved equal by Hubbell or Panduit Corp.
2.18 TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEMS:
A. Furnish and install Telephone and Data raceways, outlet boxes, Data & Voice Jacks and
complete with wiring using only CAT6 Cable.
B. All raceways shall be concealed and of a size as shown on the plans.
C. Furnish and install CAT6 Cable homerun (use 3/4" conduit through walls and floors, run
cables tied neatly together on side of wall above hung ceiling or in crawl space in a open steel
ring installed at every 5 feet to hold all low voltage cables, run all cables parallel or
perpendicular only to building walls, diagonal run of cables shall not be made unless
instructed otherwise in field) for every Telephone and Data Outlets circuited back to Data
Room on Second Floor.
D. Telephone and Data outlets shall include Hubbell series HD670(A)or(B)6 for Data and
HD670(A)or(B)4 for Voice Jacks and Connectors mounted individually in a single gang box
for each with Hubbell type #FPL11 Telco Ivory cover plates with written Data and Voice
respectively for each applications.
Data Jacks shall be Office White,Telephone Jacks shall be Gray.
E. The entire installation shall be coordinated with Lilly Library.
F. Experience
The Vendor must have BICSI registered installers and technicians on staff and assign them to
this project. The project shall be staffed at all times by installers and technicians who,in the
ELECTRICAL 16000-28
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
X. Exact colors shall be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color charts.
Y. All exterior lighting fixtures shall be fused.
Z. All tamperproof fasteners shall be Tork head(center pin reject)type. Provide three(3)
screwdrivers for such to Owner.
2.16 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Wall mounted occupancy sensor shall provide 300 sq.foot coverage for hand motion. Switch
shall mount flush in outlet box, be compatible with magnetic and electronic ballasts, have
microprocessor-based circuitry and offer a choice of Automatic on or Manual on modes. The
switch shall be rated for use at 120V or 277V, and a maximum load of 800 watts or 1200
watts respectively. The sensor shall use Dual technology(Ultrasonic and Infrared)only,only
Ultrasonic and or Infrared shall not be allowed.Provide a Five(5)year warranty. Set the time
delay on the switch for 6 minutes. The wall switch shall be Sensor Switch or approved equal.
B. The ceiling mounted occupancy sensor for corridor applications (type A) shall provide bi-
directional coverage 72' long by 13' wide. Sensor shall be mounted to a two gang box,which
houses the switch-pack for the sensor. The sensor shall use Dual technology(Ultrasonic and
Infrared) only, only Ultrasonic and or Infrared shall not be allowed, and the frequency of the
OW sensor shall be 32 KHz. Sensor shall have replaceable circuit board, adjustable sensitivity
control,crystal controlled for accuracy and a Five(5)year warranty. The switch pack shall be
heavy duty type with zero crossing circuit for high inrush current loads, isolated (dry)
contacts, 120/277VAC operation and a Five (5) year warranty. Switch-pack shall be UL
listed and be by the same manufacturer of the occupancy connected to it. Switch pack shall
be Watt Stopper or approved equal,and Occupancy sensor shall be Watt Stopper or approved
equal. Where a slave sensor is shown wired to the above sensor, it shall be the same sensor
without an individual switch-pack. The sensor shall be connected to the switch-pack for the
above sensor.
C. The ceiling mounted occupancy sensor (type B) for use in rooms up to 1,750 square feet
walking motion and 900 square feet minor motion. The sensor shall be a dual technology
sensor for use with a switch-pack and a frequency of 32 KHz. The sensor shall provide 360
degree coverage, real time self adjusting sensitivity and time delay, microprocessor based
Airflow Tolerant technology, manual On/off switch capability, immune to RFI, EMI and
voltage fluctuations and a Five (5)year warranty. The switch pack shall be heavy duty type
with zero crossing circuit for high inrush current loads, isolated(dry) contacts, 120/277VAC
operation and a Five (5) year warranty. Switch-pack shall be UL listed and be by the same
manufacturer of the occupancy connected to it. Switch pack shall be Novitas #13-051 and
Occupancy sensor shall be Novitas #01-300. Where a slave sensor is shown wired to the
above sensor it shall be the same sensor without an individual switch-pack. The sensor shall
be connected to the switch-pack for the above sensor.
D. The ceiling mounted occupancy sensor(type C)for use in small rooms up to 1,270 square feet
walking motion and 825 square feet minor motion. The sensor shall use Dual technology
(Ultrasonic and Infrared) only sensor for use with a switch-pack and a frequency of 32 KHz,
only Ultrasonic and or Infrared shall not be allowed. The sensor shall provide adjustable
ELECTRICAL 16000-27
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
2. Ballasts shall have a high power factor UL listed for Class P, Sound Rated A, less
than 10 percent total harmonic distortion.
3. Ballasts shall be high frequency (20 KHz or greater) and operate without detectable
flicker.
4. Ballast case operating temperature shall not exceed 35 degrees C temperature rise.
5. Ballast shall have MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) line protection suitable for
ANSMEEE C62.41 installation category A.
6. Ballasts shall have a five-year written warranty from date of shipment against
mechanical or electrical defects under normal conditions of use. The warranty shall
include a per-ballast replacement labor allowance.
M. Compact fluorescent ballasts shall be high power factor or electronic type specifically listed
for use with the lamps and thermally protected and able to sense the end-of-lamp-life
terminating power to unit at end of lamp-life,resetting upon relamping.
N. Fixtures to be located outdoors or indoors in ambient that may be below 60 degree F(-18
degree C),shall have outdoor ballasts and lamps suitable for operation at 0 degree(-16 degree
C).
O. All ballasts shall be covered by a five-year warranty replacement against defects and warranty
shall include payment for labor costs or replacement of inoperative"in-warranty"ballasts.
P. Provide manpower and tools for final adjusting of all adjustable fixtures. This operation shall
take place immediately before the building is turned over to the owner after regular working
hours where required.
Q. Metal halide ballasts shall be CWA type. Autotransformer type is not acceptable due to high
starting currents.
R. Provide individually fused fixtures for HID and emergency lighting fixtures. Indicate fusing
in submittals. Provide ten percent spare fuses of each type supplied(minimum one). Mount
in cabinet in Electric Room. Obtain signed receipt from owner.
S. All fixtures to be independently supported from building structure.
T. Provide 10%spare lamps for all types specified.
U. All pendant fixtures shall be mounted from"hang-strait''devices.
V. All recessed fluorescent fixtures shall be a minimum of.125 virgin acrylic,they shall be
compatible with the system specified. Electrical contractor shall be responsible for providing
appropriate trim for either flanged of grid ceilings.
W. Provide end caps on all industrial fluorescent fixtures.
ELECTRICAL 16000-26
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
6. Submit photometric information.
7. Submit point-by-point calculations for substituted fixtures where requested.
F. Fixtures shall be free of light leaks. No crossbars are permitted over light shields. Fixtures
shall provide for sufficient ventilation of lamps and ballasts. Size and location of vent holes
shall be indicated on Manufacturer's Drawings. Outdoor fixtures shall have mesh screens in
vent holes.
G. Assume all responsibility for the safe handling of all light fixtures,accessories,and lamps
until the final inspection has been made by the Architect and the installation accepted by the
owner.
H. Special fittings and materials that may be required to support fixtures shall be supplied as well
as supports,spacers,or grounds required to secure surface or pendant mounted fixtures on
suspended ceilings.
I. Fixtures,part or parts thereof(including lamps)determined to be defective shall be replaced.
J. Recessed fixtures shall be supplied with trim gaskets as required to prevent light leaks on
ceiling. Provide mounting support bars for all recessed fixtures,where required.
K. Lamps of the proper type,wattage,and voltage rating shall be provided in each fixture as
indicated on the fixture schedule.
1. Fluorescent lamps shall be equal to Osram/Sylvania Octron 800 Series T8 lamps
rated 3500K with a CRI of 85 or more, input wattage for all T8 lamps shall not
exceed 31 watts: 36" lamp F025/35K, 2225 lumens, 48" lamp F032/35K, 3000
lumens;24"lamp F017/35& 1400 lumens.
2. Compact fluorescent and double twin tube fluorescent lamp shall be equal to
Osram/Sylvania's compact and twin tube fluorescent lamps with a color temperature
of 3500K. Circline lamps shall be equal to Osram/Sylvania Rapid Start Designer
3000K Series. 2D lamps shall be equal to GE 4 pin lamps with 2700K color.
3. HID lamps shall be rated for installation as required by fixture. Provide base up
vertical or horizontal lamps as required. Do not use universal lamps.
4. All lamps, except where indicated and within each source type, i.e.; fluorescent,
incandescent, etc., shall be of same manufacturer, Osram/Sylvania, General Electric,
Phillips,Venture or approved equal.
L. Ballasts for fluorescent fixtures shall be high frequency electronic ballasts and be completely
compatible with the lamp types indicated and CBM listed. Ballasts shall be manufactured by
Electronic Ballast Technology(EBT),Osram/Sylvania or Motorola. Instant start ballasts are
not acceptable. Ballast performance(power input/lumen output,operating temperature levels,
and total harmonic content)shall be certified by independent laboratory tests.
1. Ballasts shall be non-PCB and RFI limited.
ELECTRICAL 16000-25
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
The backbox shall be galvanized metal. The box shall be 20"wide by 5.75"deep,unless
indicated otherwise on the drawings.
2.15 LIGHT FIXTURES
A. All luminaries and other lighting equipment shall be delivered to the job complete,wired and
including all supporting means such as plaster flames,supports,hangers,canopies,sockets,
holders,all current or voltage modifiers,such as ballasts, starters,all light control materials;
specifically diffusers,louvers,lenses,reflectors and refractors. All lighting fixtures shall be
constructed and installed in accordance with local building codes and directives by the
National Board of Fire Underwriters and shall bear the label of approval of the Underwriters'
Laboratories,Inc. All materials shall be new and of best grade of approved manufacturing
standards. Workmanship shall be of the highest order to assure trouble-free operation and
durability of equipment
B. The lighting fixtures scheduled on the Drawings are indicative of the type and characteristics
required. Approved manufacturers shall be as scheduled by type on the drawings. All
substitutions shall be reviewed by the Architect/Engineer,only during the bidding period.
C. Fixtures shall meet the requirements of utility incentive programs for energy efficiency.
Contact utility company for information. Cooperate and coordinate with utility for incentive
program. Incentives shall go to the owner. Provide information and fill out forms as
requested.
D. Assume all responsibility for checking Architectural Drawings,prior to ordering fixtures,and
provide the specified fixtures with proper mounting arrangement to be compatible with the
type ceiling construction in which the fixture is to be mounted. Submit letter indicating
verification was done.
E. Manufacturer's submittals for all lighting fixtures shall be submitted for review and
acceptance prior to purchase.
1. Submittals shall indicate complete details of fixtures, including Manufacturer's
catalog numbers for sockets, lamps, ballasts, light shields, switches, metal gauges,
type of wiring,finish color and texture.
2. Fluorescent fixture submittals shall include: Ballast Manufacturer and catalog
number, Lamp Manufacturer and catalog number together with a statement of
compatibility when used together as an integral part of the fixture.
3. Where pertinent to proper installation or operation, submittals shall indicate
relationship between fixtures and adjacent elements of structure (walls, columns,
ducts,openings,ceiling grid,etc.)
4. Submit verification of meeting utility incentive program requirements.
5. Submit letter indicating that the latest Architectural Drawings have been reviewed for .. ,
ceiling types and the fixtures being submitted have the proper mounting accessories.
ELECTRICAL 16000-24
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
The suppression components shall have a response time no greater than 0.5 nanoseconds for
any of the individual protection modes.
Suppressors shall be designed to withstand a Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage
(MCOV)of not less than 115%of nominal RMS voltage.
Visible indication of the suppressor's operational status shall be provided by a three-color
LED for each phase. Green indicates normal operation,amber indicates reduced protection,
and red indicates loss of protection.
Dry contacts(normally open or normally closed)shall be provided to allow connection to a
remote monitor or other system via an easily accessible DB-9 connector. The output of the
dry contacts shall indicate the loss of protection on a particular phase or the entire unit.
Panelboard:
The entire panelboard system shall be UL 67 listed with complimentary listings and marks for
UL 1449 and UL 1283. They shall be of door-in-door construction.
The unit shall have a removable interior as manufactured by Siemens Energy&Automation,
Inc.
The main bus shall be copper and rated for the load current required. Neutral bus shall be
200%of phase buses.
The unit shall be provided with branch circuit breakers as indicated on the drawings. All
branch circuit spaces shall be available for load connections.
The unit shall include a 200%rated neutral bus.
The unit shall have ample wiring space around the interior and shall conform to the National
Electric Code and applicable local codes.
The field connections to the panelboard shall be main lug or main breaker as indicated on the
drawings.
The panelboard shall be supplied with the appropriate branch breaker positions and nominal
current rating as indicated in the panelboard schedule.
Approved Vendor:
The surge protected panelboard(s)shall consist of the Sentron Transient Protection System
(TPS),installed in a Sentron S 1 or S2 Lighting Panelboard,as manufactured by Siemens
Energy&Automation,Inc.
The unit shall be top or bottom feed according to requirements. A circuit breaker listing shall
be provided in the holder located inside the door.
ELECTRICAL 16000-23
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
G. Panelboards shall be mounted with a minimum mounting height of six feet(6')to main
breaker or top of Panelboard,depending on type installed.
H. UL wire bending space requirements shall be met.
I. Approved equals: Square D I line series,ITE Siemens,General Electric,or approved equal.
J. Directory shall be typed,handwritten will be rejected. Directory shall identify feeder origin.
K. All circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type only.
2.14 SURGE PROTECTED PANELBOARD CP
Integral surge suppressor(suppressor contained within the panelboard).
Suppressors shall be listed in accordance with UL 1449,Standard for Safety,Transient
Voltage Surge Suppressors,UL 1283,Electromagnetic Interference Filters,and UL 67
Panelboards.
Suppressors shall incorporate bus bars for the surge current path. Small round wiring or plug-
in connections shall not be used in the path for surge current diversion. Surge current
diversion circuitry shall be bolted directly to the panelboard bus bars for reliable low
impedance connections.
Suppressors shall be constructed using an array of computer matched high energy Metal
Oxide Varistors(MOV). Each mode will have redundant suppression paths and be
independently fused with 200,000 A/C rated fuses.
Suppression circuits shall provide the following suppression paths: line-to-neutral,line-to-
ground,and neutral-to-ground.
Suppressors shall be equipped with an audible alarm which shall activate when any one of the
surge current modes experiences a reduction or loss of protection.An alarm on/off switch
shall be provided to silence the alarm and a push-to-test switch shall be provided to test the
alarm. The switches and alarm shall be located on the front cover of the suppressor's
enclosure.
Suppressors shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
Maximum single impulse current rating shall be no less than 80 kA/160 kA per phase
(calculated from component manufacturer's specifications).
The UL 1449 clamping voltage as tested as measured at the branch breakers of the panelboard
shall not exceed the following(clamping voltage measurements at the suppressor terminals
shall not be an acceptable comparison of these values).
Voltage L-N N-G L-G
208/120V 500V 500V 500V
ELECTRICAL 16000-22
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
OW
1. Provide heavy duty Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor(TVSS) with surge current
capacity of 100KA per mode,it shall use lightning arrester technology with EMI/RFI
noise filtering, it shall have visual alarm, audible alarm, surge counter, and form c
contacts. It shall be mounted adjacent to MSE. TVSS shall be as manufactured by
General Electric type THE 120Y100 PP (install it flush in MSE facing front) or
approved equal.
H. MSE shall be equipped with an Underwriters label attesting to its suitability as service
entrance equipment.
I. MSE arrangement shall be as shown on drawing. MSE shall be as manufactured by Square
D,Westinghouse,GE or approved equal.
J. Installation
MSE shall be installed in accordance with NEC, as shown, as herein specified, and the
manufacturer's requirements.
K. Record Drawings
Record drawings shall be furnished providing the following information: Complete rating,
short-circuit rating of bus and interrupting rating of lowest rated device, overall outline of
dimensions including space available for conduits, circuit schedule showing circuit numbers
devices description, device trip rating, feeder circuit identification,conductor rating and on-
line diagram.
2.13 PANELBOARDS
A. The Panelboards shall be of the dead-front type with hinged door flame in accordance with
both NEMA and UL standards for use as service entrance equipment.
B. Panelboards shall be for use on 120/208 volts,3 phase 4 wire and can be replaced without
disturbing adjacent breakers. Breakers shall be rated as shown on Panel Schedule. Panels
shall be equipped with ground bus welded to panel and the neutral shall be insulated from the
box. Bussing shall be copper only.AIC rating shall be as per panel schedule,and shall be
fully rated.
C. Cabinet boxes shall be constructed of code gauge steel. Panel boxes shall be of sufficient size
to provide minimum of 8"gutter space on all sides.
D. Trims to be constructed of code gauge fiuniture steel with gray finish,ANSI 49,to be
equipped with directory holder. Doors shall have concealed hinges and flush spring lock with
pull-ring handle. Provide cover hinged to box type trim.
E. Provide GFCI circuit breakers,switching duty breakers,and shunt trip as indicated. Each
GFCI circuit breaker requires a dedicated neutral in each branch circuit.
F. Provide spare breakers as shown on Panel Schedule.
ELECTRICAL 16000-21
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
C. MSE bussing shall be of the hard drawn 98%minimum conductivity tin plated copper sized
to limit the temperature rise to 55 C, having a tensile strength exceeding 20,000 pounds per
square inch and shall conform to the following:
1. No individual bar shall be of a thickness of more than 1/4". Where necessary for
current capacity,multiple parallel bars shall be used. Parallel bars shall be separated
by copper spacers or washers maintaining a spacing equal to bar thickness.
2. Exclude divergent routing of electrically paralleled bars.
3. Connections shall be made up with cadmium plated steel bolts and nuts utilizing
"Belleville Type"washers or split lock nuts plus flat washers.
4. The current density across bolted contact surfaces of bars shall not exceed 200 amps
per square inch. Bolted contact surfaces of bars shall be silver or tin plated.
5. The buses shall be arranged A,B,C,type left to right,top to bottom,and front to rear
throughout to assure convenient safe testing and maintenance.
6. The bus bars shall be mounted on supports of high impact non-tracking insulating
material and shall be braced to withstand short circuit stresses produced by the peak
of a 42,000 RMS symmetrical current fully displaced.
7. Bussing designated as mains shall be run for the full extent indicated without
reduction in size.
D. MSE shall be complete with small wiring, necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks within
the board. All groups of control wires leaving the switchboard shall be provided with
terminal blocks with suitable numbering strips. All steel surfaces shall chemically cleaned
and treated to provide a bond between paint and metal surfaces to prevent the entrance of
moisture and formation of rust under the paint film. MSE exterior shall be finished with
ASA-61 and ASA-24 light and dark gray with white interior. All hardware used on
conductors shall have a high tensile strength and have suitable protective finish.
MSE shall be provided with adequate lifting means and shall be capable of being rolled or
moved into installation position and bolted directly to the floor without the use of floor sills.
E. Submit certification that MSE has withstood,without breakdown,a factory dielectric"hi-pot"
test consisting of a one minute application of a 60 cycle AC test voltage applied between
phase legs and from phase leg to enclosure. The applied test voltage shall have a RMS value
of at least twice the line to line system voltage to which the switchboard is to be applied plus
one thousand volts(minimum 1500 volts).
F. MSE main protective device shall be individually mounted, bolt on type molded case 600A
circuit breaker.
1. It shall be rated at 22000 Amps,RMS symmetrical minimum for short circuit.
G. Accessories:
ELECTRICAL 16000-20
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
C. Quadplex receptacle 20A, 125V with lexan wallplate-Bryant#21254.
D. Duplex GFCI receptacle #647-2 rated 20A, 125V with lexan wallplate. RacoBell enclosure
outdoors)-RacoBell-#5051-0.
E. Floor flush mount (Adjustable floor box) 20A duplex receptacle with Data outlet, it shall be
Wiremold Walker type #881 (Box) & type #881C20AAB cover with brass coverplates &
brass slide holders, Divider between power and data, and type #2A245-05E insert, provide
two of these floor boxes with all accessories where quad receptacles and Data outlets are
shown in plans. Floor Pokethru with duplex receptacles and Data outlets shall be Wiremold
Walker type #RC3A20ABS with brass coverplates & brass slide holders and type #2A245-
05E insert.
F. Lexan Cover Plates Shall be of blue color for all clean power receptacles for computers that
are wired to Panel CP.
G. Exterior receptacle weatherproof cover shall comply with MEC 410-57(b) and shall be
Raco/Bell#5052-0 or Taymac or Intermatic,and shall be clear.
H. Coverplates shall be stainless steel or lexan as selected by Architect.
I. Approved equals:Hubbell,Bryant or Leviton.
J. Wiring devices manufactured by Hubbell,Leviton,or approved equal are acceptable.
K. Wall plates in finished areas shall be manufactured by wiring device manufacture.
2.12 MAIN SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT
A. Main Service Entrance Equipment; herein after called MSE; shall be of the free standing,
mounted against wall, front accessible only, dead front,totally enclosed, externally operable
type and shall be completely self supporting structure of the required numbers of vertical
sections bolted together to form one rigid structure of 70" high, 26" wide, and 14.3" deep.
Section shall be thoroughly rust proofed, primed and painted to provide an overall even
appearance, and shall be having construction of heavy gauge formed steel. All sides shall be
manufactured of heavy code gauge steel. The tops shall have screw on plates. MSE shall
include 600A Frame/600A Trip main service circuit breaker, Utility Company metering
compartment as required by Mass. Elect. Co.,minimum 200KA per mode protection TVSS,
and all other accessories and equipment as listed on drawings with necessary
interconnections,instrumentation and control wiring.
B. It shall have complete phase leg bussing suitable for main service supply characteristics. It
shall have a ground bar consisting of a 3"X''Y2"copper bar run along the section for its entire
length. The ground bar shall be fastened and bonded to each vertical-framing members of the
switchboard.
ELECTRICAL 16000-19
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
120/208 Volts
Black-Phase A
Red-Phase B
Blue-Phase C
White-Neutral
Green-Ground
2.9 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Heavy-duty type,service entrance labeled where applicable.
B. NEMA enclosures.
C. Fusible types with rejection clips.
D. Rain tight and lockable where indicated.
E. Furnish and installed by Electrical Subcontractor.
F. Fuses: Size according to motor current.
G. Elevator disconnect switch shall be lockout type with interlock(power on with cover open)
and shall be bonded with a#6 green ground.Provide pair of Form"C"contacts,contacts to
operate simultaneously when switch operates.
H. Approved Manufacturer: Square D,General Electric,TTE Siemens or approved equal.
2.10 SWITCHES
(all.rated 20 Amp. 120/277 VAC)
A. Single pole—Bryant#4701-I
B. Three way—Bryant#4903-I
C. Four way—Bryant#4904-I
D. Cover plates shall be Antique Brushed Brass as selected by Architect.
E. Device and wallplate colors by Architect.
F. Approved equals:Hubbell,Bryant or Leviton.
2.11 RECEPTACLES
A. Simplex receptacle 20A, 125V with lexan Bryant#5361-1,wallplate- 1 Bryant#72091.
B. Duplex receptacle 20A, 125V with lexan Bryant#5362-1,wallplate—Bryant#72101.
ELECTRICAL 16000-18
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
conditions, (2) size and number of raceways, conductors and/or cable, and (3) device or
fixture.
B. Boxes used for supporting fixtures shall include a 3/8"fixture stud.
C. Where multiple devices are located at one point,the appropriate gang box shall be used.
D. Boxes used for pendant feeds to lighting fixtures shall be equipped with swivel hangers.
E. All surface mounted boxes shall be"FS"type with appropriate covers and plates.
2.6 JUNCTION BOXES
A. Where shown on plans,and where necessary to terminate tap-off or redirect multiple conduit
runs, provide appropriately designed junction boxes. Boxes shall be code gauge galvanized
steel and shall have full access screw covers secured with corrosion-resistant screws.
B. Covers shall be flush or surface-mounted as required.
C. Weatherproof junction boxes shall be of the flanged type.
D. Box size shall be in accordance with N.E.C.
E. Where intermediate supports are necessary because of box dimension,provide removable
cross brackets.
F. All surface mounted boxes shall be"FS"type with appropriate covers and plates.
2.7 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Under steel construction, use beam clamps for hangers. Under concrete construction, use
inserts or expansion shields. Under wood construction,use lag screws or bolts.
B. Hold small conduit in place along walls or columns,where exposed,by one-hole malleable
pipe clips and all metal expansion shields.
C. Where parallel banks of conduit are installed,support them by means of horizontal angles
below the conduit with vertical hanger rods at both ends.
D. Backboards for electrical and telephone equipment shall be 3/4"plywood panels painted with 2
coats of gray enamel on all sides. Provide 2"x 4"frame backing for plywood and secure to
wall. Plywood shall be AC-INTERIOR-APA grade with exterior glue.
2.8 MARKING FEEDERS
A. Permanent tags should be connected to all feeders at intermediate pull boxes to provide
identification for future use.
A. All feeders shall be identified with colored tape. Colors are as follows:
ELECTRICAL 16000-17
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2.3 CONDUCTORS
A. All conductors shall be soft-drawn copper,and shall have a conductivity of not less than 98%
of the USASI standard annealed copper,shall be smooth and true and of cylindrical form and
shall be within 1%of the actual size called for. All conductors shall bear the markings of the
Underwriter's Laboratories,the AWG size,the type insulation,maximum permissible voltage,
the manufacturer's name and trade mark.Minimum insulation voltage rating shall be 600
VAC at 75 degrees
B. For power and lighting systems,no wire smaller than#12 AWG shall be used.
C. All feeder cables shall be type"THW'and shall be insulated for 600 volts.
D. Branch circuit wiring in raceway shall be type"THHN", "THWN",and shall be insulated for
600 volts color-coded over its entire length.
E. Conductors#12 AWG and smaller shall be solid.
F. Conductors#10 AWG and larger shall be stranded.
G. Lighting circuit conducts in fixture raceways shall be#12 AWG minimum,Type AVA,AVB,
AWM,FE or equal as approved.
H. Approved solderless fittings shall be used at all joints and terminals.
I. All special system wiring shall be of a type and size as indicated by manufacturer for
equipment.
J. Wire and cable to be by General Electric,Okonite,or approved equal.
2.4 PULL BOXES
A. In general, and where applicable, specifications for pull boxes shall be same as for junction
boxes. Pull boxes shall be installed as indicated on the plans and wherever else as necessary
to facilitate conductor installation.
B. Pull boxes shall be installed in runs of more than 100 feet or runs having more than the
equivalent of 3 right angle bends.
C. Location of pull boxes shall be agreed with the Engineer and shall be"accessible"as defined
in NEC.
D. Boxes shall be supported independently of entering conduits. Pull boxes for new services
shall be as indicated on the plans.
2.5 BOXES AND FITTINGS
A. Outlet boxes and covers shall be pressed galvanized code gauge unless otherwise noted r
required by the N.E.C. Boxes shall be of size and type to accommodate (1) structural
ELECTRICAL 16000-16
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
comply with NEMA FB 1,Conduit shall be manufactured by Alflex Triangle,Fourslide or
approved equal. Fittings shall be manufactured by Tomic or equal. Fittings which use a
screw to bind against the tubing will not be accepted.
E. Intermediate metallic conduit shall be steel and shall have a protective zinc coating applied
both inside and outside by means of hot dip galvanizing. The conduit shall comply with
ANSI C80.6 and UL1242 standards. The conduit shall be delivered with caps to protect
threads. No running threads shall be permitted. Fittings shall be threaded steel and shall have
a protective zinc coating applied both inside and outside by means of hot dip galvanizing. All
fittings shall conform to UL8 and shall be labeled accordingly. Split couplings and threadless
couplings shall only be used in renovation applications and shall be approved by the
University's Facilities Planning personnel. Provide insulated throat bushings on all ends.
F. Rigid non metallic conduit shall be either schedule 40 or Schedule 80 PVC and shall comply
with UL651. In underground installations transition rigid nonmetallic conduit to rigid steel
conduit within 5' of building including stub up. Provide a 3"wide metallic warning tape
stating"Danger—Buried Electric" 12"below grade directly above all buried PVC ductbanks.
Fittings shall be provided by the same manufacturer that supplies the conduit and shall be
installed using manufacturer approved cement solvent. All elbows shall be long sweep PVC
coated rigid steel conduit.
G. All feeders and homeruns shall be installed in conduit or duct. Raceways underground shall
be rigid steel galvanized,non-metallic duct encased in concrete or plastic conduit encased in
concrete. Conduits in concrete slabs on grade or where exposed to weather shall be rigid steel
galvanized. Conduits in concrete slabs or walls above grade shall be galvanized intermediate
metal conduit(IMC)where allowed by code or rigid steel galvanized. Conduits in masonry
walls,in steel stud walls or in furred spaces 10' in length or greater,shall be EMT for 2 inch
and smaller size and shall be EMT,rigid steel galvanized or galvanized intermediate metal
conduit(IMC)where allowed by code,for larger than 2 inch size. Conduits in metal or wood
stud walls,in furred spaces less than 10'in length or for final connections to recessed fixtures
or to motors or moving or vibrating equipment shall be flexible conduit in dry locations and
liquid-tight flexible conduit in damp locations or where exposed to weather.
H. A ground wire shall be provided in all conduit runs. The ground conductor shall be sized in
accordance with code or larger as may be indicated on the contract documents.
I. All branch circuits feeding lighting and computer outlets shall be provided with a dedicated
neutral. No multi wired branch circuits shall be installed.
J. MC cable may be used for branch circuiting between outlets only. MC cable shall have a
separate insulated dedicated ground wire. MC cable shall have a dedicated neutral conductor
as noted in paragraph I above for designated branch circuits.Exposed MC cables shall not be
allowed.
K. Type`BX"cables shall not be allowed.
L. Refer to'Installation of Conduits and Fittings' in part 3 of these specifications for installation
requirements of all conduits.
ELECTRICAL 16000-15
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WIREWAYS
A. Wireways shall be made to accommodate conductors as required in accordance with
applicable rules of the National Electric Code. To be of code gauge steel and supported as
required by Code.
2.2 RACEWAYS AND WIRING SYSTEMS
A. Electrical Metallic Tubing(EMT)may be run exposed or where concealed in masonry.EMT
shall be eectro-galvanized and meet A.N.S.I. standards. Minimum size shall be 1/2".
Couplings and connector shall be threadless-type specifically designed for the purpose.
Exposed raceway shall be run parallel to and at right angles to building features. Raceway
shall be continuous from outlet to outlet. Pull or junction boxes shall be furnished and
secured as required by building construction. Electrical Metallic Tubing(EMT)shall be cold
rolled tubing with a zinc protective coating on the outside and a zinc enamel or equivalent
contusion resistant coating on the inside. All EMT shall meet UL-797 and shall be labeled
accordingly. Fittings shall be steel and shall be either two screw set screw type or
compression type. Setscrew fittings shall only be used in areas not prone to damage and areas
inaccessible to general public. All Security System and Fire Alarm System raceways shall
use compression type fittings. All connectors shall be provided with insulated throats. All
raceway shall be run parallel to and at right angles to building features. Approved
manufactures are Republic,Triangle,Allied Tube or approved equal.
B. Liquid tight flexible metal raceway shall be used for final connections to operating or
vibrating equipment,and for connections to equipment requiring adjustment in position.
Provide green wire for bonding. Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be interlocked zinc coated
steel construction,with a sunlight and mineral oil resistant PVC jacket and shall comply with
UL360. Maximum length shall be 6'. Provide a separate ground conductor in each length of
flexible steel conduit regardless of length. Provide separate bond wire where integral
conductor is not available. Fittings shall be steel,liquid-tight. Seal and ground conduit and
comply with NEMA FB 1. Use Anaconda,Electro-Flex,Flexi-Guard or approved equal.
C. Rigid metal conduit shall be used in areas subject to corrosion,as required by Code,from pad
mounted transformer to new switchboard and as indicated. Rigid steel conduit and conduit
fittings shall be hot dipped galvanized steel with factory galvanized threads. They shall be
steel and shall have a protective zinc coating applied both inside and outside by means of hot
dip galvanizing. The conduit shall comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL1242 standards. The
conduit shall be delivered with caps to protect threads. No running threads shall be permitted.
Fittings shall be threaded steel and shall have a protective zinc coating applied both inside
and outside by means of hot dip galvanizing. All fittings shall conform to UL8 and shall be
labeled accordingly. Split couplings and threadless couplings shall only be used in renovation
applications and shall be approved by the University's Facilities Planning personnel. Provide
insulated throat bushings on all ends.
D. Flexible metallic conduit shall be interlocked zinc coated steel construction and shall comply ..�,
with UL 1. Maximum length used shall be 6'. Install a separate ground conductor in each
length of flexible steel conduit regardless of length.Fittings shall be malleable iron and shall
ELECTRICAL 16000-14
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
Owner and the Architect or his representative that the true intent and meaning of the drawings
and specifications has been carried out. Contractor shall provide all instruments and labor
necessary to make such tests. Such tests shall include voltage tests at incoming service and at
every panel and switchboard. Any work showing faults under test, and any work not in
accordance with the specifications shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expense.
1.24 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Provide and keep up-to-date a complete as-built set of blue line prints. Correct daily to show
every change from the original drawings and specifications including the size and kind of
equipment, panel schedules, lighting fixture schedule, and runs of all conduits including
dimensional location of all underground runs, and all addenda and/or change orders. Prints
for this purpose may be obtained from the Architect. Keep this set of drawings on the work
and use only as a record set.
C. Furnish Record drawing prints, and prepare "As-built" drawing mylars, and in Latest
AutoCAD version CD Rom in accordance with Section 01000 Basic Requirements.
1.25 DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS
A. The Electrical contractor shall thoroughly examine the site prior to bid to determine the total
extent of demolition and removals required.
B. Electrical contractor shall Disconnect and remove all existing electrical equipment,wiring,
systems,and parts thereof and appurtenances,which are made obsolete by this renovation.All
obsolete and removed material shall be taken to an area designated by the General Contractor.
C. Conduits containing wiring concealed in walls and not exposed during construction shall
remain,although piping shall be cutoff where exposed and capped or plugged behind the
surface of any new finished wall,ceiling,or floor after all wiring removed from them.
D. Approximately 10%of the existing Fluorescent Light Fixtures that are to be removed are
equipped with PCB Ballasts and Mercury in Lamps,electrical contractor is responsible in
removing those ballasts and lamps by acquiring services of EPA certified agency that has an
extensive experience in removing Hazardous material,and dispose them in an approved
manner.
E. The General Contractor shall remove the materials from site and dispose of in accordance
with all regulations.
ELECTRICAL 16000-13
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. Deliver equipment knocked down if necessary.
B. Install equipment with adequate clearances for maintenance and operation.
1.20 ANCHORING EQUIPMENT
A. All floor-mounted equipment shall be securely anchored to the floor with sufficient anchors to
resist a horizontal force equal to the weight of the equipment.
B. All floor-mounted equipment 6 feet or more in height shall be anchored to the wall near the
top of the equipment,if mounted against the wall with sufficient anchors to resist a horizontal
force equal to the weight of the equipment.
1.21 EQUIPMENT BOLTED CONNECTIONS
A. Before energizing switchboards, Panelboards, disconnect switches etc., the Contractor shall
tighten or retighten all accessible bolts in the electrical conductive paths using a torque device
to the torque recommended by the manufacturer. If manufacturers torque values are not
indicated,use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
1.22 PRELINIINARY OPERATION
A. Operate electrical systems with required supervision for at least two full days prior to
substantial completion. Make necessary adjustment,and check proper operation.
B. The Owner reserves the right to operate portions of the electrical system on a preliminary
basis without voiding the guarantee or relieving the Contractor or his responsibility.
1.23 TESTS PRIOR TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Tests shall be attended by representative of Electrical Subcontractor, equipped with
instruments required to demonstrate proper functioning of systems,as specified. Demonstrate
the following:
B. Equipment installed and operating in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and
instructions and with these specifications.
C Safety controls operating as specified.
D. Motors equipped with proper overload protection and not operating under overload.Obtain
ammeter readings.
E. Submit report in triplicate listing system tested,date,results and description of fault
corrections,if any.
F. All wiring and connections shall be tested for continuity, grounds and short circuits before the
fixtures,devices and equipment are connected.
G. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall make any tests necessary to satisfy the
ELECTRICAL 16000-12
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
Opposite each number,give the area or equipment which that circuit controls.Number
circuits in agreement with circuit numbering shown on drawings so that future reference to
circuit control can be obtained easily.
1.15 OPERATING PROCEDURE
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall at all times have a foreman on the project authorized to
make decisions and receive instructions exactly as of the Electrical Subcontractor himself
were present. The foreman or superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the
express approval of the Architect/Engineer after construction work begins.
1.16 TEMPORARY LIGHT&POWER
A. See General Conditions for description of temporary light and power.
1.17 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. At the time of final acceptance,the Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish four(4)sets of
operating instructions for all equipment for delivery to the Owner.
B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall instruct Owner's representative in the operation of all
electrical systems.
lowk C. The contractor shall provide a schedule and instructions for preventative maintenance of all
items requiring same.
1.18 GUARANTEE
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall and hereby does warrant that all work executed and all
equipment furnished under this section shall be free from defects of workmanship and
materials for a period of one (1) year from date of final acceptance of this work. The
Electrical Subcontractor further agrees that he will, at his own expense,repair and replace all
such defective work and all other work damaged thereby,which becomes defective during the
term of the Guarantee Warranty.
B. In addition to the guarantees called for under this specification and the requirements of the
"General Conditions", and "Basic Requirements",the Contractor shall guarantee his work as
follows:
1. For factory-assembled equipment and devices on which the manufacturers furnish
standard published guarantees as regular trade practice,the Contractor shall obtain
such guarantee and/or warranty,and deliver same to the Owner,along with operating
manuals required under other paragraphs of the specifications.
2. Fluorescent lighting fixture ballasts shall be guaranteed for a minimum of five(5)
years,after final acceptance of project,for material and labor.
1.19 EQUIPMENT CLEARANCES
ELECTRICAL 16000-11
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
C. Prepare Coordination Drawings as follows:
1. The Contractor shall require the ELECTRICAL Subcontractor to prepare original
Drawings showing all power distribution equipment,feeder runs,lighting fixtures,
ceiling mounted fire alarm devices.
2. The Contractor shall have sepia transparencies made there from.
3. The Contractor shall then require the PLUMBING Subcontractor to indicate all
his/her equipment and plumbing lines on these transparencies.
4. The Contractor shall then require the FIRE PROTECTION Subcontractor to indicate
all his/her equipment and piping on the transparencies.
5. The Contractor shall then require the HVAC Subcontractor to indicate all his/her
equipment,ductwork,hot/cold water and other heating pipings on these
transparencies.
6. The Contractor shall resolve conflicts and then submit these transparencies to the
Architect for review.
D. Coordination Drawings shall bear the signature of all Subcontractors involved indicating that
all space conditions have been satisfactorily resolved. IN addition,the Drawings shall bear
the Contractor's stamp bearing the notation"Drawings Have Been Checked and Coordinated '
with All Trades". Drawings without these notations will not be accepted by the Architect.
E. If any space conflicts cannot be resolved by the Contractor,he shall immediately notify the
Architect and request disposition of the conflict.
F. Coordination Drawings are for the Contractor's and Architect's use during construction and
shall not be construed as replacing any Shop,"As-built",or Record Drawings required
elsewhere in these Contract Documents.
G. Architect's review of Coordination Drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from his overall
responsibility for coordination of all work performed pursuant to the Contract or from any
other requirement of the Contract.
1.14 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify electrical equipment and systems unless their function and identity are obvious.
B. Legend plates shall be provided on a Panelboards,switchgear and disconnect switches.
Black/white core. Letters shall be Y4"high and legend shall consist of panel designations as
shown on drawings and the voltage.All disconnect switches shall be identified with engraved
legend plates,letters and color shall be the same as described for Panelboards. These legend
plates shall be engraved with equipment serviced information:Voltage,Panelboard circuit
number. All legend plates shall be fastened with screws;adhesive will not be permitted. ,
C. Provide on inside cover of all Panelboards,neatly typed indexes giving the circuit number.
ELECTRICAL 16000-10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
be so labeled.
1.11 REFERENCE TO MATERIALS BY NAME
A. Specific reference in the specification,or on contract drawings,to any article,device,product,
material,fixture,form,or type of construction,etc.,by name,make or catalog number shall
be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality,and shall not be construed as limiting the
competition. The Contractor may at his option use any article,device,product,material,
fixture,form or type of construction which,in the judgment of the Architect/Engineer,is
equal to that named. Approval for any manufacturer's product not specifically mentioned
shall be obtained as described below.
B. If the Contractor intends to provide equipment,products or materials by an alternate
manufacturer not listed as an equal,the alternate manufacturer must be approved by the
Engineer prior to the close of bidding. An Addendum will be issued to allow all bidders the
opportunity to bid using approved alternate manufacturers. Equipment cuts of"both"the
specified manufacture and the alternate manufacture shall be provided to the Engineer by the
Electrical Contractor. The above cuts shall be in the possession of the Engineer a minimum
of ten days prior to the close of bids. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any submittals
of alternate manufacturers if the above provisions are not complied with"in full".
1.12 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall refer to the drawings for a full comprehension of the work to
be done and for conditions affecting the locations and placements of his equipment and
materials. These drawings are intended to be supplementary to the specifications,and any
work indicated,mentioned or implied in either is to be considered as specified by both.
Should the character of the work herein sufficiently explained in the specifications or
drawings,the Electrical Subcontractor may apply to the Architect/Engineer for further
information and shall conform to such when given as it may be consistent with the original
intent. The Architect/Engmeer reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in location
prior to installation at no expense to the Owner. All items are diagrammatic and exact
locations are subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer-
1.13 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of all Electrical,Plumbing,Fire
Protection and HVAC work. Before materials are fabricated or work begun,he shall submit
to the Architect complete Coordination Drawings in the form of reproducible(sepia)
transparencies at not less than'/4 inch scale.Congested areas and sections through shafts shall
be prepared at not less than 3/8 inch scale,such areas being as determined by the Architect.
B. Coordination Drawings shall indicate the necessary offsets for all ductwork,piping,conduit,
and other items to clear the work of all other trades and to maintain the required ceiling height
and partition layout. Additionally a separate set of drawings dimensioning all penetrations of
the floor plank system shall be provided. These drawings shall indicate penetration size as
well as dimensions from the exterior walls or other reference point acceptable to the
Architect.
ELECTRICAL 16000-9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
provide complete operating systems.
B. Install work as closely as possible to layouts shown on drawings. Modify work as necessary
to meet job conditions and to clear other equipment. Consult Architect before making
changes,which affect its function or appearance of systems.
D. Dimensions,elevations and locations are shown approximately. Verify measures in field.
E. Architect reserves the right to order changes in layout of such items as switches,fixtures and
outlets if such changes do not substantially affect costs and if affected items have not been
fabricated or installed.
F. In some cases,drawings are based on products of one manufacturer,as listed on the drawings
and specifications. Contractors shall be responsible for modifications made necessary by
substitution of products of other manufacturers.
F. Coordinate work with work specified in other sections. Relocate work if required for proper
installation and functioning of other systems.
H. Install products in accordance with manufacturers'instructions. Notify Architect if contract
documents conflict with manufacturers'instructions. Comply with Architect's
interpretations.
I. Provide brackets,supports,anchors,and frames required for installation of work specified in
this division.
J. Do not install part of a system until all critical components of the system and related system
have been approved. Coordinate parts of system.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Tools,Scaffolding,Etc:All necessary tools,machinery,scaffolding and transportation for
completion of this contract shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor.
B. Waste Material:All rubbish created by the Electrical Contractor shall be removed by the
Electrical Contractor.
1.9 PROTECTION
A. The Electrical Contractor shall,at all times,fully protect his work and materials from injury
or loss to others. Any injury or loss,which may occur,shall be made without expense to the
Owner. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his
materials until the building is accepted by the Owner.
1.10 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Materials and workmanship shall be the best of their respective kinds and in full accordance
with the most modern construction methods. Electrical materials and equipment of types,for
which there are Underwriters Laboratories Standards,shall conform to their requirements and
ELECTRICAL 16000-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
those items requiring shop drawings or manufacturer's detail drawings to be submitted or
submittals of information for review, all to the Architect, until returned such to the submitter
carrying either the notation "Approved" or "Approved as Corrected" as indicated by the
Architect or his Engineer. An "Approved as Corrected" notation means that changes as
indicated must be incorporated or the qualifying acceptance will be considered void.
C. If a re-submittal of Shop Drawings is required due to substitution by the contractor of
equipment not equal to the specified equipment,the Engineer reserves the right to directly bill
the Contractor and receive payment for review of these shop drawings prior to their release at
a rate of$75.00 per hour with a two(2)hour minimum.
D. Corrections or comments made on the shop drawings during the review do not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility to comply with the requirements of the drawings and
specifications. This review is only to check for general conformance with the design concept
of the project and general compliance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor remains
responsible for: Confirming and correlating all dimensions and quantities; selecting
fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating the work of the trades; and
performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner.
E. Shop drawings listing various manufacturers to be considered subject to availability are not
acceptable and will be rejected.
F. Within thirty (30) days of award of contract this Subcontractor shall submit for the
Architect/Engineer's approval, six (6) copies of the manufacturer's shop drawings, clearly
high lighted each items with types, sizes, catalog numbers etc., detail prints, and data sheets
for the following items:
1. Main Service Equipment complete with Circuit Breakers,TVSS,rating,etc.
2. Panel boards,and Circuit Breakers.
3. Conduits and conductors.
4. Light fixtures,Poles,Ballats,Occupancy sensors,and Switches.
5. Disconnect switches.
6. Wiremold System.
7. Fire Alarm System complete.
8. Wiring devices.
1.7 INSTALLATION OF THE WORK
A. Examine the site and all the drawings before proceeding with the layout and installation of
this work.
B. It is not the intention of the drawings to show every item,piece of equipment,and detail to
ELECTRICAL 16000-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
D. The above list is given to acquaint the contractor with the general phase of the work included,
but it is not intended to cover all items which are described hereinafter. All of the work of the
Contractor shall be complete and in accordance with the true intent and meaning of the
drawings and specifications.
E. The word'provide' used elsewhere in these specifications or on the drawings shall be taken to
mean furnish,move into place,install and connect(wire).
1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. The following items of work,associated with the electrical work,will be performed in
accordance with other sections of these specifications.
1. Excavation,and backfill,except as hereinafter specified.
2. All cutting,patching,preparation and painting of finish work
3. Any drilling of holes through walls,floors or structural members
4. The Mechanical Contractors shall furnish all of their equipment complete and ready
for wiring by the Electrical Subcontractor,complete with wiring diagrams where
applicable-Section 15500
1.5 CODES,ORDINANCES AND PERMITS
A. Comply with all codes and ordinances applying to this work. Bidders shall inform
themselves of Code requirements. In case of conflict between the contract documents and a
governing code or ordinance,the higher standard shall govern.
B. All permits and fees required shall be obtained and paid for by the Electrical Subcontractor.
C. Particular attention is directed to:
1. State of Massachusetts 2002 Electric Code.
2. Local Electric Wiring Ordinance.
3. National Fire Protection Organization.
4. Requirements of Town Of Osterville.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop and erection drawings and descriptive and supportive literature for all work in
accordance with the General Conditions. Approval by the Architect/Engineer must be
obtained prior to delivery of materials to the site.
B. No fabrications, ordering, delivery to the site or other steps shall be taken with respect to
ELECTRICAL 16000-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
Service from Mass Electric Company pole.
4. Furnish and install new junction boxes and pull boxes.
5. Furnish and install new light fixtures,occupancy sensors,switches etc.
6. Furnish and install new 600A Main Service Circuit Breaker,CT Section,Distribution
Panelboard,TVSS,and new grounding system.
7. Furnish and install new Panelboards,and Circuit Breakers.
8. Furnish and install new wiring devices,wall plates and branch circuit wiring.
9. Furnishing, installation and connections of all lighting fixtures and lamps, and
accessories,contactors,time switches and other required control equipment as shown
on the drawings.
10. Furnish and install complete new Fire Alarm System components. System to include
all peripheral devices,Red Beacon,Knox Box and Direct Dialer to Fire Department.
Provide necessary outlet boxes,conduits with wiring.
11. Make final connections of power and/or control wiring as required by equipment
installed by other trades.
12. Furnish and install new Data outlets with devices and CAT6 wiring from each outlet
to Data Room on second floor,use 3/4"conduit from each outlet to above ceiling.
13. Furnish and install new Telephone outlets with devices and CAT6 wiring from each
outlet to Data Room on second floor, use 3/4" conduit from each outlet to above
ceiling.
14. Furnish and install Heavy duty fused safety switches.
15. Install HVAC Contractor furnished Starters and Variable frequency drives to all
HVAC motors and equipment,and provide wiring.
16. Furnish and install new wiring devices.
17. Provide all sleeves, hangers, supports, inserts, anchors, bolts, etc., required for the
installation of this work.
18. Surface Wiremold raceways and all fittings,and boxes.
19. Temporary light and power service, lighting outlets, lamps, receptacles, and wiring
for construction lighting and power
20. Perform Tests of all electrically operated equipment.
21. Guarantee
ELECTRICAL 16000-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
part thereof with persons on his own payroll and is qualified so to do.This Section of
the Specifications requires that the following classes of work shall be listed in
Paragraph E under the conditions indicated herein.
Classes of Work
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Drawings and general provisions of contract,including General and Supplementary
Conditions and General Requirements apply to work of this section.
B. Examine Drawings and other Specification Sections for requirements that affect work of this
Section.
C. As used in this Section, "provide"means"furnish and install".
D. Where an item is referred to in singular number in Contract Documents,provide as many
such items as are necessary to complete the work.
E. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the drawings but not specifically listed in this
Section,provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard
established for the balance of the Work Specified,in accordance with the Architect's
interpretation.
F. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications,or within either Document
not clarified by addendum,the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided,in
accordance with the Architect's interpretation. (See Article One of the general and
Supplementary General Conditions.)
1.3 SUMMARY OF WORK
A. The Contractor under this section shall furnish all labor,materials,appliances and equipment
necessary to perform all electrical work,complete in strict accordance with this section of the
specifications and applicable drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract.
B. The work referred to under this division includes all labor,materials and equipment,rigging,
and transportation for the satisfactory installation and completion of all work referred to
herein and/or as may be shown on the contract drawings and not specifically mentioned in
this division.
C. The following schedule is part,but not necessarily all-inclusive,of the items in this division
of the contract:
1. Remove all existing electrical rendered obsolete by this project.
2. Remove existing 200A electric service conduits,wires,equipment,Panelboard and
all associated feeders and branch circuits wiring.
3. Furnish and install new underground 600A, 120/208V,3 Phase,4 Wire electric
ELECTRICAL 16000-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 16000—ELECTRICAL
(FILES SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PARTI GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. The drawings and conditions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary
Conditions,and all Division 1 sections,apply to the work of this Section.Work to be done
under this Section is shown on the contract drawings listed at the front of the specifications.
The listing of Contract drawings and Specifications shall not limit the Sub-Contractors
responsibility to determine the full extent of his work as required by all Contract drawings and
Specifications.
B. Time,manner and requirements for bidding filed sub-bids
Sub-bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall be filed in a
sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at a time and place as stipulated in the
"NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS"
1. The following shall appear on the upper left hand of the envelope:
NAME OF SUB-BIDDER:
NAME OF PROJECT:
SUB-BID FOR SECTION: 16000-ELECTRICAL
2. Each sub-bid submitted for work under this Section shall be on forms furnished by
the Awarding Authority,as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the General
Laws,as amended. Sub-Bid forms may be obtained at the office of the Awarding
Authority or Architect,or may be obtained by written request.
3. Sub-bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied a by a BID BOND
or CASH or CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURERS or CASHIERS CHECK
issued by a responsible bank or trust company payable to the town of Northampton in
the amount of 5 percent of the bid.A sub-bid accompanied by any other form of bid
deposit than those specified will be rejected.
4. Sub-sub-bid Requirements:
The Sub-Bidder shall list in Paragraph E of the FORM for SUB-BID the name and
bid price of each person,firm or corporation performing each class of work or part
thereof for which(the Section of the Specifications for that sub-trade)requires such
listing;provided that,in the absence of a contrary provision in the Specifications,any
Sub-Bidder may,without listing any bid price,list his own name in said paragraph E
for any such class of work or part thereof and perform that work with persons on his
own payroll,if such Sub-Bidder,after Sub-Bid openings,shows to the satisfaction of
the Town of Northampton that he does customarily perform such class of work or the
ELECTRICAL 16000-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2.17 TWO COMPARTMENT WIREMOLD RACEWAY ASSEMBLIES .....................28
2.18 TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEMS: .....................................................................28
2.19 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM...............................................................................................29
2.20 CATV SYSTEM ............................................................................................................38
2.21 RELAYS.........................................................................................................................3 8
2.22 POWER INTERRUPTIONS.........................................................................................38
PART3 EXECUTION............................................................................................................39
3.1 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.....................................................................................39
3.2 WORKMANSHIP...........................................................................................................39
3.3 GROUNDING.................................................................................................................40
3.4 CONDUITS AND FITTINGS........................................................................................42
3.5 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES............................................................................43
3.6 REQUIREMENTS GOVERNING ELECTRIC WORK IN DAMP OR WET
LOCATIONS WITHIN BUILDING CONFINES........................................................44
3.7 TESTS..............................................................................................................................45
3.8 MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUITRY...............................................................................45
3.9 LIGHTING FIXTURES..................................................................................................45
3.10 FIRESAFING AND SMOKE SEAL............................................................................46
3.11 SPLICES.........................................................................................................................47
3.12 GENERAL NOTES .......................................................................................................47
ELECTRICAL 16000-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 16000-ELECTRICAL..........................................................................................3
PART1 GENERAL.................................................................................................................3
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS ...............................................................................................3
1.2 REFERENCES..................................................................................................................4
1.3 SUMMARY OF WORK...................................................................................................4
1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE............................................................6
1.5 CODES, ORDINANCES AND PERMITS.....................................................................6
1.6 SUBMITTALS..................................................................................................................6
1.7 INSTALLATION OF THE WORK.................................................................................7
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS..............................................................................8
1.9 PROTECTION...................................................................................................................8
1.10 QUALIFICATIONS.........................................................................................................8
1.11 REFERENCE TO MATERIALS BY NAME ...............................................................9
1.12 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................9
1.13 COORDINATION DRAWINGS....................................................................................9
1.14 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION.........................................................10
1.15 OPERATING PROCEDURE........................................................................................11
1.16 TEMPORARY LIGHT&POWER..............................................................................11
1.17 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ..................................................................................11
1.18 GUARANTEE................................................................................................................11
1.19 EQUIPMENT CLEARANCES.....................................................................................11
1.20 ANCHORING EQUIPMENT.......................................................................................12
1.21 EQUIPMENT BOLTED CONNECTIONS.................................................................12
1.22 PRELIMINARY OPERATION....................................................................................12
1.23 TESTS PRIOR TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION...............................................12
1.24 RECORD DRAWINGS.................................................................................................13
1.25 DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS.............................................................................13
PART2 PRODUCTS.............................................................................................................14
2.1 WIItEWAYS....................................................................................................................14
2.2 RACEWAYS AND WIRING SYSTEMS....................................................................14
2.3 CONDUCTORS..............................................................................................................16
2.4 PULL BOXES .................................................................................................................16
2.5 BOXES AND FITTINGS...............................................................................................16
2.6 JUNCTION BOXES .......................................................................................................17
2.7 SUPPORTING DEVICES..............................................................................................17
2.8 MARKING FEEDERS ...................................................................................................17
2.9 DISCONNECT SWITCHES..........................................................................................18
2.10 SWITCHES.....................................................................................................................18
2.11 RECEPTACLES.............................................................................................................18
2.12 MAIN SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT............................................................19
2.13 PANELBOARDS...........................................................................................................21
2.14 SURGE PROTECTED PANELBOARD CP...............................................................22
2.15 LIGHT FIXTURES....................................
....................................................................24
2.16 OCCUPANCY SENSORS............................................................................................27
ELECTRICAL 16000-1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
c. Pump size and model number.
d. Pump horsepower.
e. Motor safety factor.
f. Heater size and manufacturer.
1. Pump Performance Data:
a. Brake horsepower.
b. Voltage and phase, nameplate and actual amperage for each
phase.
c. Design and actual GPM.
d. Design and actual pressure differential.
2. Coil and Radiation Performance Data:
a. GPM flow.
b. Supply water temperature.
c. Return water temperature.
g. Water balance procedure shall include:
1. Setting all balance valves to design requirements.
2. Mark all balance valves in their final positions.
3. Balance all pumps to design requirements.
END OF SECTION 15600
..l.•.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-94
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
m. Register/grille/diffuser size, factor, free area, core or neck area.
n. Design CFM and FPM.
o. Final CFM and FPM.
p. Manufacturer and type.
q. Instrument and method used.
d. Air balance procedure shall include:
1. Setting all dampers taking care not to "choke" system and cause
objectionable noise. Balancing in this manner will not be acceptable.
2. Mark all manual volume dampers in their final positions.
3. Setting all automatic dampers to correct percentage of total stroke.
11. Perform water balancing as follows:
a. Balancing Contractor shall perform all necessary adjustments to balancing
devices and pumps to obtain flows indicated or called for in the Contract
Documents in accordance with ASHRAE and standards of good practice.
b. Prior to start of balancing,Balancing Engineer shall perform the following:
c. Check rotation of all pumps.
d. Check position of all shut-off valves.
e. Check position of all balance valves.
f. Compile the following data for each pump and system:
1. Pump Descriptive Data:
2. System identification.
a. Location or area served.
b. Pump manufacturer.
BEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-93
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
a. System identification.
b. Location or area served.
c. Fan manufacturer.
d. Fan size and model number.
e. Fan horsepower.
f. Motor safety factor.
g. Heater size and manufacturer.
h. Final sheave position.
2. Fan Design and Delivered Conditions:
a. Fan and motor RPM.
'"
b. Brake horsepower.
c. Voltage and phase, nameplate and actual amperage for each
phase.
d. Total, suction and discharge static pressure.
e. Supply,return and exhaust CFM.
f. Outside and return air percentages.
g. Pressure drop across each filter bank and coil.
h. Cycle used for system balance.
i. Duct size,number velocity readings and average velocity.
j. Velocity pressure in mains and trunks.
k. System Design and Delivered Conditions:
1. Identify each register/grille/diffuser,and VAV terminal
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-92
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
3. Replace dirty filters on new equipment with new to prevent excessive static
pressure resistance.
4. Arrange to have Sheet Metal Contractor available to assist Balancing Contractor
and to furnish and install manual air volume dampers, splitters, turning vanes, and
other devices for air supply,return and exhaust ducts necessary to obtain specified
air quantities.
5. Arrange to have Temperature Control Contractor available to assist Balancing
Contractor and make necessary adjustments to control systems.
6. Furnish the Balancing Contractor with a complete set of mechanical plans,
specifications,equipment shop drawings and other necessary information.
7. Notify Engineer prior to start of work, and arrange for meeting with all concerned
parties to review the desired system operation and method of balancing.
8. Upon completion of work, Balancing Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of
balancing report for review and approval, and shall certify all systems are properly
balanced within five percent(5%)of design conditions.
9. Balancing Contractor shall be available at the project during final inspection to
verify balancing data if required by Engineer.
10. Perform Air Balancing as follows:
a. Prior to submitting fan and system performance data for approval,
Balancing Contractor shall perform all necessary adjustments to obtain air
flow and distribution of air as called for in Contract Documents, in
accordance with ASHRAE,AABC,NEBB and standards of good practice.
b. Prior to start of balancing,Balancing Engineer shall perform the following:
1. Check rotation of fans.
2. Verify all fire/smoke dampers are open and equipped with fusible link.
3. Align all pulleys and adjust belts.
4. Adjust fan speed to design conditions.
c. Compile the following data for each fan and system:
1. Fan Descriptive Data:
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-91
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA ,.
K. Install removable type dryer strainer in liquid line with 3-valve by-pass.
3.17 SYSTEM BALANCING
A. After completion of systems installation and prior to acceptance, systems shall be
balanced to design conditions shown on drawings or specified by an independent
agency operating and specializing in testing and balancing of air and water systems.
Systems to be balanced shall including the following:
B. All air handling and fan systems.
C. All hydronic piping systems.
1. Balancing Contractor shall be a certified AABC or NEBB independent agency
specializing in testing and balancing of air and water systems.
2. Engineer shall approve agency.
D. Mechanical Contractor shall not perform system balance unless he can substantiate his
ability, performance, certification by AABC or NEBB, and instrumentation, and obtain ,
written approval by Engineer prior to bid.
E. Work shall include balancing and adjusting of all mechanical apparatus, air distribution
systems and appurtenances,and all water circulating systems and appurtenances.
F. Provide all instruments, gauges, sensing and flow devices, and accessories required to
perform the tests and shall make their own provisions for insertion of testing
instruments.
G. All holes made in ductwork shall be drilled,no punching allowed. Contractor shall plug
all holes in an approved manner.
H. All instruments used in procedure shall be certified to have been calibrated within six
month period prior to work. Types, series numbers, and dates of calibration shall be
included in report.
I. Mechanical Contractor shall perform the following:
1. Provide correct pulleys and drive belts where required to obtain the specified air
quantities at no additional cost. Balancing Contractor shall install same.
2. Furnish and install water balancing devices where required to obtain desired water ,.,N
flow for each system and branch.
BEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-90
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
G. Duct connection to sleeve shall be made with"S" slip to forma breakaway joint.
H. Provide a sufficient size duct access door located so as to easily inspect and replace
linkage. Label door as fire, smoke or both access door.
3.16 SHEET METAL WORK
A. All ductwork shall conform to SMACNA manuals and NFPA bulletins and shall be
made leaktight.
B. Provide a complete duct system as indicated on the plans for connecting supply and
return air, exhaust air fans, outside air or exhaust openings, making all necessary
changes in cross section, offsets, etc. whether specifically indicated to meet building
conditions, and installing a damper at every branch take-off from main truck. Provide
air turns where center line of elbow is less than 150%of width shown on plans.
C. Install all motorized dampers, registers, grilles, diffusers, fire/smoke dampers, and
attenuators.
D. Ductwork shall be arranged to clear other trades. No pipe shall pass through ducts. If
the duct cannot be run as shown on the drawings, the Contractor must install the duct
between the required points by any route available, subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
E. Types of joints and details of reinforcing shall be submitted for approval.
F. Duct-mate or equal type connection systems are approved with gaskets and sealants.
G. Flexible duct connections shall be installed where ductwork connects to vibrating or
moving equipment. Flexible connections shall be not less than three inches (3") wide
with a three inch(3")strip of galvanized steel permanently attached to each edge.
H. Install all duct transformations required to connect thermostatic control dampers, roof
curbs,registers,etc.
I. Install all flexible duct with lengths as short as possible,maximum 6 ft on low pressure
systems and 4' on medium pressure system. with supports 4'to 6'o.c.to structure. Any
duct runs over 10 ft. shall be solid sheet metal ducting. Duct shall not rest or be
supported on ceiling or suspension system.
J. Fabricate smokepipes welding all seams and joints and connect to boiler and water
heater outlets. Elbows shall be five pieces. Provide gasketed access door bolted to
flange.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-89
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA ,..,
waived, nor shall the responsibility for the Service Contract be assumed by any
other party unless previously approved by the Consulting Engineer in writing.
7. Authorized manufacturers service representative shall furnish One (1) Year of
Warranty Burner Service on the Burner(s) and Control(s) which shall commence
from the Date of Original Lightoff and shall continue Warranty Burner Service
coverage up to and including the First Anniversary of Burner Lightoff.
8. Warranty burner service shall include labor and materials to replace any parts or
controls which might fail in service as the result of a defect in materials or
manufacture. Normal wear and tear on parts as the result of daily operation will
not be included as "no charge" items (nozzles, igniters, etc.) and other such
devices, which may require replacement as the result of operation during the
Warranty Service Contract shall not be included. Preventative maintenance,in the
form of yearly tune-up and bi-yearly cleanings and adjustments shall be the
responsibility of the Installing Contractor throughout the duration of the Warranty
Contract while the equipment is under his control. Preventative maintenance,
cleaning and routine adjustments shall not be performed by the warranty service
Contractor but by the Owners obligated Service Company.
3.15 FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPER INSTALLATION
A. Dampers installed as per the following:
1. NFPA
2. UL
3. SMACNA
4. All applicable codes.
B. Installed in sleeves within wall, floor or ceiling construction at fire/smoke penetration.
Sleeve gauge per code.
C. Space between damper and construction filled to match adjoining work by General
Contractor.
D. Install 1%" x 1%" x 16 gauge minimum retaining angles both sides of damper
installation and secure with welds,nuts and bolts or screws as per manufacturer and UL.
E. Provide clearance on top and sides for expansion.
F. Apply sealant to joints all around,both sides of fire/smoke penetration.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-88
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2. The process of Start-Up and Commissioning shall include Purging of the Boiler;
Burner Operation Tests, including CO sampling, Stack Temperature; CO2
sampling; Tests for Venting; Ignition Tests; Pilot Turndown Tests; Manifold
Pressure Tests,; Instruction to the Owner and all other such procedures as may be
directed by the Consulting Engineer.
3. The final results of a Combustion Efficiency Test with all pertinent Combustion
Data shall be logged onto a check sheet which shall be submitted to the Consulting
Engineer to prove compliance with this section of the Specifications and for
Record purposes. Lightoff Burner Technician shall certify, in writing, that the
Burner(s)have been properly tuned and set-up with no flame impingement on the
cast iron surfaces.
a. Combustion efficiency testing shall include no less than the following:
1. Clock and adjust Burner input at the Meter to establish correct rate of
fire and set each Burner to rated input at High Fire. Set Main Gas
regulator and provide all adjustments to both Primary and Secondary
Air as necessary to ensure proper flame shape at 100% input with no
direct impingement upon heating surfaces and with good quality
001k combustion with not more than 0.04% CO in the flue gas analysis.
2. CO2 in the flue gas with recorded Gross and Net Stack Temperatures to
establish stack loss value. Each Burner shall be set to operate at the
overall best performance and combustion efficiency for which the
equipment is designed and capable of
b. Adjustment and checkout of all aquastat controls, limits, switches,
operating controls, low water cutoff devices, gas valves, pressure
regulators, combustion controls, high and low gas pressure switches and all
Lockout conditions.
4. He shall supervise purging of the Boiler(s) and shall conduct Pilot turndown tests.
All required tests for proper venting which shall include setting and adjusting the
Boiler outlet damper to the Boiler manufacturers specifications.
5. Provide instruction to the Owners Operating Personnel in the procedures to resolve
a "Lockout" condition. Operating personnel shall also be instructed in the
Operation and routine daily maintenance of the Burner and controls during the
lightoff process. The Owner shall arrange to have the personnel who require
training to be present at the Lightoff.
6. Factory Authorized Service representative shall provide the initial Burner lightoff
and One (1) Year of Warranty Burner service. This requirement shall not be
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-87
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA -'^*
piping, labor, staging, fittings, valves, hoses and other materials and shall pay all
required permits for Inspection as may be required to perform such tests as may be
directed by these Contract Documents and as required by the Consulting Engineer and
the State Boiler Inspector.
I. An initial hydrostatic pressure test of 80 PSI shall be conducted on each Boiler for a
period of not less than 5 hours. Tests shall be of such duration as necessary and as
directed by the Consulting Engineer to ensure that the Boilers have been installed and
piped correctly with no leaks or other improper operating conditions.
J. Installing Contractor shall contact and notify the State Boiler Inspector when the
installation of the Boiler(s), Burner(s) and controls is substantially complete. Installing
Contractor shall request an inspection of the Boilers to be conducted by the State Boiler
Inspector and to have a Certificate of Inspection issued upon satisfactory inspection.
K. After receipt of certificate of Inspection, Installing Contractor shall furnish a suitable
glass front frame in which to place said certificate. Frame, with Inspection certificate
inserted therein, shall then be placed on or posted in a suitable location within the Boiler
room in which the new Boilers have been installed.
L. Installing Contractor shall maintain all apparatus in satisfactory operating condition.
Perform periodic Burner tune-up and cleaning of the Boiler fireside surfaces when dirty,
provide preventative maintenance, perform turndown tests, conduct tests for Flame
Safeguard, Combustion Efficiency, Draft tests, Limit Control tests and Safety Valve
tests, check the ignition system and adjust,repair or replace any as necessary while the
heating system is under his ownership and control a and until such time as the Owner
accepts the equipment, issues the Final certificate of Payment and assumes the full
obligation of Ownership.
M. Installing Contractor shall note that any Warranty Service (Hereinafter specified) as
may be absorbed by the authorized Service representative shall in no way absolve the
Installing Contractor from any and all responsibility for the Care, Service and
Preventative Maintenance for Materials furnished to this Contract, while the Heating
System is under his Control,and until final acceptance by the Owner.
N. Installing Contractor shall guarantee the entire installation for a period of One(1)Year
from the date of Owner Acceptance and beneficial usage by the Owner and Date of
Final Payment.
O. Commissioning:
1. An authorized representative of the Boiler or Burner manufacturer shall perform
the initial start-up, final adjusting and testing of the Burners and Controls in the
presence of the Gas Inspector and the gas Company representative and the Owners
Operating Personnel.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-86
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
nipple and blowoff valve installed. Each blowoff valve shall be Brass, ball type, not
less than 1-1/4" inch minimum and rated equal to the pressure stamped on the Boiler
and to a temperature rating of not less than 250°F. and all blowdown discharges shall be
arranged so as to allow the Operator to view the water that is discharged to drain. Ends
of blowdown piping shall be cut at a 45° Degree angle to prevent a cap or plug from
being installed.
C. All Boiler discharges shall be piped to floor drains or as indicated by the Consulting
Engineer. Furnish and install all necessary pipe and fittings to connect the pressure
relief valve discharge full size (Minimum Acceptable) to floor drain. Discharge shall
be arranged so that there will be no danger of scalding Boiler room personnel in the
event of a pressure relief situation. Size and arrangement of discharge piping shall be
such that any pressure that may exist or develop will not reduce the relieving capacity
of the relief valve below that required to protect the Boiler. All such discharge piping
shall be supported by hangar or standoff to prevent the valve body from undue stress or
strain.
D. Installing Contractor shall utilize capped tees at all turns in the return piping to the back
section of each Boiler for cleaning of the return piping at or near each Boiler.
Feedwater, makeup water and/or water treatment shall be introduced into the Boiler
water through the return piping only. Provisions shall be made for the expansion and
contraction of all hot water mains connected to each Boiler by providing substantial
anchorage at suitable points and by providing swing joints so there will be no stress or
strain transmitted to any Boiler. Stop valves shall be provided in the supply and return
pipe connections to each Boiler permitting draining either Boiler without emptying the
entire system.
E. After final assembly and connection, each Boiler shall be thoroughly cleaned internally
following the manner described within the Boiler manufacturers installation
instructions,or by ASME Section VI,either method acceptable by the Engineer.
F. The process of cleaning the Boiler(s) shall include the use of a boil-out compound of
Caustic Soda or Tri-Sodium Phosphate at the rate of one (1) pound of either chemical
per 50 Gallons of total water in the system being cleaned. This cleaning shall include
Boiler Cleanout, Surface Blowoff, Blowdown and a wash as directed and detailed in
referenced instructions.
G. The process of cleaning the Boiler(s) shall be repeated as often as necessary and as
directed by the Consulting Engineer to ensure that all mill scale,core sand,rust,dirt and
debris, cutting oils and thread sealers or any other contaminants have sufficiently been
eliminated from the Boiler(s) and to produce a condition of the Boiler water that is
clean and considered acceptable to the Consulting Engineer.
H. All field tests after the Boiler(s) have been installed and connected to the system shall
be limited to not more than 80 PSI. Installing Contractor shall furnish all equipment,
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-85
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA 100%,
3.13 FIRESAFING AND SMOKE SEAL
A. Clean surfaces to receive firestopping materials. Remove dirt, grease, oil, loose
materials,rust or other substances that may affect installation of the fire resistance.
B. Refer to Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL) Fire Resistance Directory; "Through-
Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ)" and "Fill Void or Cavity Materials (X HW)"
for Manufacturers UL System plates. Also refer to 3M Fire Protection Products
"Applications and Specifier's Guide".
C. Install firestopping materials as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
D. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an effective fire stop.
E. Install firestopping materials so that void opening 4 inches (101,6mm) or larger will
support the required floor load,unless the opening is protected from possible loading or
traffic.
F. Examine firestopping areas to ensure proper installation prior to concealing or enclosing
firestopped areas.
G. Areas of work shall remain accessible until inspection (and approval) by applicable
code authorities.
H. All sealants and compounds shall be neatly applied to each end of opening of ceiling,
floor or wall penetrations and in accordance with code requirements. All penetrations
shall be minimum size possible.
I. All firesafmg and smoke seal shall be performed as work progresses so as to protect
each area,room or floor in the building.
3.14 BOILERBURNER SYSTEM
A. Install each Boiler in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and
recommendations. Boiler manufacturer shall provide the services of a Representative to
supervise the installing contractor with the assembly and erection of each Boiler. Upon
completion of the Boiler assemblies, the Boiler manufacturers representative shall
certify the proper assembly and connection of each Boiler prior to startup.
B. Boiler drain valves shall be connected to the lowest water space available and shall be
installed with pipe and fittings to connect the bottom blowoff full size to drain. Furnish
and install 3" inch by 1-1/4" inch eccentric reducer in the lower left or right hand '
tappings of the front section of each forced hot water Boiler, complete with a short
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-84
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
3.12 INSULATION
A. Insulate piping with material specified. Unions shall not be insulated. Piping within
radiation covers shall not be insulated.
B. Fittings and valves shall be insulated to equal thickness with flexible matching
insulation and covers applied.
C. Provide wood blocking or calcium silicate insulation sections at all hanger protection
saddles so as not to crush insulation.
D. Insulate ducting with material specified.
E. All insulation shall be installed to provide a neat and finished appearance with no
unfinished edges,tears,raw ends or peeling tape.
F. Maintain vapor barrier integrity throughout.
G. Install finish jacket on all exposed and exterior ducting.
H. Wipe dirt from all insulation surfaces prior to applying tapes and adhesives. Any
improperly applied insulation jackets,tapes,or covers shall be removed and replaced.
I. Insulation on ducting shall be adhered with noncombustible insulation bonding
adhesive applied as recommended by manufacturer. Insulation shall be additionally
secured to bottom of square or rectangular ducts over 24" wide and to all sides of
ducting with any dimension greater than 36" with mechanical fasteners spaced at 18"on
center.
J. Seal all duct joints and seams with pressure-sensitive tape or glue after stapling.
K. All sealants and adhesives shall be NFPA and NBFU labeled and approved for use.
L. All insulation shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
M. Install metal jackets with a 2" overlap at longitudinal and transverse joints. The laps
shall be in orientated in a direction that will shed water. Seal butt joints with a
weatherproof sealant recommended by the insulation manufacturer. Secure the jacket
with stainless steel draw bands 12"on center and at but joints.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-83
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA A04%.
T. All mechanical equipment shall be vibration isolated and seismically restrained as per
the schedules in this specification.
U. Seismic restraint exclusions
1. Piping
a. All piping less than 2 1/2" in diameter except those listed below.
1. All piping in boiler and mechanical equipment rooms less than 1 1/4"
I.D..
2. All clevis or trapeze supported piping suspended from hanger rods
where the point of attachment is less than the 12" in length from the
structure to the structural connection of the clevis or trapeze.
2. Suspended equipment
a. VAV boxes and fan powered equipment weighing less than 50 lbs. and
rigidly connected to the supply side of the duct system and supported with a
minimum of 4 hanger rods.
V. Equipment Isolator and Seismic Restraint Schedule:
Equipment Schedule Required Isolators and Static Deflection
Restraints
Curb Mounted Rooftop Air Handlers Isolation and seismic curb 2.5"
Not internally isolated supplied by equipment
RTU-1 manufacturer
Existing ACCU Restrained spring isolators 25"
Snubbers
Base rails
Suspended HVAC Equipment Spring hangers 1.0"
Not internally isolated
EF-1,CUH-2,UH-1,U11-2,UH-3,P-1,P-2 Cable restraints
Floor Mounted IIVAC Equipment Neoprene washer/bushing
Not isolated
ET-1 Female wedge anchor
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-82
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
Q. Air handling equipment and centrifugal fans shall be protected against excessive
displacement that results from high air thrust in relation to the equipment weight.
Horizontal thrust restraint shall be provided.
R. Locate isolation hangers as near to the overhead support structure as possible.
S. Seismic Restraint of Piping
1. Seismically restrain all piping listed as a,b or c below.Use seismic cable restraints
if isolated. Cable restraints or solid brace restraints may be used on unisolated
piping.
a. Fuel oil piping, gas piping, medical gas piping, and compressed air piping
that is 1" I.D. or larger.
b. Piping located in boiler rooms, mechanical equipment rooms, and
refrigeration equipment rooms that is 1 1/4" I.D. and larger.
c. All other piping 2 1/2" diameter and larger.
2. Transverse piping restraints shall be at 40' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes,
except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads.
3. Longitudinal restraints shall be at 80' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except
where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads.
4. Where thermal expansion is a consideration, guides and anchors may be used as
transverse and longitudinal restraints provided they have a capacity equal to or
greater than the restraint loads in addition to the loads induced by expansion or
contraction.
5. For fuel oil and all gas piping transverse restraints must be at 20' maximum and
longitudinal restraints at 40'maximum spacing.
6. Transverse restraint for one pipe section may also act as a longitudinal restraint for
a pipe section of the same size connected perpendicular to it if the restraint is
installed within 24" of the elbow or TEE or combined stresses are within allowable
limits at longer distances.
7. Hold down clamps must be used to attach pipe to all trapeze members before
applying restraints in a manner similar to clevis supports.
Ow 8. Branch lines may not be used to restrain main lines.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AII2 CONDITIONING 15600-81
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA ,.
F. Any conflicts with other trades which will result in rigid contact with equipment or
piping due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions should be brought to the
architects/engineers attention prior to installation. Corrective work necessitated by
conflicts after installation shall be at the responsible contractors expense.
G. Bring to the architects/engineers attention any discrepancies between the specifications
and the field conditions or changes required due to specific equipment selection,prior to
installation. Corrective work necessitated by discrepancies after installation shall be at
the responsible contractors expense.
H. Correct,at no additional cost,all installations that are deemed defective in workmanship
and materials at the contractors expense.
I. Overstressing of the building structure must not occur because of overhead support of
equipment. Contractor must submit loads to the structural engineer of record for
approval. Generally bracing may occur from
1. Flanges of structural beams.
2. Upper truss cords in bar joist construction.
3. Cast in place inserts or wedge type drill-in concrete anchors.
J. Seismic cable restraints shall be installed slightly slack to avoid short circuiting the
isolated suspended equipment,piping or conduit.
K. Seismic cable assemblies are installed taut on non-isolated systems. Seismic solid brace
assemblies may be used in place of cables on rigidly attached systems only.
L. At locations where cable restraint assemblies or solid brace assemblies are located, the
support rods must be braced when necessary to accept compressive loads with steel
angles and ductile iron rod clamps.
M. At all locations where cable restraint assemblies or solid brace are attached to pipe
clevis hangers,the clevis hanger cross bolt must be reinforced with a cross bolt brace.
N. Drill-in concrete anchors for ceiling and wall installation shall stud wedge type.Drill-in
concrete anchors for floor mounted equipment shall be female wedge type.
O. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases as required.
Independent steel rails are not permitted on this project.
P. Where piping passes through walls, floors or ceilings the vibration isolation
manufacturer shall provide split wall seals.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-80
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
3.8 UNIT HEATERS
A. Set units in place and suspend from structure with threaded rods. Installation shall be
vibration free.
B. Connect all piping,mount all control and service valves, and accessories.
3.9 FIN-TUBE RADIATION
A. Installation shall be complete with all accessories required.
B. Secure back plate to wall,run level.
C. Install element,connect piping with control, shut-off and balance valves and vents.
D. Align valves and vents with access door locations.
E. Install cover,align with all joints flush and tight.
3.10 CABINET UNIT HEATERS
A. Set units in place and secure to structure.
B. Connect all piping,mount all control and service valves and accessories.
3.11 VIBRATION ISOLATORS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. All vibration isolators and seismic restraint systems must be installed in strict
accordance with the manufacturers written instructions and all certified submittal data.
B. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment,
piping or duct work resulting in stresses or misalignment.
C. No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be made that
degrades the noise and vibration control system herein specified.
D. The contractor shall not install any equipment, piping, or duct which makes rigid
connections with the building unless isolation is not specified. 'Building" includes, but
is not limited to,slabs,beams,columns,studs and walls.
E. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-79
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA 10%lk
3.5 THERMOMETERS
A. All thermometers installed 6-0" or more above floor shall be installed at an oblique
angle,to be readable from floor.
B. Install each with separable well so that thermometer may be removed without draining
system.
C. Where required, install a separable well for all temperature sensors for EMS system.
Wells shall be compatible with sensors to be used.
3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
A. Install pumps with valve on suction and triple-duty valves on discharge; connect piping
with flexible connectors.
B. Align pumps per manufacturer's directions.
C. Install air separator,connect piping.
D. Install expansion tank.
E. Install PRV with 3-valve by-pass.
3.7 AIR HANDLING UNITS AND FANS
A. Set all units in place on vibration isolators securing isolators to structure and units to
isolators. Suspended units shall be supported with threaded hanger rods and vibration
isolators from structure.
B. Units and fans with internal isolation shall be secured to bases with anchors and bolts.
C. Vane set fans to be mounted on heavy duty steel angle frames secured to structure.
D. Entire installations shall be vibration free.
E. All ducting connections to air handling units and fans shall be made with flexible
connections unless units have internal fan isolation.
F. Connect all piping and ducting, mount all control valves, service and balance valves,
vents and accessories.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-78
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
L. Comply with all regulations of the Federal Clean Air Act for venting, recovering and
recycling of refrigerants.
3.3 SUPPORTS,BRACKETS AND HANGERS
A. Fabricate all supports and brackets required for installation of equipment, piping and
ductwork.
B. Provide all rods, steel angles,channels,beams and flat stock as required.
C. Adequately secure all supports,brackets and hangers to structure with proper devices to
suit construction.
D. Support pipes independently of each other and in accordance with details.
E. Support piping with structurally adequate hangers and supports.
F. Support piping to equipment and control valves to permit removal of equipment without
additional support of pipes.
G. Support piping at intervals indicated on straight runs and at changes of direction.
Support copper tubing to 1 inch size,6 feet or less on centers.
H. Do not use wire or wood fasteners for pipe supports.
I. Supports shall be attached to top chord of joists.
J. Support pipe from concrete structure by concrete inserts, or expansion shields. Support
horizontal piping with malleable iron universal-type supports.
K. Support grouped pipes with trapeze supports.
L. Riser clamps shall be wrought steel,to fit tightly around pipes,with extension lugs.
M. Size hangers for full thickness insulation over 2'/2"pipe size.
N. Install insulation protection saddles on hangers.
3.4 GAUGES
A. Install on all pump suction and discharge piping.
B. Each gauge shall be furnished with a gauge cock.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-77
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
P. Eccentric fittings shall be used at all changes in pipe size.
Q. Weld-O-Let fittings may be used where branches connect to mains.
R. All piping entering or leaving building shall be made watertight.
S. Provide strainers at inlet of all control valves,traps and as shown.
T. Provide di-electric fittings where dissimilar pipes connect,i.e., steel to copper.
3.2 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM
A. All piping shall remain stored at jobsite sealed with caps each end and shall be properly
shipped to site.
B. Fittings shall be cast bronze or wrought copper solder fittings, suitable for connection
with silver solder.
C. All piping joints shall be silver soldered with piping charged with dry nitrogen while
brazing joint.
D. Install removable type dryer strainer in liquid line with 3-valve by-pass.
E. Provide all necessary traps and pitch to properly drain refrigerant system and guarantee
proper operation.
F. After piping system is complete,test high side at 300 psi,low side at 150 psi,and check
with electronic leak detector. Maintain pressure on system for minimum of 12 hours.
G. Evacuate system when ambient temperature is above 607 to 2.0 MM of mercury for 12
hours; pressure displacement shall not be less than 5 CFM. Check vacuum with
electronic gauge.
H. Charge all systems with proper amount recommended by manufacturer and leave in
proper working order.
I. Replace any refrigerant loss during year of system guarantee and leave in proper
working order.
J. Seal all pipes watertight at building entry.
K. Furnish and install all necessary refrigerant accessories, such as liquid line solenoid ,
valves, expansion valves, filter dryers, sight glasses, mufflers, shut-off valves, etc.
Accessories shall be as manufactured by Sporlan,Alco or Jackes-Evans.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-76
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
OOW Florence,MA
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING
A. Minimum pipe size shall be 3/4" unless specifically noted otherwise.
B. Piping as indicated on drawings is diagrammatic and exact locations are subject to the
approval of the Architect/Engineer.
C. Pipe shall be run straight and true at the proper pitch and shall be firmly supported
without undue stress.
D. All elbows shall be long-radius type.
E. All piping shall be new unless otherwise noted. No piping or devices shall be reused.
F. Install flanges where required with gaskets.
G. Ream ends of all pipes. Pipe compounds on male ends only.
H. All connections to pieces of equipment and all changes in direction of mains shall be
made with screwed,welded or flanged fittings. Allow for expansion or contraction.
1. No mitered fittings will be approved.
J. Install all valves furnished by Temperature Control Subcontractor.
K. Provisions for expansion in mains and risers shall be made by the installation of
expansion joints and/or expansion compensators,offsets, or pipe loops with anchors and
guides,wherever indicated on the plans,or as may be required.
L. Install anchors and pipe guides as detailed and as per manufacturer's recommendations.
M. Vent all high points and drain all low points in hot water piping system. Pitch all piping
to drain and provide hose end drain valves each with cap. Extend vent lines to
accessible location or drain and terminate with petcock.
N. Install isolating valves on each item of equipment and on all branch mains and risers.
O. Install balancing valve on each item of hydronic equipment, i.e. coils, convectors,
cabinet and unit heaters,pumps and fin-tube radiation.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-75
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA ,.
a. Room sensor shall cycle the fan to satisfy space demands for heat. On
lower demand,the fan shall be de-activated.
b. Provide a strap on aquastat to prevent operation of the fan when the hot
water return temperature falls below 100 degrees F. (adjustable).
4. Elevator Machine Room Ventilation and Data Room Ventilation
a. Fan shall be controlled by a wall thermostat. When space temperature rises
above 95 degrees F. (adjustable) the fan shall start. Fan shall run
continuously until the temperature falls below the setpoint.
5. Elevator Shaft Vent
a. Provide a damper at the top of the elevator shaft. Coordinate exact location
of the damper and actuator access with the General Contractor.
b. The normally open damper shall be powered closed and shall open under
each one of the following circumstances:
1. When the space thermostat determines that the temperature at the top
of the shaft exceeds 85°F.
2. When the smoke detector determines a smoke condition at the top of
the shaft.
3. When there is a loss of power to the damper actuator.
6. General Exhaust Fans
a. Fan shall run continuously during occupied hours.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-74
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
connections to the burner flame safeguard system such that flame failure is
annunciated on the control system.
b. The boiler control system shall start the main building pump whenever any
zone is calling for heat. The boiler control system shall start the standby
building pump upon a failure of the main building pump. An alarm
condition of pump failure shall be provided.
c. The boiler shall maintain a reset water temperature to the building loop.
The temperatures shall be reset from 120 degrees at 60 degree ambient to
180 degrees at 0 degree ambient
d. The ATC contractor shall wire the aquastats and low water cut-offs on the
boiler. The ATC contractor shall provide manual switches to remotely turn
off the boiler. The switches shall be outside the boiler room door and shall
have a red face plate.
2. Packaged Rooftop Unit and Existing AHU
a. Control systems for the new rooftop unit and the existing air handler are
specified in Paragraph 2.77 CHANGEOVER BYPASS VAV SYSTEM
CONTROL.
b. In addition to these controls,provide the following:
1. Alarm Condition Mode:
a. Fan Control: Duct mounted smoke detectors in the unit
discharge position shut down the supply fan upon sensing smoke
conditions. The smoke detectors shall be an integral part of the
fire alarm system and their installation on the alarm side shall be
provided under other Sections. The ATC contractor shall
provide all fan shut down and interlock wiring and shall
coordinate with other trades for proper combined operation.
b. Unit Control: Outside air and exhaust air dampers shall be
closed.
c. Low limit thermostats downstream of the heating section shall
shut down unit and close outside air and relief air dampers upon
sensing temperatures below 40 degrees F.
3. Cabinet Unit Heaters
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-73
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
b. Sensors used for mixed air application shall be the averaging type and have
an accuracy of 1 degree F.
c. Duct sensors shall protrude into the air stream a minimum of 9 in.
d. OA temperature sensors shall have a minimum range of-5(F. to 152(F. and
an accuracy of within l(F. in this temperature range.
2. Pressure Instruments:
a. Differential Pressure and Pressure Sensors: Sensors shall have a 4-20 mA
output proportional signal with provisions for field checking. Sensors shall
withstand up to 150 percent of rated pressure,without damaging the device.
Accuracy shall be within 2 percent of full scale. Sensors shall be
manufactured by Leeds & Northrup, Setra, Robertshaw, Dwyer
Instruments,Rosemont, or be approved equal.
b. Pressure Switches: Pressure switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of 2
percent of range and withstand up to 150 percent of rated pressure. Sensors
shall be diaphragm or bourbon tube design. Switch operation shall be
adjustable over the operating pressure range. The switch shall have an
application rated Form C, snap-acting, self-wiping contact of platinum
alloy, silver alloy, or gold plating. Switches shall be manufactured by
Dwyer Instruments, or approved equal.
3. Panels:
a. Control panels shall be fully enclosed NEMA 1 cabinets with all metal
construction. Cabinets shall have hinged door with locking latch on cover
plate. All cabinet locks shall be common keyed. Cabinets shall be wall
mounted or freestanding as required.
b. All indicating devices manually adjusted during routine operations of
system shall be located on cabinet door. All control devices shall be
located within the cabinet mounted to sub-panel.
M. Control Sequences: The ATC contractor shall provide a complete system as required so
that all equipment shall operate properly according to the following sequences of
operation:
1. Boiler Plant.
a. The boiler is controlled by a panel furnished with the boiler. In addition to
the sequences provided by this panel the ATC contractor shall provide
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-72
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
deviations for review. All materials and equipment shall have passed the
calibration and operational tests before commencing the performance test.
b. The second part includes performance testing. These tests shall validate the
functionality of all control sequences. During the test period, all possible
control sequences shall be exercised either by normal control operation or
forced operation as required. Log and submit all results.
3. When the system performance is deemed satisfactory in whole by the Engineer,the
system parts will be accepted for beneficial use and placed under warranty. At this
time, a "notice of completion" shall be issued by the Engineer and the warranty
period shall start.
K. Owner's Instructions:
1. The ATC Contractor shall provide the services of competent instructors to provide
full instructions to designated personnel in the operation and of the systems. The
training shall be specifically oriented to the system and interfacing equipment
installed.
2. Operator Testing: The ATC Contractor shall provide all training materials required
to instruct four operator personnel on:
a. System overview.
b. Emergency operation.
3. Maintenance Testing: The ATC Contractor shall provide all instructional materials
required to instruct 4 maintenance personnel on:
a. General operation of the equipment.
b. Diagnostics.
c. Troubleshooting and repair instructions.
L. Instrumentation and Control:
1. Input Devices:
a. Temperature Sensors: Sensors shall be of the type and have accuracy
ratings as indicated and/or required for the application and shall permit
accuracy rating of within 1 percent of the temperature range of their
intended use. Sensors must be capable of being calibrated.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-71
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
closed position at 4" W.G. static pressure. Penn Model OBD-10 or equal by
Prefco or Louvers&Dampers.
4. Valves:
a. Where indicated, provide automatic temperature control valves complete
with actuator sized to close-off against system pressure for the service
required. Valves shall be straight through or mixing type as required. The
valves shall be bronze or forged brass body with replaceable disc and a dual
sealing valve stem. This feature shall allow disassembly of the valve top,
inspection and packing replacement without system shutdown, or valve
body removal. Valve body ratings shall be NSI Class 125 for screwed or
union fittings and ANSI Class 250 for flared fittings.
b. Provide three-way hot water mixing valves complete with actuator sized to
close-off against system pressure. Valve stem packing shall be low friction,
tight sealing Teflon asbestos, and valve stems shall be polished Monel. All
valves shall use guided valve plugs for good sealing and reliable operation.
Valves 2%s" and smaller shall be ANSI Class 250 bronze body with screwed
ends. Valves 2'/z" to 4" shall be Class 125 cast iron body with bronze trim
and flanged ends. Valves 5" and 6" shall be 125 psi class steel body bronze
trim and flanged ends.
c. All water valves shall be sized for 5 psig (11.5 ft. hd.) maximum pressure
drop.
d. All valves shall be capable of modulating throughout their entire range
without creating any objectionable noise. Valves creating objectionable
noise (in the engineers opinion) shall be replaced with valves that do not
create objectionable noise.
J. Acceptance Test and Acceptance:
1. Upon completion of the installation, the ATC Contractor shall start up the system
and perform all necessary calibration, testing, and debugging operations. An
acceptance test shall be performed by the ATC Contractor in the presence of the
Owner's representative.
2. The following two-part tests shall be performed by the ATC Contractor and
scheduled after completion of the equipment and installation:
a. The first part includes an operational test of all field equipment. Perform
detailed cross check of each sensor by making a comparison between
reading at the sensor and a standard test instrument. Note all results and
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-70
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
Furnish and supervise installation of stainless steel wells for all piping
systems.
b. For mixed air or stratified locations, furnish and install averaging bulb type
sensors.
c. All pipe and duct sensors shall have an accessible NEMA 1 electrical box
for connections and termination's.
2. Electronic Damper Actuators
a. Electronic damper actuators shall be spring return motor actuator type. As
manufactured by "Belimo". A break mechanism shall prevent the return
spring from driving the motor actuator toward its normal position unless the
power is interrupted.
b. ATC Subcontractor shall provide all actuators and linkage for unit
furnished dampers.
c. The motor assembly shall include electric/ electronic contacts, hardware,
and brackets to allow proper motion and operation.
3. Control Dampers
a. Control dampers for HVAC systems shall be opposed blade and provided to
allow effective modulation or close-off of air flow as required for each fan
system. Damper frames and blades must be constructed of either galvanized
steel or aluminum for adequate resistance to corrosion. Damper frames
must be constructed to facilitate field assembly of several individual
sections into a large damper area and must be provided with openings or
mounting clips to allow secure fastening of damper frame to the
surrounding ductwork, collar,or fan housing.Maximum blade length in any
section shall be 48". Additional stiffening or bracing shall be provided for
any section exceeding 48" in height. All blades must be provided with
suitable bearings for smooth operation and all blades must be
interconnected to provide unison operation.
b. Dampers shall be provided with either parallel or opposed blade linkage and
arranged for normally open or normally closed operation as specified for
each.
c. All dampers shall be provided with appropriate seals along the blade edges
and at blade ends to provide tight closure with minimum leakage. Air
leakage in the damper closed position shall not exceed 0.5% per sq. ft. in
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-69
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA .,
all control components on the job which shall include a trouble-shooting and
operating procedure. This manual shall be furnished to the Owner and shall show
the total integrated control system. A competent technician shall be provided for
instruction purposes.Refer to PART 3, for "System Start-up/Tests and Balancing",
and cooperate with other Contractors in their phase of the work.
2. Before the Architect/Engineer is asked to supervise and/or witness the adjustments
called for in this Specification, the Control Manufacturer, though the HVAC
Subcontractor, shall state in writing that the entire system is complete, that the
controls have been calibrated, and that the controlled devices and/or equipment
have been physically inspected and checked to assure that these terminal devices
are in fact under proper control and working smoothly over their entire range of
operation.
3. Control system shall neither be considered complete nor acceptable until all
conditions of the sequence of operations have been attached and all temperatures
are maintained within specified limits at all operating conditions.
4. Provide coordination with equipment manufacturer, HVAC Subcontractor, and
Electrical Subcontractor for proper sequence of operation and for interlock
required with smoke and fire alarm systems, etc. (See SECTION 16000 - "
ELECTRICAL WORK).
H. Local Control Panels:
1. All temperature controls and related electronic devices, etc. shall be mounted in an
enclosed control panel, with a hinged door. All temperature settings, adjustments,
and calibrations shall be made at the system control panel.
2. Details of the panels shall be submitted for approval prior to fabrication. Locations
of panels are to be convenient for adjustment and service.
3. All electrical devices with the panels shall be factory pre-wired to a numbered
terminal strip. Wiring within the panel shall be in accordance with NEMA and UL
Standard and shall meet all local codes.
I. Material Standards
1. Temperature Sensors:
a. Duct sensors shall be RTD or thermistor type electronic non-adjustable in
sealed casings. Accuracy of sensor shall be f %2(F. through industry
standard ranges required for service.Insertion type bulb shall be used where
required for use in non-stratified air such as return or exhaust air plenums.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-68
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
40W Florence,MA
eliminate stratification on all AHU units; affix baffles permanently in place after
stratification problem has been eliminated; furnish and install access doors or other
approved means of access through ducts for service to control equipment.
3. Painting: All finished painting required for control piping and equipment shall be
done by the General Contractor.
4. Cutting and Patching: All cutting and patching necessary for the installation of the
control system shall be done by the General Contractor.
5. BoilerBumer Controls: ATC Subcontractor shall install the Boiler Control System
and shall provide all wiring and appurtenances necessary for a complete and
operating system.
6. VVT Changeover / Bypass systems: ATC Subcontractor shall install the VVT
Changeover / Bypass Control Systems and shall provide all wiring and
appurtenances necessary for a complete and operating system.
F. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop drawings are to be complete with all devices identified by numbers and
letters and those same identifying numbers used in the description of operation for
positive ease in cross-referencing. Descriptive bulletins shall be included for all
devices; these bulletins identified by the same key numbers and letters shall be
used on the control layout.Description bulletins and/or control layout shall include
data on sensitivity, pressure ranges, temperature ranges, means of adjustment,
means of calibration, ranges, and all other data necessary for the Architect-
Engineer to check use and function of each device for its intended application.
2. Valve and damper schedules shall be submitted.
3. At the completion of the job, final corrected "As Installed" record shop drawings
shall be furnished complete with all final settings, ranges, temperature ranges,
sample times, throttling ranges, and temperature control settings. In addition, a
print out of all control strategies which match the above drawings will be
submitted as part of the "As-Installed" drawings. These are to be sent to the
Architect-Engineer for review prior to submitting them to the Owner.
G. Adjustment,Calibration,and Coordination with Other Trades:
1. On completion of the job, the ATC Subcontractor shall completely adjust, ready
for use, all thermostats, valves, damper motors and relays provided under this
Contract and be present for functional tests of the systems.The ATC Subcontractor
shall provide a complete instruction manual covering the function and operation of
IDEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-67
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA ,,amk
3. All temperature control panel wiring to terminal strips and field wiring from
terminal strips to field mounted devices.
4. All wiring to the "Auto" side of hand-off-auto switches on the units being
controlled by the ATC Subcontractor.
5. Wiring of all electro-mechanical devices required to be located on or in
temperature control panels.
6. All wiring to the temperature control panels shall be by the ATC Subcontractor
specifically for that purpose.
7. All wiring to activate and control air conditioning refrigeration stages.
8. All interconnecting wiring to thermostats, sensors, controlled devices, auxiliary
devices, switches, transformers, relays, protective devices, control panels, clocks,
terminal strips,accessories and appurtenances.
9. All wiring shall comply with National, State and local Electrical Codes.
D. Power wiring: All power wiring will be installed and terminated by the Electrical
Subcontractor.Power wiring shall be defined as follows:
1. Wiring of power feeds to disconnects,starters, and electric motors.
2. Wiring of 120V AC power feeds to all temperature control panels where required.
3. Power wiring to 120V single phase motors.
E. Related Work:
1. Installation of Valves and Wells: Automatic temperature control valves and
separable wells for the immersion element, and couplings for flow and pressure
switches furnished by the Control Manufacturer, shall be installed by the HVAC
Subcontractor under the ATC Subcontractor's supervision.
2. Installation of Dampers: All automatic dampers furnished by the Control
Manufacturer shall be installed by the HVAC Sheet Metal Subcontractor under the
ATC Subcontractor's supervision, to see that the dampers are correctly installed so
that they operate freely and close tightly.It shall be the responsibility of the HVAC
Subcontractor to provide and install blank off plates when the control application
requires; assemble multiple section dampers with required interconnecting
linkages and extend the required number of shafts through the ducts for externally
mounted damper motors; provide, install, and locate sheet metal baffle plates to
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-66
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
3. Control system for the VVT Changeover/Bypass systems is furnished under other
paragraphs. This systems shall be installed and adjusted by the ATC contractor.
4. All wiring, conduit, junction boxes, fittings, etc., necessary for the temperature
control system shall be furnished and installed by the ATC Subcontractor and shall
conform to all standards and codes as described under Section 16000 -
ELECTRICAL WORK. Wiring shall be in metal raceways where required by
prevailing codes.
5. Provide nameplates for all control devices. Devices on panels to have "Lamicoid"
nameplates,isolated control valves,relays,etc.to be marked with stamped tape.
B. Scope:
1. The ATC Subcontractor shall furnish and install all equipment, accessories,wiring,
instruments,and appurtenances required for a complete and functioning system.
2. The system, as specified, shall independently control the building's HVAC
equipment to maintain a comfortable environment in an energy efficient manner.
3. All materials and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly
manufactured for this and/or other systems, and not custom designed especially for
this project.All components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual
use.
4. The ATC Subcontractor shall demonstrate that this capability to execute this
Contract will evidence that he has actively engaged in the business of installing
similar systems. Submit evidence that the manufacturer has factory supervised
service facilities and competent technicians to service systems within the area
covered by the Local Office.
5. The ATC Subcontractor shall provide a list of no less than five similar projects
which have building control systems as specified. These projects must be on-line
and functional such that the Owner's representative would observe the control
system in full operation.
C. Control Wiring: All temperature control wiring will be installed and terminated by the
ATC Subcontractor. Control wiring shall be as follows:
1. All circuits which are activated or deactivated by temperature control system
components,such as,but not limited to,high and low limit protective devices.
2. All circuits which activate or deactivate temperature control system components.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-65
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
4. Valves located above ceilings shall be marked by colored dots approximately '/4"
in diameter applied to the ceiling grid. The color code shall be:
a. Chilled Water Blue
b. Hot Water Red
E. Mechanical Equipment Identification:
1. General: Install engraved plastic laminate sign or plastic equipment marker on or
near each major item of mechanical equipment and each operational device, as
specified herein if not otherwise specified for each item or device. Provide signs
for the following general categories of equipment and operational devices:
a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous
units such as gas outlets.
b. Meters, gages,thermometers and similar units.
c. Fuel-burning units including boilers, and heaters.
d. Pumps, and similar motor-driven units.
e. Fans, and blowers.
f. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.
2. Fire Dampers located above ceilings shall be marked by colored dots
approximately t/4" in diameter applied to the ceiling grid. The color code shall be
orange
2.48 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
A. General Requirements:
1. The system shall be a properly integrated system installed by competent mechanics
regularly employed in the profession of temperature control. The control system
shall be complete in all respects, including room thermostats, immersion
thermostats, switches, relays, valves, cabinets and other accessory equipment, and
a complete system of control wiring
2. Control system for the Boiler/Bumer is furnished under other paragraphs. This
system shall be installed and adjusted by the ATC contractor.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-64
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
b. VAV boxes located above ceilings shall be marked by colored dots
approximately 1/4" in diameter applied to the ceiling grid. The color code
shall be black
C. Piping System Identification:
1. General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system
indicated to receive identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of
flow:
a. Stenciled markers, including color-coded background band or rectangle,
and contrasting lettering of black or white. Extend color band or rectangle
2"beyond ends of lettering.
b. Plastic pipe markers,with application system as indicated under"Materials"
in this section. Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot
non-insulated pipes.
2. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to
view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts,
tunnels, plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations. Near each valve and
control device. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and
terminal units; mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow
pattern. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter
non-accessible enclosures. Near major equipment items and other points of
origination and termination. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50'
along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping
and equipment. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit
intermediately spaced markers.
D. Valve Identification:
1. General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping
system; exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units,
and similar rough-in connections of end-use and units. List each tagged valve in
valve schedule for each piping system.
2. Tagging Schedule: Comply with requirements of"Valve Tagging Schedule" at end
of this section.
3. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in machine rooms where indicated or,
if not otherwise indicated,where directed by Architect/Engineer.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-63
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA .. ,
B. Type KSSPC-FLG braided flexible connector. Constructed of stainless steel annular
corrugated metal surrounded with a woven wire braid of high tensile stainless steel.
C. Carbon steel plate flanges ASA 150#bolt hole patterns on all pipes 3" and over, carbon
steel male nipples to 2'/z" sizes.
D. Flexible Connectors shall not be used to correct misalignment.
2.46 TAGS,NAMEPLATES AND CHARTS
A. Each valve, control, switch and piece of apparatus installed under this contract shall be-
properly identified. Valves shall be provided with a 1'/2" diameter brass tag with 'h"
high numbers and/or letters fastened with nylon ties. Beaded chain will not be
acceptable.
B. Valve tag identification shall conform to valve chart listing.
C. All other equipment including fans, AHU's, pumps, sound attenuators, condensing
units, heat exchangers, etc. shall be provided with a suitable laminated plastic
nameplate with 1/4" letters fastened with appropriate screws or rivets. ,OMIN
D. Provide framed in glass,typed charts for valves and install where directed.
2.47 IDENTIFICATION, COLOR CODING&FLOW DIRECTION
A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation,
painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces,
install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification
prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.
B. Ductwork Identification
1. General: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake and relief ductwork with duct
markers; or provide stenciled signs and arrows, showing ductwork service and
direction of flow, in black or white (whichever provides most contrast with
ductwork color).
a. Location: In each space where ductwork is exposed, or concealed only by
removable ceiling system, locate signs near points where ductwork
originates or continues into concealed enclosures (shaft, underground or
similar concealment), and at 50' spacing along exposed runs.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-62
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. Filters shall be Purolator Hl-E40 medium efficiency pleated or equal by Kock or Fan.
C. Furnish two complete sets for all new and existing equipment,one to be installed at job
start-up; other set to Owner for spare.
2.44 FLEXIBLE AIR DUCT
A. General: Factory fabricated, complying with NFPA 90A. Flexible ducts shall not
penetrate any fire or smoke barrier, which is required to have a fire resistance rating of
one hour or more. Provide approximate lengths indicated on the drawings. Provide
insulated acoustical air duct connectors in supply air duct systems and else where as
shown.
B. Flexible ducts shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., complying with UL
181. Ducts larger than 8 inches in diameter shall be Class 1.Ducts 8 inches in diameter
and smaller may be Class 1 or Class 2.
C. Insulated Flexible Air Duct: Factory made including mineral fiber insulation with
maximum C factor of 0.25 at 75°F mean temperature, encased with a low permeability
moisture barrier outer jacket, having a puncture resistance of not less than 50 Beach
Units. Acoustic insertion loss shall not be less than 3 dB per foot of straight duct,at 500
Hz,Based on 6 inch duct,of 2500 fpm.
D. Application Criteria:
1. Temperature range: 0 to 250°F internal.
2. Maximum working velocity, fpm: 2400 for low pressure, 5000 for medium and
high pressure systems.
3. Minimum working pressure,inches of water gauge:
E. Low pressure systems: 2"positive, 1-1/2"negative.
F. Medium pressure systems: 6"positive.
G. Duct Clamps: 100 percent nylon strap, 175 pounds minimum loop tensile strength
manufactured for this purpose or stainless steel strap with cadmium plated worm gear
tightening device. Apply clamps with sealant and as approved for UL 181, Class I
installation.
2.45 FLEXIBLE PIPING CONNECTORS
A. As manufactured by Keflex,Flexonics or Anaconda. Model number is Keflex.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-61
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA ...A,
B. Complete with fan and motor housing, fan scroll, belt or direct-drive motor, motor
mount,bird screen,curb gasket,backdraft damper and disconnect switch.
C. Construction: Heavy-duty low silhouette housing,ribbed aluminum with finish suitable
for field painting, tubular welded framework, one-piece deep throat venturi orifice,
aluminum fan wheel. Locked to drive shaft, anti-corrosive protective coating, and
internal electrical conduit.
D. Bearings: Non-cantilevered, flange mounted extended life ball bearings. On horizontal
supports.
E. Motor/Drive: Adjustable motor mount, isolated from air stream mounted on rubber-in-
shear vibration dampers. Ventilated hinged motor-drive compartment.
F. Fan Wheel: Precision balanced,non-overloaded all aluminum wheel and hub.
G. Backdraft Damper: Motorized by ATC Subcontractor.
H. Motor: Force cooled compartment. Capacity,size and model as scheduled on drawings
with built-in thermal overload protection. .,
I. Fans shall be manufactured by Greenheck,Briedert or Loren Cook Company.
2.41 FAN ROOF CURBS
A. Prefabricated,insulated, constructed of.081 gauge aluminum, 12"high. Heliarc welded
construction with built-in self flashing. Fiberglass insulation lining, 2" thick. Sized to
fit roof fan exactly. Slope of curb shall be that fan sits horizontally regardless of roof
pitch. Nailers shall be pressure treated
2.42 ACCESS PANELS
A. Steel access panels,as manufactured by Karp,Milcor or Wilkinson for access to valves,
dampers, vents, controls, etc. Panel door shall have flush screw driver lock. 16-gauge
frame, 13-gauge hinged door; rating of door shall be equal to the fire rating of wall,
ceiling or floor,which it is installed into.
B. Install in each location where valves, dampers, vents, controls, etc. are concealed by
construction to non-accessible areas of walls,ceilings and floors.
2.43 FILTERS
A. Filters shall be furnished for all equipment requiring same, sizes as required for
equipment and minimum 4"thickness for AHD's.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-60
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
I. The rating of the firestops shall be 1,2, 3,&4 hour(s),but in no case less than the rating
of the time-rated floor or wall assembly.
2.38 INLINE BELT DRIVE CENTRIFUGAL FAN
A. Furnish and install duct mounted centrifugal fan of the size and type called for on the
drawing schedule and in the location shown on the plans. The fan shall be single width,
single inlet belt drive.
B. The housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel with square duct
mounting collars. Removable or hinged service doors shall permit easy access to all
interior components.
C. The wheel shall be of the non-overloading, backward inclined centrifugal fan type,
constructed of aluminum. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The
wheel cone and fan inlet cone shall be carefully matched from maximum performance
and operating efficiency.
D. Motors shall be of the heavy duty permanently lubricated ball bearing type. The fan
shaft shall be ground and polished shaft mounted in heavy duty,permanently lubricated,
pillow block ball bearings. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 165% of driven
horsepower. Pulleys shall be of the fully machined cast iron type keyed and securely
attached to the wheel and motor shafts. The motor pulley shall be adjustable for final
system balancing.
E. Fans shall be as manufactured by Greenheck Model BSQ, Bayley, Trane, New York
Blower or as approved.
2.39 CABINET FANS
A. The fans shall be of the centrifugal direct drive type. The fan shall be constructed of
heavy gauge galvanized steel. The fan shall be resiliently mounted within an
acoustically lined enclosure. The outlet duct collar shall include an aluminum backdraft
damper.The fan disconnect is internal and is of the plug in type.The fan wheel shall be
forward curved and shall be dynamically balanced. Fans shall be licensed to bear the
AMCA seal for sound and air flow performance and shall be UL listed. Fans shall be
Greenheck Model SP,Penn Zephyr.
2.40 ROOF EXHAUST FANS
A. Centrifugal roof-type,backward-inclined blades,non-overloading design. Fans shall be
domed type as indicated on fan schedule.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-59
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
2.37 FIRE SAFING AND SMOKE SEAL
A. Firesafing and smoke seal is required for all pipes, ducts and conduit penetrations
through all walls, floors, partitions or leaving or entering any vertical pipe/duct
shaftway at all floors and through all walls. This Subcontractor shall provide his own
pipe and duct sleeves and do his own fresafing and smoke seal work.
B. Elastomeric intumescent firestopping material as manufactured by 3M Construction
Markets,Dow-Corning,or approved equal.
C. Components to be used as follows:
1. 3M Brand Fire Barrier CP 25N/S No Sag Caulk.
2. 3M Brand Fire Barrier CP 25 S/L Self Leveling Caulk.
3. 3M Brand Fire Barrier CP 25WB Caulk.
4. 3M Brand Fire Barrier FS-195 Wrap/Strip.
5. 3M Brand Fire Barrier CS-195 Composite Sheet.
6. 3M Brand Fire Barrier 7900 Series Penetration Sealing Systems.
7. 3M Brand Fire Barrier MPS-2 Moldable Putty Stix.
8. 3M Brand Fire Barrier MPP-4S Moldable Putty Pads.
D. Firestopping material shall be asbestos-free and capable of maintaining an effective
barrier against flame, smoke and gases in compliance with the requirements of ASTM
E814,UL 1479, and UL Fire Resistance Directory.
E. Materials shall meet and be acceptable for use by BOCA,Massachusetts state code and
all other applicable codes. Assemblies shall be UL listed.
F. Materials shall meet the requirements of NFPA 101 -Life Safety Code and NFPA 70 -
National Electrical Code.
G. Materials shall be suitable for the firestopping of penetrations made by steel, glass,
plastic and insulated pipe.
H. On insulated pipe, the fire-rating classification must not require removal of the
insulation.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-58
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
assemblies shall be Type SCB at the ceiling and at the clevis bolt, SCBH between
the hanger rod nut and the clevis or SCBV if clamped to a beam all as
manufactured by Mason Industries,Inc.
9. Seismic solid braces shall consist of steel angles or channels to resist seismic loads
with a minimum safety factor of 2 and arranged to provide all directional restraint.
Seismic solid brace end connectors shall be steel assemblies that swivel to the final
installation angle and utilize two through bolts to provide proper attachment. Solid
seismic brace assemblies shall be type SSB as manufactured by Mason Industries,
Inc.
10. Steel angles, sized to prevent buckling, shall be clamped to pipe or equipment rods
utilizing a minimum of three ductile iron clamps at each restraint location when
required. Welding of support rods is not acceptable. Rod clamp assemblies shall
be Type SRC as manufactured by Mason Industries,Inc.
11. Pipe clevis cross bolt braces are required in all restraint locations. They shall be
special purpose preformed channels deep enough to be held in place by bolts
passing over the cross bolt. Clevis cross brace shall be type CCB as manufactured
by Mason Industries,Inc.
12. All-directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel members
restrained by a one-piece molded neoprene bushing of bridge bearing neoprene.
Bushing shall be replaceable and a minimum of 1/4 inch thick. Rated loadings
shall not exceed 1000 psi. A minimum air gap of 1/8 inch shall be incorporated in
the snubber design in all directions before contact is made between the rigid and
resilient surfaces. Snubber end caps shall be removable to allow inspection of
internal clearances. Neoprene bushings shall be rotated to insure no short circuits
exist before systems are activated. Snubber shall be Type Z-1225 as manufactured
by Mason Industries,Inc.
13. Stud wedge anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, not from
undersized wire that is "rolled up" to create the thread. The stud anchor shall also
have a safety shoulder, which fully supports the wedge ring under load. The stud
anchors shall have an evaluation report number from the I.C.B.O Evaluation
Service, Inc. verifying its allowable loads. Drill-in stud wedge anchors shall be
type SAS as manufactured by Mason Industries,Inc.
14. Female wedge anchors are preferred in floor locations so isolators or equipment
can slide into place after the anchors are installed. Anchors shall be manufactured
from full diameter wire,and shall have a safety shoulder to fully support the wedge
ring under load. Female wedge anchors shall have an evaluation report number
from the I.C.B.O Evaluation Service,Inc. verifying to its allowable loads.Drill-in
female wedge anchors shall be type SAB as manufactured by Mason Industries,
Inc.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-57
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,NU *00%,
between the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that
must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8
of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a
minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection.
Submittals shall include spring diameters, deflection, compressed spring height
and solid spring height. Mountings shall be Type SLF as manufactured by Mason
Industries,Inc.
5. Restrained spring mountings shall have an SLF mounting as described above,
within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension
when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A
steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are
equal. A minimum clearance of 1/2" shall be maintained around restraining bolts
and between the housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring
action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Since housings
will be bolted or welded in position there must be an internal isolation pad.
Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic forces. Mountings shall be SLR as
manufactured by Mason Industries,Inc.
6. Spring mountings built into a ductile iron or steel housing to provide all directional
seismic snubbing. The snubber shall be adjustable vertically and allow a
maximum of 1/4 inch travel in all directions before contacting the resilient
snubbing collars. Mountings shall be SSLFH as manufactured by Mason
Industries,Inc.
7. Spring hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1 1/4"thick
neoprene elements at the top and a steel spring seated in a steel washer reinforced
neoprene cup on the bottom. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the
compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum
additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall
include spring diameters, deflection, compressed spring height and solid spring
height. The neoprene element and the cup shall have neoprene bushings projecting
through the steel box. To maintain stability the boxes shall not be articulated as
clevis hangers or the neoprene element stacked on top of the spring. Spring
diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the
hanger rod to swing through a 30° arc from side to side before contacting the rod
bushing and short circuiting the spring. Submittals shall include a hanger drawing
showing the 30° capability.Hangers shall be type 30N as manufactured by Mason
Industries,Inc.
8. Seismic Cable Restraints shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables sized to
resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of two and arranged to provide
all-directional restraint. Cable end connections shall be steel assemblies that swivel
to final installation angle and utilize two clamping bolts to provide proper cable
engagement. Cables must not be allowed to bend across sharp edges. Cable
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-56
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
3. Blanket shall consist of 1 %2" thick, 11 pounds per square foot density fiberglass
mat with a barium sulfate loaded vinyl acoustic barrier. Inner and outer jackets
shall be vinyl coated polypropylene fabric. Outer jacket shall have a 2" wide
Velcro flap to cover any exposed seams.
4. Compressors shall be field measured by a manufacturer's representative prior to
fabrication to ensure good thermal performance.
5. Acoustic blanket system shall be equal to Insultech LT250A-VP or approved
equal.
2.36 VIBRATION ISOLATORS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. All vibration isolators and seismic restraints described in this section shall be the
product of a single manufacturer. Mason Industry's products are the basis of these
specifications; products of other manufacturers are acceptable provided their systems
strictly comply with the specification and have the approval of the specifying engineer.
B. For the purposes of this project, failure is defined as the discontinuance of any
attachment point between equipment or structure, vertical permanent deformation
greater than 1/8 inch and/or horizontal permanent deformation greater that 1/4 inch.
C. Vibration Isolators and Seismic Restraints.
1. Two layers of 3/4" thick neoprene pad consisting of 2" square waffle modules
separated horizontally by a 16 gauge galvanized shim. Load distribution plates
shall be used as required. Pads shall be Type Super "W" as manufactured by
Mason Industries,Inc.
2. Bridge-bearing neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static deflection of 0.2"
and all directional seismic capability. The mount shall consist of a ductile iron
casting containing two separated and opposing molded neoprene elements. The
elements shall prevent the central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from
contacting the casting during normal operation. The shock absorbing neoprene
materials shall be compounded to bridge-bearing specifications. Mountings shall
be Type BR as manufactured by Mason Industries,Inc.
3. A one piece molded bridge bearing neoprene washer/bushing. The bushing shall
surround the anchor bolt and have a flat washer face to avoid metal to metal
contact. Neoprene bushings shall be type HG as manufactured by Mason
Industries,Inc.
4. Spring isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any housing and
complete with a molded neoprene cup or 1/4" neoprene acoustical friction pad
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-55
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
D. Pressure drop through each unit shall not exceed scheduled values at design air
quantities.
E. Cap open ends of attenuators at factory with plastic, heavy duty paper, cardboard or
other appropriate material to prevent entrance of dirt, water, or any other foreign matter
to inside of attenuator. Caps shall not be removed until attenuator is installed in duct
system.
F. Acoustic and aerodynamic performance shall be based on independent laboratory tests
performed in accordance with ASTM E-477. Test results shall be submitted to the
Engineer upon request. Submittal data shall include dynamic insertion loss in both
forward flow-and reverse flow conditions. Static pressure drops shall be reported for
actual air flow conditions.
G. Sound attenuators shall be as manufactured by Aerosonics, Environmental Air or
Korfund
2.35 SOUND ATTENUATING INSULATION
A. Indoor Application ,
1. Sound attenuating insulation shall be provided between the air handling unit
discharge and intake openings and the sound attenuators.
2. The entire area of the opening under the air handling unit that remains after the
installation of ductwork shall be insulated.
3. The insulation shall be Barricade Lag Series B-10 LAG/QFA-9 by Sound Seal or
approved equal.
4. Sound attenuation insulation shall have the following Sound Transmission Losses:
125 Hz—19db, 250 Hz—20 db, 500 Hz—23 db, 1000 Hz— 33 db, 2000 Hz—44
db and 4000 Hz—53 db.
B. Outdoor Application
1. Air conditioning compressors located on the new roof shall be wrapped with a
field applied acoustic blanket.
2. Provide an acoustic blanket system for the two compressors in the new packaged
rooftop unit (RTU-1) and for the compressor in the existing Carrier air cooled
condensing unit(Model#38AKS008).
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-54
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
C. As manufactured by Ruskin,National Controlled Air,or Air Balance.
2.33 REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS
A. Shall be manufacturer, model and types as scheduled on drawings. Sizes as indicated
on drawings.
B. Select grilles, diffusers and registers with neck velocities and noise ratings equal to or
less than those used for design.
C. All supply air devices shall be used designed to diffuse the specified air quantities
uniformly throughout the conditioned space.
D. Ratings shall be certified and tested in accordance with Air Diffusion Council Test
Code 1062R2,or another approved test procedure.
E. Equipment shall be sound performance tested and rated in accordance with
ASHRAE-36B Standard for sound power measurement.
F. Location of air distribution devices installed in ceilings shall be as indicated. See
reflected ceiling plans.
G. Opposed blade volume dampers shall have removable adjusting key or wrench.
H. All air distribution equipment shall be steel with baked enamel finish as indicated,
except where indicated otherwise.
I. As manufactured by Titus,Metalaire or Krueger.
2.34 SOUND ATTENUATORS
A. Attenuator casing shall be not less than 20 gauge galvanized sheet steel or 18 gauge
aluminum. Casing shall be fitted with suitable flanges to make clean airtight
connections to ductwork.
B. Sound-absorbent material shall be faced with glass fiber cloth and covered with not less
than 24 gauge galvanized perforated sheet steel or 22 gauge perforated aluminum.
Perforations shall not exceed 5/32-inch diameter, approximately 40 percent free area.
Sound absorbent material shall be long glass fiber acoustic blanket meeting
requirements of NFPA 90A.
C. Entire unit shall be completely air tight and free of vibration and buckling at internal
static pressures up to eight inch water gauge at operating velocities.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-53
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
5. Provide bellmouths, conical tees, laterals, reducers and other low loss fittings as
shown in SMACNA Standards.
D. Turning Vanes: Single thickness, as manufactured by Barber-Colman, Titus or Duro-
Dyne.
E. Flexible Connections: Fire retardant, flexible heavy-impregnated canvas; Vent-Fab as
manufactured by Ventfabrics,equal by Duro-Dyne or Flex-Hose.
F. Access Doors: 10"x 10" minimum 1" thick,hinged with cam latch,24-gauge door,22-
gauge frame, primed galvanized, gasketed. Install at each fire, smoke and automatic
damper. As manufactured by Cesco,equal by Duro-Dyne.
G. Sealants: Water and fire resistive, compatible with mating materials and meeting UL
and NFPA requirements.
H. Acoustically-Lined Duct (where indicated on drawings): Acoustical insulating liner
shall be V thickness of 1-1/2 pcf density Johns-Manville "microlite" duct liner with
factory applied flame retardant black plastic coating, or approved equal. Maximum
thermal conductivity (K): 0.25 at 75 degrees F mean temperature. Duct liner shall
comply with NFPA Standard No. 90A. Duct liner shall be odorless. If an objectionable
odor is detected due to the lining it shall be replaced with an odorless liner at no cost to
the Owner. Adhere liner to all interior sides of ducts with minimum of 75% coverage
of fire retardant adhesive such as Benjamin Foster's 85-20, or approved equal. Use
mechanical fastening of Graham welded pins, spaced on a maximum of 12" centers.
Contractor shall be held responsible for liner adhesion. Prior to installing liner, caulk
the edges of insulation that will butt with a heavy coat of fire resistive mastic,Benjamin
Foster's 85-20,or approved equal. Duct dimension indicated shall be inside clear size.
2.32 FIRE DAMPERS
A. Fire Dampers: Type "B" 1'/2 hour rated and stamped,UL label and construction curtain
style, horizontal and vertical with sleeve and 165°F fusible link. For square,
rectangular,oval or round ducts.
B. Fire dampers in dishwasher exhaust and locker room exhaust shall be stainless steel
construction,all others may be galvanized steel.
1. The damper frame may be of design and length as to function as the mounting
sleeve, thus eliminating the need for a separate sleeve, as allowed by UL 555.
Otherwise provide sleeves and mounting angles, minimum 14 gage, required to
provide installation equivalent to the damper manufacturer's UL test installation.
2. Submit manufacturer installation instructions conforming to UL rating test.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-52
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. Rectangular Duct Systems:
1. Rectangular ductwork shall be galvanized steel G-60, ASTM Standards A525 and
A527.
2. Gauges, reinforcement and joints for rectangular duct systems shall conform to
SMACNA 1985 Manual for duct systems of 2"WG Table 1-5.
3. Elbows shall be constructed either with the inside radius equal to the duct width or
provide square elbows with single thickness turning vanes. All in compliance with
SMACNA Manual 1985 Edition.
4. All fittings for rectangular ductwork shall be fabricated in compliance with
SMACNA Section 2. All connections on branches to mains shall use a 45° clinch
collar, or fittings for round ducting with bellmouth and heavy duty regulators as
manufactured by Buckley model HD-BMD or equal.
5. All joints shall be sealed with Class C duct sealant for 2" W.G. application.
Installed in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and
SMACNA manuals.
6. All ducts shall be supported as recommended by SMACNA Section 4. Duct
hangers shall be spaced at not less than 5 ft. on center and at each fitting. Hangers
shall be secured to steel structure.
7. Volume dampers of splitters shall be constructed in accordance with details shown
in the SMACNA Duct Manual, Section 2. Dampers shall be equipped with
locking quadrants with position indicator.
C. Round Ducts:
1. All round ductwork shall be round spiral lock seam construction. Spiral duct
gauges shall be in accordance with SMACNA standards.
2. Spiral duct shall be provided in continuous lengths wherever possible. Except
when interrupted by fittings,duct sections shall not be less than twelve feet long.
3. Spiral duct and fittings shall be by the same manufacturer to insure good fit of slip
joints.
4. Elbows: Diameters 3 through 8 inches shall be two section die stamped, all others
shall be gored construction, maximum 180 angle, with all seams continuously
welded. Coat galvanized areas of fittings damaged by welding with corrosion
resistant aluminum paint or galvanized repair compound.
BEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-51
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
Exhaust&outside air plenums 2"
Ducting in attic 2"
2. Replace any insulation damaged by the selective demolition to the existing system.
3. Duct insulation in all mechanical rooms and where exposed shall be rigid
fiberglass board with FSK vapor barrier, 3 lb. density with "K" factor of .23 at
75°F. mean temperature; 25-50 UL rating.All joints and seams tape or glue sealed
to maintain vapor barrier integrity.
4. Duct insulation in all concealed spaces shall be flexible fiberglass 1.5 lb density
with FSK vapor barrier facing. Staple and seal all seams and joints with self
adhering foil tape.
5. Ductwork insulated as follows:
a. Supply air: All ducting from air handling and air conditioning units. No
exposed ducting in conditioned spaces shall be insulated, except as noted.
b. Return air: All ducting in mechanical rooms, plenums, in uninsulated duct '
shafts and 10 ft. upstream of O.A. duct connection.
c. Exhaust air: All plenums and risers to roof fans 5 ft. upstream of fan.
d. Outdoor air: All.
e. Mixed air: All combined OA and RA mixed air ducting in mechanical
rooms.
6. Insulation as manufactured by Owens-Corning,Knauf,Certain-teed,or SPI.
7. Duct insulation tape as manufactured by Compac type 110-7 or equivalent grade
approved equal.
8. All insulation pipe and duct sealants, adhesives, coatings as manufactured by
Childers,3M,or MEI and UL approved.
2.31 SHEET METAL WORK
A. Ductwork: Fabricated from galvanized zinc-coated sheet steel in accordance with
NFPA and SMACNA manuals. Gauges as listed in SMACNA manuals; minimum
gauge shall be 24.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-50
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
1. Insulate all piping including: heating water supply and return, condensate drains,
refrigerant suction, cold water make-up, and all fittings and valves. Insulation
thickness as indicated below:
SERVICE PIPE SIZE THICKNESS
Heating water runouts to 12 ft. up to 1" ''/z"
Heating water All 1 ''2"
Cold water All 1/2"
Condensate Drain All %"
Refrigerant Suction All 1"
2. Piping insulation except condensate drain and Refrigerant Suction shall be heavy
density rigid fiberglass with an "R" value of 4.5 per 1" thickness at 75°F mean
temperature and flame spread rating of 25, smoke developed 50. Owens Corning,
Knauf or Certainteed. A/C Condensate and refrigerant suction shall be flexible
unicellular.
3. Fittings and valves shall be insulated with equal thickness flexible fiberglass of
pre-formed rigid fiberglass.
4. Insulation shall be covered with a Kraft reinforced ASJ jacket having longitudinal
stapled seams. Self-sealing butt strips shall be installed on circumferential joints
and shall be stapled.UL 25/35 rating.
5. Fittings and valves shall be covered with pre-formed fitting covers of high-impact,
UV-resistant poly-vinyl chloride vapor retarding jackets. Covers shall be installed
with staples. Equal by Zeston.
6. Exterior piping and fittings shall be finished in a 0.016" aluminum jacket
conforming to ASTM B209,3003 Alloy,H-14 temper.
B. Ductwork:
1. Insulate all ductwork as described with materials and thickness as specified.
SERVICE THICKNESS
Supply air ducting 1%"
Return air ducting 1%z"
Exhaust air ducting 1%z"
Outside air ducting 2"
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-49
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA 100%
I. Mount pushbuttons, selector switches and signal devices in the cover of the starter
enclosure it controls unless otherwise noted.
J. Pushbuttons mounted in the cover of a starter enclosure shall be standard duty. Provide
HOA switch where motors are automatically controlled.
K. Starters shall have the nameplate furnished for each button, light or selector switch
position. Nameplate shall be as herein specified or shown on the drawings.
L. Furnish pushbutton stations with "START" buttons black and "STOP" buttons red,
unless otherwise specified. Engrave the words "START"— "STOP" on the faceplate of
the pushbutton. All motors remotely controlled by interlocks,relays, switches and other
automatic control devices shall have motor controllers furnished with selector switches.
M. Furnish pilot light lamps for motor starters for operation on holding coil or line voltage,
unless otherwise specified.
N. Design starters and auxiliary equipment for the voltage supply at the building. Where
voltage supply at the building as specified or indicated on the Drawings is 208 volts
A.C. 220-volt coils will not be acceptable. Consult with the electrical trade for voltage
supply. In lieu of the above, when codes or local regulations require it a 120/208 volt
control transformer will be acceptable.
O. Motor controllers and starters shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts
Electrical Code, the American Insurance Association and the Underwriters
Laboratories.
P. Furnish motor controllers and starters to the electrical trade who will mount and power
wire the motor controllers and starters.
Q. Install controllers and starters on equipment they control,unless remotely controlled.
R. Submit complete wiring diagrams and sequence of operation descriptions for the
Architect's approval. Where equipment purchased and approved is the same as shown
on the drawings,so state in writing.
S. Approved Manufacturers: Allen Bradley Company,Cutler Hammer Co.,Inc., Square D.
Company and General Electric Company.
2.30 INSULATION
A. Piping
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-48
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
Nominal H.P. Efficiency
1 85.5
1'/z 86.5
2 86.5
3 89.5
5 89.5
7'/2 91.0
10 91.7
2.29 MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTROLLERS
A. The HVAC Contractor shall furnish a motor controller for all equipment shown on the
drawings and schedules unless otherwise indicated.Enclosures shall be NEMA Type 1,
general-purpose type unless otherwise indicated. Controllers shall be minimum NEMA
size 1 for all motor controls and HP ratings. Supply the Electrical trades with necessary
information and wiring diagrams required for wiring the starters.
B. Furnish polyphase motors with magnetic non-reversing across-the-line starters with
overload protection in each phase.
C. Unless otherwise noted on Drawings, furnish fractional HP single-phase motors with
manual toggle switch type motor starters with overload protection.
D. All starter and auxiliary control devices shall be the products of one manufacturer
unless an integral part of a complete assembly and except as otherwise specified.
E. Furnish magnetic starters with one N.O. electrical interlock for the holding coil circuit,
under voltage protection and provisions for adding a minimum of two additional
auxiliary contracts with same enclosure.
F. Unless otherwise specified, furnish all starters with thermal type overload relays having
inverse time delay characteristics and interchangeable heater elements in each phase.
The overload relays shall be of the manual reset type with button in cover.
G. Provide one overload relay for starters controlling 120V single phase motors. Provide
three overload relays for all starters controlling three phase motors.
H. Provide manual starters with means of externally locking the operating mechanism in
the"OFF"position.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-47
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
7. password protection
8. auto log-off
e. The operators panel shall have an internal modem. All system status and
operating parameters shall be accessible via modem communication from a
remote location. The operators panel shall have the ability to automatically
dial out alarm status information to a remote modem device.
f. The central controller shall have the capability of directly controlling the
operation a packaged rooftop unit with a factory installed microprocessor
control board. The central controller and the rooftop control board shall be
capable of sharing data and control modes over a single pair of wires via a
communications board mounted in the unit. The central controller shall
automatically recognize and communicate with the rooftop unit on the
communications link.
6. Failure modes of operation
a. The central controller shall accommodate the following failure conditions:
I. Tests
1. Velocity sensor component,pressure transducer, must pass a voltage stability test,
executed over a period of time of four days to assure accuracy and repeatability of
voltage output to 1%of operational range.
2. Manufacturer shall download all setpoints at factory for unit control.
3. Manufacturer shall 100% functionally test unit controller at factory when
fabrication of equipment is complete. The test shall assure successful operation of
damper stroke, sensor inputs and communications.
2.28 ENERGY EFFICIENT MOTORS
A. All electric motors 1 BP and larger shall be of the energy-saving type.
B. Motors shall be 'Premium Efficiency Energy Saver" by G.E., or approved equal by
Toshiba,Baldor or Gould.
C. Energy efficient motors shall be required on all equipment including air handling units,
fans,pumps,and wherever an electric motor is an integral part of equipment.
D. Motors shall have horsepower and nominal efficiency as listed at 1,800 RPM.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-46
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
2. Active heating temperature setpoint.
3. Current terminal unit damper position.
4. Current zone temperature.
5. Terminal unit remote heat status
6. Occupied/Unoccupied mode
p. Central controller shall be capable of interface via serial communications
link with higher end building automation system.
5. Remote Operators Panel - The central controller shall have a digital operators
panel to provide monitoring and control of terminal unit controllers from one
location. Multiple central controllers can be linked to one operators panel.
a. The operators panel shall have an LCD display screen to display system
information, and an integral keypad for system control.
b. The panel shall allow the operator to enter the occupied and unoccupied
heating and cooling setpoints for each terminal unit controller connected to
the system. Setpoints shall be stored in non-volatile memory and
maintained during a power outage without the use of batteries.
c. The operators panel shall have time-of-day scheduling capability.
Scheduling shall be two on/off periods per day for each of the seven week
days, plus exception and holiday schedules. Schedules shall be stored in
non-volatile memory and maintained during a power outage without the use
of batteries. The terminal unit controllers shall be scheduled by group.
d. The operators panel shall have:
1. automatic implementation of daylight saving time and leap year
2. 24 holiday dates
3. timed override capability for groups of terminal unit controllers
4. optimal start
5. the ability to display temperature and system failure alarms
6. an alarm log of the last 32 alarm events
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-45
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,NIA
h. All central controller setpoints and operating parameters shall be stored in
non-volatile electronic memory within the central controller or transmitted
to each terminal unit controller for storage in non-volatile electronic
memory. Battery back-up is not acceptable.
i. The central controller shall be capable of accepting time clock input to
determine occupied or unoccupied setpoint mode of operation.
j. Central controller shall be configurable as either an air conditioning unit
controller or a heat pump controller.
k. The central controller shall not require electronic display and.keyboard
terminal for system start-up and normal operation.
1. The central controller shall be capable of resetting the terminal unit
minimum position setpoint for purposes of increasing ventilation to the
space whenever the HVAC unit has no heating or cooling stages energized.
m. The central controller shall be capable of assigning terminal unit controllers
into groups. Grouping shall allow for acquiring group status information
and executing override commands to all unit controllers within a group at
one time.
n. The central controller shall be capable of monitoring and editing the
following setpoints which reside in the terminal unit controller:
1. Occupied cooling setpoint(45-95 F).
2. Occupied heating setpoint(45-95 F).
3. Unoccupied cooling setpoint(45-95 F).
4. Unoccupied heating setpoint(45-95 F).
5. Minimum position setpoint(0-100%).
6. Maximum position setpoint(0-100%).
7. Minimum heating position setpoint(0-100%)
o. The central controller shall be capable of reporting the following terminal
unit controller status information: .0"N
1. Active cooling temperature setpoint.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-44
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
b. 1-3 stages electric
c. proportional hot water
d. fast pulse width modulation—electric
e. slow pulse width modulation—electric
4. Central Controller
a. The central controller shall exchange information with each terminal unit
controller. The information shall be electronically encoded and serially
transmitted on single twisted pair communication link.
b. The central controller shall send setpoints and override instructions to the
terminal unit controller. The terminal unit controller shall send operating
status and configuration information to the central controller.
c. The central controller shall be capable of communicating and operating
with any configuration of manufacturer's DDC VAV terminal unit product,
including fan powered reheat and pressure independently controlled units.
d. The central controller shall communicate with up to 16 terminal unit
controllers.
e. The central controller shall scan the terminal unit controllers to determine
deviations from temperature setpoint, time of deviation, time from last
changeover and number of terminal unit controllers requiring heating or
cooling. Based upon this information, the system heat/cool mode and stage
of capacity shall be determined.
f. The central controller shall monitor the system supply air temperature to
ensure that high and low temperature limits are maintained. The
temperature limits shall be editable values.
g. The central controller shall modulate the position of the bypass damper
based on a supply air duct [velocity] [pressure] input, to maintain a
minimum air flow rate through the air conditioning unit. Bypass damper
position and setpoints shall be available for monitoring and editing at the
central controller. If bypass damper information is not available at central
controller, additional equipment must be provided which will allow
monitoring and editing bypass damper parameters at central controller.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-43
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA 100%1
b. All VAV terminal unit controller setpoints and operating parameters shall
be stored in non-volatile electronic memory. Battery back-up is not
acceptable.
c. All VAV terminal unit controllers will come with factory-programmed
setpoints and operating parameters, or have default settings capable of
providing typical operating control on power-up.
d. The VAV terminal unit controller shall be field or factory configurable to
function as an auto-changeover device, or as an auto-changeover device
with remote heat control capability.
1. The auto-changeover terminal unit controller shall control damper
position, and therefore primary airflow, in response to the difference
between zone temperature and the appropriate set point. The terminal
unit controller shall be capable of operating as a cool supply air
controller or to "changeover" and operate as a warm supply air
controller.
2. The terminal auto-changeover unit controller configured for remote
heat control shall control damper position, and therefore primary
airflow, in response to the difference between zone temperature and
the appropriate set point. The terminal unit controller shall be capable
of operating as a cool supply air controller or to "changeover" and
operate as a warm supply air controller. Additionally, the terminal unit
controller shall be capable of controlling local heat, remote from the
air conditioning unit heat, in response to a difference between zone
temperature and the appropriate setpoint.
3. The terminal unit controller configured to control remote heat shall be
capable of allowing simultaneous remote heat and HVAC unit heat, or
disabling remote heat when HVAC unit heat is being provided.
4. The terminal unit controller shall be equipped with 24 VAC triac
output(s) to energize remote heat. The triacs shall be configurable to
function as normally open or normally closed outputs. If only a contact
closure is available to enable remote heat, additional relay power
wiring must be provided.
5. The terminal unit controller shall be configurable to control various
types of remote heat.These types of remote heat are to include:
a. 1-3 stages of hot water ,
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-42
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
G. Wiring
1. Factory mount and wire VAV terminal unit controls. Mount electrical components
in terminal unit control box with removable cover.
2. Provide industry standard 1/4" male spade connectors on terminal unit controller
for field wiring of thermostat,communications and power source.
3. All wiring shall comply with local and national electric codes and the
manufacturer's published installation manual.
4. Provide terminal strips in central controller for field wiring of air conditioning unit
input connections, duct temperature sensor, duct pressure sensor, communications,
time clock,bypass damper motor and power wiring.
H. Controls
1. Electric damper actuator: 24 VAC with end switches to eliminate actuator motor
stall conditions.
2. Zone thermostat
a. Zone thermostat shall be a sensor with thumbwheel setpoint adjustment,
night setback override and cancel buttons, and a communications jack.
1. The zone sensor shall have the capability of manually overriding the
unit controller to the continuous unoccupied mode.
2. The zone sensor shall have the capability of manually overriding the
unit controller to the maximum flow position.
b. Zone thermostat shall be simple, and easy to use. If programming or editing
of parameters at zone thermostat is required, customer training must be
provided.
3. Variable air volume(VAV)terminal unit controller
a. The VAV terminal unit controller shall be a microprocessor based, direct
digital controller and shall contain the control logic required to modulate
the flow of primary air through the terminal unit in response to the
difference between zone temperature and the appropriate setpoint. The
control algorithm shall be proportional-integral.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-41
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
O. Conventional Thermostat Interface (CTI) — This field-installed circuit board shall
provide interface with electro-mechanical thermostats or automation systems.
2.27 CHANGEOVER BYPASS VAV SYSTEM CONTROL
A. The changeover/bypass VAV system shall provide temperature control of multiple
comfort zones through the use of a constant volume single-zone HVAC unit. Variable
air volume control shall be provided for each zone to maintain zone temperature within
the heating/cooling setpoints. The system shall monitor the temperature and setpoints of
the zones and automatically change the heat/cool mode of the HVAC unit to satisfy
zone requirements. The system shall maintain airflow through HVAC unit by bypassing
air from the supply to the return duct. Bypass air is modulated based upon system
monitoring of supply duct pressure.
B. The entire changeover/bypass system, including VAV terminal units, direct digital
controls and Building Automation System shall be furnished by a single manufacturer
who shall be responsible for the entire system. Acceptable manufacturers may either be
the variable air volume terminal unit or temperature control manufacturer, but must
bear sole responsibility for the system. System to be Varitrac by Trane or equal.
C. Zone controls are ceiling mounted variable air volume supply air control terminals for
connection to low pressure duct. VAV terminal units shall be networked to a central
controller, which,based on the multiple zones comfort requirements,provides a staged
"heat" or "cool' decision to be used by the building air conditioning unit.A variable air
volume bypass air control terminal shall modulate to maintain a minimum airflow
across the air conditioning unit.
D. The systems controls shall be a dedicated direct digital microprocessor based control
system with multi-level distributed microprocessing. System controls shall be designed
for use exclusive to zone.temperature and changeover/bypass control. General purpose
or generic controls are not acceptable.
E. Casings: Units shall be completely factory-assembled,manufactured of rolled and seam
welded 18 gauge galvanized steel. Discharge end shall be crimped to fit standard round
ductwork. Casings shall be available in the following inlet and outlet diameter sizes: 6",
8", 10", 12", 14", 16".
F. Volume Damper
1. Damper blade shall be constructed of 22 gauge galvanized steel.
2. Damper blade shall have aerodynamically designed edges to provide seal tight
operation at full closure without gasketing and vibration free operation at open
positions.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-40
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
requires blower operation to initiate gas flow. On an initial call for heat,the combustion
blower shall purge the heat exchanger 45 seconds before ignition. After three
unsuccessful ignition attempts, the entire heating system shall be locked out until
manually reset at the thermostat. Units shall be suitable for use with natural gas or
propane(field installed kit) and also comply with California requirements for low NOx
emissions.
I. The outdoor fans shall be direct-drive, statically and dynamically balanced, draw
through in the vertical discharge position. The fan motor(s) shall be permanently
lubricated and have built-in thermal overload protection.
J. Units shall have belt-driven, FC centrifugal indoor fan with adjustable motor sheaves.
Units over 7-1/2 tons shall have an adjustable idler-arm assembly for quick-adjustment
to fan belts and motor sheaves.All motors shall be thermally protected.
K. Unit shall be completely factory wired with necessary controls and contactor pressure
lugs or terminal block for power wiring. Units shall provide an external location for
mounting fused disconnect device.Microprocessor controls shall be provided for all 24-
volt control functions. The resident control algorithms shall make all heating, cooling
and/or ventilating decisions in response to electronic signals from sensors measuring
indoor and outdoor temperatures. The control algorithm maintains accurate temperature
control, minimizes drift from set point and provides better building comfort. A
centralized Microprocessor shall provide anti-short cycle timing and time delay
between compressors to provide a higher level of machine protection.
L. The roof curb shall be designed to mate with the downflow unit and provide support
and a watertight installation when installed properly.The roof curb design shall allow
field-fabricated rectangular supply/return ductwork to be connected directly to
the curb. Curb design shall comply with NRCA requirements. Curb shall ship
knocked down for field assembly and include wood nailer strips. The curb shall
meet the Commonwealth of Massachusetts Seismic requirements with a ground
acceleration of 0.25G. Curb shall have restrained spring isolators for vibration
isolation.
M. The economizer shall be either field or factory installed. The assembly includes fully
modulating 0-100 percent motor and dampers, barometric relief, minimum position
setting, preset linkage, wiring harness with plug and fixed dry bulb control. Solid-state
enthalpy and differential enthalpy control shall be a factory-supplied, field-installed
accessory.The factory-installed economizer arrives in the shipping position and shall be
moved to the operating position by the installing contractor.
N. The powered exhaust fan shall assist the barometric relief damper on the economizer in
relieving building pressurization.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-39
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1. Unit casing shall be constructed of zinc coated, heavy gauge, galvanized steel.
Exterior surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphatized and finished with a weather-
resistant baked enamel finish. Unit's surface shall be tested 500 hours in a salt
spray test in compliance with ASTM B 117. Cabinet construction shall allow for all
maintenance on one side of the unit. Service panels shall have lifting handles and
be removed and reinstalled by removing only a single fastener on the 3-7-1/2 ton
units and not more than three screws on the 8-1/2-25 ton units while providing a
water and air tight seal.All exposed vertical panels and top covers in the indoor air
section shall be insulated with fire-resistant, permanent, odorless glass fiber
material. The base of the downflow unit is insulated with a foil faced, closed-cell
material. The downflow unit's base pan shall have no penetrations within the
perimeter of the curb other than the raised 1-1/8" high supply/return openings to
provide an added water integrity precaution, if the condensate drain backs up. The
base of the unit shall have provisions for forklift and crane lifting.
2. The top cover shall be one piece or where seams exist, it shall be double hemmed
and gasket sealed to prevent water leakage.
C. Two inch,throwaway filters shall be provided.
D. Compressors shall be direct-drive hermetic, reciprocating or scroll type with a
centrifugal oil pump providing positive lubrication to moving parts. Motor shall be
suction gas-cooled and shall have a voltage utilization range of plus or minus 10 percent
of unit nameplate voltage. Crankcase heater, internal temperature and current-sensitive
motor overloads shall be included for maximum protection. Shall have internal spring
isolation and sound muffling to minimize vibration transmission and noise. Low-
pressure switches shall be standard.
E. Compressors shall be fitted with a field applied acoustic blanket system for sound
attenuation. Refer to Specification Section 2.35 SOUND ATTENUATING
INSULATION.
F. Each refrigerant circuit shall have independent fixed orifice expansion devices, service
pressure ports and refrigerant line filter dryers factory installed as standard. An area
shall be provided for replacement suction line dryers.
G. Evaporator and condenser coils shall be internally finned 3/8" copper tubes
mechanically bonded to configured aluminum plate fm shall be standard. Coils shall be
leak tested at the factory to ensure pressure integrity. The evaporator coil and condenser
coil shall be leak tested to 200 psig and pressure tested to 450 psig.
H. The gas heating section shall have a drum and tube heat exchanger design using
corrosion resistant steel components. A forced combustion blower shall supply ,,.%,
premixed fuel to a single burner ignited by a pilotless hot surface ignition system. In
order to provide reliable operation, a negative pressure gas valve shall be used that
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-38
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
b. The boiler shall be direct vent using Schedule 40 PVC,ABS or CPVC.
4. Boiler Trim
a. All electrical components to be high quality manufacture and bear UL label.
b. Water boiler controls furnished:
1. High limit temperature control (190 degrees F maximum allowable
boiler water temperature).
2. Combination pressure-temperature gauge. Gauge dial clearly marked
and easy to read.
3. ASME certified pressure relief valve, set to relieve at 30 PSIG.
4. Flue gas, outlet water temperature, and return water temperature
sensors.
5. Low water protection.
6. Built-in freeze protection.
7. 0011 Taco circulator.
5. Provide wall mounting kit.
2.26 GAS ROOF TOP UNITS
A. General
1. Units shall be as manufactured by Trane,Carrier or American Standard.Units shall
high efficiency type.
2. Units shall be dedicated downflow airflow. Operating range shall be between 115
F and 0 F cooling as standard from the factory for all units. Cooling performance
shall be rated in accordance with DOE and/or ARI testing procedures. All units
shall be factory assembled, internally wired, and fully charged with R-22 and 100
percent run-tested before leaving the factory. Wiring internal to the unit shall be
colored and numbered for simplified identification. Units shall be UL listed and
labeled, classified in accordance to ANSIZ21.47 for gas fired central furnaces and
OW UL 1995/CAN/CSA No.236-M90 for central cooling air conditioners.
B. Casing
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-37
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
1. Boiler shall be equal to Weil-McLain Ultra 230. Other manufacturers or other
Weil-McLain boiler must comply with the full intent of these specifications.
2. Boiler Construction
a. Boiler heat exchanger: Cast aluminum mono block heat exchanger.
b. Boiler main components:
1. The combustion chamber will be sealed and located at the top of the
mono block casting which will be of counterflow design, to assure that
sediment and any lime that might form will fall to the bottom, away
from the crown sheet area.
2. Boiler shall be supplied with a gas valve designed with negative
pressure regulation (fan suction "pulls" gas through valve rather than
gas pressure "pushing" gas through valve). This enables the boiler to
operate in a safe condition at a derated output, even if the inlet gas
pressure should drop to as low as 4 inches W.C. The inlet (natural)
(propane) gas pressure to the boiler gas valve should be a minimum of
4"W.C. and a maximum of 13"W.C. If inlet gas pressure exceeds 13" '
W.C., a 100% lock-up type gas pressure regulator of adequate size
must be installed in gas supply piping and adjusted to prevent pressure
in excess of 13"W.C.
3. The burner shall be premix combustion type, made with stainless steel
and a woven metal fiber outer covering providing a wide range of
modulating firing rates.
4. The boiler shall be equipped with a variable speed blower system,
capable of modulating the boiler firing rate.
5. The boiler shall be equipped with a device capable of controlling the
air/fuel ratio through a 5 to 1 turndown ratio.
6. The control system shall have an electronic display for boiler set-up,
boiler status, and boiler diagnostics.
3. Venting and Combustion Air
a. Boiler must be capable of using outside air piped directly to boiler for
combustion. Inlet and termination of these pipes must be connected to
either, through the roof or sidewall terminations as recommended by the
manufacture.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-36
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
shall be UL listed and shall be furnished with a safety switch and check valve.The unit
shall be Little Giant Model VCM-15UL
2.25 HIGH EFFICIENCY GAS BOILER
A. General Requirements
1. Furnish and install one packaged, modulating, sealed combustion, power-vented,
high efficiency gas-fired boiler with cast aluminum heat exchangers that use
outside air for combustion.
2. Install packaged boiler unit according to manufacturer's installation instructions.
All work to be done in a neat and workmanlike manner.
3. Boiler shall be capable of burning natural or propane gas.
4. Boiler shall have I=B=R Hydronics Institute gross output at 100% fire rate 207
MBH per boiler.
5. Boiler shall be 92.8% minimum DOE efficient as required by National Energy
Conservation Act or ASHRAE 90.1.
6. Boiler shall be capable of full modulation firing with a turn down of up to 5 to 1
7. Boiler shall be manufactured by ISO 9001 registered company to conform to
Section IV of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
8. Individual cast aluminum mono block to be fire tested and hydrostatically pressure
tested at factory in accordance with ASME requirements.
9. Maximum allowable working pressure 30 PSIG water as listed on the rating label.
10. Regulatory Requirements
a. Boiler shall meet or exceed the SCAQD (South Coast Air Quality District
of California)Low Nox emission requirement of 40NG/J.
b. Boiler and controls to comply with applicable regulations.
c. Boiler shall meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency and Department of
Energy guidelines for"Energy Star" energy efficiency.
B. Product
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-35
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
specified mills per year penetration; ferrous, 0.5; brass, 0.2; copper, 0.15. Inhibitor
shall be stable at equipment skin surface temperatures and bulk water temperatures
of, respectively, not less than 250 degrees F and 125 degrees Fahrenheit. Heat
exchanger fouling and capacity reduction shall not exceed that allowed by fouling
factor 0.0005.
7. All chemicals shall be environmentally safe and approved for use.
8. By Barclay Chemical Company,Betz Entec,Culligan or ChemTreat.
2.23 INLINE MOUNTED CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A. Inline mounted pumps shall be Bell and Gossett Series 80 or equal.
B. Furnish and install pumps with capacities as shown on the Drawings. Pumps shall be
inline type, close coupled single stage design, for installation in vertical or horizontal
position and capable of being serviced with disturbing piping connections.
C. Pump volute shall be Class 30 cast iron. The impeller shall be cast bronze enclosed
type,dynamically balanced,keyed to the shaft and secured by a locking capscrew.
D. The pump shall be non-overloading at any point on the pump curve.
E. The liquid cavity shall be sealed off at the motor shaft by an internally flushed
mechanical seal with ceramic seat and carbon seal ring, suitable for continuous
operation at 225°F. A bronze shaft sleeve shall completely cover the wetted area under
the seal.
F. Pumps shall be rated for a minimum of 175 psi working pressure. The pump case shall,
have gauge tappings at the suction and discharge nozzles and will include vent and
drain ports.
G. Motor shall meet NEMA specifications and shall be of the size and voltage called for on
the Drawings. Motor shall be of the premium efficiency type. It shall have heavy duty,
grease lubricated ball bearings, completely adequate for the maximum load for which
the pump is designed.
H. Each pump shall be factory tested per Hydraulic Institute standards. It shall then be
thoroughly cleaned and painted with high grade machinery enamel prior to shipment.
2.24 A/C CONDENSATE PUMP
A. The condensate removal unit shall consist of a vertical type pump unit with a high `
impact polystyrene sump. The unit shall have an ABS motor and tank cover. The unit
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-34
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1. Brass body with threaded ends.
2. Provide replaceable coil assembly.
3. Provide manually operable stem to permit operation in the event of coil failure.
D. Expansion Valve:
1. Angle type or straight through design suitable for Refrigerant R-22.
2. Brass body with internal or external equalizer and adjustable superheat setting.
Provide complete with capillary tube and remote sensing bulb.
2.22 WATER TREATMENT
A. A water treatment company under contract to Mechanical Contractor shall provide the
necessary chemicals, supervision, chemical treatment and tests for flushing and refilling
of hydronic piping systems and new boilers. Hydronic systems as specified include the
complete hot water and chilled water systems.
B. Closed Systems
1. A written report shall be submitted to the Engineer indicating initial and final
conditions.
2. All side loops and low points shall be drained and flushed.
3. Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate with water treatment company and pump
manufacturer so as to provide proper chemicals and level of treatment which will
not damage pumps,pump seals,boilers,piping or equipment.
4. Inhibitor: Provide sodium silicate, sodium nitrite/borate, or other approved
proprietary compound suitable for make-up quality and make-up rate and which
will cause or enhance bacteria/corrosion problems or mechanical seal failure due to
excessive total dissolved solids. Shot feed manually. Maintain inhibitor residual as
determined by water treatment laboratory, taking into consideration residual and
temperature effect on pump mechanical seals.
5. pH Control: Inhibitor formulation shall include adequate buffer to maintain pH
range of 8.0 to 10.0.
6. Performance: Protect various wetted, coupled, materials of construction including
ferrous, and red and yellow metals. Maintain system essentially free of scale,
corrosion and fouling. Corrosion rate of following metals shall not exceed
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-33
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,NU
(standard tire valve) to facilitate the on-site charging of the tanks to meet system
requirements. The tank must be constructed in accordance with Section VIII of the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and be stamped for 125-psi working pressure.
Tank shall be Armstrong,Amtrol or ITT Bell&Gossett. Tank shall be installed in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's installation and charging procedures.
B. Microbubble Air Separator: Spirotherm, Bell & Gossett, Taco or approved equal. All
fittings shall be fabricated of steel, rated for 150psig design pressure and shall be
selected for less than a 1' pressure drop and velocities not exceeding 4 fps. The units
shall include an internal copper coalescing medium to facilitate air removal. Provide an
integral high capacity float actuated air vent at the top fitting of the tank. The unit shall
have a bottom blow down connection.
C. Air Separator: 125 psig rated ASME construction, size as noted on drawings. The air
separators shall be of steel body with flanged connections. The units shall be sized
Based on manufacturers published flow information. The units shall be Bell & Gossett
Rolairtrol or approved equal.
D. Pressure-Reducing Valve: Setting as noted on drawings,all bronze.
E. Triple-Duty Valves: Straight pattern valve to perform the functions of non-slam check,
throttling valve, shut-off valve, calibrated balancing valve and system flow meter. The
valve shall be heavy-duty cast iron construction with standard flanged connections and
rated for a maximum working pressure of 175 psig. The valve shall be fitted with a
bronze seat replaceable bronze disc, stainless steel stem and chatter preventing springs.
The valve design shall permit repacking under system full pressure. Each valve shall be
equipped with brass readout valves with integral checks. Valves shall be Armstrong
Pump or Bell&Gossett Triple duty valve or approved equal
2.21 REFRIGERANT SPECIALTIES
A. Liquid Indicators:
1. Double port type with brass body,flared or solder ends.
2. Employ removable seal caps on each port for inspection of refrigerant conditions.
B. Filter-Dryers:
1. Straight type,with brass shell and using combined straining and drying materials.
2. Employ replaceable desiccant material.
C. Solenoid Valves:
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-32
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
E. Fin-tube radiation shall be Vulcan, Sterling or Riffling..
2.19 CONVECTORS
A. Furnish and install Vulcan Convector where shown on plans or equal by Sterling or
Modine.
B. Convector heating element shall be non-ferrous consisting of 5/8" diameter copper
tubing and .010 thick aluminum plate fins with full-flanged collars. The tubes shall be
expanded mechanically into fin collars to form a permanent thermal bond. Fins shall be
protected front and back by formed shield plates running entire length of element.
Headers shall be cast brass provided with bottom threaded piping connections. Heating
elements shall be tested by manufacturer at 100-psi air pressure under water. Elements
shall be supported from brackets on sides of cabinet, which shall allow for proper
pitching of the element.
C. Cabinets shall be formed from cold rolled steel and shall be suitably braced and
reinforced where necessary to provide stiffness, and accurately fitted to prevent air
leakage. Cabinet front shall be flanged top and bottom for added rigidity. Top edge of
cabinet fronts shall be smoothly formed with 3/8" inside radius. Air outlet louvers shall
be the Venetian type.Fourteen gauge cold rolled steel heating element support brackets
shall be spot welded to inside ends of all Convector cabinets. All cabinets' 48" long or
32" high and greater shall have a stiffening channel spot-welded to inside front. After
fabrication, all cabinets shall be thoroughly cleaned, and provided with a high quality
prime coat. The cabinets shall be finished in a baked on enamel finish coat. The finish
coat colors shall be submitted for approval. Accessory items shall be included as noted
per job requirements. Cabinets for the convectors in the auditorium shall have custom
covers as detailed on the project drawings. The auditorium custom covers shall be
constructed of 14 gauge cold rolled steel and shall be primed and fmished with a baked
on enamel top coat.
D. Convectors shall be provided with tamperproof access doors. Access doors shall be 4"
X 4" and shall be located in the non-louvered area.Access doors shall be hinged on side
with straight shaft type hinge and shall close with positive-action snap hinge.
E. Convectors shall be provided with 4" end pockets. End pocket shall consist of the
cabinet extended in length as noted with#20 gauge CRS baffle spot welded to back of
cabinet extending from heating element to air outlet louvers. One end pocket only on
64" long units.
2.20 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
A. Expansion Tank: Furnish and install, of size and capacity as shown on plans, a
pre-charged vertical or horizontal as indicated, steel expansion tank with integral heavy
duty Butyl rubber diaphragm. The tank shall have a charging valve connection
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-31
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA ,,.
2.16 HYDRONIC UNIT HEATERS
A. As manufactured by Vulcan, Sterling„Modine or Dunham-Bush.
B. Heating capacities, size and model as noted on the drawings.
C. Copper-aluminum fm element.
D. Baked enamel finish on furniture steel enclosures.
E. Direct-drive, 120 VAC/60/1,PSC motor.
2.17 CABINET UNIT HEATERS
A. As manufactured by Vulcan, Sterling,Modine or Trane.
B. Heating capacities, size and model as noted on the drawings. Submit color charts for
approval by the Architect.
C. Copper-aluminum fin element.
D. Baked enamel finish on 16 gauge fizrniture steel enclosures.
E. Direct-drive, 120 VAC/60/1, PSC motor, complete with multi-speed switch, on-off
switch with motor thermal overload protection.
F. Access panels with tamperproof locks and permanent aluminum filter.
2.18 FIN-TUBE RADIATION
A. Radiation enclosures shall be wall to wall unless otherwise noted or shown and include
wall sleeves, end caps, splice plates, slide cradle radiation supports and back plates as
specified on drawings.Radiation shall be IBR rated.
B. Elements, covers and capacities shall be indicated on drawings; lengths indicated shall
be full active length of element.
C. Covers shall butt end to end of next section without overlap. Splice piece shall be
internal. Only wall sleeve shall overlap. Cover shall be minimum 14 gauge or as
indicated on the Contract Drawings. Covers for curved sections of wall shall be custom
curved.Covers shall be finnished with powder coating finish; color by Architect.
D. Locking tamper-proof access doors for all valves,vents,etc.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-30
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
kit that shall meet ASTM flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke
development rating of 50 or less.
3. Acceptable manufacturers are Armstrong Pumps Inc.,Tour Anderson,Amtrol, and
MNG.Flow
F. Flow Measuring Device Identification:
1. Metal tag attached by chain to the device.
2. Include meter or equipment number, manufacturer's name, meter model, flow rate
factor and design flow rate in gpm.
G. Portable Water Flow Indicating Meters:
1. Minimum 6-inch diameter dial, forged brass body,beryllium-copper bellows, 250
psig working pressure.
2. Bleed and equalizing valves.
3. Vent and drain hose and two 3000-mm (10 feet) lengths of hose with quick
disconnect connections.
4. Factory fabricated carrying case with hose compartment and a bound set of
capacity curves showing flow rate versus pressure differential fir each device used
on the project.
5. Provide one portable meter for each range of differential pressure required for the
installed flow devices.
2.15 VENTS
A. Radiation Vents:B&G Model No.4V.Equal by Sarco or Taco.
B. System Vents: Brass petcock for all coils and system high points. Extend piping to
accessible location and/or nearest drain.
C. Large Capacity Air Vents (Located at Air Separators): Float actuated modulating high
capacity air vent with positive shut off to 150 psig at a maximum temperature of 250
degrees. The design of the vent shall not allow air to be drawn into the system if the
system pressure were to drop below ambient pressures. The vent shall be constructed of
cast iron with type 313 stainless steel,brass, EPDM and silicone rubber. The vent shall
be Bell&Gossett Model 107 or equal.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-29
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA ,ow
D. Check valves up to 2'/z": Class 125 SWP,200 PSI,WOG,screwed ends, 5 degree swing
check,B-62 bronze body and cap,meeting MSS SP80.Model IB-904.
E. Ball valves up to 2": Rated 150 SWP, 600 PSI, WOG, meeting WWV 35C Type H,
Class A, Style 3. Two-piece threaded body, solid or tunnel drilled, large port, chrome
ball. Teflon seats and seals. Blowout proof stem design with threaded adjustable
packing follower. Packing retained under full working pressure with handle or handle
nut removed.Zinc plated handle with plastisol grip. Model 8501.
F. Drain valves: Class 125 SWP, 200 PSI, WOG,bronze, screwed or solder end, threaded
bonnet, adjustable packing nut,hose adapter with cap,malleable iron hand wheel.
G. Boiler drain: Same as Ball valves as specified above.
2.14 WATER FLOW MEASURING DEVICES
A. Minimum overall accuracy plus or minus three percent over a range of 70 to 110
percent of design flow. Select devices for not less than 110 percent of design flow rate.
B. Venturi Type bronze,steel,or cast iron with bronze throat,with valved pressure sensing ,
taps upstream and at the throat.
C. Wafer Type Circuit Sensor: Cast iron wafer-type flow meter equipped with readout
valves to facilitate the connecting of a differential pressure meter. Each readout valve
shall be fitted with an integral check valve designed to minimize system fluid loss
during the monitoring process.
D. Self-Averaging Annular Sensor Type: Brass or stainless steel metering tube, shutoff
valves and quick-coupling pressure connections. Metering tube shall be rotatable so all
sensing ports may be pointed down-stream when unit is not in use.
E. Flow Measuring/Balance Valve
1. Minimal read out accuracy plus or minus 5%. Valve manufacturer shall furnish
with submittal a valve schedule showing service, flow rate, pressure drop and
valve size.
2. Balancing Valves shall be equal percentage globe style valves. 90 degree stoke
valves shall not be acceptable. Valves shall be available in sweat or soldered
configuration in 1/2" to 2" diameter and with grooved or flanged ends in 2 1/2"
through 12" diameter. Valves shall have two pressure read out ports and two drain
ports. Read out and drain ports shall be interchangeable. To allow for future
modifications valves with fixed orifices shall not be considered acceptable. Valve
manufacturer shall furnish on hot or chilled water service a pre-formed insulation
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-28
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
G. Range:
1. Vacuum: 30"Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure.
2. Fluids under pressure: Two times the operating pressure.
H. Fittings:
1. Valves: 1/4"brass lever handle gauge cock.
2. Siphons: Steam service shall have 1/4"NPT brass siphons.
3. Snubbers:Pulsating service shall have piston type snubbers.
I. Gauges and fittings shall be as manufactured by Wika,Weksler or Ashcroft
2.12 STRAINERS
A. Strainers shall be as manufactured by Hayward,Mueller, Sarco or Armstrong. Strainers
used with steel pipe shall be cast iron body. Strainers used with copper pipe or tube
shall be bronze body.
B. Y Strainers:
1. Strainers shall be provided with stainless steel screens. Screens for water service
and 3" and under pipe size shall have 0.045-inch perforations. Screen shall have a
minimum area of 2.5 times the pipe cross sectional area.
2. Strainers 2-1/2" and smaller shall be threaded end connections with a pressure
rating of 125 psi.
2.13 VALVES
A. As manufactured by Hammond or equal by Stockham, or Nibco; model numbers are
Hammond.
B. Gate valves up to 21/2": Class 150 SWP, 300 PSI, WOG, screwed ends, rising stem,
solid wedge,bronze stem,bronze body,malleable iron hand wheel,meeting MSS SP80.
Model IB-646.
C. Globe valves: Class 125 SWP,200 PSI,WOG, screwed ends,B-62 bronze body bonnet
and stem,malleable iron hand wheel,meeting MSS SP80.Model IB-440.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-27
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
5. Stem: Precision ground aluminum, tapered for a close tolerance metal to metal
contact with a matching tapered thermowell. Length shall be 3 %2" or longer to suit
installation.
D. Separable socket thermowells:
1. 3/4"NPT brass thermowell with protective socket for installation in threaded pipe to
hold fixed thermometer stem.
2. Material:Brass for use in copper or steel pipe.
3. Extension: Lagging extension for insulated pipe.
4. Insertion length shall extend to the center of the pipe.
E. Thermometers and thermowells shall be as manufactured by Wika,Weksler or Ashcroft
2.9 UNIONS
A. Steel Pipe: Shall be malleable iron with bronze seats.
B. Copper Pipe: Shall be cast brass.
2.10 GASKETS
A. Gaskets and sheet packing shall be Garlocl, Crane or Johns-Manville Co.'s make,
designed for service,pressure and temperature for their respective use. Use best quality
1/16"thick sheet rubber,cut to bolt circle and notched on bolts.
2.11 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Gauges shall be manufactured to ASME B40.1 Grade 1A.
B. Phosphor-bronze bourdon tube type with bottom connection.
C. Case: Stainless steel with matte finish. 4 11/s" diameter case with a snap in acrylic
window.
D. Connection:Brass 1/4"NPT.
E. Dial: White aluminum with stop pin black markings.
F. Accuracy:Plus or minus 1 percent of range span.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-26
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
4. Copper and brass pipe,Figure CT-99C.
5. Riser clamp,Figure 261.
6. Pipe Alignment Guides Figure 255 or 256
2.7 HANGER RODS
A. Secured to structure with adequate anchors,bolts,unistrut or concrete inserts.
PIPE SIZE THREADED ROD DIAMETER MAXIMUM SPACING
Up to 1'/4" '/4" 8'-0"
1'/z" to 2" 3/8" 8'-0"
2'/2" &3" V2 It 8V-011
B. Maximum spacing is recommended as a guide. The requirements shall be in accordance
with the Manufacturers Standardization Standard (MSS) SP-69. Provide additional
hangers where required to adequately support piping, valves, short lengths of pipe, and
where flexible connections would be subject to strain from weight of piping.
2.8 THERMOMETERS
A. Scale Range: Hot Water Heating: 30 to 300 degrees F.with 5 degree scale divisions.
B. Accuracy: Plus or minus one percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division
to a maximum of 1.5 percent range span.
C. Materials:
1. Case: Textured black finish, V-shaped molded plastic or aluminum case. Spring
mounted heavy glass window.Nine inch scale
2. Adjustable Joint: Joint completely encloses capillary for thermal system
protection. 180 degree adjustment in vertical plane. 360 degree adjustment in the
horizontal plane with locking device.
3. Tube:Mercury filled red reading magnifying lens tube. Spirit fill is available.
4. Scale: Permanently baked on, bold black graduations printed on white coasted
aluminum.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-25
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
D. Refrigerant Piping: Copper type ACR, seamless hard drawn conforming to ASTM
B280
E. Vents, Sleeves and Drains: Black Steel Schedule 40
2.4 PIPE FITTINGS
A. Steel pipe to 2'/2": 150-pound malleable iron, ANSI B16.3. 125-pound cast iron, ANSI
B 16.4,may be used in lieu of malleable iron. Bushing reduction of a single pipe size,or
use of close nipples,is not acceptable.
B. Copper pipe: Cast bronze or brass sweat fittings, 95/5 lead-free solder.
C. Flanges: Weld neck or slip-on, plain face, 150 pound, conforming to ASTM A105,
gasketed with temperature rating suitable for the service. Flange bolting: Carbon steel
machine bolts or studs and nuts,ASTM A307, Grade B.
2.5 JOINTS AND FLANGES
A. Screwed Joints shall be made tight with a Teflon tape or compound applied to the male
threads only.
B. Welded Joints shall mate properly and have continuous leak-tight weld.
C. Flanged Fittings shall be used for connection to all equipment requiring same, flanges
and drilling to match the mating joint, 150-psi rating. Fitted with machine bolts of
proper size and number with locking washer under each hexagon nut.
D. Soldered Fittings shall be neat and wiped clean of excess solder and paste.
E. Brazing alloy for oil piping shall be cadmium free silver solder, American Welding
Society Bag series.
2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. As manufactured by Grinnel,C&P or Crane;numbers are Grinnel.
1. Steel pipe to 2%',Figure 65 or 260.
2. Pipe roll stand,all sizes,Figure 271.
3. Pipe saddle,all sizes,Figure 258.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-24
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND SPECIALTIES
A. Materials specified for the work on all systems shall be new, unless specifically noted
otherwise, and shall be manufactured in conformance with the specified codes or
standards.
B. Where materials are not specified, the Mechanical Contractor shall furnish the best of
the respective kind.
2.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL SUPPORTS
A. Provide all necessary steel and fabricate brackets, hangers and supports stands as
required for all ceiling and floor-mounted equipment such as fans, heaters, ductwork,
piping,air handling units,etc.
B. Hangers:Adequate to support equipment and not cause vibrations.
C. Anchoring: Properly secured to building structure by Heating, Ventilating and Air
Conditioning Contractor,by welding,nuts and bolts, clamps,etc. Single sided"C" type
beam clamps for support rods of overhead piping, ductwork or equipment are not
acceptable.
D. Any improperly secured or fabricated supports shall be removed and replaced if in the
Architect or Engineer's opinion they are inadequate.
2.3 PIPING
A. Hot Water Piping above grade,2'/z"&under:
1. Black Steel schedule 40 ERW or seamless conforming to ASTM A53 Grade B
2. Copper type L, seamless hard drawn conforming to ASTM B88
B. Condensate drains:
1. Copper Type"M"or type L conforming to ASTM B88
2. Copper type DWV conforming to ASTM B306
C. Domestic cold water: Copper type L, seamless hard drawn conforming to ASTM B88
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-23
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
received all legally required inspections and approvals before the system may be
used.
2. Units that are designed to be used with filters shall be equipped with proper filters
before being placed in use. All return air and outside air inlets to equipment shall
have filters that cover the entire opening. Units shall not be used without filters.
Filters shall be changed weekly.
3. All permanent heating and ventilation equipment that is used for heating during
construction shall be thoroughly cleaned and restored to first class condition. The
system shall be equipped with new filters and new belts(if required).
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-22
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. Any equipment or material, which offers extended guarantee/warranty, shall be issued
to Owners at completion of the project.
1.25 SHEET METAL SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit complete drawings of all ductwork indicating sizes, elevations and coordination
with piping and piping of other trades where pertinent. Coordinate and indicate
electrical cable tray location.Drawings shall be 114"=1'-0"minimum.
1.26 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. All engineering time required to modify design or construction documents to
accommodate substituted materials shall be billed to the HVAC contractor at an hourly
rate of$75.00 per hour. When submitting substituted materials the contractor will be
provided with estimates of engineering time associated with the substitutions.
Substantial Completion will not be granted until all bills associated with additional
engineering services,due to substitutions,have been paid.
1.27 TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATION
A. The HVAC Subcontractor shall be responsible for temporary heating and ventilation as
described in Specification Section 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND
CONTROLS.
B. If approved by the Owner, use of the permanent heating system for temporary heat is
allowed after the building is enclosed and the system has been tested and is ready to
operate.
1. All portions of the permanent heating system that are used for heating during
construction shall be thoroughly cleaned and restored to first class condition.
2. Use of the permanent heating system for temporary heat shall not affect any
heating system guarantee. Any guarantee shall begin to run when the Owner
accepts the building.
C. In areas of the building provided with an auxiliary source of heat (i.e. Finned Tube
Radiation), avoid using the new, permanent heating and ventilation equipment for
temporary heat.
D. In areas of the building without an auxiliary source of heat,the new,permanent heating
and ventilation equipment may be used for temporary heating.
1. The permanent heating and ventilation equipment shall be completely installed as
designed(including permanent wiring to a permanent power source)and shall have
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-21
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA -4004,
B. Provide diagrams and instructions necessary for the Electrical Subcontractor to make
connections properly.
C. Electrical work required under this contract shall be done in accordance with Electrical
Specifications and applicable provisions of the National Electrical Code and local
ordinances.
D. Verify all electric characteristics prior to ordering equipment.
1.22 DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS
A. Demolition will be performed by the General Contractor.
B. The HVAC Contractor is responsible for disconnecting services as required to allow the
General Contractor to perform demolition.
C. The Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Subcontractor shall thoroughly examine
the site prior to bid to determine the total extent of demolition and removals required.
D. The site will be abated of all hazardous materials prior to start of any new construction. ..�,
E. Piping concealed in walls and not exposed during construction shall remain, although
piping shall be cutoff where exposed and capped or plugged behind the surface of any
new finished wall,ceiling,or floor.
F. Comply with all regulations of the Federal Clean Air Act for venting, recovering and
recycling of refrigerants.
1.23 WELDING
A. All welding shall be performed by certified welders.
B. Protect all adjoining work with welding operations by erecting protection barriers or use
of welding blankets.
C. Maintain a fire watch during and after all welding operations.
1.24 GUARANTEE WARRANTY
A. The Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Subcontractor shall and hereby does
warrant that all work executed and all equipment furnished under this section shall be
free from defects of workmanship and materials for a period of one(1)year.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-20
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
4. Provide installation instructions, drawings and trained field supervision to insure
proper installation and performance
I. Related Work
1. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with restraint vendor and sized to provide
a minimum edge distance of ten (10) bolt diameters all around the outermost
anchor bolt to allow development of full drill-in wedge anchor ratings. If cast-in
anchors are to be used, the housekeeping pads shall be sized to accommodate the
ACI requirements for bolt coverage and embedment.
2. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel for all equipment, piping,
ductwork,etc.including roof-mounted equipment, as required or specified.
3. Where curbs are required for roof mounted equipment,vibration and seismic curbs
shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer.
4. Contractor shall supply restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping pads,
concrete inserts, double-sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with the
requirements of the vibration vendor's calculations.
J. Seismic Force Levels-The following force levels will be used on this project.
Building "G"Forces for "G"Forces for "G"Forces for "G"Forces for Life
Code All Pipe,Duct Rigidly Mounted Flexibly Safety Equipment
&Conduit Equipment Mounted either Rigidly or
Equipment Flexibly Mounted
Zone 2 Mass. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert.
State
Building. 0.25 0.08 0.40 0.15 0.40 0.15 0.60 0.20
Code
1.21 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Electrical work will be the responsibility of the Electrical Subcontractor, unless
specifically required otherwise by this specification. The HVAC Contractor shall
furnish motor starters. Installation and wiring of motor starters shall be by the Electrical
Contractor.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-19
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
2. Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment, showing vibration
isolators and seismic restraints by referencing numbered descriptive drawings.
3. Submit fabrication details for equipment bases including dimensions, structural
member sizes and support point locations.
4. Provide all details of suspension and support for ceiling hung equipment.
5. Where walls, floors, slabs or supplementary steel work are used for seismic
restraint locations, details of acceptable attachment methods for ducts, conduit and
pipe must be included and approved before the condition is accepted for
installation. Restraint manufacturers' submittals must include spacing, static loads
and seismic loads at all attachment and support points.
6. Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number,size and
locations for each piece of equipment.
7. Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections of equipment to
the structure.
8. Calculations (including the combining of tensile and shear loadings) to support
seismic restraint designs must be stamped by a registered professional engineer
with at least five years of seismic design experience and licensed in the state of the
job location. Testing and calculations must include both shear and tensile loads as
well as one test or analysis at 45°to the weakest mode.
9. Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, static seismic loads and capacity of
materials utilized for connections to equipment and structure. Analysis must detail
anchoring methods, bolt diameter, embedment and/or welded length. All seismic
restraint devices shall be designed to accept, without failure, the forces detailed in
this Section acting through the equipment center of gravity. Overturning moments
may exceed forces at ground level.
H. Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control equipment shall have the
following responsibilities:
1. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations
2. Provide vibration isolation and seismic restraints as scheduled or specified
3. Provide calculations and materials if required for restraint of non-isolated
equipment
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-18
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
C. This specification is considered to be minimum requirements for seismic consideration
and is not intended as a substitute for legislated, more stringent, national, state or local
construction requirements Installation of seismic restraints shall conform in all aspects
to the latest edition of the Massachusetts State Building Code
D. The contractor shall correct any variance or non-compliance with these specification
requirements in an approved manner.
E. The work in this section includes,but is not limited to the following:
1. Vibration isolation for piping,ductwork and equipment
2. Flexible piping connections
3. Equipment isolation bases
4. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment.
5. Seismic restraints for non-isolated equipment
6. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision
7. Certification of seismic attachment of housekeeping pads
F. Definitions
1. Positive Attachment- A positive attachment is defined as a cast-in anchor, a drill-
in wedge anchor, a double-sided beam clamp loaded perpendicular to a beam, or a
welded or bolted connection to structure. Single sided "C" type beam clamps for
support rods of overhead piping, ductwork or equipment are not acceptable on this
project.
2. Transverse Bracing - Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular to the
centerline of the pipe,duct or conduit.
3. Longitudinal Bracing - Restraint(s) applied to limit motion parallel to the
centerline of the pipe,duct or conduit.
G. The manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic restraints shall provide submittals
for products as follows:
1. Catalog cuts or data sheets on vibration isolators and specific restraints detailing
compliance with the specification.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-17
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1.19 INSTALLATION OF THE WORK
A. Examine the site and all the drawings before proceeding with the layout and installation
of this work.
B. Arrange the work essentially as shown, except layout to be made on the job to suit
actual conditions. Confer and cooperate with other trades on the job so all work will be
installed in proper relationship. Precise location of parts to coordinate with other work
is the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor.
C. Arrange for required chases, slots and openings.
D. Indicated equipment connections are based on equipment of a given manufacturer.
Contractor assumes responsibility for proper arrangement of pipes, ducts, etc. to
connect approved equipment in a proper and approved manner. Follow equipment
manufacturer's detailed instructions and recommendations in the installation and
connection of all equipment.In case of conflict between manufacturer's instructions and
the contract documents,notify the Architect/Engineer before proceeding.No equipment
installation or connections shall be made in a manner that voids the manufacturer's
warranty.
E. Install all work in a neat and workmanlike manner using only workmen thoroughly
qualified in the trade or duties they are to perform.Rough work will be rejected.
F. All material shall be new.No old pipe,ductwork or equipment shall be used.
G. It is the intent of these specifications to provide complete systems, which are free from
objectionable generating noise or of excessive vibration. In the opinion of the
Mechanical Engineer, any items found in either of these conditions shall be corrected
and noises or vibration dampened as directed.
1.20 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. All mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork as noted on the Drawings or in the
Specification shall be mounted on vibration isolators to prevent the transmission of
vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the building structure. Vibration
isolators shall be selected in accordance with the weight distribution to produce
reasonably uniform deflections.
B. It is the intent of the seismic portion of this specification to keep all mechanical
building system components in place during a seismic event. All systems must be
installed in strict accordance with seismic codes, component manufacturer's and
building construction standards.Whenever a conflict occurs between the manufacturer's
and construction standards,the most stringent shall apply.
BEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-16
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
10. A filter chart shall be provided. The chart shall list the quantity, size, efficiency
and original supplier and model number of each filter. The filters shall be listed on
a per unit basis.
11. As installed control diagrams by the control manufacturer
12. Description of sequence of operation by the control manufacturer
13. Parts list of major equipment, including recommended items to be stocked as spare
parts
14. As installed, color-coded wiring diagrams of all electrical motor controller
connections and interlock connections.
15. All balance test reports.
16. As-Built drawings for each trade drawn using a computer - aided drafting (CAD)
software package. Drawing files and corresponding hard copies of each drawing
shall be provided.
1.17 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. At the time of final acceptance, the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Subcontractor shall furnish four (4) sets of equipment manuals for all equipment for
delivery to the Owner.
B. The Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Subcontractor shall instruct Owner's
representative in the operation of all heating apparatus and systems to the satisfaction of
Owner's representative and shall provide videotapes of all instructions, maintenance,
and service procedures.
C. A minimum of forty (40) hours instruction shall be provided for Heating, Ventilating
and Air Conditioning systems and forty(40)hours for the control system.
1.18 SPARE PARTS
A. The Contractor shall provide spare parts for mechanical equipment as follows:
1. One(1)set of belts for each belt driven fan.
2. One(1)spare set of filters for each air handling unit.
B. The spare parts required shall be labeled or identified with manufacturers information
as well as the equipment identification number and location.
BEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-15
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA lowk.
1. Sixth: Contractor shall hold a coordination meeting with sheet metal, fire
protection, electrical, plumbing, and HVAC trades and shall resolve conflicts
between trades. Coordination drawings are to assist in identifying trade conflicts.
2. Seventh: Each trade shall revise their drawing to remedy conflicts identified during
coordination meeting.The general contractor shall create and maintain a composite
drawing showing all revisions.
3. Eight: Sheet metal, fire protection, electrical, plumbing, and HVAC trades shall
sign the final composite coordination drawings as indication of their acceptance of
the construction layout shown thereon.
1.16 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. The Contractor will furnish and submit the instruction manuals in accordance with
Section 01700 containing the following additional materials:
1. Brief description of each system and operating features
2. Manufacturer's name and model numbers of all components of the system listed on
the equipment schedule drawing,control and wiring diagrams on controllers.
3. Provide a list of the mechanical contractor and all major subcontractors who have
worked on the HVAC portions of the project.
4. Provide a list of the Manufacturers representative for all equipment listed on the
schedule drawings. The list shall include Company Name, Address, Telephone
Number and Contact Person.
5. Chart of the numbers, location and function of each valve. Additionally the
contractor shall provide a set of record drawings with the service, function and
location of each valve.
6. Step by step operating instruction including preparation for starting, summer
operation,winter operation, shutdown and draining.
7. Maintenance instructions
8. Possible breakdowns and repairs
9. Manufacturer's literature describing each piece of equipment listed on the
equipment schedule,control diagrams and wiring diagrams of controllers.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-14
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
OOW Florence,MA
1.15 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings showing the size and location of mechanical pipes, ducts,
equipment and appurtenances, relative to the work of other trades shall be prepared
before materials are purchased or work is begun.
B. All coordination drawings are to be produced using CAD software compatible with
AutoCAD 2000. Architect will furnish background drawing files that show ceiling grid
layouts,ceiling heights,lights and walls.
C. Coordination Drawings for the following trades shall be submitted: sheet metal, fire
protection,electrical and other HVAC trades.
D. Coordination drawings shall be prepared as follows:
1. First: Sheet metal trade shall draw ductwork layout in detail on drawings provided
by architect. Plans shall show top and bottom of duct heights, location of ducts,
duct sizes including insulation,structural steel and bottom of steel elevations.
2. Second: As part of work of SECTION 13900, fire protection trade shall draw fire
protection piping, sprinkler heads, drain piping, etc. on coordination drawings
prepared by sheet metal trade.Include pipe sizes,centerline elevations of pipes and
locations of pipe.
3. Third: As part of DMSION 16-ELECTRICAL, electrical trade shall draw
electrical distribution conduits,cable trays,wires,panels,and other electrical work,
which must be coordinated with other trades on coordination drawings that have
been prepared by sheet metal,and fire protection trades.
4. Fourth: As part of SECTION 15400,plumbing trade shall draw waste piping,vent
piping, water piping, risers and other plumbing work which must be coordinated
with other trades on coordination drawings which have been prepared by sheet
metal, fire protection, and electrical trades. Include elevations and locations of all
plumbing equipment.
5. Fifth: As part of work of SECTION 15600,HVAC trades shall draw HVAC piping
work which must be coordinated with other trades on coordination drawings that
have been prepared by the sheet metal, fire protection, electrical and plumbing
trades.
6. Each trade shall use a different color code.
E. Coordination Meeting and Drawing Revisions
BEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-13
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA ,,.,,,k
1.12 WASTE MATERIAL
A. The HVAC Subcontractor on a regular basis and at least once each week shall remove
all rubbish created by the HVAC Subcontractor.
B. All material shall be properly disposed of in accordance with all prevailing codes,rules
and regulations.
1.13 PROTECTION
A. This Subcontractor shall at all times fully protect his work and materials from injury or
loss by others. Any injury or loss that may occur shall be made good without additional
expense to the Owner. This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of
all his materials until the Owner accepts the project.
B. This Subcontractor shall also protect building and equipment from damage by
installation of his work,and shall pay for all damages thereto.
1.14 COORDINATION OF TRADES
A. Coordinate the work of different trades so that interference between mechanical,
electrical, architectural, and structural work, including existing services, will be
avoided.
B. Within the limits indicated on the drawings, the maximum practicable space for
operation, repair, removal and testing of mechanical and other equipment will be
provided.
C. Pipes, ducts and similar items shall be kept close as possible to joists, above walls and
columns, to take up a minimum amount of space. Pipes, ducts, equipment and similar
items shall be located so that they will not interfere with the intended use of eyebolts
and other lifting equipment.
D. Furnish and install all offsets, fittings and similar items necessary in order to
accomplish the requirements of coordination.
E. Coordination Drawings are required. Any work installed prior to approval of
coordination drawings shall be at the Contractor's risk.
F. All equipment, such as the pumps, air handling equipment, filters, etc., shall fit the
space shown on the project drawings, and provide accessibility for servicing, repairing
and inspecting apparatus at least equal to that shown. Each item of equipment shall be
installed without damage to the building,building equipment or the item of equipment.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-12
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
E. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general arrangement of systems and work
included in Contract. Information and components shown on riser diagrams and details
but not shown on plans shall apply or be provided as if expressly required on both.
Additionally, information shown on the plans but not shown on riser diagrams and
details shall be provided.
F. Drawings are not intended to show every offset, fitting or component; however,
Contract Documents require components and materials whether or not indicated or
specified as necessary to make HVAC installation complete and operational.
G. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in location
prior to installation at no expense to the Owner.
H. Address questions regarding Contract Documents to Architect in writing prior to award
of contract. Otherwise, Architect's interpretation of meaning and intent of Contract
Documents shall be final.
1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. As work progresses,maintain complete and separate set of black line prints of Contract
Drawings at job site at all times. Record work completed and changes from original
Contract Drawings, clearly and accurately. Valve tags shall be recorded as they are
installed.
B. At completion of work, the Contractor shall submit As-Built drawings for each trade to
architect for review and approval.As-Built drawings are to be drawn using a computer-
aided drafting (CAD) software package. Contractor shall provide drawing files and
corresponding hard copies of each drawing.
1.11 REFERENCE TO MATERIALS BY NAME
A. Specific reference in the specifications to any article, device,product,material, fixture,
form or type of construction by name, make, or catalog number shall be interpreted as
establishing a standard of quality. This shall not be construed as limiting the
competition.
B. Approval of any manufacturer's product not specifically mentioned shall be obtained
prior to the close of the interpretation period.
C. The Contractor may at his option use any article,device,product,material,fixture, form
or type of construction that in the judgment of the Architect/Engineer is equal to that
named.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-11
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA 4"ON
3. Institute of Boiler Rating(IBR)
4. Air Moving and Conditioning Association(AMCA).
5. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM)
6. American Gas Association(AGA)
7. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA)
8. National Board of Fire Underwriters(NBFU)
9. Underwriters'Laboratories(UL)
10. United States of America Standards Association(USAS)
11. Occupational Safety and Health Act(OSHA).
1.8 PERMITS AND FEES
A. The Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Subcontractor shall obtain all necessary
permits and approval of the work by the local authorities. The HVAC Subcontractor
shall obtain all other permits, licenses or certificates of approval, arrange for all
inspections and pay all fees and charges in connection therewith.
1.9 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Work of this Section is shown primarily on the following Drawings:M1 through M3.
B. HVAC contractor is responsible for the information shown on all the drawings in the
contract set. Listing of HVAC Drawings above does not limit responsibility of
determining full extent of work required by the Contract Documents. Refer to
Architectural, Plumbing, Electrical, Structural and other Drawings and other Sections
that indicate types of construction in which work must be installed and work of other
trades with which work of this Section must be coordinated.
C. This Sub-contractor shall refer to the drawings for a full comprehension of the work to
be done and for conditions affecting the location and placement of equipment and
materials. Locations shown on the HVAC Drawings shall be checked against general
and detailed Drawings of the construction proper.
D. Drawings are intended to be supplementary to the Specifications. Any work indicated, ,
mentioned or implied in either is to be considered as specified by both.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
directly bill the Contractor and receive payment for review of these shop drawings prior
to their release at a rate of$75.00 per hour with a two(2)hour minimum.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All materials used under this section of the specifications shall be new and the best
product of the manufacturer. All materials are to be without defects and designed to
function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended.
B. This Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced tradesmen,
thoroughly experienced in the installation of all materials specified under this section of
the specifications and able to work in harmony with all other tradesmen employed on
the project.
C. This Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his material to the building site
when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and
that of other trades.
1.6 EQUALITY OF MATERIALS
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this section will
be determined in accordance with the approval of the Engineer.
1.7 CODES, STANDARDS, ORDINANCES
A. All work shall conform to the requirements of all codes and regulations governing such
work,as may be required by local and state ordinances.
1. Where the provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes,rules or
regulations,the latter shall govern.
2. Where the Contract Documents are in excess of applicable codes, rules or
regulations, the Contract Provisions shall govern unless otherwise directed by the
Architect.
B. Any material or operation specified by reference to the published specifications of a
manufacturer of any of the following shall comply with the requirements of the current
specifications or standard listed.
1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME)
2. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE)
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,NU ,.
2. Pumps and hydronic specialties
3. Valves, strainers,vents,piping,fittings and accessories
4. Hangers and guides
5. Thermometers,gauges
6. Roof Top Air handling units
7. Water Treatment
8. Vibration isolators
9. Registers,grilles, diffusers,louvers, fire dampers,and ducting accessories
10. Exhaust fans.
11. Fin-tube radiation,convectors,cabinet and unit heaters
12. Energy efficient motors
13. Insulation for pipes,ducts and equipment
14. Motor Starters
15. Fire safing
16. All caulking,sealants,adhesives and tapes
17. Valve tags and pipe identification.
18. Heating,Ventilating and Air Conditioning Controls
19. All wiring diagrams
B. No fabrications, ordering, delivery to the site or other steps shall be taken with respect
to items requiring shop drawings, manufacturer's detail drawings or submittals of
information until the items are reviewed and approved.
C. If a resubmittal of Shop Drawings is required due to substitution by the Contractor of
equipment not equal to the specified equipment, the Engineer reserves the right to
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
equipment. Provide signed documentation for above procedures from factory or service
representative. Systems included:
1. Boiler/burner
2. EMS system
3. All other systems and equipment requiring manufacturers installation review
C. Related Sections:
1. The following items are not included in this section and will be performed under
the designated sections.
a. Cutting and patching
b. Excavation and backfill
c. Flashing and counter flashing unless noted otherwise noted or shown.
d. Concrete Bases.
e. Painting
f. Louver installation
g. All electrical wiring to equipment installed under this contract including
starters and disconnect switches, unless specifically noted herein. All
temperature control wiring shall be under Heating, Ventilating and Air
Conditioning Contractor's section of work and shall be by Temperature
Control Subcontractor, including transformers from 120 VAC to control
voltage and any 120 VAC control wiring required to power operators, etc.
2. Reference to Drawings: Work to be performed is shown on Drawings listed for
work of this section.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Quantity of shop and/or manufacturer's drawings as called for in General Provisions
shall be submitted to the Architect for review,for the following:
1. Boiler/burners
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1. New hydronic boiler/burners
2. Systems of hydronic,and miscellaneous piping
3. Pumps and hydronic specialties
4. Valves and piping accessories
5. Motor Starters
6. Water Treatment
7. Roof Top Air Handling Units
8. Systems of supply,return,and exhaust ducting.
9. Registers,grilles,diffusers,louvers,fire/smoke dampers and ducting accessories
10. Exhaust fans.
11. Fin-tube radiation,convectors and unit heaters.
12. Piping,ducting and equipment insulation
13. Heating,Ventilating&Air Conditioning Controls
14. Water and air balancing
15. Start-ups,test and shake down of systems.
16. Valve tags,charts,pipe identification.
17. Maintenance manuals
18. Guarantee.
19. Sheet metal shop drawings
20. Coordination drawings
B. This contractor shall include as part of his contract, all charges for start-up, checking,
adjusting and field inspections and service representatives for all special systems and `
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
such listing; provided that, in the absence of a contrary provision in the
Specifications, any Sub-Bidder may, without listing any bid price, list his own
name in said paragraph E for any such class of work or part thereof and perform
that work with persons on his own payroll, if such Sub-Bidder, after Sub-Bid
openings, shows to the satisfaction of the Town of Northampton that he does
customarily perform such class of work or the part thereof with persons on his own
payroll and is qualified so to do. This Section of the Specifications requires that the
following classes of work shall be listed in Paragraph E under the conditions
indicated herein.
Classes of Work
Sheet Metal
Insulation
Automatic Temperature Controls
Testing and Balancing
1.2 REFERENCES
A. The GENERAL DOCUMENTS,as listed on the Table of Contents, and applicable parts
of Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, shall be included in and made a part of
this Section.
B. Examine Drawings and other Specification Sections for requirements that affect work
of this Section.
C. As used in this Section, "provide" means "furnish and install' and "HVAC" means
"Heating,Ventilating and Air Conditioning".
D. Where an item is referred to in singular number in the Contract Documents provide as
many such items as are necessary to complete the work.
E. Before starting work, visit the site and examine the conditions under which work must
be performed including preparatory work performed under other Sections or Contracts,
or by Owner. Report conditions that might adversely affect work in writing through
Contractor to Architect.Do not proceed with work until defects have been corrected and
conditions are satisfactory. Commencement of work shall be construed as complete
acceptance of existing conditions and preparatory work.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. Work included: Provide labor,materials and equipment necessary to complete the work
of this section,including,but not limited to the following:
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
SECTION 15600- HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
(FILED SUB BID REQUIRED)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. The drawings and conditions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, and all Division 1 sections, apply to the work of this Section. Work to be
done under this Section is shown on the contract drawings listed at the front of the
specifications. The listing of Contract drawings and Specifications shall not limit the
Sub-Contractors responsibility to determine the full extent of his work as required by all
Contract drawings and Specifications.
B. Time,manner and requirements for bidding filed sub-bids
1. Sub-bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall be
filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at a time and place as
stipulated in the"NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS" -"'►
The following shall appear on the upper left hand of the envelope:
NAME OF SUB-BIDDER:
NAME OF PROJECT:
SUB-BID FOR SECTION: 15600-HVAC
2. Each sub-bid submitted for work under this Section shall be on forms furnished by
the Awarding Authority, as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the General
Laws, as amended. Sub-Bid forms may be obtained at the office of the Awarding
Authority or Architect,or may be obtained by written request.
3. Sub-bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied a by a BID
BOND or CASH or CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURERS or CASHIERS
CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company payable to the town of
Northampton in the amount of 5 percent of the bid.A sub-bid accompanied by any
other form of bid deposit than those specified will be rejected.
C. Sub-sub-bid Requirements:
1. The Sub-Bidder shall list in Paragraph E of the FORM for SUB-BID the name and
bid price of each person, firm or corporation performing each class of work or part
thereof for which (the Section of the Specifications for that sub-trade) requires
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
3.14 BOILER/BURNER SYSTEM 84
3.15 FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPER INSTALLATION 88
3.16 SHEET METAL WORK 89
3.17 SYSTEM BALANCING 90
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2.17 CABINET UNIT HEATERS 30
2.18 FIN-TUBE RADIATION 30
2.19 CONVECTORS 31
2.20 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 31
2.21 REFRIGERANT SPECIALTIES 32
2.22 WATER TREATMENT 33
2.23 INLINE MOUNTED CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 34
2.24 A/C CONDENSATE PUMP 34
2.25 HIGH EFFICIENCY GAS BOILER 35
2.26 GAS ROOF TOP UNITS 37
2.27 CHANGEOVER BYPASS VAV SYSTEM CONTROL 40
2.28 ENERGY EFFICIENT MOTORS 46
2.29 MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTROLLERS 47
2.30 INSULATION 48
2.31 SHEET METAL WORK 50
2.32 FIRE DAMPERS 52
2.33 REGISTERS,GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS 53
2.34 SOUND ATTENUATORS 53
2.35 SOUND ATTENUATING INSULATION 54
2.36 VIBRATION ISOLATORS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 55
2.37 FIRE SAFING AND SMOKE SEAL 58
2.38 INLINE BELT DRIVE CENTRIFUGAL FAN 59
2.39 CABINET FANS 59
2.40 ROOF EXHAUST FANS 59
2.41 FAN ROOF CURBS 60
2.42 ACCESS PANELS 60
2.43 FILTERS 60
2.44 FLEXIBLE AIR DUCT 61
2.45 FLEXIBLE PIPING CONNECTORS 61
2.46 TAGS,NAMEPLATES AND CHARTS 62
2.47 IDENTIFICATION,COLOR CODING&FLOW DIRECTION 62
2.48 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 64
PART 3-EXECUTION 75
3.1 PIPING 75
3.2 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM 76
3.3 SUPPORTS,BRACKETS AND HANGERS 77
3.4 GAUGES 77
3.5 THERMOMETERS 78
3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 78
3.7 AIR HANDLING UNITS AND FANS 78
3.8 UNIT HEATERS 79
3.9 FIN-TUBE RADIATION 79
3.10 CABINET UNIT HEATERS 79
3.11 VIBRATION ISOLATORS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 79
3.12 INSULATION 83
3.13 FIRESAFING AND SMOKE SEAL 84
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 15600 -HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL 4
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 4
1.2 REFERENCES 5
1.3 SUMMARY 5
1.4 SUBMITTALS 7
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 9
1.6 EQUALITY OF MATERIALS 9
1.7 CODES,STANDARDS,ORDINANCES 9
1.8 PERMITS AND FEES 10
1.9 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 10
1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS 11
1.11 REFERENCE TO MATERIALS BY NAME 11
1.12 WASTE MATERIAL 12
1.13 PROTECTION 12
1.14 COORDINATION OF TRADES 12
1.15 COORDINATION DRAWINGS 13
1.16 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 14
1.17 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 15
1.18 SPARE PARTS 15
1.19 INSTALLATION OF THE WORK 16
1.20 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 16
1.21 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 19
1.22 DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS 20
1.23 WELDING 20
1.24 GUARANTEE WARRANTY 20
1.25 SHEET METAL SHOP DRAWINGS 21
1.26 SUBSTITUTIONS 21
1.27 TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATION 21
PART 2-PRODUCTS 23
2.1 MATERIALS AND SPECIALTIES 23
2.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL SUPPORTS 23
2.3 PIPING 23
2.4 PIPE FITTINGS 24
2.5 JOINTS AND FLANGES 24
2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 24
2.7 HANGER RODS 25
2.8 THERMOMETERS 25
2.9 UNIONS 26
2.10 GASKETS 26
2.11 PRESSURE GAUGES 26
2.12 STRAINERS 27
2.13 VALVES 27
2.14 WATER FLOW MEASURING DEVICES 28
2.15 VENTS 29
2.16 HYDRONIC UNIT HEATERS 30
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS &EXPANSIONS
FLORENCE,MASSACHUSETTS
polished and lacquered brass tag with black indented stamping Y2" high, fastened
with brass chain.
B. Beaded chain will not be acceptable. Valve tag identification shall conform to
valve chart listing. All other equipment shall be provided with a suitable
laminated plastic nameplate fastened with appropriate screws or rivets.
END OF SECTION 15400
PLUMBING
15400-26
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS&EXPANSIONS
FLORENCE,MASSACHUSETTS
A. All piping shall be flushed clean before tests are applied. No portion of the hot
water, cold water, waste, sanitary, gas, or acid piping shall be covered,
concealed, used or correction or replacement until tests thereof have been
satisfactorily completed in the presence of the Architect's authorized
representative. This Subcontractor must accommodate his testing operations to
the progress of the project as a whole. Correct all defects appearing under test
and repeat the test until all parts of the work have withstood them successfully.
Screwed piping shall be made tight without caulking. When the work is
presented for acceptance, all valve stem packing must be new and without leaks,
all gauges and thermostats must be in place and reading accurately. This
Subcontractor shall furnish all labor, material and services for testing, including
plugs, pumps and compressors, shall make and remove all temporary piping
connections required for the tests, and shall dispose of test water and all wastes
after tests. leave all work in good order,ready for full use.
B. Upon completion of roughing in, all outlets in the soil, waste, vent, acid waste
and acid vent piping systems shall be temporarily capped and made tight. The
piping shall then be filled with water up to the roof or minimum of ten-foot(10')
head and must remain full without additional pumping, for a period of one (1)
hour without showing any leakage of water.
C. Upon completion of roughing in, all outlets in the hot water, cold water piping
systems inside building shall be temporarily capped and made tight. The piping
shall then be filled with water, and shall be made tight under a hydrostatic
pressure of 125# per square inch gauge maintained for one (1) hour without
additional pumping.
3.05 STERILIZATION
A. Each unit of domestic water service line and distribution system shall be
sterilized with chlorine before acceptance of domestic operation. The amount of
chlorine applied shall be such as to provide a dosage of not less than 50 parts per
million. The chlorinating material shall be introduced to the water lines and
distributing systems in a manner approved by the Water Department. If possible
to do so, the lines shall be thoroughly flushed before introduction of the
chlorinating material. After a contact period of not less than eight(8)hours,the
system shall be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine content is not
greater than 1.0 parts per million. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be
opened and closed several times during the contact period.
3.06 TAGS,NAMEPLATES AND CHARTS
A. Each valve, control, switch and piece of apparatus installed under this contract
shall be properly identified. Valves shall be provided with a 1'/2" diameter
PLUMBING
15400-25
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS & EXPANSIONS
FLORENCE,MASSACHUSETTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Insulate all concealed water piping and fittings before closing in.
B. Piping shall be tested before insulation is applied.
C. Install complete hot and cold water systems for the building serving all
equipment and fixtures. All connections to water serviced equipment and to hot
water heater shall be equipped with shut-off valves and unions. Piping to be
pitched to low points to permit positive drainage.
D. Install shutoff valves on each piece of equipment on both hot and cold water.
E. Install all 4" and larger horizontal soil and waste piping at a slope of 1/8" per
foot in direction of flow or as noted. 3" and smaller at ''/4"per foot slope.
F. Piping concealed in partitions must be properly aligned to obtain absolute
concealment. Piping not properly concealed must be removed and replaced at
this Contractor's Expense.
G. Cleanouts must be installed in the soil,rainleader and waste piping:
1. at all upper terminals of all horizontal soil and waste piping;
2. at each change in direction of more than 45°;
3. at bottom of each stack.
H. Install pipe hangers to support all horizontal above-ground piping. Install riser
clamps at each floor level. Anchor hangers and clamps securely to building
construction.
I.
3.02 ON-SITE SANITARY AND STORM
A. This Subcontractor shall be responsible to install all sanitary and storm drain
piping out to 10' beyond foundation wall.
C. All excavation and backfill shall be by the General Contractor.
3.04 BUILDING SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEANING
PLUMBING
15400-24
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS & EXPANSIONS
FLORENCE,MASSACHUSETTS
B. All high-pressure gas piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel with welded joints.
Provide flanged connections at gas valves, flanges shall be welded to piping.
C. All low-pressure gas piping 3" and larger shall have welded joints, sizes 2'/Z" and
smaller shall have threaded joints.
D. All gas regulators and gas train regulators vent piping shall be Schedule 40 black
steel pipe and fittings.
E. Gas shut-off valves for sizes 2" and larger shall be lubricated plug valves with
threaded or flanged connections. Rated for 200 PSI W.O.G. with full port area,
through valve, as manufactured by Milwaukee Valve Company.
F. All gas shut-offs 1'/z" and smaller shall be bronze ball valves rated for gas
service,400 PSI W.O.G. with full port and lever handle.
G. Gas piping shall be color-coded and provided with identification label.
H. Provide bronze gas cocks on piping 2" and smaller and steel valves on piping
2'/2" and larger.
I. This Contractor shall make all final gas connections to Water heater, boiler and
rooftop unit.
PLUMBING
15400-23
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS &EXPANSIONS
FLORENCE,MASSACHUSETTS AOWI%k
2.17 FIRESAFING AND SMOKE SEAL
A. Firesafing and smoke seal is required where pipes, ducts and conduit leave or
enter any vertical pipe/duct shaftway at all floors and through all walls above or
below any Class "A" acoustical tile ceiling, or any space without any type of
finish ceiling.
B. Firesafing and smoke seal is required for all pipes, ducts or conduit penetrations
through rated walls or partitions and at positions separating smoke zones from
each other - if smoke zones or plenums are employed in the building. Each of
the principal trades - plumbing, sprinklers, HVAC and electrical - are to provide
their own pipe and duct sleeves and to do their own firesafing and smoke seal
work.
C. Firesafing and smoke seal of pipe and duct penetrations through non-rated
secondary walls within a rated larger area need not require firesafing and smoke
seal until they penetrate the rated walls.
D. Firesafing and smoke seal materials are as follows:
1. "Poke-through" fire containment, USG "THERMAFIBER", fire test
CEG 4-11-78; USG 6-2-76; CEG 8-7-85.
2. USG "THERMAFIBER" Rigid-type, various thickness.
3. USG "THERMAFIBER SMOKE SEAL COMPOUND" - UL No.
R11327-L; UL No. R11327-R.
4. Dow Corning fire stop sealant and Dow Corning fire stop foam "A" and
"B" classified for 1,2 and 3 hours.
C. All firesafing material must be noncombustible as defined by NFPA Standard
220 when tested in accordance with ASTME136; melt point — 2000°F; when in
contact with metal, be non-corrosive meeting FS-HH-1-558 B; "k" value of 0.25
or less per ASTM C 518; the material shall be moisture-resistant, mildew,
vermin-proof and non-deteriorating. The firesafing insulation shall meet fire
containment tests per ASTM El 19.
2.18 GAS SYSTEM and PIPING INSIDE BUILDING&ON SITE
A. All low-pressure gas piping 11" W.C. and lower shall be Schedule 40 black steel
pipe with threaded joints and fittings.
PLUMBING
15400-22
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS & EXPANSIONS
FLORENCE,MASSACHUSETTS
2.14 HOSE BIBBS
A. Furnish and install Woodford model#24P Chrome Plated wall faucet with key
handle, chrome plated cap and chrome plated vacuum breaker. Or approved
equal.
2.15 TRAP PRIMERS
A. Furnish and install Trap Primer Valves by Precision Plumbing Products, INC.,
model #PR-500 or equal to. Plumbing Sub-Contractor shall provide trap primer
valves and trap primer water lines to all floor drains that require connection
thereto: whether indicated on plans or not.
2.16 CLEANOUTS AND FLOOR DRAINS
A. Furnish and install cleanouts, and floor and roof drains as manufactured by Zum,
Wade or Jay R. Smith. Flashing of all drains by General Contractor. The
following list based on Zurn model numbers.
1. Floor Drain"A" Z-415-P, dura-coated cast iron with
bottom outlet combination invertible
membrane clamp and adjustable to floor
level, nickel-bronze Type B 6" diameter
strainer. Provide with trap primer.
2. Floor Drain"B" Z-550-P, dura-coated cast iron with
bottom outlet, combination membrane
flashing clamp,seepage pan
3. Floor Cleanouts ZB-1400-2 round nickel bronze,
scoriated top, cast-iron body.
Adjustable to finish floor.
4. Wall Cleanout ZB-1447-VP, cleanout tee, dura-coated
cast iron, gas and watertight ABS
tapered thread plug, and square, smooth
nickel bronze 8" x 8" wall access cover
and frame. Install where vertical rain
conductor, soil or waste pipe is
concealed in wall or partition.
PLUMBING
15400-21
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS &EXPANSIONS
FLORENCE,MASSACHUSETTS
J-1174-KS Just, concealed faucet, 6 1/2" gooseneck
spout with vandel resistant aerator and
handles. Concealed cast brass body,
replaceable seats.
J-35-ADA-FS Offset grid drain assembly.
Furnish and install P-trap and extend
loose key angle supply stop.
Provide Handi-Lav-Guard insulation kit
on waste and water piping as
manufactured by Truebro or approved
equal.
4. P4 Mop Receptor
MSB-2424 Fiat 24" x 24" x 10" deep molded stone
service basin, color by Architect.
830-AA Chrome plated service faucet with
vacuum breaker, integral stops, wall
bracket,pail hook and thread on spout.
889-CC Mop hanger with 3 rubber tool grips.
874 Cast-iron strainer.
E-77-AA Vinyl bumper guards.
5. P5 Water Cooler(Handicap Accessible)
HAC-8F Barrier Free, Water cooler, wall
mounted, stainless steel, by Hasley
Taylor. Insulate 1 1/4" waste piping
up to waste main.
6. P6 Wall Hydrant
B67 Woodford automatic draining, anti-freeze
wall hydrant with two check valves,
backflow preventer, loose tee key to be
furnished with each hydrant. Flush
mounting polished brass wall box.
Josam or Zurn approved equal.
PLUMBING
15400-20
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS &EXPANSIONS
FLORENCE,MASSACHUSETTS
111-2185 Eljer 1.6 with direct-fed siphon jet
action, elongated bowl, off-floor
mounting, 1-1/2" inlet stud, vitreous
china. Flushes on 1.6 gallons.
111 Sloan Royal Flushometer valve with
vacuum breaker and angle stop, 1.6
gallons per flush, Dual filtered type
diaphragm, or approved equal.
#95 Olsonite open front seat less cover.
Provide carrier to suit construction with
rear anchor leg or foot support, for
standard chase installations.
2. P2 Wall Hung Lavatory(Handicap)
051-2204 Free Style wall hung lavatory, vitreous
china,Rear overflow,provide concealed
arm carrier to suit construction. Faucet
holes on 4" centers.
S-60-G-H-VP Symmons, Scotts chrome plated lavatory
faucet set, single lever w/blue/red
indicators, metering/temperture
selection, 4" centerset, cast brass body,
0.5 gpm, vandel proof. Moen or
Chicago faucet as equals.
Offset grid drain assembly
Provide P-trap and extended loose key
angle stops.
3. P3 Stainless Steel Sink
SL-ADA-2017-A-GR Just, 18 type 304 stainless steel sink,20"x
17" x 6" deep bowl, sound deadening
undercoating, grip rim plus self-
rimming feature, with faucet ledge rear.
3 hole punched, Elkay or Dayton as
equals.
PLUMBING
15400-19
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS&EXPANSIONS
FLORENCE,MASSACHUSETTS
L. Furnish and install anti-siphon vacuum breakers on hose bibbs and toilet rooms,
Woodford Model 34-HI or approved equal.
M. Furnish and install pressure-reducing valve where indicated on plans or where
required for equipment as manufactured by Watts Regulator Company, Model
U5.
N. Furnish and install pressure-type vacuum breaker Watts Model 800, where
supply is under constant water pressure.
O. Furnish and install atmospheric vacuum breaker Watts Model 288A, where the
vacuum breaker is not subject to constant water pressure.
P. Furnish and install Zurn Model Z-1025 fixed air gap, dura-coated cast iron with
slip joint inlet and no hub outlet, in locations shown on plans.
Q. Furnish and install Watts Model 777 strainer at main building water service
entrance, size as indicated on plans.
R. Provide all necessary spare parts for all backflow-preventers installed.
2.10 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A. Furnish and install on water closets and urinals, or where shown on plans, water
hammer arrestors equal to Zurn#Z-1700,Precision Plumbing Products or Josam,
sizes as shown on plans or approved equal.
2.11 ACCESS PANELS
A. Furnish access panels for wall or ceiling installation as manufactured by Karp,
Milcor, or Zurn, size 10" x 10", or as indicated on plans. Units shall be prime-
coated,hinged and lock.
2.12 PLUMBING FIXTURES:
A. Furnish and install all fixtures shown on plans or specified herein, providing
chrome-plated piping for all exposed piping and trimmings. Each fixture shall
have separate key stops for hot and cold water. The following list of fixtures
stated in this section are based on Eljer company, model numbers are provided
to establish type and quality of materials. Fixtures made by Kohler Company,
American Standard or Crane Company are approved equals.
1. P1 Water Closet(Handicap) ..
PLUMBING
15400-18
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS & EXPANSIONS
FLORENCE,MASSACHUSETTS
B. Valves shall be installed where shown on the drawings and shall be the type
noted. Valves 3 inches and smaller shall have screwed end. Valves larger than
3 inches shall have flanged ends. Gate, globe and ball valves shall be installed
with the stems upright and within 15 degrees of vertical whenever possible.
Butterfly valves shall be mounted with the stem in the horizontal wherever
possible.
C. Gate valves 2%i inches and smaller shall be Class 125 SWP, 200 WOG, rising
stem, B-62 bronze body, bronze stem, solid wedge, meeting MSS SP80, with
handwheel. Hammond IB-640, Stockham B-100, or Nibco T-111.
D. Gate valves 3 inches and larger shall be Class 125 SWP, flanged end, cast iron
body, bronze trim, OS&Y valves, meeting MSS SP70. Stem/wedge connections
shall be T-head connection. Pinned connections are not acceptable. Hammond
E?,-1140, Stockham B-623,or Nibco F617-0.
E. Check valves 2%s inches and smaller shall be rated Class 125 SWP, 5 degree
swing check type, meeting MSS SP80. Body and cap shall be B-62 bronze.
Hammond IB-904, Stockham B-319,or Nibco T-413B.
F. Check valves 3 inches and larger shall be Class 125 SWP, flanged end, cast iron
body, bronze trim, swing check meeting MSS SP71. Hammond IR-1124,
Stockham G-931, or Nibco F918-B.
G. Globe valves 2%s inches and smaller shall be Class 125 SWP, valves meeting
MSS SP80. Body, bonnet and stem shall be B-62 bronze with handwheel.
Hammond IB-440, Stockham B-16, or Nibco T211-B.
H. Globe valves 3 inches and larger shall be Class 125 SWP, flanged end, cast iron
body, bronze trim meeting MSS SP85. Hammond IR-116, Stockham G-512, or
Nibco F718-B.
I. Ball valves 2 inches and smaller shall be rated 150 SWP, 600 WOG meeting
WWV 35C Type II, Class A, Style 3. Valves shall be two piece-threaded body,
solid or tunnel drilled, large port, chrome ball. Seats and seals shall be teflon.
Stem shall be of blowout-proof design with threaded adjustable packing
follower. Packing shall be retained under full working pressure with handle or
handle nut removed. Hammond 8501,Apollo Series 70, or Nibco T-585.
J. Furnish and install trap primers with distribution units to all floor drains
indicated on the plans, as manufactured by Precision Plumbing Products, or
approved equal. Based on Precision Plumbing Products.
K. Furnish and install Watts Model 909QTSU reduced-pressure backflow preventer
with Watts Series 909AG-F air gap where shown on plans or approved equal.
PLUMBING
15400-17
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS & EXPANSIONS
FLORENCE,MASSACHUSETTS
A. This Contractor shall furnish and set all sleeves required. Where pipes pass
through walls, floors, ceilings, etc. all sleeves shall be steel pipe. Where
uncovered pipes pass through finished ceilings, partitions, walls and floors,
heavy-chromium escutcheons shall be provided.
2.07 PRESSURE GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS
A. Furnish and install pressure gauges and thermometers where indicated on the
drawings. Gauges shall be U.S. Gauge Model P-500, Marsh or Ashcroft with
4'/z" dial, or approved equal.
B. Thermometers shall be Ashcroft Model, all with 2%z" stem and 3" dial, or U.S.
Gauge.
2.08 PIPING INSULATION
A. All new domestic water service piping, all exposed or concealed hot, cold piping
shall be insulated with %2" cellular flexible foamed tubing. This includes all new
valves and piping throughout the building. Insulate 1 1/4" waste piping from all
water fountains up to waste mains.
B. All valves and fittings shall be covered with equal thickness of insulation. All
joints shall be sealed and be vapor tight.
C. Insulate all exposed hot, cold and waste piping under handicapped lavatories and
kitchen sinks with Handi-Lav-Guard insulation kit as manufactured by Truebro
or approved equal.
D. All pipe insulation shall be as manufactured by Owens-Corning, Armstrong, or
approved equal.
E. Insulate all new exposed rainconductor piping in building with 1%" thick
sectionalized fiberglass insulation with PVC jacket, cover all fitting with equal
thickness insulation and cover with Zeston fittings.
F. Insulate all new exposed or concealed rainleader piping above ceilings or in
chases with%s" cellular flexible foamed tubing.
2.09 VALVES AND SHUT-OFFS
A. All hot water recirculating, hot and cold water branch supplies shall be
controlled separately by full size bronze gate valves. Provide drainage valves
with hose ends at all low points,whether indicated on the drawings or not.
PLUMBING
15400-16
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS & EXPANSIONS
FLORENCE,MASSACHUSETTS
B. All new horizontal water piping mains and branch runouts shall be supported
with over-sized carbon steel hangers, the hanger shall be installed on the outside
of pipe insulation with 18 gauge protection saddle between pipe insulation and
hanger:
PIPE SIZE ROD SIZE MAX. SPACING HANGERS
%2" - 1'/a" 3/8 inch 5 feet Fig.269-Ring.
1%" or larger '/2 inch 10 feet Fig. 65-Cleves
C. Water piping installed inside chase, behind fixtures, copper piping shall be
supported with Fig. CT-122R copper-plated split tubing clamp, fastened directly
to pipe and supported with 3/8" threaded rod. Pipe insulation shall butt-up to
clamps.
D. All new horizontal cast-iron soil, and vent piping shall be supported with carbon
steel Clevis Hanger Figure 260 as follows:
PIPE SIZE ROD SIZE MAXIMUM SPACING
Up to 3 inch '/z inch 5 feet
4 to 5 inch 5/8 inch 5 feet
6 to 8 inch 3/4 inch 5 feet
Where 10 feet lengths of cast-iron pipe is installed, support spacing of 10 feet is
acceptable. All hangers for cast-iron pipe larger than 4" shall be supported from
the top core of the bar joist.
E. All vertical piping shall be supported off walls or building structure with suitable
clamps and anchor rods.
F. Refer to Section 2.05 Pipe Supports for additional information.
2.05 PIPE IDENTIFICATION MARKERS
A. Furnish and install pipe identification markers to comply with OSHA Standards
including direction of flow arrows, as manufactured by Seton or approved equal.
B. Install identification markers on the following systems:
1. Cold Water
2. Domestic Hot Water&Hot Water Return
O'` 2.06 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS
PLUMBING
15400-15
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS& EXPANSIONS
FLORENCE,MASSACHUSETTS
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL, WASTE,VENT AND RAINLEADER PIPING
A. All below-floor piping shall be service weight cast iron pipe and fittings, with
lead and oakum or resilient gasket joints.
B. All above-floor soil, waste and rainleaders 2" and larger shall be service weight
cast iron, joints shall be made up with lead and oakum, or no-hub pipe with
stainless steel couplings.
C. Above-floor soil, vent and waste 2" and smaller shall be type "M" copper pipe
and fittings or DWV pipe and fittings.
D. All above-floor vent piping 3" and larger shall be copper pipe and fittings or no-
hub pipe and fitting as described above.
E. All vents below floor slab shall be 2" minimum.
2.02 WATER PIPING(Interior of Building)
A. All hot, cold water piping shall be hard copper. Type "L" seamless drawn tubing
of 99.9% copper assembled with sweated fittings. All piping shall be supported
in an approved manner and shall be graded to drain back to drainoff cocks,joints
make up with 95/5 silver solder.
B. All below-floor trap primer discharge lines, soft-rolled type "K" copper tubing.
2.03 WATER SERVICE
A. The Plumbing Contractor will be responsible for providing the new 6" water
service from 10' outside foundation wall and extend into the building. The
Plumbing Subcontractor shall provide water service piping and meter as
indicated on drawing.
2.04 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. All new horizontal copper waste and vent piping shall be supported with copper-
plated Grinnell Model CT-269 adjustable hangers, as follows:
PIPE SIZE ROD SIZE MAXIMUM SPACING
1'/z" or larger 3/8 inch 10 feet
PLUMBING
15400-14
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS &EXPANSIONS
Florence,MA
B. All coordination drawings are to be produced using CAD software compatible
with AutoCAD Release 14. Architect will background drawing files that show
ceiling grid layouts,ceiling heights, lights, and walls.
C. Coordination Drawings for the following trades shall be submitted: sheet metal,
fire protection, electrical, and other HVAC trades.
PLUMBING
15400-13
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS & EXPANSIONS
Florence,MA
1.25 COOPERATION WITH OTHERS
A. This Contractor shall cooperate to the fullest extent with all other trades so as
best to expedite the entire project.
B. This Contractor shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to
sizes, locations, and means of support, etc. to all other trades requiring such
information.
1.26 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and patching in general shall be the responsibility of the General
Contractor. The Subcontractor is expected to inform the General Contractor
sufficiently in advance to allow incorporation of inserts and the like and to
otherwise prevent any appreciable cutting and patching. Where such is caused
by lack of sufficient notice on the part of the Subcontractor to the General
Contractor, a back-charge will be in order from the General Contractor to the
Subcontractor for such cutting and patching.
1.27 GUARANTEE WARRANTY
A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall and hereby does warrant that all work
executed and all equipment furnished under this section shall be free from
defects of workmanship and materials for a period of one year from date of final
acceptance of this work. The Plumbing Subcontractor further agrees that he
will, at his own expense,repair and replace all such defective work and all other
work damaged thereby, which becomes defective during the term of the
Guarantee Warranty.
1.28 WELDING
A. All welding shall be performed by certified welders.
B. Protect all adjoining work with welding operations by erecting protection
barriers or use of welding blankets.
C. Maintain a fire watch during and after all welding operations.
1.29 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings showing the size and location of mechanical pipes, ducts,
equipment and appurtenances, relative to the work of other trades shall be
prepared before materials are purchased or work is begun.
PLUMBING
15400-12
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS & EXPANSIONS
Florence,MA
A. Examine the site and all the drawings before proceeding with the layout and
installation of this work.
B. Arrange the work essentially as shown, except layout to be made on the job to
suit actual conditions. Confer and cooperate with other trades on the job so all
work will be installed in proper relationship. Precise location of parts to
coordinate with other work is the responsibility of the Plumbing Contractor.
C. Arrange for required chases, slots and openings.
D. Indicated equipment connections are based on equipment of a given
manufacturer. Contractor assumes responsibility for proper arrangement of
pipes, ducts, etc. to connect approved equipment in a proper and approved
manner. Follow equipment manufacturer's detailed instructions and
recommendations in the installation and connection of all equipment. In case of
conflict between manufacturer's instructions and the contract documents, notify
the Architect/Engineer before proceeding. No equipment installation or
connections shall be made in a manner that voids the manufacturer's warranty.
E. Install all work in a neat and workmanlike manner using only workmen
thoroughly qualified in the trade or duties they are to perform. Rough work will
be rejected.
F. All material shall be new. No old pipe, ductwork or equipment shall be used.
G. It is the intent of these specifications to provide complete systems, which are
free from objectionable generating noise or of excessive vibration. In the
opinion of the Mechanical Engineer, any items found in either of these
conditions shall be corrected and noises or vibration dampened as directed.
1.24 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Electrical work, including furnishing and installation of starters, will be the
responsibility of the Electrical Subcontractor, unless specifically required
otherwise by this specification.
B. Provide diagrams and instructions necessary for the Electrical Subcontractor to
make connections properly.
C. Electrical work required under this contract shall be done in accordance with
Electrical Specifications and applicable provisions of the National Electrical
Code and local ordinances.
D. Verify all electric characteristics prior to ordering equipment.
PLUMBING
15400-11
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS & EXPANSIONS
Florence,MA
B. All obsolete materials shall be disconnected and removed including hangers and
supports and shall be taken to an area designated by the General Contractor. The
General Contractor shall remove the materials from site and dispose of in
accordance with all regulations.
C. Obsolete items to be removed,but not limited to,include:
1. Fixtures and trim.
2. Pumps.
3. Floor Drains.
4. Water heaters.
5. Tempering valves.
6. Drinking Fountains.
7. Sanitary Sinks.
8. Backflow Preventers.
9. Piping(Water, sewer, storm and gas) above and below slab.
D. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall thoroughly examine the site prior to bid to
determine the total extent of demolition and removals required.
E. All piping concealed in walls and exposed piping during construction shall be
removed. Piping below grade level shall be removed from inside building unless
indicated on plans to remain.
F. Remove existing water service and meter within building. Cap off existing water
main at point of entrance into building.
1.21 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. This Contractor shall provide water for construction use.
1.22 PROTECTION
A. This Subcontractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from
injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss, which may occur, shall be made
good without additional expense to the Owner. This Contractor shall be
responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the project is
accepted by the Owner.
B. This Subcontractor shall also protect building and equipment from damage by
installation of his work, and shall pay for all damages thereto.
1.23 INSTALLATION OF THE WORK
PLUMBING
15400-10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS &EXPANSIONS
Florence,MA
materials whether or not indicated or specified as necessary to make Plumbing
installation complete and operational.
D. Address questions regarding Contract Documents to Architect in writing prior to
award of contract. Otherwise, Architect's interpretation of meaning and intent of
Contract Documents shall be final.
1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. As work progresses, maintain complete and separate set of blackline prints of
Contract Drawings at job site at all times. Record work completed and changes
from original Contract Drawings, clearly and accurately. Valve tags shall be
recorded as they are installed.
B. At completion of work, Owner will furnish set of mylar copies of originals to
Contractor. Contractor's professional draftsman shall transfer changes to mylars;
submit mylars and one set of prints to Architect for review and approval.
1.18 REFERENCE TO MATERIALS BY NAME
A. Specific reference in the specifications to any article, device, product, material,
fixture, form, or type of construction, etc. by name, make, or catalog number
shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality, and shall not be
construed as limiting the competition, and the Contractor in such cases, may at
his option use any article, device, product, materials, fixture, form or type of
construction which, in the judgment of the Architect/Engineer, is equal to that
named, and further provided approval of any manufacturer's product not
specifically mentioned is obtained prior to the close of the interpretation period.
1.19 WASTE MATERIAL
A. All rubbish created by the Plumbing Subcontractor shall be removed by the
Plumbing Subcontractor on a regular basis and shall be taken to an area
designated by the General
Contractor.
B. All material shall be properly disposed of in accordance with all prevailing
codes,rules and regulations.
1.20 DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS:
A. Disconnect and remove all existing plumbing equipment and systems and parts
thereof and appurtenances,which are made obsolete by this renovation.
PLUMBING
15400-9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS & EXPANSIONS
Florence,MA
A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall refer to the drawings for a full comprehension
of the work to be done and for conditions affecting the location and placement of
his equipment and materials. These drawings are intended to be supplementary
to the specifications, and any work indicted, mentioned or implied in either is to
be considered as specified by both. Should the character of the work herein
contemplated or any matter pertaining thereto be not sufficiently explained in
the specifications or the drawings, the Plumbing Subcontractor may apply to the
Architect/Engineer for further information and shall conform to such when given
as it may be consistent with the original intent. The Architect/Engineer reserves
the right to make any reasonable changes in location prior to installation at no
expense to the Owner. All lines are diagrammatic and exact locations are
subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer.
1.14 OPERATING PROCEDURE
A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall, at all times, have a foreman on the project
authorized to make decisions and receive instructions. The foreman or
superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of
the Architect/Engineer after construction work begins.
1.15 PERMITS AND FEES
A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall obtain all necessary permits and approval of
the work by the local authorities. He shall obtain all other permits, licenses or
certificates of approval, arrange for all inspections and pay all fees and charges
in connection therewith.
1.16 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Work of this Section is shown primarily on the following Drawing: P 1.
B. Listing of Plumbing Drawings above does not limit responsibility of determining
full extent of work required by Contract Documents. Refer to Architectural,
HVAC, Electrical, Structural and other Drawings and other Sections that
indicate types of construction in which work must be installed and work of other
trades with which work of this Section must be coordinated. Locations shown
Plumbing Drawings shall be checked against general and detailed Drawings of
the construction proper.
C. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general arrangement of systems and
work included in Contract. Information and components shown on riser
diagrams but not shown on plans, and vice versa, shall apply or be provided as if
expressly required on both. It is not intended to specify or to show every offset,
fitting, or component; however, Contract Documents require components and
PLUMBING
15400-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS & EXPANSIONS
Florence,MA
1.9 PROTECTION OF WORK
A. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at
all times.
B. All fixtures shall be protected by boarding over or by the application of a
standard protective paste covering which is non-injurious to the fixtures.
1.10 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. At the time of final acceptance, the Plumbing Subcontractor shall furnish three
sets of operating instructions for all equipment for delivery to the Owner.
B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall instruct Owner's representative in the
operation of all Plumbing apparatus and systems. In addition, the Plumbing
Subcontractor shall provide video taped instructional demonstrations of all
equipment, operation, start-ups, and maintenance procedures.
C. A minimum of eight (8) hours instruction shall be provided for Plumbing
systems.
1.11 MATERIALS AND CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY
A. All materials used in the contract shall be new and first class in every respect,
without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for
which they are intended.
B. This Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a
regular working schedule in harmony with other tradesmen on the job. He shall
also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to the proper and
expeditious laying out of his work.
1.12 LAYOUT OF WORK
A. The arrangement of all piping indicated on the drawings is diagrammatic only,
and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the
building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs,bends, offsets, etc.
B. This Contractor shall layout all work and be responsible for the accuracy of it.
Conditions at the building shall be the determine factor for all measurements.
All overhead piping shall be laid out so as to obtain maximum headroom.
1.13 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
PLUMBING
15400-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS&EXPANSIONS
Florence,MA
C. Within thirty (30) days of award of contract, the Plumbing Subcontractor shall
submit for the Architect/Engineer's approval, six copies of the manufacturers'
shop drawings, detail prints, and data sheets for the following items:
1. Tempering Valves.
2. Access Panels.
3. Floor Drains.
4. Fixtures and Trim.
5. Valves.
6. Floor Cleanouts.
7. Wall Access Cleanouts.
8. Insulation.
9. Wall Hydrants.
10. Backflow Preventers.
11. Pressure Gauges.
12. Temperature Gauges.
13. Vacuum Breakers.
14. Shock Arrestors.
15. Trap Primers.
16. Hose Bibbs.
17. Hose Bibb Vacuum Breaker.
18. Pressure Reducing Valves.
19. Pipe Markers.
20. Fixed Air Gaps.
21. Roof Drains
D. No fabrication, ordering, delivery to the site or other steps shall be taken with
respect to those items requiring shop drawings or manufacturers' detail drawings
to be submitted or submittals of information for review, all to the Architect, until
he returns such to the submittor carrying either the notation "Approved" or
"Approved as Corrected" as indicated by the Architect or his Engineer. An
"Approved as Corrected" notation means that changes as indicated must be
incorporated or the qualifying acceptance will be considered void.
1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY
A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials to
the building site when required, so as to carry out his work efficiently and to
avoid delaying his work and that of other trades.
1.8 TOOLS, SCAFFOLDING, ETC.
A. All necessary tools, machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of ..,A
this contract shall be provided by the Plumbing Subcontractor.
PLUMBING
15400-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS & EXPANSIONS
Florence,MA
4. All equipment and fixtures being furnished by other equipment
contractors shall be complete with all faucets, trim, regulators and
components.
1.5 CODES, STANDARDS, ORDINANCES
A. All work shall conform to the requirements of all codes and regulations
governing such work, as may be required by local and state ordinances.
1. Where the provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any
codes,rules or regulations,the latter shall govern.
2. Where the Contract Documents are in excess of applicable codes, rules
or regulations, the Contract Provisions shall govern unless otherwise
directed by the Architect.
B. Any material or operation specified by reference to the published specifications
of a manufacturer of any of the following shall comply with the requirements of
the current specifications or standard listed.
1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
2. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
Engineers (ASHRAE).
3. Institute of Boiler Rating(IBR).
4. Air Moving and Conditioning Association(AMCA).
5. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
6. American Gas Association(AGA).
7. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA).
8. National Board of Fire Underwriters(NBFU).
9. Underwriters'Laboratories (UL).
10. United States of America Standards Association(USAS).
11. Occupational Safety and Health Act(OSHA).
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop and erection drawings and descriptive and supportive literature for
all work in accordance with the General Conditions. Approval by the
Architect/Engineer must be obtained prior to delivery of material to the site.
B. If a resubmittal of Shop Drawings is required due to substitution by the
Contractor of equipment not equal to the specified equipment, the Engineer
reserves the right to directly bill the Contractor and receive payment for review
of these shop drawings prior to their release at a rate of$75.00 per hour with a
two (2)hour minimum.
PLUMBING
15400-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS & EXPANSIONS
Florence,MA
10. Insulate all exposed water and waste piping below handicap lavatories in
accordance with ADA requirements.
11. Work included in this section as shown on Plumbing Drawings and
including all Architectural Plans, Structural, Heating and Air
Conditioning Plans.
12. Furnish and install floor drains as indicated on plans.
13. Furnish and install new water service&meter as indicated on drawings.
14. Furnish 10" x 10"access panels for all locations where soil or waste pipe
cleanouts or water shutoff valves are concealed by new walls or
partitions. Access panels installed by General Contractor. Coordinate
locations with Architects.
15. Furnish and install exterior wall hydrants where indicated on plans.
C. This Contractor shall include as part of his contract, all charges for start-up,
checking, adjusting and field inspections and service representatives for all
special systems and equipment. Provide signed documentation for above
procedures from factory or service representative. Systems include:
1. Gas fired Water Heater
2. All other systems and equipment requiring manufacturers installation
review.
D. Reference to Drawings: Work to be performed is shown on Drawings listed at
the end of this section.
1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. The following work in conjunction with this section of the specifications shall be
done under sections of the specifications by the contractor so designated. This
work shall be done at no expense to the Plumbing Subcontractor.
1. All cutting, patching, blocking, furring-in or piping preparation and
painting.
2. Flashing of all roof penetrations and floor drains.
3. Access panels furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and installed by
General Contractor in sizes and locations as shown on the plumbing ..
drawings.
PLUMBING
15400-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS &EXPANSIONS
Florence,MA
F. Before starting work,visit the site and examine the conditions under which work
must be performed including preparatory work performed under other Sections
or Contracts, or by Owner. Report conditions which might adversely affect
work in writing through Contractor to Architect. Do not proceed with work until
defects have been corrected and conditions are satisfactory. Commencement of
work shall be construed as complete acceptance of existing conditions and
preparatory work.
1.3 SUMMARY OF WORK
A. The scope of work without limiting the generality thereof, includes the
furnishing and installing of the following items of work and related items
incidental thereto, shown on Drawings, and as herein specified:
B. The following schedule is part, but not necessarily all inclusive of the items in
this section of the contract.
1. Furnish and install complete cold and hot water system for domestic use
in existing building.
2. Furnish and install complete soil, waste and vent piping system in
building to all fixtures as indicated on plans.
3. Furnish and install sanitary sewer and storm drain system's as indicated
on plans.
4. Furnish and install new water mains in building.
5. Furnish and install all related storm drain and rainleader piping as
indicated on plans. Furnish and install new storm drain line as indicated
on plans.
6. Furnish and install Gas fired water heater as indicated on plans.
7. Furnish and install water, waste, etc. to equipment which are furnished
under other section of specifications,and make all final connections.
8. Insulate all domestic cold water, hot water, all horizontal sanitary and
rain conductor piping.
9. Furnish and install all fixtures and trim as specified or called for on
plans.
PLUMBING
15400-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS & EXPANSIONS
Florence,MA
that work with persons on his own payroll,if such Sub-Bidder,after Sub-Bid
openings,shows to the satisfaction of the City of Nothampton that he does
customarily perform such class of work or the part thereof with persons on his
own payroll and is qualified so to do. This Section of the Specifications
requires that the following classes of work shall be listed in Paragraph E under
the conditions indicated herein.
Classes of Work
Insulation
B. List of Drawings: The Work to be done by the Subcontractor for work of this
Section is shown on the following listed Drawings. This Subcontractor shall
carefully inspect all the below listed Drawings, not just those pertaining to his
sub-trade, and shall provide all work normally done by his sub-trade unless
specifically called for otherwise, regardless of where among the Drawings it
appears.
Site Work
Architectural
Equipment
Structural
Plumbing
Fire
HVAC
Electrical
Technology
1.2 REFERENCES
A. The GENERAL DOCUMENTS, as listed on the Table of Contents, and
applicable parts of Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, shall be included
in and made a part of this Section.
B. Examine Drawings and other Specification Sections for requirements that affect
work of this Section.
C. As used in this Section, "provide" means "furnish and install'.
D. Where an item is referred to in singular number in Contract Documents, provide
as many such items as are necessary to complete the work.
E. Before submitting bid, visit and carefully examine site to identify existing
conditions and difficulties that will affect work of this Section. No extra
payment will be allowed for additional work caused by unfamiliarity with site
conditions that are visible or readily construed by experienced observer.
PLUMBING
15400-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS & EXPANSIONS
Florence,MA
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. The drawings and conditions of the Contract,including General and
Supplementary Conditions, and all Division 1 sections, apply to the work of this
Section. Work to be done under this Section is shown on the contract drawings
listed at the front of the specifications. The listing of Contract drawings and
Specifications shall not limit the Sub-Contractors responsibility to determine the
full extent of his work as required by all Contract drawings and Specifications.
B. Time,manner and requirements for bidding filed sub-bids
1. Sub-bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall be
filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at a time and place as
stipulated in the"NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS"
The following shall appear on the upper left hand of the envelope:
NAME OF SUB-BIDDER:
NAME OF PROJECT:Lilly Library
SUB-BID FOR SECTION: 15400-Plumbing
2. Each sub-bid submitted for work under this Section shall be on forms furnished
by the Awarding Authority,as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the
General Laws,as amended. Sub-Bid forms may be obtained at the office of the
Awarding Authority or Architect,or may be obtained by written request.
3. Sub-bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied a by a BID
BOND or CASH or CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURERS or CASHIERS
CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company payable to the
City of Norhampton in the amount of 5 percent of the bid. A sub-bid
accompanied by any other form of bid deposit than those specified will be
rejected.
C. Sub-sub-bid Requirements:
1. The Sub-Bidder shall list in Paragraph E of the FORM for SUB-BID the name
and bid price of each person,firm or corporation performing each class of work
or part thereof for which(the Section of the Specifications for that sub-trade)
requires such listing;provided that,in the absence of a contrary provision in the
Specifications,any Sub-Bidder may,without listing any bid price,list his own
name in said paragraph E for any such class of work or part thereof and perform
PLUMBING
15400-1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence.MA
installed horizontally with the bottom of the valve 12"-48" above the
floor. The valve shall also be installed 12" from the wall.
END OF SECTION 15300
FIRE PROTECTION
15300-14
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence.MA
C. Approval of tests by all authorities having jurisdiction over the installation
shall be obtained in writing by the Sprinkler Subcontractor and shall be
submitted to the Owner before final acceptance of his work will be granted.
D. No piping shall be concealed or covered prior to testing and inspection
including backfilling.
E. Notify Architect 48 hours prior to any testing.
1. All equipment, materials and labor necessary for these tests shall be
provided by this Subcontractor without any additional cost to the
Owner.
2. Any other tests required by local ordinance shall be made in
accordance with said regulations.
3. If the test shows any defects, such defects shall be corrected and the
test shall be repeated.
F. The Architect shall be notified 48 hours in advance of any tests so that he or
one of his representatives may be present.
G. After testing, all systems shall be kept under constant pressure until final
acceptance.
H. The engineer shall be notified and shall be present for
1. Main drain test
2. Testing of all system alarms.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. All materials and equipment shall be carefully protected during shipment
and protected during installation and properly handled and stored at the job
site so as to prevent damage. This Subcontractor shall assume full
responsibility for protection for work until its completion and final
acceptance.
3.06 BACKFLOW PREVENTORS
A. The backflow preventor shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and 310 CMR 22.22. The valve shall be
FIRE PROTECTION
15300-13
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence.MA
O. Sprinkler heads shall be located within 4 inches of center line of tile or
within 4" of the center of half of a 4' tile. All sprinkler heads must be
aligned in uniform rows within a room or open area.
3.03 FIRESAFING AND SMOKE SEAL
A. Firesafing and smoke seal is required where pipes penetrate all walls and all
floors.
B. This Subcontractor shall furnish and install for his work, sleeves and
firesafing smoke seal work.
C. Firesafing and smoke seal materials are as follows:
1. "Poke-through" fire containment, USG "THERMAFIBER", fire test
CEG 4-11-78;USG 6-2-76; CEG 8-7-85.
2. USE "THERMAFIBER"Rigid-type,various thickness.
3. USG "THERMAFIBER SMOKE SEAL COMPOUND" -- UL No.
R11327-L,UL No. R11327-R.
4. Dow Corning fire stop sealant and Dow Corning fire stop foam "A"
and"B" UL classified for 1,2 and 3 hours.
D. All firesafing material must be noncombustible as defined by NFPA
standard 220 when tested in accordance with ASTM E136; melt point -
2000F; when in contact with metal,be non-corrosive meeting FS-HH-1-558
B; "k" value of 0.25 or less per ASTM C 518; the material shall be moisture-
resistant, mildew, vermin proof and non-deteriorating. The firesafing
insulation shall meet fire containment tests per ASTM El 19.
E. All sealants and compounds shall be neatly applied to each end of opening
of ceiling, floor or wall penetrations and in accordance with Code
requirements. All penetrations shall be minimum size possible.
3.04 TESTING
A. The systems shall be hydrostatically tested under a pressure of 200 psi for a
period of not less than two hours per NFPA Pamphlet No. 13, and any
defects or leaks shall be remedied. No caulking will be allowed.
B. Perform such other tests as may be required by authorities having 141Wk
jurisdiction including fire underwriters.
FIRE PROTECTION
15300-12
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence.MA
manufacturer's instructions and the contract documents, notify the
Architect/Engineer before proceeding. No equipment installation or
connections shall be made in a manner that voids the manufacturer's
warranty.
E. Install all work in a neat and workmanlike manner using only workmen
thoroughly qualified in the trade or duties they are to perform. Rough work
will be rejected.
F. All material shall be new.
G. It is the intent of these specifications to provide complete systems which are
free from objectionable noises and vibrations. Any equipment that is
generating noise or is vibrating shall be dampened as directed.
H. Piping as indicated on drawings is diagrammatic and exact locations are
subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer.
L Pipe shall run straight and true at the proper pitch and shall be firmly
supported without undue stress.
J. All of the equipment shall be constructed and installed to operate safely and
without leakage, undue wear, noise, vibration corrosion or water hammer.
All materials and workmanship shall be of good quality and free from
defects. All materials shall be installed, connected and supported according
to the manufacturer's recommended best practices.
K. Installation of pipes shall be as high as possible, consistent with other trades.
L. Equipment shall be provided with all components required by the National
Electric Code and all applicable NFPA Documents.
M. Floor, Wall and Ceiling Escutcheon Plates: Provide for all sprinkler piping
passing through floors, walls and ceilings, approved type, one-piece or split-
type escutcheon plates. Plates shall be securely anchored in place with set
screws or other approved positive means.
N. All piping shall be pitched in accordance with NFPA #13. As much as
possible, piping shall pitch back to main system drain. Where
supplementary drains are provided, they are to run to unfinished areas only.
All lines must be drainable and drains are to be provided at all low points,
whether or not specifically shown.
FIRE PROTECTION
15300-11
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence.MA
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Design is based on the hazard occupancies indicated
B. Design Densities:
1. Light hazard .10 density over 1500 square feet plus 100 gpm for
inside hose streams.
2. Ordinary hazard group I .15 density over 1500 square feet plus 250
gpm for inside hose streams.
3. Ordinary hazard group H 0.2 gpm/sf over 1500 square feet plus 250
gpm for hose streams
4. The application areas can be reduced based on ceiling heights and the
use of quick response sprinklers in accordance with NFPA 13,
11.2..3.2.3.1
3.02 INSTALLATION OF WORK
A. Examine the site and all drawings before proceeding with the layout and
installation of this work.
B. Arrange the work essentially as shown on Drawing FP-1, exact layout to be
made on the job to suit actual conditions. Confer and cooperate with other
trades on the job so that all work will be installed in proper relationship.
Precise location of parts to coordinate with other work is the responsibility
of this Subcontractor.
C. Arrange for required chases, slots and openings. This Subcontractor is liable
for cutting or patching made necessary by his failure to make proper
arrangements in this respect.
D. Indicated equipment connections are based on equipment of a given
manufacturer. This Subcontractor assumes responsibility for proper
arrangement of pipes, sprinkler heads and accessories, etc. to connect
approved equipment in a proper and approved manner. Follow equipment
manufacturer's detailed instructions and recommendations in the installation 004,01,
and connections of all equipment. In case of conflict between
FIRE PROTECTION
15300-10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence.MA
out to not less than the original diameter. Piping shall be kept free from
scale and dirt.
C. Nipples shall be of the same material as the pipe or tubing with which they
are installed.
2.05 HANGERS,ANCHORS
A. Hangers shall support the piping from the building structure to maintain the
required grade and pitch of the pipe lines, prevent vibration, secure the
piping in place and provide for expansion and contraction. Non-metallic
and non-metallic resilient elements shall be used with hangers.
B. Hanger types and spacing per NFPA Pamphlet #13. Seismic Bracing shall
be provided in accordance with NFPA 13
C. Vertical piping shall be supported at its base by a base fitting set on a
pedestal or foundation. The vertical piping shall be clamped or secured at
each end.
2.06 BACKFLOW PREVENTOR
A. The backflow shall be of the double check type and shall be equipped with
UL/FM OS&Y gate valves. The assembly shall consist of two
independent check modules within a single housing, sleeve access port,
four test cocks and two OS&Y Gate valves. Checks shall be removable
and serviceable,without use of special tools. The housing shall be type
304 stainless steel. The check valve shall have reversible elastomeric
disks and in operation shall produce drip tight closure against the reverse
flow of liquid. The backflow preventor shall be an Ames Maxim M20ON
or approved equal.
OW
FIRE PROTECTION
15300-9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence.MA
C. All pipe hangers and hanger spacings shall be in strict accordance with
NFPA Pamphlet No. 13. Seismic Bracing shall be provide in accordance
with NFPA 13
D. Valve Sign: Properly lettered, approved metal signs shall be attached to
each control valve.
E. Floor, Wall and Ceiling Escutcheon Plates: Provide for all sprinkler piping
passing through floors, walls and ceilings, approved type, one-piece or split-
type escutcheon plates. Plates shall be securely anchored in place with set
screws or other approved positive means.
2.03 SLEEVES, PLATES &INSERTS
A. Sprinkler Subcontractor shall keep General Contractor fully informed as to
the position of pipes and openings required for the work under this Section
and coordinate with the General Contractor so that there may be no delay
caused by lack of information. Furnish and install all sleeves, inserts and
related components.
B. Sleeves shall be installed around all piping passing through concrete
foundations, walls, slabs, roofs partitions or other building construction.
Sleeves shall be set in new concrete construction before pouring. The
Sprinkler Subcontractor shall be held responsible for the locations, setting
and anchoring of sleeves in a substantial manner. The locations will be
approved by the Architect before concrete is poured.
C. All sleeves installed in vertical positions shall be constructed of Schedule 40
steel pipe projecting %z inch above finished floor. All sleeves installed in
horizontal position shall be constructed of standard weight steel pipe flush
with wall surface. Sleeves in fire-rated building walls and in floor slabs
shall be installed with approved packing between sleeves and piping to
provide for fire stop with the same rating as the wall it penetrates. Sprinkler
Subcontractor shall be responsible for making waterproof all penetrations of
Sprinkler pipe through walls and slabs.
2.04 JOINTS
A. Joints and connections of piping shall be made permanently gas and water
tight.
B. Threaded joints shall be made with a lubricant on the male threads only. All
burrs and/or cuttings shall be removed and the pipe shall be reamed or filled
FIRE PROTECTION
15300-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence.MA
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM(WET)
A. Sprinkler heads shall be as scheduled on the drawings. All sprinklers shall
be UL listed and shall not utilize O rings
B. Spare sprinklers shall be provided in one cabinet, Reliable Model A-1
cabinet. Cabinet shall have an assortment of heads as used on the job and
also an approved type sprinkler head wrench for each type head. Mount on
wall along side riser valve.
C The General Contractor shall install access panels.
D. Butterfly valves 2" through 3" shall be equal to Victaulic Series 727 Fireball
with built in tamper switch.
E. Butterfly valves 4" and larger equal to Victaulic 708 with built in tamper
switch.
F. Tamper switches shall be Notifier or Potter Electric Signal Company, and
shall be installed on all control valves for the sprinkler system.
1. For 2" and smaller, valves shall be Model PMS-O plug-type
switches.
2. For 2%" and larger, valves shall be Model OSYS gate valve
switches.
H. Cast Iron Gate Valves shall be OS&Y, solid disk with rising stem, flanged.
The valve shall be FM approved.
2.02 PIPING AND FITTINGS
A. Wet pipe sprinkler piping shall be standard-weight black steel pipe or
lightwall pipe with fittings. Piping 2" and smaller shall be schedule 40.
Piping 2-1/2" and larger shall be schedule 10 minimum. Fittings for
schedule 40 piping shall be screwed, except where flanged fittings are
required. Flanged fittings shall be 150 pound class. Fittings on schedule 10
piping shall be mechanical couplings,Vitaulic or approved equal..
B. All valves, ball drips, vacuum breakers, pressure gauges, angle and all other
miscellaneous appurtenances shall be approved for sprinkler service by a
nationally recognized testing laboratory.
FIRE PROTECTION
15300-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence.MA
indicate with dimensions and grades all underground pipe, conduit, cables,
etc., showing locations of all valves,junctions, connections, ends and other
pertinent data.
B. Each such Subcontractor shall show his daily progress by coloring the
various pipes, fixtures, apparatus and associated appurtenances exactly as
they are erected. This process shall incorporate both the changes noted
above and other deviations from the original drawings, whether resulting
from job conditions encountered or from any other cause. Principle
dimensions of concealed work shall be recorded. At pipe installations,valve
numbers shall be added as soon as established.
C. The marked-up and colored-in prints will be used as a guide for determining
the progress of the work installed. They shall be inspected monthly by the
appropriate mechanical or electrical engineering consultant of the Architect
and shall be corrected immediately if found either inaccurate or incomplete.
D. Before completion of the project, the record drawing prints shall be
submitted to the appropriate engineering consultant, through the Architect,
for final inspection and comments. The prints, along with comments and
recommendations, will be returned to the appropriate Subcontractors who
shall then each, at their own expense, prepare a complete set of record "As-
Built" tracings by obtaining, through arrangement with the Contractor, a set
of mylar transparency prints of the original tracings, and revising same to
incorporate the same information. Quality of drafting shall be equal to that
on originals.
E. Refer to Owner's Special Conditions.
FIRE PROTECTION
15300-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence.MA
C. Electrical work required under this contract shall be done in accordance with
Section 16000 and applicable provisions of the National Electric Code and
state and local ordinances.
1.08 MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. At the completion of the project, the Sprinkler Subcontractor shall submit
three (3) complete sets of manuals containing equipment data, maintenance
requirements and parts lists for each item of equipment. Manuals shall be in
three-ring hard-cover binders. The contractor shall provide copies of NFPA
25 in each binder.
B. Manuals shall be approved by Engineer prior to delivery to Owner.
1.09 SCHEDULING
A. Scheduling of work shall be coordinated with Architect, Engineer, General
Contractor and Owner.
1.10 PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify all piping by OSHA. Color Coding using bands not less than two
inches in width, spaced not more than twenty feet apart and as required by
OSHA.
1.11 GUARANTEE
A. The Sprinkler Subcontractor shall guarantee all work from date of
acceptance, to be free of defects. The Sprinkler Subcontractor shall make all
repairs, perform all service and replace all defective work and equipment
during the one-year guarantee at his own expense; there shall be no cost to
the Owner.
1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. The General Contractor will furnish, free of charge to Subcontractor, a
complete and separate set of blue line prints of pertinent portions of the
Contract Drawings for record drawing purposes. Contractor shall maintain
current, at the site, this set of record drawings on which he shall accurately
show the actual installation of all his work, and indicating thereon any
variations from the basic Contract Drawings. All changes, including those
issued by addendum, formal changes, other instructions by the Architect and
the Engineer and those due to all other causes shall be recorded. Include,
but do not limit to, changes in sizes, grades, locations, and dimensions, and
FIRE PROTECTION
15300-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence.MA
2. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM).
3. American Gas Association(AGA).
4. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA).
5. National Board of Fire Underwriters (NBFU).
6. Underwriters'Laboratories (UL).
7. United States of America Standards Association(USAS).
8. Occupational Safety and Health Act(OSHA).
1.05 COMPLIANCE WITH CODE
A. All work shall conform to the requirements of all codes and regulations
governing such work or as may be required by Local or State Ordinances or
State Building Code.
B. Where the provisions of Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules
or regulations,the latter shall govern.
C. Where the Contract Documents are in excess of applicable codes, rules or
regulations, the contract provisions shall govern unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer.
1.06 PERMITS AND FEES
A. The Sprinkler Subcontractor shall obtain all necessary permits and approval
of the work by the local authorities. He shall obtain all other permits,
licenses or certificates of approval, arrange all inspections and pay all fees
and charges in connection therewith.
1.07 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Electrical work, including famishing and installing of starters will be the
responsibility of Division 16 Contractor, unless specifically required
otherwise by this specification.
B. Provide diagrams and instructions necessary for the electrician to make
connections properly. ^O
FIRE PROTECTION
15300-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence.MA
C. Reference to Drawings: Work to be performed is shown on Drawings listed
at the end of this section.
1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS AND REVIEWS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract
and Division 1 Specifications sections.
1. Approved shop drawings from Insurance Co.
2. Quick Response Sprinkler heads.
3. Tamper switches.
4. Water flow switch.
5. Spare sprinklers with cabinet and wrench.
6. Access panels.
7. Double Check Backflow Preventer
8. Glycol loop (Crawl space)
B. No fabrication, ordering, delivery to the site or other steps shall be taken
with respect to those items requiring shop drawings or manufacturer's detail
drawings to be submitted or submittals of information for review, all to the
Architect, until he returns such to the submittor carrying either the notation
"Approved" or "Approved as Noted" as indicated by the Architect or his
Engineer.
C. The Sprinkler Subcontractor shall assume the cost of and entire
responsibility for any changes in the work as shown on the Drawings which
may be occasioned by approval of materials other than as specified.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Any material or equipment component or operation specified by reference to
the published specifications of a manufacturer or any of the following shall
comply with the requirements of the current specifications or standard listed.
In case of a conflict between referenced specifications and the project
specifications,the project specifications shall govern:
1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
FIRE PROTECTION
15300-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence.MA
A. The scope of the work under this Section consists of furnishing and
installing of all labor, materials, scaffolding, rigging, equipment, services
and incidentals necessary to complete all Sprinkler Systems work and
without limiting the generality thereof, including the following:
1. New wet sprinkler systems for the building. Each system includes
water flow switches, electric bell, inspectors tests, tamper switches,
and all necessary valves and fittings for a complete system in
accordance with NFPA Standard No. 13, and City of Northampton
Water Department requirements.
2. This Subcontractor shall coordinate his work with the work of all
other trades.
3. Complete testing of new systems.
4. Obtaining all permits and paying all fees associated with this work.
5. Preparation of shop drawings and approval prior to fabrication of all
components of system, all in accordance with the approval and
recommendations of the NFPA Pamphlet No. 13 and local and state
regulations and ordinances and Owner's Insurance Rating
Company's specific requirements.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. Excavation and backfill.
2. Counter-flashing unless otherwise noted or shown.
3. Installation of access panels.
4. Painting of finished work as noted.
5. All chases, soffits and openings.
6. Wiring of electrically supervised valves to trouble alarms in panels,
wiring from trouble alarm to Fire Department call system, wiring
from the building sprinkler service flow switches or existing alarm
check valves to the building fire alarm systems and to the Fire
Department call system and electric power to panels by Electrical
Subcontractor.
FIRE PROTECTION
15300-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence.MA
SECTION 15300:FIRE PROTECTION
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. The drawings and conditions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions, and all Division 1 sections, apply to the work
of this Section. Work to be done under this Section is shown on the
contract drawings listed at the front of the specifications. The listing of
Contract drawings and Specifications shall not limit the Sub-Contractors
responsibility to determine the full extent of his work as required by all
Contract drawings and Specifications.
B. Time, manner and requirements for bidding filed sub-bids
1. Sub-bids for work under this section shall be for the complete work
and shall be filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding
Authority at a time and place as stipulated in the "Invitation to
Bid."
The following shall appear on the upper left hand of the envelope:
Name of Sub-Bidder:
Name of Project: Lilly Library
Sub-Bid for Section: 15300 -Fire Protection
2. Each sub-bid submitted for work under this Section shall be on a
form furnished by the Awarding Authority, as required by Section
44F of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-Bid
forms may be obtained at the office of the Awarding Authority or
Architect, or may be obtained by written request.
3. Sub-bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied
a by a BID BOND or CASH or CERTIFIED CHECK or a
TREASURERS or CASHIERS CHECK issued by a responsible
bank or trust company payable to the City of Northampton in the
amount of 5 percent of the bid. sub-bid accompanied by any other
form of bid deposit than those specified will be rejected.
1.02 SUMMARY
FIRE PROTECTION
15300-1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. Traveling cables shall be of the best grade for the service and shall be so installed to
provide a proper size loop to the car. They shall have a fire resistant outer braid.
3.04 PAINTING
A. All exposed metal work at elevator entrances and within the elevator cab shall be
shop painted with baked-enamel finish as specified hereinabove.
B. All other metal work shall be properly painted after installation as part of the work of
this Section with one coat of rust-inhibitive metal primer and two coats of metal
protective paint.
3.05 FINAL TEST
A. In addition to the other requirements, tests and remedies herein provided, upon
completion of the elevator installation, the Elevator Manufacturer and/or Elevator
Installing Firm shall make, in the presence of the Architect, a running speed test with
full maximum load on the elevator equipment, as installed, meets the speed, capacity
and all other requirements of the specifications.
B. In the event the equipment does not meet all requirements of the
Specification, the Elevator Manufacturer and/or Elevator Installing firm
shall promptly remove from the premises all work condemned by the
Architect as failing to conform to the Contract, and shall promptly replace
and re-execute his own work in accordance with the Contract, without
expense to the Owner, and shall bear all expense of making good all work of
other contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement.
END OF SECTION 14212
HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR 14212- 19
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
finish. All exposed surfaces of the doors and frames shall receive
applications of mineral filler with each application, baked and sanded and
rubbed smooth between coats. Colors of finishes shall closely match special
color chips furnished by Architect.
2. Structural members shall receive a shop coat of paint.
F. Handicapped Raising Image System(Tactile):
1. Tactile images to meet Federal Handicapped Access Standards under public
law 93-112, Section 502 and 503. They are also to comply with the
Massachusetts State Elevator Code.
2. Braille and raised tactile numbers.
3. Floor number plates at jambs of elevator doors.
4. Arrow access indicator.
5. Any other images as may be required to comply with code.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of elevator plant shall be complete in all respects and in a first-class
manner, in accordance with the approved shop drawings, the manufacturer's printed
specifications and instructions, and the requirements of the laws, rules, regulations,
codes, and industry standards specified hereinbefore.
B. Elevator work shall be complete in all respects, with all components properly
adjusted, and with all operating mechanisms and controls in proper working order.
3.02 EXCAVATION
A. A hole shall be excavated to accommodate the plunger and cylinder and the bid shall
be based on the possibility of encountering rocks, boulders, sand and water. If such
obstructions are encountered,no additional compensation will be provided.
3.03 WIRING
A. Furnish and install as work of this Section all wiring necessary to connect operating
buttons, switches and signals in the hoistway and all electrical equipment on the car
to the elevator control panel. The wiring shall be installed in a neat and orderly
manner, and shall be installed in conduit, electrical metallic tubing or metal
wireways, excluding traveling cables, except that flexible conduit may be used for 40"IN
short runs.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR 14212- 18
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
4. A protective device shall extend the full height of and project beyond the
front edge of the car door. Should this device touch a person or object while
the car door is closing, the Car and hoistway doors shall return to their open
position. The doors shall remain open until the expiration of a
predetermined interval and then close automatically.
5. The doors shall open automatically as the elevator is leveling and close
either after the expiration of a time interval or the moment a car button call
is registered. Only the door shall open for the landing being served. If
desired, it shall be possible to stop or reverse the doors. In case of power
interruptions or failure of the operator, it shall be possible to open the doors
manually from within the car.
6. Hoistway Door Unlocking Device: Hoistway door unlocking devices as
specified by the ANSI A-17.1 Code shall be provided to permit authorized
persons to gain access to hoistway when elevator car is away from the
landing.
7. Electronic Passenger Sensing Device: A solid state electronic detector
designed to operate as described below shall be provided at the entrance of
the elevator car. In addition, an electro-mechanical reversal edge shall be
provided on the leading edge of the car door.
a. After a stop is made, the doors shall remain open for an adjustable
time interval. Closing may be initiated instantaneously by
registration of a car call.
b. The doors will remain open as long as the electronic detector senses
the presence of a passenger or object in the door opening. If door
movement is obstructed for a predetermined time, the doors will
resume normal closing operation. If the electro-mechanical reversal
edge contacts a person or object while closing, the doors will
immediately stop and reopen. Closing will be initiated one-half
second after the passenger or object has moved from the opening.
D. Door Hangers and Tracks: Furnish and install for each hoistway sliding door sheave
type two point suspension hangers and track complete. Hanger brackets shall be
integral with the door or applied. Sheaves and rollers shall be of steel and shall
include ball bearings properly sealed to retain grease lubrication. Hangers shall be
equipped with adjustable ball bearing rollers to take the up thrust of the doors.
Tracks shall be drawn steel shapes, smooth surface, and arranged to hold oil
lubrication. Suitable means shall be used to transmit motion from one door panel to
the other.
E. Finish of Doors and Frames:
1. All exposed parts of hoistway doors and frames shall be thoroughly cleaned,
followed by a baked-on primer coat and sprayed-on two-coat baked enamel
HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR 14212- 17
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
securely fastened to sills and hanger supports and shall be returned on the
hoistway side to present a neat appearance.
3. Doors: Door panels shall bear U.L. "B" Labels, and be flush and formed
from not lighter than No. 16 U.S. gauge furniture steel and all joints shall be
welded their full length, and shall contain suitable material for sound
deadening. Bottom of doors shall be provided with removable laminated
phenolic guides which run in the sill slots with minimum clearance. All
doors to be reinforced and provided with keyways as required for door
operating mechanisms and to meet the specified codes. Doors shall be
reinforced for separate hangers or built to include integral hangers.
4. Sills: The sills shall be extruded aluminum with fluted wearing surface.
Grooves for the door guides shall be machined with minimum clearance.
The sills shall be supported on steel anchors securely fastened to the floor
construction.
5. Fascia Plates and Toe Guards: Fascias shall be No. 16 U.S. gauge steel for
the lowest landing,gradually beveled to the wall.
6. Hanger Supports and Cover Plates: Hanger supports shall be 3/16 in. thick
formed sections securely bolted to the struts. Cover plates shall be made of
No. 16 U.S. gauge steel extending the full travel of the doors and shall be �*•
made in removable sections for ease in servicing the hangers from within the
elevator car.
7. Struts and Closer Angles: Structural steel angles shall be furnished of
sufficient size to accommodate the door closers. Angles to be continuous
and securely bolted to the sills and building beams above.
8. Sight Guards: Sight guards shall be furnished, finished to match the doors.
C. Door Operators:
1. Doors on the car and at each hoistway landing shall be operated quietly and
smoothly by an electric operator which shall open and close the car door and
hoistway door simultaneously.
2. An electric contact for the car door shall be provided which shall prevent the
elevator movement away from the landing unless the door is in the closed
position as defined in the specified codes.
3. Each hoistway door shall be equipped with a positive electro-mechanical
interlock and auxiliary door closing device so that the elevator can be
operated only after the interlock circuit is established. The interlock
operations shall comply with the specified codes.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR 14212- 16
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
11. Lighting shall be fluorescent type, mounted above a suspended 1/2 in. by 1/2
in. white enamel finished metal egg-crate ceiling.
12. 1/4 in. by 2 in. Type 302 stainless steel handrails with No. 4 satin finish shall
be provided on two sides of the cab.
13. Type 302 stainless steel protective buttons, with No. 4 satin finish, and
removable protective pad shall be provided for each elevator car.
14. All interior and exterior steel surfaces shall be bonderized or given an
approved rust-preventive process before the finish is applied. The exterior
steel surfaces of car panels shall be given an application of "Insulmat" or
other approved fire-retardant sound deadening material.
15. Finish: All furniture steel work at cars shall be thoroughly cleaned, followed
by a baked-on primer coat and sprayed-on two-coat baked enamel finish. All
exposed surfaces of the furniture steel work shall receive applications of
mineral filler with each coat application, baked and sanded and rubbed
smooth between coats. Colors of finishes shall closely match special color
chips furnished by Architect.
16. Particular care must be taken in boxing and crating the cab to avoid damage
in transit, as cab and accessories must be in perfect condition at the time of
final inspection after installation in the building.
2.06 DOORS AND ENTRANCES
A. Car doors shall be 3'-0" wide by T-0" high, single panel, horizontal sliding type
construction not less than 1" thick. The car door leaves shall be hung on two-point
suspension sheave-type hangers similar to those specified for hoistway doors. Doors
shall be especially designed and reinforced for power operation.
1. Doors shall be faced with Type 302 sheet stainless steel with No. 4 satin
finish.
B. Hollow Steel Elevator Hoistway Entrances:
1. Furnish and install entrance units complete with unit frames, sills, struts,
hanger supports and cover, fascia and dust cover or toe guard as described
below. The unit frame, sill, struts, and hanger supports and cover shall be
inserted prior to the erection of the rough walls and shall be set in proper
relation to the elevator guides. Door panels shall be installed after the walls
are finished.
2. Unit Frames: The unit frames shall be made from No. 14 U.S. Gauge best
grade furniture steel and shall comprise head and jamb sections with integral
casing of trim and bolted to form one piece unit frames. Frames shall
contain suitable material for effective sound deadening. All frames shall be
HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR 14212- 15
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. Car Platforms: The car platforms shall consist of a steel frame, steel stringers, and a
substantial wood floor, or shall be constructed entirely of steel suitably reinforced.
Metal car threshold plates shall be included with necessary grooves for car door.
The underside of wooden platform shall be fireproofed with sheet steel. The
platforms shall be arranged to accept vinyl composition tile flooring specified
hereinbelow.
C. Car Enclosure:
1. The car shall be of the following construction and design.
2. Side walls shall be constructed of full-height lengths of plastic laminate
pressure-bonded to a wood core with a fire-retardant backing sheet. Colors
to be selected by Architect from plastic laminate manufacturer's full line of
colors.
3. The car canopies shall be of best-grade cold-rolled furniture steel not less
than No. 14 U.S. standard gauge. The canopies shall be on one-piece
construction and reinforced to form a working platform to withstand the
weight of two workmen and handrails and emergency exit.
4. The entrance columns shall be square and shall be formed integral with the
return panels. A fascia shall be provided between the return panels from top
of car entrance to ceiling. Entrance panels, return panels and fascia shall be
Type 302(18-8) stainless steel,not less than 14 ga., with No. 4 satin finish.
5. Finish flooring shall be Carpet#1 furnished and installed under this Section
and shall conform to material and workmanship standards set forth under
CARPET Section.
6. The car shall be securely fastened to the platform.
7. The car shall be provided with emergency exits in conformance with
requirements of the ANSI Code. The top exit shall be held in place by
suitable fastenings removable from outside of ceiling.
8. Necessary cutouts shall be provided in the car for operating fixtures, signal
fixtures, etc., as specified elsewhere.
9. Ventilation shall consist of a two speed exhaust fan located in the car
ceiling.
10. The Elevator Subcontractor shall furnish and install a suitable telephone
cabinet in the car and shall furnish and install the necessary telephone cable
from the cabinet to a junction box furnished and installed by other trades in
the hoistway. The telephone instrument shall be furnished and connected by
others. Aol*
HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR 14212- 14
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
continuous pressure, spring return with key removable only in the "off'
position.
3. When the hoistway access switch is turned to the "on" position,the car shall
move with the hoistway door at that landing open and car door open, but no
other landing door open, provided top-of-car operation (hereinafter
described)is cut out.
4. There shall be located on the car crosshead a single fixture containing the
following: an emergency stop toggle switch, a toggle switch for making the
access switch inoperative, and a female receptacle for a plug-in type
operating device. A plug-in type operating device shall be furnished,
containing continuous pressure buttons for operating the car. Operation
from top of the car shall be obtained by simultaneous continuous pressure of
the appropriate direction button and a safety operating button after these
buttons have been made effective.
5. Operation from top of the car shall not be possible unless all electric door
contacts are closed.
6. Under keyed access switch operation, the travel of the car shall be limited to
a zone extending below the top landing for a distance not exceeding the
height of the car enclosure.
F. Two-Way Leveling: The elevator shall be provided with an automatic two-way
leveling device so designed that landing stops shall be approached at reduced speed
from either direction of travel with up or down and the car shall level with an
accuracy of 1/4 inch under the varying loads. Landing level shall be maintained as
long as the car is within the leveling zone.
G. Automatic Terminal Stops: The elevator shall be equipped with an automatic
stopping device arranged to bring the car to a stop at the terminal landings
independent of the regular operating device in the car.
2.05 CARS
A. Car Frames:
1. Suitable car frames or sub-truss of structural steel shapes, bolted, or welded
or riveted together shall be provided.
2. Slide guides shall be furnished at the top and bottom of each of the upright
members of the car frame subtruss, and structural members of suitable size
shall be furnished under the platform to transmit the load from the plunger to
the platform. Brace rods or structural members as required to form a
thoroughly rigid structure of car frame and platform shall be provided.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR 14212- 13
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
D. Signals:
1. Car Position Indicator: An electric position indicator of approved design
shall be provided in each elevator car. Indicator shall consist of a finished
faceplate with plastic numerals behind each of which shall be a small
shielded light bulb, so arranged that as the car travels through the hoistway,
its position shall be indicated by the illumination of the numeral
corresponding to the landing at which the car is stopped.
2. Hall Position Indicator: An electric position indicator shall be provided at
the Main Level. The indicator will consist of a finished face place with
numerals, behind each of which shall be a small shielded light bulb, so
arranged that as the car travels through the hoistway its position shall be
indicated by the illumination of the numeral corresponding to the landing at
which the car is stopped or passing.
3. Illuminated Car and Hall Buttons: Button units shall be of the illuminated
type. When a call is registered by pressing the button, it shall illuminate to
indicate that a call has been registered. The button shall remain lighted until
the elevator answers the call. Hall button face plates shall be of Type 302
stainless steel with No. 4 satin finish.
4. Alarm Bell: An alarm bell shall be provided in the hoistway, connected to
an alarm bell button in each car.
5. A hall lantern and gong shall be provided above each hoistway entrance
jamb to indicate the direction in which the car is set to travel.
6. Make all provisions to comply with the State and ANSI Handicapped Codes
referred to hereinbefore.
E. Inspection Operation(Hoistway Access Switch):
1. The car shall be run to the top landing by the regular operations device and
then by means of a key-operated switch in the car "normal" operation shall
be modified as follows:
a. Automatic leveling cut out.
b. Power door operation cut out.
C. Normal operating devices (car and landing)made ineffective.
d. Access switches (hereinafter described)made effective.
2. Each elevator shall be provided with hoistway access switches at the top and
bottom terminal landings. This switch shall be the key-operated type,
HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR 14212- 12
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. Simplex Selective-Collective Automatic Operation: Control of the elevator shall be
automatic in operation by means of pushbuttons in the car numbered to correspond to
floors served, for registering car stops and by "up-down" pushbuttons at each
intermediate landing and "call" pushbuttons at terminal landings. The momentary
pressing of one or more buttons shall dispatch the car to the designated landings in
the order in which the landings are reached by the car, irrespective of the sequence in
which the buttons are pressed. Each landing call shall be cancelled when answered.
When the car is traveling in the up direction, it shall stop at all floors for which car
buttons or "up" hall buttons have been pressed; it shall not stop at floors where
"down" buttons only have been pressed, unless the stop for that floor has been
registered by a car button, or unless the down call is at the highest floor for which
any buttons have been pressed. Likewise, the pressing of an "up" button when the
car is traveling in the down direction shall not intercept the travel unless the stop for
that floor has been registered by a car button, or unless the up call is the lowest for
which any button has been pressed.
1. When the car has responded to its highest or lowest stop, and stops are
registered for the opposite direction, its travel shall reverse automatically
and it shall then clear the calls registered for the direction.
2. Should both up and down calls be registered at an intermediate floor, only
the call corresponding to the direction in which the car is traveling shall be
cancelled upon the stopping of the car at the landing.
3. The operating buttons in the car and at the landings shall be mounted in
Type 302 stainless steel flushpanel with No. 4 satin finish. The car panel
shall also contain an emergency stop switch to interrupt the power supply
and apply the brakes independently of the regular operating device. The
opening of the stop switch shall not cancel the registered calls and, after this
switch is again closed, the car shall continue to answer its various calls. The
car panel shall also contain a key operated car light switch and a fan switch.
4. The buttons in the car and hall stations shall be of the light-up type which
will be illuminated when the button is pressed indicating that a call has been
registered for that landing.
B. Independent Service: A key operated switch shall be provided for each elevator for
selecting Independent Service operation. When this switch is in the Independent
Service position, the elevator shall be disconnected from the duplex control system
and all hall calls will be transferred to the other car. The elevator taken out of
service may then be run from its car buttons for any special usage.
C. Emergency Power Operation:
1. In the event of normal power supply failure, the elevator system shall be
arranged to lower from a battery emergency supply. The emergency power
supply shall consist of battery and battery charges.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR 14212- 11
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
H. Oil Viscosity Control: Provide complete hydraulic and electronic control which
shall maintain all of the hydraulic fluid in the reservoir, pump and control valve at a
minimum temperature of 100 degrees F. at all times. If the oil temperature drops
below this preset minimum, the elevator will be dispatched automatically to the
lowest terminal floor at which point the pump shall bypass oil in the system without
car motion until the preset temperature is reached. Normal response to the passenger
demand will not be affected by this control. Resistance type heating elements do not
meet the intent of this specification.
I. Stop Switch in Pit: A stop switch shall be provided in the pit of each elevator and
this switch shall conform with the specified codes.
J. Car Stall Protective Circuit: In the event the cars should stall while ascending as the
result of a relay failure, valve failure, low oil in the system, etc., a special circuit
shall be provided which shall automatically return the car to the bottom landing and
perform a normal door operation after which the elevator shall be completely shut
down except for a door operation. Service can be restored by recycling the main line
switch.
K. Wiring: The Elevator Installing Firm shall furnish and install complete, all
necessary insulated wiring to connect all parts of the equipment. All wire and
traveling cables shall have a flame retarding and moisture resisting outer cover and
shall be run in metal conduit, metallic tubing, wire ducts or raceways. Traveling .•
cables shall be flexible and suitably suspended so that there is no drain on the
individual conductors. All electrical material and work shall at minimum, comply
with the requirements of the National Electric Code.
L. Guide Rails: The guide rails for the car shall consist of planed steel T's having
cross-section recommended by manufacturer for elevator type, weight and speed, and
guide rail clear span and support distances. Erect rails plumb and securely fastened
to the hoistway framing by heavy steel brackets. If the hoistway walls are not load
bearing, then the guide rails shall be supported at each floor. Any necessary guide
rail backing required to span the distance floor to floor shall be provided by the
Elevator Contractor. The ends of the guides shall be tongued and grooved forming
matched joints connected with steel splice places.
M. Buffers: Adequate spring buffers shall be provided, mounted on pit floor or
supported on the cylinder heads. Buffers shall be blocked up as required to protect
cylinder heads and packing gland in the event the car should for any reason pass the
bottom limit switch setting. Striking plates shall be provided on underside of car
frame.
N. Automatic Guide Rail Lubricators: Lubricators shall be provided and mounted on
top of upper guide shoes. Wool felt wiper shall apply an even, uniform flow of oil
which shall thoroughly lubricate faces of guide rail from a leakproof oil reservoir.
2.04 OPERATION AND CONTROL low*
HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR 14212- 10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
car, shall be provided. Operation of the manual lowering valve shall permit
the car to be lowered at slow speed, in the event the power fails.
4. Storage Tank: An oil reservoir shall be constructed of welded steel sheets,
and shall be provided with a cover, a protected vent opening, a filtering
screen mounted over the suction inlet and a drain connection. An initial
supply of oil sufficient for proper operation of the elevator shall be provided.
Tank shall have a capacity equal to the volume of oil required to lift elevator
to future top terminal plus a reserve of not less than 10 gallons.
5. Sound Reducing Enclosure: The lower area of the power unit where the
pump and valve are installed shall be enclosed with removable sheet steel
panels lined with sound deadening material to reduce air-borne noises.
6. Muffler: A blow-out muffler,designed to minimize the transmission of fluid
pulsations, shall be furnished and installed in the pipe-line between the
pumping unit and cylinder head.
7. Sound Isolating Couplings, a minimum of two, shall be installed in the oil
line in the machine room between pump and jack.
8. Provide rubber isolation mat underneath reservoir and pump.
E. Piping:
1. Piping shall be furnished and installed between the pumping units and the
cylinder heads complete with necessary fittings. A gate valve shall be
provided in the line to facilitate maintaining and adjusting the elevator.
2. All hydraulic piping related to the elevator machinery shall be installed so
that rigid contact between the piping and other building systems is avoided.
Piping supports should include Neoprene Isolators (1/4 in. static deflection)
and Neoprene Filler Sleeves should be used where piping penetrates walls.
F. Controllers:
1. Electro-magnetic controllers shall be provided including necessary starting
switches of adequate size together with all relays and switches required to
accomplish the operation specified.
2. Overload relays shall be of the manual reset type of suitable size for the
motor furnished.
G. Reduced Voltage Starting: To reduce starting currents, Wye-Delta reduced voltage
starting shall be provided for the pump motors to limit starting current to 300% of
full load running current.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR 14212- 9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA ...,,,
B. Elevator Cylinder and Plungers:
1. The elevator cylinders shall be constructed of steel piping of sufficient
thickness suitable for a working pressure of 400 pounds per square inch.
Cylinders of multiple section construction shall be thoroughly and
substantially connected by means of external coupling. The bottom of
cylinders shall be closed and the top provided with a cylinder head equipped
with stuffing box and packing gland with a self-adjusting packing that does
not require external adjustment, so arranged as to effectively prevent
leakage. The inside of the cylinders shall be coated with rust preventative
and on the outside with super-service Black Bitumatic, or equal.
2. The plungers shall be constructed of selected steel tubing of proper diameter
machined true and smooth with a fine polished finish. Plungers of multiple
section construction shall be securely joined by means of internal couplings.
The plungers shall be provided with a stop welded to the bottom to prevent
the plungers from leaving the cylinders and shall be secured to the car
frames by means of suitable platen.
3. The plungers and cylinders shall be installed plumb and must operate freely
with minimum friction.
C. Wells for Cylinders: The wells for the cylinders shall be sunk into the ground by the
Elevator Installing Firm. Excavation work is unclassified, and shall be made through
whatever materials encountered, without extra payment.
D. Pumping Units: The pumping units shall be of integral design and shall include an
electric motor belt driven to a pump, a control valve assembly, a storage tank, a
main-line strainer, necessary piping connections and controller, all compactly
designed and mounted on a structural steel bedplate as a single self-contained unit.
The motor and pump assembly shall be mounted on a rubber isolated inner base with
removable drip pan, and the tank and controller shall be supported above on a
structural steel frame.
1. Pump: Shall be a positive displacement, screw type to give smooth
operation and shall be especially designed and manufactured for elevator
service.
2. Motor: Shall be of the alternating current, polyphase, squirrel cage
induction type and shall be of a design especially adapted to plunger elevator
requirements.
3. Control Valve Assembly: Shall be of compact design suitable for operation
under the required pressures. It shall contain a metered bypass valve, a
check valve, a relief valve, a manual lowering valve, metered lowering and
leveling valves and pilot valves. An isolated seal and coupling device,
designed to reduce the transmission of vibrations and noise to the elevator 0
HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR 14212- 8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
F. Travel: From lower level to upper level, a distance of about 12 feet servicing two
landings.
G. Openings: Two front.
H. Door Size and Type: Y-0" by 7-0" side-opening type.
I. Operation: Simplex Selective-Collective.
J. Signals: Car-Position Indicator
Hall Position Indicator at main floor
Hall Lanterns and Gongs at all floors
K. Machine Location: Adjacent, at the lower level as indicated on the Drawings.
L. Power Supply:
1. The power supply for the elevator apparatus shall match voltage of available
power supply, 3 phase, 3 wires, 60 hertz a.c. (to be verified by Elevator
Manufacturer).
T,, 2. The lighting supply will be 120 volts, 60 hertz, a.c.
3. Door operation shall be by direct current power.
M. Special Features: ANSI Handicapped Provisions
Dual Beam Photoelectric Eyes
Telephone Compartment(telephone by others)
Reduced Voltage Starting
Oil Viscosity Control
Battery Operated Lowering Device
2.03 ELEVATOR MACHINERY
A. Type of Equipment:
1. The elevators shall be the "plunger electric" type with direct acting plungers,
pumping units, storage tanks and magnetic control valves. The pumping
units and associated control equipment shall be located as indicated on the
Drawings. The operating fluid shall be oil.
2. The pumps shall deliver the oil directly to the cylinder at the necessary
pressure and in sufficient quantity to lift the fully loaded elevator at the
specified speed. The tanks shall act as a storage tank only and the oil shall
be pumped from the tank into the cylinder on the up trip and shall be
returned into the tank on the down trip.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR 14212-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
E. The maintenance service shall be performed solely by the Elevator Manufacturer
and/or Elevator Installing Firm and shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent
or subcontractor.
1.10 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. It is the responsibility of the Elevator Manufacturer and/or the Elevator Installing
Firm to examine all conditions on the Drawings and in the Specifications and the
governing laws and building code, and to assume all costs in connection with this
building Contract, including cost of any incidental work and equipment which may
not be called for on the Drawings and Specifications but which are necessary for
construction and proper operation of elevators or required by the governing laws and
building code.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. The elevator equipment shall be as manufactured by Dover Elevator Co., Payne
Elevator Co., Otis Elevator Co., Westinghouse Elevator Co., or equal approved by
the Architect.
1. The manufacturer shall have been regularly engaged in the installation of
elevators of the type specified herein and shall be able to demonstrate at
least three installations of the type specified made by him within 50 miles of
the site which have provided satisfactory operation for a period of at least
two years prior to the date of receipt of general bids for this project.
2. Also, the manufacturer shall be able to demonstrate that he has provided
satisfactory maintenance service for elevators of the type specified, that he
has maintained a complete elevator maintenance organization comprised of
regularly employed elevator inspectors and mechanics, and that he has
maintained an adequate stock of parts for replacement and emergency
purposes, all within 50 miles of the site for a period of at least five years
prior to the date of receipt of general bids.
2.02 DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Quantity and Type: One(1)Passenger Elevator, Oil-Hydraulic Type.
B. Car Inside Dimensions: As indicated on drawings and compliant with Code.
C. Car Platform Dimensions: As indicated on drawings.
D. Capacity: 50001bs.
E. Speed: 100 feet per minute, minimum, "up" direction with contract load.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR 14212- 6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
addition to, and not in lieu of, other liabilities which the Contractor may have by law
or other provisions of the Contract Documents.
B. Under these requirements, the Elevator Manufacturer and Elevator Installing Firm
shall jointly and severally furnish to the Owner through the Architect, a written
warranty that the materials and workmanship of the apparatus installed under this
Section shall be first-class in every respect, and that he will make good any defects
in materials or workmanship not due to ordinary wear and tear or improper use that
may develop within one (1) year from date of certification for operation by state
and/or local authorities or the Date of Substantial Completion of the entire project,
whichever is later.
C. This guarantee is not intended to supplant normal maintenance service and shall not
be construed to require free service for periodic examination, lubrication, or
adjustment due to normal use, beyond that included in the Specification; nor
correction without charge, of breakage, maladjustment's, or other trouble arising
from abuse, misuse, improper or inadequate maintenance, or any other causes
beyond the control of the Elevator Manufacturer and Elevator Installing Firm.
1.09 MAINTENANCE
A. The Elevator Manufacturer and Elevator Installing Firm shall jointly furnish
maintenance and call back service for a period of one (1) year after the date of
certification for operation by state and/or local authorities or the Date of Substantial
Completion of the entire project, whichever is later. Maintenance service shall
consist of at least monthly inspections, lubrication, and adjustment of equipment.
Call back service shall consist of immediately providing all intermediate
maintenance service calls requested by the Owner.
B. The Elevator Manufacturer and/or Elevator Installing Firm shall furnish all labor,
material, and equipment required for replacing all parts which become defective
within one year after date of substantial completion of project at no cost to the
Owner except that defects due to misuse, accidents, or negligence on the part of the
Owner will not be considered to be covered under the maintenance guarantee.
C. Include, but do not limit to, replacement of all seals, packing and reservoir oil as
often as necessary during the maintenance period to maintain adequate factor of
safety and performance. Only genuine standard parts produced by the manufacturer
of the equipment concerned shall be used for replacement.
D. All work under the maintenance provision shall be performed by competent
personnel under the supervision and in the direct employ of the Elevator
Manufacturer and/or Elevator Installing Firm. Work shall be done during the regular
working hours and days, but emergency call-back service shall be available at all
times. All premium time call-back service shall be paid for at straight-time hourly
rate by the Owner.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR 14212- 5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA ,
C. Do not order materials or begin fabrication or installation of materials until
Architect's approval has been obtained.
1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with all state and local authorities having jurisdiction and obtain all
necessary permits, pay all fees, obtain all required inspections, and carry out all
required tests which are required by such authorities.
1.06 STANDARDS, CODES AND REGULATIONS
A. Furnish all elevator equipment in accordance with, and perform all work required so
that the elevator equipment and its installation shall conform to the following
standards,codes and regulations:
1. Commonwealth of Massachusetts applicable laws and codes, including
Massachusetts Elevator Code 524-CMR.
2. National Electrical Code
3. Applicable Handicapped Code
4. ASME/ANSI A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. �.
1.07 TEMPORARY USE OF ELEVATORS
A. Should the General Contractor desire the use of elevator equipment before final
completion and final acceptance, he shall make necessary arrangements with the
Elevator Installing Firm, subject to the approval of the Owner and Architect and
governing code compliance. The General Contractor shall reimburse the Elevator
Installing Firm for any labor or materials which are not part of the permanent
installation and which are required to provide temporary elevator service including,
but not limited to, temporary car enclosures, requisite guards or other protection for
elevator machine room and hoistway openings, main line switch with wiring,
necessary power, signaling devices, lights in car, testing and obtaining any necessary
special permits or certificates, and elevator operators together with any other special
labor or equipment, needed to permit temporary usage. In addition, the Contractor
shall sign the Elevator Installing Firm's Temporary Acceptance Form before any
elevator is placed into temporary service, and shall pay all costs of power and
operation, including maintenance of the equipment. He shall also agree that the
complete elevator equipment will be left in the same condition.
1.08 GUARANTEE
A. In addition to the specific guarantee requirements of the GENERAL CONDITIONS,
the Contractor shall obtain in the Owner's name the standard written manufacturer's
guarantee of all materials furnished under this Section where such guarantees are A
offered in the manufacturer's published product data. All these guarantees shall be in
HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR 14212-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
b. Build in all steel beams.
3. Work of MISCELLANEOUS METAL Section:
a. Steel interfacing between guide rail brackets and building structure.
b. Steel support angles for thresholds of each hoistway opening, if
indicated.
C. Steel ladder at elevator pit.
4. Work of DAMPPROOFING Section:
a. Dampproofing of elevator pit.
5. Work of ELECTRICAL Section:
a. Providing of electric power feeders to elevator controller, with main
line fused disconnect switch or circuit breaker.
b. Providing of separate hoistway outlet boxes for car lights, as shown
on the elevator shop drawings. Provide fused electrical service to
car light outlet box.
C. Providing of fused electrical service, convenience outlet, and
switched light fixture in elevator pit and at machine room.
d. Providing of fused electrical services for elevator signal system.
e. Providing of electric service for installing, testing, and adjusting the
elevator equipment.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300
to Architect for approval showing general arrangement of the elevator equipment and
specific details of materials, finishes, construction, installation, and anchorage
including related work by other trades sufficient to fully describe the proposed
designs and installations. Include detailed information rough-in and other
preparatory work by other trades related to the elevator installations.
B. Samples: Submit samples in accordance with Section 01330, to Architect for
approval, consisting of various exposed equipment and accessories, such as
indicators, tacktile images, pushbuttons, etc., for selection and/or approval, as may
be requested.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR 14212- 3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA . ,
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work of this Section consists of all labor, material, equipment and services to
complete the work of electric oil-hydraulic elevator and related items, as indicated
on the Drawings and/or as specified herein.
B. In all cases where a device or part of the equipment is referred to herein in the
singular, it is intended that such reference shall apply to as many devices are
required to complete the installation.
C. Reference to Drawings: Work to be performed is shown on Drawings listed after the
Table of Contents in this Specification Book.
1.03 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. The following items of related work are specified and included in other Sections of
the Specifications:
1. Work of GENERAL CONTRACTOR OR HIS SUB-CONTRACTORS:
a. Providing a dry safe location for storage of the elevator materials.
b. Permitting placement of drilling rig at jack hole and removal of
spoils from drilling operations.
C. Providing of loose dry sand fill around the elevator jack casing.
d. Providing of legal hoistway with required legal ventilation, pits, and
machine rooms with concrete floors, machine foundations and
access doors.
e. Providing of barricades and protection of the hoistway during the
time the elevator equipment is being installed.
f. Cutting of walls, floors, and partitions, together with any repairs
made necessary thereby. Providing of recesses in walls and floors to
receive doors, sills, and signal equipment such as indicators, push
buttons,hall lanterns, etc.
g. Setting of inserts as shown on the approved elevator shop drawings.
h. Protection of all finished installed work until substantial completion
of project, including installation of protective coverings at hoistway
entrances.
2. Work of MASONRY Section:
a. Grouting of thresholds and door j ambs at elevator entrances.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR 14212-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 14212 -HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and conditions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
General Conditions and all Division 1 Sections, apply to the work of this section.
B. Time,manner,and requirements for submitting filed sub-bids:
1. Sub-bids for work under this Section shall be for the Awarding Authority at a
time and place as stipulated in the"NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS".
The following shall appear on the upper left hand corner of the envelope.
NAME OF SUB-BIDDER:
NAME OF PROJECT:
SUB-BID FOR SECTION: 14212-HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR
2. Each sub-bid submitted for work under this Section shall be on forms
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44F of Chapter
149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-bid forms may be obtained at the
office of the Architect-Engineer or may be obtained by written request.
3. Sub-bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a BID
BOND or CASH or CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURER'S or
CASHIER'S CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company payable
to the City of Northampton in the amount of 5 percent of the bid. A sub-bid
accompanied by any other form of bid deposit than those specified will be
rejected.
C. Sub-Sub-Bid Requirements: (NONE REQUIRED UNDER THIS SECTION).
D. Equality of material, article assembly or system other than those named or described
in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of Section
01600, S.C.G.,and Chapter 30, Section 39M of the General Laws
E. Issue submittals in accordance with Section 01300, SHOP DRAWINGS AND
SAMPLES, and General Conditions for Record Documents. Submittals under this
Section shall include manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions on
manufactured items and samples of all materials.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR 14212-1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:
2. Vestibule 100; aluminum mat, aluminum frame and vinyl wearing surface:
a. Reese
1) Perfect Mate model with#547 diamond peak vinyl tread with Perfect Mat
Frame model 548—L&P Aluminum recessed frame.
2.2 MATERIALS:
A. General: Provide colors, patterns, and profiles of materials. Where not indicated, provide
colors,patterns, and profiles selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards.
B. Roll-Up Aluminum Mat: Aluminum frames anchored in floor depression with aluminum
constructed mat with vinyl treads.
1. Grate style: 6063-T52 Aluminum tread spaced 2"on center.
2. Aluminum hinge with 1"x 3/16"slotted holes
3. Thickness: 1/2"deep—Field verify
4. Top Surface:Aluminum with diamond peak vinyl insert.
5. Colors: To be chosen by the architect.
2.3 FABRICATION:
A. Shop-fabricate units of floor grate work to greatest extent possible in sizes as indicated. Where
not indicated otherwise, provide single unit for each mat installation, but do not exceed
manufacturer's maximum size recommendation for units intended for removal and cleaning.
Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes.
Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner
units without joints. Where possible, verify sizes by field measurement before shop
fabrication.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer's instructions at locations indicated and
coordinated with entrance locations and traffic patterns.
3.2 PROTECTION:
^"
A. Defer installation of floor mats until time of Substantial Completion for Project.
END OF SECTION 12690
FLOOR MATS 12690-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 12690 -FLOOR MATS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Surface-type floor mats/walk-off mats of the following type:
a. Aluminum mat with vinyl surface and aluminum frame.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of floor mat and frame specified, including manufacturer's
specifications and installation instructions, details of construction relative to materials,
dimensions of individual components,profiles, and finishes.
C. Shop drawings showing layout and types of floor mat and frames,full-scale sections of typical
installations, details of patterns or designs,anchors, and accessories.
1. Coordinate shop drawing submittal with concrete work shop drawings showing
oversized recess for deferred installation of frames.
D. Samples for initial selection purposes in form ofmanufacturer's color charts consisting of actual
sections of floor mat and frame materials,showing full range of colors,textures,finishes,and
patterns available, for each type of floor mat and frame indicated.
E. Samples for verification purposes in form of 12-inch-square assembled section of floor mat and
frame members with selected tread surface showing each type of metal finish and color of
exposed floor mat,frames,and accessories required. Where finishes involve normal color and
texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
F. Maintenance data in the form of manufacturer's printed instructions for cleaning and
maintaining floor mats/grates.
1.4 OUALITY ASSURANCE:
Ow A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain floor mats from one source of a single manufacturer.
FLOOR MATS 12690- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
D. Liquid Soap Dispenser, Surface-Mounted-Tank Type: Minimum 40-ounce-capacity, satin
finished stainless steel dispenser fabricated for surface mounting. Provide corrosion-resistant
push button valve with stainless steel springs, and internal parts designed to dispense soap
in measured quantity by pump action and with integral check valve to prevent leaking.
Concealed wall fastening, hinged filler-top requires special key to open. Vandal resistant
construction with unbreakable refill window.
1. Equip unit with push-type valve for dispensing soap in liquid form.
2. Product: Model B-4112.
E. Stainless Steel Framed Mirror Units: Fabricate frame with angle shapes not less than 0.05
inch(18 gage),with square comers mitered,welded, and ground smooth. Provide in No.4
satin polished finish.
1. Type A: Product;Model B-2901836.
F. Mop and Broom Holder/Utility Shelf: Combination unit with 0.05-inch(18-gage),Type 304,
stainless steel shelf with 1/2-inch returns, 0.062-inch (16-gage) support brackets for wall
mounting. Provide 0.062-inch(16-gage)stainless steel hooks for wiping rags welded to rear
of shelf,together with spring-loaded,rubber hat,cam-type mop/broom holders. Provide unit
34 inches long and complete with three mop/broom holders and four hooks.
1. Product: Model B-239 -34.
2. Install one unit in Janitor's Closet 218.
G. Double and Single-Prong Robe Hook: Heavy-duty satin finished stainless steel double and
single prong robe hook; rectangular wall bracket with backplate for concealed mounting.
Mount on back of door in Room 119.
1. Product:Double Robe Hook-Model B-672.
2. Product: Single Robe Hook—Model B-671
END OF SECTION 10801
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 -5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners
appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level,
plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed,tamper-resistant manner with special hangers,toggle
bolts, or screws. Set units level, plumb, and square at locations indicated, according to
manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated.
C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to
method in ASTM F 446.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function
properly. Replace damaged or defective items.
B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORY SCHEDULE:
A. Double-Roll Toilet Tissue Dispenser/Cabinet; Size to accommodate two separate rolls of
core type tissue to 5-inch-diameter roll.
1. Fabrication: Heavy duty cast aluminum, satin finish. High impact plastic hold rolls
up to 6"dia. Tumbler lock secures spindles in place.
2. Product: Model B-27460.
B. Combination Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle: Where this designation is indicated,
provide stainless-steel combination unit complying with the following:
1. Semi-recessed Type: Designed with continuous, seamless wall flange;Dispenses 600
C-fold, 800 multifold or 1100 single fold towels from unit's upper compartment;
waste receptacle in unit's lower compartment with minimum 6.3-gal. capacity,
reusable, leak proof; and door compartments with continuous hinges and tumbler
locksets.
2. Product: Model No. B-38032, surface mounted with stainless steel skirt.
C. Stainless Steel Grab Bars: Provide grab bars with wall thickness not less than 0.05 inch(18
gage) and as follows:
1. Mounting: Concealed, manufacturer's standard flanges and anchorage with four
setscrews.
2. Clearance: 1-1/2-inch clearance between wall surface and inside face of bar.
3. Gripping Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard nonslip texture.
4. Heavy-Duty Size: Outside diameter of 1-1/2 inches.
5. Product: Model B-6106.99 x lengths indicated.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 -4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
C. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service),
nickel plus chromium electrodeposited on base metal.
D. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with
silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with
FS DD-M-411.
E. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
F. Fasteners: Screws,bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit,tamper and
theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.
2.3 FABRICATION:
A. General: One, maximum 1-1/2-inch-diameter,unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo, as
approved by Architect,is permitted on exposed face of accessories. On interior surface not
exposed to view or back surface of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or
stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.
B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated,fabricate units with tight
seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with continuous
stainless-steel hinge. Provide concealed anchorage where possible.
C. Recessed Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all-welded
construction, without mitered comers. Hang doors and access panels with full-length,
stainless-steel hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed.
D. Framed Glass-Mirror Units: Fabricate frames for glass-mirror units to accommodate glass
edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that permits rigid,
tamper-resistant glass installation and prevents moisture accumulation.
1. Provide galvanized steel backing sheet,not less than 0.034 inch and full mirror size,
with nonabsorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler
material.
E. Mirror-Unit Hangers: Provide mirror-unit mounting system that permits rigid, tamper-and
theft-resistant installation, as follows:
1. One-piece,galvanized steel,wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism
to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.
F. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 -3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
2. Do not modify aesthetic effects,as judged solely by Architect,except with Architect's
approval. Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data
to Architect for review.
1.5 COORDINATION:
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances
required for access by disabled persons,proper installation,adjustment,operation,cleaning,
and servicing of accessories.
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent
delaying the Work.
1.6 WARRANTY:
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Manufacturer's Mirror Warranty: Written warranty, executed by mirror manufacturer
agreeing to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within minimum
warranty period indicated. low*
1. Minimum Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide toilet accessories by one
of the following:
1. American Specialties,Inc.
2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment,Inc.
3. Bradley Corporation.
B. Products manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. are specified. Items
designated establish minimum requirements for design and performance of equipment
required by this Section.
2.2 MATERIALS:
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666,Type 304,with No.4 fmish(satin),in 0.0312-inch minimum
nominal thickness,unless otherwise indicated.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 -2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Toilet room accessories.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6, Section 06100 Rough Carpentry for coordination of blocking
requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses,
dimensions,profiles, fastening and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes for
each type of accessory specified.
B. Setting Drawings: For cutouts required in other work; include templates, substrate
preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring
devices.
C. Product Schedule: Indicating types,quantities, sizes,and installation locations by room of
each accessory required. Use designations indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory
Schedule and room designations indicated on Drawings in product schedule.
D. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1. Provide lists of replacement parts and service recommendations.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Source Limitations: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit
and for units exposed to view in same areas,unless otherwise approved by Architect.
B. Product Options: Accessory requirements, including those for materials, finishes,
dimensions,capacities, and performance, are established by specific products indicated in
the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule.
1. Products of other manufacturers listed in Part 2 with equal characteristics, as judged
solely by Architect,may be provided.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 -1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
1. Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system
complying with AAMA 603.8 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils
(0.04 mm), medium gloss.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.8 STEEL FINISHES:
A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other
contaminants that could impair paint bond using manufacturer's standard methods.
B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's
standard two-coat,baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.
Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve
a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION:
A. Examine roughing-in for cabinets to verify actual locations before cabinet installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed
cabinets are to be installed.
C. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1. Remove and replace damaged,defective,or undercharged units.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing fire-protection specialties.
B. Install in locations as directed by the Architect and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING,AND PROTECTION:
A. Adjust cabinet doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Refinish or replace cabinets and doors damaged during installation.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that cabinets and doors are
without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 10520
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
H. Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design,as follows:
1. Duo Panel: Model "Vertical Duo," tempered glass, 1/8 inch thick.
I. Door Construction: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, of materials
indicated, and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
1. Provide minimum 1/2-inch-thick door frames,fabricated with tubular stiles and rails,
and hollow-metal design.
2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels.
J. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type
for cabinet type,trim style,and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever handle
with cam-action latch, or exposed or concealed door pull and friction latch. Provide
concealed or continuous-type hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.
2.5 COLORS AND TEXTURES:
J. Colors and Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for these
characteristics.
2.6 FINISHES,GENERAL:
J. Comply with NAAMM's"Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
K. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
L. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable
variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other
components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are
assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
M. Cabinet Finish: Provide manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following:
1. Interior of cabinets.
2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES:
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
B. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited
chemicals;Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating;Organic
Coating: as specified below). Apply baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer's
specifications for cleaning,conversion coating,and painting.
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. Cabinet Construction: Provide manufacturer s standard box(tub),with trim,frame,door,and
hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind
smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Listed and labeled to meet requirements of ASTM E 814 for
fire-resistance rating of wall where it is installed.
a. Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0478-inch-
thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch-thick, fire-barrier
material.
b. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
2. Cabinet Metal: Enameled-steel sheet.
3. Semi-Recessed Model for Dry Chemical: 2409-6R.
B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for the following:
1. Fire extinguisher.
C. Cabinet Mounting: Suitable for the following mounting conditions:
R 1. Semirecessed: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth to suit style
of trim indicated.
D. Cabinet Trim Style: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with comers mitered,welded,and
ground smooth.
1. Exposed Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping
surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge
(backbend).
a. Flat Trim: 1/4-to 5/16-inch backbend depth.
b. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4-to 1-1/2-inch backbend depth.
E. Cabinet Trim Material: Manufacturers standard, as follows:
1. Aluminum sheet.
F. Door Material: Manufacturer's standard,as follows:
1. Aluminum sheet.
G. Door Glazing: Manufacturer's standard,as follows:
1. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3,
as follows:
a. Class 1 (clear).
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10,
"Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers."
C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type,rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
I. Provide extinguishers listed and labeled by FM.
1.5 COORDINATION:
A. Coordinate size of cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated
and provided by Owner under separate Contract are accommodated.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. J.L. Industries,Inc.
2. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
3. Potter-Roemer;Div. of Smith Industries,Inc. ,,
B. Products of Larsen's Manufacturing Co. are specified. Items designated establish intent for
design and performance of products required by this Section. Equal products may be used
with approval from the architect.
2.2 MATERIALS:
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: Carbon steel,complying with ASTM A 366/A 366M,commercial
quality, stretcher leveled,temper rolled.
B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for
type of use and finish indicated, and as follows:
1. Sheet: ASTM B 209.
2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221.
2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS:
A. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each cabinet and other
locations indicated.
B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 2-A:10:B:C, 10-1b nominal capacity, in
enameled-steel container.
I. Model: MP-10. _aftl,
2.4 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINETS:
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 10520-FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Portable fire extinguishers.
2. Fire-protection cabinets for the following:
a. Portable fire extinguishers.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping sealants at fire-rated cabinets.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Include construction details,material descriptions,dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection specialties.
1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification.
2. Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods,
relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet
type,trim style, and panel style.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of
units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of
cabinet finish indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed cabinet finish required, prepared on
Samples of size indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work.
If finishes involve normal color and texture variations,include sample sets showing the full
range of variations expected.
1. Size: 6-by-6-inch-square Samples.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets through one source from a single
manufacturer.
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520-1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from
distortion or other defects in appearance.
B. Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using the methods indicated
below:
1. Fastener: Tamper proof"snake eyes" anchors in the four corners of the sign. Finish
anchor heads to match sign background color.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
A. After installation, clean.soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner.
END OF SECTION 10425
SIGNS 10425 -5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
4. Fastener: Tamper proof"snake eyes" anchors in the four comers of the sign. Finish
anchor heads to match sign background color.
5. Colors: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors. Text/symbol colors from
standard Gerber vinyl colors(or similar to ASI standard SC colors).
2.5 BRONZE PLAOUES:
A. Contractor to provide and install one(1)bronze dedication plaque. The installation location
and timing will be determined by the architect. Each plaque shall be constructed according
to the following:
1. Size: 2' 0"x 3' 0"overall.
2. Material: Cast bronze.
3. Letter Style: relief,polished.
4. Border: 1-1/2"wide doubled lined
5. Background:Dark oxidized,pebble.
6. Mounting: Concealed treaded rods.
7. Finish: Manufacturer's chemical protection.
8. Layout: Plaque No. 1 to include name of Library, Building Committee (9 members),
Mayor, Library Trustees (9 members), Misc. Text (500 characters), Architect and
Contractor. Final layout to be determined by the architect.
2.6 BUILDING LETTERS:
A. Exterior building letters shall be cast metal letters manufactured by Gemini Incorporated or
approved equal. Building lettering shall comply with the following:
1. Size: 12"high
2. Font: Architectural.
3. Surface Texture: Smooth,polished.
4. Fastener: Manufacturer's stainless steel expansion anchors.
5. Colors: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
5. See contract drawings for letter locations and signage copy.
2.6 FINISHES:
A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of materials
with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance,
provide color matches indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by the Architect from the
manufacturer's full range of colors.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION: ,.
A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated,using mounting methods of the
SIGNS 10425-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1. American Graphics Inc.
2. ASI Sign Systems,Inc.
3. Best Manufacturing Company.
4. Mohawk Sign Systems.
3. Gemini Incorporated.
4. Metal Arts.
2.2 MATERIALS:
A. Polyamid Resin Sheet: Provide photomechanically produced,monolithic,stratified,polyamid
resin tactile panel,bonded to inert base.
B. Mounting Height: 60 inches above finished floor,unless otherwise noted for interior signs.
2.3 PANEL SIGNS. GENERAL:
A. Panel Signs: Comply with requirements indicated for materials,thicknesses,finishes,colors,
designs, shapes, sizes,and details of construction.
1. Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under
installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally.
B. Raised Sign Copy: Raise copy 1/32-inch from plaque surface by manufacturer's
photomechanical stratification processes.Uniformly opaque,precisely formed graphics shall
comply with applicable ADA regulations including size, style, spacing,content,position, and
colors.
C. Raised Braille Copy: Raise copy 1/32-inch from plaque surface by manufacturer's
photomechanical stratification processes. Uniformly opaque,precisely formed Braille copy
shall comply with applicable ADA regulations including but not limited to size, style,spacing,
content,position, and colors.
1. Sign manufacturer shall be responsible for translation of sign copy to Braille.
D. Provide room signs for all rooms designated on the Room Finish Schedule.Room numbering
system to be determined based on Owner's input during construction.
2.4 PANEL SIGNS:
A. Unframed Panel Signs:
1. Subsurface Graphics: Background color(s) shall be subsurface screen paint applied to
produce vandal resistant finish. Signface to be 0.125-inch translucent acrylic with mar
resistant matte finish.
2. Subsurface Background: Painted over subsurface screen graphic.
3. Surface Texture: Clear,matte finish.
SIGNS 10425-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
a. Polyamid Resin Sheet: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections
of material including the full range of colors available for each material required.
2. Samples for verification of color, pattern, and texture selected and compliance with
requirements indicated:
a. Polyamid Resin Sheet: Provide a sample panel not less than 8-1/2 inches by 11
inches for each material, color, texture, and pattern required. On each panel
include a representative sample of the graphic image process required, showing
graphic style, and colors and finishes of letters, numbers, and other graphic
devices.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those indicated
for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance,and sufficient production
capacity to produce sign units required without causing delay in the Work.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: For each separate sign type required, obtain signs from one
source of a single manufacturer.
C. Handicapped Accessibility Requirements: Buildings, structures, areas and facilities made
accessible to handicapped persons, and the accessible route(s) thereto, shall be clearly
identified with the international symbol of accessibility for the physically handicapped in
accordance with ANSI A117.1, Section 4.28.
1. Letters and numbers on signs shall have a width-to-height ratio between 3:5 and 1:1,and
stroke width-to-height ratio between 1:5 and 1:10.
2. Colors of letters and numbers shall contrast with colors of background materials.
3. Signage which provides emergency information or general circulation directions, or
identifies rooms and spaces shall be raised letters and numbers,and shall comply with
ANSI A117.1 Sections 4.28.2,4.28.2 and 4.28.5.
4. Signs identifying accessibility shall be placed on the wall adjacent tp the latch side of
the door, or on the door, at 60 inches above the floor.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and
fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings.
Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following
SIGNS 10425-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
SECTION 10425 -SIGNS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes the following types of signs:
1. Panel signs.
2. Bronze Plaques.
3. Aluminum exterior, architectural lettering
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities for temporary project identification signs.
2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates for
mechanical equipment.
3. Division 16 Section 'Electrical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates for
electrical equipment.
4. Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for illuminated exit signs.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to
materials,dimensions of individual components,profiles,and finishes.
C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and
large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds,
layout,reinforcement, accessories, and installation details.
1. Provide message list for each sign required,including large-scale details of wording and
lettering layout.
2. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction,provide setting drawings,
templates,and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed
as a unit of Work in other Sections.
D. Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for initial selection of color,
pattern and surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with requirements
indicated.
1. Samples for initial selection of color,pattern, and texture:
SIGNS 10425 - 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louver units plumb, level, and in proper alignment with adjacent
work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to
screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight
connection.
C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.
D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers,
as indicated.
E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding operations
require for fitting and jointing. Restore finishes so there is no evidence of corrective
work. Return items which cannot be refinished in field to shop, make required
alterations and refinish entire unit,or provide new units.
F. Protect galvanized and nonferrous metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action
by application of a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces which will be in
contact with concrete,masonry, or dissimilar metals.
G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings,joint fillers, and insulation, as louver installation
progresses where required to make louver joints weathertight. Comply with Division
7 Section "Joint Sealers" for sealants applied during installation of louver.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect louvers and vents from damage of any kind during construction period
including use of temporary protective coverings where needed and approved by
louver manufacturer. Remove protective covering at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction period, so
that no evidence remains of correction work. If results of restoration are
unsuccessful, as judged by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new
units.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Periodically clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents, which are not protected by
temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period; do
not let soil accumulate until final cleaning.
B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and with a mild soap or
detergent not harmful to finishes. Rinse thoroughly and dry surface.
END OF SECTION 10200
LOUVERS 10200-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
front edges of blades and of channels in jambs and mullions; complying with the
following requirements.
1. Louver Depth: 4 inches,unless otherwise indicated.
2. Frame Thickness: 0.125 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Louver Blade Thickness: 0.125 inch,unless otherwise indicated.
4. Louver Blade Angle: 30 degrees,unless otherwise indicated.
5. Louver Free Area: Not less than 52 percent.
6. Water Penetration: Not more than 0.02 oz. per sq. ft. of free area at an
airflow of 760 fpm free area velocity when tested for 15 minutes.
2.05 LOUVER SCREENS
A. General: Provide each exterior louver with louver screens complying with the
following requirements:
B. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Screening Type: Insect screening,unless otherwise indicated.
D. Secure screens to louver frames with stainless steel machine screws, spaced at each
corner and at 12 inch o.c. between.
E. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate screen frames with mitered corners to louver sizes
indicated and to comply with the following requirements:
1. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver frames to which
screens are attached.
2.06 FINISHES
A. Finish shall match fluorocarbon coating to match aluminum windows as specified in
Section 08520-13.
1. Color: As indicated on the drawings, final color selection by the Architect.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions for
installation of anchorages which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry .40%,,
construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.
LOUVERS 10200-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
C. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal, unless otherwise
indicated. Do not use metals which are corrosive or incompatible with materials
joined.
1. Use types, gages, and lengths to suit unit installation conditions.
2. Use Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Anchors and Inserts: Of type, size, and material required for type of loading and
installation indicated. Use nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and
inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance.
Use toothed steel or expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.
E. Bituminous Paint: SSPC-Paint 12(cold-applied asphalt mastic).
2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Fabricate louvers and vents to comply with requirements indicated for
design, dimensions,materials,joinery, and performance.
B. Preassemble louvers in shop to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble
units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for
reassembly and coordinated installation.
C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing,including separation between blades and frames
at head and sill,to produce uniform appearance.
D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of size indicated with
allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances of louvers, adjoining
construction,and perimeter sealant joints.
E. Include supports, anchorages,and accessories required for complete assembly.
F. Provide sill extensions and loose sills made of same material as louvers, where
indicated, or required for drainage to exterior and to prevent water penetrating to
interior.
G. Join frame members to one another and to fixed louver blades as follows, unless
otherwise indicated, or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between
frame members necessary:
1. With fillet welds, concealed from view; or mechanical fasteners; or a
combination of these methods; as standard with louver manufacturer.
2.04 FIXED EXTRUDED ALUMINUM WALL LOUVERS
A. Horizontal Drainable Fixed Blade Louvers: Extruded aluminum frames and louver
blades; designed to collect and drain water to exterior at sill by means of gutters in
LOUVERS 10200-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
A. Product data for each product indicated.
B. Shop drawings of louver units and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections,
and details showing profiles, angles, spacing of louver blades; unit dimensions
related to wall openings and construction; free areas for each size indicated; and
profiles of frames at jambs,heads and sills.
C. SMACNA Standard: Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual'
recommendations for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual louver openings by accurate field measurements
before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the Work.
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work,
proceed with fabrication of louvers and vents without field measurements.
Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions
correspond to proposed dimensions.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Louvers:
a. Architectural Louvers
b. Airline Products Co.Div.,Danzer Metal Works Co.
C. Greenheck Louvers.
d. Construction Specialties, Inc.
B. To establish a standard of quality, design and specification are based on Model EDJ-
430 with insect screen as manufactured by Greenheck Louvers. Louvers to be
prefinished in color selected by the architect, consist of drainable blades and
fabricated in the shapes indicated on the drawings.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for
forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer to produce required finish.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221,Alloy 6063-T5 or T-52. -404,
LOUVERS 10200-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
SECTION 10200 -LOUVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and conditions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
General Conditions and all Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of
this section.
B. Refer to Section 01600 — PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS for general requirements
covering material storage,installation, and substitutions.
1.02 SUMMARY OF WORK:
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Fixed metal louvers as shown in the contract drawings.
B. Air intake louvers for HVAC units are specified in Division 15. HVAC louvers shall
be provided by Section 15600 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning and
installed by the General Contractor.
C. All louvers not part of the HVAC work shall be provided and installed by the
General Contractor.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Louver Terminology: Refer to AMCA Publication 501-85 for definitions of terms
for metal louvers not otherwise defined in this section or referenced standards.
1.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and install exterior metal wall
louvers to withstand the effects of loads and stresses from wind and normal thermal
movement, without evidencing permanent deformation of louver components
including blades, frames, and supports; noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade
rattle or flutter;and permanent damage to fasteners and anchors:
1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf per sq. ft. acting
inwards or outwards.
B. Air Performance, Water Penetration, and Air Leakage Ratings: Provide louvers
complying with performance requirements indicated as demonstrated by testing
manufacturers stock units, of height and width indicated, according to Air Movement
and Control Association(AMCA) Standard 500.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
LOUVERS 10200- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
3.09 MAINTENANCE STOCK
A. Provide five(2)unopened one-gallon cans for maintenance stock,for each type,and color
of paint used on this project,taken from the same production runs as those used on the
project. Ensure that each can is clearly labeled for storage and delivered to the Owner's
designated maintenance representative.
B. All maintenance stock materials shall be turned over to Owner's designated representative
upon substantial completion. Contractor shall be responsible for the storage and safe
keeping of all materials prior to substantial completion.
END OF SECTION
O
09900 - 11
PAINTING
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA .•
exterior metal priming.
2. Remove all grease or dirt with mineral spirits before applying paint.
E. New gypsum wallboard and plaster: Spot-seal all compound surfaces in gypsum
wallboard, and hot spots in plaster, with specified first coat material before application
of the first coat.
3.06 APPLICATION
A. General:
1. Apply all materials in strict accordance with the approved manufacturer's printed
instructions, and in accordance with the best trade practices,and each coat shall
be inspected and approved by the Architect before succeeding coat is applied.
2. Do not apply successive coating until the preceding coat is thoroughly dry,and
in no case in less than 24 hours after the preceding coat.
3. Make each coat slightly lighter in color tone than the final coat to be applied
thereon.
B. Priming and Painting of Exterior Cast Metalwork
1. Using a brush,apply metal primer followed by specified paint over a thoroughly cleaned
surface. Allow primer to dry thoroughly before the application of final coat.
2. Brush out primer and finish paint onto surfaces in an even film with parallel
brush strokes.
3.07 CLEAN-UP
A. Upon completion of the work of this SECTION 09900,remove all coating splatters from
glass, prefinished surfaces, bright metals, and from other surfaces that have not been
painted or finished hereunder. Remove all materials and debris and leave the site of the
work in a clean condition so far as this work is concerned.
B. Final inspection: Protect all painted and finished surfaces against damage until the date
of final acceptance of the work.The Architect will conduct a final inspection of all work
performed hereunder.Re-coat or touch-up,as directed by the Architect,any areas found
which do not comply with the requirements of this SECTION 09900,and bear all costs
therefor.
C. Any re-coating or touch-up work,required after the work of this SECTION 09900 has
been accepted by the Architect, will be paid for by the Contractor.
PAINTING 09900- 10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
acceptance of the surface as being satisfactory. Correct any defects in the coatings work
resulting from such accepted surfaces,and bear all costs therefor.
3.04 WORKMANSHIP-
A. Perform all work with skilled mechanics under adequate supervision.
B. Apply all materials under adequate illumination, spreading and smoothly following the
materials on, without runs, sags, or holidays.
C. Perform no work in the rain,dew, or fog, when the temperature is below 50 degrees F.,
or before the other finish materials have been thoroughly dried out.
3.05 PREPARATION WORK
A. General: Refer to the Drawings for specific notes regarding preparation of existing
surfaces in addition to the requirements specified herein. Perform all preparation work
on the various surfaces, as required to properly receive paint and finish materials.
Remove all foreign matter which would otherwise prevent proper adhesion of the applied
finishes.
B. New wood and plywood surfaces:
1. Smooth minor defects by sanding and/or by the use of steel wool. Remove all
foreign matter with commercial paint remover and fine sandpaper.
2. Wash sap spots and knots with mineral spirits. When dry, touch up spots and
knots with commercial stain kill formulation.
3. Fill up nail holes and cracks with wood putty or plastic wood after primer of first
coat of finish is dry.
C. Existing previously-painted wood and plywood surfaces (except floors), after finish
carpentry modifications have been made thereto:
1. Remove all loose and abraded paint by sanding and scraping, sanding to feather
edges at surrounding sound paint material to prevent crater areas when re-coated.
2. Thoroughly wash all surfaces to remove all dirt, oil, and foreign matter.
3. Spot-prime all bare segments with specified first coat materials.
D. New and existing metal work:
1. Remove rust, blistered and defective existing and shop prime paint, and all
foreign materials, down to bright metal by wire brushing, scraping, sanding,
and/or commercial paint remover. Spot prime bare metal with exterior or interior
alkyd base metal primer,as applicable. Use only rust-inhibiting type primer for
PAINTING 09900-9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
3.01 PROTECTION
A. Furnish and lay suitable drop cloths in all areas where coating work is being done to
protect floors and all other surfaces from damage during the work.
B. The Contractor will remove and replace all finish hardware applied to doors except hinges
and locks on exterior doors.Do not paint around hardware except on exterior doors where
hardware will remain in place.
C. At the completion of work in each area, remove all coating spots from all surfaces,
including finish hardware.Do not use abrasive paper or abrasive cleaner on hardware.
3.02 STORAGE AND USE OF MATERIALS
A. Store all materials in designated spaces, in a manner which meets the requirements of
applicable codes and fire regulations.When not in use,ensure that such spaces are kept
locked and inaccessible to those not performing work under this SECTION 09900.
Provide a carbon dioxide or dry chemical-type fire extinguisher,bearing the label of the
National Board of Fire Underwriters and tag of recent inspection,for each space where
coating materials are stored.
B. Do not use the sanitary system for mixing or disposal of refuse material. Carry water to
mixing rooms and dump waste material in a suitable refuse receptacle.Remove oily rags
and waste each day.
C. Deliver all materials in manufacturer's original sealed containers, bearing the
manufacturer's standard label, indicating type and color.Deliver sufficient quantities of
materials in advance of the time needed,in order that work will not be delayed.
D. Before application,thoroughly stir all canned materials,unless otherwise directed by the
manufacturer of the specific coating used, to ensure uniformity of color and mass, and
remove all skins, coating lumps, and other foreign matter,by straining.Apply materials
without reducing or thinning,except as otherwise recommended by the specific material
manufacturer, and then only with the approval of the Architect.
3.03 ACCEPTANCE OF NEW SURFACES
A. Inspect all new surfaces and assure that they are in proper condition to receive work to
be performed under this SECTION 09900. Submit to the Architect any questions as to
the proper performance of the various paint systems specified herein, no later than 15
calendar days prior to the date of commencing work, requesting disposition on the
systems in question;otherwise,assume the responsibility for providing the desired results.
B. If the new surfaces are not thoroughly dry or if they cannot be put in proper condition to
receive paint by customary cleaning methods,or sanding,notify the Contractor in writing
requesting necessary correction. ANON
C. The commencement of applied coatings work in any space will be construed as
PAINTING 09900-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
G. Vertical and overhead surfaces of new gypsum wallboard and plaster, scheduled for
ordinary painted finish:
1. First coat for new and repaired plaster, and for joint and depression compound
surfaces of new gypsum wallboard,only,prior to finish coats:Moore Q.D.Prime
Seal, Glidden 3416 Vinyl Primer Tinted, PPG Speedhide Emulsion Sealer, or
equal.
2. Two coats: Moore Regal Aquavelvet,PPG Satinhide Latex Lo-Lustre,Glidden
Color Naturals, or equal.
H. Restored plaster surfaces scheduled for finish replication
1. First coat for new plaster, and for joint and depression compound surfaces of
new gypsum wallboard, only, prior to fmish coats: Moore Q.D. Prime Seal,
Glidden 3416 Vinyl Primer Tinted,PPG Speedhide Emulsion Sealer, or equal.
2. Two coats: Moore Regal Wall Satin, Pittsburgh Wallhide Latex Flat, Glidden
Spred Satin,or equal,spray applied. Colors,texture and sheen to match adjacent
plaster surfaces.
AW I. New exposed to view covered pipes within finished painted areas:
1. First coat for new pipes, only: Moore Latex Quick Dry Prime Seal, Glidden
Insulcap,PPG Speedhide Emulsion Sealer, or equal.
2. Two coats: Same finish specified herein for immediately adjacent surfaces.
J. New exposed to view uninsulated hot pipes within finished painted areas:
1. Two coats heat-resistant enamel conforming to Federal Specification TT-E-496,
Type I, applied when surfaces are less than 140 degrees F.
2.04 COMPATIBILITY OF COATINGS
A. Ensure that all paints, enamels, and coatings, proposed to be applied hereunder, are
compatible with existing coatings,coatings used for shop-primed items, and items which
have been prime-coated under the work of other trades. Approved shop drawings and
manufacturer's data sheets generally indicate types of priming materials used on the
various items. Such information may be obtained from the Architect upon request.
B. Bring to the Architect's attention any condition which may require a change in the
specifications before proceeding with the work. Failure to do so shall be construed as
acceptance of the coatings specified. Perform all corrective measures, at no cost to the
Owner,for any defects in the work,resulting from the use of such materials.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
PAINTING 09900-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA ..•.
B. Existing previously painted wood and plywood surfaces, after specified preparation
thereof:
1. Two coats: Moore Regal Aquaglo, Pittsburgh Manor Hall Latex Lo-Lustre
Enamel, Glidden Spred Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel, or equal.
C. New items of solid oak and oak veneer plywood, after specified preparation thereof:
1. First coat for bare wood and plywood surfaces, only: Moore Benwood
Architectural Stain,Glidden Spred Wood Stain,PPG Rez Wood Stain,or equal.
2. Three coats: Moore Benwood Satin Finish Varnish, Glidden Interior Satin
Varnish,PPG Rez Satin Varnish, or equal.
D. Refinished items of stained solid oak and oak veneer plywood,after specified preparation
thereof:
1. First coat for bare wood and plywood surfaces, only: Moore Benwood
Architectural Stain,Glidden Spred Wood Stain,PPG Rez Wood Stain,or equal.
2. Two coats: Moore Benwood Satin Finish Varnish, Glidden Interior Satin
Varnish,PPG Rez Satin Varnish, or equal.
E. New metal doors and pressed steel frames;new ferrous metal work,including unprimed
galvanized steel surfaces and shop-primed steel surfaces; after specified preparation
thereof:
1. First coat, for unprimed galvanized metal surfaces, only: Galvanized metal
primer product of finish coating manufacturer.
2. First coat for shop-primed new metal work,and second coat for field-primed new
galvanized metal surfaces, only: Interior alkyd enamel undercoater product of
fmish coating manufacturer.
3. Two coats: Moore Alkyd Dulamel, Glidden Spred Lustre Semi-Gloss Enamel,
PPG Satinhide Alkyd Low Lustre Enamel, or equal.
F. New steel pipe railings and other metal railing assemblies:
1. First coat:Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline,Porter 4335 High Build Epoxy
Primer, or equal, 3 mils(dft), 56%solids by volume,minimum.
2. Second coat: Tnemec Endura-Shield Hi-Build Urethane,Porter Hythane Super
8610, or equal,3 mils(dft),58%solids by volume,minimum, semi-gloss finish.
PAINTING 09900-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.02 EXTERIOR COATING SCHEDULE
A. New galvanized and non-galvanized ferrous metal surfaces,including steel doors;pressed
steel frames; and other new galvanized and non-galvanized ferrous metal surfaces:
1. First coat, for galvanized metal items only: Exterior galvanized metal primer
product of the finish coat manufacturer.
2. First coat,for non-galvanized bare metal surfaces only:Exterior zinc-rich primer
product of the finish coat manufacturer.
3. Two coats:Moore Impervo Enamel,Pittsburgh PPG Quick Dry Enamel,Glidden
Glid Guard Industrial Enamel,or equal.
B. Existing metalwork to be recoated:
1. First coat: Exterior galvanized metal primer product of the finish coat
manufacturer.
2. Two coats:Moore Impervo Enamel,Pittsburgh PPG Quick Dry Enamel,Glidden
Glid Guard Industrial Enamel,or equal
C. Existing solid wood trim and siding and existing wood windows and frames:
1. First coat for new unprimed wood surfaces and existing bare wood, only:
Exterior alkyd pigmented primer/sealer product of the finish coating
manufacturer.
2. Two coats: Moore Moorglo Latex House &Trim Paint,PPG Sun-Proof Latex
House&Trim Paint, California Acrylic Trim Paint, Glidden Spred Latex trim
Paint, or equal.
2.03 INTERIOR COATING SCHEDULE
A. New items of solid birch, poplar,pine, birch veneer plywood,and fir veneer plywood,
after specified preparation thereof:
1. First coat for bare wood and plywood surfaces, only: Moore Alkyd Enamel
Underbody, Pittsburgh Quick Dry Enamel Undercoater, Glidden Spred
Undercoater, or equal.
ASW
2. Two coats: Moore Regal Aquaglo, Pittsburgh Manor Hall Latex Lo-Lustre
Enamel, Glidden Spred Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel, or equal.
PAINTING 09900-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
5. New finish hardware, except primed hinges and closers.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with the provisions of SECTION 01300,
SUBMITTALS:
1. Colors and samples:
a. The Architect will furnish a schedule of colors for each area and
surface. Mix all colors in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.More than one color may be used on any wall surface with
straight line separation between colors, at no additional cost to the
Owner.
b. Colors of priming coats (and body coats where specified) shall be
lighter than those of finish coat.
C. Ensure that all colorants are pure,non-fading pigments,mildew-proof,
sunproof, finely ground in approved medium; and limeproof, when
used in coatings to be applied on plaster, and gypsum board surfaces.
d. Prepare,and submit to the Architect for approval,samples of all colors,
stains,and finishes.Make the submissions sufficiently in advance of the
schedule application commencement to permit a proper review by the
Architect, adjustments in colors to be made, re-submissions to be
reviewed, and approvals given, so as not to delay work. Re-do any
coatings,applied without such approval,to the Architect's satisfaction,
and bear all costs therefor.
e. Prepare and submit samples of opaque coatings on separate 12 by 16
inch tempered hardboard panels, or same sized dense-surfaced
cardboard. Prepare and submit samples of stain and clear finish to be
applied on matching species of the existing woods or wood veneer
plywoods, on pieces at least 8 by 8 inch size.
f. After final approval of all colors by the Architect, submit to the
authorized representative of the Owner,color chips of all coatings used,
with manufacturer's name and his designation of the coating and color
for the purpose of future re-ordering of coatings. Color chips for color
shall total at least six(6)square inches for each color.
2. Literature: Manufacturer's complete product data and specifications for each
type coating material to be applied hereunder,including material compositions,
recommended application procedures,and product limitations.
B. Do not commit to ordering materials until all required submittals have been made, and
PAINTING 09900-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2. Sanding and removal of all defective and abraded transparent finishes on wood
and plywood surfaces,thoroughly washing and rinsing all transparent finishes,
spot-priming bare surfaces with first coat material specified for similar new
surfaces, and application of specified stain-kill material to remainder of the
surfaces.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. The following related work will be performed under the designated SECTIONS:
1. Shop priming and touch-up of new non-galvanized miscellaneous metals:
SECTION 05500,MISCELLANEOUS METALS.
2. Gypsum drywall work, including sanding of all joint and fastener head
compound: SECTION 09255,GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES.
3. Shop priming of new flush steel doors,pressed steel frames,and related items in
conjunction therewith: SECTION 08110, STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES.
4. Factory-finishing of new mechanical and electrical equipment: SECTIONS
15400, 15600, and, 16000,respectively.
5. Staging and planking over eight (8) feet in height, furnished, installed, and
maintained, at no cost to the PAINTING Sub-Contractor: SECTION 01500,
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS.
6. Selective demolition and removal of existing work, not otherwise specified
hereunder: SECTION 02070, SELECTIVE DEMOLITION.
7. The Contractor shall be made aware that lead-containing paint may be present
on several components located throughout the building that will be impacted by
renovation activities on this project.Lead abatement of these components will
not be required for performance of the renovation work outlined by the Contract
Documents and Drawings. The Contractor shall refer to section 02080 -
`Disturbance of Lead Containing Materials" for specific procedures.
B. The following items of work do not require painting or finishing under this SECTION
09900:
1. New prefinished items.
2. Copper,brass,unprimed aluminum, stainless steel, and bright metalwork.
3. Concealed-from-view items and surfaces,except as specified hereunder.
4. Exterior concrete, stone, cast material and masonry.
PAINTING 09900-3
1 1 11 IN
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. PART A and DIVISION 1 of PART B, as listed in the TABLE OF CONTENTS, are
hereby made part of this SECTION by reference thereto.
B. Refer to SECTION 01030,ALTERNATES,for alternates which may affect the work of
this SECTION.
C. After inspecting existing conditions at the site,examine the various trade SECTIONS of
the Specifications and be thoroughly familiar with all provisions regarding painting and
finishing work included herein.
D. Refer to the Room Finish Schedules and other Drawings for various surfaces to receive
applied coatings hereunder,together with other surfaces and items specified herein.
1.02 WORK TO BE PERFORMED
A. Furnish and install the following:
1. Complete specified finish systems,for all new exterior and interior surfaces and
materials; new replacement segments of existing exterior and interior surfaces
and materials;and bare surfaces of existing exterior and interior work,except as
otherwise specified hereunder.
2. Two coats of specified finish materials for designated existing exterior and
interior previously-coated surfaces,after specified preparation thereof,except as
otherwise specified herein.
3. Paint exterior fiber cement board with two colors to be selected by the Architect.
Color No.I shall be the field color and color No. 2 shall be applied to all trim
work.
4. Paint all existing exterior wood trim and siding with two colors to match the new
exterior color scheme. Scrape and sand existing surfaces to prepare for new paint
applications.
B. Touch-up all scratches and other blemishes on surfaces of new pre-primed items and
surfaces, prior to applying finish systems hereunder. Touch-up all surface defects in
finishes applied hereunder,prior to final acceptance of the General Contract.
C. Prepare all existing previously-coated surfaces,not otherwise specified to be completely
re-finished, as required to properly receive new coatings to be applied hereunder,
including,but not necessarily limited to the following:
1. Sanding and removal of all defective and flaking paint,thoroughly washing and
rinsing all opaque coatings, and spot-priming bare surfaces with first coat
material specified for similar new surfaces.
PAINTING 09900 .2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
4, Florence,MA
SECTION 09900-PAINTING
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PARTI -GENERAL
1.00 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Drawings and conditions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary General
Conditions and all Division 1 Sections, apply to the work of this section.
B. Time,manner,and requirements for submitting filed sub-bids:
1. Sub-bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall be
filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at a time and place as
stipulated in the "NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS".
The following shall appear on the upper left hand comer of the envelope.
NAME OF SUB-BIDDER:
s NAME OF PROJECT:
SUB-BID FOR SECTION: 09900-PAINTING
2. Each sub-bid submitted for work under this Section shall be on forms famished
by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the
General Laws, as amended. Sub-bid forms may be obtained at the office of the
Architect-Engineer or may be obtained by written request.
3. Sub-bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a BID
BOND or CASH or CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURER'S or CASHIER'S
CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company payable to the City of
Northampton in the amount of 5 percent of the bid. A sub-bid accompanied by
any other form of bid deposit than those specified will be rejected.
C. Sub-Sub-Bid Requirements: (NONE REQUIRED UNDER THIS SECTION).
D. Work to be done under this SECTION is shown on all Drawings as listed and numbered on
title sheet under List of Drawings.
PAINTING 09900- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
00K Florence, MA
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Temperature at the time of installation must be between 65°-75°F(18°-24°C)and be
maintained for at least 48 hours after the installation to allow for proper adhesive set up.
B. Relative humidity shall not exceed 80%
C. Do not expose wall covering to direct sunlight during or after installation. This will
cause the surface temperature to rise,which in turn will cause bubbles and delamination.
D. Do not install Wall Covering in any rooms that will experience more than a 20°F(12°C)
temperature change.
E. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
F. Reversible pattern with a straight across match,horizontal repeat 26",vertical repeat 18"
3.02 CLEANING
A. General: Immediately upon completion of installation, clean wall covering and
accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommended cleaning method.
B. Remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from installation as work
progresses and upon completion of work.
END OF SECTION 09720
A
WALLCOVERING 09720-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA 'AWN
D. Chemical and stain resistance:Provide wall coverings and wall protection systems with
chemical and stain resistance in accordance with ASTM D-1308.
E. Color Match:Provide wall coverings and wall protection systems that are color matched
in accordance with the following: Delta E difference of no greater than 1.0 using the
Hunter (Lab) Scale. (Does not apply to .030" semi-rigid wall covering, due to its
inherent properties.)
F. Single source responsibility: Provide all components of the wall protection system
manufactured by the same company to ensure compatibility of color, texture and
physical properties.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Materials must be stored flat in a clean and dry area where temperature shall be
maintained above 507 (10°C). Do not stand rolls on end.
B. Materials must be acclimated in an environment of 65°- 75°F(18°-24°C) for at least
24 hours prior to beginning the installation. *"
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. In order to establish a standard of quality this contract is written for the following
manufacturers, equal products will be considered. Equal products must have similar
pattern repeat and pattern.
1. Tower Wallcovering—Surface Materials
With Stain Resistant tower coat finish
Built-in fungus inhibitor and fuse bonded backing
06723 approved, five year warranty,IS09002 certified
Mercury and Caduim free
Style: Barcelona damask
Color: T2-BD-03
Type II, 54"width 20.0 oz Lin. Yard
Class: A
Pattern Repeat: Hor. 26"X vert. 18"
WALLCOVERING 09720-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Pok Florence, MA
SECTION 09720-WALL COVERING
1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all
Sections within DIVISION 1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a
part of this Section of the Specifications.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This section includes the following types of wall protection:
1. Wall Covering
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements related to this section:
1. Division 6 Section 06100"Rough Carpentry"
2. Division 9 Section 09255 "Gypsum Board Assemblies"
1.03 REFERENCES
A. National Codes(UBC, SBCCI,BOCA and Life Safety)
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
C. Underwriters Laboratories(UL)
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer qualifications: Engage an installer who has not less than 3 years experience in
installation of wall coverings and wall protection systems similar in complexity to those
required for this project.
B. Manufacturer's qualifications: Not less than 5 years experience in the production of
specified products and a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Fire performance characteristics: Provide wall coverings with a NFPA 101-94
Classification when tested by ASTM E-84-91: Class A interior wall and ceiling finish
when mounted on reinforced cement board and on type X gypsum board. Test results
met flammability requirements of Federal Specification CCC-W-408A, B, C, D and
CFFA 101A,B with flame spread of 10 for type I and type II and smoke developed of
25 for type I and 5 for type II when tested according to ASTM E84-91 on reinforces
cement board.
WALLCOVERING 09720-1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
2. Gauge: 1/12"
3. Stitch count: 10 S.P.I.
4. Pile Height: .094 (low) .218 (high).
5. Yarn Weight(tufted): 30 oz./yd.
6. Fiber Content: BASF Zefron Nylon/BCF Nylon
7. Dye Method: Solution/space Dyed
8. Stain/Soil Protection: Commercial anti-soil protection
9. Secondary backing: iLoc Standard backing by Cambridge
10. Width: 12' broadloom
11. Static Control: less than 3.5 K.V.step.
12. Pattern repeat: 24"W x 25.5'L
Ow END OF SECTION 09680
4
CARPET 09680-9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA ,
3.6 CARPET SCHEDULE:
A. Available Product: Refer to Finish Plans for Carpet Designation Locations. Subject to
compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated Into the Work include,but are
not limited to, the following:
B. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following for the carpet in the
main areas ,borders and stair runner.(or equal):
Carpet Designation "CARPET 1":provide the following:
To establish a standard of quality this specification is based on "Glen Coe III"
manufactured by Cambridge with iLoc-standard backing,color to be Determined.Equal
products accepted upon approval by the Architect; these products must match desired
pattern and colors.
1. Construction: Textured Patterned Loop Broadloom
2. Gauge: 1/10"
3. Stitch count: 10 S.P.I.
4. Pile Height: 0.125 (low)0.156(high)
5. Yarn Weight(tufted): 26 oz./yd. ""
6. Fiber Content: BASF Zefron Nylon/BCF Nylon
7. Dye Method: Solution/space Dyed
8. Stain/Soil Protection: Commercial anti-soil protection
9. Secondary backing: iLoc Standard backing by Cambridge
10. Width: 12' broadloom
11. Static Control: less than 3.5 K.V.step.
C. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following for the carpet in
accent areas specified on finish plan(or equal):
Carpet Designation "CARPET 2"provide the following:
To establish a standard of quality this specification is based on"Kew Gardens III"with
iLoc-standard backing manufactured by Cambridge, color to be Determined. Equal
products accepted upon approval by the Architect; these products must match desired
pattern. Carpet to have a large-scale pattern repeat(see pattern repeat size)pattern to be
organic in nature with a free form swirl motif.
1. Construction: Interloop pattern Broadloom
CARPET 09680-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
E. Glue-Down Installation:
1. Fit sections of carpet into each space prior to application of adhesive. Trim
edges and butt cuts with seaming cement.
2. Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Butt carpet edges tightly together to form seams without gaps. Roll
entire carpet area lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensure uniform bond.
Remove any adhesive promptly from face of carpet by method which will not
damage carpet face.
F. Carpet to be installed in patterns as indicated on the drawings.
3.4 INSTALLATION ON STAIR TREADS
A. Stretch-in installation; comply with CRI 104, section 13.
B. Install carpet in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
F. Carpet shall be securely bonded to the floor in compliance with the "Americans with
Disabilities Act"(ADA), § Section 4.5.3.
G. Proper layout and planning shall be completed prior to any application of tacking strips
H. Apply tackstrips to each stair riser, tread and along all edges and power stretch carpet to
insure a secure bond with no wrinkling or buckling.
F. Bind all exposed edges of carpet runner.
G. Carpet to be installed with pile running parallel to length of stairs.
3.5 CLEANING:
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation.
1. Remove visible adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
2. Remove protruding yarns from carpet surface.
3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.
3.6 PROTECTION:
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 15: "Protection of Indoor Installation."
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions,in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure carpet is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial
Completion.
CARPET 09680-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
affecting performance of carpet. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
B. Verify that subfloors and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with
requirements specified in this Section and those of the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer.
3.2 PREPARATION:
A. General: Comply with carpet manufacturer's installation recommendations to prepare
substrates indicated to receive carpet installation.
B. Level subfloor within 1/4 inch in 10 feet, noncumulative, in all directions. Sand or grind
protrusions,bumps,and ridges. Patch and repair cracks and rough areas. Fill depressions.
1. Use leveling and patching compounds to fill cracks,holes,and depressions in subfloor
as recommended by the following:
a. Carpet manufacturer.
C. Remove subfloor coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are
incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap,wax, oil, or silicone.
D. Broom or vacuum clean subfloors to be covered with carpet. Following cleaning,examine
subfloors for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust.
E. Concrete-Subfloor Preparation: Apply concrete-slab primer, according to manufacturer's
directions, where recommended by the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer.
3.3 INSTALLATION:
A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet;
maintain uniformity of carpet location and lay of pile. Follow seaming diagram as
submitted and approved. At doors, center seams under doors; do not place seams in
traffic direction at doorway.
B. Extend carpet under open-bottomed obstructions and under removable flanges and
furnishings, and into alcoves and closets of each space.
C. Provide cut-outs where required, and bind cut edges properly where not concealed by
protective edge guards or overlapping flanges.
D. Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to substrate.
CARPET 09680-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
oft Florence, MA
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents.
1. Carpet: Before installation begins, furnish quantity equal to 5 percent of amount
installed but not less than one carton or bundle of each color and pattern.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET:
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the products specified in
each carpet Product Data sheet at end of this Section.
2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES:
A. Concrete-Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer.
owk B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: As recommended by the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer.
C. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type, free from methanol or
solvents and conforming to OSHA requirements regarding VOC's, to suit products and
subfloor conditions indicated and to comply with flammability requirements for installed
carpet as recommended by the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer.
D. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet
manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to
prevent pile loss at seams.
E. Transition Strips: At all joints between carpet and other flooring materials, the carpet
installer shall provide and install metal transition strips. See contract drawing for details and
manufacturer's models. To establish a standard of quality, transition strips shall be
manufactured by Schluter. Equal products may be used with approval from the architect.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION:
A. Examine subfloors and conditions,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content,alkalinity range,installation tolerances,and other conditions
CARPET 09680-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
A. General: Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104, Section 5: "Storage and
Handling."
B. Deliver materials to Project site in original factory wrappings and containers, labeled with
identification of manufacturer,brand name, and lot number.
C. Store materials on-site in original undamaged packages,inside well-ventilated area protected
from weather, moisture, soilage, extreme temperatures, and humidity. Lay flat, with
continuous blocking off ground.
1. Store carpet materials between 40°F and 100°F. Condition carpet tiles for a minimum
of 48 hours prior to installation between 60T and 90T.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6: "Site Conditions."
B. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until space is
enclosed and weatherproof,wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry,work above
ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be
continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.
C. Subfloor Moisture Conditions: Moisture emission rate of not more than 3 lb/1000 sq.ft./24 ^W,
hours when tested by calcium chloride moisture test in compliance with CRI 104,6.2.1,with
subfloor temperatures not less than 55 deg F.
D. Subfloor Alkalinity Conditions: A pH range of 5 to 9 when subfloor is wetted with potable
water and pHydrion paper is applied.
E. Subfloor temperature shall be a minimum of 60°F for proper adhesive performance.
1.8 WARRANTY:
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner
of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and
shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor
under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Carpet Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by carpet manufacturer and
Installer agreeing to repair or replace carpet that does not meet requirements or that fails in
materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include,but are not
limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and
delamination.
C. Warranty Period: Lifetime with iLoc standard backing from date of Substantial Completion.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS:
CARPET 09680-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
G. Maintenance data for carpet to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in
Division 1. Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining carpet,including manufacturer's recommended frequency for
maintaining carpet.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes
and performance. Include cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified by the Floor
Covering Installation Board (FCIB) or who can demonstrate compliance with FCIB
certification program requirements.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of carpet from one source and by a single
manufacturer.
C. Carpet Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide carpet with the following fire-test-
response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated
below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Identify carpet with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
1. Surface Flammability: Passes CPSC 16 CFR,Part 1630.
2. Flame Spread: 25 or less per ASTM E 84.
3. Smoke Developed: 450 or less per ASTM E 84.
D. Mockups: Prior to installing carpet, construct mockups for each type of carpet and
installation method required to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups
to comply with the following requirements,using materials indicated for final unit of Work.
1. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or,if not indicated,as
directed by Architect.
2. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before start of final unit of Work.
5. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.
a. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial
Completion may become part of the completed Work.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING:
CARPET 09680-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For carpet installed on walkway surfaces,provide products
with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:
1. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8.
B. All products and installations shall be ADA compliant.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of carpet material and installation accessory specified. Submit
manufacturer's printed data on physical characteristics,durability,fade resistance,and fire-
test-response characteristics. Submit methods of installation for each type of substrate.
C. Shop Drawings showing columns,doorways,enclosing walls or partitions,built-in cabinets,
and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. Indicate the following:
1. Existing flooring materials to be removed. 100%,
2. Existing flooring materials to remain.
3. Carpet type, color, and dye lot.
4. Locations where dye lot changes occur.
5. Seam locations,types, and methods.
6. Type of subfloor.
7. Type of installation.
8. Pattern type,repeat size,location, direction, and starting point.
9. Pile direction.
10. Type, color, and location of insets and borders.
11. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.
12. Transition details to other flooring materials.
D. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts or Samples of
materials showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of
carpet indicated.
E. Samples for verification of the following products,in manufacturer's standard sizes,showing
the full range of color,texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare Samples from the
same material to be used for the Work. Label each sample with manufacturer's name,
material type, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and carpet schedule.
Submit the following:
1. Full tile samples of each type of carpet material required.
2. 12-inch Samples of each type of exposed edge stripping and accessory item.
F. Schedule of carpet using same room designations indicated on Drawings.
CARPET 09680-2
1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
SECTION 09680- CARPET
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and conditions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary General
Conditions and all Division 1 Sections,apply to the work of this section.
B. Time,manner, and requirements for submitting filed sub-bids:
1. Sub-bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall be
filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at a time and place as
stipulated in the "NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS".
The following shall appear on the upper left hand comer of the envelope.
NAME OF SUB-BIDDER:
NAME OF PROJECT:
SUB-BID FOR SECTION: 09680 -Carpet
2. Each sub-bid submitted for work under this Section shall be on forms furnished
by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the
General Laws, as amended. Sub-bid forms may be obtained at the office of the
Architect-Engineer or may be obtained by written request.
3. Sub-bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a BID
BOND or CASH or CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURER'S or CASHIER'S
CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company payable to the City of
Northampton in the amount of 5 percent of the bid. A sub-bid accompanied by
any other form of bid deposit than those specified will be rejected.
C. Sub-Sub-Bid Requirements: (NONE REQUIRED UNDER THIS SECTION).
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes carpet, carpet stair runner and installation.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 3 Sections for curing compounds and other concrete treatments compatibility
with carpet adhesives.
2. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for materials and
►, installation.
CARPET 09680- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
according to resilient product manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate with
Owner's maintenance program.
3.5 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
A. Vinyl Wall Base VINYL: Where indicated on the room finish schedules or designation is
indicated,provide rubber wall base complying with the following:
1. Products: As follows:
a. Johnsonite,Division of Duramax,Inc.
2. Color and Pattern:
a. VINYL: As selected by the Architect.
3. Style: Cove with top-set toe at vinyl composition tile.
4. Minimum Thickness: 1/8 inch.
5. Height: 6 inches.
6. Lengths: Coils in lengths standard with manufacturer,but not less than 96 feet.
7. Outside Corners: Field fabricated.
8. Inside Corners: Field fabricated.
9. Ends: Field fabricated.
10. Surface: Smooth.
END OF SECTION 09653
A"k
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
instructions.
B. Apply resilient wall base to walls,columns,pilasters,casework and cabinets in toe spaces,and
other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
1. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
2. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
3. Do not stretch base during installation.
4. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of
resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
5. Install premolded outside and inside corners before installing straight pieces.
C. Place resilient products so they are butted to adjacent materials and bond to substrates with
adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING:
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient and rubber products:
1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by resilient
product manufacturers. *"
2. Sweep or vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly.
3. Do not wash resilient products until after time period recommended by resilient product
manufacturer.
4. Damp-mop or sponge resilient products to remove marks and soil.
B. Protect resilient products against mars,marks,indentations,and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period.
Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by resilient product manufacturer.
1. Apply protective floor polish to vinyl resilient products installed on floors that are free
from soil,visible adhesive, and surface blemishes,if recommended by manufacturer.
a. Use commercially available product acceptable to resilient product manufacturer.
b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service.
2. Cover resilient products installed on floors with undyed,untreated building paper until
inspection for Substantial Completion.
C. Clean resilient products not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections intended to
establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean products according to
manufacturer's written recommendations.
1. Before cleaning,strip protective floor polish that was applied to vinyl products on floors
after completing installation only if required to restore polish finish and if recommended
by resilient product manufacturer.
2. After cleaning,reapply polish on vinyl products on floors to restore protective floor finish
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
each designation in the Resilient Wall Base and Accessory Schedule at the end of Part 3.
2.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE:
A. Vinyl Wall Base: Products complying with FS SS-W-40, Type I and with requirements
specified in the Resilient Wall Base and Accessory Schedule.
2.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES:
A. Vinyl Accessories: Products complying with requirements specified in the Resilient Wall Base
and Accessory Schedule.
2.4 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES:
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based
formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
* 3.1 EXANIINATION:
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of resilient products will occur,
with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements, including those for
maximum moisture content. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for resilient
product installation and comply with requirements specified. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION:
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates
indicated to receive resilient products.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions,to fill cracks,holes,and depressions in substrates.
C. Remove coatings,including curing compounds,and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap,wax,oil,or silicone,using mechanical methods recommended
by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing resilient
products. After cleaning,examine substrates for moisture,alkaline salts,carbonation,or dust.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Install resilient and rubber products according to manufacturer's written installation
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA ,
1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 W/sq. cm or greater when tested per ASTM E 648.
2. Smoke Density: Maximum specific optical density of 450 or less when tested per
ASTM E 662.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and containers,
each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and
handling instructions.
B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather,with ambient temperatures maintained
between 50 and 90 deg F.
C. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours before installation,
unless longer conditioning period is recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F in spaces to receive
resilient products for at least 48 hours before installation,during installation,and for at least 48
hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written recommendations specify longer time
periods. After postinstallation period,maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F or more
than 95 deg F.
B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be
installed.
C. For resilient products installed on traffic surfaces,close spaces to traffic during installation and
for time period after installation recommended in writing by manufacturer.
D. Coordinate resilient product installation with other construction to minimize possibility of
damage and soiling during remainder of construction period. Install resilient products after other
finishing operations, including painting,have been completed.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS:
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for each 250 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each
different type, color,pattern,and size of resilient product installed.
2. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the products indicated for
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 09653-RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. All work indicated under this section shall be included under the filed sub bid Section 09651
Resilient Flooring.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Resilient wall base.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section"Resilient Tile Flooring."
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's standard sample sets consisting of sections of units
showing the full range of colors and patterns available for each type of product indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard sizes,but not less than 12 inches long,of
each product color and pattern specified.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of resilient wall base and accessories certifying
that each product furnished complies with requirements.
1.4 OUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who
has specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project and with a
record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and color of product specified from one source with
resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without
delaying the Work.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire-test-response
characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653-1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA ,
1. Before cleaning,strip protective floor polish that was applied after completing installation
only if required to restore polish finish and if recommended by flooring manufacturer.
2. After cleaning,reapply polish to floor surfaces to restore protective floor finish according
to flooring manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate with Owner's
maintenance program.
3.5 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING SCHEDULE:
A. Vinyl Composition Tile VCT: Where this designation is indicated,provide vinyl composition
floor tile complying with the following:
1. Products:To establish a standard of quality,the contract documents are based on resilient
tile flooring as manufactured by Armstrong Commercial Flooring. Equal products may
be used with approval from the architect. Colors shall be chosen from Armstrong
Commercial Flooring's Standard Excelon,"imperial texture"line(or equal)as scheduled
below:
a. VCT-1: As selected by the Architect.
b. VCT-2: As selected by the Architect.
2. Tile layout patterns are shown in the contract documents. Final colors will be chosen by
the architect during the submittal phase.
3. Class: Class 2.
4. Wearing Surface: Smooth.
5. Thickness: 1/8 inch.
6. Size: 12 by 12 inches.
END OF SECTION 09651
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 -6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device.
G. Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts,and similar items in finished floor areas.
Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed on covers.
Tightly adhere edges to perimeter of floor around covers and to covers.
H. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to comply
with tile manufacturer's written instructions, including those for trowel notching, adhesive
mixing, and adhesive open and working times.
1. Provide completed installation without open cracks,voids,raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks,and other surface imperfections.
I. Hand roll tiles according to tile manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING:
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient products:
1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by resilient
product manufacturers.
2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.
3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by flooring manufacturer.
4. Damp-mop floor to remove marks and soil.
B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period.
Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by flooring manufacturer.
1. Apply protective floor polish to floor surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive,
and surface blemishes, if recommended in writing by manufacturer.
a. Use commercially available product acceptable to flooring manufacturer.
1) Apply two coats of sealer and three coats of wax.
b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service.
2. Cover products installed on floor surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper until
inspection for Substantial Completion.
3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor surfaces. Place plywood or
hardboard panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or
roll objects over panels without moving panels.
C. Clean floor surfaces not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections intended to
401k establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean products according to
manufacturer's written recommendations.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 -5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
manufacturer.
3. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete" for slabs receiving resilient flooring.
4. Subfloors are free of cracks,ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION:
A. General: Comply with resilient product manufacturer's written installation instructions for
preparing substrates indicated to receive resilient products.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions,to fill cracks,holes,and depressions in substrates.
C. Remove coatings,including curing compounds,and other substances that are incompatible with
flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation.
After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 TILE INSTALLATION:
A. General: Comply with tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls,discounting minor offsets, so
tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths
that equal less than one-half of a tile at perimeter.
1. Lay tiles square with room axis,unless otherwise indicated.
C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures. Discard
broken, cracked, chipped,or deformed tiles.
1. Lay tiles in basket-weave pattern with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles.
2. Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated on Drawings.
3. Scribe, cut and fit tiles to conform to the complex curves and shapes indicated. Joints
between different tile types shall be neat,tight and smooth.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures,
including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and
nosings.
E. Extend tiles into toe spaces,door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
F. Maintain reference markers,holes,and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 -4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
2. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the products indicated for
each designation in the Resilient Tile Flooring Schedule at the end of Part 3.
2.2 RESILIENT TILE:
A. Vinyl Composition Floor Tile: Products complying with ASTM F 1066 and with requirements
specified in the Resilient Tile Flooring Schedule.
2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES:
A. Leveling and Patching Compounds: The Resilient Flooring Contractor shall provide and
installed the leveling and patching materials in all locations where new tile is being installed
The leveling process shall include portland cement based materials chemically mixed with water
and installed according to the manufacturer's specifications. Acceptable manufacturer's include
the following:
1. Ardex,Inc.-"SD-F Feather Finish"
2. Umaco, Inc.—"Acrylflex/Add Mix-21
3. Maple Corporation—"Planicrete 50 and Ultra/Pan MB"
4. Dependable Chemical Co.,Inc—Feathercrete and Skimcrete XL"
B. The floor preparation and/or leveling shall include a three coat system to provide an acceptable
surface for the finish floor material. The floor preparation shall include the following:
1. First Coat:Acrylflex/Add Mix 21
2. Second Coat: Acrylflex/Add Mix 21
3. Third Coat: Ardex SD-F Feather Finish
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION:
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of resilient products will occur,
with Installer present,for compliance with manufacturer's requirements. Verify that substrates
and conditions are satisfactory for resilient product installation and comply with requirements
specified.
B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
"* 2. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by flooring
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 -3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA ,..
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire-test-response
characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 W/sq. cm or greater when tested per ASTM E 648.
2. Smoke Density: Maximum specific optical density of 450 or less when tested per
ASTM E 662.
1.05 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and containers,
each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and
handling instructions.
B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather,with ambient temperatures maintained
between 50 and 90 deg F.
C. Store tiles on flat surfaces.
D. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours before installation,
unless longer conditioning period is recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F in spaces to receive
products for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for at least 48 hours
after installation,unless manufacturer's written recommendations specify longer time periods.
After postinstallation period,maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F or more than 95
deg F.
B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be
installed.
C. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation and for time period after installation
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
D. Install tiles and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
E. Do not install flooring over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond
with adhesive,as determined by flooring manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test.
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS:
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Furnish not less than one box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color,
pattern, class,wearing surface, and size of resilient tile flooring installed.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 -2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
SECTION 09651 -RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and conditions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary General
Conditions and all Division 1 Sections, apply to the work of this section.
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Vinyl composition floor tile.
1. Floor Preparation.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section"Resilient Wall Base and Accessories"for resilient wall base,reducer
strips,and other accessories installed with resilient floor tiles.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units
showing the full range of colors and patterns available for each type of product indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: Full-size tiles of each different color and pattern of resilient floor tile
specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of resilient products certifying that each product
furnished complies with requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: For resilient floor tle to include in the maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who
has specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project and with a
record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type,color,and pattern of product specified from one source
with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties
without delaying the Work.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 - 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
,,, Florence,MA
2. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel
Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-
rolled steel sheet hot-dip galvanized according to
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation, with prefinished,
15/16-inch-wide,steel caps on flanges;other characteristics as follows:
a. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
b. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-
edge type, as standard with manufacturer.
C. Face Design: Flush face.
d. Cap Material: Steel painted.
f. Cap Finish: Painted white.
END OF SECTION 09511
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 11
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
a. "Sheetrock brand lay-in ceiling tile,C1imaPlus#3260 with vinyl
finish"USG Interiors, Inc.
2. Classification: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 for Type XX,Pattern G
3. Pattern: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 pattern designation(description)
as specified by product designation.
4. Color: to be selected by architect.
5. Light Reflectance Coefficient: Not less than 0.77 .
6. Ceiling Attenuation Class: Not less than CAC 45.
7. Edge Detail: Square.
8. Thickness: %z inch for USG.
9. Size: 24 by 24 inches.
10. Warranty: 15 years against visible sag. 104 deg., 90 percent relative
humidity.
11. Surface burning characteristics,ASTM E84:Class A,Flame spread:25.
smoke developed: 5
C. Suspension Systems:
SAT-1 Suspension System for Acoustical Panel Ceiling "SAT-1": Where this
designation is indicated,provide a washable acoustical panel ceiling suspension
system complying with the following:
1. Products: Provide one of the following:
a. "Donn DX;" USG Interiors,Inc.
2. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel
Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-
rolled steel sheet hot-dip galvanized according to
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation, with prefinished,
15/16-inch-wide,steel caps on flanges;other characteristics as follows:
a. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
b. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-
edge type, as standard with manufacturer.
C. Face Design: Flush face.
d. Cap Material: Steel painted.
e. Cap Finish: Painted white.
SAT-2 Suspension System for Acoustical Panel Ceiling "SAT-2": Where these
designations are indicated, provide acoustical panel ceiling suspension system
complying with the following:
1. Products: Provide one of the following:
a. "Donn DXLA;"USG Interiors, Inc.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
3.5 CLEANING:
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning
and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
3.6 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING SCHEDULE:
A. Areas to receive suspended acoustical tile/panel ceilings are indicated in the Room Finish
Schedule and on the reflected ceiling plans by the notation S.A.T. The types of suspended
acoustical panel ceilings for each room are indicated below.
B. Ceiling Tiles:
SAT-1 Wet formed,Mineral-Base Acoustical Panels for Acoustical Panel Ceiling
"SAT-111: Where this designation is indicated, provide acoustical panels
complying with the following:
1. Products: Equal products may be used with approval from the architect:
a. "Eclipse C1imaPlus#76775 USG Interiors,Inc.
2. Classification: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 for Type III, Form 1,
pattern EI
3. Pattern: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 pattern designation(description)
as specified by product designation.
4. Color: To be selected by architect.
5. Light Reflectance Coefficient: .84.
6. Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.75.
7. Ceiling Attenuation Class: Not less than CAC 35.
8. Edge Detail: Shadow Line—tapered(SLT)
9. Thickness: 3/4 inch minimum.
10. Size: 24 by 24 See drawings
11. Warranty: 10 years against visible sag. 104 deg., 90 percent relative
humidity.
12. Surface burning characteristics,ASTM E84:Class A,Flame spread:25.
smoke developed: 25
SAT-2 Wet-formed,Mineral-Base Acoustical Panels for Acoustical Ceiling"SAT-2
Where this designation is indicated,provide acoustical panels complying with
the following:
1. Products:Equal products may be used with approval from the architect:
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one
another. Remove and replace dented,bent, or kinked members.
F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a
neat,precise fit.
1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a. Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to long axis of
space.
2. For square-edged panels,install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges
of suspension system runners and moldings.
3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system members with box-shaped flanges,
install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension system surfaces and
panel faces flush with bottom face of runners.
4. Paint cut panel edges remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed
panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical
panel manufacturer.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field
quality-control testing.
B. Extent and Testing Frequency: Testing will take place in successive stages in areas
described below. Proceed with installation of acoustical panel ceilings only after test results
for previously installed hangers comply with requirements.
1. Extent of Each Test Area: When installation of ceiling suspension systems on each
floor has reached 20 percent completion but no panels have been installed.
2. Within each test area, testing agency will select one of every 10 powder-actuated
fasteners and post-installed anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will test
them for 200 lbf of tension;it will also select one of every two post-installed anchors
used to attach bracing wires to concrete and will test them for 440 lbf of tension.
3. When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with requirements,
testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested until 20 consecutively pass
and then will resume initial testing frequency.
C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D. Remove and replace those fasteners and anchors that test results indicate do not comply with
specified requirements.
^'
E. Additional Testing: Where fasteners and anchors are removed and replaced, additional
testing will be performed to determine compliance with specified requirements.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
ASTM E 580.
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension
system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal
forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support
standard suspension system members,install supplemental suspension members and
hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension
members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established
by referenced standards and publications.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to
inserts,eye screws,or other devices that are secure;that are appropriate for substrate;
and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated
temperatures.
5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate
framing members,by attaching to inserts,eye screws,or other devices that are secure
and appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger
involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail
due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or drilled-in
anchors that extend through forms into concrete.
7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly
from hangers,unless otherwise indicated;and provide hangers not more than 8 inches
from ends of each member.
C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four
tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers,
without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing
wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of
moldings before they are installed.
2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not
more than 3 inches from ends,leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance
of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA .�.
horizontal and vertical ceiling panels. Joints between grid systems shall be riveted together.
See drawings for additional details and locations.
2.4 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT:
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag,
paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following
requirements:
1. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints
and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a. PL Acoustical Sealant; Chemrex,Inc.,Contech Brands.
b. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant;Pecora Corp.
C. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant;United States Gypsum Co.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION:
A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut,
with Installer present,for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections
that affect ceiling installation and anchorage,and other conditions affecting performance of
acoustical panel ceilings.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION:
A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors
whose installation is specified in other Sections.
B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths
at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and
comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
3.3 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per
manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636.
2. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
Direct Hung, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Cast-in-Place and Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material
indicated below,with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with
capability to sustain,without failure,a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling
construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified
testing and inspecting agency.
a. Type: Postinstalled expansion anchors.
b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC service condition
(mild).
2. Postinstalled Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type
suitable for application indicated,fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials,with
clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with
capability to sustain,without failure,a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling
construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified
testing and inspecting agency.
E. Wire Hangers,Braces,and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M,Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load
(ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than yield stress of wire, but
provide not less than 0.106-inch-diameter wire.
F. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
G. Flat Hangers: Mild steel,zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
H. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch-thick,
galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M,G90 coating designation;with
bolted connections and 5/16-inch-diameter bolts.
I. Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated,
manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge
details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material and
finish as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.
1. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter
required to fit penetration exactly.
2. For narrow-face suspension systems,provide suspension system and manufacturer's
standard edge moldings that match width and configuration of exposed runners.
J. Vertical Metal Suspension System.At acoustical ceiling panels soffits,the ceiling contractor
shall provide and install metal "F" style grid molding. The grid shall support both the
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA 00%,
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated
for each designation in the Acoustical Panel Ceiling Schedule at the end of Part 3.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL:
A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration
indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types,patterns,
acoustical ratings, and light reflectances,unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mounting Method for Measuring Noise Reduction Coefficient: Type E-400;plenum
mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per
ASTM E 795.
B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each
product type.
1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing
ASTM E 1264 pattern designations and not manufacturers' proprietary product
designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full
range of products that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color,
light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.
C. Antimicrobial Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard
antimicrobial solution consisting of a synergistic blend of substituted ammonium salts of
alkylated phosphoric acids admixed with free alkylated phosphoric acid that inhibits fungus,
mold,mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria.
D. Panel Characteristics: Comply with requirements indicated in the Acoustical Panel Ceiling
Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM E 1264 classifications.
2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL:
A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply
with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements.
B. Metal Suspension System Characteristics: Comply with requirements indicated in the
Acoustical Panel Ceiling Schedule at the end of Part 3.
C. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for
Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating
finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.
1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating
Classification for Severe Environment Performance"where high-humidity finishes are
indicated. A►
D. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
O'' Florence, MA
independent testing and inspecting agency that is acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction and that performs testing and follow-up services.
2. Surface-burning characteristics of acoustical panels comply with ASTM E 1264 for
Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84.
3. Fire-resistance-rated assemblies, which are indicated by design designations from
UL's "Fire Resistance Directory," from ITS/Wamock Hersey's "Directory of Listed
Products,"or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency,are identical
in materials and construction to those tested per ASTM E 119.
4. Products are identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site in original,
unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected
against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels,permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed
and weatherproof,wet-work in spaces is complete and dry,work above ceilings is complete,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
1.7 COORDINATION:
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them,including light fixtures,HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system,and partition assemblies.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS:
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage,and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Provide 10 full size ceiling tiles of each type installed.
2. Suspension System Components: Provide 10 linear feet of runner and five cross rails
of each type installed.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA ,..�►,,
1. Ceiling suspension system members.
2. Method of attaching suspension system hangers to building structure.
3. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures; air outlets and inlets; speakers;
sprinklers;and special moldings at walls,column penetrations,and other junctures of
acoustical ceilings with adjoining construction.
4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch= 1 foot.
C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each type of ceiling assembly indicated;in sets
for each color,texture,and pattern specified,showing the full range of variations expected in
these characteristics.
1. 6-inch-square samples of each acoustical panel type,pattern, and color.
2. Set of 12-inch-long samples of exposed suspension system members, including
moldings, for each color and system type required.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other
information specified.
E. Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of acoustical panel ceilings and components with
requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products. lowhk
F. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of acoustical panel ceiling's and components'
compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed acoustical panel
ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a
record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations for Ceiling Units: Obtain each acoustical ceiling panel from one source
with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties
without delaying the Work.
C. Source Limitations for Suspension System: Obtain each suspension system from one source
with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties
without delaying the Work.
1. Obtain both acoustical ceiling panels and suspension system from the same
manufacturer.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the
following requirements:
1. Fire-response tests were performed by UL, ITS/Wamock Hersey, or another
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
SECTION 09511 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and conditions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary General
Conditions and all Division 1 Sections,apply to the work of this section.
B. Time,manner, and requirements for submitting filed sub-bids:
1. Sub-bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall be
filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at a time and place as
stipulated in the "NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS".
The following shall appear on the upper left hand corner of the envelope.
NAME OF SUB-BIDDER:
NAME OF PROJECT:
SUB-BID FOR SECTION: 09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings _
2. Each sub-bid submitted for work under this Section shall be on forms furnished
by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the
General Laws,as amended. Sub-bid forms may be obtained at the office of the
Architect-Engineer or may be obtained by written request.
3. Sub-bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a BID
BOND or CASH or CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURER'S or CASHIER'S
CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company payable to the City of
Northampton in the amount of 5 percent of the bid. A sub-bid accompanied by
any other form of bid deposit than those specified will be rejected.
C. Sub-Sub-Bid Requirements: (NONE REQUIRED UNDER THIS SECTION).
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes ceilings consisting of acoustical panels and exposed suspension
systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating
penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken,
unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions,in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure tile is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial
Completion.
1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective
cleaner to completed file floors. Protect installed rile work with kraft paper or other heavy
covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage,and wear.
2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is
completed.
D. Before final inspection,remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from file surfaces.
END OF SECTION 09310
CERAMIC TILE 09310- 13
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA ,,00,
contraction,and isolation joints,where indicated during installation of setting materials,mortar
beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants."
H. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following tile installation standards:
1. For ceramic tile grouts(sand-portland cement,dry-set,commercial portland cement,and
latex-portland cement grouts),comply with ANSI A108.10.
3.04 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION:
A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile Floor Installation
Schedule,including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 series of file
installation standards.
1. Clean concrete surfaces and moisten surfaces of concrete prior to placing setting mortar.
2. After the mud/mortar at depress slabs has been set and pitched to floor drains, float
mortar over an area no greater than to be covered with tile while the mud remains plastic.
Cover evenly with no bare spots. Comb mortar wit notched trowel within 10 minutes of
applying tile. AONk
3. Press tile firmly into mortar. Set in and adjust tile into position before initial set of mortar
takes place.
4. After the file has been allowed to set,force maximum amount of grout into joints. Strike
or tool the joints to a depth of cushion.
B. Joint Widths: Install file on floors with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch.
C. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated;set in same type of setting bed
as abutting field tile,unless otherwise indicated.
1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would
otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor fmish.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTING:
A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting,clean all ceramic file surfaces so they are
free of foreign matter.
1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from file as soon as possible.
2. Unglazed file may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by file and grout
manufacturer's written instructions,but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Protect
metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning.
Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning.
CERAMIC TILE 09310- 12
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
3.02 PREPARATION:
A. Remove coatings,including curing compounds,and other substances that contain soap,wax,oil,
or silicone and are incompatible with tile-setting materials by using a terrazzo or concrete
grinder,a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush.
B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with dry-set or latex-portland cement mortars
that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI Al 08 series of file installation
standards for installations indicated.
1. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per rile-setting material manufacturer's
written instructions to fill cracks,holes,and depressions.
2. Remove protrusions,bumps,and ridges by sanding or grinding.
C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample
submittals,verify that tile has been blended in the factory and packaged so tile units taken from
one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match
approved Samples. If not factory blended,either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project
site before installing.
3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL:
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 series of file installation
standards in "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile"that apply to types of setting and
grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's"Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with
TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete
covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at
obstructions,edges,and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for
straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other
penetrations so plates, collars,or covers overlap tile.
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when
adjoining tiles on floor,base,and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields
in both directions in each space. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. For tile mounted in sheets,make joints between tile sheets the same width as joints within
tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,
CERAMIC TILE 09310- 11
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
4. Latex additive(water emulsion)described below,serving as replacement for part or all
of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex additive manufacturer for
use with job-mixed portland cement and aggregate mortar bed.
a. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard.
b. Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber.
C. Latex Additive: Acrylic resin.
B. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.1.
1. For wall applications, provide nonsagging, latex-portland cement mortar complying
with ANSI Al 18.4 for mortar of this type defined in Section F-2.1.2.
C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4, composed as follows:
1. Prepackaged Dry-Mortar Mix: Factory-prepared mixture of portland cement; dry,
redispersible,ethylene vinyl acetate additive;and other ingredients to which only water
needs to be added at Project site.
a. For wall applications, provide nonsagging, latex-portland cement mortar
complying with ANSI A118.4 for mortar of this type defined in Section F-2.1.2.
2. Mixture of Dry-Mortar Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of prepackaged dry-mortar
mix and liquid-latex additive complying with the following requirements:
a. Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber.
b. Latex Additive: Acrylic resin.
c. For wall applications, provide nonsagging, latex-portland cement mortar
complying with ANSI A118.4 for mortar of this type defined in Section F-2.1.2.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION:
A. Examine substrates,areas,and conditions where tile will be installed,with Installer present,for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of installed tile.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free from oil,waxy films,and
curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108
series of tile installation standards for installations indicated.
2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors,recessed frames, electrical and mechanical
units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before
installing tile.
3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations;if
not coordinated, adjust latter in consultation with Architect.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
CERAMIC TILE 09310-10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2.10 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT:
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
manufacturers'written instructions.
B. Add materials,water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment,mixer speeds,mixing containers,mixing time,and
other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for installations indicated.
D. Transition Strips:At all joints between ceramic rile and other flooring materials,the ceramic tile
installer shall provide and install metal transition strips. See contract drawing for details and
manufacturer's models. To establish a standard of quality, transition strips shall be
manufactured by Schluter. Equal products may be used with approval from the architect.
2.11 WATERPROOFING FOR ALL TILE INSTALLATIONS
A. Polyethylene-Sheet Waterproofing: Manufacturer's standard proprietary product consisting of
composite sheets,60 inches(152 mm)wide by a nominal thickness of 0.030 inches(0.76 mm),
composed of an inner layer of nonplasticized,chlorinated polyethylene sheet faced on both sides
with laminated,high-strength,nonwoven polyester material, designed for embedding in latex-
portland cement mortar and as the substrate for latex-portland cement mortar setting bed.
2.12 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement Mortar Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with
ANSI Al08.1A and as specified below:
1. Cleavage Membrane: Asphalt felt, ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15), or polyethylene
sheeting ASTM D 4397,4.0 mils(0.1. mm)thick.
2. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized,welded wire fabric,2 by 2 inches(50.8 by 50.8
nun)by 0.062-inch(1.57-mm)diameter;comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82,
except for minimum wire size.
3. Expanded Metal Lath: Provide diamond-mesh lath complying with ASTM C 847 for
requirements indicated below:
a. Base Metal and Finish for Interior Applications: Fabricate lath from uncoated or
zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, with uncoated steel sheet painted after
fabrication into lath.
b. Base Metal and Finish for Exterior Applications: Fabricate lath from zinc-coated
(galvanized)steel sheet.
C. Configuration over Studs and Furring: Flat.
d. Configuration over Solid Surfaces: Self-furring.
e. Weight: 2.5 lb/sq.yd. (1.4 kg/sq.in).
f. Weight: 3.4 lb/sq.yd. (1.8 kg/sq.m).
CERAMIC TILE 09310-9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA .40%
a. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard.
B. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1,Type I.
2.07 GROUTING MATERIALS:
A. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI Al 18.6 for materials described in Section H-2.4,
composed as follows:
1. Mixture of Dry-Grout Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of factory-prepared,dry-grout
mix and latex additive complying with the following requirements:
a. Unsanded Dry-Grout Mix: Dry-set grout complying with ANSI A 118.6 for
materials described in Section H-2.3, for joints 1/8 inch and narrower.
b. Sanded Dry-Grout Mix: Commercial portland cement grout complying with
ANSI Al 18.6 for materials described in Section H-2.1, for joints 1/8 inch and
wider.
C. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard.
2.08 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS:
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base
polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements of Division 7 .
Section"Joint Sealants."
B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed
joints,unless otherwise indicated.
C. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25;
Uses T,M,A, and,as applicable to joint substrates indicated,O.
D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
1. Multipart,Pourable Urethane Sealants:
a. Chem-Calk 550;Bostik.
b. Vulkem 245; Mameco International,Inc.
C. NR-200 Urexpan;Pecora Corp.
d. THC-900;Tremco, Inc.
2.09 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified,portland-cement-based
formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations
indicated.
B. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and
grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout
manufacturers.
CERANUC TILE 09310-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, NIA
2.05 PORCELAIN TILE
A. General:To provide a standard level of quality,the specification is based on "Continental Slate
Porcelain"as manufactured by Dal Tile This file shall conform to the requirements of ANSI
A137.1—2000. All products shall be ADA compliant. Provide tile equal to the following
product:
1. Size: 12x12 inches nominal
2. Trim: As indicated on drawings
3. Type and Finish: matte finish
4. Color: To be selected from full range of colors available. For bidding purposes allow
90%to be chosen within price groups I and II and 10%from price group III.
Product Test Data:
PORCELAIN -TECHNICAL PROPERTIES
NAME OF TEST ASTM REQUIREMENT
a. Water Absorption C373 0.5%Maximum
b. Abrasive Wear C501 100 Minimum
C. Breaking Strength C648 250lbs. Minimum
d. Bond Strength C482 50 psi Minimum
e. Coefficient of Friction- C1028 .6 Minimum
f. Coefficient of Friction-Wet C1028 .6 Minimum
g. Facial Dimensions(Range) C499 1.5%Maximum
h. Range of Thickness C499 5/16"
i. Warpage(Dia onal) C485 +/-0.75 Maximum
j. Wedging C502 1.00%Maximum
k. Scratch Hardness C373 7/8
5. Provide matching trim shapes such as bullnose, corners and cove base when
specified.
6. Patterns to be as indicated on the drawings and provided by the file manufacturer.
2.06 SETTING MATERIALS:
A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI Al 18.4, composed as follows:
1. Mixture of Dry-Mortar Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of prepackaged dry-mortar mix
and liquid-latex additive complying with the following requirements:
CERANUC TILE 09310-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
3. Thickness: 0.040 inch
4. Bond Strength: >300 PSI
5. Abrasive Hardness: 253
6. Robinson Floor Test: 14 cycles—extra heavy rating
7. Thermal Shock Resistance: ASTM C484-66
8. Frost Resistance: ASTM C-1026—No damage
9. Chemical Resistance: Unaffected to 10%HCL acid
10. Braking Strength: >500 PSI
11. Color Resistance to Light: DIN 51094
12. Total Photometric Reflectance:48.3 out of 50
13. Impact Resistance: ASTM C-368,44.9 PSI Strength factor
14. Skid Resistance:Meets ASTM C-1028
15. To establish a standard of quality,the contract documents are based on unglazed ceramic
mosaic tile as manufactured by American Olean. Equal products may be used with
approval from the architect.
a. Colors to be selected by the architect in color ranges one through four.
b. Patterns to be as indicated on the drawings and provided by the file manufacturer.
B. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat the and to comply
with the following requirements:
1. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where
applicable.
2. Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:
a. Base for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Coved.
b. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners, except with coved base and cap
angle pieces designed to member with stretcher shapes.
C. All outside corners and edges abutting to other materials to be bullnosed.
2.04 STONE THRESHOLDS:
A. General: Provide stone thresholds that are uniform in color and finish, fabricated to sizes and
profiles indicated to provide transition between tile surfaces and adjoining finished floor
surfaces.
1. Fabricate thresholds to heights indicated, but not more than 'h inch above adjoining
finished floor surfaces,with transition edges beveled on a slope of no greater than 1:2.
B. Marble Thresholds: Provide marble thresholds complying with ASTM C 503 requirements for
exterior use and with a minimum abrasive-hardness value of 10 per ASTM C 241.
1. Provide white,honed marble complying with the Marble Institute of America's Group A
requirements for soundness.
2. All threshold to comply with ADA code requirements. Ao%,.
CERAMIC TILE 09310-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
a. H.B.Fuller Co.
b. American Olean Tile Co.,Inc.
C. Jamo, Inc.
9. Manufacturers of Glass-Mesh Mortar Units:
a. Modulars,Inc., P.O.Box 216,Hamilton, OH 45012.
b. Durabond Division,USG Industries,Inc.
10. Manufacturers of Tile Cleaners:
a. Hillyard Chemical Co.
b. L&M Surco Mfg. Co.,Inc.
2.02 PRODUCTS,GENERAL:
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1,"Specifications for
Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
1. Provide tile complying with Standard Grade requirements,unless otherwise indicated.
2. For facial dimensions of tile,comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in
Part 1 "Definitions" Article.
B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI
standards referenced in"Setting Materials" and"Grouting Materials" articles.
C. Colors,Textures,and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile,
grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other
appearance characteristics,provide specific products or materials complying with the following
requirements:
1. Match Architect's samples.
2. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat tile.
D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample
submittals,blend tile in the factory and package so tile units taken from one package show the
same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.
E. Mounting: Where factory-mounted tile is required, provide back- or edge-mounted tile
assemblies as standard with manufacturer,unless another mounting method is indicated.
2.03 CERAMIC MOSAIC TILE PRODUCTS:
A. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Provide factory-mounted flat tile complying with the following
requirements:
1. Size: 2"x2"and 1"xl"
2. Water Absorption: <=036%
CERAMIC TILE 09310-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
Provide two linear feet of cove base for each color and type installed and two stone
threshold.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products indicated in the ceramic
tile installation schedules at the end of this Section.
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Tile Products:
a. American Olean Tile Company.
b. Dal-Tile Corporation.
C. United States Ceramic Tile Co.
2. Tile-Setting and-Grouting Materials:
a. American Olean Tile Company. _1104N
b. Dal-Tile Corporation.
C. Laticrete International, Inc.
d. Mapei Corporation.
3. Manufacturers of Porcelain Tile:
a. Dal-Tile Corp.
b. American Olean Tile Co.,Inc.
C. United States Ceramic Tile Co.
4. Manufacturers of Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile:
a. Dal-Tile Corp.
b. American Olean Tile Co.,Inc.
C. United States Ceramic Tile Co.
5. Manufacturers of Latex-Portland Cement Mortars:
a. H.B.Fuller Co.
b. American Olean Tile Co.,Inc.
C. Jamo,Inc.
6. Manufacturers of Latex Portland Cement Grouts:
CERAMIC TILE 09310-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
1. Stone thresholds.
2. Joint sealants.
E. Mockups: Before installing tile, construct mockups for each form of construction and finish
required to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following
requirements,using materials indicated for completed Work.
1. Locate mockups in the location and of the size indicated or,if not indicated,as directed
by Architect.
2. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before proceeding with final unit of Work.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
1. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial
Completion may become part of the completed Work.
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of
Division 1 Section"Project Meetings."
1.07 DELIVERY STORAGE,AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact
until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI Al 37.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.
B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other
causes.
C. Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces
from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does.contact bonding surfaces of rile,
remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is completed and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained to comply with referenced
standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS:
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products
installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels
describing contents.
OOW
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to four square feet of
amount of floor installed, for each type, composition,color,pattern,and size indicated.
CERAMIC TILE 09310-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
C. Tile Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or
sections of tiles showing the full range of colors,textures,and patterns available for each type
and composition of tile indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.
D. Grout Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections of
grout showing the full range of colors available for each type of grout indicated.
E. Samples for Verification: Of each item listed below, prepared on Samples of size and
construction indicated. Where products involve normal color and texture variations, include
Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture required, at least 12
inches square, mounted on braced cementitious backer units, and with grouted joints
using product complying with specified requirements and approved for completed work
in color or colors selected by Architect.
2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required.
3. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths.
F. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the products furnished comply
with requirements.
G. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses,names of architects and owners,and other information specified.
H. Tile Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of special-purpose tile with
specified requirements.
I. Setting Material Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of tile-setting
and-grouting products with specified requirements.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed tile installations
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of
successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain each color,grade,finish,type,composition,and variety of
tile from one source with resources to provide products from the same production run for each
contiguous area of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the
Work.
C. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality
for each mortar,adhesive,and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate
from one source or producer.
D. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Awk
Section from one source and by a single manufacturer for each product:
CERAMIC TILE 09310-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 09310 -CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and conditions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary General
Conditions and all Division 1 Sections,apply to the work of this section.
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Unglazed Ceramic mosaic tile.
2. Porcelain Ceramic tile.
3. Stone thresholds installed as part of tile installations.
4. Floor preparation.
5. Sealing of grout in tile areas.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete"for monolithic slab finishes specified for tile
substrates. See locations for depressed slabs for mud-set tile installation.
1.03 DEFINITIONS:
A. Module Size: Actual tile size(minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499)plus joint
width indicated.
B. Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces,provide products with the
following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:
1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6.
1.05 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: For each type of tile,mortar, grout,and other products specified.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
1. Tile patterns and locations.
2. Widths, details, and locations of expansion,contraction, control, and isolation joints in
file substrates and finished tile surfaces.
CERAMIC TILE 09310- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
ceilings:
a. Installation of 80 percent of lighting fixtures,powered for operation.
b. Installation, insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water piping systems.
C. Installation of air duct systems.
d. Installation of air devices.
e. Installation of mechanical system control air tubing.
f. Installation of ceiling support framing.
3.11 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions,in a manner acceptable to Installer,that ensure
gypsum board assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION 09255
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 14
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints,interior angles,flanges of cornerbead, edge trim,control
joints,penetrations,fastener heads, surface defects,and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum
board surfaces for decoration.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting-type joint
compound.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim accessories having flanges
not requiring tape.
D. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per GA-
214.
1. Level 1 for ceiling plenum areas,concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher
level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies.
2. Level 4 for gypsum board surfaces,unless otherwise indicated.
E. Use the following joint compound combination as applicable to the finish levels specified:
3. Embedding and First Coat: Ready-mixed,drying-type,all-purpose or taping compound.
Fill(Second)Coat: Ready-mixed,drying-type,all-purpose or topping compound. Finish
(Third)Coat: Ready-mixed,drying-type,all-purpose or topping compound.
F. For Level 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply first,fill(second),
and finish(third)coats of joint compound over joints, angles,fastener heads, and accessories.
Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of
visual defects and ready for decoration.
G. Where Level 1 gypsum board finish is indicated,embed tape in joint compound.
H. Finish exterior gypsum soffit board using setting-type joint compounds to prefill joints and
embed tape, and for first, fill (second), and finish (third) coats, with the last coat being a
sandable product. Smooth each coat before joint compound hardens to minimize need for
sanding. Sand between coats and after finish coat.
1. Painting exterior gypsum soffit board after finish coat has dried is specified in another
Division 9 Section.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Above-Ceiling Observation: Architect will conduct an above-ceiling observation prior to
installation of gypsum board ceilings and report any deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not
proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have
been corrected.
1. Notify Architect one week in advance of the date and the time when the Project,or part
of the Project, will be ready for an above-ceiling observation.
2. Prior to notifying Architect, complete the following in areas to receive gypsum board
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 13
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA ..�,
control and expansion joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical
sealant including a bead at both faces of the partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and
manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths
around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical
ceilings.
M. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and
finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications.
N. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c.
3.7 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS:
A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing,unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls,apply gypsum panels vertically(parallel to framing),unless otherwise
indicated, and provide panel lengths that will minimize end joints.
3. On Z-furring members,apply gypsum panels vertically(parallel to framing)with no end
joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
B. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows:
1. Fasten with screws.
3.8 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES:
A. General: For trim accessories with back flanges,fasten to framing with the same fasteners used
to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory
manufacturer's directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners.
B. Install comerbead at external corners.
C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. Provide edge trim
type with face flange formed to receive joint compound,except where other types are indicated.
1. Install LC-bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back
flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate.
2. Install L-bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed.
3. Install U-bead where indicated.
D. Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's recommendations and in
specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. ^'k
3.9 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES:
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255- 12
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of
adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels.
Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open
space between panels. Do not force into place.
E. Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid
joints other than control joints at comers of framed openings where possible.
F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open
(unsupported)edges of stud flanges first.
G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
H. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid-core wood doors,hollow metal doors,and doors
over 32 inches wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip and immediately insert gypsum
panels into frames.
I. Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and manufacturers recommendations and in
specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect but not less than the following
requirements:
1. Ceiling areas which exceed 2500 s.f.
2. Wall,partition and furring runs exceeding 301.f.
3. Do not exceed a distance of 50 feet, in any direction,between ceiling control joints.
4. Install control joints where ceiling framing or furring changes direction.
5. Install control joints where a control or expansion joint occurs on the exterior wall.
6. Do not exceed a distance of 30 feet between control joints in walls or wall furring.
J. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces(above
ceilings, etc.),except in chases that are braced intemally.
1. Except where concealed application is indicated or required for sound,fire,air, or smoke
ratings,coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq.ft. in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts,pipes,and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural
members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks,cut gypsum panels to
fit profile formed by coffers,joists,and other structural members;allow 1/4-to 3/8-inch-
wide joints to install sealant.
K. Isolate perimeter of nonload-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except
floors,as detailed. Provide 1/4-to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with
U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and
abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
L. Where STC-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated,seal construction at perimeters,behind
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 11
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
2. For STC-rated and fire-resistance-rated partitions that extend to the underside of
floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid structural surfaces to obtain ratings,
install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and
decks,as needed,to support gypsum board closures needed to make partitions continuous
from floor to underside of solid structure.
D. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated.
1. Single-Layer Construction: Space studs 16 inches o.c.,unless otherwise indicated.
E. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each gypsum
board panel can be attached to open (unsupported)edges of stud flanges first.
F. Frame door openings to comply with GA-219,and with applicable published recommendations
of gypsum board manufacturer,unless otherwise indicated. Attach vertical studs at jambs with
screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track
section (for cripple studs)at head and secure to jamb studs.
1. Install 2 studs at each jamb,unless otherwise indicated.
2. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof
structure above.
G. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or,if none indicated,
as required for door openings. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required
above door heads.
H. Install thermal insulation as follows:
1 Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches o.c.
2. Except at exterior comers,securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with
concrete stub nails,screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners
spaced 24 inches o.c.
3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange
extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw attach short flange of furring
channel to web of attached channel. Start from this furring channel with standard width
insulation panel and continue in regular manner. At interior corners, space second
member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.
4. Until gypsum board is installed,hold insulation in place with 10-inch staples fabricated
from 0.0625-inch diameter tie wire and inserted through slot in web of member.
3.6 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL:
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to
comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
B. Install sound-attenuation blankets, where indicated, prior to installing gypsum panels unless
blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
4. Secure flat,angle,and rod hangers to structure,including intermediate framing members,
by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and
appropriate for structure as well as for type of hanger involved,and in a manner that will
not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place
hanger inserts that extend through forms.
6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts,pipes,or conduit.
B. Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.
C. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated,but not less than
that required by the referenced steel framing installation standard.
1. Wire Hangers: 48 inches o.c.
2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c.
3. Furring Channels(Furring Members): 24 inches o.c.
D. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so that cross-
furring or grid suspension members are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet as measured both
lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members.
I� E. Wire-tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as indicated.
F. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system
meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other
and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
G. For exterior soffits, install cross-bracing and additional framing to resist wind uplift according
to details on Drawings.
3.5 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS:
A. Install runners(tracks)at floors,ceilings,and structural walls and columns where gypsum board
stud assemblies abut other construction.
1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls,install asphalt felt strips or foam
gaskets between studs and wall.
B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surfaces
do not vary more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing.
C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended
ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue
framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling to provide support for gypsum board.
1. Cut studs 1/2 inch short of full height to provide perimeter relief.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 -9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
3.2 PREPARATION:
A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of
overhead structural assemblies to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to
building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers that will develop their full
strength and at spacing required to support ceilings.
1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation well
in advance of time needed for coordination with other construction.
3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL:
A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with
ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board
assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories,
furnishings,or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with recommendations
of gypsum board manufacturer or,if none available,with United States Gypsum Co.'s"Gypsum
Construction Handbook."
C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading
imposed by structural movement. Comply with details shown on Drawings.
1. Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates ceiling.
2. Where partition framing and wall furring abut structure,except at floor.
a. Provide slip-or cushioned-type joints as detailed to attain lateral support and avoid
axial loading.
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members.
Independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members as indicated.
3.4 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS:
A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay
hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing,countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards.
3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying,either directly to structures or to inserts,
eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,
and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 -8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
0'` Florence, MA
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag,
paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following
requirements:
1. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and
openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies
according to ASTM E 90.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a. PL Acoustical Sealant; ChemRex,Inc.; Contech Brands.
b. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant;Pecora Corp.
C. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant;United States Gypsum Co.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced
standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer.
B. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting-type joint compound recommended for spot-grouting hollow
metal door frames.
C. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for the following applications:
1. Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.033 inch thick.
D. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to steel members
from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
E. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226,Type I(No. 15 asphalt felt),nonperforated.
F. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket insulation produced by combining
mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665
for Type I(blankets without membrane facing).
1. Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION:
A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow metal
frames, cast-in-anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies
specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 -7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA ..
2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES:
A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Comerbead, edge trim,and control joints complying with
ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below:
4. Material: Formed metal,zinc coated by hot-dip process or rolled zinc.
5. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047:
a. Comerbead on outside comers,unless otherwise indicated.
b. LC-bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to receive joint
compound. Use LC-beads for edge trim,unless otherwise indicated.
C. L-bead with face flange only;face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use
L-bead where indicated.
d. U-bead with face and back flanges; face flange formed to be left without
application of joint compound. Use U-bead where indicated.
e. One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering
slot opening.
6. Products: Provide the following products,or accepted equal subject to compliance with
requirements:
a. Comerbead Type l: ULTRACORNER, as produced by NO-COAT or as
approved by the Architect.
b. All other Cornerbeads: No. 103, "Dur-A-Bead;"United States Gypsum Co.
C. LC-bead: No.200-A metal trim,United States Gypsum Co.
d. L-bead: No.200-B metal trim,United States Gypsum Co.
e. Control Joint: No.093 control joint,United States Gypsum Co.
2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS:
A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the
recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials
for each application indicated.
B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape,unless otherwise indicated.
C. Drying-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged vinyl-based products
complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use.
1. Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product.
a. All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds.
2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT:
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 -6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
1. Thickness: 0.0598 inch where indicated.
2. Thickness: As indicated.
H. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance,
holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members
securely to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board
manufacturers for applications indicated.
2.4 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS:
A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available that will
minimize end-to-end butt joints in each area indicated to receive gypsum board application.
1. Widths: Provide gypsum board in widths of 48 inches.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows:
1. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces,unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type: Type X where required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies.
3. Type: Sag-resistant type for ceiling surfaces.
4. Edges: Tapered.
5. Thickness: 5/8 inch unless otherwise indicated.
C. Abuse Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: Noted on Drawings as "Fiber Reinforced Gypsum"
meeting ASTM D5420,ASTM E695,ASTM C 36 and as follows:
1. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces,unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type: Type X where required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies.
3. Edges: Tapered.
4. Thickness: 5/8 inch unless otherwise indicated.
5. Product Provide the following:
a. Sheetrock Brand Abuse Resistant Gypsum Panels, United States Gypsum
Company.
D. Water-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 630 and as follows:
1. Type: Regular,unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type: Type X where required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and where indicated.
3. Thickness: 5/8 inch,unless otherwise indicated.
E. Gypsum Board Base Layer(s)for Multilayer Applications: Gypsum wallboard,ASTM C 36,
and as follows:
1. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces,unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type: Type X where indicated or required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies.
3. Edges: Manufacturer's standard.
4. Thickness: 5/8 inch where indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
exterior soffits and ceiling suspension members in areas within 10 feet of exterior walls.
G. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, manufacturer's standard direct-
hung grid suspension system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock
to form a modular supporting network.
2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS:
A. General: Provide steel framing members complying with the following requirements:
1. Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant coating.
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653,G 40 hot-dip galvanized coating for framing members
attached to and within 10 feet of exterior walls.
B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and
doubled over to form 3/16-inch-wide minimum lip(return),and complying with the following
requirements for minimum thickness of base(uncoated) metal and for depth:
1. Thickness(Ceilings, soffits): 0.0179 inch,unless otherwise indicated. (see drawings for
exterior locations requiring .1046 inch and .0598 inch metal studs)
2. Thickness(Walls): 0.0359 inch as follows:
a. For head runner, sill runner,jamb,and cripple studs at door and other openings.
3. Depth: 3-5/8 inches,unless otherwise indicated.
C. Deflection Track: Manufacturer's top runner complying with the requirements of ASTM C 645
and with 2-inch-deep flanges.
D. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645,hat shaped,depth and minimum thickness of base
(uncoated)metal as follows:
1. Thickness: 0.0329 inch,unless otherwise indicated.
2. Depth: 1-1/2"or as indicated.
E. Furring Brackets: Serrated-arm type,adjustable,fabricated from corrosion-resistant steel sheet
complying with ASTM C 645, minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal of 0.0329 inch,
designed for screw attachment to steel studs and steel rigid furring channels used for furring.
F. Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Manufacturer's standard product designed to reduce sound
transmission,fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653 or ASTM A 568 to form
1/2-inch-deep channel of the following configuration:
1. Double-Leg Configuration: Hat-shaped channel with 1-1/2-inch- wide face connected
to flanges by double-slotted or expanded-metal legs (webs).
G. Steel Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing complying with �•
ASTM A 653 or ASTM A 568,length and width as indicated, and with a minimum base metal
(uncoated)thickness as follows:
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 -4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Steel Framing and Furring:
a. Dale Industries,Iric.
b. Dietrich Industries,Inc.
C. Marino/Ware(formerly Marino Industries Corp.).
d. National Gypsum Co.;Gold Bond Building Products Division.
e. Unimast,Inc.
2. Grid Suspension Assemblies:
a. Armstrong World Industries,Inc.
b. Chicago Metallic Corp.
C. USG Interiors,Inc.
d. Worthington Steel Company(formerly National Rolling Mills).
3. Gypsum Board and Related Products:
a. Domtar Gypsum.
b. Georgia-Pacific Corp.
C. National Gypsum Co.;Gold Bond Building Products Division.
d. United States Gypsum Co.
2.2 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS:
A. General: Provide components complying with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
B. Wire Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper,0.062 inch thick.
C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper,0.162-inch diameter.
D. Hanger Rods: Mild steel and zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
E. Flat Hangers: Mild steel and zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
F. Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90
degrees and doubled over to form 3/16-inch-wide minimum lip (return), and complying with
the following requirements for minimum thickness of base(uncoated)metal and for depth:
1. Thickness: 0.0179 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Depth: As indicated.
3. Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant coating.
4. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G 40 hot-dip galvanized coating for framing for
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA ,.
D. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of gypsum board assembly components certifying
that their products comply with specified requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Single-Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for gypsum
board assemblies from a single manufacturer,unless otherwise indicated.
B. Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other
panel products from a single manufacturer.
C. Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the
same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer
acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-resistance-rated gypsum board assemblies are
indicated,provide gypsum board assemblies that comply with the following requirements:
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As indicated by GA File Numbers in GA-600 "Fire Resistance
Design Manual"or design designations in UL"Fire Resistance Directory"or in the listing
of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Gypsum board assemblies indicated are identical to assemblies tested for fire resistance ,
according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather,direct sunlight, surface contamination,corrosion,construction traffic,and other causes.
Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for
applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum
board manufacturer s recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not
less than 40 deg F. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board,maintain not less
than 50 deg F for 48 hours before application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed
95 deg F when using temporary heat sources.
C. . Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts Aqwk
during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 09255 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Nonload-bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies.
2. Gypsum board assemblies attached to steel framing.
3. Gypsum board assemblies attached to wood framing.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 6 Section 'Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring, and gypsum
sheathing applied over wood framing.
2. Division 7 Section "Firestopping"for firestopping systems and fire-resistance-rated joint
sealants.
1.3 DEFINITIONS:
A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA-505 for definitions
of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced
standards.
1.4 ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
A. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings,provide
materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined
according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent
testing agency.
B. Fire Resistance: Provide gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings indicated.
1.5 SUBMITTALS:
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of product specified.
C. Shop Drawings showing locations,fabrication, and installation of control and expansion joints
including plans,elevations, sections,details of components, and attachments to other units of
Work.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA ,
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do
come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass
manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt,
scum,alkaline deposits, or stains;remove as recommended by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken,chipped,cracked, abraded,or damaged in any way,
including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before
date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 08800
GLAZING 08800- 12
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
subjected to movement.
K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by
gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints
with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3.4 TAPE GLAZING:
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that,when compressed by glass,their exposed edges are flush
with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously,but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.
C. Where framing joints are vertical,cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first
and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal,cover these joints by applying tapes to
Jambs and then to heads and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together,not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed.
F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.
Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
3.5 GASKET GLAZING(DRY):
A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings
exactly,with stretch allowance during installation.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place
with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression
gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against
faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of
openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending
stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING:
GLAZING 08800-11
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,NM AWN
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION:
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL:
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants,gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass,
minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable
tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass
from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge
damage or other imperfections that,when installed,could weaken glass and impair performance
and appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G. Provide spacers for glass liter where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows:
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances,unless gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face
clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.
2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width. With glazing tape,use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of
tape.
H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways
in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket
on opposite side,provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is
GLAZING 08800- 10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:
1. Neoprene,ASTM C 864.
2. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber,ASTM C 1115.
3. Any material indicated above.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS:
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard,requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated,and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners,Primers,and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85,plus or minus
5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness
required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement(side
walking).
F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330,Type 0(open-cell material),of size and
density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant
performance.
2.09 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS:
A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for
Project,with edge and face clearances,edge and surface conditions,and bite complying with
written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard,to comply with
system performance requirements.
B. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION:
A. Examine framing glazing,with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
offsets at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep system.
3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
GLAZING 08800-9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA ..,�
D. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.
2.5 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS:
A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:
1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with
other materials they will contact,including glass products,seals of insulating-glass units,
and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing
at time of installation.
3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range for this characteristic.
B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements
indicated for each liquid-applied,chemically curing sealant in the Glazing Sealant Schedule at
the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade,
class, and uses.
1. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in
the Glazing Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for
adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719,to withstand
the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at time of installation and
remain in compliance with other requirements in ASTM C 920 for uses indicated.
C. Glazing Sealant for Fire-Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to product used in test assembly
to obtain fire-protection rating.
2.6 GLAZING TAPES:
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids
content of 100 percent;nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces;with
or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for
application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with
ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous
pressure.
2.7 GLAZING GASKETS (ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS):
A. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated,fabricated into frames
with molded corner units and zipper lock strips, complying with ASTM C 542,black.
B. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below,
complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile
GLAZING 08800-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2.2 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS:
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036,Type I(transparent glass,flat),Quality q3 (glazing select);class
as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3.
B. Pyrolytic-Coated Float Glass: Float glass with solar-reflective metallic-oxide coating applied
by pyrolytic deposition process during initial manufacture, complying with requirements
specified in schedules at the end of Part 3.
2.3 WIRED GLASS:
A. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II (patterned and wired glass, flat), Class 1 (clear),
Quality q8 (glazing); 6.4 mm thick;of form and mesh pattern indicated below:
1. Polished Wired Glass: Form I (wired,polished both sides), and as follows:
a. Mesh m2 (square).
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Polished Wired Glass:
OW
a. Ashai Glass Co./Ama Glass Corp.
b. Central Glass Co.,Ltd.
C. Nippon Sheet Glass Co.,Ltd.
d. Pilkington Glass Ltd.
2. Patterned Wired Glass:
2.4 INSULATING GLASS:
A. Insulating-Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a
dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with
requirements specified in this Article and in the Insulating-Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3.
1. Provide Kind HS(heat-strengthened)float glass in place of annealed glass where needed
to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to
comply with glass design requirements specified in "Performance Requirements"
Article. Provide Kind FT(fully tempered)where safety glass is indicated.
B. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated in the Insulating-
Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3 are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are
measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge.
C. Sealing System: Dual seal,with primary and secondary sealants as follows:
t
1. Polyisobutylene and silicone.
GLAZING 08800-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA .�.
L. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least
one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following inspecting and
testing agency:
1. Insulating Glass Certification Council.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING:
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to
prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation,temperature changes,direct
exposure to sun, or other causes.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when
glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation,or other causes.
1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions
are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to,and run concurrent with,other warranties made by Contractor under requirements
of the Contract Documents.
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Coated-Glass Products: Written warranty, made out to
Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for those
coated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in"Definitions"Article,f.o.b.the nearest shipping
point to Project site,within specified warranty period indicated below.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Written warranty,made out to Owner
and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating-
glass units that deteriorate as defined in"Definitions"Article,f.o.b.the nearest shipping point
to Project site,within specified warranty period indicated below.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS:
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the products indicated in
schedules at the end of Part 3.
GLAZING 08800-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified
according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated,as documented according to
ASTM E 548.
2. Test elastomeric glazing sealants for compliance with requirements specified by
reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable,to other standard test methods.
H. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazing sealant
manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of each glass type, tape sealant, gasket,
glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will contact or affect elastomeric glazing
sealants.
1. Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other
specific preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of
glazing sealants to glass,tape sealants,gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.
a. Perform test&under normal environmental conditions replicating those that will
exist during installation. .
2. Submit not fewer than nine pieces of each type and finish of glass-framing members and
each type,class,kind,condition,and form of glass(monolithic,and insulating units)as
well as one sample of each glazing accessory(gaskets,tape sealants,setting blocks,and
spacers).
3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
4. For materials failing tests, obtain sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures,including the use of specially formulated primers.
5. Testing will not be required if elastomeric glazing sealant manufacturers submit data
based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to,and compatibility
with,glazing materials matching those submitted.
I. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,for fire ratings
indicated,based on testing according to NFPA 252.
J. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and
ANSI Z97.1.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with
certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
K. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product
manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in
referenced standards.
1. SIGMA Publications: SIGMA TM-3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines." and SIGMA
T13-3001, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
GLAZING 08800-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA AMIN
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that
products furnished comply with requirements.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
F. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer
indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and
for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials.
G. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating the following products
comply with requirements,based on comprehensive testing of current products:
1. Insulating glass.
2. Glazing sealants.
3. Glazing gaskets.
H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations for Clear Glass:' Obtain clear float glass from one primary-glass
manufacturer.
C. Source Limitations for Coated Glass: Obtain coated glass from one manufacturer for each type
of coating and each type and class of float glass indicated.
D. Source Limitations for Insulating Glass: Obtain insulating-glass units from one manufacturer
using the same type of glass and other components for each type of unit indicated.
E. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for
each product and installation method indicated.
F. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in"Submittals"Article
from a qualified testing agency based on testing glass products.
1. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing.agency with the
experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated,as documented according to
ASTM E 548.
G. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for product test reports „OM4�
in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant
formulations within a 36-month period.
GLAZING 08800-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures": Section 6.4.2, "Analytic Procedure," based on mean roof heights
above grade indicated on Drawings.
b. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set
vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action.
1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less.
C. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all
four edges,provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind
pressure to 1150 times the short side length or 1 inch,whichever is less.
1) For monolithic-glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads.
2) For insulating glass.
d. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6 mm.
C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the
following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass
framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change(Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F,material surfaces.
D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties
specified based on manufacturer's published test data,as determined according to procedures
indicated below:
1. For monolithic-glass lites,properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick.
2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick and a
nominal 1/2-inch-wide interspace.
3. Center-of-Glass U-Values: NFRC 100 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1
computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft.x h x deg F.
4. Center-of-Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200 methodology using LBL-
35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer program.
5. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.
1.6 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. Samples: For the following products,in the form of 12-inch- square Samples for glass.
1. Wired glass.
2. Insulating glass for each designation indicated.
C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in
preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.
GLAZING 08800-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1.3 SUMMARY:
A. All work indicated under this section shall be included under the filed sub-bid for Section
08520 Aluminum Windows.
B. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those
specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this
Section:
1. Doors.
2. Interior borrowed lites.
1.4 DEFINITIONS:
A. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in referenced
glazing publications.
B. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a
specified gas.
C. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for
maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects
include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.
D. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use that is
attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and
practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written
instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on
interior surfaces of glass.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind
and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage
attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of
sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight;deterioration of glazing materials;or other
defects in construction.
B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm
glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for
various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in
strengths(annealed or heat treated)required to meet or exceed the following criteria:
1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300,
according to the following requirements:
a. Specified Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project
from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade,
GLAZING 08800-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 08800-GLAZING
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and conditions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary General
Conditions and all Division 1 Sections, apply to the work of this section.
B. Time,manner, and requirements for submitting filed sub-bids:
1. Sub-bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall be
filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at a time and place as
stipulated in the "NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS".
The following shall appear on the upper left hand corner of the envelope.
NAME OF SUB-BIDDER:
NAME OF PROJECT:
SUB-BID FOR SECTION: 08800-Glazing
2. Each sub-bid submitted for work under this Section shall be on forms furnished
by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the
General Laws,as amended. Sub-bid forms may be obtained at the office of the
Architect-Engineer or may be obtained by written request.
3. Sub-bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a BID
BOND or CASH or CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURER'S or CASHIER'S
CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company payable to the City of
Northampton in the amount of 5 percent of the bid. A sub-bid accompanied by
any other form of bid deposit than those specified will be rejected.
C. Sub-Sub-Bid Requirements: (NONE REQUIRED UNDER THIS SECTION).
D. Work included under this File Sub Bid is indicated in:
I. Section 08520—Aluminum Windows
2. Section 08410-Aluminum Storefront Systems
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
B. Refer to Sections 01600—PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS for general requirements covering
material storage, installation, and substitutions.
GLAZING 08800- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. Installation shall be by an installer approved and trained by the manufacturer in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and fire marshal's listing
requirements.
C. Comply with the automatic swinging door operator system manufacturer's
recommendations and/or installation guide when installing the automatic swing door
operator. Set all units plumb,level and true.
D. Provide all fasteners required for installation of the automatic door operator.
E. Adjustment and Cleaning: After repeated operation of the completed installation, re-
adjust door operators and controls for optimum operating condition and safety. Clean
all metal surfaces promptly after installation.
F. Explain and review the Daily Safety Check Procedure with an Owner's
Representative.
END OF SECTION 08715
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR 08715-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2S logic, bifold sensor logic, normal back check or large back check, "MAGIC-
TOUCH"on/off.
H. The MAGIC-TOUCH feature shall allow door activation by manual action without
the need for an approach sensor.
I. A "soft-start" "soft-stop" motor driving circuit shall be provided for smooth normal
opening and recycling,thus minimizing loosening of doors,pivots, and frames.
J. one second reverse-on-obstruction feature shall be provided to reverse door motion
if an obstruction is met during door opening or closing.
K. A cam actuated emergency breakout switch shall be provided to disconnect power to
the motor when an in-swinging door is manually pushed in the emergency out
direction. The operator will then automatically reset and power will be resumed.
L. Fully adjustable opening speed and opening check speed. Control circuitry shall
include a 0-30 second adjustable time delay.
M. Provide an internal transformer/power supply for approach sensor and Sentrex safety
sensors.
N. Provide a "safety plus" - 1.5 seconds extension of both operate and safety signals M%k
after pressure has been removed from the control mats.
O. A safety carpet check feature shall monitor the safety carpet activation on every open
cycle. If a safety carpet shall fail "open", the door shall be held open for 12 seconds
as a signal to the owner that there is a problem.
PART III- EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION:
A. The door installer shall verify that the installation area is dry, clean and free of
foreign matter. Check as-built conditions and verify the manufacturer's details for
accuracy to fit the wall assembly prior to fabrication. Report in writing to the
Contractor any detrimental conditions to the proper functioning of the swinging door
operator and correct prior to any installation in accordance to the manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF SWINGING DOOR OPERATOR:
A. Provide 120 VAC, 10 amps minimum to electrical door operator. Electrical
contractor shall provide service to each operator from junction box for multiple
operators.
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR 08715-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
OW-
arm shall be splined to the operator drive spindle for maximum holding and strength.
The door arm assembly shall have no moving parts
V. Controls: Push plates shall operate the exterior entry door and the interior vestibule
door.
W. Entrapment Protection: The door forces and speeds generated during power opening
and manual opening in both directions of swing, and spring closing in both directions
of swing shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A156.19 and all applicable
codes.
2.03 OPERATING CONDITIONS:
A. Climatic Conditions: The operator shall be fully lubricated to minimize wear and
friction of moving parts, and shall operate between-30 degrees F and+130 degrees F
in all climatic conditions.
2.04 ELECTRICAL CONTROL:
A. Electrical control shall incorporate the following: An encoder on the motor shaft shall
monitor revolutions and send signals to a microprocessor in the controller. Signals
from the encoder define door position without using an external magnet and magnetic
switch.
B. Full Energy / Low Energy Selectable: The microprocessor control shall be easily
field adjustable to comply with ANSI A156.10 - Full Energy or ANSI A156.19 -
Low Energy Code requirements. Field adjustments for door-opening speed, door-
opening force, door-closing speed, door-closing force shall be provided without the
requirement for additional components.Additionally the system shall have the ability
to be converted from Full Energy to Low Energy with simple field modifications.
C. Life Cycle Data Counter (LCD): The microprocessor control shall incorporate an
output to drive a non-re-settable counter used to aide in customer tailored
maintenance programs.
D. Controller Protection: The microprocessor controller shall incorporate the following
features to ensure trouble free operation: Automatic Reset Upon Power Up, Fuse
Protection,Electronic Surge Protection,Internal Power Supply Protection.
E. Learn speed. When power is first applied and an open signal is received, the
controller shall open the door at a speed slightly faster than check speed which allows
the controller to"learn" safely yet expediently.
F. A "watchdog" LED shall indicate that the controller is functioning properly by
remaining lit(when power is on). Additional LED's shall indicate proper operation of
the motor encoder when the door moves.
G. The controller shall have program dip switches to allow selection or change at the
following parameters: carpet or timer logic, single or dual door, normal operation or
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR 08715-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
fully closed to door fully open. Additionally, the range of the force shall be easily
field adjustable to accommodate a wide range of on-site conditions.
J. Controlled Motion: The operator shall be designed to provide a positive position for
full open and a positive position for full closed.
K. Split Force Path: The operator shall be designed such that abusive forces deployed to
the door shall directly bypass the motor and gear train assembly and be delivered
directly to the compression spring via actuator rods and a profile cam, thereby
extending the life of the system.
L. Quiet Performance: The operator shall be designed to output audible noise ratios less
than or equal to 50dba.
M. Field Removable Motor: The operator shall be designed to allow for motor removal
and replacement in the field with simple tools and without the need for operator
removal from the header assembly.
N. Auxiliary Switch: The operator shall incorporate an auxiliary switch allowing for
monitoring of door position.
O. Manual Use: The operator shall function as a manual door closer in the direction of
swing with or without electrical power. A cam and roller mechanism shall allow the
operator to deliver an even, consistent open force across the entire transition from
door fully closed to door fully open.
P. Emergency Release: For center pivot door(s) - normal in swing, the operator shall
have a built-in emergency release with controlled spring return to the closed position
without manual resetting. While the door is in the emergency release mode, a
disconnect switch shall prevent powered operation.No header or jamb mounted stops
or cams shall be required for emergency function. Not more than 50 pounds at the
lock stile shall be required for emergency use per ANSI A156.10.
Q. Aluminum Header Extrusions: Shall be a minimum 0.156"wall thickness.
R. Aluminum Extrusion Finish: A anodized finish shall be match the color of the
aluminum storefront system.
S. Header Case: Shall be 5-1/2" wide by 6" high (124 mm wide by 152 mm high)
aluminum extrusions with structurally integrated end caps. The operator shall be
sealed against dust, dirt, and corrosion within the header case. Access to the operator
and electronic control box shall be provided by a full-length removable cover, edge
rabbetted to the header to ensure a flush fit.
T. Linkage Assembly: Shall provide positive control of door through entire swing; shall
permit use of butt hung, center pivot, and offset pivot-hung doors.
U. Door Arm Assembly: Shall be a door arm assembly consisting of a forged steel arm
which fastens into web of top rail. The door arm shall fasten to the factory installed
reinforcing plate. All parts shall be concealed in the top web of the door. The door
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR 08715-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
approval from the Architect. The system shall consist of electro-mechanical
swinging door operator and electrical controls, aluminum header, connecting
hardware, actuating controls, guide rails, and on/off/hold open switch. All
components shall be factory assembled, adjusted and tested. Four push pads (one
exterior - three interior) shall be provided with components for mounting directly to
storefront frame. Color of exposed components shall match the storefront system.
B. Power Open Operation: The operator shall open the door with a 3/16 HP, DC motor
through a high torque reduction gear system, cut spiral beveled gear set welded to a
toothed drive shaft, and linkage. The drive system shall have positive, constant
engagement. A cam and roller mechanism shall provide for a non-back-lash positive
open and close positioning. The operator shall stop the door in the open position by
electrically reducing the motor voltage and stalling against a field adjustable 80 to
135 degree positive stop. Door operations shall comply with requirements of the
ADA and Massachusetts State Building Code.
C. Full Energy / Low Energy Selectable: The microprocessor control shall be easily
field adjustable to comply with ANSI A156.10 - Full Energy or ANSI A156.19 -
Low Energy Code requirements. Field adjustments for door-opening speed, door-
opening force, door-closing speed, door-closing force shall be provided without the
requirement for additional components. The system shall have the ability to be
converted from Low Energy to Full Energy with simple field modifications and
addition of Safety Sensors as outlined in ANSI A156.10.
D. Non-Handed Operation: The operator shall have the ability to be converted from
right hand to left hand operation with simple field modifications.
E. Serviceability: To reduce on site spare parts requirements, the operator shall be
designed to accommodate right hand, left hand, in-swing, out-swing, visible,
concealed, low energy, and full energy applications with minimal field
modifications/parts.
F. Field Adjustable Compression Spring Closing Operation: The operator shall close the
door by spring energy. Employing the motor, as a dynamic brake shall aide-closing
speed. The closing spring shall be a helical compression spring, adjustable for
positive closing action at a low material stress level for long spring life. The helical
compression spring shall be easily adjustable to accommodate a wide range of field
conditions.
G. Independent Adjustable Closing and Latching Speed Control: The operator shall
employ a rheostat module to allow for easy, independent field adjustment of closing
and latching speeds using the motor as a dynamic brake.
H. Field Adjustable Open Stop: The operator shall provide a non-handed, easily field
adjustable open stop to accommodate opening angles from 80 to 135 degrees without
the need for additional components.
I. Consistent Cycle: Utilizing a cam and roller mechanical design profile, the operator
shall deliver an even, consistent open force across the entire transition from door
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR 08715-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA �.
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING:
A. All materials shall arrive in the manufacturer's original sealed,labeled containers.
B. Store materials in a dry, protected, well-vented area. The contractor shall report
damaged material immediately to the delivering carrier and note such damage on the
carrier's freight bill of lading.
C. Remove all protective material after installation.
1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS:
A. Proposals for substitution products will be accepted only from bidding contractors a
minimum of 10 working days before the bid due date.The proposed substitution shall
meet the performance and quality standards of this specification.
1.07 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Verify that other trades are complete before installing the automatic swinging door
operator.
B. Mounting surfaces shall be plumb, straight and secure; substrates shall be of proper ,
dimension and material.
C. Refer to the construction documents, shop drawings and manufacturer's installation
instructions.
D. Coordinate installation with the glass,glazing and hardware installation.
E. Observe all appropriate OSHA safety guidelines for this work.
1.08 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE:
A. Manufacturer's Standard Warranty: Warranted materials shall be free of defects in
material and workmanship for one year after installation.
PART II-PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER:
A. Stanley Access Technologies,Farmington, CT, or equal.
2.02 SWINGING DOOR OPERATOR:
A. Swinging Door Operator: To establish a standard of quality, the design and this AO%%
specification section are based on a swinging door operator by Stanley - The Magic
Force model; visible application - low energy. Equal products may be used with
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR 08715-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 08715-AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR
PART I-GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY:
A. Work included: Furnishing and installing factory fabricated and finished electro-
mechanical swinging operator.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Section 08410-Entrances and Storefronts: Furnishing and installing aluminum doors
and frames.
B. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware: Furnishing and installing hardware for swinging
entrance doors.
C. Section 16000 - Electrical Supply and Termination: Furnish electrical conduit and
wiring for controls and operators.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's product and complete installation data for all
materials in this specification.
B. Shop drawings: Show profiles, joining method, location of components, anchorage
details, adjacent construction interface, and dimensions as well as all necessary
wiring and electrical requirements.
C. Samples: Sized to adequately represent material.
D. Contract Closeout: Submit the Manufacturer's warranty and performance
certifications.
E. Installation Guide: Provide a written installation guide and operation manual.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Swinging door operator shall be CERTIFIED by the manufacturer to meet
performance design criteria according to the following test standards:
1. ANSI,American National Standards Institute A156.19,Low Energy
2. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code, Section 5-2.1.9
3. Underwriter's Laboratories(UL) listed to UL325
4. CSFM—CA State Fire Marshal
5. 780 CMR Massachusetts State Building Code
B. Automatic Swinging Door Operator: Shall be manufactured in an ISO 9001
registered manufacturing facility.
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR 08715- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
Hardware Set 16
Each to Receive:
1 EA KEY CABINET STOCK
FINISH HARDWARE 08710- 16
. LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
Hardware Set 13
Each to Receive:
3 EA BUTTS T4A3386 4 1/2 X 4 112 NRP 10B MC KINNEY MFG.CO.
1 EA CORE 6300 10B SARGENT
1 EA EXIT DEVICE 88L-06 10B VON DUPRIN INC.
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS861 VON DUPRIN INC.
1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6111AL US10B VON DUPRIN INC.
1 EA KICKPLATE 8 X 34 X.050 X B4E 10B DON-JO MANUFACTURING
1 EA MOP PLATE 4 X 35 X.050 X 134E 10B DON-JO MANUFACTURING
1 EA THRESHOLD TO SUIT FLOOR CONDITION BRONZE NATIONAL GUARD
3 EA SILENCERS STOCK
1 EA AUTO OPERATOR 4051/4060 EB SARGENT
2 EA ACTUATOR 4296HP 32D SARGENT
NOTE:
1.AUTO OPERATOR TO WORK IN SEQUENCE WITH DOOR 117.
Hardware Set 14
Each to Receive:
3 EA BUTTS T4A3386 4 112 X 4 1/2 NRP 10B MC KINNEY MFG.CO.
1 EA SIGNATURE CORE 10-6300 10B SARGENT
1 EA EXIT DEVICE 88L-06 10B VON DUPRIN INC.
1 EA CYLINDER RIM 6434 10B SARGENT
1 EA EXIT ALARM 94-550-9V DKB SARGENT
1 EA DOOR CLOSER 281 CPS EB SARGENT
1 EA KICKPLATE 8 X 34 X.050 X B4E 10B DON-JO MANUFACTURING
1 EA THRESHOLD 8426 X 36" BRONZE NATIONAL GUARD
1 EA SWEEP 600D X 36" NATIONAL GUARD
1 SET GASKETING 700DA-17' NATIONAL GUARD
1 EA RAIN DRIP 16D-40" NATIONAL GUARD
Hardware Set 15
Each to Receive:
1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE DFMHD X PREP FOR EPT BZ PEMKO
1 EA SIGNATURE CORE 10-6300 10B SARGENT
1 EA EXIT DEVICE 88L-06 106 VON DUPRIN INC.
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS861 VON DUPRIN INC.
1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 611 1A US10B VON DUPRIN INC.
1 EA DOOR CLOSER 281 CPS EB SARGENT
1 EA KICKPLATE 8 X 34 X.050 X B4E 10B DON-JO MANUFACTURING
1 EA THRESHOLD 8426 X 36" BRONZE NATIONAL GUARD
1 EA SWEEP 600D X 36" NATIONAL GUARD
1 SET GASKETING 700DA-17' NATIONAL GUARD
1 EA RAIN DRIP 16D-40" NATIONAL GUARD
1 EA AUTO OPERATOR 4051/4060 EB SARGENT
1 EA ACTUATOR 4296HP 32D SARGENT
NOTE:
1.AUTO OPERATOR TO WORK IN SEQUENCE WITH DOOR 116.
FINISH HARDWARE 08710- 15
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
Hardware Set 9
Each to Receive:
3 EA BUTTS TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 10B MC KINNEY MFG.CO.
1 EA CORE 6300 10B SARGENT
1 EA LOCKSET 64-8205/04/37 LW1 B X WBS 10B SARGENT
1 EA MOP PLATE 4 X 35 X.050 X 134E 10B DON-JO MANUFACTURING
1 EA DOOR STOP TO SUIT 10B ROCKWOOD
3 EA SILENCERS STOCK
Hardware Set 10
Each to Receive:
3 EA BUTTS TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 10B MC KINNEY MFG.CO.
1 EA LOCKSET 64-8237 LW1 B X WBS 10B SARGENT
1 EA CORE 6300 10B SARGENT
1 EA KICKPLATE 8 X 34 X.050 X 134E 10B DON-JO MANUFACTURING
1 EA MOP PLATE 4 X 35 X.050 X 134E 10B DON-JO MANUFACTURING
1 EA DOOR STOP TO SUIT 10B ROCKWOOD
1 EA GASKET 5050-18'0" NATIONAL GUARD
3 EA SILENCERS STOCK
Hardware Set 11
Each to Receive:
3 EA BUTTS T4A3386 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 10B MC KINNEY MFG.CO.
1 EA LOCKSET 64-76-8204 LW1 B X WBS 10B SARGENT
1 EA SIGNATURE CORE 10-6300 10B SARGENT
1 EA DOOR CLOSER 281 CPS EB SARGENT
1 EA KICKPLATE 8 X 34 X.050 X B4E 106 DON-JO MANUFACTURING
1 EA THRESHOLD 8426 X 36" BRONZE NATIONAL GUARD
1 EA SWEEP 600D X 36" NATIONAL GUARD
1 SET GASKETING 700DA-17' NATIONAL GUARD
1 EA RAIN DRIP 16D-40" NATIONAL GUARD
Hardware Set 12
Not used
FINISH HARDWARE 08710- 14
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
Hardware Set 5
Each to Receive:
3 EA BUTTS TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 10B MC KINNEY MFG.CO.
1 EA LOCKSET 64-8237 LW1B X WBS 106 SARGENT
1 EA CORE 6300 10B SARGENT
1 EA KICKPLATE 8 X 34 X.050 X 134E 10B DON-JO MANUFACTURING
1 EA MOP PLATE 4 X 35 X.050 X B4E 1013 DON-JO MANUFACTURING
1 EA DOORSTOP TO SUIT 10B ROCKWOOD
3 EA SILENCERS STOCK
Hardware Set 6
Each to Receive:
3 EA BUTTS TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 10B MC KINNEY MFG.CO.
1 EA PRIVACY SET 8265 LW1B X WBS 10B SARGENT
1 EA KICKPLATE 8 X 34 X.050 X 134E 108 DON-JO MANUFACTURING
1 EA MOP PLATE 4 X 35 X.050 X B4E 10B DON-JO MANUFACTURING
1 EA DOOR STOP TO SUIT 10B ROCKWOOD
3 EA SILENCERS STOCK
Hardware Set 7
Each to Receive:
8 EA BUTTS MATCH EXISTING SIZE&WEIGHT 1013 MC KINNEY MFG.CO.
2 EA SIGNATURE CORE 10-6300 10B SARGENT
1 EA EXIT DEVICE 8827L-06 10B VON DUPRIN INC.
1 EA EXIT DEVICE 8827EO-06 10B VON DUPRIN INC.
2 EA CYLINDER MORTISE 6442 10B SARGENT
2 EA DOOR CLOSER 281 CPS EB SARGENT
2 EA KICKPLATE 8 X 35 X.050 X 134E 10B DON-JO MANUFACTURING
1 EA THRESHOLD 8426 X 72" BRONZE NATIONAL GUARD
2 EA SWEEP 600D X 36" NATIONAL GUARD
1 EA RAIN DRIP 16D-76" NATIONAL GUARD
1 SET GASKETING 700DA-20' NATIONAL GUARD
1 SET SPLIT ASTRAGALS 600D 2PCS 84" NATIONAL GUARD
Hardware Set 8
Each to Receive:
3 EA BUTTS TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 10B MC KINNEY MFG.CO.
1 EA CORE 6300 10B SARGENT
1 EA LOCKSET 64-50-8250 LW1 B X WBS 10B SARGENT
1 EA DOOR CLOSER 281-0/P10 EB SARGENT
1 EA KICKPLATE 8 X 34 X.050 X B4E 10B DON-JO MANUFACTURING
1 EA MOP PLATE 4 X 35 X.050 X 134E 10B DON-JO MANUFACTURING
1 EA DOOR STOP TO SUIT 10B ROCKWOOD
3 EA SILENCERS STOCK
FINISH HARDWARE 08710- 13
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
Hardware Set 1
Each to Receive:
1 EA LOCKSET 64-8205/04/37 LW1 B X WBS 10B SARGENT
NOTE:
1.REMOVE EXISTING LOCK AND REPLACE WITH NEW LOCK,SAME FUNCTION.
SOME RE-WORKING OF THE DOOR WILL BE REQUIRED.
Hardware Set 2
Each to Receive:
3 EA BUTTS T4A3386 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 106 MC KINNEY MFG.CO.
1 EA SIGNATURE CORE 10-6300 10B SARGENT
1 EA LOCKSET 64-8216 LW1 B X WBS 10B SARGENT
1 EA DOOR CLOSER 281 CPS EB SARGENT
1 EA KICKPLATE 8 X 34 X.050 X 134E 10B DON-JO MANUFACTURING
1 EA THRESHOLD 8426 X 36" BRONZE NATIONAL GUARD
1 EA SWEEP 600D X 36" NATIONAL GUARD
1 SET GASKETING 700DA-17' NATIONAL GUARD
1 EA RAIN DRIP 16D-40" NATIONAL GUARD
Hardware Set 3
Each to Receive: AIM%,
6 EA BUTTS TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 10B MC KINNEY MFG.CO.
2 EA CORE 6300 10B SARGENT
2 EA EXIT DEVICE 8827LF-06 10B VON DUPRIN INC.
2 EA CYLINDER MORTISE 6442 10B SARGENT
2 EA MAGNETIC HOLD OPEN-WALL-2100 DKB ARCHITECTURAL BLDGS.
2 EA DOOR CLOSER 281 P10 EB SARGENT
2 EA KICKPLATE 8 X 35 X.050 X 134E 10B DON-JO MANUFACTURING
2 EA MOP PLATE 4 X 35 X.050 X B4E 10B DON-JO MANUFACTURING
2 EA DOOR STOP TO SUIT 10B ROCKWOOD
2 EA SILENCERS STOCK
Hardware Set 4
Each to Receive:
3 EA BUTTS T4A3386 5 X4 1/2 NRP 106 MC KINNEY MFG.CO.
1 EA CORE 6300 10B SARGENT
1 EA LOCKSET 64-76-8204 LW1 B X WBS 10B SARGENT
1 EA DOOR CLOSER 281-0/1310 EB SARGENT
1 EA KICKPLATE 8 X 34 X.050 X 134E 10B DON-JO MANUFACTURING
1 EA MOP PLATE 4 X 35 X.050 X 134E 10B DON-JO MANUFACTURING
1 EA DOOR STOP TO SUIT 10B ROCKWOOD
1 EA GASKET 5050-18'0" NATIONAL GUARD
3 EA SILENCERS STOCK
"wo'k,
FINISH HARDWARE 08710- 12
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
C. Check for proper operation and adjustments of hardware. Advise the
contractor how to make any necessary adjustments or corrections.
3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust operating parts to work easily and smoothly.
B. Clean exposed surfaces using non-abrasive materials and methods
recommended by the hardware manufacturer. Remove and replace hardware
that cannot be cleaned.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Provide temporary protection to ensure hardware will be without damage or
deterioration at the time of final acceptance. Remove protections and reclean
as necessary immediately before final acceptance.
3.06 HARDWARE SETS
A. The following listings are of typical openings. Openings not included shall
have the same hardware as that of a similar opening.
OPW
B. Determination of final quantities required is the responsibility of the
contractor.
FINISH HARDWARE 08710-11
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA ...
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine door frame and conditions under which this work is to be performed
and notify the contractor, in writing of any conditions detrimental to the
proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory
conditions are corrected. Beginning or continuing work, means the installer
accepts substrates and conditions.
B. General Contractor is to receive, check, and store all material. Any
discrepancies or shortages are to be reported in writing to the supplier within
two weeks of receipt of material at the job site.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Strictly comply with manufacturers instructions except where more restrictive
requirements are specified.
B. Mount hardware at locations indicated in the DHI manual, "Recommended
Locations for Builders Hardware" except where specifically indicated
otherwise.
C. Set thresholds in a full bed of butyl-rubber or mastic.
D. Install 700SA weatherstrip first. Do not cut or notch.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Installers shall be experienced door hardware mechanics or finish carpenters
trained to install commercial builders hardware, and shall comply with the
following.
1. Install hardware in compliance with the manufacturers instructions,
recommendations and templates provided.
2. Set hardware level,plumb and true.
3. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as necessary for proper
installation and operation.
4. Pre-drill wood units with pilot holes before installing wood screws.
B. After installation have been completed, provide the services of the
manufacturers representative of each item installed, to determine the proper
application and installation of hardware, according to the approved schedules.
FINISH HARDWARE 08710- 10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
2.03 FINISHES
A. Exterior Hinges US l OB Dull Bronze
B. Interior Hinges: US l OB Dull Bronze
C. Locks/Latchsets: US l OB Dull Bronze
D. Exit Devices US l OB Dull Bronze
E. Closers 690(EB) Sprayed Bronze
F. Kickplates,Push/Pull:US l OB Dull Bronze
G. Stops and Misc. US l OB Dull Bronze
2.04 KEYING
1. Provide a new removable core Masterkey system. Allow for future expansion
of other schools into the key system.
2. Provide temporary cores and 10 construction keys for use by the contractor
during the construction period. The temporary cores are to be returned to the
Hardware supplier after the contractor installs the permanent cores.
3. Provide "visual key control" by stamping permanent cores and keys with
applicable key codes symbols or marks. Factory master keys shall be stamped
with the factory registration numbers only.
4. Provide"Signature"high security cores at all exterior opening or equal.
5. Provide cylinders and cores to operate all locks, exit devices and other key
operated devices, new or existing.
6. All permanent change keys, master keys or grand master keys shall be sent to
the owner properly tagged by registered mail.
7. Provide the following quantities:
Grandmaster....... 3 Master Keys......5 per set
Change Keys....... 3
Construction Key 6
2.05 KEY CONTROL:
1. Provide a key cabinet with all the necessary components for the present
system plus 50% expansion.
FINISH HARDWARE 08710-9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
2. Where automatic & self latching flush bolts are specified for "UL"
rated doors provide one of the following with dust proof strikes.
METAL WOOD
Ives 559/357 or 556/356
Glynn Johnson 17137/17139 or FB8/FB 10
Rockwood 1842/1845 or 1942/1945
K. COORDINATORS:
I. Where pairs of "UL" rated doors are equipped with an overlapping
astragal, supply a coordinator to insure that the inactive leaf closes
first. Supply with all necessary brackets and filler bars to insure it's
proper function.
Ives 900 Series
Glynn Johnson GCCor Series
D.C.I. 600 Series
L. SILENCERS:
1. Provide 3 silencers for single doors and 2 silencers for pairs of doors, `
at all new and existing wood and hollow metal frames.
M. WEATHERSTRIP &THRESHOLDS:
1. Furnish perimeter brush type weatherstrip, door sweeps and meeting
stile weatherstrip for all exterior doors, and/or as noted in the
Hardware Sets..
2. All exterior and gymnasium doors in hollow metal frames shall be
provided with thresholds as noted, and in conjunction with sill details
of the door schedule.
N. PADLOCKS:
1. Furnish master keyed padlocks for overhead doors or where specified
in the hardware sets. Padlocks shall be compatible with the Grand
Master Key system.
O. MAGNETIC HOLDOPENS:
1. Supply Rixson FM900 Series to suit wall condition or equal.
FINISH HARDWARE 08710-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2. Factory cut push plates for cylinders where required.
G. DOOR PULLS:
1. Shall be I" in diameter solid bar 10" on centers. Back plate shall be
same size as push plate. Pulls shall meet Barrier Free requirements.
H. KICK PLATES
1. Shall be .050 thick with four beveled edges, 8" x 2" less than door
width of single doors, and 1" less on pairs. Protection plates shall be
beveled all four sides.
2. Cut all kick plates to clear surface applied hardware.
3. Armor plates shall be 34"high.
I. DOOR STOPS
1. Provide stops for all interior doors. Wherever possible provide wall
bumpers. Provide floor stops where the use of wall bumpers is not
feasible. Furnish with all necessary risers and fasteners to suit wall or
floor conditions.
Rockwood 409 or 440/442
Ives 4021/2 or 436/438
Glynn Johnson 60W or FB 13/1713 17
2. In cases where neither wall bumpers nor floor stops can be used, a
separate over-head stop shall be provided. Furnish Glynn Johnson
surface mount 80 series or equal,unless specified otherwise.
J. FLUSH BOLTS
1. The inactive leaf of pairs of doors not required for egress purposes
shall be equipped with manual flush bolts and dust proof strikes.
METAL WOOD
Ives 458 or 358
Glynn Johnson FB6 or F136W
Rockwood 555 or 557
FINISH HARDWARE 08710-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
concealed vertical rods where specified suitable to the door type
material.
4. Operating lever trim shall match the lockset lever design specified
above.
5. Trim as specified in hardware sets.
Sargent 80 Series
Von Duprin 98 Series
Precision D-Apex Series x shim kit
6. Provide Von Duprin 88 Series where specified or equal.
E. CLOSERS
1. All closers shall be from one manufacturer, carry a ten year warranty,
and be made in the USA. All closers shall be inspected after
installation by a factory representative to insure proper adjustment and
operation.
2. Provide all brackets, drop plates, spacer blocks and any other
accessories required to insure proper installation. All fire rated
openings are to be furnished with closures.
3. Exterior doors shall be heavy duty rigid arm, with a positive stop, and
adjustable back check and cold weather fluid.
Sargent 281 CPSH
LCN 4111 H-Spring Cush Series
Norton UNI7560 X H130
4. Interior doors specified with closers shall have parallel arm type:
Sargent 281-P9/281-0
LCN 4111/4011
Norton PR7560/7560
F. PUSH PLATES:
1. Shall be .050 thick wrought, engraved with PUSH. The size shall be
8" x 16 inch, except reduce width by 1" less than lock stile where
required.
FINISH HARDWARE 08710-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
4. The size shall be 4.5 x 4.5 on doors up to 3 feet 6 inches in width and 5
x 4.5 on doors wider than 3 feet 6 inches.
5. The width of the hinge shall be sufficient to clear all trim. Furnish 1
pair of hinges for all doors up to 5 feet high. Furnish one additional
hinge for every 2.5 feet or fraction there after, whether specified or
not.
6. All types of hinges shall be manufactured by the same company.
C. LOCKS & LATCHSETS
1. Furnish heavyduty mortise type. All locks shall meet ANSI Standard
A156.13 series 1000, grade 1.
2. Provide locks with a 3/4 anti friction latchbolts with a 1" throw
deadbolt. Mortise lock trim shall be thru-bolted. Provide proper
length strike,to suit trim and door conditions.
OW 3. Lever trim leading to hazardous areas shall be knurled for the visually
impaired.
4. Lock functions to be reviewed with the owner at time of the keying
meeting to insure desired operation.
Sargent 8200 Series LW1B Lever
Schalge L9000 Series 07B Lever
Best 35H Series#16J Lever
5. Levers shall be solid cast brass or bronze. Hollow or filled levers are
not acceptable.
D. EXIT DEVICES
1. Provide exit devices where required by code or local authority having
jurisdiction. Provide "UL" Fire Exit Hardware labels on devices in
openings with fire ratings.
2. Provide rim devices for single doors.
3. Provide vertical rod devices for pairs of doors. Provide exit devices
less bottom rod (lbr) where applicable by fire ratings. Provide
FINISH HARDWARE 08710-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
ITEMS MANUFACTURERS
Hinges Stanley Hager McKinney
Locks, Latchsets Sargent Schlage Best
Cylinders Sargent Schalge Best
Exit Devices Sargent Von Duprin Precesion
Closers Sargent LCN Norton
Overhead Stops Sargent Glynn John ABH
Push/Pulls Rockwood Ives Trimco
Flush Bolts H.B. Ives Glynn John DCI
Weatherstrip Pemko Zero National Guard
Threshold Pemko Zero National Guard
Auto Operators Sargent LCN Gyro Tech
Model numbers in the Hardware sets, were taken from the catalogs of the manufacturers
listed above,unless otherwise specified.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Provide tamper-proof fasteners wherever possible. Do not use thru-bolts
unless "UL" required. Provide screws which match the finish of the
hardware.
B. HINGES -Shall be ball bearing type, 5 knuckle hinges such as Stanley "FBB"
Series.
1. Exterior door hinges shall be continuous stainless steel heavy duty,
with lifetime warrranty, model #651 or equal at Hollow Metal Doors.
Provide CFMSLIHD hinges at Aluminum Doors.
2. Interior door hinges shall be steel plated, standard duty, .134 minimum
thickness. Provide N. R. P. at all outswinging corridor doors with
locksets.
3. Interior door hinges for doors 3 feet 6 inches or wider shall be heavy
duty, .180 minimum thickness.
FINISH HARDWARE 08710-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
4. Address for delivery of keys.
F. Pre-Installation Conference: Manufacturers or their representatives for locks,
closers, and exit devices are to meet with the hardware installer at project site,
to review the manufacturers installation instructions and guidelines.
1.05 DELIVERY. STORAGE &HANDLING
A. Deliver all items in the manufacturers original package. Each item
individually packaged and marked for the intended opening and use. Each
item complete with all necessary screws, bolts, special tools and instructions.
Mark all Hardware with the door number it is intended to be installed on.
B. Storage; Store on floor in a dry area of building out of the way of other work
in progress.
C. Handling; Handle all items in manner to prevent damage. Marred, defaced,
defective items will be rejected.
D. The General Contractor shall set aside a locked room with shelves for the sole
purpose of the receipt and storage of Finish Hardware. Once the Hardware
has been delivered the General Contractor shall be solely responsible for the
storage and care of the Hardware. The General Contractor is to report any
shortages to the supplier within 10 working days from receipt of delivery.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. All hardware, except closers shall be guaranteed for a period of not less than
one year after the completion of the project.
B. Door closers shall have a ten year warranty.
C. Where the manufacturers warranty is extended for a period greater than one
year, said warranty shall apply for that item to it's fullest extent.
D. The Hardware Supplier shall not be liable where faulty operation is due to
improper installation, abnormal usage, or lack of proper maintenance.
ew
FINISH HARDWARE 08710-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. Before ordering Hardware, submit 6 Copies of a typed Vertical Hardware
Schedule with catalog cuts in the scheduling format, recommended by DHI.
The Architects/Engineers approval, does not relieve the supplier of
responsibility for furnishing necessary quantities and proper hardware for any
intended opening.
B. Samples: Upon the Architects request, submit samples showing Finish,
Quality and Function of proposed items. All samples prior to the projects
completion.
C. Templates: Furnish templates or samples to the door and frame manufacturer
to enable proper and accurate sizing and locations of cut outs for hardware.
D. Keying: Submit a separate Keying Schedule for approval in the format
recommended by DHI, as directed by the owner or owners representative.
E. Submit all schedules within 10 days of receiving a purchase order or contract.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Hardware Supplier must be regularly engaged in contract hardware for
projects of this size for at least two years or have in their employment, the
services of an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) acceptable to the
Architect or Consultant.
B. The Hardware Supplier shall field verify the suitability and adaptability of all
hardware items specified in relation to all details and surrounding conditions.
The Architect attention shall be directed by the supplier to any item which is
not shown and to any typographical or other error so that corrections maybe
made before the schedule is submitted.
C. Standards: Manufacturers and model numbers listed are to establish a
standard of quality. Similar items manufactured in the USA and approved by
the Architect or consultant will be considered, if required data and samples are
submitted at least ten days prior to the published bid date.
D. The hardware supplier shall survey all existing doors prior to the hardware
submittal, for compatibility and coordination of new hardware to be installed
by the contractor. Any conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the
architect.
E. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at project site. Incorporate keying
conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware
keying system including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of
security required, and plans for future expansion.
2. Key system schematic diagram.
3. Requirements for key control system.
FINISH HARDWARE 08710-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Furnish, deliver and install finish hardware for interior and exterior doors
other than that of hardware specified in other specific sections.
B. Furnish all necessary screws, bolts, expansion shields, thru bolts and any other
devices necessary for the proper installation of the Hardware whether
specified or not.
C. Requirements from Division 1, shall be included in, and made part of this
section.
Related Sections:
A. Metal Doors and Frames
B. Wood doors
C. Cabinet Hardware
D. Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection systems
Except where noted elsewhere.
E. Electro/Mech. Devices
F. Door Signage
G. Aluminum Storefronts
H. Concealed contacts at exterior doors
1.02 REFERENCES
A. All hardware shall comply with the following, and or the Local
Authorities having jurisdiction.
B. NFPA 80 Fire Door and Windows Code.
C. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code.
D. NFPA 105 Smoke Control Code
E. ANSI A117.1 Access for the Physically Handicapped.
F. MSBC Massachusetts State Building Code.
G. DHI Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware
Hardware for Labeled Fire Doors
H. BHMA/ANSI Materials and Finishes
I. ADA American with Disabilities Act
J. Title 3,Public Law 101 —336
1.03 SUBMITTALS
FINISH HARDWARE 08710-1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1. Verify that openings are dimensionally within allowable tolerances,plumb,
level,clean,provide a solid anchoring surface and are in accordance with
approved shop drawings. Confirm all existing conditions and dimensions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. The manufacturer shall approve the installer in writing. The manufacturer shall
certify that the installer is experienced in installing the manufacturer's or similar new
and replacement windows. If so required, the installer himself must supply to the
architect references testifying to his previous experience. The installer alone shall
perform all installation work described in this specification section.
B. Use only skilled tradesmen with work done in accordance with approved shop
drawings and specifications.
C. Plumb and align window faces in a single plane for each wall plane and erect
windows and materials square and true. Adequately anchor to maintain positions
permanently when subjected to normal thermal and building movement and specified
wind loads.
D. Adjust windows for proper operation after installation.
E. Furnish and apply sealants to provide a weather tight installation at all joints and
intersections and at opening perimeters. Wipe off excess material and leave all
exposed surfaces and joints clean and smooth.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. After completion of window installation, windows shall be inspected, adjusted, put
into working order and left clean, free of labels, dirt, etc. Protection from this point
shall be the responsibility of the general contractor.
B. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching
crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass
surface. Remove nonpermanent labels,and clean surfaces.
C. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into
contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 08520
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520- 11
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as
indicated.
5. Glazing Stops: Provide screw-applied or snap-on glazing stops, coordinated
with glass selection and glazing system indicated. Finish to match window
units.
B. Preglazed Fabrication: Preglaze window units at the factory where possible and
practical for applications indicated. Comply with glass and glazing requirements of
Division 8 Section"Glazing"of these Specifications and AAMA 101.
1. All aluminum frame and vent extrusions shall have a minimum wall
thickness of.125".
2. Mechanical fasteners,welded components and hardware items shall not
bridge thermal barriers. Thermal barriers shall align at all frame and vent
corners.
C. Screens
1. Screen frames shall be extruded aluminum.
2. Screen mounting holes in the window frame shall be factory drilled.
3. Screen mesh shall be aluminum.
4. All operable windows shall have screens.
2.07 FINISH
A. Organic
1. Window finish shall be AA-M12-C42-RlX Kynar 5000 in a color
chosen by the architect from standard range of 10 colors.
2. Finish all exposed areas of aluminum windows and components with AA-
M12-C42-R1X and AAMA guide specification 605.2.. In accordance with
AAMA 605.2 with a total dry thickness of not less that 1.2 mils.
3. Manufacturer shall supply a 10 yr.warranty. Finish will not crack,blister,
peel or otherwise loose adhesion durring the warranty period.
4. Factory finish shall be applied by window manufacturer.
PART-3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Job Conditions
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520- 10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
nonshrinking, and nonmigrating. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" of these
Specifications for selection and installation of sealants.
I. Wire-Fabric Insect Screen: 18-by-16 mesh of 0.011-inch-diameter, coated aluminum wire,
complying with FS RR-W-365,Type VII.
2.05 HARDWARE
A. Locking hardware shall be manufactured from a white bronze alloy with a US25D
brushed finish.
B. Weatherstripping
1. All weatherstripping shall be Santoprene or equal.
C. Thermal Barrier
1. Barrier material shall be poured-in-place two part polyurethane. A
nonstructural thermal barrier is unacceptable.
2.06 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate aluminum window units to comply with indicated standards.
Include a complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of window
units.
1. Provide units that are reglazable without dismantling sash.
2. Prepare window sash for glazing, except where preglazing at the factory is
provided.
B. Thermally Broken Construction: Fabricate window units with an integral, concealed,
low-conductance, thermal barrier, located between exterior materials and window
members exposed on interior, in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal
contact.
1. Provide thermal-break construction that has been in use for not less than 3
years, has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and
condensation, and has been tested to show adequate strength and security of
glass retention.
2. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct
infiltrating water to exterior.
3. Subframes: Provide subframes with anchors for window units as shown, of
profile and dimensions indicated but not less than 0.062-inch-thick extruded
aluminum. Miter or cope corners, and weld and dress smooth with concealed
mechanical joint fasteners. Finish to match window units.
4. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window
units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of
window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
6. Low-Emissivity Coating: Pyrolytic on third surface.
7. Nominal Performance Characteristics are as indicated below:
a. Visible Light Transmittance: 76 %
b. Summer Daytime U-Value: 0.50
d. Winter Nighttime U-Value: 0.44
C. All insulated glass shall come with a 10 yr. warranty.
2.03 MATERIALS
C. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for
strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 22,000-
psi ultimate tensile strength and not less than 0.125 inch thick at any location for main
frame and sash members.
D. Fasteners: Provide aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other
materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum
window members,trim,hardware, anchors, and other components of window units.
1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw anchor into aluminum less than 0.125 inch
thick, reinforce interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive
screw threads or provide standard,noncorrosive,pressed-in, splined grommet nuts.
2. Exposed Fasteners: Except where unavoidable for application of hardware, do not
use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of
member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate.
E. Anchors, Clips, and Window Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips, and window
accessories of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or hot-dip zinc-coated steel or iron
complying with requirements of ASTM B 633; provide sufficient strength to withstand
design pressure indicated.
F. Compression-Type Glazing Strips and Weatherstripping: Unless otherwise indicated, and
at manufacturer's option, provide compressible stripping for glazing and weatherstripping
such as molded EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM D 2000 Designation
2BC415 to 313C620, or molded PVC gaskets complying with ASTM D 2287, or molded
expanded EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Grade 4.
G. Sliding-Type Weatherstripping: Provide woven-pile weatherstripping of wool,
polypropylene, or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric. Comply with
AAMA 701.2.
1. Provide stripping with integral centerline barrier fin of semirigid plastic sheet of
polypropylene.
H. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated window units, provide type recommended loo
by manufacturer for joint size and movement. Sealant shall remain permanently elastic,
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1. Products: Provide one of the following:
a. Interpane Glass Company.
b. Guardian Industries.
C. Pilkington LOF
d. PPG Industries, Inc.
2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1" and Thickness of Each Lite: '/4".
3. Interspace Content: Argon.
4. Indoor Lite: Type I(transparent glass, flat)float glass.
a. Class 1 (clear).
b. Kind FT(fully tempered).
5. Outdoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass,flat)float glass.
a. Class 1 (clear).
b. Kind FT(fully tempered).
6. Low-Emissivity Coating: Pyrolytic on third surface.
7. Nominal Performance Characteristics are as indicated below:
a. Visible Light Transmittance: 76%
b. Summer Daytime U-Value: 0.50
C. Winter Nighttime U-Value: 0.44
B. Low-E Insulating Glass with Translucent Feature: At exterior glazing indicated to be
translucent, provide low-emissivity insulating-glass units complying with the
following:
1. Products: Provide one of the following:
a. Interpane Glass Company.
b. Guardian Industries.
c. Pilkington LOF
d. PPG Industries,Inc.
2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1" and Thickness of Each Lite: '/4".
3. Interspace Content: Argon.
4. Indoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat)float glass.
a. Class 1 (clear).
b. Kind FT(fully tempered).
5. Outdoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat)float glass.
a. Class 1 (frosted at second surface).
b. Kind FT(fully tempered).
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
or workmanship within 10 years after date of Substantial Completion. Failures
include,but are not limited to the following:
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air
infiltration,or condensation.
2. Faulty operation of sash and hardware.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
4. Failure of the window installer to meet the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
C. Warranty Period: 10 years after date of Substantial Completion.
D. Warranty Period for Metal Finishes and Glass: 10 years after date of Substantial
Completion.
1.10 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide extra stock to owner as follows:
1. Sash locks including attachment hardware: 2 each type.
2. Window Screens: 2 of each Type B,D,G and H window units.
1.11 ALTERNATES
A. Examine Section 01030—Alternates,for clarification to the Scope of Work in this
Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 WINDOW UNITS
A. All Double Hung shall be TRACO Series TR-900, double glazed and thermally
broken with exterior closure flange. Equal Products by Wausau Metals, Efco
Window and Kawneer Window are acceptable.
1. Test reports documenting compliance with requirements of Section 1.05.
A. Fixed windows shall be TRACO Series TR-9500, double glazed and thermally
broken. Provide fixed frames to match operable units. Equal Products by Wausau
Metals,Efco Window and Kawneer Window are acceptable.
2.02 GLASS &GLAZING
A. Low-E Insulating Glass: At all exterior glazing provide low-emissivity insulating-glass
units complying with the following:
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
submitted products on the basis of that review. No Shop Drawings for aluminum
windows shall be reviewed by the Architect without prior review and approval by
both the window and glazing manufacturers. Coordination and compatibility
between products shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check window openings by field measurement before
fabrication and show recorded measurement on Shop Drawings. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to adoid delays to the Work.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Material shall be packed, loaded, shipped, unloaded, stored, and protected in a
manner which will avoid abuse, damage, and defacement in accordance with the
recommendations of the AAMA.
B. Remove all paper wrappings and interleaving that are wet or which could become
wet when unloading and storing materials.
C. Store inside in a clean, well drained and well ventilated area free of dust and
corrosive fumes. Store materials stacked vertically or on edge, in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions, so that water cannot accumulate within materials. Use
wood or plastic shims between components to provide water drainage and air
circulation and prevent contaminants from contacting aluminum. The contractor
shall provide storage trailers for all materials to be used on site. The trailers shall be
placed on the site in a location approved by the Architect.
D. The contractor will be responsible for taking the steps necessary to protect stored
materials from lime, mortar, run-off from concrete, copper and other corrosive
materials, careless handling or tools, weld splatter, acids, roofing tar, solvents,
abrasive cleaners and other items that could damage the finish or window
components.
E. Items which become damaged because of non-compliance with these conditions will
be cause for rejection and such items shall be replaced by the contractor without
additional costs to the Owner.
1.09 WARRANTIES
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by aluminum window
manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace window components that fail in materials
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA ,ook
B. Include listing of not less than 25 projects of type and size similar to this project,
using the proposed projects, that have been successfully completed within the
previous five years.
1. At least 12 of such projects shall be in the State of Massachusetts.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of window required, including the following:
1. Construction details and fabrication methods.
2. Profiles and dimensions of individual components.
3. Data on hardware, accessories, and finishes.
4. Recommendations for maintaining and cleaning exterior surfaces.
C. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of each type of window required
including information not fully detailed in manufacturer's standard Product Data and
the following:
1. Layout and installation details, including anchors.
2. Elevations at 1/4 inch = 1 foot scale and typical window unit elevations at
3/4 inch= 1 foot scale.
3. Full-size section details of typical composite members, including
reinforcement and stiffeners.
4. Location of weep holes.
5. Panning details.
6. Hardware,including operators.
7. Window cleaning provisions.
8. Glazing details.
9. Accessories.
D. Samples:
1. Submit sample of TRACO Series TR-9000 window unit (or equal)
with Kynar finish. Color to be selected by Architect from full range
of 10 standard color options.
2. Submit 8"x 8"samples of each glazing type and insulated panel type
specified.
E. Test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating that each type,
grade, and size of window unit complies with performance requirements indicated
based on comprehensive testing of current window units within the last 5 years. Test
results based on use of down-sized test units will not be accepted.
F. Metal window manufacturer and installer and glass manufacturer must mutually
review the glass/glazing and metal windows submission and individually warrant the
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
a. Test unit in accordance with AAMA 1503.1-1993.
b. Condensation Resistance Factor(CRF) shall not be less than 45.
6. Thermal Transmittance Test(Conductive U-Value)
a. Test unit in accordance with AAMA 1503.1-1993.
b. Conductive thermal transmittance(U-Value) shall not be more than
.65 BTU/hr/sf/degrees F.
7. Forced-Entry Resistance: Comply with Performance Level 10 requirements
when tested according to ASTM F 588.
8. Thermal Movements: Provide window units that allow thermal movement
resulting from the following maximum change(range)in ambient
temperature when engineering,fabricating,and installing aluminum windows
to prevent buckling, opening of joints,and overstressing of components,
connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on
actual surface temperatures of materials due to solar heat gain and nighttime
sky heat loss.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide products produced by a single manufacturer
capable of showing prior production of units similar to those required for all items.
All windows and storefront systems to be supplied by a single manufacturer through
one source.
B. Standards: Requirements for aluminum windows, terminology and standards of
performance, and fabrication workmanship are those specified and recommended in
AAMA 101-85 and applicable general recommendation published by AAMA and
AA.
C. Design Criteria: The drawings are based on a specific type and model of aluminum
window by a single manufacturer (TRACO). An equivalent type of window by
another manufacturer may be accepted provided that deviations in dimensions and
profiles are minor and do not materially detract from the design concept or intended
performances as judged solely by the Architect.
1.05 REFERENCES
A. Window supplier shall have had at least five years of glazing experience of similar
application and must have at least five years satisfactory experience with the window
manufacturer and be qualified by the manufacturer.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA „
1.03 TESTING AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Test Units
1. Air,water and structural test shall conform to requirements set forth in
ANSI/AAMA 101-93.
2. Thermal test unit sizes shall be 4'-0"x 6-0".
B. Test Procedures and Performances
1. Windows shall conform to all ANSI/AAMA 101-93 requirements for the
window type referenced in 1.01.B. In addition,the following specific
performance requirements shall be met.
2. Air Infiltration Test
a. Test unit in accordance with ASTM E 283 at a static air pressure
difference of 6.24 psf.
b. Air infiltration shall not exceed.07 cfm per square foot of window
frame.
3. Water Resistance Test
a. Test unit in accordance with ASTM E 331/ASTM E 547 at a static
air pressure difference of 8.25 psf.
b. There shall be no uncontrolled water leakage.
4. Uniform Load Structural TestStructural Performance: No failure or
permanent deflection in excess of 0.4 percent of any member's span after
removing the imposed load,for a positive(inward)and negative(outward)
test pressure of 32 lbf/sq. ft.
a. Design Wind Speed at Project Site: 70 mph. Wind loading
requirements shall be based on the Mass Building Code wind loading
requirements for Massachusetts Wind Load Zone 1.
b. Exposure: Exposure "C."
C. Building Importance Factor: Category I11.
d. At conclusion of test there shall be no glass breakage,permanent
damage to fasteners, hardware parts, support arms or actuating
mechanisms,nor any other damage which would cause the window
to be inoperable.
5. Condensation Resistance Test(CRF)
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 08520-ALUMINUM WINDOWS
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and conditions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
General Conditions and all Division 1 Sections,apply to the work of this section.
B. Time,manner, and requirements for submitting filed sub-bids:
1. Sub-bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall
be filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at a time and place
as stipulated in the "NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS".
The following shall appear on the upper left hand corner of the envelope.
NAME OF SUB-BIDDER:
NAME OF PROJECT:
SUB-BID FOR SECTION: 08520-Aluminum Windows
2. Each sub-bid submitted for work under this Section shall be on forms
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44F of Chapter
149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-bid forms may be obtained at the
office of the Architect-Engineer or may be obtained by written request.
3. Sub-bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a BID
BOND or CASH or CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURER'S or
CASHIER'S CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company payable
to the City of Northampton in the amount of 5 percent of the bid. A sub-bid
accompanied by any other form of bid deposit than those specified will be
rej ected.
C. Sub-Sub-Bid Requirements: (NONE REQUIRED UNDER THIS SECTION).
1.02 SUMMARY OF WORK
A. Furnish and install fixed and operable aluminum architectural windows complete
with hardware,glazing,trim, screens and all related components as shown on the
drawings and specified in this section.
B. A portion of the Work of this Section shall be included in the project subject to
acceptance by The Owner as Add Alternate No. 2. That work shall include the
furnishing and installation of replacement windows in the existing library building as
indicated on the drawings.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
Preparation includes,but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
2. Install structural silicone adhesive according to sealant manufacturer's written
instructions.
3. Secure panels with double-sided tape until structural adhesive is cured.
4. Remove excess sealant from component surfaces before sealant has cured.
F. Install glazing to comply with requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing," unless
otherwise indicated.
G. Install perimeter sealant to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants,"unless otherwise indicated.
H. Erection Tolerances: Install storefront systems to comply with the following maximum
tolerances:
1. Variation from Plane:Limit variation from plane or location shown to_inch in
12 feet;1/a inch over total length.
2. Alignment: Where surfaces abut in line,limit offset from true alignment to 1/16
inch. Where surfaces meet at comers, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32
inch.
3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to
1/16 inch.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds,and dirt from surfaces.
3.04 PROTECTION:
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions,in a manner acceptable to manufacturer
and Installer,that ensure storefront systems are without damage or deterioration at the
time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 08410
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS 08410- 11
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
C. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
D. High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: AA-C12C42R1x Organic Coating: as
specified below. Prepare,pretreat,and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply
with coating and resin manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat,
thermocured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and
fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene
fluoride resin by weight;complying with AAMA 605.2.
a. Color and Gloss: To match new aluminum window system. Color to be
selected by Architect from the full range of 10 standard colors.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION:
A. Examine areas,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of storefront systems. Do not Aft,
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting,handling, and
installing storefront systems. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to
produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
Seal joints watertight.
B. Metal Protection:Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals,protect against galvanic
action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape
recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete
or masonry,protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring
or migrating within the system to the exterior.
D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in a full sealant bed to provide weathertight
construction, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants."
E. Install framing components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades
without warp or rack of framing members.
1. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural adhesive according to sealant
manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion.
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS 08410- 10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
6. Low-Emissivity Coating: Pyrolytic on third surface.
7. Nominal Performance Characteristics are as indicated below:
a. Visible Light Transmittance: 76 %
b. Summer Daytime U-Value: 0.50
C. Winter Nighttime U-Value: 0.44
2.06 FABRICATION:
A. General: Fabricate components that,when assembled, will have accurately fitted joints
with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. After
fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
Shop Drawings.
1. Fabricate components for screw-spline frame construction.
B. Forming: Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or deformations,
before finishing.
C. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices.
D. Fabricate components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture
occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior.
E. Glazing Channels:Provide minimum clearances for thickness and type of glass indicated
according to FGMA's "Glazing Manual."
F. Metal Protection:Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals,protect against galvanic
action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape
recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete
or masonry,protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
G. Storefront: Fabricate framing in profiles indicated for flush glazing(without projecting
stops). Provide subframes and reinforcing of types indicated or, if not indicated, as
required for a complete system. Factory assemble components to greatest extent possible.
Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.
2.07 ALUMINUM FINISHES:
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces
are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable
variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other
iow components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are
assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS 08410-9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2. Exterior Storefront/Entrance System:EFCO, D502 Thermal, wide stile with 4
1/i"deep x 2"wide 6063-T5 aluminum frame with glazing Type G-1.Doors to be
equipped with continuous geared hinges, standard concealed overhead closers,
rim latching panic bars with removable latching mullions,offset panic pulls and
dead bolt locks. Furnish standard units and accessories for a complete
installation as detailed.
3. Provide additional hardware as indicated below:
a. General: Refer to Section 08710-Finish Hardware for requirements for
hardware items other than those indicated to be provided by the
aluminum entrance manufacturer.
b. Door Stop: Provide floor or wall mounted door stop,as appropriate,with
integral rubber bumper;comply with ANSI A156.16,Grade 1.
C. Keyed Cylinders: Provided under Section 08710.
d. Thresholds: Provide extruded aluminum threshold of size and design
indicated in mill finish, 1/2" maximum height, complete with anchors
and clips,coordinated with pivots and closers. All thresholds to comply
with ADA requirements.
e. Coordinate installation of storefront with requirements of automatic door
opening system supplied by others.
2.05 GLASS &GLAZING
A. Low-E Insulating Glass Type "G-1": At all exterior glazing, provide low-emissivity
insulating-glass units complying with the following:
1. Products: Provide one of the following:
a. Interpane Glass Company.
b. Guardian Industries.
C. Pilkington LOF
d. PPG Industries,Inc.
2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1"and Thickness of Each Lite: 1/a".
3. Interspace Content: Argon.
4. Indoor Lite: Type I(transparent glass,flat) float glass.
a. Class 1 (clear).
b. Kind FT(fully tempered).
5. Outdoor Lite: Type I(transparent glass,flat)float glass.
a. Class 1 (clear).
b. Kind FT(fully tempered).
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS 08410-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
H. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12
requirements,except containing no asbestos,formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.
I. Aluminum Cladding: Prefinished .032" aluminum cladding to be custom shaped and
installed at locations indicated on the drawings. Cladding to be installed with corrosive
resistant concealed fasteners.
2.03 COMPONENTS:
A. ' Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets and
reinforcements that are compatible with adjacent materials. Provide nonstaining,
nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
B. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1. Reinforce members as required to retain fastener threads.
2. Do not use exposed fasteners, except for hardware application. For hardware
application,use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws finished to match
framing members or hardware being fastened,unless otherwise indicated.
C. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel
inserts complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153 requirements.
D. Concealed Flashing: Dead-soft, 0.018-inch-thick stainless steel, complying with
ASTM A 666,of type selected by manufacturer for compatibility with system.
E. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable weather stripping as follows:
1. Compression Weather Stripping: Molded neoprene complying with
ASTM D 2000 requirements or molded PVC complying with ASTM D 2287
requirements.
2.04 ALUMINUM ENTRANCE DOORS:
A. To establish a standard of quality,the design and this specification section are based on
aluminum entrance doors series D502 ThermaStile manufactured by Efco Corporation.
Equal products may be used with approval from the architect. Aluminum entrance doors
shall be provided with the following:
1. Interior Storefront/Entrance System: EFCO, D502 Thermal, wide stile with 4
1/2"deep x 2"wide 6063-T5 aluminum frame with glazing Type G-1. Doors to
be equipped with continuous geared hinges, standard concealed overhead
closers, rim latching panic bars with removable latching mullions and offset
panic pulls. Interior storefront/entrances do not require cross rails with exit
devices,but do require cross rails with fixed"dummy"panel and pulls to match
exterior storefront/entrance doors. Furnish standard units and accessories for a
complete installation as detailed.
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS 08410-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA _Am%,
products by one of the following:
1. Series"S-403" wide stile thermal storefront,EFCO Corporation.
2. Series "Entrance," wide stile thermal,manufactured by Traco.
3. Series "Tubalite," wide stile thermal,manufactured by Wausau Metals.
B. Details on Drawings are based on products manufactured by EFCO Corporation.
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effect, as judged solely by Architect, except
with Architect's approval and only to the extent needed to comply with
performance requirements. Where modifications are proposed, submit
comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.
2.02 MATERIALS:
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated,complying with the requirements of standards indicated below.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
2. Extruded Bars,Rods,Shapes,and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
4. Bars,Rods, and Wire: ASTM B 211.
B. Steel Reinforcement: Complying with ASTM A 36 for structural shapes,plates,and bars;
ASTM A 611 for cold-rolled sheet and strip; or ASTM A 570 for hot-rolled sheet and
strip.
C. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard pressure-glazing system of black, resilient
glazing gaskets, setting blocks,and shims or spacers,fabricated from an elastomer of type
and in hardness recommended by system and gasket manufacturer to comply with system
performance requirements. Provide gasket assemblies that have comers sealed with
sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D. Spacers, Setting Blocks, Gaskets, and Bond Breakers: Manufacturer's standard
permanent,nonmigrating types in hardness recommended by manufacturer,compatible
with sealants,and suitable for system performance requirements.
E. Compression-Type Glazing Strips and Weatherstripping: Unless otherwise indicated,and
at manufacturer's option,provide compressible stripping for glazing and weatherstripping
such as molded EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM D 2000 Designation
2BC415 to 3BC620, or molded PVC gaskets complying with ASTM D 2287,or molded
expanded EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Grade 4.
F. Framing system gaskets, sealants, and joint fillers as recommended by manufacturer for
joint type.
G. Sealants and joint fillers for joints at perimeter of storefront systems as specified in •
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS 08410-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
Architect's evaluation of criteria conforming to ASTM E 699,that the independent testing
agency has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated
without delaying the Work.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of storefront system through one source from a
single manufacturer. All windows and storefront systems to be supplied by a single
manufacturer through one source.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Established Dimensions:Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating systems without field
measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure actual dimensions correspond to
established dimensions.
1.06 WARRANTY:
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made
by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer agreeing to
repair or replace components of storefront systems that fail in materials or workmanship
within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Structural failures including,but not limited to,excessive deflection.
2. Adhesive sealant failures.
3. Cohesive sealant failures.
4. Failure of system to meet performance requirements.
5. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
6. Failure of operating components to function normally.
7. Water leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas.
8. Faulty operation of sash and hardware.
C. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Manufacturers-Aluminum Storefronts: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS 08410-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: For each product specified. Include details of construction relative to
materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles,and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For storefront systems. Show details of fabrication and installation,
including plans,elevations, sections,details of components,provisions for expansion and
contraction, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Verification: Of each type of exposed finish required in manufacturer's
standard sizes. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include
Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
D. Cutaway Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal framing intersection of systems, made
from minimum 6-inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the
following:
1. Joinery.
2. Anchorage.
3. Expansion provisions.
4. Glazing.
5. Flashing and drainage.
6. Structural-adhesive joints at applied panels.
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with
specified requirements.
F. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer,indicating
that materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with sealants; include joint sealant manufacturers' written
interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and recommendations for
primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion.
G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and
witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency, indicate compliance of storefront
systems with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current systems.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to assume engineering
responsibility and perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing
storefront systems similar to those required for this Project and who is acceptable to
manufacturer.
1. Engineering Responsibility:Prepare data for storefront systems,including Shop
Drawings,based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturers standard
units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS 08410-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
having jurisdiction or ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures," Section 9, "Earthquake Loads," whichever are more stringent.
H. Dead Loads:Provide storefront-system members that do not deflect an amount which will
reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension when carrying full dead load.
1. Provide a minimum 1/8-inch clearance between members and top of glazing or
other fixed part immediately below.
I. Live Loads: Provide storefront systems, including anchorage, that accommodate the
supporting structures'deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads
indicated without failure of materials or permanent deformation.
J. Air Infiltration: Provide storefront systems with permanent resistance to air leakage
through fixed glazing and frame areas of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq.ft. of fixed wall area
when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static-air-pressure difference of 1.571bf/sq.
ft.
K. Water Penetration:Provide storefront systems that do not evidence water leakage through
fixed glazing and frame areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimum
differential pressure of 20 percent of inward-acting wind-load design pressure as defined
by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures,"but not less
than 6.24 lbf/sq.ft. Water leakage is defined as follows:
1. Uncontrolled water infiltrating systems or appearing on systems' normally
exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water
controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained back to the exterior and cannot
damage adjacent materials or finishes is not water leakage.
L. Thermal Movements:Provide storefront systems,including anchorage,that accommodate
thermal movements of systems and supporting elements resulting from the following
maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures without buckling,
damaging stresses on glazing, failure of joint sealants, damaging loads on fasteners,
failure of operating units to function properly, and other detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change(Range): 120 deg F,ambient; 180 deg F,material surfaces.
M. Structural-Support Movement: Provide storefront systems that accommodate structural
movements including,but not limited to, sway and deflection.
N. Condensation Resistance:Provide storefront systems with condensation resistance factor
(CRF)of not less than 45 when tested according to AAMA 1503.1.
O. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide storefront systems with average U-values of not
more than 0.63 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F when tested according to AAMA 1503.1.
P. Dimensional Tolerances: Provide storefront systems that accommodate dimensional
tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS 08410-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
1. Exterior aluminum entrance and storefront systems.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
A. General: Provide aluminum storefront systems capable of withstanding loads and thermal
and structural movement requirements indicated without failure, based on testing
manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
Failure includes the following:
1. Air infiltration and water penetration exceeding specified limits.
2. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
structural movement,to glazing units.
B. Glazing: Physically and thermally isolate glazing from framing members.
C. Glazing-to-Glazing Joints: Provide glazing-to-glazing joints that accommodate thermal
and mechanical movements of glazing and system,prevent glazing-to-glazing contact,
and maintain required edge clearances.
D. Thermally Broken Construction: Provide systems that isolate aluminum exposed to
exterior from aluminum exposed to interior with a material of low thermal conductance.
E. Wind Loads: Provide storefront systems,including anchorage,capable of withstanding
wind-load design pressures calculated according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction or the American Society of Civil Engineers' ASCE 7, "Minimum Design
Loads for Buildings and Other Structures,"6.4.2, "Analytical Procedure," whichever are
more stringent. Provide framing with concealed steel reinforcing splines at locations
indicated on the drawings.
1. Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to wall plane is limited to
1/175 of clear span or 3/a inch,whichever is smaller,unless otherwise indicated.
2. Static-Pressure Test Performance: Provide storefront systems that do not
evidence material failures,structural distress,failure of operating components to
function normally, or permanent deformation of-main framing members
exceeding 0.2 percent of clear span when tested according to ASTM E 330.
a. Test Pressure: 150 percent of inward and outward wind-load design
pressures.
b. Duration: As required by design wind velocity;fastest 1 mile of wind
for relevant exposure category.
F. Hurricane-Resistance Test Performance: Provide storefront systems that pass large and
small missile-impact tests, as required by systems' location above grade, and cyclic-
pressure tests according to testing requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
G. Seismic Loads: Provide storefront systems,including anchorage,capable of withstanding
the effects of earthquake motions calculated according to requirements of authorities
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS 08410-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 08410-ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS SYSTEMS
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and conditions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary General
Conditions and all Division 1 Sections,apply to the work of this section.
B. Time,manner, and requirements for submitting filed sub-bids:
1. Sub-bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall be
filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at a time and place as
stipulated in the "NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS".
The following shall appear on the upper left hand corner of the envelope.
NAME OF SUB-BIDDER:
NAME OF PROJECT:
SUB-BID FOR SECTION: 08410-Aluminum Storefront Systems
&FRP Doors
2. Each sub-bid submitted for work under this Section shall be on forms furnished
by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the
General Laws,as amended. Sub-bid forms may be obtained at the office of the
Architect-Engineer or may be obtained by written request.
3. Sub-bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a BID
BOND or CASH or CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURER'S or CASHIER'S
CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company payable to the City of
Northampton in the amount of 5 percent of the bid. A sub-bid accompanied by
any other form of bid deposit than those specified will be rejected.
C. Sub-Sub-Bid Requirements: (NONE REQUIRED UNDER THIS SECTION).
D. Work included under this File Sub Bid is indicated in:
1. Section 08520—Aluminum Windows
2. Section 08800 - Glazing
1.01 SUMMARY:
A. All work indicated under this section shall be included under the filed sub-bid for Section
08520 Aluminum Windows.
B. This Section includes the following:
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS 08410- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
of supports,inserts,and anchoring devices. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices for access
doors that must be built into other construction. Coordinate delivery with other work to
avoid delay.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installing access doors.
B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels
aligned with adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Install concealed-frame access doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces.
3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN:
A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.
B. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped,bowed,or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION 08305
ACCESS DOORS 08305 -4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
h. Locks: Key-operated cylinder lock.
i. Size: 18-by 18-inches door size,minimum.
B. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Trim for Unit Masonry: Units consisting of frame with
exposed trim, door, hardware, and complying with the following requirements:
1. Frame: 0.0598-inch-thick steel sheet.
2. Frame: 0.0598-inch-thick zinc-coated steel sheet at toilet rooms.
3. Door: 0.0747-inch-thick steel sheet.
4. Door: 0.0747-inch-thick zinc-coated steel sheet at toilet rooms.
5. Trim: Flange integral with frame, 1-1/4 inches wide, overlapping surrounding
finished surface.
6. Hinge: Continuous type.
7. Locks: Key-operated cylinder lock.
8. Size: 18-by 18-inches door size,minimum.
C. Trimless,Flush Access Doors for Gypsum Board: Units consisting of frame,concealed edge
trim,door,hardware, and complying with the following requirements:
1. Frame: 0.0598-inch-thick steel sheet.
2. Frame: 0.0598-inch-thick zinc-coated steel sheet at toilet rooms.
3. Door: 0.0747-inch-thick steel sheet.
4. Door: 0.0747-inch-thick zinc-coated steel sheet at toilet rooms.
5. Concealed, Gypsum Board Edge Trim: 0.0299-inch zinc-coated or galvanized-steel
sheet with face flange formed to receive joint compound.
6. Hinge: Concealed spring pin or continuous type.
7. Locks: Key-operated cylinder lock.
2.4 FABRICATION:
A. General: Manufacture each access door assembly as an integral unit ready for installation.
B. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Continuous welded construction. Grind welds smooth and
flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to
secure access panels to types of supports indicated.
1. For gypsum board assemblies,furnish frames with edge trim for gypsum board.
C. Locking Devices: Furnish number required to hold door in flush, smooth plane when closed.
1. For cylinder lock,furnish 2 keys per lock and key all locks alike.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION:
A. Advise Installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door
installation,including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame,as well as locations
ACCESS DOORS 08305-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1. Test Method for Vertical Installations: ASTM E 152.
2. Test Method for Horizontal Installations: ASTM E 119.
C. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard size units, which
may vary slightly from sizes indicated.
1.5 COORDINATION:
A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access
to concealed equipment, and indicate on schedule specified under"Submittals" Article.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. J.L. Industries.
2. Karp Associates,Inc.
3. Larsen's Manufacturing Co.
4. Milcor,Inc.
5. The Williams Bros. Corporation of America.
2.2 MATERIALS:
A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366 commercial-quality, cold-rolled steel sheet with baked-on,
rust-inhibitive primer.
B. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591, Electrolytic zinc-coated steel sheet with Class C
coating and phosphate treatment to prepare surface for painting.
2.3 ACCESS DOORS:
A. Insulated, Fire-Rated Access Doors: Self-latching units consisting of frame, trim, door,
insulation,and hardware, including automatic closer, interior latch release, and complying
with the following requirements:
1. Frame with Exposed Trim: Perimeter frame with integral exposed trim complying
with the following requirements:
a. Frame: 0.0598-inch-thick steel sheet.
b. Frame: 0.0598-inch-thick zinc-coated steel sheet at toilet rooms.
C. Trim: 1-1/4 inch flange overlapping surfaces surrounding door frame.
d. Door: 0.0747-inch-thick steel sheet.
e. Door: 0.0747-inch-thick zinc-coated steel sheet at toilet rooms.
f. Insulation: Mineral wool.
g. Hinge: Concealed spring pin or continuous type.
ACCESS DOORS 08305-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
SECTION 08305 -ACCESS DOORS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes the following types of access doors:
1. Paintable unrated and rated ceiling access doors to be located in gypsum board ceiling
systems at all mechanical and plumbing controls,valves,dampers and all other access
points.
2. Unrated wall access door in the attic,Room 200.
3. Rated(1 hr. assembly) and insulated floor hatch in Room 103.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 8 Section 'Door Hardware"for mortise or rim cylinder locks.
2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies"for gypsum board ceilings.
3. Division 15 Section 'Duct Accessories"for duct access doors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of access door assembly specified, including details of
construction relative to materials, individual components, profiles, finishes, and
fire-protection ratings(if required).
1. Include complete schedule, including types, general locations, sizes, ceiling
construction details,locking provisions,and other data pertinent to installation.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain access doors for entire Project from one source and
by a single manufacturer.
B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and
frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per test method as indicated
below,and are labeled and listed by UL,Warnock Hersey,or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
ACCESS DOORS 08305 - 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.
C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors are without
damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
3. Staining: As selected by the Architect.
4. Effect: Filled finish.
5. Sheen: Satin.
F. Opaque Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: AWI System OP4 opaque conversion varnish.
3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
4. Sheen: Satin.
G. Seal tops and bottoms of doors before final finish is applied to doors.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION:
A. Examine installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size,location,and swing
characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions,referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
2. Fitting Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Provide_inch at jambs and heads, 1/16
inch per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors, and_inch from bottom of door to top
of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled,provide
1/4-inch clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold.
3. Fitting Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: Comply with NFPA 80.
4. Bevel non-fire-rated doors_inch in 2 inches(3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges.
C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation, if fitting or machining is required
at Project site.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTING:
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
C. Metal Louvers: Size and type shown and fabricated from the following:
1. Steel: 20-gage,galvanized and factory primed for paint finish.
2. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame
formed of 18-gage cold-rolled steel,factory-primed,and approved for use in door
of fire-rating indicated.
D. Metal Frames for Other Light Openings in non fire rated Doors: Match metal frames used in
fire rated doors. Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 18-gage cold-rolled steel, factory-
primed.
2.5 FABRICATION:
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated,with the following uniform clearances
and bevels,unless otherwise indicated:
1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply
with requirements of NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with
DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules,door frame Shop Drawings,DI-11 A115-
W series standards, and hardware templates.
0
1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and
alignment before factory machining.
C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of
referenced standards for kind(s)of door(s)required.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2.6 FACTORY FINISHING:
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard's requirements for factory finishing.
B. Finish wood doors at factory.
C. Finish wood doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish wood
doors indicated to receive opaque finish.
D. Finish wood doors at factory where indicated in schedules or on Drawings as factory finished.
E. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated for grade, finish system, staining
effect,and sheen.
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: AWI System TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1. Particleboard Core: ANSI A208.1,Grade LD-2.
2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking at particleboard-core doors as follows:
a. 5-inch top-rail blocking.
b. 5-inch bottom-rail blocking.
C. 5-inch by 18-inch lock blocks.
d. 5-inch midrail blocking,at doors indicated to have exit devices.
3. Construction: Five plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive
planed before veneering.
B. Solid Core Doors for Transparent Finish (Stiles less than 10 inches wide or openings greater
than 40 percent): Comply with the following requirements:
1. Core: Structural Composite lumber.
2. Construction: Five plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive
planed before veneering.
C. Fire-Rated Doors: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated or
manufacturer's standard mineral-core construction as required to provide fire rating ,
indicated.
2. Blocking: For mineral-core doors, provide composite blocking with improved screw-
holding capability approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated and as follows:
a. 5-inch top-rail blocking.
b. 5-inch bottom-rail blocking.
C. 5-inch by 18-inch lock blocks.
d. 5-inch midrail blocking,at doors indicated to have exit devices.
3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide manufacturer's standard laminated-edge
construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance and with outer
stile matching face veneer.
4. Pairs: Provide fire-rated pairs with fire-retardant stiles that are labeled and listed for kinds
of applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals.
2.4 LIGHT FRAMES:
A. Wood Frames for Light Openings: As follows:
1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces.
B. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood-
veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in
doors of fire rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening AW1k
size and fire rating indicated.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
OOW and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor
under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement on door manufacturer's standard
form, signed by manufacturer,Installer,and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective
doors that have warped(bow,cup,or twist)more than'/a inch in a 42-by-84-inch section or that
show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span,or
do not comply with tolerances in referenced quality standard.
1. Warranty shall'also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair
or replacement of defective doors.
2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time after the date of
Substantial Completion:
a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
C. Contractor's Responsibilities: Replace or refinish doors where Contractor's work contributed
to rejection or to voiding of manufacturer's warranty.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Flush Wood Doors:
a. Algoma Hardwoods Inc.
b. Eggers Industries,Architectural Door Division.
C. V-T Industries,Inc.
d. Weyerhaeuser Co.
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION.GENERAL:
A. Doors for Transparent Finish: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Grade: Premium,with Grade A faces.
2. Faces: Red oak,plain sliced.
3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.
4. Match within Door Faces: Center balance match.
5. Pair and Set Match: Provide for pairs of doors and for doors hung in adjacent sets and
doors within 8 feet of each other.
6. Stiles: Same species as face.
2.3 SOLID-CORE DOORS:
A. Solid Core Doors for Transparent Finish (Stiles less than 10 inches wide): Comply with the
following requirements:
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
D. Samples for Verification: As follows:
1. Comer sections of doors approximately 8 by 10 inches with door faces and edgings
representing the typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid
lumber required. Finish sample with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors.
2. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long,for each material,type, and finish required.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Quality Standard: Comply with the following standard:
1. NWWDA Quality Standard: NWWDA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
2. AWI Quality Standard: AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grade
of door,core,construction,finish, and other requirements.
C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated,
based on testing according to NFPA 252.
1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure.
2. Temperature-Rise Rating: At stairwell enclosures,provide doors that have a temperature-
rise rating of 450 deg F maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING:
A. Protect doors during transit,storage,and handling to prevent damage, soiling,and deterioration.
Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Individually package doors in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic
sheeting.
B. Mark each door with individual opening numbers used on Shop Drawings. Use removable tags
or concealed markings.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and
relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas
during the remainder of the construction period to comply with requirements of the referenced
quality standard for Project's geographical location. Doors shall be delivered and stored in the
building for 72 hours prior to installation.
1.7 WARRANTY:
A. General Warranty: Door manufacturer's warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 08211 -FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces and applied decorative moldings as detailed.
2. Factory finished flush wood doors.
3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section"Glazing"for glass view panels in flush wood doors.
C. Louvers for flush wood doors, including furnishing and installation, are specified under this
section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, and trim
for openings.
1. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door;elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data;location and extent of hardware blocking;and
other pertinent data.
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
5. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual materials in small sections for
the following:
1. Faces of factory-finished doors with transparent finish. Show the full range of colors
available for stained finishes.
2. Metal Louvers: Blade and frame in 6"lengths,for each material and finish required.
3. Metal Frames for Light Openings:Metal light frames in 6"lengths for each material and
type required.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors.
3. At existing concrete or masonry construction,install at least 3 completed opening anchors
per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike
jamb. Set frames and secure to adjacent construction with bolts and masonry anchorage
devices.
4. In metal-stud partitions,install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels.
In steel-stud partitions,attach wall anchors to studs with screws.
5. In in-place gypsum board partitions,install knock-down, slip-on,drywall frames.
6. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Door Installation: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames,within clearances specified in
ANSI/SDI 100.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.
B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection,remove protective wrappings from
doors and frames.
C. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items,leaving steel doors and
frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition.
END OF SECTION 08110
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
C. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer that complies with ANSI A224.1
acceptance criteria, is compatible with finish paint systems indicated, and has capability to
provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats. Apply primer immediately after surface
preparation and pretreatment.
2.9 STANDARD STEEL DOORS:
A. Provide metal doors of types and styles indicated on drawings or schedules.
B. Door Louvers:
1. Provide sightproof stationary louvers for interior doors where indicated,constructed of
inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped blades formed of 24-gage cold-rolled steel set into 20
gage steel frame.
2.10 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES:
A. Provide metal frames for doors,transoms, sidelights,borrowed lights, and other openings, of
types and styles as shown on drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate frames of minimum 14-gage cold-rolled furniture steel.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered and welded comers.
2. Form exterior frames of hot dip galvanized steel.
B. Door Silencers:Except on weather-stripped frames,drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike
jambs of single-door frames and 2 silencers on heads of paired-door frames.
C. Plaster Guards: Provide 26-gage steel plaster guards or mortar boxes,welded to frame,at back
of finish hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation
and to close off interior of openings.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Install steel doors,frames,and accessories according to Shop Drawings,manufacturer's
data,and as specified.
B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI 105,unless otherwise indicated. Set frames
accurately in position,plumbed, aligned,and braced securely until permanent anchors are set.
After wall construction is completed,remove temporary braces and spreaders,leaving surfaces
smooth and undamaged.
1. Except for frames located in existing concrete, masonry, or gypsum board assembly
construction,place frames before constructing enclosing walls and ceilings.
2. In masonry construction,install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location
on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
M. Shop Painting:
1. Clean,treat,and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units,including
galvanized surfaces.
2. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign
materials before application of paint.
3. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly
finished surface ready to receive finish paint.
4. Finish painting of steel doors and frames is specified in Section 09900-Painting.
2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL:
A. Comply with NAAMM's"Metal Finishes Manual"for recommendations relative to applying and
designating finishes.
B. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. l," for steel sheet finishes.
C. Apply shop applied primers and organic finishes to doors and frames after fabrication.
2.7 GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISHES: AWN
A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so that surfaces are free of oil
or other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating of the type suited to the
organic coating applied over it. Clean welds,mechanical connections,and abraded areas,and
apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.
1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in
galvanized steel,with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight,
and complying with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint 20.
B. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated,
apply air-dried primer specified below immediately after cleaning and pretreatment.
1. Shop Primer: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer paint complying with performance
requirements of FS TT-P-641,Type II.
2.8 STEEL SHEET FINISHES:
A. Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil,
grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if
present,from uncoated steel to comply with SSPC-SP 5(White Metal Blast Cleaning)or SSPC-
SP 8 (Pickling).
B. Pretreatment: Immediately after surface preparation,apply a conversion coating of type suited
to organic coating applied over it.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1. Unless otherwise indicated,provide thermal-rated assemblies with U-value rating of 0.41
Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F or better.
F. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware
according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier.
Comply with applicable requirements of SDI 107 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door
and frame preparation for hardware.
1. For concealed overhead door closers,provide space,cutouts,reinforcing, and provisions
for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable.
G. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for
surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site.
H. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or,if not indicated,according to the Door and
Hardware Institute's(DHI) "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard
Steel Doors and Frames."
I. Glazing Stops: Minimum 20 gage(0.0359-inch-thick) steel or 0.040-inch-thick aluminum.
1. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior
doors for glass,louvers,and other panels in doors.
2. Provide screw-applied,removable, glazing beads on inside of glass, louvers, and other
panels in doors.
J. Close top and bottom edges of all doors as integral part of door construction or by addition of
minimum 16-gage inverted steel channels.
K. Thermal-Rated(Insulating)Assemblies:
1. At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled,provide doors which have
been fabricated as thermal insulating door and frame assemblies and tested in accordance
with ASTM C 236.
a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated assemblies with U factor of
0.24 Btu/(hr. x ft.sq. x oF).
L. Sound-Rated(Acoustical)Assemblies: Where shown or scheduled,provide door and frame
assemblies which have been fabricated as sound-reducing type, tested in accordance with
ASTM E 90,and classified in accordance with ASTM E 413.
1. Unless otherwise indicated,provide acoustical assemblies with sound ratings of STC 40
or better.
2. To establish a standard of quality, the design and this specification are based on
Kriegersonic Acoustical Doors with#NC 2 sponge neoprene compression seal at jambs
and heads and with coordinating single automatic door bottom at the sill as detailed.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners.
2. Form interior frames from 16-gage(0.0598-inch-thick)cold-rolled steel sheet.
3. Form exterior frames from 14-gage(0.0785-inch-thick)galvanized steel sheet.
B. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames,drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike
jambs of single-door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double-door frames.
C. Plaster Guards: Provide minimum 26-gage(0.0179-inch-thick) steel plaster guards or mortar
boxes at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware
operation and to close off interior of openings.
D. Grout: When required in masonry construction, as specified in Division 4 Section "Unit
Masonry."
2.5 FABRICATION:
A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid,neat in appearance,and free from defects,warp,
or buckle. Where practical,fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work
that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at
Project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI 100 requirements.
1. Internal Construction: One of the following manufacturer's standard core materials
according to SDI standards:
a. Rigid polyurethane conforming to ASTM C 591.
2. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads,except not more than 1/4 inch
between non-fire-rated pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom.
3. Interior Doors: SDI-100,Grade H,heavy duty,Model 1,minimum 16 gage faces.
B. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and
Frames."
C. Galvanized Steel Doors, Panels, and Frames: For the following locations, fabricate doors,
panels, and frames from galvanized steel sheet according to SDI 112. Close top and bottom
edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 14-gage
galvanized steel channels, with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. Seal
joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
1. At exterior locations.
D. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for
exposed screws and bolts.
E. Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or
scheduled,provide doors fabricated as thermal-insulating door and frame assemblies and tested
according to ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2. Thermal Rated Steel Door and Frame Assemblies:
a. Ceco Corp.
b. Curries Mfg.,Inc.
C. Pioneer Bldrs. Products Corp./Div. CORE Ind., Inc.
3. Sound-Rated(Acoustical) Assemblies:
a. Krieger Steel Products Company
b. Ceco Corp.
C. Pioneer Bldrs. Products Corp./Div. CORE Ind.,Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS:
A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial-quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled,
complying with ASTM A 569.
B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Carbon steel complying with ASTM A 366,commercial quality,or
ASTM A 620,drawing quality, special killed.
C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel complying with ASTM A 526,commercial
quality,or ASTM A 642,drawing quality,hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 525,with
A 60 or G 60 coating designation,mill phosphatized.
D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.0478-inch-thick steel sheet;0.0516-inch-
thick galvanized steel where used with galvanized steel frames.
E. Inserts,Bolts,and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into
exterior walls,hot-dip galvanize complying with ASTM A 153,Class C or D as applicable.
2.3 DOORS:
A. Steel Doors: Provide 1-3/4-inch-thick doors of materials and ANSI/SDI 100 grades and models
specified below,or as indicated on Drawings or schedules:
1. Interior Doors: Grade II, heavy-duty, Model 1, full flush design, minimum 16-gage
(0.0478-inch-thick)cold-rolled steel sheet faces.
2. Exterior Doors: Grade III, extra heavy-duty, Model 2, seamless design, minimum 14-
gage(0.0598-inch-thick)galvanized steel sheet faces.
2.4 FRAMES:
A. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings,
according to ANSI/SDI 100, and of types and styles as shown on Drawings and schedules.
Conceal fastenings,unless otherwise indicated.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. Provide doors and frames complying with ANSUSDI 100 'Recommended Specifications for
Standard Steel Doors and Frames" and as specified.
B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80,are identical to door and frame
assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per ASTM E 152, and are labeled and
listed by UL,Warnock Hersey,or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
1. Temperature-Rise Rating: Where fire rated doors are indicated,provide doors that have
a temperature-rise rating of 450 deg F maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure.
C. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For door assemblies required to be fire-rated and
exceeding sizes of tested assemblies,provide certificate or label from an approved independent
testing and inspection agency, indicating that door and frame assembly conforms to the
requirements of design,materials and construction as established by individual listings for tested
assemblies.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and
job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors
and frames.
B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided
refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect;otherwise,remove and replace
damaged items as directed.
C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch-high wood
blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity
chamber. If cardboard wrappers on doors become wet,remove cartons immediately. Provide
minimum 1/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Steel Doors and Frames:
a. Amweld Building Products,Inc.
b. Ceco Door Products.
C. Fenestra Corp.
d. E.H.Friedrich Co.
e. Kewanee Corp.
f. Republic Builders Products.
g. Steelcraft.
h. The Philipp Manufacturing Company.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 08110-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes steel doors,frames and borrowed lights. See Drawings for locations of
steel doors requiring decorative applied moldings.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for building anchors into and grouting frames in
masonry construction.
2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for hollow-core and solid-core wood doors
installed in steel frames.
3. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware"for door hardware and weatherstripping.
4. Division 8 Section "Glazing"for glass in steel doors and sidelights.
5. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for spot grouting frames in gypsum
board partitions.
6. Division 9 Section"Painting"for field painting primed doors and frames.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction,
materials,dimensions,hardware preparation,core,label compliance,sound ratings,profiles,and
fmishes.
C. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details
of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of
construction, location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and
reinforcements,and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
D. Door Schedule: Submit schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details
and openings as those on Contract Drawings.
1. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.
E. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts showing the full range
of colors available for factory-finished doors and frames.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
O.
a. Use O Joint Substrates: Glass,ceramic tile.
6 Applications: Interior,horizontal and vertical joints: Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures.
END OF SECTION 07920
JOINT SEALANTS 07920- 12
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
a. Use O Joint Substrates: Painted aluminum and galvanized steel.
8. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per
ASTM C 1248.
9. Applications: Exterior,horizontal and vertical joints:
a. Perimeter joints of aluminum and steel frames in exterior walls.
b. Control joints in concrete masonry.
B. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated
and/or required,provide products complying with the following:
1. Products: Provide one of the following:
a. Chem-Calk 900;Bostik Inc.
b. Vulkem 921;Mameco International.
C. Dynatrol I;Pecora Corporation.
d. DyMonic;Tremco.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component)and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT(nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M,A,and,as applicable to joint substrates indicated,
ew O.
a. Use O Joint Substrates: Painted aluminum,galvanized steel,concrete masonry.
6. Applications: Interior,horizontal and vertical joints:
a. Perimeter joints of aluminum and steel frames in exterior walls.
b. Control joints in concrete masonry.
C. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated and/or
required, provide products formulated with fungicide that are intended for sealing interior
ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high
humidity and temperature extremes,and that comply with the following:
1 Products: Provide one of the following:
a. 786 Mildew Resistant;Dow Corning.
b. Sanitary 1700;GE Silicones.
C. 898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant;Pecora Corporation.
d. PSI-611;Polymeric Systems,Inc.
e. Tremsil 600 White;Tremco.
2 Type and Grade: S (single component)and NS (nonsag).
3 Class: 25.
4 Use Related to Exposure: NT(nontraffic).
5 Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G,A,and,as applicable to joint substrates indicated,
JOINT SEALANTS 07920- 11
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
primed,adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill,sealant configuration, and
sealant dimensions.
6. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures
used to originally seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and new
sealant contacts original sealant.
B. Evaluation of Field-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or
noncompliance with other indicated requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Remove
sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other
requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated
requirements.
3.5 CLEANING:
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
3.6 PROTECTION:
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,despite such protection,damage
or deterioration occurs,cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.
3.7 ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE:
A. Low-Modulus Nonacid-Curing Silicone Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated
and/or required,provide products complying with the following:
1. Products: Provide one of the following:
a. 790;Dow Corning.
b. Silpruf; GE Silicones.
C. 864;Pecora Corporation.
d. Spectrem 1;Tremco.
2. Color: Custom colors,match architects samples. A different color will be required for
each exterior material.
3. Type and Grade: S (single component)and NS (nonsag).
4. Class: 25.
5. Additional Movement Capability: 50 percent movement in extension and 50 percent
movement in compression for a total of 100 percent movement.
6. Use Related to Exposure: NT(nontraffic).
7. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M,G,A,and,as applicable to joint substrates indicated, "'s
O.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920- 10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of
sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193,unless otherwise
indicated.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field-test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1. Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows:
a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each type of elastomeric
sealant and joint substrate.
b. Perform one test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or one test per each
floor per elevation.
2. Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand-pull method described below:
a. Make knife cuts from one side of joint to the other, followed by two cuts
approximately 2 inches long at sides of joint and meeting cross cut at one end.
Place a mark 1 inch from cross-cut end of 2-inch piece.
b. Use fingers to grasp 2-inch piece of sealant between cross-cut end and 1-inch
mark; pull firmly at a 90-degree angle or more in direction of side cuts while
holding a ruler along side of sealant. Pull sealant out of joint to the distance
recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesive capability,but not less
than that equaling specified maximum movement capability in extension;hold this
position for 10 seconds.
C. For joints with dissimilar substrates,check adhesion to each substrate separately.
Do this by extending cut along one side,checking adhesion to opposite side,and
then repeating this procedure for opposite side.
3. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration
complying with specified requirements. Record results in a field adhesion test log.
4. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:
a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type
of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion
passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.
b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free from voids.
C. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified
requirements.
5. Record test results in a field adhesion test log. Include dates when sealants were installed,
names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,harm
substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
a. Metal
b. Glass.
C. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant
manufacturer,based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply
primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas
of joint-sealant bond;do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning
methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without
disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS:
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated,unless more stringent requirements apply. ,
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials,applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch,twist,puncture, or tear sealant backings..
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and back of joints.
E. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings
are installed:
I. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing
begins,tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth,uniform beads
JOINT SEALANTS 07920 -8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or
joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-
adhesive tape where applicable.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated,as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials,free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way,and formulated to promote
optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining,nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION:
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present,for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration,installation tolerances,and other conditions affecting joint-
sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION:
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant,including dust,paints(except for permanent,protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants,oil, grease,waterproofing, water repellents,water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing,grinding,blast cleaning,mechanical
abrading,or a combination of these methods to produce a clean,sound substrate capable
of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from
above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed
air. Porous joint surfaces include the following:
a. Concrete.
0 b. Masonry.
C. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL:
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants,backings,and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for
this characteristic.
2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS:
A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule at the
end of Part 3,including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type,grade,class,and
uses.
B. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in the
Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for
adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the
specified percentage change in the joint width existing at the time of installation and remain in
compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated.
C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified in the
Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule to be nonstaining to porous substrates,provide products that
have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates
indicated for Project.
2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS:
A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product of this description
indicated in the Latex Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3.
2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING:
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining;are compatible with
joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330,of type indicated below and of size and density
to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:
1. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin.
C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene,butyl,EPDM,or silicone tubing complying
with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at
temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size
and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to
optimum sealant performance.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
I. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint
sealant manufacturer.
2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint
sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
3. When joint substrates are wet.
B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths
are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.
C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants
capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
1.8 WARRANTY:
A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to,and run concurrent with,other warranties made by Contractor under requirements
of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace
elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified
in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty,signed by elastomeric sealant manufacturer
agreeing to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with
performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
I. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
D. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint
sealants from the following:
1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant
manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by
structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals,tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
contaminants.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS:
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the products indicated for
each type in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
joint preparation and joint-sealant installation required for the completed Work.
Allow sealants to cure fully before testing.
b. Make knife cuts from one side of joint to the other, followed by two cuts
approximately 2 inches long at sides of joint and meeting cross cut at one end.
Place a mark 1 inch from cross-cut end of 2-inch piece.
C. Use fingers to grasp 2-inch piece of sealant between cross-cut end and 1-inch
mark; pull firmly at a 90-degree angle or more in direction of side cuts while
holding a ruler along side of sealant. Pull sealant out of joint to the distance
recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesive capability,but not less
than that equaling specified maximum movement capability in extension;hold this
position for 10 seconds.
d. For joints with dissimilar substrates,check adhesion to each substrate separately.
Do this by extending cut along one side,checking adhesion to opposite side,and
then repeating this procedure for opposite side.
5. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of
product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory
adhesion is obtained.
6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing
adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with
requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to
joint substrates during testing.
F. Mockups: Before installing joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants as follows to verify
selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of
materials and execution:
1. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive
elastomeric joint sealants, which are specified by reference to this Section.
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE,AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating
manufacturer,product name and designation,color,expiration date, pot life, curing time, and
mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent
their deterioration or damage due to moisture,high or low temperatures,contaminants,or other
causes.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the AM#^
following conditions:
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
manufacturer.
C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturers,
for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.
1. Use manufacturers standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific
joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint
sealants to joint substrates.
a. Perform tests under environmental conditions replicating those that will exist
during installation.
2. Submit not fewer than nine pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates,
shims,joint-sealant backings,secondary seals,and miscellaneous materials.
3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers.
5. Testing will not be required if joint sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data
that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and
compatibility with,joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.
D. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals"
Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-
month period.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E 548.
2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference
to ASTM C 920,and where applicable,to other standard test methods.
3. Test elastomeric joint sealants according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for
compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and
cohesion under cyclic movement,adhesion-in peel,and indentation hardness.
4. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing
standard specifications and test methods.
E. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants,field test their
adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1. Locate test joints where indicated or,if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
a. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
b. Each type of nonelastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected.
Ow 4. Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand-pull method described below:
a. Install joint sealants in 60-inch-long joints using same materials and methods for
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants
showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Samples for Verification:'For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sealants
in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the
appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products furnished
comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.
E. SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's
Sealant Validation Program.
F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
G. Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods
resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on preconstruction testing specified in
"Quality Assurance"Article.
H. Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application. Include information specified
in "Field Quality Control"Article.
I. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating the following:
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
J. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating sealants comply with
requirements,based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations.
K. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants
similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
SECTION 07920 -JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by
reference to this Section:
B. This Section includes sealants for the following applications:
1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
b. Joints between different materials.
C. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows.
d. Other joints as indicated.
2. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
C. Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete
walls and partitions.
d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors,
windows, and elevator entrances.
e. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls,floors,and counters.
f. Other joints as indicated.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry"for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and
gaskets.
2. Division 7 Section "Firestopping"for fire-resistant building joint-sealant systems.
3. Division 8 Section "Glazing"for glazing sealants.
4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies"for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum
board partitions to reduce sound transmission.
5. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Panel Ceilings"for sealing edge moldings at perimeters
of acoustical ceilings.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous
joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or
deterioration of finishes.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim work
during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time
of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 07620
A""R
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
in finished Work.
1. Do not solder the following metals:
a. Aluminum.
2. Pretinning is not required for the following metals:
a. Lead-coated copper.
3. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into
joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.
F. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion,but movable,joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to
completely conceal sealant.
1. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered.
G. Seams:
1. Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat4ock seams. Tin edges to be seamed,
form seams, and solder.
2. Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with
epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
H. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating
concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation
as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Underlayment: Where installing stainless steel or aluminum directly on cementitious or
wood substrates, install a slip sheet of red-rosin paper and a course of polyethylene
underlayment.
2. Bed flanges of Work in a thick coat of roofing cement where required for waterproof
performance.
I. Install reglets to receive counterflashing according to the following requirements:
1. Where reglets are shown in masonry, furnish reglets for installation under Division 4
Section "Unit Masonry."
J. Counterflashings: Coordinate installation of counterflashings with installation of assemblies to
be protected by counterflashing. Install counterflashings in reglets or receivers. Secure in a
waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant, lead wedges and sealant,
interlocking folded seam, or blind rivets and sealant. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of
2 inches and bed with sealant.
3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA „MIA
B. High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: AA-C12C42R1x Organic Coating: as specified
below). Prepare,pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating
and resin manufacturer's instructions.
1. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured
system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color
topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight;
complying with AAMA 605.2.
a. Color and Gloss:
1) All materials and assemblies: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's
full range of choices for color and gloss.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION:
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed
and verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Awk
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with
performance requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods
indicated,providing for thermal expansion of metal units;conceal fasteners where possible,and
set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps,joints,and seams that will
be permanently watertight and weatherproof.
B. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning,buckling,and tool marks
and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-
resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before
fabricating sheet metal.
C. Roof-Edge Flashings: Secure metal flashings at roof edges according to FM Loss Prevention
Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone.
D. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work. Space
movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of comer or
intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or
would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof,form expansion joints of intermeshing
hooked flanges,not less than 1 inch deep,filled with mastic sealant(concealed within joints).
E. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered,removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges
of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches,except where pretinned surface would show
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
but never less than thickness of metal being secured.
2.04 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS:
A. General: Fabricate sheet metal items in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance
requirements but not less than that listed below for each application and metal.
B. Scuppers: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick.
C. Leaders and downspouts:Fabricate from the following material:
1. Aluminum: 0.060 inch thick.
2. Leaders and downspouts shall be 3"x 4"minimal overall size.
D. Gutters:Fabricated from the following material:
1. Aluminum: 0.060 inch thick
2. Gutters shall be 5"x 5"overall in the profile shown on the drawings.
E. Exposed Trim, and Fascia:Fabricate from the following material:
1. Aluminum: 0.060 inch thick.
F Copings:Fabricate from the following material:
1. Aluminum: 0.060 inch thick.
G. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Aluminum: 0.060 inch thick.
H. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Lead-Coated Copper: 20 oz./sq. ft.
I. Through-wall Flashing:Fabricate from the following material:
I. Lead-Coated Copper: 20 oz./sq. ft.
J. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Lead-Coated Copper: 20 oz./sq.ft.
2.05 ALUMINUM FINISHES:
A. General: Comply with Aluminum Association's (AA) 'Designation System for Aluminum
Finishes"for finish designations and application recommendations.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
H. Paper Slip Sheet: 5-lb/square red rosin, sized building paper conforming to FS UU-B-790,
Type I, Style lb.
I. Polyethylene Underlayment: ASTM D 4397,minimum 6-mil-thick black polyethylene film,
resistant to decay when tested according to ASTM E 154.
J. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices,and similar accessory
units as required for installation of Work,matching or compatible with material being installed;
noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance.
2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL:
A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with
recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"that apply to the design,
dimensions,metal,and other characteristics of the item indicated.
B. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result
in waterproof and weather-resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions
of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
C. Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning,buckling, and tool marks
and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be
seamed,form seams, and solder.
E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal
with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
F. Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed
within 24 inches of comer or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions
in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form
expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges,not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic
sealant(concealed within joints).
G. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion,but movable,joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.
H. Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces
at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by
manufacturer.
I. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed
on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view.
J. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being
anchored or from compatible,noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. ,..ft,,
1. Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experience Installer who has completed sheet metal flashing
and trim work similar in material,design,and extent to that indicated for this Project and with
a record of successful in-service performance.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of
each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection
of materials and finishes.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 METALS:
A. Lead-Coated Copper: ASTM B 101,cold-rolled copper sheet,not less than 20 oz./sq.ft.,both
sides coated with lead weighing not less than 12 nor more than 15 lb/100 sq. ft., unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use
and finish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability of alloy and temper
designated below:
1. Factory-Painted Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209,3003-H14,with a minimum thickness
. of 0.040 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES:
A. Solder: ASTM B 32,Grade Sn50,used with rosin flux.
B. Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by
sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened.
C. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and
containing no asbestos fibers,compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.
D. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene;nonhardening,nonskinning,nondrying,nonmigrating sealant.
E. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of
components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,
recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior and interior nonmoving joints,including
riveted joints.
G. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and
weather-resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. All work indicated under this Section shall be included under the filed sub-bid for Section
07533 Single-Ply Membrane Roofing.
B. This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories:
1. Exposed trim, soffits, and fascia.
2. Copings.
3. Metal flashing.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for elastomeric sealants.
2. Division 7 Roofing Sections for flashing and roofing accessories installed integral with
roofing materials as part of roofing-system work.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REOUIREMENTS:
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement,
thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing.
B. Fabricate and install flashings at roof edges to comply with recommendations of FM Loss
Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for the following wind zone:
1. Wind Zone 1:Wind pressures of 25 to 30 psf.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Shop Drawings of each item specified showing layout, profiles, methods of joining, and
anchorage details.
C. Samples of sheet metal flashing,trim,and accessory items, in the specified finish. Where finish
involves normal color and texture variations,include Sample sets composed of 2 or more units
showing the full range of variations expected.
1. 8-inch-square Samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished surfaces.
2. 12-inch-long Samples of factory-fabricated products exposed as finished Work. Provide
complete with specified factory finish.
D. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and conditions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary
General Conditions and all Division 1 Sections, apply to the work of this section.
B. Time,manner, and requirements for submitting filed sub-bids:
1. Sub-bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and
shall be filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at a time
and place as stipulated in the "NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS".
The following shall appear on the upper left hand corner of the envelope.
NAME OF SUB-BIDDER:
NAME OF PROJECT:
SUB-BID FOR SECTION: 07620-SHEET METAL FLASHING AND
TRIM
2. Each sub-bid submitted for work under this Section shall be on forms
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44F of
Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-bid forms may be
obtained at the office of the Architect-Engineer or may be obtained by
written request.
3. Sub-bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a
BID BOND or CASH or CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURER'S or
CASHIER'S CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company
payable to the City of Northampton in the amount of 5 percent of the bid.
A sub-bid accompanied by any other form of bid deposit than those
specified will be rejected.
C. Sub-Sub-Bid Requirements: (NONE REQUIRED UNDER THIS SECTION).
D. Work included under this File Sub Bid is indicated in:
1. Section 07311 —Asphalt Shingles
2. Section 07533 - Single Ply Membrane Roofing
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
END OF SECTION 07533
k
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533-24
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
3.13 WALKWAY INSTALLATION: specified items or equal
A. Sarnapad Walkway
Mark lines on the roof to determine location and direction(s) of Sarnapad Walkway
network. The roof surface shall be clean. Apply Sarnacol adhesive to the roof surface
and to the underside of the Sarnapad in accordance with the Sarnapad and Sarnacol
Product Data Sheets. Weld the Sarnapad tabs'to the roof membrane with a Sarnamatic
641 or 621 (or equivalent)heat-welder. Do not run Walkway over Sarnabars.
1. To be installed at all walkway paths,as indicated on the drawings. Provide shop
drawings showing walkways and location of rooftop mechanical units for review
and modification by Architect.
3.14 TEMPORARY CUT-OFF
A. All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane in order to maintain a
watertight condition as the work progresses. When a break in the day's work occurs in the
central area of a roof, a temporary waterstop shall be constructed to provide a 100%
watertight seal. When work on the new system is suspended,the stagger of the insulation
joints shall be maintained by installing partial fillers. The new membrane shall be carried
into the waterstop. The waterstop shall be sealed to the deck and/or substrate so that water
will not be allowed to travel under the new or existing roofing. The edge of the membrane
shall be sealed in a continuous heavy application of roof cement of 6"girth. When work
resumes the contaminated PVC membrane shall be cut out. All sealant, contaminated
membrane,insulation fillers,etc. shall be removed from the work area and disposed of off
site. None of these materials shall be used in the new work.
B. If inclement weather occurs while a temporary waterstop is in place,the contractor shall
provide the labor necessary to monitor the situation to maintain a watertight condition.
C. If any water is allowed to enter under the newly-completed roofing,the affected area shall
be removed and replaced at the contractor's expense.
3.15 COMPLETION
A. Prior to demobilization from the site, the work shall be reviewed by the Architect,
manufacturer's technician,and the Contractor. All defects noted,non-compliances with the
specifications or the recommendations of the approved membrane manufacturer shall be
itemized in a punch list. These items must be corrected immediately by the Contractor prior
to demobilization to the satisfaction of the Architect and membrane manufacturer.
B. All warranties,as required in Part 1 of this specification shall be submitted for approval prior
to final payment.
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533-23
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1. Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49(latest issue).
2. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.
(SMACNA)-(latest issue).
B. All flashing materials shall be part of the warranteed roofing system.
C. Complete all metal work in conjunction with roofing and flashings so that a watertight
condition exists daily.
D. Metal shall be installed to provide adequate resistance to bending to allow for normal
thermal expansion and contraction.
E. Metal joints shall be watertight.
F. Metal flashings shall be securely fastened into solid wood blocking. Fasteners shall
penetrate the wood nailer a minimum of 1 inch.
G. Airtight and continuous metal hook strips are required behind metal fascias. Hook strips
are to be fastened 12 inches on center into the wood nailer or masonry wall.
H. Counter flashings shall overlap base flasings at least 4 inches.
I. Hook strips shall extend past wood nailers over wall surfaces by 1-1/2 inch minimum and
shall be securely sealed from air entry.
3.12 EDGE METAL
A. All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane as the job progresses.
No temporary flashings shall be allowed without the prior written approval of the Architect
and membrane manufacturer. Acceptance shall only be for specific locations on specific
dates. If any water is allowed to enter under the newly completed roofmg due to incomplete
flashings,the affected area shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor' expense.
B. Clad metal flashings shall be formed and installed per the Detail Drawings. Provide full
color range for selection by Architect.
1. All metal flashings shall be fastened into solid wood nailers with two rows of post
galvanized flat head annular ring nails, 4 inches on center staggered. Fasteners
shall penetrate the nailer a minimum of 1 inch.
2. Metal shall be installed to provide adequate resistance to bending and allow for
normal thermal expansion and contraction.
C. Adjacent sheets of clad metal shall be spaced 1/4 inch apart. The joint shall be covered with
2 inch wide aluminum tape. A 4 inch minimum wide clad cover plate shall be installed 1404
over the joint.
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533-22
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
ew
manufacturer. Approval shall only be for specific locations on specific dates. If any water
is allowed to enter under the newly completed roofing,the affected area shall be removed
and replaced at the Contractor's expense. Flashing shall be adhered to compatible, dry,
smooth,and solvent-resistant surfaces. Use caution to ensure adhesive fumes are not drawn
into the building.
B. Sarnacol Adhesive for Membrane Flashings
1. Over the properly installed and prepared flashing substrate,Samacol adhesive shall
be applied according to instructions found on the Product Data Sheet. The
Samacol adhesive shall be applied in smooth,even coats with no gaps,globs or
similar inconsistencies. Only an area which can be completely covered in the same
day's operations shall be flashed. The bonded sheet shall be pressed firmly in
place with a hand roller.
2. No adhesive shall be applied in seam areas that are to be welded. All panels of
membrane shall be applied in the same manner,overlapping the edges of the panels
as required by welding techniques.
C. Install Samastop/Sarnabar/Sarnacord according to the Detail Drawings with approved
fasteners into the structural deck at the base of parapets, walls and curbs. Sarnastop is
required by Sarnafil at the base of all tapered edge strips and at transitions, peaks, and
valleys according to details.
D. Approved membrane manufacturer's requirements and recommendations and the
specifications shall be followed. All material submittals shall have been accepted by mfr.
prior to installation.
E. All fleshings shall extend a minimum of 8 inches above roofing level unless otherwise
accepted in writing by the Architect and membrane manufacturer.
F. All flashing membranes shall be consistently adhered to substrates. All interior and exterior
corners and miters shall be cut and hot-air welded into place. No bitumen shall be in
contact with the approved membrane.
G. All flashing membranes shall be mechanically fastened along the counter-flashed top edge
with Samastop at 6-8 inches on center.
H. All flashings shall be terminated according to membrane manufacturer's recommended
details.
I. All flashings that exceed 30 inches in height shall receive additional securement. Consult
approved membrane manufacturer's Technical Department for securement methods.
3.11 METAL FLASHING: specified items or equal
A. Metal details,fabrication practices and installation methods shall conform to the applicable
requirements of the following:
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533-21
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
C. All surfaces to be welded shall be clean according to membrane manufacturer's
recommendations,and dry. No adhesive shall be present within the lap areas.
D. Hand Welding:Hand welded seams shall be completed in three stages. Equipment shall
be allowed to warm up for at least one minute prior to start of welding.
1. The lap shall be tack welded every 3 feet to hold the material in place.
2. The back edge of the lap shall be welded with a thin,continuous weld to prevent
loss of hot air during the final welding.
3. The hot air nozzle shall be inserted into the lap,keeping the welding equipment at
a 45 degree angle to the side lap. Once the proper welding temperature has been
reached and the material starts to flow,the hand roller shall be applied at a right
angle to the welding gun and pressed lightly. For straight laps, the 1-1/2"wide
nozzle shall be used. For corners and compound connections,the 3/4"wide nozzle
shall be used.
E. Machine Welding
1. Machine welded seams may be achieved by the use of membrane manufacturer's
various automatic welding equipment. When using this equipment, the
manufacturer's instructions shall be followed and local codes for electric supply,
PP Y,
grounding and over current protection observed. The automatic welding machines
require 218 to 230 volts at 30 amps. The use of a portable generator is
recommended.
2. When welding sheets adhered with adhesive, 15 inch wide metal tracks must be used
over the deck sheet and under the machine welder to prevent wrinkles.
F. Quality Control of Welded Seams
1. The Contractor shall check all welded seams for continuity using a rounded
screwdriver. Visible evidence that welding is proceeding correctly is smoke
during the welding operation, shiny membrane surfaces, and an uninterrupted
flow of dark grey material from the underside of the top membrane. On-site
evaluation of welded seams shall be made daily by the Contractor to locations as
directed by membrane manufacturer's representative. One inch (25 mm) wide
cross-section samples of welded seams shall be taken at least three times a day.
Correct welds display failure from shearing of the membrane prior to separation
of the weld. Each test cut shall be patched by the Applicator at no extra cost to
the Owner.
3.10 MEMBRANE FLASHINGS
A. All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane as the job progresses.
No temporary flashings shall be allowed without the prior written approval of membrane
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533-20
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
completely prior to installing the membrane.
2. When the adhesive on the substrate is dry, the approved roof membrane is
unrolled. Adjacent sheets shall be overlapped 3 inches(75 mm). Once in place,
one-half of the sheet's length shall be turned back and the underside shall be
coated with Sarnacol 2170 adhesive at a rate of 1/2 gallon per 100 ft2 (0.2
liters/mz). When the membrane adhesive has dried slightly to produce strings
when touched with a dry finger,the coated membrane shall be rolled onto the
previously-coated substrate being careful to avoid wrinkles. Do not allow
adhesive on the underside of the approved membrane to dry completely.
The amount of membrane that can be coated with adhesive before rolling into
substrate will be determined by ambient temperature, humidity and crew. The
bonded sheet shall be pressed firmly in place with a water-filled,foam-covered
lawn roller by frequent rolling in two directions. The remaining un-bonded half
of the sheet shall be folded back and the procedure repeated.
3. The Applicator shall count the amount of pails of adhesive used per area per day
to verify conformance to the specified adhesive rate.
4. No adhesive shall be applied in seam areas. All membrane shall be applied in
the same manner.
C. Sarnacol 2121 Adhesive:
1. Over the properly installed and prepared absorbent substrate, Samacol 2121
adhesive shall be poured out of the pail and spread using notched squeegees.
The adhesive shall be applied at a rate according to Sarnafil requirements (no
adhesive is placed on back of the membrane). The formation of a film on the
surface of the adhesive shall not be allowed to occur. The membrane shall be
carefully unrolled into the wet adhesive while the edges are overlapped 3 inches
(75 mm). The membrane shall be pressed firmly into the adhesive layer with a
water-filled,foam-covered lawn roller by frequent rolling in two directions.
2. Sarnacol 2121 shall not be used if temperatures below 40°F(5°C)are expected
during application or subsequent drying time.
No adhesive shall be applied in seam areas. All membrane shall be applied in
the same manner.
3.09 HOT AIR WELDING OF LAP AMMS
A. Adjacent sheets shall be welded in accordance with membrane manufacturer's written
instructions. All side and end lap joints shall be hot air welded. Lap areas shall be a
minimum of 3 inches wide when machine welding,and a minimum of 4 inches wide when
hand welding.
B. Welding equipment shall be provided by or approved by membrane manufacturer. All
mechanics intending to use the equipment shall have successfully completed a course of
instruction provided by a membrane manufacturer's representative prior to welding.
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533-19
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
the boards and the substrate. Each insulation board shall be installed tightly against
the adjacent boards on all sides.
2. Fasteners are to be installed consistently in accordance with fastener
Manufacturer's recommendations. Fasteners are to have minimum penetration
into structural deck recommended by the fastener manufacturer and roof system
manufacturer.
3. Use fastener tools with'a depth locator and torque-limiting attachment as
recommended or supplied by fastener manufacturer to ensure proper installation.
G. Attachment with Hot Type III Asphalt:
1. Insulation shall be adhered to the concrete deck or another approved substrate
with hot Type III asphalt according to the asphalt Manufacturer's instructions.
The temperature of the asphalt shall be at the asphalt Manufacturers instructions
for EVT. The asphalt temperature and application methodology shall be
maintained throughout the installation as recommended by the asphalt
manufacturer,the NRCA and ARMA. The installation shall be such to cause the
insulation boards to rest evenly on the roof deck/substrate so that there are no
significant and avoidable air spaces between the boards and the substrate. The
maximum insulation board size with hot-asphalt attachment is 4 ft x 4 ft(1.2 in
x 1.2 m). Each insulation board shall be installed tightly against the adjacent ,.
boards on all sides and walked-in-place to assure even and consistent contact
with the substrate. Aluminum tape shall be installed over joints where asphalt
has been pushed to the board's surface.
When hot asphalt is used to attach the insulation board to the deck, a Samabar
shall be installed above the adhered roof membrane 4 ft (1.3 m)from the edge
of the roof along the entire perimeter. The Sarnabar shall be fastened 12 inches
(0.3 m)on center and a membrane cover strip is welded over it.
3.08 INSTALLATION OF ROOFING MEMBRANE: specified items or equal
A. The surface of the insulation or substrate shall be inspected prior to installation of the roof
membrane. The substrate shall be clean, dry and smooth with no excessive surface
roughness, contaminated surfaces or unsound surfaces such as broken, delaminated, or
damaged insulation boards.
B. Samacol 2170 Adhesive:
1. Over the properly installed and prepared substrate surface, Sarnacol 2170
adhesive shall be applied using solvent-resistant 3/4 inch (19 mm) nap paint
rollers. The adhesive shall be applied to the substrate at a rate according to the
membrane manufacturer's requirements. The adhesive shall be applied in
smooth, even coating with no gaps, globs, puddles or similar inconsistencies.
Only an area which can be completely covered in the same day's operations shall
be coated with adhesive. The first layer of adhesive shall be allowed to dry
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533- 18
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
3.04 SUBSTRATE INSPECTION
A. A dry,clean and smooth substrate shall be prepared to receive the approved adhered roof
system.
B. The Contractor shall inspect the substrate for defects such as excessive surface roughness,
contamination,structural inadequacy,or any other condition that will adversely affect the
quality of work.
C. The substrate shall be clean, smooth, dry,free of flaws, sharp edges, loose and foreign
material,oil and grease. Roofing shall not start until all defects have been corrected.
D. All roof surfaces shall be free of water, ice and snow.
E. The approved membrane shall be applied over compatible and accepted substrates only.
3.05 VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION
A. Install over all new roof areas.
3.06 WOOD NAILERS
A. See section 06100:Rough Carpentry
3.07 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Insulation shall be installed according to insulation Manufacturer instructions.
B. Insulation shall be neatly cut to fit around penetrations and projections.
C. Install tapered insulation around drains creating a drain sump and at all mech. units and
other obstructions to divert water flow to drains.The contractor shall provide a roof plan
showing the tapered insulation layout for review by the Architect.
D. Do not install more insulation board than can be covered with approved membrane by the
end of the day or the onset of inclement weather.
E. Use at least 2 layers of insulation when the total insulation thickness exceeds 2.5 inches.
Stagger joints at least 12 inches between layers.
F. Mechanical Attachment:
1. Insulation shall be mechanically fastened to the deck with approved fasteners and
plates at a rate according to Manufacturer. FM's and manufacturer's
recommendations for fastening rates and patterns. The quantity and locations of
the fasteners and plates shall also cause the insulation boards to rest evenly on the
roof deck/substrate so that there are no significant and avoidable air spaces between
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533-17
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
shall be approved for such use by the fastener manufacturer. All miscellaneous wood
fasteners and anchors used for flashings shall have a minimum embedment of 1 inch
(25 mm) and shall be approved for such use by the fastener manufacturer.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
The roofing contractor shall coordinate the installation so that each area is made watertight at the end
of each work period.
3.02 SUBSTRATE CONDITION
A. Contractor shall be responsible for acceptance or provision of proper substrate to receive
new roofing materials.
B. Contractor shall verify that the work done under related sections meets the following
conditions:
1. Roof drains and/or scuppers have been reconditioned and/or replaced and
installed properly.
2. Roof curbs,nailers, equipment supports, vents and other roof penetrations are
properly secured and prepared to receive new roofing materials.
3. All surfaces are smooth and free of dirt,debris and incompatible materials.
4. All roof surfaces shall be free of water, ice and snow.
3.03 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION
A. The roof deck and existing roof construction must be structurally sound to provide support
for the new roof system. The Applicator shall load materials on the rooftop in such a
manner to eliminate risk of deck overload due to concentrated weight. The Owner's
Representative shall ensure that the roof deck is secured to the structural framing according
to local building code and in such a manner as to resist all anticipated wind loads in that
location.
B. Re-roofing of Existing Single-Ply Roofing
Any existing roofing,insulation,base flashing,deteriorated wood blocking or deteriorated
metal flashings shall be removed. Remove only that amount of roofing and flashing which
can be made weathertight with new materials during a one-day period or before the onset
of inclement weather.The Architect and Contractor shall examine the condition of the roof
deck and existing insulation. Deteriorated decking or wet or deteriorated materials are to
be removed and replaced. Add a recover board or new insulation board. Fasten recover
board or top layer of insulation in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533- 16
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
D. Samasolv
A high quality solvent cleaner used for the general cleaning of residual asphalt,scuff marks,
etc.,from the membrane surface. Sarnasolv is also used daily to clean seam areas prior to
hot-air welding in tear off or dirty conditions or if the membrane is not welded the same day
it is unrolled. Consult Samafil Product Data Sheet for additional information.
E. Decore Profile:
Extruded PVC sections formulated to match the roof membrane in all characteristics.
Standing seam Decore Profile shall be continuously hot air welded to the roof sheet
following the manufacturer's specifications. Decore Profile standing seam strips to be
installed in a straight continuous line with an acceptable tolerance of 1/2"maximum over a
single strip measured at the top of the strip.All joints to include manufacturer's connection
dowels and shall be sealed with finished ends. Roofing sheet receiving the Decore Profile
and the Decore Profile itself shall be a color from the manufacturer's standard colors. All
colors shall be chosen by the architect.
2.09 SEALANTS AND PITCH POCKET FILLERS: specified items or equal
A. Sarnafil Multi-Purpose Sealant(for termination details).
B. Sarnafiller(two-part urethane filler for pitch pocket toppings).
C. Depending on substrates,the following sealants are options for temporary overnight
tie-ins:
1. Type III hot asphalt conforming to ASTM D312(latest revision).
2. Sarnafiller.
3. Multiple layers of roofing cement and felt.
4. Spray-applied,water-resistant urethane foam.
5. Mechanical attachment with rigid bars and compressed sealant.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS FASTENERS AND ANCHORS
A. All fasteners,anchors,nails, straps,bars,etc. shall be post-galvanized steel,aluminum
or stainless steel. Mixing metal types and methods of contact shall be assembled in
such a manner as to avoid galvanic corrosion. Fasteners for attachment of metal to
masonry shall be expansion type fasteners with stainless steel pins. All concrete
OOW fasteners and anchors shall have a minimum embedment of 1.25 inch(32 mm)and
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533-15
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
embossment. Used as a protection layer from rooftop traffic. Samatred is supplied in rolls
of 39.3 inches(1.0 m)wide and 32.8 feet(10 m)long. Consult Samafil Product Data Sheet
for additional information.
B. Sand-Coated Walkway
A fiberglass reinforced,60 mil,weldable membrane with a thick sand-based coating on top.
Net dimensions are approximately 150 mil(4 mm)thick by 26 inches(0.6 m),39 inches
(1.0 m),78 inches(2.0 m)wide with varying lengths. The standard length is 32 feet(10 m).
Consult Sarnafil Product Data Sheet for additional information. At a minimum walkways
shall extend from roof access hatches and doors to all rooftop mechanical units and roof
drains.
C. Sarnapad
A 1/a inch thick, injection-molded walkway pad with welding tabs made entirely of
recycled PVC material. Used to install a continuous rooftop walkway network. Net
dimensions are 1/a inch thick x 24 inches long x 24 inches wide. Consult Sarnafil
Product Data Sheet for additional information.
2.07 VAPOR RETARDER: specified items or equal
A. Sarnavap-10
A 10 mil(0.25 mm)thick polyethylene vapor retarder/air retarder.Sarnavap-10 is supplied
in a folded panel that is rolled onto a core. The core width is 5 feet(1.5 m). When unrolled
off the core and unfolded,the sheet dimensions are 20 feet(6.9 m)wide by 100 feet(33 m)
long. Consult Samafil Product Data Sheet for additional information.
2.08 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES: specified items or equal
A. Aluminum Tape
A 2 inch(50 mm)wide pressure-sensitive aluminum tape used as a separation layer between
small areas of asphalt contamination and the membrane and as a bond-breaker under the
coverstrip at Samaclad joints.
B. Samamatic 641mc
220 volt, self-propelled, hot-air welding machine used to seal long lengths of Sarnafil
membrane seams.
C. Perimat Welder
120 volt, self-propelled, hot-air welding machine used to seal long-lengths of Sarnafil
membrane seams along perimeter details.
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533- 14
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
Notes:
a) There is a significant increase in drying time due to an increase in
humidity andlor a decrease in temperature. Do not install when outdoor
or substrate temperatures during drying period are expected to fall below
40°F(5°C).
b) Do not allow Sarnacol 2121 adhesive to skin-over or surface-dry prior
to installation of membrane.
C) Use a water-filled,foam-covered lawn roller to consistently and evenly
press the membrane into the adhesive layer.
B. Samafastener-XP
A#15,heavy-duty,corrosion-resistant fastener used with Sarnaplate,Samastop or Samabar
to attach insulation or membrane to the steel roof deck. Sarnafastener-XP has a shank
diameter of approximately 0.21 inch (5.3 mm) and the thread diameter is approximately
0.26 inch(6.6 mm). The driving head has a diameter of approximately 0.435 inch(11 mm)
and is#3 Phillips design for positive engagement. Consult Sarnafil Product Data Sheet for
additional information.
C. Samastop
An extruded aluminum,low-profile bar used with certain Sarnafasteners to attach to the roof
deck or to walls/curbs at terminations,penetrations and at incline changes of the substrate.
Sarnastop is a 1 inch (25 mm) wide, flat aluminum bar 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick that has
predrilled holes every 6 inches(152 mm)on center. Consult Samafil Product Data Sheet
for additional information.
D. Samabar
An FM-approved,heavy-duty, 14 gauge,galvanized or stainless,roll-formed steel bar used
to attach membrane to the roof deck. The formed steel is pre-punched with holes every 1
inch(25 mm)on center to allow various Samafastener spacing options. Consult Sarnafil
Product Data Sheet for additional information.
D. Base Sheet Fastener
As recommended by Sarnafil.
2.06 WALKWAY PROTECTION: specified items or equal
A. Samatred
A polyester reinforced, 0.096 inch (96 mil/2.4 mm), weldable membrane with surface
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533-13
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. Membrane Adhesive
1. Sarnacol 2170 Adhesive:
A solvent-based reactivating-type adhesive used to attach the membrane to the
substrate, either horizontally or vertically. Consult Product Data Sheets for
additional information. Application rates are as follows:
Substrate Rate Membrane Rate Total Rate
Gallons/100 ft2 gallons/100 ft2 gallons/100 ft2
Metal 0.75 + 0.50 = 1.25 (0.51)
Isocyanurate 1.25 + 0.50 = 1.75 (0.71)
Dens-Deck 1.00 + 0.50 = 1.50 (0.61)
Notes:
a) Due to an increase in viscosity when outdoor temperatures during
installation are below 40°F (5°C), add 0.5 gal/100 ft2 (0.2 1/m2) to
within 5°F of dew point. Solvent evaporation time increases
significantly when temperatures drop. Ensure first layer of Sarnacol
2170 is fully dry before second layer is applied to the back of the
membrane for proper reactivation.
b) Use a water-filled,foam-covered lawn roller to consistently and evenly
press the membrane into the adhesive layer.
A. Samacol 2121 Adhesive:
A water-based adhesive used to attach the membrane to the horizontal or near-
horizontal substrate. Consult Product Data Sheets for additional information.
Application rates are as follows:
Substrate Rate Membrane Rate Total Rate
Gallons/100 ft2 gallons/100 ft2 gallons/100 ft2
Isocyanurate 1.75 + 0 = 1.75 (0.71)
Dens-Deck 1.75 + 0 = 1.70 (0.761)
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533- 12
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
3. Sarnafiller
A urethane sealant used for pitch pocket topping. Sarnafiller is a two component
sealant. Samafiller cures with excellent elasticity and adhesion to various surfaces.
Consult Sarnafil Product Data Sheet for additional information.
4. Multi-Purpose Sealant
A proprietary sealant used at flashing terminations. Consult Sarnafil Product Data
Sheet for additional information.
5. Sarnacol 2170 Adhesive
A solvent-based reactivating-type adhesive used to attach the membrane to the
flashing substrate. Consult Product Data Sheets for additional information.
6. Sarnacol 2121 Adhesive
A water-based contact-type adhesive used to attach the membrane to the flashing
substrate. Consult Product Data Sheets for additional information.
7. Sarnafelt
A non-woven polyester or polypropylene mat cushion layer that is necessary behind
G410 or G459 Flashing Membrane when the flashing substrates are rough-surfaced
or incompatible with the flashing membrane. Consult Product Data Sheets for
additional information.
2.04 INSULATION/OVERLAYMENT/RECOVER BOARD: specified items or equal
A. Sarnatherm Insulation
A rigid isocyanurate foam insulation with black mat facers. Samatherm is available in 4 ft
x 4 ft or 4 ft x 8 ft sizes and 1-1/2"or 2"thicknesses,as indicated on the drawings. Consult
Sarnafil Product Data Sheet for additional information.
B. Dens-Deck®
A siliconized gypsum, fire-tested hardboard with fiberglass-mat facers. Dens-Deck is
provided in a 4 ft x 8 ft (1.2 in x 2.4 m) board size and in '/s inch thickness. Consult
Sarnafil Product Data Sheet for size,thickness and additional information.
2.05 ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533-11
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2.03 FLASHING MATERIALS: Specified items or equal
A. Wall/Curb Flashing
1. Samafil G410 Membrane
A fiberglass reinforced membrane adhered to approved substrate using Samacol
adhesive. Consult Sarnafil Product Data Sheets for adhesive options and additional
information.
2. Samaclad
A PVC-coated,heat-weldable sheet metal capable of being formed into a variety
of shapes and profiles. Samaclad is a 25 gauge,G90 galvanized metal sheet with
a 20 mil (1 mm) unsupported Samafil membrane laminated on one side. The
dimensions of Samaclad are 4ft x8ft(1.2mx2.4 in) or4ftx 10ft (1.2mx
3.0m). Consult Sarnafil Product Data Sheet for additional information.
B. Perimeter Edge Flashing
1. Samaclad
A PVC-coated,heat-weldable sheet metal capable of being formed into a variety
of shapes and profiles. Samaclad is a 25 gauge,G90 galvanized metal sheet with
a 20 mil (1 mm) unsupported Samafil membrane laminated on one side. The
dimensions of Samaclad are 4 ft x 8 ft(1.2 in x 2.4 m) or 4 ft x 10 ft (1.2 in x
3.0m). Consult Samafil Product Data Sheet for additional information.
a. Color to be selected by Architect.
C. Miscellaneous Flashing
1. Saraflash
A prefabricated expansion joint cover made from Samafil membrane. Samaflash
is designed for securement to wall or horizontal surfaces to span and accommodate
the movement of new and existing expansion gaps from 1 inch to 4-1/2 inches(25
mm to 114 mm) across. Available in 40 foot (12 m) rolls. Consult Samafil
Product Data Sheet for additional information.
2. Samareglet
A heavy-duty, extruded aluminum flashing termination reglet used at walls and
large curbs. Samareglet is produced from 6063-T5,0.10 inch-0.12 inch(2.5 mm
-3.0 mm)thick extruded aluminum. Samareglet has a 2-1/4 inch(57 mm)deep
profile, and is provided in 10 foot(3 m) lengths. Use prefabricated Samareglet
mitered inside and outside corers where walls intersect. Consult Sarnafil Product
Data Sheet for additional information.
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533- 10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
a lacquer coating.
B. Membrane shall conform to ASTM D4434 (or latest revision) "Standard for Polyvinyl
Chloride Sheet Roofing."Classification: Type H,Grade 1.
C. As manufactured,membrane shall conform by meeting or exceeding the following physical
properties:
Minimum Sarnafil
ASTM ASTM Typical Physical
Parameters Test Method Requirement Properties
color -- -- off-white
overall thickness
mm(inches) D751 1.14mn(0.045 in) 1.2 mm(0.072 in)
tensile strength,psi D638 1500 psi 1600 psi
elongation at break, % D638 250%MD/ 270%MD/
230%CMD 250%CMD
seam strength,%of
tensile strength D638 75% 85%
retention of properties
after heat aging D3045 -- --
tensile strength, %v of
original D638 80% 93%
elongation,%of original D638 80% 93%
tear resistance(1 b£) D1004 10 14
low temperature
(40 degrees F) D2136 pass pass
accelerated weathering
test(Xenon) D2565 5,000 hours 10,000 hours
cracking(7X magnification) -- none none
discoloration(observed) -- negligible negligible
crazing(7X magnification) -- none none
linear dimensional change% D1204 0.1%max. 0.0%
weight change after
immersion in water,max. % D570 +3.0%max. 2.5%
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533 -9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1.11 WARRANTIES
A. 15-Year Systems Warranty: Upon successful completion of the work and prior to receipt
of final payment, provide 15-year Systems Warranty from the approved membrane
manufacturer.
B. 20-Year Membrane Warranty:Upon successful completion of the work and prior to receipt
of final payment,provide 20-year Membrane from the approved membrane manufacturer.
C. Roofing Contractor's Warranty: The Roofing Contractor shall supply the Owner with a
minimum two-year workmanship warranty. In the event any work related to roofing,
flashing, or metal work is found to be defective or otherwise not in accordance with the
contract documents within two years of substantial completion,the roofing contractor shall
remove and replace at no cost to the Owner. The Contractor's Warranty obligation shall run
directly to the Owner,with a copy to the approved membrane manufacturer.
1.12 MATERIALS AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Manufacturer's representative shall provide(at no cost)full instruction in the care,operation
and emergency repair of the roof system to maintenance personnel designated by the Owner.
B. The Roofing Contractor shall provide the Owner with a hand-welding kit, including two
nozzles and roller with enough material to make emergency repairs. ...
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. To establish a standard of quality,the components of the single-ply reinforced PVC adhered
roof system specified and detailed in the contract documents are based on products of
Sarnafil,Inc,Canton,Massachusetts. Equal products may be used with approval from the
architect.
B. Materials,products&installation procedures listed herein establish a minimum standard
of quality by which the Architect will evaluate all other materials proposed to accomplish
the specified scope of work.
C. Components to be used that are other than those supplied or manufactured by the approved
manufacturer may be submitted for review and acceptance by the manufacturer providing
the system warranty. Manufacturer's acceptance of any other product is only for a
determination of compatibility with their products. The specifications, installation
instructions, limitations, and/or restrictions of the respective manufacturers must be
reviewed by the Architect for acceptability for use with the approved system/membrane
manufacturer's products.
2.02 MEMBRANE
A. G410 non-laminated 0.072 in.(actual)thickness,fiberglass reinforced PVC membrane with
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
P. Contaminants, such as grease, fats, oils, and solvents, shall not be allowed to come into
contact with the roofing membrane. Any such contact shall be reported to the membrane
manufacturer,
Q. Contractor shall verify that all roof drain lines are unblocked before starting work. Report
any such blockages to the Architect in writing.
R. If any unusual or concealed condition is discovered, stop work and notify Architect and
membrane manufacturer immediately in writing.
S. Site clean-up,including both interior and exterior building areas which have been affected
by construction,shall be completed to the Architect's and Owner's satisfaction.
T. All landscaped areas affected by construction activities shall be raked clean and seeded,if
required.
U. The adhered membrane shall not be installed under the following conditions without
consulting the manufacturer's Technical Department for precautionary steps:
1. The roof assembly permits interior air to pressurize the membrane underside.
2. Any exterior wall has 10% or more of the surface area comprised of opening
doors or windows.
ew
3. The wall/deck intersection permits air entry into the wall flashing area.
V. Upon visual inspection of the substrate,notify the Architect of any moisture,damage,or
deterioration.
W. Precautions shall be taken when using adhesives at or near rooftop vents or air intakes.
Adhesive odors could enter the building. Coordinate the operation of vents and air intakes
in such a manner as to avoid the intake of adhesive odor while ventilating the building.
Keep lids on unused cans at all times.
X. Protective wear shall be worn when using solvents or adhesives or as required by job
conditions.
1.10 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Bid Conference:A pre-bid conference shall be held with a representative of the Owner
and involved trades to discuss all aspects of the project. The Contractor's field
representative or roofing foreman for the work shall be in attendance.
B. Site Visit: Bidders shall visit the site and carefully examine the existing areas in question
as to conditions which may affect proper execution of the work. All dimension and
quantities shall be determined or verified by the Contractor. No claims for extra costs will
be allowed because of lack of full knowledge of the existing conditions.
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
D. The Contractor shall conduct fastener pullout tests in accordance with the latest revision of
the SPRI/ANSI Fastener Pullout Standard to help verify condition of deck/substrate and to
confirm expected pullout values.
E. All surfaces to receive new insulation, membrane or flashings shall be thoroughly dry.
Should surface moisture occur,the contractor shall provide the necessary equipment to dry
the surface prior to application.
F. All new and temporary construction,including equipment and accessories,shall be secured
in such a manner,at all times,as to preclude wind blow-off or damage.
G. Temporary waterstops shall be installed at the end of each day's work,and shall be removed
before proceeding with the next day's work. Waterstops shall be compatible with all
materials and shall not emit dangerous or incompatible fumes.
H. The Contractor is cautioned that certain membranes are incompatible with asphalt,coal tar
and oil-based materials and cements. Creosote and penta-based materials are also
incompatible. Such materials should not come in contact with Manufacturer's membranes
at any time. If such contacts occur, the material shall be cut out and discarded. The
contractor should consult the membrane/ system manufacturer with respect to material
compatibility,precautions,and recommendations.
1. Arrange work sequence to avoid use of newly-constructed roofmg for storage, walking
surface, and equipment movement. Where such access is absolutely required, the
Contractor shall provide all necessary protection and barriers to segregate the work area and
to prevent damage to adjacent areas. Both plywood and polyester felt protection shall be
provided for all new and existing roof areas which receive traffic during construction.
J. Prior to and during application,all dirt,debris and dust shall be removed from surfaces either
by vacuuming,sweeping,blowing with compressed air and/or similar methods.
K. All roofing, insulation, flashings and metal work removed for construction shall be
immediately taken off the site to a legal dumping area authorized to receive such materials.
Any hazardous materials such as asbestos or materials containing asbestos fibers shall be
disposed of in accordance with applicable City,State and Federal requirements.
L. The Contractor shall follow all safety regulations as recommended by OSHA.
M. The Contractor should take care during application and storage that overloading of deck and
structure does not occur.
N. Installation of a membrane over coal tar pitch, or resaturated roof, may require special
installation precautions and techniques. Consult Manufacturer for such additional
information.
O. Liquid materials such as solvents and adhesives shall be stored and used away from open
flames,sparks and excessive heat.
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
O
a. Name of specific project
b. Recommended proceedures for attachment of insulation to deck,including
quantity,density,and/or spacing.
C. Approval for use of single ply manufacturer's adhesives for bonding
membrane directly to the insulation board.
d. Statements which express warranty conditions for the successful
performance of their insulation for the duration of the single ply
manufacturer's warranty.
11. Report from an independent testing laboratory certifying the manufacturer's
membrane has met a minimum 10,000 hours of Xenon exposure, according to
ASTM D2565.
1.08 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All products delivered to the job site shall be in the original unopened containers or
wrappings.
B. Handle all materials to prevent damage. Place all materials on pallets and fully protected
from moisture.
C. Membrane rolls shall be stored lying down on pallets,and fully protected from moisture with
OOW clean canvas tarpaulins.
D. Bonding adhesives shall be stored at temperatures between 40 degrees F and 80 degrees F.
E. All flammable materials shall be stored in a cool, dry area away from sparks and open
flames. Follow precautions outlined on containers or supplied by material
manufacturer/supplier.
F. All materials which are determined damaged by the Owner's Representative or manufacturer
are to be removed from the job site and replaced at no cost to the Owner.
1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Materials may be installed under the following weather conditions(extreme temperatures,
moisture, humidity), but only after consultation with the system manufacturer, as
performance of materials,installation costs and production may be affected.
B. Only as much of the new roofing as can be made weathertight each day, including all
flashing and metal work, shall be installed. All seams shall be cleaned and heat welded
before leaving the job site that day.
C. All work shall be scheduled and executed without exposing the interior building areas to
the effects of inclement weather. The existing building and its contents shall be protected
against all risks,and any damages shall be repaired or replaced. All exterior building and
ground areas shall be protected from damage.
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA ,,.w,
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. The contractor shall submit the following in accordance with Section 01300—Submittals:
1. A detailed schedule including manpower and construction approach illustrating how
the contractor proposes to complete the project.
2. Proposed single ply manufacturer's specifications.
3. Three(3)samples of each primary component to be used in the roof system and the
manufacturer's current literature for each component.
4. Written approval by the insulation manufacturer for use and performance of the
product in the proposed system.
5. Sample copy of membrane manufacturer's 15 year system warranty.
6. Dimensional shop drawings which shall include:
a. outline of roof and roof size
b. profile details of flashing methods for penetrations and terminations
C. written acceptance from the membrane manufacturer's technical
department.
d. board by board layout of tapered system, and shall comply with the
drainage pattern required.
e. Complete board layout of all tapered insulation components,thicknesses,
and the average"R"value for the completed insulation system.
f. The roofing contractor shall verify all existing roof conditions,including
but not limited to:dimensions,elevations,drain locations,and equipment,
and confirm same with the insulation manufacturer prior to shipment of
any material.
7. Certifications by producers of roofing and insulating materials that all materials
supplied comply with all requirements of the identified ASTM and industry
standards.
8. Written documentation from the roofing system manufacturer indicating that he is
advised of all materials proposed for use, including the insulation substrate,
fastenings and methods of installation,and that he is satisfied that all materials and
methods are compatible with his system, presenting no exception affecting the
issuance of the specified warranty.
9. Certification from the membrane manufacturer that system specifications meet all
identified code and insurance requirements.
10. The insulation manufacturer shall send,in writing to the Architect and single-ply
manufacturer,a copy of his recommendations for use of his product,including: 40
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
1. The system manufacturer is familiar with the existing conditions and all substrate
materials proposed for use,and that the manufacturer agrees to provide all necessary
on-site technical assistance to achieve a satisfactory installation.
2. All materials and workmanship will be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
3. The installation will be under the constant supervision of an experienced factory
trained,licensed applicator. All work pertaining to the installation of the system shall
only be completed by contractor personnel trained and authorized by the approved
manufacturer in those procedures.
4. A technical representative directly employed by the manufacturer shall visit the
site(s)to inspect the installation of the membrane at least three(1)time each week,
and will conduct a final inspection to observe the installed roof system and
ascertain that the roofing system has been installed according to applicable
manufacturer's specifications&details.
E. There shall be no deviation made from the Contract Specification or the approved shop
drawings without prior written approval by the system manufacturer,the Architect and the
Owner.
F. The contractor shall provide a constant full-time Superintendent that shall be on site at all
times while any work is in progress.
1.06 CODE REQUIREMENTS
A. The Roofing Contractor shall submit evidence that the proposed roofmg system will meet
the identified requirement of the following recognized code approval or testing agencies.
These requirements are minimum standards and no roofing work shall commence without
written documentation of the system's compliance,as required in the"Submittals" section
of this specification.
1. Factory Mutual Research Laboratories-Norwood,MA
a. F.M.Class I System acceptance
b. F.M.I-90 wind uplift resistance
2. Underwriters Laboratories-Chicago,IL
a. U.L.Class A membrane
3. American Society of Testing and Materials(.)
a. A.S.T.M. D4434 Classification Type 11,Grade I
4. Massachusetts State Building Code 780 CMR-6"Ed.
a. Provide warranty for compliance with 1507.3 "Low-Slope Roof
Coverings".
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA A0**
this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General
Conditions of the Contract.
1.03 SCOPE
A. Install a fully adhered roofing membrane with flashings, and other items approved by the
roofing Manufacturer to comprise a total roofing system.
B. The work includes but is not necessarily limited to the installation of:
1. Vapor retarder(where specified)
2. Insulation including tapered crickets at drains and meth.equip.
3. Roof board
4. Fasteners
5. Roof membrane
6. Roof membrane flashings
7. Walkways
8. Metal flashings
9. Sealants and adhesives
10. Removal&reinstallation of all existing rooftop equipment as required to perform
the roofing operations specified herein.
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Rough Carpentry-Section 06100
B. Sheet Metal Flashing&Trim—Section 07620
C. Roofing Accessories—Section 07720
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The roofing system shall be applied only by an approved Roofing Contractor authorized prior
to bid by roof membrane manufacturer.
B. The roofing & flashing methods to be employed shall be a complete system, with all
insulation,membrane and flashing components and details of installation as recommended
by the roofing system manufacturer,which are recognized in the roofing industry for having
manufactured and warranted the type of installation proposed,for at least ten(15)years.
C. Each roofing contractor submitting a bid shall be experienced in the installation of the
specified system(s) and shall be able to demonstrate: not less than eight (8) years of
continuous business operation in the roof contracting trade,not less than five(5)years as
an approved contractor for the roof membrane manufacturer, and a minimum of five(5)
warranted installations of the specified system of comparable scope and size to this project.
The successful bidder shall be required to be currently licensed by the approved roofing
system manufacturer complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
This information is in addition to the requirements set forth in the General Bid Form.
D. Before the contract is awarded,the successful bidder shall provide proof of the following:
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 07533-SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and conditions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary General
Conditions and all Division 1 Sections,apply to the work of this section.
B. Time,manner, and requirements for submitting filed sub-bids:
1. Sub-bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall be
filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at a time and place as
stipulated in the "NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS".
The following shall appear on the upper left hand corner of the envelope.
NAME OF SUB-BIDDER:
NAME OF PROJECT:
SUB-BID FOR SECTION: 07533 Singl,e-Ply Membrane Roofing
2. Each sub-bid submitted for work under this Section shall be on forms furnished
by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the
General Laws,as amended. Sub-bid forms may be obtained at the office of the
Architect-Engineer or may be obtained by written request.
3. Sub-bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a BID
BOND or CASH or CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURER'S or CASHIER'S
CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company payable to the City of
Northampton in the amount of 5 percent of the bid. A sub-bid accompanied by
any other form of bid deposit than those specified will be rejected.
C. Sub-Sub-Bid Requirements: (NONE REQUIRED UNDER THIS SECTION).
D. Work included under this File Sub Bid is indicated in:
1. Section 07311 -Asphalt Shingles
2. Section 07620—Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Attention is directed to the Contract; the General Conditions of the Contract; the
Supplementary and General Conditions, and the General Requirements and Technical
Specifications sections of this Specification.
B. Equality of material,article,assembly or system other than those named or described in
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533-1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2. Install in accordance with conditions stated in model code evaluation report
applicable to location of project.
3. Use trim details indicated on drawings and per manufacturer's
recommendations.
4. Touch up all field cut edges before installing.
5. Pre-drill nail holes to prevent breakage.
6. Use hot-dipped galvanized nails,concealed wherever possible. Where
exposed,establish a plumb and level nailing pattern with consistant spacing
of exposed heads.
B. Over Wood and Wood-Composite Sheathing: Fasten siding through sheathing into
studs.
C. Over Masonry Walls: Install furring strips of adequate thickness to accept full length
of nails and spaced at 16 inches (406 mm)on center.
D. Allow space between both ends of siding panels that butt against trim for thermal
movement; seal joint between panel and trim with exterior grade sealant.
E. Joints in Horizontal Siding: Avoid joints in lap siding except at comers; where joints
are inevitable stagger joints between successive courses.
F. Joints in Vertical Siding: Install Z-flashing in horizontal joints between successive
courses of vertical siding.
G. Furred Installation: Leave space at top and bottom open; top may be behind soffit; at
bottom install insect screen over opening by wrapping a strip of screen over bottom
ends of vertical furring strips.
H. Install sheet metal flashing above door and window casings and horizontal trim in
OOW field of siding.
I. Do not install siding less than 6 inches (150 mm) from surface of ground nor closer
than 1 inch (25 mm) to roofs, patios, porches, and other surfaces where water may
collect.
J. After installation, seal all joints except lap joints of lap siding. Seal around all
penetrations. Paint all exposed cut edges.
K. Finish Painting: Specified in Section 09900.
3.4 CLEANING
A. At completion of work,remove debris caused by siding installation from project site.
B. Touch-up,repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 07466
FIBER CEMENT SIDING 07466-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
9. Finish: Factory sealed with FiberTect.
10. Finish: Unprimed.
E. Soffit: CertainTeed WeatherBoards,Fiber Cement Soffit,ventilated.
1. Thickness: 1/4 inch(6 mm),nominal.
2. Style: Smooth texture, 12 inches(305 mm)wide.
3. Finish: Factory sealed with FiberTect.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Trim: Fiber cement board,cut from siding material; cut edges primed.
B. Provide the following trim:
1. Starter strip for lap siding.
2. Outside corners,butted to siding.
3. Outside corners,overlapping siding.
4. Fascia board.
5. Vertical and horizontal band,rake and frieze boards.
6. Round-top window trim,one piece,cut from smooth face panels
F. Sealant: Paintable, 100 percent acrylic latex caulk complying with ASTM C 920.
G. Sheet Metal Flashing: Minimum 26 gauge hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, or
aluminum. ,wook
H. Nails: Length as required to penetrate minimum 1-1/4 inch ( 32mm) into solid
backing; hotdipped galvanized or stainless steel.
I. Building Paper: Kraft or bituminous paper;not polyethylene or foil.
J. Finish Paint: As specified in Section 09900.
K. Finish Paint: 100 percent acrylic latex.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to commencing installation, verify governing dimensions of building and
condition of substrate.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Examine, clean, and repair as necessary any substrate conditions that would be
detrimental to proper installation.
B. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and drawing details.
1. Read warranty and comply with all terms necessary to maintain warranty
coverage.
FIBER CEMENT SIDING 07466-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2.2 PANELS
A. Fiber Cement Board Panels - Cement and cellulose fiber formed under high pressure
into boards with integral surface texture; complying with ASTM C 1186 Type A
Grade H; machined edges;for nail attachment.
1. Surface Burning Characteristics:Flame spread index of 0, smoke developed
index of 6,maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84(Class
UA).
2. Flammability: Noncombustible,when tested in accordance with ASTM E
136.
3. Flexural Strength: At least 1450 psi(10 MPa)when in equilibrium
condition, and at least 1015 psi(7 MPa)when in wet condition,tested in
accordance with ASTM C 1185.
4. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: Less than 1 x 10^-5/inch/inch/degree F
(0.5 x 10^-5/degree C),when tested.in accordance with ASTM E 228.
5. Water Vapor Transmission: Less than 7.0 perm-inch(10 ng/(Pa s m), when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 96.
6. Freeze Thaw Resistance: At least 80 percent flexural strength retained,when
tested in accordance with ASTM C 1185.
7. UV Resistance: No cracking,checking, or erosion,when tested for 2000
hours in accordance with ASTM G 26.
8. Water Tightness: No water droplets on underside, when tested in accordance
with ASTM C 1185.
B. Horizontal Siding: CertainTeed WeatherBoards,FiberCement Siding.
1. Thickness: 5/16 inch(8 mm),nominal.
2. Length: 12 feet(3657 mm),nominal.
3. Style: Smooth lap siding.
4. Width: 6-1/4 inches(159 mm)wide.
5. Finish: Factory sealed with FiberTect.
C. Simulated Shingle Siding: CertainTeed WeatherBoards Shapes FiberCement Siding.
1. Thickness: 5/16 inch(8 mm),nominal.
2. Style: Half-rounds full cut between shingles,7 inches (178 nun)exposure,
16 inches(406 mm)wide by 48 inches(1219 mm)long,nominal.
3. Finish: Factory sealed with FiberTect.
D. Vertical Siding: CertainTeed WeatherBoards,FiberCement Siding.
1. Thickness: 5/16 inch(8 mm),nominal.
2. Size: 48 by 96 inches (1220 by 2440 mm),nominal.
3. Size: 48 by 120 inches(1220 by 3048 mm),nominal,where required to
avoid visible seams
3. Style: Smooth panel.
FIBER CEMENT SIDING 07466-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA ,
H. ASTM E 228 - Standard Test Method for Linear Thermal Expansion of Solid
Materials With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer; 1995.
I. ASTM G 26 - Standard Practice for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus (Xenon-
Arc Type)With and Without Water for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials; 1996.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide minimum 24" by 36" sample pieces to the site including bead-board
paneling, smooth face paneling and scalloped siding.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used,including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods,including nailing patterns.
4. Applicable model code authority evaluation report(ICBO,BOCA,CCMC,
etc.)
C. Siding manufacturer's requirements for vapor retarders, primer, paint, etc., to be
installed by others.
D. Maintenance and periodic inspection recommendations.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: Provide installer with not less than three years of experience with products
similar to those specified.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store products off the ground, on a flat surface, and under a roof or separate
waterproof covering.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Register manufacturer's warranty,made out in Owner's name, with copy to Owner.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. CertainTeed Corporation, Siding Products Group, P.O. Box 860, Valley Forge,
Pennsylvania 19482. ASD. Tel: (800) 233-8990 (professional) or (800) 782-8777
(consumer). www.certainteed.com.
B. Products manufactured by CertainTeed are specified to establish a minimum
standard of design and performance. Other manufacturers with products meeting the
established standards are acceptable.
FIBER CEMENT SIDING 07466-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 07466-FIBER CEMENT SIDING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and conditions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
General Conditions and all Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of
this section.
B. Refer to Section 01600 — PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS for general requirements
covering material storage,installation,and substitutions.
1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK:
A. Provide all required labor and materials for a complete installation of the fiber
cement exterior siding system including moisture barrier and all
accessory components to complete a warranteed installation per the manufacturers
recommendations.
1.3 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Siding panels to include smooth surface,bead-board and scallop style.
B. Ventilated soffit panels and fascia boards.
C. Accessories and trim.
1.4 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Framing and Sheathing.
B. Section 07900-Joint Sealers.
C. Section 09900-Paints and Coatings:Field painting.
1.5 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 920-Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 1998.
B. ASTM C 1185 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Non-Asbestos
Fiber-Cement Flat Sheet,Roofing and Siding Shingles,and Clapboards; 1999.
C. ASTM C 1186 - Standard Specification for Flat Non-Asbestos Fiber Cement Sheets;
1999.
D. ASTM E 72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for
Building Construction; 1998.
E. ASTM E 84 -- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials; 1999.
F. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials;
1995.
G. ASTM E 136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube
Furnace at 750 Degrees C; 1999.
FIBER CEMENT SIDING 07466- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. All work must be performed in a neat and orderly manner.
B. Roofer shall do only enough work(deck preparation) that can be roofed in the same
working day. New work shall be sealed each day to be weathertight.
END OF SECTION 07311
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. Ridge Vent: Must allow for direct shingle application. Provide concealed ridge,
peak, and hip vents as called for on drawings.
B. Nails: Standard round wire shingle type not dipped zinc coated steel.
C. Vent Rubber boot.
D. Flashing.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. The Roofing Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper performance and
completion of the work described herein. It shall be his responsibility to inspect all
surfaces and correct any conditions which may affect his work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Ice Dam/Valley Protection: Install at all eaves and valleys per manufacturers
instructions.
B. Underlayment: Place one ply over all areas not protected by eave ice dam, lapping
edges minimum 12". Stagger laps of consecutive sheets. Nail in place.
C. Asphalt Shingles: Install per manufacturer's instructions:
1. Hips and Ridges: Cap with individual shingles. No exposed nails are to be
allowed.
D. Metal Drip Edge: Install along eave and rake edge prior to shingle installation.
E. Ridge Vent: Cut ridge according to manufacturer's requirements.
F. Snow Guards: Install at 24" o.c. staggered along rows at 36" apart perpendicular to
the roof edge or,per manufacturer's recommendations.
3.03 CLEANING
A. At the completion of the work included in this Section, the Roofing and Flashing
Contractor shall clean, remove and cart away from the premises all rubbish and
accumulated materials and leave the work in a satisfactory condition.
3.04 GENERAL NOTE
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
OW
1. The Roofing Contractor shall supply the Owner with a minimum two-year
workmanship warranty. In the event any work related to roofing, flashings,
or metal work is found to be defective or otherwise not in accordance with
the contract documents within two years of substantial completion, the
Roofing Contractor shall remove and replace at no cost to the Owner. The
Contractor's warranty obligation shall run directly to the Owner and a copy
shall be sent to the Shingle Manufacturer. This warranty shall not limit the
Contractor's obligation with respect to State or Government laws or statutes.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All materials of this roofing system shall be furnished, specified and approved by the
Shingle manufacturer. Samples and technical data sheets of all materials used on the
project that are not supplied by the Shingle Manufacturer shall be furnished to the
Shingle Manufacturer for written approval prior to the start of work.
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products which may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited
to the following:
1. Bird"Architect 90"(specified as standard of quality) asphalt shingles.
3. GAF"Timberline"asphalt shingles.
4. Alpine #10R pad style snow guard by Vermont Slate (specified as standard of
quality).
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Shingles: Architectural style self sealing. 245#/square. Color by Architect.
B. Eave (Ice Dam) Protection: Sheet barrier of rubberized asphalt bonded to sheet
polyethylene with strippable treated release paper 36"wide min.
C. Underlayment: No. 15 min.unperforated asphalt saturated felt. To be installed at all
eaves and valleys.
D. Snow Guards. Copper retrofit strap with half round stop.
2.04 ACCESSORIES:
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311- 5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA ,
A. Adhesives, primer and caulks as indicated are extremely flammable and/or toxic.
Use precautions indicated on can and carton labels.
B. Surfaces to be bonded shall be dry and clean. Suitable surfaces are usually
considered to be smooth, solid masonry, wood, and metal plus well fastened wood
fiber protection board.
C. Only as much of the new roofing as can be made weathertight each day, including all
flashing work, shall be installed.
D. All work shall be scheduled and executed without exposing the interior building
areas to the effects of inclement weather. The building and its contents shall be
protected against all risks.
E. Shingles and flashings shall be thoroughly dry. Should surface moisture occur, the
Roofing Contractor shall provide the necessary equipment to dry the surface prior to
application.
F. All new and temporary construction, including equipment and accessories, shall be
secured in such a manner,at all times, as to preclude wind blow-off or damage.
G. Temporary waterstops shall be installed at the end of each day's work, and shall be
removed before proceeding with the next day's work. Waterstops shall be
compatible with all materials and shall not emit dangerous or incompatible fumes.
H. Contaminants, such as grease, fats, oils and solvents, shall not be allowed to come
into contact with the roofing shingle. Any such contact shall be reported to the
Shingle Manufacturer.
I. If any unusual or concealed condition is discovered, stop work and notify the
Architect and Shingle Manufacturer.
J. Site clean-up, including both interior and exterior building areas which have been
affected by construction, shall be completed to the University's satisfaction.
K. All landscaped area affected by construction activities shall be raked clean and
seeded, if required.
1.09 WARRANTIES
A. Shingle Manufacturer's thirty (30)year material warranty.
1. Upon successful completion of the work and receipt of final payment, the
Shingle Manufacturer's thirty (30) year material warranty shall be issued to
the Owner.
B. Roofing Contractor's two(2)year labor and workmanship warranty.
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
6. Certifications by producers of roofing materials that all materials supplied
comply with all requirements of the identified ASTM and industry standards.
7. Certification that system specified meets all identified code and insurance
requirements.
8. All components and materials not supplied by the Shingle Manufacturer,
shall be submitted to the Shingle Manufacturer for written approval prior to
the start of the installation. All shop Drawings are to be reviewed and
approved by the Shingle Manufacturer prior to the start of the installation.
9. Submit the manufacturer's latest specifications and installation instruction
including regulatory compliance data. ONLY MANUFACTURER'S SHOP
DRAWING WILL BE ACCEPTABLE. Drawings by third party design
houses will be rejected.
10. Shop Drawings: Submit roof plan showing layout dimensions and details.
Approved shop drawings shall be returned to insulation manufacturer prior
to insulation delivery.
11. THE ROOFING CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL THE
ROOF DIMENSIONS AND PENETRATION LOCATIONS.
1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. All materials provided by the Shingle Manufacturer shall be delivered with
appropriate packaging labels indicating appropriate warnings, storage conditions, lot
numbers and usage instructions.
B. Materials shall be stored in its original packaging and conditions shall be maintained
in accordance with the Shingle Manufacturer's recommendations.
C. The Shingle shall be kept in sealed factory bags. If the shingle is to be covered by a
tarp, the tarp should be erected above the shingle rolls to permit air movement. In
addition,the color of the tarp is to be clear or white to prevent any heat attraction.
D. All flammable materials shall be stored in a cool, dry area away from sparks and
open flames. Follow precautions outlined on container or supplied by
manufacturer/supplier.
E. Any materials which are determined damaged by the Architect or manufacturer's
representative are to be removed from the job site and replaced at no cost to the
Owner.
1.08 JOB CONDITIONS
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1.02 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all
Sections and Parts as listed in the Table of Contents, which are hereby made a part of
this Section of the Specifications.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Installation of roof paper, shingles, aluminum drip edge, ridge vent, and ice and
water shield.
B. Removal of existing slate shingles in area of new dormer and reinstallation along
new valley flashing.
C. Installation of retrofit snow guards as indicated.
1.04 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. SECTION 06100—ROUGH CARPENTRY
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. There shall be no deviation made from the Contract Specifications, Drawings and Aw%,
approved Shop Drawings without prior written approval by the Owner, the Architect
and the Shingle Manufacturer.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Within 15 days after award of the Contract and before any of the materials of the
work are delivered to the job site, the Roofing Contractor shall submit to the
Architect the following:
1. Four(4)copies of the Single Manufacturer's Specifications.
2. Two (2) samples of each manufacturer's material to be used in the roofing
system, including shingles, fasteners, flashing, etc., including each
component manufacturer's literature.
3. Specimen copy of the Shingle Manufacturer's warranty.
4. Specimen copy of the Roofing Contractor's two year labor warranty.
5. Dimensioned Shop Drawings which include:
a. Outline of roof and roof size.
b. Profile details of flashing methods for penetrations and terminations.
C. Technical acceptance from the Shingle Manufacturer. ''
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 07311 -ASPHALT SHINGLES
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and conditions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
General Conditions and all Division 1 Sections, apply to the work of this section.
B. Time,manner, and requirements for submitting filed sub-bids:
1. Sub-bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and
shall be filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at a time and
place as stipulated in the "NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS".
The following shall appear on the upper left hand comer of the envelope.
NAME OF SUB-BIDDER:
NAME OF PROJECT:
SUB-BID FOR SECTION: 07311 -Asphalt Shingles
2. Each sub-bid submitted for work under this Section shall be on forms
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44F of Chapter
149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-bid forms may be obtained at the
office of the Architect-Engineer or may be obtained by written request.
3. Sub-bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a BID
BOND or CASH or CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURER'S or
CASHIER'S CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company payable
to the City of Northampton in the amount of 5 percent of the bid. A sub-bid
accompanied by any other form of bid deposit than those specified will be
rejected.
C. Sub-Sub-Bid Requirements: (NONE REQUIRED UNDER THIS SECTION).
D. Work included under this File Sub Bid is indicated in:
1. Section 07533 - Single Ply Membrane Roofing
2. Section 07620—Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
sealants with sides of joint. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use
tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant
manufacturer.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Inspecting agency employed and paid by Owner will examine completed firestopping to
determine, in general,if it is being installed in compliance with requirements.
B. Inspecting agency will report observations promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
C. Do not proceed to enclose firestopping with other construction until reports of examinations are
issued.
D. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace firestopping so that it complies with
requirements.
3.6 CLEANING:
A. Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work progresses
by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping products
and of products in which opening and joints occur.
B. Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,despite such protection,damage
or deterioration occurs,cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping immediately
and install new materials to produce firestopping complying with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 07270
FIRESTOPPING 07270-9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA ,,
manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond;do not
allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces
that will remain exposed upon completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently
stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from
firestopping materials. Remove tape as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing
firestopping's seal with substrates.
3.3 FIRESTOPS AT THROUGH-PENETRATIONS AND VOIDS AT TOPS OF WALLS:
A. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1 and the
through-penetration firestop manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to
products and applications indicated.
B. Install forming/damming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill
materials during their application and in the position needed to produce the cross-sectional
shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings of designated through-penetration firestop
systems. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other
accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.
C. Install fill materials for through-penetration firestop systems by proven techniques to produce
the following results:
1. Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings,forming materials,accessories,
and penetrating items.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce
smooth,uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.4 INSTALLING FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SEALANTS:
A. General: Comply with the"System Performance Requirements"article in Part 1,with ASTM C
1193,and with the sealant manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to
products and applications indicated.
B. Install joint fillers to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to
produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability and develop fire-resistance rating required.
C. Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting
joint substrates,completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration,and providing
uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint width that optimum sealant
movement capability. Install sealants at the same time joint fillers are installed.
D. Tool nonsag sealants immediately after sealant application and prior to the time skinning or
curing begins. Form smooth,uniform beads of configuration indicated or required to produce
fire-resistance rating,as well as to eliminate air pockets,and to ensure contact and adhesion of
FIRESTOPPING 07270-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following
requirements:
1. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and
openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies
per ASTM E 90.
2. Product has flame-spread and smoke developed ratings of less than 25 per ASTM E 84.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
1. Acoustical Sealant:
a. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant,Pecora Corp.
b. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant,United States Gypsum Co.
C. FS-One,Hilti,Inc.
C. Locations: Voids at top of non-rated walls and partitions and penetrations through non-rated
walls and partitions.
2.5 MIXING:
A. For those products requiring mixing prior to application, comply with firestopping
manufacturer's directions for accurate proportioning of materials,water(if required),type of
mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other
procedures needed to produce firestopping products of uniform quality with optimum
performance characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION:
A. Examine substrates and conditions,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for
opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance of firestopping. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION:
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings and joints immediately prior to installing firestopping to
comply with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates and from
penetrating items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping.
2. Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound
surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles
remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer using that
FIRESTOPPING 07270-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
e. Joint fillers for joint sealants.
2. Temporary forming materials.
3. Substrate primers.
4. Collars.
5. Steel sleeves.
C. Applications: Provide firestopping systems composed of materials specified in this Section that
comply with system performance and other requirements.
2.2 FILL MATERIALS FOR THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS:
A. Intumescent,Latex Sealant: Single-component, intumescent, latex formulation.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
1. Intumescent Latex Sealant:
a. Metacaulk 950,The RectorSeal Corporation.
b. Fire Barrier CP 25WB Caulk,3M Fire Protection Products.
C. FS-One,Hilti,Inc.
2.3 FIRE-RESISTIVE ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS:
A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing,elastomeric
sealants of base polymer indicated that complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including
those referenced for Type,Grade,Class,and Uses,and requirements specified in this Section
applicable to fire-resistive joint sealants.
B. Sealant Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following:
1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors
for products of type indicated.
C. Single-Component,Nonsag,Urethane Sealant: Type S;Grade NS;Class 25;and Uses NT,M,
A, and(as applicable to joint substrates indicated)O.
D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
1. Single-Component,Nonsag,Urethane Sealant:
a. Isoflex 880 GB,Harry S. Peterson Co., Inc.
b. Isoflex 881,Harry S.Peterson Co., Inc.
C. Vulkem 921,Mameco International Inc.
d. S ikaflex-15 LM, Sika Corp.
2.4 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT: ,,,qk�
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag,
FIRESTOPPING 07270-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. Deliver firestopping products to Project site in original,unopened containers or packages with
intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of
manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's
classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for
multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle firestopping materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to
moisture,temperature changes, contaminants,or other causes.
1.7 PROTECT CONDITIONS:
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures
are outside limits permitted by firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to
rain, frost,condensation,or other causes.
B. Ventilation: Ventilate firestopping per firestopping manufacturers' instructions by natural
means or,where this is inadequate, forced air circulation.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:
A. Notify Owner's inspection agency at least 1 week in advance of firestopping installations;
confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations.
B. Do not cover up those firestopping installations that will become concealed behind other
construction until Owner's inspection agency and authorities having jurisdiction, if required,
have examined each installation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRESTOPPING,GENERAL:
A. Compatibility: Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each
other,the substrates forming openings,and the items,if any,penetrating the firestopping under
conditions of service and application,as demonstrated by firestopping manufacturer based on
testing and field experience.
B. Accessories: Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill
materials and to comply with"System Performance Requirements article in Part 1. Use only
components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing
and inspecting agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems. Accessories include but
are not limited to the following items:
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials including the following:
a. Semirefractory fiber(mineral wool) insulation.
b. Ceramic fiber.
C. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming materials to prevent
leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
d. Fire-rated formboard.
FIRESTOPPING 07270-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA ,
qualified testing and inspection agency.
B. Information on drawings referring to specific design designations of through-penetration
firestop systems is intended to establish requirements for performance based on conditions that
are expected to exist during installation. Any changes in conditions and designated systems
require the Architect's prior approval. Submit documentation showing that the performance of
proposed substitutions equals or exceeds that of the systems they would replace and are
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified, licensed, or
otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having the necessary experience,staff,
and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. A manufacturer's
willingness to sell its firestopping products to the Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the
Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer.
D. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems for each kind of
penetration and construction condition indicated from a single manufacturer.
E. Field-Constructed Mockup: Prior to installing firestopping,erect mockups for each different
through-penetration firestop system indicated to verify selections made and to demonstrate
qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following
requirements,using materials indicated for final installations.
1. Locate mockups on site in locations indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
2. Notify Architect 1 week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be
erected.
3. Obtain Architect's acceptance of mockups before start of final unit of Work.
4. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging completed unit of Work.
a. Accepted mockups in an undisturbed condition at time of Substantial Completion
may become part of completed unit of Work.
F. Provide firestopping products containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the method
specified in 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, "Polarized Light
Microscopy."
G. Coordinating Work: Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that
designated through-penetration firestop systems are installed per specified requirements.
H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of
Division 1 Section"Project Meetings."
I. Owner will employ and pay a qualified inspection agency to check installed firestopping
systems for compliance with requirements.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING:
FIRESTOPPING 07270-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
construction and penetrating items.
2. Where Project conditions require modification of qualified testing and inspecting
agency's illustration to suit a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit
illustration approved by firestopping manufacturer's fire protection engineer with
modifications marked.
D. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of firestopping products certifying that their
products comply with specified requirements.
E. Product test reports from, and based on tests performed by,a qualified testing and inspecting
agency evidencing compliance of firestopping with requirements based on comprehensive
testing of current products.
F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in"Quality Assurance"article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names,
addresses,names of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide firestopping that complies with the following
requirements and those specified under the"System Performance Requirements" article:
1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A
qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, Warnock Hersey, or another agency
performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems that is
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814
under conditions where positive furnace pressure differential of at least 0.01 inch of
water is maintained at a distance of 0.78 inch below the fill materials surrounding the
penetrating items in the test assembly. Provide rated systems complying with the
following requirements:
a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of
qualified testing and inspecting agency.
b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference
to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by UL in their "Fire
Resistance Directory," by Warnock Hersey, or by another qualified testing and
inspecting agency.
3. Fire-resistive joint sealant systems are identical to those tested for fire-response
characteristics per ASTM E 119 under conditions where the positive furnace pressure
differential is at least 0.01 inch of water,as measured 0.78 inch from the face exposed to
furnace fire. Provide systems complying with the following requirements:
a. Fire-Resistance Ratings of Joint Sealants: As indicated by reference to design
designations listed by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory" or by another
qualified testing and inspecting agency.
b. Joint sealants, including backing materials, bear classification marking of
FIRESTOPPING 07270-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
with F ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or
exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the constructions penetrated.
C. T-Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems
with T ratings, in addition to F ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814,where indicated and
where systems protect penetrating items exposed to contact with adjacent materials in
occupiable floor areas. T-rated assemblies are required where the following conditions exist:
1. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside of wall cavities.
2. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft
enclosures.
3. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located in construction containing doors
required to have a temperature-rise rating.
4. Where firestop systems protect penetrating items larger than a 4 inch diameter nominal
pipe or 16 sq. in. in overall cross-sectional area.
D. Fire-Resistive Joint Sealants: Provide joint sealants with fire-resistance ratings indicated, as
determined per ASTM E 119,but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance
rating of the construction in which the joint occurs.
E. For firestopping exposed to view,traffic,moisture,and physical damage,provide products that
do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions.
1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems,provide moisture-
resistant through-penetration firestop systems.
2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches or more in width and
exposed to possible loading and traffic,provide firestop systems capable of supporting
the floor loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means.
3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop
systems not requiring removal of insulation.
F. For firestopping exposed to view,provide products with flame-spread values of less than 25
and smoke-developed values of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
C. Shop drawings detailing materials, installation methods, and relationships to adjoining
construction for each through-penetration firestop system, and each kind of construction
condition penetrated and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of
qualified testing and inspecting agency evidencing compliance with requirements for each
condition indicated.
1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting
agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop configuration for
FIRESTOPPING 07270-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 07270-FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes firestopping for the following:
1. Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated walls and partitions including both empty
openings and openings containing cables,pipes,ducts,conduits,and other penetrating
items.
2. Penetrations through smoke barriers and construction enclosing compartmentalized areas
involving both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items.
3. Sealant joints in fire-resistance-rated construction.
4. Penetrations and voids at tops of fire-resistance rated walls and partitions of the
following construction types:
a. Masonry walls and partitions.
b. Gypsum board assembly walls and partitions.
5. Penetrations and voids at tops of non-fire-resistance rated walls and partitions of the
following construction types:
a. Masonry walls and partitions.
b. Gypsum board assembly walls and partitions.
6. Penetrations into attic or truss spaces.
7. Penetrations at floor openings around mechanical risers.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 4 Section"Unit Masonry"for joint fillers for non-fire-resistive-rated masonry
construction.
2. Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants" for non-fire-resistive-rated joint sealants.
3. Division 15 Sections specifying ducts and piping penetrations.
4. Division 16 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
A. General: Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of
fire, according to requirements indicated, and the passage of smoke and other gases.
B. F-Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems
FIRESTOPPING 07270- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
.:..................
exposures,physical abuse,and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where
insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction
immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION 07210-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA ,MIN
C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit
tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere
with placement.
D. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are
otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER INSULATION:
A. On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer.
B. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying
protection board. Set in adhesive according to written instructions of insulation manufacturer.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION:
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's
written instructions. If no specific method is indicated,bond units to substrate with adhesive or
use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B. Seal joints between closed-cell(nonbreathing)insulation units by applying adhesive,mastic,or
sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in
completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation
manufacturer.
C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.
1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder,and seal each continuous area of insulation to
surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
D. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the
following requirements:
1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill cavities formed by framing members. Where
more than one length is required to fill cavity,provide lengths that will produce a snug
fit between ends.
2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
E. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown.
Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of
approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft..
3.6 PROTECTION:
A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather
BUILDING INSULATION 07210-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced
standards.
1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's
standard thicknesses,widths,and lengths.
B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid,cellular polystyrene thermal insulation formed
from polystyrene base resin by an extrusion process using hydrochlorofluorocarbons as
blowing agent to comply with ASTM C 578 for type and with other requirements indicated
below:
1. Type IV, 1.60-lb/cu. ft. minimum density,unless otherwise indicated. -.� .
2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices
of 75 and 450,respectively.
C. Faced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Thermal insulation combining mineral fibers of type
described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665, Type III, Class A
(blankets with reflective vapor-retarder membrane facing and flame spread of 25 or less);with
foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim,or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face.
1. Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass.
2.3 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS:
A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION:
A. Examine substrates and conditions,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements of
Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if oth'&=cvnditions
affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION:
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing
projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or that interfere with insulation attachment.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL:
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
application indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged,dry,unsoiled,and has not been exposed at any time to ice
and snow.
BUILDING INSULATION 07210-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA ,
without delaying the Work.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-
response characteristics indicated on Drawings or specified elsewhere in this Section as
determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials
with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM)E 84.
2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING:
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture,soiling,
and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B. Protect plastic insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and
concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project
site before installation time.
3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each
area of construction.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide insulation products by one
of the following:
1. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation:
a. Amoco Foam Products Company.
b. DiversiFoam Products.
C. Dow Chemical Co.
d. UC Industries, Inc.; Owens-Corning Co.
2. Glass-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.
C. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation.
d. Schuller International, Inc. ,W%k
2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS:
BUILDING INSULATION 07210-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 07210-BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Foundation wall insulation.
2. Concealed building insulation.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 4 Section"Unit Masonry"for insulation installed in cavity walls and masonry
cells.
2. Division 6 Section 'Rough Carpentry" for foam-plastic board sheathing over wood
framing.
4. Division 9 Section indicated below for insulation installed as part of metal-framed wall
and partition assemblies:
a. "Gypsum Board Assemblies."
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of insulation product specified.
C. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by a qualified independent testing
agency evidencing compliance of insulation products with specified requirements including
those for thermal resistance,fire-test-response characteristics,water-vapor transmission,water
absorption,and other properties,based on comprehensive testing of current products.
D. Research or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction that evidence compliance of foam-plastic insulations with building code in effect
for Project.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Single-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation
from a single source with resources to provide products complying with requirements indicated
BUILDING INSULATION 07210- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to
grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as
required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing,countersunk and
filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated.
F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as
indicated.
5 Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag,bow,or other variation from
a straight line.
6 Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.
G. Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. Caulk space
between backsplash and wall with specified silicone sealant.
1 Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation
from a straight line.
2 Secure backsplashes to walls with silicone sealant.
3 Cut openings and install aluminum bar grilles in countertops where indicated on
drawings.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate functional and visual
defects;where not possible to repair,replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean,lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.4 PROTECTION:
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to fabricator and
Installer that ensures that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION 06402
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-11
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer compatible with finish coats to
concealed surfaces of woodwork, including backs of trim, cabinets, paneling, and
ornamental work and the underside of countertops. Apply 2 coats to back of paneling.
Concealed surfaces of plastic laminate-clad woodwork do not require backpriming when
surfaced with plastic laminate or thermoset decorative overlay.
D. Washcoat for Stained Finish: Apply a vinyl washcoat to woodwork made from closed-grain
wood before staining and finishing.
E. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods.
F. Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: After staining(if any), apply paste wood filler to open-
grain woods and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood.
1. Apply vinyl washcoat sealer after staining and before filling.
G. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system,
staining, and sheen,with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.
1. Grade: Premium.
2. AWI Finish System TR-6: Catalyzed polyurethane.
3. Staining: Match Architect's sample.
4. Sheen: Satin 30-50 gloss units.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION:
A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
installing.
B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade
specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.
B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with
concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for plumb and level(including
tops).
C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish
at cuts.
D. Route sides of cabinet walls to receive shelf standards. Install shelf standards so they are flush
with the sides of the cabinet walls.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402- 10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
E. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and
drawers except where located directly under tops.
2.7 PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS:
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for countertops.
1. Grade: Custom.
B. Type of Top: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following:
1. Grade: GP-50,0.050-inch nominal thickness.
2. Colors,Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and
textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
a. All colors, patterns or textures shall be selected from laminate manufacturer's
standard products by the architect at the time of submittals.
3. Edge Treatment: As indicated.
4. Core Material: Medium-density particleboard.
5. Scratch(mar)resistant grade.
2.8 TRIM:
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300.
B. Interior Trim for Transparent Finish: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Grade: Custom.
2. Lumber Species: Red Oak,plain sawn,unless otherwise indicated.
2.9 SHOP FINISHING OF INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK:
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500,unless otherwise indicated.
1. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.
B. General: The entire finish of interior architectural woodwork is specified in this Section,
regardless of whether shop applied or applied after installation.
1. Shop Finishing: To the greatest extent possible, finish architectural woodwork at the
fabrication shop. Defer only final touch up, cleaning, and polishing until after
installation.
C. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
architectural woodwork,as applicable to each unit of work.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions,profiles,and details indicated. Radius outside corners of
countertops and window sills a minimum of one inch. Ease edges to radius indicated for the
following:
1. Corners of cabinets and edges of solid-wood(lumber)members and rails: 1/16 inch.
D. Complete fabrication,including assembly,finishing,and hardware application,before shipment
to Project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing,trimming, and fitting.
1. Trial fit assemblies at the fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.
Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be
removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check
measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on approved shop
drawings before disassembling for shipment.
E. Shop-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing
fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or
roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of
cutouts and, where located in countertops and similar exposures, seal edges with a water-
resistant coating.
2.6 WOOD CABINETS (CASEWORK)FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH: Amok
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for wood cabinets.
1. Grade: Premium.
B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.
C. Wood Species for Exposed Surfaces: Red oak,rift sawn/cut.
1. Grain Matching: Run and match grain horizontally for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed
panels.
2. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match.
3. Vertical Matching of Veneer Leaves: End match.
4. Veneer Matching Within Panel Face: Balance match.
5. Veneer Matching Within Room: Provide cabinet veneers in each room or other space
from a single flitch with doors,drawer fronts,and other surfaces matched in a sequenced
set with continuous match where veneers are interrupted perpendicular to the grain.
D. Semi-exposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:
1. Surfaces Other than Drawer Bodies: Match species and cut indicated for exposed
surfaces.
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid hardwood lumber, stained to match species indicated for AOWN
exposed surfaces, shop finished.
3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood, shop finished.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2. File Drawer Slides: 2001bf.
I. Grommets,for cable passage through countertops: 1 inch OD, aluminum grommets with 3/4-
inch hole and aluminum cap with slot for wire passage. Color will be selected by Architect from
manufacturer's standard range.
J. Fiberglass Board Insulation:
1. Type vinyl-reinforced-foil faced glass fiber insulation complying with ASTM C 612,type
lA and 1B.
2. Surface burning characteristics:
a. Maximum flame spread: 25.
b. Maximum smoke developed: 50.
C. Tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
3. Apply directly to rear of casework with adhesive complying with surface burning
characteristics specified above. Cut back insulation as required and wrap vinyl facing
over edge, so that there are no exposed untreated edges in the final installation.
4. Product: "Commercial Use Board" manufactured by Owens-Coming Fiberglass
Corporation, or accepted equivalent subject to compliance with requirements.
2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS:
A. Furring,Blocking,Shims,and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber,kiln dried to less
than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with
ASME B 18.6.1 for applicable requirements.
C. Nails: Select material,type, size,and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105
for applicable requirements.
D. Anchors: Select material,type,size,and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior
walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion
bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL:
A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality
standard and of the following grade:
1. Grade: Custom.
B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood
moisture content in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication
and in installation areas.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
G. Bead Board Paneling
1. Red oak veneer plywood, 1/4"grooved paneling.
2. Acceptable products shall be Georgia Pacific "Bedford Village" style or equal by
Weyerhauser or Nantucket Bead Board Co.
3. Finish to mach oak trim.
H. Methyl methacrylate based solid surface countertops with integral undermount vanity bowls.
1. Manufacturer: Wilsonart International.
2. Surfacing Material: Wilsonart Gibraltar Solid Surfacing.
3. Sink: Wilsonart BV 122 ADA compliant undermount vanity bowl.
4. Edge profile shall be a small roundover.
5. Final sanding steps shall yield a matte finish that is uniform over the entire surface.
2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS:
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural
casework.
B. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by reference to BHMA
numbers or referenced to this standard. ,ow%*
C. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA code number indicated.
D. For concealed hardware provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class
requirements of BHMA A156.9.
E. Cabinet Hardware:
1. Catches: As follows:
a. Magnetic Catches
b. Push-in Magnetic Catches
C. Friction Catches
d. Ball Friction Catches
F. Adjustable Shelf Standards
1. Shelf Rests for Standards: chrome plated steel
G. Shelf Rests: chrome plated steel. Provide 50 extra stock shelf rests to the Owner.
H. Drawer Slides: Side-mounted, full-extension, zinc-plated steel drawer slides with steel ball
bearings, complying with BHMA A156.9, Grade 1 and rated for the following loads:
1. Box Drawer Slides: 1001bf.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
C. All wood cabinets shall include brass wire pulls on all drawers and doors.
All plastic laminate cabinets shall include stainless steel wire pulls at all
drawers and doors.
D. All drawers shall be equipped with rolling glides on both sides of the
drawer.
E. All base cabinets shall include adjustable interior shelving of the same
material and finish as the cabinet exterior.
F. All cabinets shall be finished and include finished end panels at all exposed
surfaces.
G. Provide finished filler panels as required to complete installation.
2.2 MATERIALS:
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of
interior woodwork,with requirements of the referenced product standards that apply to product
characteristics indicated:
1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2.
3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1,Grade M-2.
4. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1.
B. Formaldehyde Emission Level for Medium-Density Fiberboard: Comply with requirements of
NPA 9.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide Medite II by Medite Corp.
C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 made with phenol-formaldehyde resins.
D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3,grades as indicated,or if not indicated,as
required by woodwork quality standard.
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure
decorative laminates by one of the following:
a. Formica Corporation.
b. Laminart.
C. Nevamar Corp.
d. Pioneer Plastics Corp.
e. Ralph Wilson Plastics Co.
E. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Resorcinol.
F. Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Decorative surface of thermally fused polyester or melamine-
impregnated web,bonded to specified substrate and complying with ALA 1992.
1. Substrate: Medium-density particleboard.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
in other than installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet
requirements specified in "Project Conditions."
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Environmental Limitations:Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed,wet-
work is completed, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check
actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication,and
show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Verify locations of concealed framing,blocking,reinforcements, and furring that support
woodwork by accurate field measurements before being enclosed. Record measurements
on final shop drawings.
2. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee
dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide
allowance for trimming at site and coordinate construction to ensure that actual
dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions.
1.8 COORDINATION: look
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing,blocking,furring,reinforcements,and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 WOODWORK FABRICATORS:
A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, Contractor has the option to provide
interior architectural woodwork manufactured by,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Merillat Industries,Inc. Adrian,MI 49221 Phone 1-800-575-8761
A. To establish a standard of quality, the cabinetry in the Staff Room is based on
Seneca Ridge Oak as manufactured by Merillat Industries, Inc. Equal products
may be used with approval from the architect.
2. Cabinetry hardware shall include the following:
A. Cam locks on all drawers and doors. All locks shall be keyed under one
master key with individual locks keyed differently.
B. All hinges shall be stainless steel, self-closing concealed hinges installed
according to the manufacturer's specifications.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work.
B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for interior architectural woodwork installation by a firm that
can demonstrate successful experience in installing architectural woodwork items similar in type
and quality to those required for this Project.
C. Quality Standard: Except as otherwise indicated,comply with the following standard:
1. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards"of the Architectural
Woodwork Institute for grades of interior architectural woodwork,construction,finishes,
and other requirements.
a. Provide AWI Certification Labels or Certificates of Compliance indicating that
woodwork meets requirements of grades specified.
2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the Quality Standard
as well as additional requirements beyond those of the Quality Standard. Comply with
such selections and requirements in addition to the Quality Standard.
D. Mockup: Prior to fabricating or installing interior architectural woodwork, construct mockup
to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well
" as qualities of materials and execution. Build mockup of the size indicated, using materials
indicated for final unit of work,and complying with the following requirements.
1. Locate mockup on site in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
2. Notify Architect one week in advance of the date and time when fabrication of mockup
will begin.
3. Notify Architect one week in advance of the date and time when mockup will be installed.
4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
5. Obtain Architect's acceptance of mockup before start of final unit of Work.
6. Retain and maintain mockup during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.
a. Accepted mockup in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial
Completion may become part of the completed Work.
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of
Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE,AND HANDLING:
A. Protect woodwork during transit,delivery, storage,and handling to prevent damage, soilage,and
deterioration.
B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage, soil, or
deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap
dispensers, and other items installed in architectural woodwork.
D. Samples for initial selection of the following in the form of manufacturer's color charts
consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and
patterns available for each type of material indicated.
1. Shop-applied transparent finishes.
2. Shop-applied opaque finishes.
3. Plastic laminates.
4. Thermoset decorative overlays.
E. Samples for verification of the following:
1. Lumber with or for transparent finish,50 sq.in.,for each species and cut,finished on one
side and one edge.
2. Wood-veneer-faced panel products,with or for transparent finish,8 by 10 inches,for each
species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish one-half of face as
specified.
a. Step finish materials on sample to show and clearly define each coat.
b. Provide separate samples of unfaced panel product used for core.
3. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, 8 by 10 inches for panels
and 50 sq. in. for lumber, for each finish system and color, with one-half of exposed
surface finished.
4. Laminate-clad panel products,8 by 10 inches,for each type, color,pattern, and surface
finish, with separate samples of unfaced panel product used for core.
5. Thermoset decorative-overlay surfaced panel products, 8 by 10 inches, for each type,
color, pattern, and surface finish, with separate samples of unfaced panel product used
for core.
6. Corner pieces as follows:
a. Cabinet front frame joints between stiles and rail, as well as exposed end pieces,
18 inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep.
b. Miter joints for standing trim.
7. Exposed cabinet hardware, one unit for each type and finish.
F. Product certificates signed by woodwork fabricator certifying that products comply with
specified requirements.
G. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 06402-INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Pre-manufactured Wood Cabinets
2. Plastic-laminate countertops.
3. Shop finishing of woodwork.
4. Interior miscellaneous shelving.
5. Custom wood cabinets.
6. Interior wood window and door trim.
7. Miscellaneous Interior wood trim.
8. Custom built circulation desk.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 6 Section'Rough Carpentry"for exposed framing and for furring,blocking,and
other carpentry work concealed in the wall.
2. Installation of hardware as specified in Section 08710—Finished Hardware.
1.3 DEFINITIONS:
A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, filler panels and
hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction prior
to woodwork installation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product and process specified and incorporated into items of
architectural woodwork during fabrication,finishing, and installation.
C. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details,attachment devices,and other components.
1. Show details full size.
2. Show locations and sizes of furring,blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed
towk blocking and reinforcing specified in other Sections.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA .s
view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install
fasteners without splitting wood;predrill as required.
G. Use hot-dip galvanized or stainless-steel nails where rough carpentry is exposed to weather,in
ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity.
H. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler.
3.2 WOOD GROUNDS,NAILERS,BLOCKING,AND SLEEPERS:
A. Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for
screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes shown and cut as required for true line and
level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.
B. Attach to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces,
unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where
possible,anchor to formwork before concrete placement.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS:
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30, "APA
Design/Construction Guide: Residential&Commercial,"for types of structural-use panels and
applications indicated.
1. Comply with"Code Plus"provisions of above-referenced guide.
B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1. Plywood Backing Panels: Nail or screw to supports.
END OF SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,NIA
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this Article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high
relative humidity,provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of
Type 304 stainless steel.
B. Nails,Wire,Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
D. Epoxy Anchors:Type 304 stainless-steel,3/16-inch dia.,threaded anchors for use in concrete
masonry units.
1. Provide adhesive installed anchors complete with manufacturer's standard epoxy
adhesive and injection tubes,screens,sleeves,or other devices required for installation.
2. Provide matching stainless steel acorn nuts for use with graphics system.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
A. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and-accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-
2-propynyl butyl carbonate(IPBC)as its active ingredient.
OOPW PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION.GENERAL:
A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry and that are too
small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted.
C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction;scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate
location of furring,nailers,blocking,grounds,and similar supports to allow attachment of other
construction.
D. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces ofpreservative-treated lumber
and plywood.
E. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven staples,P-nails, and allied fasteners.
2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer.
3. "Table 2305.2--Fastening Schedule" of the BOCA National Building Code.
F. Use common wire nails,unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select
fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA .. ,
and 15 percent,respectively. Treat indicated items and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing,vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade.
C. Complete fabrication of treated items before treatment,where possible. If cut after treatment,
apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces. Inspect each piece of lumber
or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER:
A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including rooftop
equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds,
stripping, and similar members.
B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes
shown.
C. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood
preservative treatment.
D. Grade: For dimension lumber sizes,provide No. 3 or Standard grade lumber per ALSC's NGRs
of any species. For board-size lumber,provide No. 3 Common grade per NELMA,NLGA,or
WWPA; No. 2 grade per SPIB; or Standard grade per NLGA, WCLIB or WWPA of any
species.
2.5 WOOD-BASED STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS, GENERAL:
A. Structural-Use Panel Standard: Provide plywood panels complying with DOC PS 1, "U.S.
Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood."
B. Species: Douglas fir.
1. Southern yellow pine is not permitted.
C. Trademark: Factory mark structural-use panels with APA trademark evidencing compliance
with grade requirements.
2.6 STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS FOR BACKING:
A. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire-
retardant-treated plywood panels with grade,C-D Plugged Exposure 1,in thickness indicated
or, if not otherwise indicated,not less than 15/32 inch thick. Paint black.
2.7 FASTENERS:
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
Minimum net retention shall be 0.40 lb/cu ft.
D. All treatment shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Standard
Specification of the American Wood Preservers Associateion for treating wood. Apply a heavy
coat of the same preservatiove used in treating to all surfaces cut after treatment.
E. Nails, spikes, bolts, nuts, and washers where sizes are not indicated or specified, shall be of
suitable size and number as approved to securely fasten and hold members in place. Hot dip
galvanize after fabrication.
F. A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20,"American Softwood Lumber Standard,"
and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review.
G. B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies,and the abbreviations used to reference them,
include the following:
1. NELMA-Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association.
2. NLGA-National Lumber Grades Authority(Canadian).
3. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
4. WCLIB -West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
5. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association.
H. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection
agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency,
grade, species,moisture content at time of surfacing,and mill.
1. For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each
piece, or omit grade stamps and provide grade-compliance certificates issued by
inspection agency.
I. Where nominal sizes are indicated,provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture
content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated,they are minimum dressed sizes for dry
lumber.
1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S,unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-
inch nominal thickness or less,unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS:
A. General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative treated or is specified to be
treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9
(plywood). Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection
agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review.
1. Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic.
B. Pressure treat aboveground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25
lb/cu.ft.. After treatment,kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
Proj ect.
1. Power-driven fasteners.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for approval,an independent testing agency must
demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria
conforming to ASTM E 699,that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct
the testing indicated without delaying the Work.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING:
A. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet
surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and
around stacks and under temporary coverings.
1. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers
between each bundle to provide air circulation.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Wood-Preservative-Treated Materials:
a. Baxter: J.H.Baxter Co.
b. Chemical Specialties, Inc.
C. Continental Wood Preservers, Inc.
d. Hickson Corp.
e. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc.
f. Osmose Wood Preserving, Inc.
2.2 LUMBER, GENERAL:
A. Rough framing includes lumber for joists,raftersm studs,plates,furring,backing,curbs,framing
grounds, sleepers, blocking, etc. All lumber for rough carpenty shall be construction-grade
lumber,with extreme fiber stress of not less than 1200 psi for conventional lumber and not less
than 2800 psi for laminated veneer lumber.
B. All lumber shall be of sound stock, delivered dry and shall be fully protected at all times from
injury and dampness. Split, broken, or otherwise damaged pieces will not be allowed in the
work.
C. Wood members that will be in contact with masonry or concrete shall be vacuum-pressure treated
with 100 percent oxide pure chromated copper arsenated meeting AWPA Standard P-5.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 06100-ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wood fin-ring,grounds,nailers,and blocking,including all roof blocking.
2. Sheathing.
3. Rooftop equipment bases,blocking and support curbs.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 6 Section"Interior Architectural Woodwork"for nonstructural carpentry items
exposed to view and not specified in another Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS:
A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless
otherwise specified.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Material certificates for dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the
American Lumber Standards Committee's(ALSC)Board of Review.
C. Wood treatment data as follows,including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for
handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated materials:
1. For each type of preservative-treated wood product, include certification by treating
plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of
preservative retained,and compliance with applicable standards.
2. For waterborne-treated products, include statement that moisture content of treated
materials was reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project site.
D. Warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment.
E. Research or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction that evidence the following products'compliance with building code in effect for
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, N A
same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching
up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film
thickness.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500- 17
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
5. Secure handrails to wall with wall brackets and end fittings. Provide
bracket with not less than 1-1/2 inch clearance from inside face of
handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated, or if not
indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall
brackets and wall return fittings to building construction as follows:
a. Use type of bracket with pre-drilled hole for exposed bolt
anchorage.
b. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in
expansion shield and exposed lag bolt.
C. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts having square
heads.
d. For steel framed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets
directly to steel framing or concealed anchors using self-tapping
screws of size and type required to support structural loads.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF BOLLARDS
A. Anchor bollards in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored into
concrete. After bollards have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space
between bollard and sleeve solid with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and
placed to comply with grout manufacturer's directions.
3.06 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS:
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items
being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements
indicated on Shop Drawings, if any.
B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from
building structure.
C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns.
Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or
with bolts through top plates of pipe columns.
1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated at girders supported
on concrete or masonry, install as specified above for setting and
grouting bearing and leveling plates.
3.07 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted
connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500- 16
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into
contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy
coat of bituminous paint.
3.03 SETTING LOOSE PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of any bond-reducing materials,
and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing
plates.
B. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other adjustable devices.
After the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed,tighten the anchor
bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the
edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout.
1. Use nonmetallic nonshrink grout,unless otherwise indicated.
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no
voids remain.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF STEEL PIPE RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS
A. Adjust railings prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting
joints. Space posts at spacing indicated, or if not indicated, as required by design
loadings. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and railing ends to
building construction as follows:
I. Anchor posts in concrete by core drilling holes not less than 5 inches
deep and 3/4 inch greater than outside diameter of post. Clean holes of
all loose material, insert posts and fill annular space between post and
concrete with the following anchoring material, mixed and placed to
comply with anchoring material manufacturer's directions.
a. Nonshrink,nonmetallic grout.
b. Leave anchorage joint exposed, wipe off surplus anchoring
material,and leave 1/8 inch build-up,sloped away from post.
2. Anchor posts to steel with steel oval flanges, angle type or floor type as
required by conditions, welded to posts and bolted to steel supporting
members.
3. Anchor rail ends into concrete and masonry with steel round flanges
welded to rail ends and anchored into wall construction with lead
expansion shields and bolts.
4. Anchor rail ends to steel with steel oval or round flanges welded to rail
ends and bolted to structural steel members,unless otherwise indicated.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-15
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates,
instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, including concrete
inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors
that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate
delivery of such items to project site.
3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners
where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place
construction; include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle
bolts,through-bolts, lag bolts,wood screws, and other connectors as required.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling,and fitting required for
installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately
in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true,
and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built ,
into concrete masonry or similar construction.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld
connections that are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded
because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of
exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are
intended for bolted or screwed field connections.
E. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded
metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in
correcting welding work,and the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength
and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and
blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of
welded surface matches those adjacent.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500- 14
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. Provide 2-1/2" x 3/16 angles to Section 04200-Unit Masonry to acoustic control
at head of masonry walls in Music Department.
2.17 FINISHES. GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative
to application and designations of finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.18 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc-coating by
the hot-dip process compliance with the following requirements:
1. Hot Dip Galvanizing: Provide coating for iron and steel fabrications
applied by the hot-dip process, Deltagalv by Duncan Galvanizing or
approved equal. The galvanizing bath shall contain high grade zinc.
Immediately before galvanizing, the steel shall be immersed in a bath of
zinc ammonium chloride. The use of the wet kettle process is prohibited.
Comply with ASTM A123 for fabricated products and ASTM A153 for
hardware. Provide thickness of galvanizing in referenced standards. In
addition to other items indicated in the contract documents,the following
ek items shall be galvanized without additional finishing:
A. Exterior lintels
B. Overhead door jamb channels and lintels
C. Bollards
D. Exterior door frames
2. ASTM A 123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and
steel products made of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes,
plates,bars, and strip 0.0299 inch thick and heavier.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to
comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface
preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed
metal fabrications:
1. Exteriors(SSPC Zone 113): SSPC-SP6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Interiors(SSPC Zone IA): SSPC-SP3 'Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with
galvanized finish or to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or
masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA1
"Paint Application Specification No. 1" for shop painting.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500- 13
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2. By radius bends of radius indicated.
3. By bending.
4. By any method indicated above, applicable to change of direction
involved.
D. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Close exposed ends of pipe by welding 3/16 inch thick steel plate in place or by
use of prefabricated fittings, except where clearance of end of pipe and adjoining
wall surface is 1/4 inch or less.
F. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures,
flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnections of pipe and
attachment of railings and handrails to other work. Furnish inserts and other
anchorage devices for connecting railings and handrails to concrete or masonry
work.
G. For interior steel railings formed from steel pipe with black finish, provide
nongalvanized ferrous metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except
galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and concrete construction.
2.14 PIPE BOLLARDS
A. Fabricate pipe bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe, concrete filled.
2.15 LOOSE LINTELS:
A. Fabricate loose structural-steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for
openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
B. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.
C. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to one-twelfth
of clear span,but not less than 8 inches,unless otherwise indicated.
D. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
2.16 MISCELLANEOUS ANGLES
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500- 12
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2.11 FINISHES.GENERAL:
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.12 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES:
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable
standard listed below:
1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products.2.
ASTM A 153/A 153M,for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to
comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-
preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed
metal fabrications:
1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 113): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial
Blast Cleaning."
OOW 2. Interiors(SSPC Zone IA): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with
galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on
fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1,
"Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices,bolts,welds, and sharp edges.
2.13 STEEL PIPE RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS
A. General: Fabricate pipe railings and handrails to comply with requirements
indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including
wall thickness of pipe, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that
required to support structural loads.
B. Interconnect railing and handrail members by butt-welding or welding with
internal connectors, at fabricator's option,unless otherwise indicated.
1. At tee and cross intersections, notch ends of intersecting members to fit
contour of pipe to which end is joined and weld all around.
C. Form changes in direction of railing members as follows:
1. By insertion of prefabricated elbow fittings.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500- 11
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.
2. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry,
equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors 1-1/4 inches wide by 1/4
inch thick by 8 inches long at 24 inches o.c.,unless otherwise indicated.
3. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed.
D. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports at exterior locations.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500- 10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. General: Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions, spacings,
details and anchorages as indicated. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14.3.
B. Siderails: Continuous steel angles, 2-1/2 inch x 2-1/2 inches x 3/8 inch with
eased edges, spaced 18 inches apart.
C. Bar Rungs: Round steel bars, 3/4 inch diameter, spaced 12 inches o.c.
D. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail
faces.
E. Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points spaced not more
than 5'-0" o.c.by means of welded or bolted steel brackets.
1. Size brackets to support design dead and live loads indicated and to hold
centerline of ladder rungs clear of the wall surface by not less than 7
inches.
F. Provide non-slip surface on top of each rung, either by coating the rung with
aluminum oxide granules set in epoxy resin adhesive, or by using a type of
manufactured rung which is filled with aluminum oxide grout.
G. Galvanize ladders, including brackets and fasteners,in the following locations:
1. Exterior.
2. As shown on the drawings.
2.09 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or
concrete construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of required
thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting
as required. Galvanize after fabrication.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports that are not a part of structural-steel
framework as necessary to complete the Work.
B. General: Provide steel framing and supports indicated and as necessary to
complete the Work.
C. Fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded
construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles
indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing
and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar
items.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
overstressing of welds and fasteners. Base design calculations on actual surface
temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 100o F.
D. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
E. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise
indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing
grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
F. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
G. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with AWS recommendations
and the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength
and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and
blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of
welded surface matches those adjacent.
H. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using
concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated
or, if not indicated, Phillips flat- head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate
joints where least conspicuous.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure.
Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended
use.
J. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to
minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for
shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value
of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
K. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive
finish hardware, screws,and similar items.
L. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or
provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
2.08 STEEL LADDERS Awk
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,NIA
G. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588,tumble-wing type, class and style as needed.
2.05 PAINT
A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Organic zinc-rich primer, complying with
SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with topcoat.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a. Carboline 621;Carboline Company.
b. Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670;PPG Industries,Inc.
C. Tneme-Zinc 90-97;Tnemec Company,Inc.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds
in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12,
except containing no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying
with ASTM D 1187.
2.06 CONCRETE FILL AND REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements of Section 03310
Concrete Work for normal weight, ready-mix concrete with minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 3,000 psi, 440 lb. cement per cu. ft. minimum, and W/C
ratio of 0.65 maximum,unless higher strengths indicated.
B. Nonslip Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged material containing fused
aluminum oxide grits or crushed emery as abrasive aggregate; rust-proof and
nonglazing;unaffected by freezing,moisture,or cleaning materials.
C. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615,Grade 60,unless otherwise indicated.
2.07 FABRICATION. GENERAL
A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated
but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated.
Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven
details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or specified
for various components of each metal fabrication.
B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and
straight sharp edges.
C. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change
(range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of
installed metal assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA AW01IN
G. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either
malleable iron, ASTM A 47, or cast steel, ASTM A 27. Provide bolts, washers,
and shims as required,hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153.
H. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select in accordance with AWS
specifications for the metal alloy to be welded.
2.03 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
A. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining,
noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C 621. Provide grout
specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications
of type specified in this section.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may
be incorporated in the Work include but are not limited to the following
Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grouts:
1. "Euco N-S Grout"; Euclid Chemical Co.
2. "Masterflow 713";Master Builders.
3. "Sonogrout"; Sonnebom Building Products Div., Rexnord Chemical
Products, Inc.
2.04 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and
zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5,
where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class
required.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex
nuts,ASTM A 563; and,where indicated, flat washers.
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
D. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel,ASME B 18.22.1.
E. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type,carbon steel,ASME B 18.21.1.
F. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated
below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the
load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load
imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488,
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with
ASTM B 633,Class Fe/Zn 5.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting
drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,
concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be
embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for
installation.
B. Sequence and coordinate installation of wall handrails as follows:
1. Mount handrails only on completed walls. Do not support handrails
temporarily by any means not satisfying structural performance
requirements.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL,GENERAL:
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the
completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.
Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade
names,or roughness.
2.02 FERROUS METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon
completion of the Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness,
smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials whose
exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names,
roughness, and, for steel sheet, variations in flatness exceeding those permitted
by reference standards for stretcher-leveled sheet.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; finish,type, and weight class as follows:
1. Galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
2. Type F, standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated, or
another weight,type, and grade required by structural loads.
D. Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30.
E. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, grade 32510.
F. Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material
and finish as supported rails,unless otherwise indicated.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA ,
sealed by the qualified professional engineer who was responsible for
their preparation.
2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under
other Sections.
3. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and
personnel.
4. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality
Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,
names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firms experienced in successfully producing metal
fabrications similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production
capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the Work.
B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of metal fabrications specified in
this section by same firm that fabricated them.
C. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS DLL
"Structural Welding Code- Steel," D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel",
and D 1.2 "Structural Welding Code-Aluminum."
1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests
for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone
recertification.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to
which metal fabrications must fit, by accurate field measurements before
fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made
without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with
fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate
construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established
dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting.
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
IOWA
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1. Top Rail of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding the following
loads applied as indicated:
a. Concentrated load of 300 lbf applied at any point
nonconcurrently,vertically downward,or horizontally.
b. Uniform load of 100 lbf per linear ft. applied nonconcurrently,
vertically downward or horizontally.
C. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to
act concurrently.
2. Handrails Not Serving as Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the
following loads applied as indicated:
a. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied at any point
nonconcurrently,vertically downward or horizontally.
b. Uniform load of 50 lbf per linear foot applied nonconcurrently,
vertically downward or horizontally.
C. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to
act concurrently.
3. Treads of Steel Stairs: Capable of withstanding a uniform load of 100
lbf per sq. ft. or a concentrated load of 300 lbf on a area of 4 sq. inches
located in the center of the tread,whichever produces the greater stress.
4. Platforms of Steel Stairs: Capable of withstanding a uniform load of 100
lbf per sq. ft.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for products used in miscellaneous metal fabrications, including paint
products and grout.
C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication
indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and
their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for
anchors and bolts specified for installation under other sections.
1. Where installed metal fabrications are indicated to comply with certain
design loadings, include structural computations, material properties, and
other information needed for structural analysis that has been signed and
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA "WIN
7. Clip angles and supports.
8. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports
are not specified in other Sections.
9. Metal pan stairs.
10.
11. Elevator work indicated in Section 14212, including hoist beam.
B. Reference to Drawings: Work to be performed is shown on Drawings listed after
the Table of Contents of this Specification Book.
C. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1. Refer to Division 2 Sections for grates, frames, manhole covers, and
related work for storm and sanitary sewerage systems and for water
distribution systems.
2. Section 05120 - Structural Steel for structural steel framing system
components, including location and materials for loose steel lintels.
Installation of loose steel lintels in masonry construction shall be by
Masonry Subcontractor.
3. Section 06100 — Rough Carpentry for metal framing anchors and other Awk
rough hardware.
D. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include the following:
1. Top of masonry wall ties and clip angles from walls to building structure.
See structural drawings for details.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions in ASTM E 985 for railing-related terms apply to this section.
1.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Design, engineer,
fabricate, and install handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements
of ASTM E 985 for structural performance based on testing performed in
accordance with ASTM E 894 and E 935.
B. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and install the following
metal fabrications to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding
the allowable design working stress of the materials involved, including anchors
and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each
respective component of each metal fabrication.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 05500-METAL FABRICATIONS
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and conditions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
General Conditions'and all Division 1 Sections, apply to the work of this section.
B. Time,manner, and requirements for submitting filed sub-bids:
1. Sub-bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and
shall be filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at a time
and place as stipulated in the"NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS".
The following shall appear on the upper left hand corner of the envelope.
NAME OF SUB-BIDDER:
NAME OF PROJECT:
SUB-BID FOR SECTION: 05500-METAL FABRICATIONS
2. Each sub-bid submitted for work under this Section shall be on forms
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44F of
Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-bid forms may be
obtained at the office of the Architect-Engineer or may be obtained by
written request.
3. Sub-bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a
BID BOND or CASH or CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURER'S or
CASHIER'S CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company
payable to the City of Northampton in the amount of 5 percent of the bid.
A sub-bid accompanied by any other form of bid deposit than those
specified will be rejected.
C. Sub-Sub-Bid Requirements: (NONE REQUIRED UNDER THIS SECTION).
1.02 SUMMARY OF WORK
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Loose steel lintels.
2. Steel ladders and ships ladders.
3. Metal bar railings.
4. Loose bearing and leveling plates.
5. Handrails and guardrails.
6. Pipe Bollards.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500- 1
LILLY LIBREARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
low
A. The surface of the beam flange that will receive the centering and the stud shear
connectors shall be free of mill scale,heavy rust,dirt debris,snow, ice,water,or
any other material that would adversely affect stud welding. Any water in the
valleys of the decking shall be released or blown out.
B. It shall be noted that the studs may be used to attach the metal decking specified
in Section 05310.
C. The metal decking shall be held in intimate contact with itself at laps and with
the supporting steel when the studs are installed.
END OF SECTION
STUD SHEAR CONNECTORS 05410-3
LILLY LIBREARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
implementation of tests as carried out by an independent testing agency. All
codes for inspection testing shall be borne by the Owner.
PART 2—PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. The stud shear connectors shall be made of cold finished carbon steel bars
conforming to ASTM A-108 requirements. The steel has a minimum tensile
strength of 60,000 psi. The studs shall be three-quarter(3/4")diameter, and shall
also conform to the requirements of Articles 429 and 430, "Code for Welding in
Building Construction"ASS D1.0069 of the American Welding Society. If flux-
retaining caps are used,the steel for the caps shall be of a low carbon trade
suitable for welding complying with ASTM A-109 requirements.
PART 3—EXECUTION
3.01 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Before beginning work, inspect all conditions to receive work and notify the
Architect/SER in writing of any condition that might prevent a satisfactory
installation.
B. The starting of work of this Section will be constructed as acceptance of the AM`'
conditions to which this work is to be applied.
C. A minimum of two(2)studs shall be welded at the start of each production
period in order to determine proper generator, control unit, and stud welder
settings. These studs shall then be bent 45 degrees from vertical, without weld
failure,to test installation procedures.
D. If, after welding,visual inspection reveals that a sound weld or full 360 degree
fillet weld has not been obtained for a particular stud,the stud shall be hammered
bent approximately 15 degrees off perpendicular to the nearest end of the beam
or bent away from the opening of the fillet.
E. Three(3)working days notice shall be given to the Owner when materials are to
be inspected.
F. Studs meeting this test will be considered acceptable and shall be left in the bent
position. Studs failing this test shall be replaced.
G. When the temperature is below 32 degrees Fahrenheit, one(1)stud in each 100
shall be tested after cooling. Studs shall not be welded when the temperature is
below 0 degrees Fahrenheit or when the surface is wet.
3.02 ERECTION
STUD SHEAR CONNECTORS 05410-2
LILLY LIBREARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 05410—STUD SHEAR CONNECTORS
PART I—GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and
all Sections within Division I —GENERAL REQUIREMENTS,which are
hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Provide all labor,materials,equipment and services, as required,to furnish and
install all steel stud shear connectors,as shown on the drawings.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be
performed under the designated Sections:
1. Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete"for concrete slab and
reinforcing steel
2. Division 5 Section"Structural steel"for steel framing
3. Divison 5 Section"Steel Deck"
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit complete layout shop drawings drawn no smaller than 1/8"= F-0". All
special conditions shall be indicated. Size and length of studs shall be indicated,
as well as welding information and layout of all studs. Shop drawings will not be
reviewed without all the above information clearly indicated. Shop drawings for
the studs shall be coordinated with the deck drawings required in Section 05310.
B. Manufacturer's catalogue shall be submitted with the shop drawings.
1.04 CODE AND STANDARDS
A. Except as modified by the requirements of the other governing codes and by this
specification, conform to the provisions and recommendations of the following
codes and standards:
1. Manual of Steel Construction by the American Institute of Steel
Construction,latest edition.
2. Requirements of the American Welding Society for Arc and Gas
Welding in Building Construction.
1.05 TESTING,INSPECTION,AND QUALITY CONTROL
A. A program of inspection and testing of stud shear connector work will be
established by the Structural Engineer of Record(SER),who will direct the
STUD SHEAR CONNECTORS 05410-1
LILLY LIBREARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality
control testing.
B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.
C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.
3.05 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of
deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Repair Painting: Wire brushing, cleaning and repair painting of rust spots, welds, and
abraded areas of both deck surfaces are included in Division 9 Section.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05310
Awk
STEEL DECK 05310-6
LILLY LIBREARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
abutting panels.
E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.
F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting
through or adjacent to decking.
G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,
continuity of decking,and support of other work.
H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds,and methods used for correcting welding work.
3.03 ROOF AND FLOOR DECK INSTALLATION
A. Fasten floor deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the
surface diameter indicated and as follows:
1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch(16mm)nominal.
2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space welds an average of
12 inches(305)apart,but not more than 18 inches(457 mm)apart.
3. Weld Spacing: Space and locate welds as indicted.
4. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location.
B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels
between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of'/z of the span or 36 inches (910
mm),and as follows:
1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling No. 10 (4.8-mm-) diameter or larger carbon-
steel screws.
2. Mechanically clinch or button punch.
3. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch-(38-mm-)long welds.
C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2
inches(38 mm)with end joints as follows:
1. End Joints: Lapped,Butted.
D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure
according to SDI recommendations,unless otherwise indicated.
E. Floor Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck,
according to SDI recommendations,to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides
of decking. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of floor deck panels, unless otherwise
indicated.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
STEEL DECK 05310-5
LILLY LIBREARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA Aft�
material and finish as deck;of profile indicated or required for application.
F. Steel Sheet Accessories: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck, unless
otherwise indicated.
G. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet,minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi(230 MPa),
of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI
Publication No.29 for overhang and slab depth.
H. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same
material,finish,and thickness as deck,unless otherwise indicated.
I. Piercing Hanger Tabs: Piercing steel sheet hanger attachment devices for use with floor
deck.
J. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick,
with factory-punched hole of 3/8-inch(9.5-mm)minimum diameter.
K. Recessed Sump Pans: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, of same
material and finish as deck,with 3-inch-(76-mm-)wide flanges and sloped recessed pans of
1-1/2-inch(38-mm)minimum depth. For drains,cut holes in the field.
L. Flat Sump Plate: Single-piece steel sheet,0.0747 inch(1.90 mm)thick,of same material and
finish as deck. For drains,cut holes in the field.
PART3-EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
3.02 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in
SDI Publication No.29,manufacturer's written instructions,and requirements in this Section.
B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection
limitations.
C. Locate decking bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.
D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately
aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch
or contract side-lap interlocks.
1. Align cellular deck panels for entire length of cell runs and align cells at ends of
STEEL DECK
05310-4
LILLY LIBREARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Steel Deck:
a. Epic Metals Corp.
b. Nucor Corp.;Vulcra$Div.
C. United Steel Deck,Inc.
2.02 ROOF DECK
A. All roof deck areas, except as otherwise shown and specified, shall be covered with 22
gauge hot-dipped galvanized 1 %2 in. deep metal roof deck, Type B, as manufactured by
United Steel Deck, or approved equal by Vulcraft.
2.03 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK
A. Composite Steel Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern
ribs and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for
Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No.29, the minimum section properties
indicated,and the following:
1. Galvanized and Shop-Primed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 6531A 653M, Structural Steel
(SS), Grade 33 (230), G60 (Z180) zinc coating; with unpainted top and bottom
surface cleaned, pretreated, and primed with manufacturer's baked-on, lead- and
chromate-free rust-inhibitive primer complying with performance requirements of FS
TT-P-664.
2. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches(38 mm).
3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0295 inch(0.75 mm).
4. Span Condition: As indicated.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with
requirements indicated.
B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically
driven carbon-steel fasteners;or self-drilling,self-threading screws.
C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel
screws,No. 10(4.8 mm)minimum diameter.
D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized,closed-cell,synthetic rubber.
E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet,minimum yield strength of 33,000
psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of same
STEEL DECK 05310-3
LILLY LIBREARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
jurisdiction.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed steel deck similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as
documented according to ASTM E 548.
C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS 131.1, "Structural Welding
Code--Steel,"and AWS D1.3,"Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical to
those steel deck units tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspection
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory"or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency.
2. Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing
and inspecting agency.
E. AISI Specifications: Calculate structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's
"Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members".
F. FM Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FM and listed in FM's "Approval Guide,
Building Materials"for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings.
1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage,
and handling.
B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a
waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the '
following:
STEEL DECK 05310-2
LILLY LIBREARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 05310-STEEL DECK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Composite floor deck.
2. Roof deck.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete"for concrete fill and reinforcing steel.
2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with
miscellaneous steel shapes. (See Section 05410 for shear studs)
00W 3. Division 9 Section"Painting"for repair painting of painted deck.
4. Division 9 Section"Special Coatings"for repair of deck special coatings.
5. Division 16 Section "Underfloor Raceway" for preset inserts, activation kits, afterset
inserts,service fittings,header ducts,and trench header ducts used with cellular deck
floor systems.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of deck,accessory,and product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing
channels, pans, deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other
construction.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by steel deck manufacturers certifying that products furnished
comply with requirements.
D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating that each of the following
complies with requirements,based on comprehensive testing of current products:
1. Mechanical fasteners.
F. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of steel deck's compliance with building code in
effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having
STEEL DECK 05310-1
LILLY LIBREARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, NIA
dead loads have been applied.
C. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using carbon-steel bolts,where indicated.
D. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection,before construction loads are
applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or
beams.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency
to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections.
B. Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1.
C. In addition to visual inspection,field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and the
following procedures,as applicable:
5. Radiographic Testing: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142.
6. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709.
7. Ultrasonic Testing: ASTM E 164.
8. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
D. Bolted connections will be visually inspected.
E. Correct deficiencies in work that inspections and test reports have indicated are not
incompliance with specified requirements.
F. Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with
specified requirements.
3.04 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Touchup Painting: After installation,promptly clean,prepare,and prime or re-prime field
connections,rust spots,and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories,
bearing plates and abutting structural steel.
1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning,SSPC-SP 2,or power-tool
cleaning,SSPC-SP 3.
2. Apply a compatible primer of the same type as the shop primer used on adjacent
surfaces.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions,in a manner acceptable to manufacturer
and installer that ensure joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05210
STEEL JOISTS 05210-5
LILLY LIBREARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. Bridging: Detail and fabricate as indicated and according to SJI's"Specifications."
1. Furnish additional erection bridging if required.
B. Fabricate steel bearing plates with integral anchorages of sizes and thicknesses indicated.
Shop prime paint.
C. Supply ceiling extensions,either extended bottom-chord elements or a separate extension
unit of enough strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch(13
mm)of finished wall surface,unless otherwise indicated.
D. Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by joist
manufacturer to complete joist installation.
2.05 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING
A. Clean and remove loose scale,heavy rust,and other foreign materials from fabricated joists
and accessories to be primed by hand-tool cleaning.
B. Apply one shop coat of primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a
continuous,dry paint film not less than 1 mil(0.025 mm)thick.
C. Painting of joists and joist accessories is specified in Division 9 Section"Painting."
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting substrates,embedded bearing plates,and abutting structural framing,
with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.
B. Install joists and accessories plumb,square,and true to line;securely fasten to supporting
construction according to SJI's"Specifications,"joist manufacturer's written
recommendations,and requirements in this Section.
1. Before installation,splice joists delivered to project site in more than one piece.
2. Space,adjust,and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening.
3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging,connections,and anchors to ensure AW
that joists are stabilized during construction.
4. Delay rigidly connecting bottom-chord extensions to columns or supports until
STEEL JOISTS 052104
LILLY LIBREARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
handling.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Steel: Comply with SDI's"Specifications"for chord and web members.
B. High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325(ASTM A 325M),Type 1,heavy hex steel
structural bolts,heavy hex carbon-steel nuts,and hardened carbon-steel washers.
1. Finish: Plain,uncoated.
C. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A780.
2.02 PRIMERS
A. Primer: Fast-curing,lead-and chromate-free,universal modified-alkyd primer with good
resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion,complying with performance requirements in
FS TT-P-664(color to be gray).
2.03 OPEN-WEB K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS
A. Manufacture steel joists according to"Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists,
K-Series,"in SDI's"Specifications,"with steel-angle top-and bottom-chord members,
underslung ends,and parallel top chord;of joist type indicated.
1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists.
B. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding,appearance,quality of
welds,and methods used in correcting welding work.
C. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists.
D. Top-Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SDI's Type S top-chord extensions
where indicated,complying with SDI's"Specification."
E. Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SDI's Type R extended ends where
indicated,complying with SDI's"Specifications."
F. Camber joists according to SJI's"Specifications."
G. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if
joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches(1:48).
2.04 JOIST ACCESSORIES
STEEL JOISTS 05210-3
LILLY LIBREARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA ,
professional engineer responsible for its preparation.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
D. Mill certificates signed by manufacturers of bolts certifying that their products comply with
specified requirements.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance"Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses,names and addresses of architects and owners,and other
information specified.
F. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of steel joists'compliance with building code in
effect for Project,from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
G. Submit the bill of materials for all joists.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing joists similar to those
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
1. Manufacturer trust be certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with SJI
standard specifications and load tables.
2. Assumes responsibility for engineering special joists to comply with performance
requirements. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
3. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally
authorized to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is
experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering
services are defined as those performed for installations of joists that are similar to
those indicated for this Project in material,design,and extent.
B. SJI Specifications: Comply with SJI's "Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight
Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders"(hereafter, "Specifications"),applicable to types of
joists indicated.
C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D 1.1, "Structural Welding
Code--Steel";and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver,store,and handle joists as recommended in SJI's"Specifications."
B. Protect joists from corrosion,deformation,and other damage during delivery,storage,and
STEEL JOISTS 05210-2
LILLY LIBREARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 05210-STEEL JOISTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Open-web K-series steel joists
2. KCS-type K-series steel joists
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing bearing plates in
concrete.
2. Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel bearing plates.
3. Division 9 Section"Painting" for prime painting.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Special Joists: Joists requiring modification by the manufacturer to support nonuniform,
unequal,or special loading conditions that invalidate SDI's"Standard Specifications Load
Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders."
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding
design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding the
design loads according to the MA State Building Code and Contract Documents.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of joist,accessory,and product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout,mark,number,type,location,and spacing of joists. Include
joining and anchorage details,bracing,bridging,accessories;splice and connection
locations and details; and attachments to other construction.
1. Indicate locations and details of anchorage devices and bearing plates to be
embedded in other construction.
2. Comprehensive engineering analysis signed and sealed by the qualified
STEEL JOISTS 05210-1
LILLY LIBREARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
exposed welds.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field
inspections and tests and to prepare test reports.
1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether
tested Work complies with or deviates from requirements.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test
reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements.
C. Additional testing,at Contractor's expense,will be performed to determine compliance of
corrected Work with specified requirements.
D. Field-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's"Specification
for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
E. In addition to visual inspection,field-welded connections will be inspected and tested
according to AWS D1.1 and the inspection procedures listed below,at testing agency's
option.
1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709;performed on root pass and on
finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be
accepted.
3. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142;minimum quality level
"2-2T."
4. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection,clean field welds,bolted connections,and
abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for
shop painting.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils
(0.038 mm).
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds,bolted connections,and
abraded areas of shop paint on structural steel are included in Division 9 Section"Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds,bolted connections,and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-10
LILLY LIBREARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
a. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for proprietary grout materials.
C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges."
1. Maintain erection tolerances of architecturally exposed structural steel within
AISC's"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before
permanently fastening. Before assembly,clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will
be in permanent contact. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in
elevations and alignment.
1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.
2. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating
temperature of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at
time of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be when completed
and in service.
E. Splice members only where indicated.
F. Remove erection bolts on welded,architecturally exposed structural steel;fill holes with
009* plug welds;and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.
G. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.
H. Finish sections thermally cut during erection equal to a sheared appearance.
I. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins. Ream holes that
must be enlarged to admit bolts.
3.04 FIELD CONNECTIONS
A. Install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's"Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures,appearance and quality of
welds,and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Comply with AISC specifications referenced in this Section for bearing,adequacy
of temporary connections,alignment,and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to
field welds.
2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment
of axes without warp.
3. Verify that weld sizes,fabrication sequence,and equipment used for architecturally
exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent
surface bleeding of back-side welding on exposed steel surfaces. Grind smooth
exposed fillet welds 1/2 inch(13 mm)and larger. Grind flush butt welds. Dress
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-9
LILLY LIBREARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
according to AWS D 1.1 and the inspection procedures listed below,at testing agency's
option.
1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709;performed on root pass and on
finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be
accepted.
3. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142;minimum quality level
"2-2T."
4. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Before erection proceeds,and with the steel erector present,verify elevations of concrete
and masonry bearing surfaces and locations of anchorages for compliance with
requirements.
B. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary shores,guys,braces,and other supports during erection to keep
structural steel secure,plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and
loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent
structural steel,connections,and bracing are in place,unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until
cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.
3.03 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC
specifications referenced in this Section.
B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing
materials and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom
surface of base and bearing plates.
I. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges,shims,or setting
nuts as required.
2. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.
Do not remove wedges or shims but,if protruding,cut off flush with edge of base
or bearing plate prior to packing with grout.
3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Finish
exposed surfaces,protect installed materials,and allow to cure.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-8
LILLY LIBREARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
exposed welds.
2.06 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces,except the following:
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially
embedded members to a depth of 2 inches(50 mm).
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
4. Surfaces to receive sprayed-on fireproofing.
5. Galvanized surfaces.(Unless called galvanized and shop primed)
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust,loose mill scale,and
spatter,slag,or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to SSPC specifications as follows:
1. SSPC-SP 2 "Hand Tool Cleaning."
C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation,apply primer according to manufacturer's
instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less
than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints,
corners,edges,and exposed surfaces(color to be gray).
2.07 GALVANIZING
A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel
indicated for galvanizing according to ASTM A 123.
2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop
inspections and tests and to prepare test reports.
1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test
specimens comply with or deviate from requirements.
2. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural steel Work is being
fabricated or produced so required inspection and testing can be accomplished.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test
reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements.
C. Additional testing,at Contractor's expense,will be performed to determine compliance of
corrected Work with specified requirements.
D. Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's"Specification
for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
E. In addition to visual inspection,shop-welded connections will be inspected and tested
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-7
LILLY LIBREARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. Fabricate architecturally exposed structural steel with exposed surfaces smooth,square,and
free of surface blemishes, including pitting,rust and scale seam marks,roller marks,rolled
trade names,and roughness.
1. Remove blemishes by filling,grinding,or by welding and grinding,prior to
cleaning,treating,and shop priming.
2. Comply with fabrication requirements,including tolerance limits,of AlSC's "Code
of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for architecturally exposed
structural steel.
C. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.
1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded.
D. Finishing: Accurately mill ends of columns and other members transmitting loads in
bearing.
E. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and for
passage of other work through steel framing members,as shown on Shop Drawings.
1. Cut,drill,or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame-cut holes
or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.
2. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items as indicated to receive
other work.
2.05 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A. Shop install and tighten high-strength bolts as indicated.
B. Shop install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C. Shop install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's"Load and Resistance
Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
1. Bolts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M)high-strength bolts,unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Connection Type: Slip-critical.
D. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures,appearance and quality of
welds,and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment
of axes without warp.
2. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence,and equipment used for architecturally
exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent
surface bleeding of back-side welding on exposed steel surfaces. Grind smooth
exposed fillet welds 1/2 inch(13 mm)and larger. Grind flush butt welds. Dress
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-6
LILLY LIBREARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
bolts and heavy hex carbon steel nuts.
3. Washers: ASTM A 36(ASTM A 36M).
H. High-Strength Bolts,Nuts,and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M),Type 1,heavy
hex steel structural bolts,heavy hex carbon-steel nuts,and hardened carbon-steel washers.
1. Finish: Plain,uncoated unless otherwise noted.
2. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating,ASTM A 153,Class C as indicated.
3. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959,Type 325.
a. Finish: Plain,uncoated.
I. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
2.02 PRIMER
A. Primer: Fast-curing,lead-and chromate-free,universal modified-alkyd primer with good
resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion,complying with performance requirements of
FS TT-P-664,color to be gray.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds and repair
painting galvanized steel,with dry film containing not less than 93 percent zinc dust by
weight,and complying with DOD-P-21035A or SSPC-Paint 20.
2.03 GROUT
A. Nonmetallic,Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed,nonmetallic,noncorrosive,nonstaining
grout containing selected silica sands,portland cement,shrinkage compensating agents,
plasticizing and water-reducing agents,complying with ASTM C 1107,of consistency
suitable for application,and a 30-minute working time.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate
structural steel according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section and in Shop
Drawings.
1. Camber structural steel members where indicated.
2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6(ASTM A 6M)and
maintain markings until steel has been erected.
3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.
4. Fabricate for delivery a sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field
handling of structural steel.
5. Complete structural steel assemblies,including welding of units,before starting
shop-priming operations.
6. Comply with fabrication tolerance limits of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges"for structural steel.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-5
LILLY LIBREARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
continuity of installation.
B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members
off ground by using pallets,platforms,or other supports. Protect steel members and
packaged materials from erosion and deterioration.
1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that
become dry or rusty before use.
2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or
damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials
or structures as directed.
1.07 SEQUENCING
A. Supply anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without
delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams,templates,instructions,and directions,as
required,for installation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel Shapes,Plates,and Bars as follows: ,,ftk
1. Carbon Steel: ASTM A 36(ASTM A 36M)(Except W shapes and shapes noted
below).
2. High-Strength, Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steel: ASTM A 572
(ASTM A 572M),Grade 50 for all W shapes.
B. Cold-Formed Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500,Grade B.
C. Hot-Formed Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53,Type E or S,Grade B.
1. Weight Class: Standard. (Unless otherwise noted)
2. Finish: Gray unless noted galvanized.
E. Carbon-Steel Castings: ASTM A 27,Grade 65-35(ASTM A 27M, Grade 450-240),
medium-strength carbon steel.
F. High-Strength Steel Castings: ASTM A 148,Grade 80-50(ASTM A 148M,(Grade 550-
345).
G. Anchor Rods,Bolts,Nuts,and Washers: As follows:
1. Unheaded Bolts: ASTM A 687,high strength.
2. Headed Bolts: ASTM A 325(ASTM A325M),Type 1,heavy hex steel structural
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-4
LILLY LIBREARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2. AISC's"Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members."
3. AISC's"Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings."
4. ASTM A 6 (ASTM A 6M) "Specification for General Requirements for Rolled
Steel Plates,Shapes, Sheet Piling,and Bars for Structural Use."
5. Research Council on Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
D. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally authorized to
practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for projects with structural steel framing that are similar to that indicated for this
project in material,design,and extent.
E. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding
Code--Steel."
1. Present evidence that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests
for welding processes involved and,if pertinent,has undergone recertification.
F. Mockups: Prior to installing architecturally exposed structural steel,construct mockups for
each form of construction and finish required to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as
qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following
requirements,using materials indicated for final unit of Work.
1. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or,if not indicated,
as directed by Architect.
2. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship of steel
surfaces and welded and bolted connections.
a. Coordinate finish painting requirements of mockups with Division 9
Section"Painting."
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before start of final unit of Work.
5. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.
a. When directed,demolish and remove mockups from Project site.
b. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial
Completion may become part of the completed Work.
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements
of Division 1 Section"Project Meetings."
1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver structural steel to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-3
LILLY LIBREARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
C. Shop Drawings detailing fabrication of structural steel components.
1. Include details of cuts,connections,splices,camber,holes,and other pertinent data.
2. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols,distinguishing between shop and field
welds,and show size, length,and type of each weld.
3. Indicate type, size,and length of bolts,distinguishing between shop and field bolts.
Identify high-strength bolted slip-critical,direct-tension,or tensioned shear/bearing
connections.
4. Include Shop Drawings signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
D. Qualification data for fines and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance"Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses,names and addresses of architects and owners,and other
information specified.
E. Mill test reports signed by manufacturers certifying that their products,including the
following,comply with requirements.
1. Structural steel,including chemical and physical properties.
2. Bolts,nuts,and washers,including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.
3. Direct-tension indicators.
4. Shear stud connectors. ..
5. Shop primers.
6. Nonshrink grout.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed structural steel
work similar in material,design,and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a
record of successful in-service performance.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in fabricating structural steel similar
to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance,as
well as sufficient production capacity to fabricate structural steel without delaying the
Work.
1. Fabricator must participate in the AISC Quality Certification Program and be
designated an AISC-Certified Plant as follows:
a. Category: Category I,conventional steel structures.
b. Fabricator shall be registered with and approved by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
1. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and
Plastic Design."
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-2
LILLY LIBREARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 05120—STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes all structural steel as indicated on the structural drawings,unless
otherwise indicated.
B. This Section includes structural steel and architecturally exposed structural steel.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section"Quality Control"for independent testing agency procedures
and administrative requirements.
2. Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications"for loose steel bearing plates and
miscellaneous steel framing.(See Section 05410 for shear studs)
3. Division 9 Section"Special Coatings" for surface preparation and priming
requirements.
4. Division 9 Section"Painting"for surface preparation and priming requirements.
D. Products installed but not furnished under this section include the following:
1. Adjustable masonry anchors welded to beams and columns.(Shop weld prior to
priming.)
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Engineer structural steel connections required by the Contract
Documents to be selected or completed by the fabricator to withstand design loadings
indicated.
B. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a fabricator who utilizes a qualified professional
engineer to prepare calculations, Shop Drawings,and other structural data for structural
steel connections.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections,
B. Product Data for each type of product specified.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing
to remove mortar fins and smears prior to tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed
masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and
nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.
2. Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove
cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water.
3. Clean masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2
applicable to type of stain present on exposed surfaces.
E. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure unit
masonry is without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
3.07 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace work of the following description:
1. Broken, chipped, stained or otherwise damaged units.
2. Defective joints.
3. Units and joints not matching approved samples and field-constructed
mock-ups.
4. Work not complying with other requirements indicated.
B. Replace in manner which results in work matching the existing building,
complying with other requirements and showing no evidence of replacement.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner which ensures
work being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION 04500
MASONRY RESTORATION AND REPAIR
04500- 10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
E. Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from bed joint thickness
indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum
thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). Do not vary bed joint thickness from
bed joint thickness of adjacent course by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not
vary from head joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch
(3 mm). Do not vary head joint thickness from adjacent head joint thickness
by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from collar joint thickness
indicated by more than minus 1/4 inch (6 mm)or plus 3/8 inch (10 mm).
3.04 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay solid brick-size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints;
butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do
not furrow bed joints or slush head joints.
B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer
larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
3.05 STRUCTURAL BONDING OF MULTIWYTHE MASONRY
A. Use individual metal ties installed in horizontal joints to bond wythes
together. Provide ties as shown, but not less than 1 metal tie for 4 sq. ft. (0.37
sq. m) of wall area spaced not to exceed 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. horizontally
and vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties within
12 inches (305 mm) of openings and space not more than 36 inches (915 mm)
apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls,
provide ties at no more than 24 inches (610 mm)o.c. vertically.
3.06 REPAIRING POINTING. AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or
otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install
replacement units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar or grout,
pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep
holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point-up joints, including corners,
openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance.
Prepare joints for application of sealants.
MASONRY RESTORATION AND REPAIR 04500-9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
3.02 INSTALLATION GENERAL
A. If required for replacement work, cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to
provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide
continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full-size units
without cutting, where possible. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to
dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with
cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
B. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of
existing masonry.
C. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick prior to laying if the initial rate of absorption
exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C
67. Allow units to absorb the water so they are damp but not wet at the time
of laying.
3.03 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
AWk
A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls, and
arrises, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), nor 3/8 inch in 20
feet (10 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet (12 mm in 12 m) or more. For
external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines,
do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet (12
mm in 12 m) or more. For vertical alignment of head joints, do not exceed
plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), nor 1/2 inch (12 mm)
maximum.
B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills,
parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4
inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet (12 mm in 12 m) or
more. For top surface of bearing walls, do not exceed 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 10
feet (3 m), nor 1/16 inch (1.5 mm)within width of a single unit.
C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related
portion of columns, walls, and partitions, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet (12
mm in 6 m), nor 3/4 inch in 40 feet (19 mm in 12 m) or more.
D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of
walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) nor plus
1/2 inch (12 mm).
MASONRY RESTORATION AND REPAIR
04500-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. Materials: Comply with requirements indicated below for basic materials and
with requirements indicated under each form of joint reinforcement, tie and
anchor for size and other characteristics:
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Wire: ASTM A 82 for uncoated wire and
with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 (1.5 oz. per sq. ft. of wire surface) for
zinc coating applied after prefabrication into units.
B. Joint Reinforcement: Provide welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed
continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than
10', with prefabricated corner and tee units, and complying with requirements
indicated below:
1. Width: Fabricate joint reinforcement in units with widths of
approximately 2" less than nominal width of walls and partitions as
required to provide mortar coverage of not less than 5/8" on joint faces
exposed to exterior and 1/2" elsewhere.
2. Wire Size: 0.1875" diameter.
3. For single-wythe masonry provide type as follows with single pair of
side rods:
2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES:
A. Reinforcing Bars: All required reinforcing bars and related grouting for
masonry construction shall be provided by the Masonry Subcontractor.
2.06 MASONRY CLEANERS:
A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of trisodium phosphate (1/2 cup dry
measure) and laundry detergent (1/2 cup dry measure) dissolved in one gallon
of water. The masonry contractor shall clean and "wash down" all areas of
exposed exterior masonry.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions for compliance with requirements for the Work and other
conditions affecting performance of specified products. Do not proceed with
the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
MASONRY RESTORATION AND REPAIR
04500-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. Laminated Through-Wall Flashing: Manufactuer's standard laminated
flashing of type indicated below:
I. Copper-Fabricated Laminate: Copper sheet of 3 oz. per sq. ft. indicated
below, bonded with asphalt between two (2) layers of glass fiber cloth.
B. Adhesive for Flashings: Of type recommended by manufacturer of flashing
material for use indicated.
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which
may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
I. Copper Fabric Laminate Flashing:
a. Copper Fabric; Afco Products,Inc.
b. Copper Fabric; Sandall Manufacturing Co., Inc.
C. Copper Fabric Flashing; York Manufacturing, Inc.
2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents,
accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other
admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at the same rate for all mortar,
regardless of weather conditions, in order to ensure that mortar color is
consistent.
B. Mortar for Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion
Specification, for job mixed mortar, of types of mortar indicated below:
1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement-lime.
2. For masonry below grade and in contract with earth, and where
indicated: Type S.
3. For exterior, above-grade loadbearing and nonloadbearing walls
and for other applications where another type is not indicated:
Type N.
2.04 JOINT REINFORCMENT TIES AND ANCHORING DEVICES:
Affikk
MASONRY RESTORATION AND REPAIR
04500-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
C. 20 deg F (-7 deg C) and Below: Provide enclosure and heat to
maintain temperatures above 32 deg F (0 deg C) within the
enclosure for 48 hours after construction.
3. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air
temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until
masonry has dried out, but not less than 7 days after completion of
cleaning.
D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature
and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar
and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials
as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F
(38 deg C) and above.
E. Clean masonry surfaces only when air temperatures are 40 deg. F (4 deg. C)
and above and will remain so until masonry has dried out,but for not less than
7 days after completion of cleaning.
F. Do not repoint mortar joints or repair masonry unless air temperatures are
between 40 deg. F(4 Deg. C) and 80 deg. F (27 deg. C) and will remain so for
at least 48 hours after completion of work.
G. Removal of Plant Growth: Remove all moss, plants, etc. from masonry
surfaces. Remove loose soil or debris from open masonry joints to whatever
depth it occurs.
1. Apply ammonia or other acceptable root killing material to plant roots,
in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Protect all plant material
to remain.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 BRICK
A. Face Brick:
The masonry contractor shall reuse the existing building brick where ever
replacement brick is required for repair work. The existing brick shall be
cleaned free of mortar and reset as required. Damaged, deteriated, discolored
or stained bricks shall not be reused.
2.02 CONCEALED FLASHING MATERIAL
MASONRY RESTORATION AND REPAIR 04500-5
now
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA Awk
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to
prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt on completed masonry.
C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed
or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds.
Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or freezing conditions.
Comply with the following requirements:
1. Cold-Weather Construction: When the ambient temperature is within
the limits indicated, use the following procedures:
a. 40 to 32 deg F (4 to 0 deg C): Heat mixing water or sand to
produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49
deg Q.
b. 32 to 25 deg F (0 to -4 deg C): Heat mixing water and sand to
produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49
deg Q. Heat grout materials to produce grout temperatures
between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg Q. Maintain mortar and
grout above freezing until used in masonry.
C. 25 to 20 deg F (4 to -7 deg C): Heat mixing water and sand to
produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49
deg Q. Heat grout materials to produce grout temperatures
between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg Q. Maintain mortar and
grout above freezing until used in masonry. Heat masonry units to
40 deg F (4 deg C) if grouting. Use heat on both sides of walls
under construction.
d. 20 deg F (-7 deg C) and Below: Heat mixing water and sand to
produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49
deg Q. Heat grout materials to produce grout temperatures
between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg Q. Maintain mortar and
grout above freezing until used in masonry. Heat masonry units to
40 deg F (4 deg Q. Provide enclosures and use heat on both sides
of walls under construction to maintain temperatures above 32 deg
F(0 deg C) within the enclosures.
2. Cold-Weather Protection: When the mean daily temperature is within
the limits indicated, provide the following protection:
a. 40 to 25 deg F (4 to -4 deg C): Cover masonry with a weather-
resistant membrane for 48 hours after construction.
b. 25 to 20 deg F (-4 to -7 deg C): Cover masonry with insulating
blankets or provide enclosure and heat for 48 hours after
construction to prevent freezing. Install wind beaks when wind
velocity exceeds 15 mi./h (25 km/h).
MASONRY RESTORATION AND REPAIR 04500- 4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1. Colored-masonry mortar samples showing the full range of colors
available.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Restoration Specialist: Work must be performed by a firm having
documented proof in writing of successful experience in comparable masonry
restoration projects and employing personnel skilled in the restoration
processes and operations indicated.
C. Single-Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients
of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one
manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or
producer for each aggregate.
1.06 DELIVERY STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Replacement of existing damaged brick and granite shall require the reuse of
masonry from the existing building to be salvaged from removals required by
new openings.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry
location.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be
maintained and contamination avoided.
D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and
accumulation of dirt and oil.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: Protect partially completed work from weather when
construction is not in progress.
B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of
masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar,
and soil that come in contact with such masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by
coverings spread on ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products
with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
MASONRY RESTORATION AND REPAIR 04500-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1. Attention is directed to the General Conditions and Section A of these
Specifications entitled Supplementary Conditions, which are hereby made a
part of this section of the Specifications.
2. Equality of material, article, assembly, or system other than those named or
described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions
of Section A, Supplementary Conditions. See also section 01300.
1.03 SUMMARY
A. Work of this Section shall be included in the project subject to acceptance by
The Owner as Add Alternate No. 1:
1. Repoint 25% of exterior brick and 25% of exterior granite to a total of
approx. 1,000 s.f.
2. Clean all exposed exterior masonry.
3. Coordinate the Work to make use of staging supplied by the General
Contractor for the use of other trades.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each product
indicated including recommendations for their application and use. Include
test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply with
requirements.
C. Restoration Program: Submit written program for each phase of restoration
process including protection of surrounding materials on building and site
during operations. Describe materials, methods and equipment to be used for
each phase of restoration work.
1. If alternative methods and materials to those indicated are proposed for any
phase of restoration work, provide written description, including evidence
of successful use on other, comparable projects, and program of testing to
demonstrate effectiveness for use on this project.
D. Samples for initial selection of the following:
MASONRY RESTORATION AND REPAIR
04500-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
SECTION 04500 - MASONRY RESTORATION AND REPAIR
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PART1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and conditions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary General Conditions and all Division 1 Sections, apply to the
work of this section.
B. Time,manner, and requirements for submitting filed sub-bids:
1. Sub-bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work
and shall be filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at
a time and place as stipulated in the "NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS".
The following shall appear on the upper left hand corner of the
envelope.
NAME OF SUB-BIDDER:
NAME OF PROJECT:
SUB-BID FOR SECTION: 04500—MASONRY RESTORATION
AND REPAIR
2. Each sub-bid submitted for work under this Section shall be on forms
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44F of
Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-bid forms may be
obtained at the office of the Architect-Engineer or may be obtained by
written request.
3. Sub-bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a
BID BOND or CASH or CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURER'S
or CASHIER'S CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company
payable to the City of Northamptonin the amount of 5 percent of the
bid. A sub-bid accompanied by any other form of bid deposit than
those specified will be rejected.
C. Sub-Sub-Bid Requirements: (NONE REQUIRED UNDER THIS SECTION).
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
MASONRY RESTORATION AND REPAIR 04500- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA 10*s
END OF SECTION 04200
UNIT MASONRY 04200-24
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
D. Grout will be sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C 1019.
E. Prism-Test Method:For each type of wall construction indicated,masonry prisms will be tested
per ASTM E 447,Method B,and as follows:
1. Prepare 1 set of prisms for testing at 7 days and 1 set for testing at 28 days.
F. Evaluation of Quality-Control Tests:In the absence of other indications of noncompliance with
requirements,masonry will be considered satisfactory if results from construction quality-control
tests comply with minimum requirements indicated.
3.16 REPAIR POINTING AND CLEANING:
A. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured,clean masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and non-metallic scrape hoes
or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 panel uncleaned for comparison
purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with
cleaning of masonry.
3. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering
them with liquid strippable masking agent,polyethylene film or waterproof masking tape.
4. 'Saturate wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners
promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water.
5. Use bucket and brush hand cleaning method described in BIA "Technical Note No. 20
Revised" to clean brick masonry made from clay or shale, except use masonry cleaner
indicated below.
a. Job-mixed detergent solution.
6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to
type of stain present on exposed surfaces.
B. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Installer,
which ensures unit masonry work being without damage and deterioration at time of substantial
completion.
3.17 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL:
A. Recycling: Undamaged, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property and shall be
removed from the Project site for his use.
B. Masonry Waste: Remove masonry waste and legally dispose of off Owners property.
UNIT MASONRY 04200 -23
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2 inches, immediately above top of flashing embedded in the wall, as masonry
construction progresses,to splatter mortar droppings and to maintain drainage.
E. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where shown to be built into
masonry.
3.14 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY:
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced
masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to conform to shape,line,and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently
tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace,tie, and support forms to maintain
position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on
them during construction.
B. Grouting:Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient
strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Do not exceed the following pour heights for coarse grout:
d. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 1-1/2 inches or for minimum grout space
of hollow unit cells of 1-1/2 by 3 inches,pour height of 12 inches.
e. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2 inches or for minimum grout space of
hollow unit cells of 2-1/2 by 3 inches,pour height of 60 inches.
f. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2-1/2 inches or for minimum grout space
of hollow unit cells of 3 by 3 inches,pour height of 12 feet.
g. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 3 inches or for minimum grout space of
hollow unit cells of 3 by 4 inches,pour height of 24 feet.
2. Provide cleanout holes at least 3 inches in least dimension at the base of each grout lift
for grout pours over 60 inches in height.
a. Provide cleanout holes at each vertical reinforcing bar.
b. At solid grouted masonry,provide cleanout holes at not more than 32 inches o.c.
3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. The Owner will employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform the following
testing for field quality control. Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements
shall be done at Contractor's expense.
B. Testing Frequency: Tests and Evaluations listed in this Article will be performed during
construction for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.
C. Mortar properties will be tested per property specification of ASTM C 270.
UNIT MASONRY 04200-22
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." Maintain joint free and
clear of mortar.
D. Build-in horizontal pressure-relieving joints where indicated;construct joints by either leaving
an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer
rod specified in Division 7 Section 'Joint Sealants."
I. Locate horizontal pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry
veneer and attached to structure behind masonry veneer.
3.12 LINTELS:
A. Install steel lintels where indicated.
B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 24 inches for block size
units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.
C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb,unless otherwise indicated.
3.13 FLASHING WEEP HOLES, AND VENTS:
A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles,lintels,ledges,
"* other obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall,and where indicated.
B. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture
flashing. Place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal
penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing
manufacturer before covering with mortar.
C. Install flashing as follows:
1. At composite masonry walls,including cavity walls,extend flashing from exterior face
of outer wythe of masonry,through the outer wythe,turned up a minimum of 4 inches,
and through the inner wythe to within t/z inch of the interior face of the wall in exposed
masonry. Where interior surface of inner wythe is concealed by furring,carry flashing
completely through the inner wythe and turn up approximately 2 inches,unless otherwise
indicated.
2. At lintels and shelf angles,extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches into masonry at each
end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 4 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2
inches to form a pan.
3. Cut off flashing flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.
D. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry
immediately above embedded flashing and as follows:
1. Form weep holes with product specified in Part 2 of this Section.
2. Space weep holes 32 inches o.c.
3. In cavities,place pea gravel to a height equal to height of first course,but not less than
UNIT MASONRY 04200-21
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2. Provide reinforcement in mortar joint 1 block course above and below wall openings and
extending 12 inches beyond opening.
a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement.
B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints,unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L"and"T"sections.
Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns,offsets,
column fireproofing,pipe enclosures,and other special conditions.
3.10 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS:
A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to
comply with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch in width between masonry and structural
member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid
materials.
2. Anchor masonry to structural with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and
attached to structural member.
3. Space anchors as indicated,but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 16 inches o.c.
horizontally.
4. Coordinate anchor types with structural steel fabricator for shop installation of welded
pieces.
3.11 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS:
A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build-in related
items as the masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints
unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement.
1. , Provide control joints in locations shown on the Drawings,or if no other spacing is noted,
provide joints in line with structural columns, or at 25 feet o.c. maximum.
2. Submit layout of all joints,types and proposed locations.
B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:
1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of block units on one side of control
joint. Fill the resultant core with grout and rake joints in exposed faces.
2. Install preformed control joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint.
Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake joint.
4. Install temporary foam plastic filler in head joints and remove when unit masonry is
complete.
C. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows: Afth
L Form open joint of width indicated,but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant
UNIT MASONRY 04200-20
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
between wythes.
C. Use either of the structural bonding systems specified above.
D. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course at corners,unless otherwise
shown.
1. Provide continuity with horizontal joint reinforcement at comers by using prefabricated
"L" units in addition to masonry bonding.
2. Stop horizontal joint reinforcing at control joints.
E. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at
juncture,provide same type of bonding specified for structural bonding between wythes and
space as follows:
1- Provide individual metal ties not more than 16 inches o.c.
2. Provide continuity with horizontal joint reinforcement by using prefabricated "T"units.
3. Provide rigid metal anchors not more than 24 inches o.c. If used with hollow masonry
units,embed ends in mortar-filled cores.
3.07 CAVITIES:
A. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike joints
facing cavities flush.
1. Use wood strips temporarily placed in cavity to collect mortar droppings. As work
progresses,remove strips,clean off mortar droppings, and replace in cavity.
B. Tie exterior wythe to back-up with individual metal ties. Stagger alternate courses.
3.08 CAVITY-WALL INSULATION:
A. On units of plastic board insulation, place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12
inches o.c.,both ways on inside face or attach to inside face with plastic fasteners designed for
this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in
cavity,with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry
or other construction as shown.
1. Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and
masonry.
3.09 HORIZONTAL-JOINT REINFORCEMENT:
A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length
of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls,
1/i inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches.
1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.
UNIT MASONRY 04200- 19
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at comers. Do not use units with
less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
E. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course,rack back 1/2-unit length for one-half running
bond or 1/3-unit length for one-third running bond;do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set
masonry,wet clay masonry units lightly if required,and remove loose masonry units and mortar
prior to laying fresh masonry.
F. Built-in Work:As construction progresses,build-in items specified under this and other Sections
of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
G. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise
indicated.
H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates,beams,
lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. Fill cores in hollow concrete
masonry units with grout full height in walls facing the corridors and as indicated.
I. Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof
structure above and as follows:
1. Provide lateral ties and leave joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above as detailed on Drawings. Fill joint with Firestopping system specified in Section A"*
07270.
3.05 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING:
A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows:
1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. Do not mortar head
joints after units are set in place.
2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers,columns,and
pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout.
3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed,
including areas under cells.
4. Maintain joint widths indicated,except for minor variations required to maintain bond
alignment. If not indicated,lay walls with 3/8-inch joints.
B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness,unless otherwise indicated.
3.06 STRUCTURAL BONDING OF MULTIWYTHE MASONRY:
A. Use individual metal ties installed in horizontal joints to bond wythes together. Provide ties as
shown,but not less than 1 metal tie for 4 sq. ft. of wall area spaced not to exceed 24 inches o.c.
horizontally and vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties within 12
inches of openings and space not more than 36 inches apart around perimeter of openings. At ,.�
intersecting and abutting walls,provide ties at no more than 24 inches o.c. vertically.
B. Use continuous horizontal joint reinforcement installed in horizontal mortar joints for bond tie
UNIT MASONRY 04200- 18
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
10"` E. Mix units for exposed unit masonry from several pallets or cubes as they are placed to produce
uniform blend of colors and textures.
F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick prior to laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 9130 sq.
in.per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb the water so they are damp
but not wet at the time of laying.
3.03 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES:
A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls, and arrises, do not
exceed 1/a inch in 10 feet, nor 3/8 inch in 20 feet,nor 1/z inch in 40 feet or more. For external
corners,expansion joints,control joints,and other conspicuous lines,do not exceed 1/4 inch in
20 feet,nor 1/z inch in 40 feet or more. For vertical alignment of head joints,do not exceed plus
or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet,nor'/z inch maximum.
B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal
grooves, and other conspicuous lines,do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet,nor 1/z inch in 40 feet
or more. For top surface of bearing walls, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet,nor 1/16 inch
within width of a single unit.
C. Variation of Linear Building Line:For position shown in plan and related portion of columns,
walls,and partitions,do not exceed 1/z inch in 20 feet,nor 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more.
D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions:For columns and thickness of walls,from dimensions
shown,do not exceed minus 1/4 inch nor plus%z inch.
E. Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from bed joint thickness indicated by more
than plus or minus 1/8 inch,with a maximum thickness limited to 1/z inch. Do not vary bed joint
thickness from bed joint thickness of adjacent course by more than 1/8 inch. Do not vary from
head joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary head joint
thickness from adjacent head joint thickness by more than 1/8 inch. Do not vary from collar-
joint thickness indicated by more than minus 1/4 inch or plus 3/8 inch.
3.04 LAYING MASONRY WALLS:
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths
and for accurate locating of openings,movement-type joints,returns,and offsets. Avoid the use
of less-than-half-size units at comers,jambs,and where possible at other locations.
B. Lay walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and
coordinated with other construction.
C. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry:Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern;do not
use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
1. One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses
above and below,or as indicated on drawings.
Owk
D. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less
UNIT MASONRY 04200- 17
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
D. Grouting of all hollow metal frames is the work of this section.
2.18 SOURCE OUALTTY CONTROL:
A. The Owner will employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform the following
testing for source quality control. Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements
shall be done at Contractor's expense.
B. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each type of concrete masonry unit indicated,units will be
tested for strength,absorption,and moisture content per ASTM C 140.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION:
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of unit masonry. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Check all embedded reinforcement to be incorporated in the masonry work for
completeness and location.
2. For the record,prepare written report,endorsed by Installer,listing conditions detrimental
to performance of unit masonry.
B. Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections prior
to installation.
3.02 INSTALLATION,GENERAL:
A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full
thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units,using
units of thickness indicated.
B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections of the
Specifications.
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening.
D. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp,unchipped edges. Cut units
as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full-size units
without cutting, where possible. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing,
unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut
edges concealed.
UNIT MASONRY 04200- 16
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation board manufacturer for application indicated.
2.17 MASONRY CLEANERS:
A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and
1/2-cup dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. of water.
2.18 MORTAR AND GROUT MDCES:
A. General: All mortar is to be premixed cement and dry materials, delivered to the site in bulk
packaging. Grout may either be premixed cement and dry materials,delivered to the site in bulk
packaging,or ready mixed off site. Mason shall mix with water to predetermined proportions
1. Do not use admixtures,including pigments,air-entraining agents,accelerators,retarders,
water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
3. Add cold-weather admixture(if used)at the same rate for all mortar,regardless of weather
conditions, in order to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270,Proportion Specification,for types of
mortar indicated below:
1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and Tune.
2. For masonry below grade,in contact with earth,and where indicated,use type indicated
below:
a. Type: S.
3. For reinforced masonry,grouted masonry and where indicated,use type indicated below:
a. Type: S.
4. For exterior, above-grade walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-
bearing partitions,and for other applications where another type is not indicated,use type
indicated below:
a. Type: S.
C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. Use course grout for all grouting
operations.
1. Compressive Strength: 2500 psi minimum at 28 days, as determined in accordance with
the provisions of ASTM C 1019.
2. Slump: 8 inches, minimum; 10 inches,maximum,measured in accordance with ASTM
C 143.
3. Do not use air-entrained admixtures.
4. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout.
UNIT MASONRY 04200-15
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
I. Copper-Fabric Laminate Flashing:
a. Copper Fabric;AFCO Products,Inc.
b. Type FCC-Fabric Covered Copper;Phoenix Building Products.
C. Copper Fabric Flashing; Sandell Manufacturing Co.,Inc.
d. York Copper Fabric Flashing;York Manufacturing, Inc.
2.15 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES:
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056,Type 2, Class A,
Grade 1;compressible up to 35 percent;of width and thickness indicated;formulated from the
following material:
1. Neoprene.
2. Polyvinyl chloride.
B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash
block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
1. Styrene-Butadiene Rubber Compound: ASTM D 2000,Designation M2AA-805.
B. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
Type I(No. 15 asphalt felt).
C. Weep Holes: Provide the following:
1. Plastic Weep Hole/Vent: One-piece,flexible extrusion manufactured from ultraviolet-
resistant polypropylene copolymer, designed to weep moisture in masonry cavity to
exterior, sized to fill head joints with outside face held back 1/8 inch from exterior face
of masonry, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following weep
hole/ventilators:
a. "#343;"Hohmann&Barnard,Inc.
b. "#3602;"Wire-Bond.
C. "Brick Vent;"Williams Products,Inc.
D. Cavity Drainage Stone: Washed gravel or washed crushed stone complying with ASTM C 33,
Size No. 6.
2.16 INSULATION:
A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular, polystyrene thermal insulation with
closed cells and integral high-density skin,formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin
in an extrusion process to comply with ASTM C 578, Type IV; in manufacturer's standard
lengths and widths; and in thicknesses indicated.
UNIT MASONRY
04200- 14
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2.11 ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING TO STEEL STUDS:
1. Metal Fasteners for Steel Studs: Steel drill screws,#10 diameter x length required to
penetrate steel stud flange by not less than 3 exposed threads,complying with ASTM C
954 except with hex washer head and neoprene washer,cadmium-plated.
2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,masonry veneer anchors
which may be incorporated in the work includes,but is not limited to,the following:
a. "D/A 213;Dur-O-Wal,Inc.
b. "DW-10";Hohmann&Barnard,Inc.
3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products which may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
a. AA Wire Products Co.
2.12 RIGID ANCHORS:
A. General: Fabricate from steel bars as follows:
1. 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 24 inches long, with ends turned up 2 inches or
with cross pins.
2.13 EXPANSION AND CONTROL JOINT ANCHORS:
A. General:
1. Anchors to be galvanized metal used to bond walls at expansion and control joints to
resist lateral movement.
2. Type"IT'to be used horizontally in level mortar joint or field bend to connect intersecting
walls or new to existing walls. Anchor to be "Slip-Set" Stabilizer by Hohmann &
Barnard,Inc. or approved equal.
3. One side to be mechanically fastened to masonry with stainless steel expansion bolts.
2.14 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS:
A. Laminated Flashing: Manufacturer's standard laminated flashing of type indicated below:
1. Copper-Fabric Laminate: Copper sheet of weight indicated below,bonded with asphalt
between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth.
a. Weight: 5 oz./sq. ft.
2. Application: Use where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.
' B. Adhesive for Flashings: Of type recommended by manufacturer of flashing material for use
indicated.
UNIT MASONRY 04200- 13
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2.09 ADJUSTABLE ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING TO STRUCTURAL FRAME:
A. General: Provide 2-piece assemblies as described below, allowing vertical or horizontal
differential movement between wall and frame parallel to plane of wall but resisting tension and
compression forces perpendicular to it.
1. For anchorage to steel framing at standard masonry coursing, provide manufacturer's
standard anchors with bent bar section for fastening to steel; and triangular-shaped
0.1875-inch-diameter wire tie section sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face.
2. For anchorage to steel framing at bond beams,provide manufacturer's standard anchors
with bent bar section for fastening to steel and bent anchor tie,with 2-inch minimum leg
which bends down into masonry unit core.
3. Acceptable Bent Bar Products: #359FP and#359FP-C "Weld-On Tie," manufactured
by Hohmann&Barnard,Inc.
4. Acceptable Anchor Products: Provide the following bent bar anchors:
a. At Standard Masonry Coursing: #301W "Column Web Tie" manufactured by
Hohmann&Barnard,Inc.
b. At Bond Beams: #301W "Column Web Tie," bent down to form a hook,
manufactured by Hohmann&Barnard,Inc,
2.10 ADJUSTABLE ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING TO CONCRETE: ,
A. General: Provide 2-piece assemblies as described below, allowing vertical or horizontal
differential movement between wall and frame parallel to plane of wall but resisting tension and
compression forces perpendicular to it.
1. For anchorage to concrete backup at standard masonry coursing,provide manufacturer's
standard anchors with bent bar section for fastening to steel; and triangular-shaped
0.1875-inch-diameter wire tie section sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face.
2. Acceptable Channel Anchor Products: #362 and #362-C "Gripstay Channels,"
manufactured by Hohmann&Barnard,Inc.
3. Acceptable Anchor Products: Provide the following Channel anchors:
C. At Standard Masonry Coursing: #363 "Flexible Gripstay Anchor' manufactured
by Hohmann&Barnard,Inc.
4. Dovetail anchors and Dovetail Slots: Anchors to be triangular galvanized 12 gage x 1"
with 1/a"hole and installed at 16" on center in both directions. Dovetail slots to be 24
gage 1" wide in 10' 0" lengths. Slots to be cast in place at 16" on center. Available
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America
b. Heckman Building Products Inc.
C. Hohmann&Barnard,Inc.
UNIT MASONRY 04200- 12
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
J. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
1. Water-Repellent Admixture:
a. Dry-Block Mortar Admixture; Grace: W.R. Grace&Co.
2.06 REINFORCIN G STEEL:
A. Steel Reinforcing Bars: Material and grade as follows:
1. Billet steel complying with ASTM A 615.
a. Grade 60.
B. Deformed Reinforcing Wire: ASTM A 496, with ASTM A 153,Class B-2 zinc coating.
2.07 JOINT REINFORCEMENT:
A. General: Provide joint reinforcement formed from the following:
1. Galvanized carbon-steel wire,coating class as follows:
a. ASTM A 153,Class B-2,for both interior and exterior walls.
look B. Description: Welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain
cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet,with prefabricated corner and tee units,
and complying with requirements indicated below:
1. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 0.1875 inch.
2. Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: 0.1875 inch.
C. For single-wythe masonry,provide type as follows with single pair of side rods:
1. Ladder design with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c.
2.08 TIES AND ANCHORS GENERAL:
A. General: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles that comply with
requirements for metal and size of this Article,unless otherwise indicated.
B. Wire: As follows:
1. Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82;with ASTM A 153,Class B-2 coating.
2. Wire Diameter: 0.25 inch.
C. Steel Sheet: As follows:
1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 3660.0747 inch.
04200- 11
UNIT MASONRY
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made
with integral water repellent, when tested as a wall assembly made with mortar
containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive according to
ASTM E 514, with test period extended to 24 hours, show no visible water or
leaks on the back of the test specimen.
a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide units made with
one of the following:
1) "Dry-Block"by W.R. Grace&Co.
2) "Rheomix 235"by Master Builders Inc.
2.04 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS:
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color cement.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150,
Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207.
D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch, use aggregate
graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve.
E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
F. Ready-Mixed Mortar: Cementitious materials,water,and aggregate complying with requirements
specified in this Article;combined to produce a pre-blended mortar.
1. The dry mortar mix materials, including cementitious material and aggregate shall be
weighed in a factory,under controlled conditions. All ingredients of the mortar shall be
completely dried and pre-blended off the jobsite.
2. Supplier: Spec Mix or approved equivalent manufacturer.
G. Ready-Mixed Grout: Cementitious materials, water,and aggregate complying with requirements
specified in this Article;combined to produce a pre-blended grout.
1. The dry grout mix materials, including cementitious material and aggregate shall be
weighed in a factory,under controlled conditions. All ingredients of the grout shall be
completely dried and pre-blended off the jobsite.
2. Supplier: Spec Mix or approved equivalent manufacturer.
H. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with
CMU,containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.
I• Water: Potable.
UNIT MASONRY
04200- 10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
5. Pattern: Modular 8" x 16"and 4"x 16" scored units as required by Drawings.
6. Color: As selected by the Architect.
7. Special Units:
a. 4, 6 or 8-inch,comer return unit.
b. Watertable and sill: 6"x 8"x 16"solid scored split face with 3"chamfer.
8. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units produced with liquid polymeric, integral water-
repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral
water repellent, when tested as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral
water-repellent manufacturers mortar additive according to ASTM E 514, with test
period extended to 24 hours, show no visible water or leaks on the back of the test
specimen.
a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide units made with one
of the following:
1) 'Dry-Block"by W.R. Grace&Co.
2) "Rheomix 235"by Master Builders Inc.
C. Smooth Face Concrete Masonry Units: Smooth Face Concrete Masonry Units are indicated on
the drawings as"CMU". Smooth Face Masonry units shall be manufactured by York Building
Products Company,Inc.or approved equal. Smooth face units shall comply with ASTM C 90
and as follows:
I. 2800 psi for fire-rated wall construction.
2. Not less than the unit compressive strengths required to produce concrete unit
masonry construction of compressive strength indicated.
3. Provide CMU units with "U.L." stamped on blocks and/or a special cast
identification indicating CMU is "U.L." approved. Cast identification shall be
hidden from view after CMU wall assembly has been constructed.
4. Weight Classification: Normal weight.
5. Provide Type I,moisture-controlled units.
6. Size: Manufactured to the actual dimensions indicated on Drawings within
tolerances specified in the applicable referenced ASTM specification.
b. 4 inch nominal: 3-5/8 inch actual.
b. 6 inch nominal: 5-5/8 inch actual.
C. 8 inch nominal: 7-5/8 inch actual.
d. 12inch nominal: 11-5/8 inch actual
7. Exposed Faces: Where indicated on the drawings, smooth face concrete units
(SMF)shall be colors chosen by the architect. Smooth face concrete units(SMF)
and split face concrete masonry units (SPF) shall be provided by a single
manufacturer from the same lot.
8. Pattern: Modular 8" x 16" and 4" x 16" units scored as 8" x 8" and 4" x 8" in
widths as required by Drawings.
9. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units produced with liquid polymeric,integral
UNIT MASONRY 04200-9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
b. Glen-Gery Corporation.
C. Lafarge Corporation.
d. Lehigh Portland Cement Co.
e. Riverton Corporation (The).
4. Joint Reinforcement,Ties, and Anchors:
a. Dur-O-Wal,Inc.
b. Heckman Building Products,Inc.
C. Hohmann &Barnard,Inc.
d. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America.
e. National Wire Products Industries.
2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS:
A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of concrete masonry unit
required.
1. Provide special shapes for lintels, comers,jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bond
beams,U-blocks,bonding, wall caps and other special conditions.
2. Provide bullnose units for outside comers,door jambs,window jambs and window sills,
unless otherwise indicated.
3. Size:Provide concrete masonry units with a nominal height of 8 inches by 16 inches long
and by dimension(s)in depth as indicated below.
B. Split Face Concrete Masonry Units: Split Face Masonry units shall be manufactured by York
Building Products Company, Inc. or approved equal. Split face units shall comply with
ASTM C 90 and as follows:
I. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength indicated below:
a. 1900 psi,except as noted.
b. Not less than the unit compressive strengths required to produce concrete unit
masonry construction of compressive strength indicated.
2. Weight Classification:Light weight.
3. Provide Type I,moisture-controlled units.
4. Size: Manufactured to the actual dimensions listed below(within tolerances specified in
the applicable referenced ASTM specification) for the corresponding nominal sizes
indicated on Drawings:
a. 4 inch nominal: 3-5/8 inch actual.
b. 6 inch nominal: 5-5/8 inch actual.
C. 8 inch nominal: 7-5/8 inch actual.
UNIT MASONRY
04200-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
C. 25 to 20 deg F: Heat mixing water and dry mix materials to produce mortar
temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F. Heat grout materials to produce grout
temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F. Maintain mortar and grout above
freezing until used in masonry. Heat masonry units to 40 deg F if grouting. Use
heat on both sides of walls under construction.
d. 20 deg F and Below: Heat mixing water and dry mix materials to produce mortar
temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F. Heat grout materials to produce grout
temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F. Maintain mortar and grout above
freezing until used in masonry. Heat masonry units to 40 deg F. Provide
enclosures and use heat on both sides of walls under construction to maintain
temperatures above 32 deg F within the enclosures.
2. Cold-Weather Protection: When the mean daily temperature is within the limits
indicated,provide the following protection:
a. 40 to 25 deg F: Cover masonry with a weather-resistant membrane for 48 hours
after construction.
b. 25 to 20 deg F: Cover masonry with insulating blankets or provide enclosure and
heat for 72 hours after construction to prevent freezing. Install wind breaks when
wind velocity exceeds 15 mi./h.
C. 20 deg F and Below: Provide enclosure and heat to maintain temperatures above
32 deg F within the enclosure for 96 hours after construction.
3. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried out,but not less than 7 days
after completion of cleaning.
E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity
conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial
shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates
with temperatures of 100 deg F and above.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following:
1. Concrete Masonry Units:
a. New Milford Block&Supply Corp.,New Milford, CT
b. Westbrook Concrete Block Co. Inc.,Westbrook CT
C. Connecticut Valley Block,Inc. West Springfield,MA
d. Chicopee Mason Supply, Chicopee,MA
2. Portland Cement, Mortar Cement, and Lime:
a. Essroc Materials,Inc.
UNIT MASONRY 04200-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms,under cover, and in a dry location to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, and
other causes. If units become wet,do not install until they are in an air-dried condition.
B. Store premixed mortar and grout materials in sealed packaging, on elevated platforms, under
cover, and in a dry location,until placed in dispensing equipment ready for use.
C. Store masonry accessories,including metal items,to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
and oil.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.
2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,
secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold
cover in place.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least
3 days after building masonry walls.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout,mortar,and soil that come in contact with such
masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on
ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames,as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes,from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt on completed masonry.
5. Install temporary expanded polystyrene insulation board in all expansion joints full height
to prevent mortar from entering joints.
D. Cold-Weather Requirements:Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit masonry
damaged by frost or freezing conditions. Comply with the following requirements:
1. Cold-Weather Construction: When the ambient temperature is within the limits indicated,
use the following procedures:
a. 40 to 32 deg F: Heat mixing water and dry mix materials to produce mortar
temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F.
b. 32 to 25 deg F: Heat mixing water and dry mix materials to produce mortar
temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F. Heat grout materials to produce grout ,,.wk,
temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F. Maintain mortar and grout above
freezing until used in masonry.
UNIT MASONRY 04200-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
Welding Code-Aluminum."
1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and,if pertinent,has undergone recertification.
H. Mockup: Prior to installing unit masonry,construct sample wall panels to verify selections made
under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as other qualities of
materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for final unit of Work.
1. Locate mockups as part of final wall assembly in the locations indicated or, if not
indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Build mockups of each type of masonry construction
a. Include exterior CMU with window opening representative of front fagade..
a. Include window complying with requirements of Division 8 Section "Aluminum
Architectural Windows."
b. Include granite work where reinstallation of existing granite is indicated.
C. Include sealant-filled joint complying with requirements of Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants."
3. Build mockup for the following types of masonry in sizes approximately 48 inches long
by 48 inches high by full thickness,including face and back-up as well as accessories.
Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in each mockup.
a. Typical exterior CMU wall to represent masonry materials of the main fagade of
the building..
4. Clean exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner indicated.
5. Location of panel will be determined in the field by the Architect.
6. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
7. Protect accepted mockups from the elements.
8. It is intended that the mockups shall be left in place as part of the final wall construction
if approved.
a. Acceptance of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units;
relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors;tooling of joints;
aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities
specifically approved by the Architect.
b. Acceptance of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in mockups,unless such deviations are specifically
approved by Architect in writing.
I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of
Division I Section 'Project Meetings."
1.06 DELIVERY STORAGE,AND HANDLIN G:
UNIT MASONRY 04200-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. Contractor shall employ and pay a qualified professional engineer to provide a survey and
inspection of foundations for compliance with dimensional tolerances.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance,an independent testing agency must
demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria
conforming to ASTM C 1093,that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct
the testing indicated without delaying the Work.
C. Preconstruction Testing: Employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform the
following preconstruction testing to establish compliance of proposed materials and construction
with specified requirements:
1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each different concrete masonry unit indicated, test
units for strength, absorption,and moisture content per ASTM C 140.
2. Prism Test: For each type of wall construction indicated, test masonry prisms per
ASTM E 447,Method B.
3. Test mortar properties per test methods of ASTM C 270.
4. Evaluate mortar composition and properties per ASTM C 780.
5. Test grout compressive strength per ASTM C 1019 .
D. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated,provide materials and construction identical to those
of assemblies with fire resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and
inspecting agency, or by another means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Certificates: Provide one of the following:
a. U.L.certificate that concrete masonry units are manufactured in conformance with
"Standard for Concrete Masonry Units" (UL-618).
b. U.L. certificate that concrete masonry units are in conformance with requirements
established by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for the class based on fire tests
conducted in accordance with the "Standard for Fire Tests of Building
Construction and Materials" (UL-263).
2. Identification: Fire resistive units shall bear identifiable mark applied to each unit for
ease of identification during construction. Mark shall not be exposed after unit in laid in
it's final position.
E. Single-Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform
texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics,from
one source and by a single manufacturer for each different product required.
F. Single-Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform
quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious
component and from one source or producer for each aggregate, with all ingredients premixed
dry and delivered to site..
G. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 "Structural
Welding Code - Steel," D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel", and D1.2 "Structural
UNIT MASONRY 04200-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
D. Samples for initial selection of the following:
I. Unit masonry samples in small-scale form showing the full range of colors and textures
available for each different exposed masonry unit required.
2. Colored-masonry mortar samples showing the full range of colors available.
E. Samples for verification of the following:
1. Full-size units for each different exposed masonry unit required showing the full range
of exposed colors,textures,and dimensions to be expected in the completed construction.
2. Colored-masonry mortar samples for each color required showing the full range of colors
expected in the finished construction. Make samples using the same sand and mortar
ingredients to be used on the Project. Label samples to indicate type and proportion
amount of colorant used.
3. Weep holes/vents in color to match mortar color.
4. Accessories embedded in the masonry.
F. Mockups: Install sample section of wall in-place for Architect's review before proceeding with
each type of exposed masonry construction
1. Review of sample is for appearance only. Neither receipt of list nor acceptance of
mockup constitutes approval of deviations from Contract Documents unless such
deviations are specifically brought to the attention of the Architect and approved in
writing.
G. Material certificates for the following, signed by manufacturer and Contractor,certifying that
each material complies with requirements.
1. Each different cement product required for mortar and grout, including name of
manufacturer,brand,type, and weight slips at time of delivery.
2. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars.
3. Each type and size of joint reinforcement.
4. Each type and size of anchors,ties,and metal accessories.
H. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency, employed and paid by
Contractor or manufacturer,indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of the
following proposed masonry materials with requirements indicated:
1. Mortar complying with BIA MI.
2. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients.
3. Masonry units.
4. Submit reports at least 14 days prior to beginning the masonry.
1. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
UNIT MASONRY 04200-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 7 Section"Flashing and Sheet Metal"for exposed sheet-metal flashing installed
in masonry.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants".
3. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Architectural Windows".
C. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include the following:
1. Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural frame
installed under Division 5 Section "Structural Steel."
D. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include the following:
1. Steel lintels for unit masonry specified in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications."
2. Wood nailers and blocking built into unit masonry specified in Division 6 Section'Rough
Carpentry."
3. Hollow metal frames in unit masonry openings specified in Division 8 Section "Steel
Doors and Frames."
5. Grouting of cells,bolting and welding of angles and work to tie the walls as indicated on
the structural drawings shall be completed under this section.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths (fm) at 28
days.
L For Concrete Unit Masonry: As follows,based on net area:
.fm= 1900 psi.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each different masonry unit, including special types used in the Work,
accessory, and other manufactured product specified.
C. Shop drawings for reinforcing detailing fabrication, bending, and placement of unit masonry
reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315 'Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement"
showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of masonry
reinforcement.
1. Coordinate layout of dowels into walls,footings and other concrete embedment to locate
reinforcement into concrete masonry cores. '"h`'
UNIT MASONRY
04200-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 04200 -UNIT MASONRY
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and conditions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary General
Conditions and all Division 1 Sections, apply to the work of this section.
B. Time,manner, and requirements for submitting filed sub-bids:
1. Sub-bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall be
filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at a time and place as
stipulated in the "NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS".
The following shall appear on the upper left hand comer of the envelope.
NAME OF SUB-BIDDER:
NAME OF PROJECT:
SUB-BID FOR SECTION: 04200-UNIT MASONRY
2. Each sub-bid submitted for work under this Section shall be on forms furnished
by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the
General Laws,as amended. Sub-bid forms may be obtained at the office of the
Architect-Engineer or may be obtained by written request.
3. Sub-bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a BID
BOND or CASH or CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURER'S or CASHIER'S
CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company payable to the City of
Northampton in the amount of 5 percent of the bid. A sub-bid accompanied by
any other form of bid deposit than those specified will be rejected.
C. Sub-Sub-Bid Requirements: (NONE REQUIRED UNDER THIS SECTION).
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Concrete unit masonry.
2. Reinstallation of existing granite.
3. Insulation in masonry walls.
4: Installation of clip angles and lintels provided by 05500 Metal Fabrications
5. Installation of wide flange lintels provided by 05120 Structural Steel
6. Field welding of reinforcing to structural beams and columns.
7. Masonry waste disposal.
8. Grouting of hollow metal frames.
9. Masonry embedded lead coated copper stepped flashing.
UNIT MASONRY 04200 -1
now
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
day's pour of each concrete mix.
6. Comprehensive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39;test two laboratory-cured
specimens at 7 days and two at 28 days.
a. Test two field-cured specimens at 7 days and two at 28 days.
b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength
from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested
at age indicated.
C. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-
cured cylinders,Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures
for protecting and curing in-place concrete.
D. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three
consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive
strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive
strength by more than 500 psi(3.4 MPa).
E. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect,concrete manufacturer,and
Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall
contain Project identification name and number,date of concrete placement,name of
concrete testing and inspecting agency,location of concrete batch in Work, design
compressive strength at 28 days,concrete mix proportions and materials,compressive ,
breaking strength,and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests.
F. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer,sonoscope, or other nondestructive device
may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or
rejection of concrete.
G. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete
when test results indicate that slump,air entrainment,compressive strengths,or other
requirements have not been met,as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting
agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders
complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300—20
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
primer according to manufacturers written instructions to produce a smooth,
uniform,plane,and level surface.
6. Repair defective areas,except random cracks and single holes 1 inch(25 mm)
or less in diameter,by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove
defective areas with clean,square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at
least 3/4-inch(19 mm)clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in
contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching
concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse
aggregate. Place,compact,and finish to,blend with adjacent finished concrete.
Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch(25 mm)or less in diameter with
patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and
clean off dust,dirt,and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and
apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried.
Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched
area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E. Perform structural repairs of concrete,subject to Architect's approval,using epoxy
adhesive and patching mortar.
F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used,subject to Architect's
approval.
3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting
agency to sample materials,perform tests,and submit test reports during concrete
placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in this
Article.
B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each
concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu.m),but less than 25 cu.yd.(19 cu.m),
plus one set for each additional 50 cu.yd.(38 cu.m)or fraction thereof.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite
sample,but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix.
Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 231,pressure method,for normal-weight concrete;
ASTM C 173,volumetric method,for structural lightweight concrete;one test
for each composite sample,but not less than one test for each day's pour of
each concrete mix.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064;one test hourly when air temperature is
40 deg F(4.4 deg C)and below and when 80 deg F(27 deg C)and above,and
one test for each composite sample.
5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567,fresh unit weight of structural lightweight
concrete.One test for each composite sample,but not less that one test for each
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-19
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect.
Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's
approval.
B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar,consisting of one part portland cement
to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16(1.2-mm)sieve,using only
enough water for handling and placing.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities,
cracks,spalls,air bubbles,honeycombs,rock pockets,fins and other projections on the
surface,and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1. Immediately after form removal,cut out honeycombs,rock pockets,and voids
more than 1/2 inch(13 mm)in any dimension in solid concrete but not less
than 1 inch(25 mm)in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete
surface. Clean,dampen with water,and brush-coat holes and voids with
bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent
has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in
place with bonding agent.
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement
and standard portland cement so that,when dry,patching mortar will match
surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify AWN
mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in
place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability
and structural performance as determined by Architect.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces,such as floors and slabs,for
finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high
areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness;use a sloped
template.
1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls,
popouts,honeycombs,rock pockets,crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch
(0.25 mm)wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through
unreinforced sections regardless of width,and other objectionable conditions.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days,correct high areas by grinding.
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface
finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching
mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair
underlayment. Prepare,mix,and apply repair underlayment and primer
according to manufacturers written instructions to produce a smooth,uniform,
plane,and level surface. Featheredges to match adjacent floor elevations.
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping.
Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch(6 mm)
to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare,mix,and apply repair topping and
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-18
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed,tamp,and
trowel-finish concrete surfaces.
3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or
hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with
recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot,
dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq.ft.x h(1 kg/sq.in x
h)before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturers written
instructions after placing,screeding,and bull floating or darbying concrete,but before
float finishing.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces,including underside of beams,
supported slabs,and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period,moist
cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period,continue
curing by one or a combination of the following methods:
D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure
unformed surfaces,including floors and slabs,concrete floor toppings,and other
surfaces,by one or a combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven
days with the following materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
C. Absorptive cover,water saturated,and kept continuously wet. Cover
concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch(300-mm)lap over adjacent
absorptive covers.
3.14 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare,clean,and install joint filler according to manufacturers written instructions.
1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months. Do not fill joints
until construction traffic has permanently ceased.
B. Remove dirt,debris,saw cuttings, curing compounds,and sealers from joints;leave
contact faces of joint clean and dry.
C. Install semirigid epoxy joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches(50
mm)deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint
after hardening.
3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-17
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
(L) 15.
3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and
an unleveled freestanding 10-foot-(3.05-m-)long straightedge,resting on two
high spots and placed anywhere on the surface,does not exceed the following:
a. 1/8 inch(3.2 mm).
E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish,stopping after second
troweling,to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be
installed by either thickset or thin-set method. Immediately after second troweling,and
when concrete is still plastic,slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms,steps,and ramps,
and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Immediately after float finishing,slightly roughen trafficked surface by
brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.
Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.
G. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Before final floating,apply slip-resistive aggregate
finish where indicated and to concrete stair treads,platforms,and ramps. Apply
according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Uniformly spread 25 lb/100 sq.ft.(12 kg/10 sq.m)of dampened slip-resistive
aggregate over surface in one or two applications. Tamp aggregate flush with
surface,but do not force below surface.
2. After broadcasting and tamping,apply float finish.
3. After curing,lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone,
and water to expose slip-resistive aggregate.
3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures,unless otherwise
indicated,after work of other trades is in place. Mix,place,and cure concrete,as
specified,to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete
filling indicated or required to complete Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is
still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard,dense finish with corners,
intersections,and terminations slightly rounded.
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and
foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at
correct elevations,complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing
machines and equipment.
D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads,landings,and associated
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-16
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one
part portland cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding
agent and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial
patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Compress grout
into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion,finish surface with a cork
float.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls,horizontal offsets,and similar unformed
surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces,strike off smooth and finish with a texture
matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed
surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces,unless otherwise indicated.
3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding,restraightening,
and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic,texture concrete surface that has been screeded and
bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes,brooms,or rakes.
1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to surfaces to receive concrete
floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile,portland cement
terrazzo,and other bonded cementitious floor finishes.
C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is
small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten,cut down high spots,and fill
low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform,
smooth,granular texture.
1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated,to surfaces to receive trowel finish,and
to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet
waterproofing,built-up or membrane roofing,or sand-bed terrazzo.
D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish,apply first trowel finish and consolidate
concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten
until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind
smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor
coverings.
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces
exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring,carpet,ceramic or
quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane,paint,or another thin film-finish
coating system.
2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances,measured within 24 hours
according to ASTM E 1155/E 1155M for a randomly trafficked floor surface:
a. Specified overall values of flatness,F(F)25;and levelness,F(L)20;
with minimum local values of flatness,F(F) 17;and levelness,F
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-15
MW
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride,salt,or other materials containing antifreeze
agents or chemical accelerators,unless otherwise specified and approved in
mix designs.
G. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R
and as follows,when hot-weather conditions exist:
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90
deg F(32 deg C)at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice
may be used to control temperature,provided water equivalent of ice is
calculated to total amount of mixing water.Using liquid nitrogen to cool
concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will
not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
3. Fog-spray forms,steel reinforcement,and subgrade just before placing
concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water,soft spots,
or dry areas.
3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with
tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections "*
exceeding ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified.
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material,
arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and
patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8
inch(3 mm)in height.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a
coating or covering material applied directly to concrete,such as
waterproofing,dampproofing,veneer plaster,or painting.
2. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth-formed finish.
C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished concrete:
1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal,moisten
concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until
producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than
that created by the rubbing process.
2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency
of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland
cement to one and one-half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding
admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by
trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout
into voids and remove excess out. When
gr grout whitens,rub surface with
clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-14
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints as indicated to form a continuous
diaphragm.
B. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during
progress of Work. Field-fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.09 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete,verify that installation of formwork,reinforcement,and
embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery,at Project site,or during placement,
unless approved by Architect.
C. Before placing concrete,water may be added at Project site,subject to limitations of
ACI 301.
1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing
admixtures to mix.
D. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will
be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness.
If a section cannot be placed continuously,provide construction joints as specified.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation,within
limits of construction joints,until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly
worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-
textured surface plane,free of humps or hollows,before excess moisture or
bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before
starting finishing operations.
F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete
work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost,freezing
actions,or low temperatures.
1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F(4.4
deg C),uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete
mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F(10 deg C)and not more than 80
10 deg F(27 deg C)at point of placement.
2. Do not use-frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-13
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to
minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing.
Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
Lace overlaps with wire.
3.07 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of
concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired,at
locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement
across construction joints,unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue
reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
2. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral
with walls,near corners,and in concealed locations where possible.
3. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against
hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
4. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against
hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints,
sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth
equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness,as follows:
1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with
shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1!8-inch-(3-mm-)wide
joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear,abrade,or otherwise
damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork,install joint-filler strips
at slab junctions with vertical surfaces,such as column pedestals,foundation walls,
grade beams,and other locations,as indicated.
1. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one
length is required, lace or clip sections together.
E. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at
joints where indicated.
I. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to
prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
3.08 WATERSTOPS
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-12
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at
not less than 50 deg F(10 deg C)for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete
is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and
protection operations are maintained.
B. Leave formwork,for beam soffits,joists,slabs,and other structural elements,that
supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following:
1. 28-day design compressive strength.
C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split,frayed,delaminated,
or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces.
Apply new form-release agent.
D. When forms are reused,clean surfaces,remove fins and laitance,and tighten to close
joints.Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed
concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.
3.04 SHORES AND RESHORES
A. Comply with ACI 318(ACI 318M),ACI 301,and recommendations in ACI 347R for
design,installation,and removal of shoring and reshoring.
B. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate
and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or
deflection.
3.05 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. See architect for waterproofing requirements.
3.06 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice"for placing
reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder
before placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale,earth,ice,and other foreign materials.
C. Accurately position,support,and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate
and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do
not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.
1. Shop-or field-weld reinforcement according to AWS D1.4,where indicated.
D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete,not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-11
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA Awk
E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete
surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete
surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1
vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways,reglets,recesses,and the like,for easy
removal.
1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
F. Set edge forms,bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support
screed strips;use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
F. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of
formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and
securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms
at inconspicuous locations.
H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. (Coordinate all
locations with architect.)
I. Form openings,chases,offsets,sinkages,keyways,reglets,blocking,screeds,and
bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing
such items.
J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips,wood,sawdust,
dirt,and other debris just before placing concrete.
K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete,as required,to prevent mortar
leaks and maintain proper alignment.
L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent,according to manufacturer's
written instructions,before placing reinforcement.
3.02 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining
work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings,
templates,diagrams,instructions,and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1. Install anchor bolts,accurately located,to elevations required.
2. Install reglets to receive top edge of foundation sheet waterproofing and to
receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls,
where flashing is shown at lintels,shelf angles,and other conditions.
3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.
3.03 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. General: Formwork,for sides of beams,walls,columns,and similar parts of the Work,
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice."
2.12 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure,batch,mix,and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94,and furnish batch ticket information.
B. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure,batch,mix,and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116,and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F(30 and 32 deg C),reduce
mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes;when air temperature
is above 90 deg F(32 deg C),reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
C. Project-Site Mixing: Measure,batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete
according to ASTM C 94. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch
machine mixer.
1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu.yd.(0.76 cu.m)or smaller,continue mixing at least
one and one-half minutes,but not more than five minutes after ingredients are
in mixer,before any part of batch is released.
2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu.yd.(0.76 cu.m),increase mixing time by
15 seconds for each additional 1 cu.yd.(0.76 cu.m).
3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work,indicating
Project identification name and number,date,mix type,mix time,quantity,and
amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in
structure.
PART 3—EXECUTION
3.01 FORMWORK
A. Design,erect,shore,brace,and maintain formwork,according to ACI 301,to support
vertical,lateral,static,and dynamic loads,and construction loads that might be applied,
until concrete structure can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size,shape,alignment,
elevation,and position indicated,within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Limit concrete surface irregularities,designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual,as
follows:
1. Class A, 1/8 inch(3 mm).
!* D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
laboratory trial mix or field test databases,as follows:
1. Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301.
2. Proportion lightweight structural concrete according to ACI 211.2 and
ACI 301.
B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix
designs for the laboratory trial mix basis.
C. Footings,foundation walls,slab-on-Grade,upper level slabs,piles,pile caps,grade
beams
and retaining walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows:
1. Compressive Strength(28 Days): 4000 psi(27.6 MPa).
2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 5401b/cu.yd. (320 kg/cu.m).
3. Maximum Slump: 4 inches(100 mm).
D. Cementitious Materials: For concrete exposed to deicers,limit percentage,by weight,
of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301
requirements.
E. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50 for concrete required to have low
water permeability.
F. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45 for concrete exposed to deicers or
subject to freezing and thawing while moist.
G. Air Content: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in
concrete at point of placement having an air content of 2 to 4 percent,unless otherwise
indicated.
H. Do not air entrain concrete to trowel-finished interior floor slabs. Do not allow
entrapped air content to exceed 3 percent.
I. Limit water-soluble,chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by
weight of cement.
J. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturers written instructions.
1. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture
(superplasticizer)in concrete,as required, for placement and workability.
2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high
temperatures,low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete,concrete for heavy-use
industrial slabs and parking structure slabs,concrete required to be watertight,
and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixes where indicated.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
e. Sternson Group.
f. Tamms Industries Co.;Div. of LaPorte Construction Chemicals North
America,Inc.
g. Vinylex Corporation.
h. Westec Barrier Technologies;Div. of Western Textile Products,Inc.
2.07 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. See architect for water proofing requirements.
2.08 CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182,Class 2,burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,
weighing approximately 9 oz./sq.yd.(305 g/sq.m)dry.
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171,polyethylene film or white burlap-
polyethylene sheet.
C. Water: Potable.
D. Clear,Waterborne,Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309,Type 1,
Class B.
2.09 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.
B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059,Type II,non-redispersible,acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
C. Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881,two-component epoxy resin,capable of
humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces,of class and grade to suit requirements,
and as follows:
1. Type II,non-load bearing,for bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened
concrete.
D. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.0217-inch-(0.55-mm-)thick galvanized
steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of
concrete or debris.
E. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet,not less than 0.0336 inch(0.85
mm)thick,with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to
prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.(Coordinate with architect for locations.)
2.10 CONCRETE MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch(19 mm).
3. Combined Aggregate Gradation: Well graded from coarsest to finest with not
more than 18 percent and not less than 8 percent retained on an individual
sieve,except that less than 8 percent may be retained on coarsest sieve and on
No. 50(0.3-mm)sieve,and less than 8 percent may be retained on sieves finer
than No. 50(0.3 mm).
E. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330.
1. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch(19 mm).
F. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94.
2.05 ADMIXTURES
A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent
water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with
other admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing
calcium chloride.
B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type A. AWN
D. High-Range,Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type F.
E. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type E.
F. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type D.
2.06 WATERSTOPS
A. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, for embedding in concrete to prevent
passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners,intersections,and directional
changes.
1. Profile: Ribbed with center bulb.
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
1. PVC Waterstops:
a. Greenstreak.
b. Meadows: W.R.Meadows,Inc.
C. Murphy: Paul Murphy Plastics Co.
d. Progress Unlimited Inc.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300—6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
prevent spalling of concrete on removal.
1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch(25 mm)to
the plane of the exposed concrete surface.
2. Furnish ties that,when removed,will leave holes not larger than 1 inch(25
mm)in diameter in concrete surface.
3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive
dampproofing or waterproofing.
2.02 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M,Grade 60(Grade 420),deformed.
B. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M,assembled with clips.
1. Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A 615/A 615M,Grade 60(Grade 420),deformed
bars.
C. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496.
D. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497,flat sheet.
2.03 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Bar Supports: Bolsters,chairs,spacers,and other devices for spacing,supporting,and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports
according to CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice"from steel wire,plastic,or precast
concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete,and
as follows:
1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact
forms,use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar
supports.
B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars,ASTM A 615/A 615M,Grade 60(Grade 420). Cut
bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.
2.04 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type II.
B. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595M,Type IP,portland-pozzolan cement.
C. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240,amorphous silica.
D. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33,uniformly graded,and as follows:
1. Class: Moderate weathering region,but not less than 3M.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver,store,and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.
1. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.
2. Repair damaged epoxy coatings on steel reinforcement according to
ASTM D 3963/1)3963M.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous,
true,and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize
number of joints.
1. Plywood,metal,or other approved panel materials.
2. Exterior-grade plywood panels,suitable for concrete forms,complying with
DOC PS 1,and as follows:
a. High-density overlay,Class 1,or better.
b. Medium-density overlay,Class 1,or better,mill-release agent treated
and edge sealed.
C. Structural 1,B-B,or better,mill oiled and edge sealed.
d. B-B (Concrete Form),Class 1,or better,mill oiled and edge sealed.
B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood,lumber,metal,or another approved
material.Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns,Pedestals,and Supports: Metal,glass-fiber-reinforced
plastic,paper,or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt
irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with
sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental
deformation.
D. Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel,stiffened to resist
plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
E. Chamfer Strips: Wood,metal,PVC,or rubber strips,3/4 by 3/4 inch(19 by 19 mm),
minimum.
F. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond
with,stain,or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent
treatments of concrete surfaces.
G. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated,removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced
plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
to conduct the testing indicated,as documented according to ASTM E 548.
1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
Technician,Grade 1,according to ACI CP-I or an equivalent certification
program.
E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same
brand from the same manufacturer's plant,each aggregate from one source,and each
admixture from the same manufacturer.
F. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS DI A, "Structural
Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."
G. ACI Publications: Comply with the following,unless more stringent provisions are
indicated:
1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete."
2. ACI 117,"Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
Materials."
H. Mockups: Cast concrete slabs-on-grade mockup to demonstrate typical joints,surface
finish,texture,tolerances, and standard of workmanship.
1. Build mockups approximately 200 sq.ft. (18.6 sq.m)in the location indicated
or,if not indicated,as directed by Architect.
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will
be constructed.
3. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting construction.
4. If Architect determines that mockups do not meet requirements,demolish and
remove them from the site and cast another until the mockup is approved.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed work.
6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
7. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.
I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Division 1 Section"Project Meetings."
1. Before submitting design mixes,review concrete mix design and examine
procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives
of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend,
including the following:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixes.
C. Ready-mix concrete producer.
d. Concrete subcontractor.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
E. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
F. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated,based on
comprehensive testing of current materials:
G. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following
items complies with requirements:
1. Cementitious materials and aggregates.
2. Form materials and form-release agents.
3. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.
4. Admixtures.
5. Waterstops.
6. Curing materials.
7. Floor and slab treatments.
8. Bonding agents.
9. Adhesives.
10. Vapor retarders.
11. Epoxy joint filler.
12. Joint-filler strips.
13. Repair materials. Ao"
H. Minutes of preinstallation conference.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work
similar in material,design,and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work
has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified
to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for formwork and shoring and reshoring installations that are similar to those
indicated for this Project in material,design,and extent.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed
concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities
and equipment.
1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed
Concrete Association's Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production
Facilities.
D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency,acceptable to A
authorities having jurisdiction,qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 03300—CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete,including formwork,reinforcement,
concrete materials,mix design,placement procedures,and finishes.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section"Earthwork"for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
2. Division 3 Section"Concrete Toppings" for metallic and nonmetallic concrete
floor toppings.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of
blended hydraulic cement,fly ash and other pozzolans,ground granulated blast-furnace
slag,and silica fume.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when
characteristics of materials,project conditions,weather,test results,or other
circumstances warrant adjustments.
1. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication,bending,and placement,
prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."
Include material,grade,bar schedules,stirrup spacing,bent bar diagrams,arrangement,
and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for
openings through concrete structures.
D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified
professional engineer detailing fabrication,assembly,and support of formwork. Design
and engineering of formwork are Contractor's responsibility.
1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping
formwork,shoring removal,and installing and removing reshoring.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
3.8 MULCHING
A. Mulch backfilled surfaces of pits,trenches,and other areas indicated.
B. Organic Mulch: Apply the following average thickness of organic mulch and finish level
with adjacent finish grades.Do not place mulch against trunks or stems.
1. Thickness: 3 inches (75 mm).
3.9 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Apply antidesiccant using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks,
branches, stems,twigs,and foliage.
1. When deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full-leaf,spray with antidesiccant
at nursery before moving and again two weeks after planting.
3.10 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. During tree and shrub work,keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly
condition.
B. Protect trees and shrubs from damage due to landscape operation, operations by other
contractors and trades,and trespassers.Maintain protection during installation and
maintenance periods. Treat,repair,or replace damaged landscape work as directed.
3.11 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil and waste material,including excess subsoil, unsuitable
soil,trash,and debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02955
look
TREES AND SHRUBS 02955-10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. Set container-grown stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of ball raised
above adjacent finish grades as indicated.
1. Carefully remove containers so as not to damage root balls.
2. Place stock on setting layer of compacted planting soil.
3. Place backfill around ball in layers,tamping to settle backfill and eliminate voids
and air pockets.When pit is approximately 1/2 backfilled,water thoroughly
before placing remainder of backfill.Repeat watering until no more is absorbed.
Water again after placing and tamping final layer of backfill.
C. Set bare-root stock on cushion of planting soil. Spread roots without tangling or turning
toward surface, and carefully work backfill around roots by hand. Puddle with water
until backfill layers are completely saturated.Plumb before backfilling,and maintain
plumb while working backfill around roots and placing layers above roots.Remove
injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break.
D. Dish and tamp top of backfill to form a 3-inch(75-mm)high mound, (saucer),around the
rim of the pit.Do not cover top of root ball with backfill.
E. Wrap trees of 1.5-inch caliper or greater with trunk-wrap tape. Start at base of trunk and
spiral cover trunk to height of first branches. Overlap wrap,exposing half the width, and
securely attach without causing girdling. Inspect tree trunks for injury,improper pruning,
and insect infestation and take corrective measures required before wrapping.
3.6 PRUNING
A. Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs according to standard horticultural practice.
Prune trees to retain required height and spread. Unless otherwise directed by Architect,
do not cut tree leaders;remove only injured or dead branches from flowering trees.Prune
shrubs to retain natural character. Shrub sizes indicated are size after pruning.
3.7 GUYING AND STAKING
A. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 2-through 5-inch(50-through 125-mm)
caliper. Stake trees of less than 2-inch(50-mm)caliper only as required to prevent wind
tip-out. Use a minimum of 2 stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches (450
mm)below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend at least 72 inches(1800 mm)
above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating balls or root masses.
Support trees with 2 strands of tie wire encased in hose sections at contact points with
tree trunk.Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.Use number of stakes as
follows:
1. Two stakes for trees up to 12 feet(3.6 m)high and 2 1/2 inches (63 mm)or less
in caliper. Use 3 stakes for trees less than 14 feet(4.2 m)high and up to 4-inch
(100-mm)caliper. Space stakes equally around trees.
TREES AND SHRUBS 02955-9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
collar set at same grade as in nursery,but 1 inch(25 mm)below finish grade,
unless otherwise indicated.
a. Setting Layer: Allow 9 inches (225 mm)of planting soil.
2. Balled and Burlapped Trees and Shrubs: Excavate approximately 1-1/2 times as
wide as ball diameter and equal to ball depth,plus the following setting layer
depth:
a. Setting Layer: Allow 3 inches (75 mm)of planting soil.
3. Container-Grown Trees and Shrubs: setting-layer depth:
Excavate to container width and depth,plus the following setting layer depth:
a. Setting Layer: Allow 6 inches (150 mm)of planting soil.
4. Where drain tile is shown or required under planted areas, excavate to top of
porous backfill over tile.
B. Dispose of subsoil removed from landscape excavations.Do not mix with planting soil
or use as backfill.
C. Obstructions: Notify Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or
shrubs are encountered in excavations.
1. Hardpan Layer: Drill 6-inch(150-mm)diameter holes into free-draining strata or
to a depth of 10 feet(3 m), whichever is less,and backfill with free-draining
material.
D. Drainage: Notify Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or
retention in tree or shrub pits.
E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate out,before placing setting layer and
positioning trees and shrubs.
3.5 PLANTING TREES AND SHRUBS
A. Set balled and burlapped stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of ball raised
above adjacent finish grades as indicated.
1. Place stock on setting layer of compacted planting soil.
2. Remove burlap and wire baskets from tops of balls and partially from sides, but
do not remove from under balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting.Do not
use planting stock if ball is cracked or broken before or during planting
operation.
3. Place backfill around ball in layers,tamping to settle backfill and eliminate voids
and air pockets.When pit is approximately 1/2 backfilled, water thoroughly
before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more is absorbed.
Water again after placing and tamping final layer of backfill.
TREES AND SHRUBS 02955-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
D. Hose Chafing Guard: Reinforced rubber or plastic hose at least 1/2 inch(13 mm)in
diameter,black,cut to lengths required to protect tree trunks from damage.
E. Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape,white, 6 inches(150 mm)long.
2.13 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Antidesiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion,permeable moisture retarder,film forming,for
trees and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix
according to manufacturer's instructions.
B. Trunk-Wrap Tape: Two layers of crinkled paper cemented together with bituminous
material,4-inch(100-mm-)wide minimum,with stretch factor of 33 percent.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive trees and shrubs for compliance with requirements and for
conditions affecting performance of work of this Section.Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake
locations, outline areas,adjust locations when requested,and obtain Architect's
acceptance of layout before planting. Make minor adjustments as may be required.
3.3 PLANTING SOIL PREPARATION
A. Before mixing,clean topsoil of roots,plants, sod, stones,clay lumps,and other
extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.
B. Mix soil amendments and fertilizers with topsoil at rates indicated. Delay mixing
fertilizer if planting does not follow placing of planting soil within a few days.
C. For tree pit and trench backfill,mix planting soil before backfilling and stockpile at site.
3.4 EXCAVATION
A. Pits and Trenches: Excavate with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation slightly
raised at center to assist drainage.Loosen hard subsoil in bottom of excavation.
1. Bare-Root Shrubs: Excavate at least 12 inches (300 mm)wider than root spread
and deep enough to allow setting of roots on a layer of planting soil and with
02955-7
TREES AND SHRUBS
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
C. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25
percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic
substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, and material harmful to plant growth.
D. Water: Potable.
2.10 FERTILIZER
A. Bonemeal: Commercial,raw, finely ground;minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 20
percent phosphoric acid.
B. Superphosphate : Commercial,phosphate mixture, soluble;minimum of 20 percent
available phosphoric acid.
C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character,
consisting of fast and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic
sources of urea-form,phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:
1. Composition: 5 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5 percent
potassium,by weight.
D. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble
nitrogen,phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:
1. Composition: 5 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5 percent
potassium,by weight.
2. Composition: Nitrogen,phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended
in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency.
2.11 MULCHES
A. Organic Mulch: Organic mulch,free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top
dressing of trees and shrubs,consisting of one of the following:
1. Type: Ground or shredded bark.
2.12 STAKES AND GUYS
A. Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound,new hardwood,redwood, or pressure-
preservative treated softwood,free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects,2 by 2
inches (50 by 50 mm)by length indicated,pointed at one end.
B. Guy and Tie Wire: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1,galvanized-steel wire, 2-
strand, twisted,0. 106 inch(2.7 mm) in diameter.
C. Guy Cable: 5-strand, 3/16-inch(4.8-mm)diameter, galvanized-steel cable, with zinc-
coated turn buckles, 3-inch(75-mm)long minimum, with two 3/8-inch(10-mm) A"k
galvanized eyebolts.
TREES AND SHRUBS
02955-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. Ball Size: Not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI 260.1 for type and
size of tree or shrub required. Increase ball size or modify ratio of depth to diameter to
encompass enough fibrous and feeding-root system necessary for full recovery of trees
and shrubs.
C. Wrap,tie, and rigidly support earth ball as recommended by ANSI 260.1 for size of balls
required;drum-lace balls with a diameter of 30 inches (760 mm)or greater.
2.6 CONTAINER-GROWN STOCK
A. Provide healthy,vigorous,well-rooted trees or shrubs established in container. Provide
balled and burlapped stock when required trees or shrubs exceed maximum size
recommended by ANSI 260.
B. Containers: Rigid containers that will hold ball shape and protect root mass during
shipping.Provide trees and shrubs established in containers of not less than minimum
sizes recommended by ANSI 260.1 for kind,type, and size of trees and shrubs required.
2.7 BARE-ROOT STOCK
A. Provide shrubs with a well-branched,fibrous-root system developed by transplanting or
"* root pruning and with not less than minimum root spread recommended by ANSI 260.1
for kind and size of trees and shrubs required.
2.8 TOPSOIL
A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268,fertile,friable,naturally loamy,pH range of 5.5 to 7.4 percent
organic material minimum,free of stones 1 inch(25 mm)or larger in any dimension, and
other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.
1. Topsoil Source: Amend existing surface soil to produce topsoil. Supplement
with imported topsoil when required.
2.9 SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Peat Humus: For acid-tolerant trees and shrubs, provide peat moss with a pH range of 3.2
to 4.5, coarse fibrous texture,medium-divided sphagnum moss peat or reed-sedge peat.
B. Sawdust or Ground-Bark Humus: Decomposed,nitrogen-treated,of uniform texture,
free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.
1. When site treated,mix with at least 0. 15 lb(2.4 kg)of ammonium nitrate or
0.25 lb(4 kg)of ammonium sulfate per cu. ft. (cu.m) of loose sawdust or ground
bark.
400*
TREES AND SHRUBS 02955-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish nursery-grown trees and shrubs conforming
to ANSI 260.1,with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning.
Provide well shaped, fully branched,healthy, vigorous stock free of disease, insects,
eggs,larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald,injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.
B. Grade: Provide trees and shrubs of sizes and grades conforming to ANSI 260.1 for type
of trees and shrubs required. Trees and shrubs of a larger size may be used if acceptable
to Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls.
C. Label at least 1 tree and 1 shrub of each variety and caliper with a securely attached,
waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.
1• Where formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees or shrubs are shown,
select stock for uniform height and spread, and number label to assure symmetry
in planting.
2.2 SHADE AND FLOWERING TREES
A. Shade Trees: Single-stem trees with straight trunk, well-balanced crown, and intact
leader, of height and caliper indicated,conforming to ANSI 260.1 for type of trees
required.
1. Branching Height: 1/3 to 1/2 of tree height.
B. Small Trees: Small upright or spreading type,branched or pruned naturally according to
species and type, and with relationship of caliper, height,and branching recommended
by ANSI 260.1.
C. Provide balled and burlapped trees.
2.3 DECIDUOUS SHRUBS
A. Deciduous shrubs with not less than the minimum number of canes required by and
measured according to ANSI 260.1 for type, shape, and height of shrub.
B. Container-grown deciduous shrubs will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped
deciduous shrubs subject to meeting ANSI 260.1 limitations for container stock.
2.4 BROADLEAF EVERGREENS
A. Form and Size: Normal-quality, well-balanced, broadleaf evergreens,of type, height,
spread, and shape required, conforming to ANSI 260.1.
2.5 BALLED AND BURLAPPED STOCK
A. Provide trees and shrubs dug with firm,natural ball of earth in which they are grown.
TREES AND SHRUBS
02955-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
ek 1. Plant frost-tender trees and shrubs only after danger of frost is past or before
frost season to allow establishment before first frost. Do not plant in frozen
ground.
B. Coordination with Lawns: Plant trees and shrubs after finish grades are established and
before planting lawns,unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
1. When planting trees and shrubs after lawns,protect lawn areas and promptly
repair damage caused by planting operations.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to,and run concurrent with,other warranties made
by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Warrant living trees and shrubs for a period of one year after date of
Substantial Completion, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth,
except for defects resulting from lack of adequate maintenance,neglect, or abuse by
Owner, abnormal weather conditions unusual for warranty period, or incidents which are
beyond Contractor's control.
C. Remove and replace dead trees and shrubs immediately unless required to plant in the
succeeding
D. Replace trees and shrubs that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition
at end of warranty period.
E. A limit of one replacement of each tree and shrub will be required,except for losses or
replacements due to failure to comply with requirements.
1.8 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintain trees and shrubs by pruning,cultivating, watering, weeding,fertilizing,
restoring planting saucers,tightening and repairing stakes and guy supports, and resetting
to proper grades or vertical position, as required to establish healthy,viable plantings.
Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease.Restore or replace
damaged tree wrappings.Maintain trees and shrubs for the following period:
1. Maintenance Period: 3 months following Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 TREE AND SHRUB MATERIAL
TREES AND SHRUBS 02955-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of trees and shrubs indicated,
complying with applicable requirements of ANSI 260. 1 "American Standard for Nursery
Stock."
1. Selection of trees and shrubs purchased under allowances will be made by
Architect, who will tag stock at their place of growth before they are prepared
for transplanting.
C. Measurements: Measure trees and shrubs according to ANSI 260. 1 with branches and
trunks or canes in their normal position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. Take
caliper measurements 6 inches (150 mm)above ground for trees up to 4-inch(100-
mm)caliper size, and 12 inches (300 mm)above ground for larger sizes. Measure main
body of tree or shrub for height and spread;do not measure
branches or roots tip-to-tip.
D. Observation: Architect may observe trees and shrubs either at place of growth or at site
before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size and
quality. Architect retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition
of balls and root systems, insects, injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory
or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or
shrubs immediately from Project site.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver freshly dug trees and shrubs.Do not prune before delivery,except as approved
by Architect. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald,drying, sweating,
whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or
shrubs in such a manner as to destroy natural shape.Provide protective covering during
delivery.Do not drop trees and shrubs during delivery.
B. Handle balled and burlapped stock by the root ball.
C. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and install
immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs
in shade,protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.
1. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil,peat moss, sawdust, or other
acceptable material.
2. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.
3. Water root systems of trees and shrubs stored on site with a fine-mist spray.
Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist condition.
1.6 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate planting of trees and shrubs during normal planting seasons for such work in
location of Project. Am*
TREES AND SHRUBS 02955-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
elk SECTION 02955–TREES AND SHRUBS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Trees.
2. Shrubs.
3. Fertilizers and Mulches.
4. Stakes and guys.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 2 Section"Site Clearing"for protection of existing trees and planting,
topsoil stripping and stockpiling, and site clearing.
2. Division 2 Section'Earthwork" for excavation,filling,rough grading,and
subsurface aggregate drainage and drainage backf 11.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses,names and address of architects and owners, and other
information specified.
C. Planting schedule indicating anticipated dates and locations for each type of planting.
D. Maintenance instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner for
maintenance of landscape work during entire year. Submit before expiration of required
maintenance periods.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed landscaping
work similar in material,design,and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a
record of successful tree and shrub establishment.
TREES AND SHRUBS 02955-1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
D. Remove waste and foreign materials, including weeds, soil cores, grass, vegetation, and
turf, and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property.
E. Till stripped,bare, and compacted areas thoroughly to a depth of 6 inches (150 mm).
F. Apply required soil amendments and initial fertilizers and mix thoroughly into top 4
inches (100 mm)of soil. Provide new planting soil as required to fill low spots and meet
new finish grades.
G. Apply seed and protect with straw mulch as required for new lawns.
H. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new grass is established.
3.7 SATISFACTORY LAWN
A. Seeded lawns will be satisfactory provided requirements, including maintenance,have
been met and a healthy, uniform,close stand of grass is established, free of weeds, bare
spots exceeding 5 by 5 inches (125 by 125 mm),and surface irregularities.
B. Replant lawns that do not meet requirements and continue maintenance until lawns are
satisfactory.
3.8 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by lawn work from paved areas. Clean wheels A"k
of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto surface of roads, walks, or
other paved areas.
B. Erect barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from
traffic. Maintain barricades throughout maintenance period until lawn is established.
END OF SECTION 02930
LAWNS
02930-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. Sow seed with a spreader or a seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when
wind velocity exceeds 5 mph(8 km/h).Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities
in 2 directions at right angles to each other.
1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or
storage.
B. Sow seed at the following rates:
1. Seeding Rate: 2 lb per 1000 sq.ft. (1 kg per 100 sq. m).
C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch(3 mm) of topsoil,roll lightly, and water with fine
spray.
D. Protect seeded slopes exceeding 1:4 against erosion with erosion-control blankets
installed and stapled according to manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Protect seeded areas against hot,dry weather or drying winds by applying peat mulch
within 24 hours after completion of seeding operations. Soak and scatter uniformly to a
depth of 3/16 inch(4.8 mm)thick and roll to a smooth surface.
3.5 HYDROSEEDING NEW LAWNS
A. Hydroseeding: Mix specified seed,fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using equipment
specifically designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly
blended into homogenous slurry suitable for hydraulic application.
1. Mix slurry with nonasphaltic tackifier.
2. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a 1-step process. Apply mulch
at the minimum rate of 1500 lb per acre(16.5 kg per 100 sq. m)dry weight but
not less than the rate required to obtain specified seed-sowing rate with seed mix
as listed at the end of this Section.
3.6 RECONDITIONING LAWNS
A. Recondition existing lawn areas damaged by Contractor's operations,including storage
of materials or equipment and movement of vehicles. Also recondition lawn areas where
settlement or washouts occur or where minor regrading is required.
1. Recondition other existing lawn areas.
B. Remove sod and vegetation from diseased or unsatisfactory lawn areas;do not bury into
soil.Remove topsoil containing foreign materials resulting from Contractor's operations,
including oil drippings,fuel spills, stone,gravel,and other construction materials, and
replace with new topsoil.
C. Where substantial lawn remains, mow,dethatch,core aerate, and rake.Remove weeds
before seeding. Where weeds are extensive, apply selective herbicides as required. Do
not use pre-emergence herbicides.
LAWNS 02930-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A
A. Limit subgrade preparation to areas that will be planted in the immediate future.
B. Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches(100 mm). Remove stones larger than
1-1/2 inches (38 mm)in any dimension and sticks,roots,rubbish,and other extraneous
matter.
C. Mix soil amendments and fertilizers with topsoil at rates recommended from soil testing
results. Delay mixing fertilizer if planting does not follow placing of planting soil within
a few days.Either mix soil before spreading or apply soil amendments on surface of
spread topsoil and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches (100 mm)of topsoil before planting.
D. Spread additional topsoil to depth required to meet thickness,grades,and elevations
shown,after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or
subgrade is frozen.
1. Place approximately 1/2 the thickness of planting soil mixture required.Work
into top of loosened subgrade to create a transition layer and then place
remainder of planting soil mixture.
E. Preparation of Unchanged Grades:Where lawns are to be planted in areas unaltered or
undisturbed by excavating, grading,or surface soil stripping operations,prepare soil as
follows:
1. Remove and dispose of existing grass,vegetation, and turf.Do not turn over into
soil being prepared for lawns.
2. Till surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches(150 mm). Apply required soil
amendments and initial fertilizers and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches(100
mm)of soil. Trim high areas and fill in depressions. Till soil to a homogenous
mixture of fine texture.
3. Clean surface soil of roots,plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous
materials harmful to plant growth.
4. Remove waste material,including grass, vegetation, and turf, and legally dispose
of it off the Owner's property.
F. Grade lawn and grass areas to a smooth,even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture.
Roll and rake,remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.Limit fine
grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future. Remove trash,debris, stones
larger than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)in any dimension, and other objects that may interfere
with planting or maintenance operations.
G. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting when soil is dry. Water thoroughly and
allow surface to dry before planting.Do not create muddy soil.
H. Restore prepared areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and before
planting.
3.4 SEEDING NEW LAWNS
LAWNS 02930-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character,
consisting of fast and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic
sources of urea-form,phosphorous,and potassium in the following composition:
1. Composition: l lb.per 1000 sq.ft. (0.5 kg per 100 sq. m)of actual nitrogen,4
percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium,by weight.
2. Composition: Nitrogen,phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended
in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency.
2.5 SEED MIXTURE
A. Sun and Partial Shade: Provide certified grass-seed blends or mixes,proportioned by
weight, as follows:
Proportion Name Min. Min. Pct. Max.Pct.
Pct. Pure Sd. Weed Sd.
Germ.
50 pct. Kentucky bluegrass 80 85 0.50
(Pea pratensis)
30 pct. Chewings red fescue 85 98 0.50
(Festuca rubra variety)
0
10 pct. Perennial rye grass 90 98 0.50
(Lolium perenne)
10 pct. Redtop 85 92 1.00
(Agrostis alba)
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive lawns and grass for compliance with requirements and for
conditions affecting performance of work of this Section. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures,utilities, sidewalks,pavements, and other facilities,trees, shrubs and
plantings from damage caused by planting operations.
B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and
discharge of soil bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and
walkways.
3.3 PLANTING SOIL PREPARATION
LAWNS 02930-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on the site. Verify suitability of
surface soil to produce topsoil meeting requirements and amend when necessary.
Supplement with imported topsoil when quantities are insufficient. Clean topsoil
of roots,plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful
to plant growth.
2. Topsoil Source: Import topsoil from off-site sources as required. Obtain topsoil
from naturally well drained sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches (100 mm)
deep; do not obtain from bogs or marshes.
3. Topsoil Source: Amend existing surface soil to produce topsoil. Supplement
with imported topsoil when required.
2.3 SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Lime: ASTM C 602, Class T,agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80 percent
calcium carbonate equivalent, with a minimum 99 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36 mm)
sieve and a minimum 75 percent passing a No. 60(250 micrometer) sieve.
1. Provide lime in the form of dolomitic limestone.
B. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade,unadulterated.
C. Sand: Clean, washed,natural or manufactured sand, free of toxic materials.
D. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.
E. Feat Humus: Finely divided or granular texture,with a pH range of 6 to 7.5,composed of
partially decomposed moss peat(other than sphagnum),peat humus,or reed-sedge pear.
F. Sawdust or Ground-Bark Humus: Decomposed,nitrogen-treated,of uniform texture, free
of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.
1. When site treated,mix with at least 0.15 lb(2.4 kg) of ammonium nitrate or 0.25
lb(4 kg)of ammonium sulfate per cu. ft. (cu. m)of loose sawdust or ground
bark.
G. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25
percent by volume of straw, sawdust,or other bedding materials; free of toxic
substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, and material harmful to plant growth.
H. Herbicides: EPA registered and approved, of type recommended by manufacturer.
I. Water: Potable.
2.4 FERTILIZER
A. Bonemeal: Commercial,raw, finely ground;minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 20
percent phosphoric acid.
B. Superphosphate: Commercial,phosphate mixture, soluble;minimum of 20 percent
available phosphoric acid.
LAWNS
02930--4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. Maintain and establish lawns by watering,fertilizing,weeding,mowing,trimming,
replanting, and other operations. Roll,regrade,and replant bare or eroded areas and
remulch to produce a uniformly smooth lawn.
1. Replant bare areas with same materials specified for lawns.
2. Add new mulch in areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or
maintenance operations sufficiently to nullify its purpose. Anchor as required to
prevent displacement.
C. Watering: Provide and maintain temporary piping,hoses, and lawn-watering equipment
to convey water from sources and to keep lawns uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches
(100 mm).
1. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly
seeded areas.
2. Water lawn at the minimum rate of 1 inch(25 mm)per week.
D. Mow lawns as soon as there is enough top growth to cut with mower set at specified
height for principal species planted.Repeat mowing as required to maintain specified
height without cutting more than 40 percent of the grass height.Remove no more than 40
percent of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings.Do not delay mowing until
grass blades bend over and become matted.Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule
initial and subsequent mowings to maintain following grass height:
1. Mow grass from 1/2 to 1 inch(12 to 25 mm)high.
E. Post fertilization:Apply fertilizer to lawn after first mowing and when grass is dry.
1. Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb per 1000 sq.ft. (0.5
kg per 100 sq. m)of lawn area.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SEED
A. Grass Seed: Fresh,clean,dry,new-crop seed complying with the Association of Official
Seed Analysts' "Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.
1. Seed Mixture: Provide seed of grass species and varieties,proportions by weight,
and minimum percentages of purity,germination, and maximum percentage of
weed seed as indicated on Schedules at the end of this Section.
2.2 TOPSOIL
A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268,pH range of 5.5 to 7,4 percent organic material minimum,free
of stones 1 inch(25 mm)or larger in any dimension, and other extraneous materials
harmful to plant growth.
LAWNS 02930-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
E. Material test reports from qualified independent testing agency indicating and
interpreting test results relative to compliance of the following materials with
requirements indicated.
1. Analysis of existing surface soil.
2. Analysis of imported topsoil.
F. Maintenance instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner for
maintenance of landscaping during an entire year. Submit before expiration of required
maintenance periods.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed landscaping
work similar in material, design,and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a
record of successful grass establishment.
B. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish a soil analysis made by a qualified independent soil-testing
agency stating percentages of organic matter,inorganic matter(silt, clay, and sand),
deleterious material,pH, and mineral and plant-nutrient content of topsoil.
1. Report suitability of topsoil for lawn growth. State recommended quantities of
nitrogen,phosphorus, and potash nutrients and any limestone, aluminum sulfate,
or other soil amendments to be added to produce a satisfactory topsoil.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Seed: Deliver seed in original sealed,labeled, and undamaged containers.
1.6 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Planting Season: Sow lawn seed during normal planting seasons for type of lawn work
required. Correlate planting with specified maintenance periods to provide required
maintenance from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecast weather
conditions are suitable for work.
1.7 MAINTENANCE
A. Begin maintenance of lawns immediately after each area is planted and continue until
acceptable lawn is established,but for not less than the following periods:
1. Seeded Lawns: 60 days after date of Substantial Completion.
a. When full maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting
season, or if lawn is not fully established at that time,continue
maintenance during next planting season.
LAWNS
02930-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
SECTION 02930—LAWNS
PART I-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Fine grading and preparing lawn areas.
2. Furnishing and applying new topsoil.
3. Furnishing and applying soil amendments.
4. Seeding new lawns.
5. Reconditioning existing lawn areas.
6. Replanting unsatisfactory or damaged lawns.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for protection of existing trees and planting,
topsoil stripping and stockpiling, and site clearing.
2. Division 2 Section 'Earthwork"for excavation, filling,rough grading,and
subsurface aggregate drainage and drainage backfill.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for the following:
1. Aluminum sulfate.
2. Fertilizers.
3. Grass Seed Mix.
C. Certification of grass seed from seed vendor for each grass-seed mixture stating the
botanical and common name and percentage by weight of each species and variety, and
percentage of purity,germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and
date of packaging.
D. Certification by product manufacturer that the following products supplied comply with
requirements:
1. Limestone.
2. Fertilizers.
LAWNS 02930-1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
C. Pipe and gasket fittings,joining with elastomeric seals in accordance with ASTM
D 3212.
D. Installation in accordance with ASTM D 2321.
E. Join different types of pipe with standard manufactured couplings and fittings
intended for that purpose.
3.5 MANHOLES
A. General: Install manholes complete with accessories as indicated. Form
continuous concrete or split pipe section channels and benches between inlets
and outlet. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finish surface where
manholes occur in pavements. Elsewhere, set tops 3 inches above finish surface,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Place precast concrete manhole sections as indicated, and install in accordance
with ASTM C 891.
C. Provide rubber joint gasket complying with ASTM C 443 at joints of sections.
D. Apply bituminous mastic coating at joints of sections.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Perform testing of completed piping in accordance with local
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Cleaning: Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous
material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each
joint as it is completed.
1. In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for
cleaning.
2. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of day or whenever work
stops.
3. Flush piping between manholes, if required by local authority,to remove
collected debris.
C. Interior Inspection: Inspect piping to determine whether line displacement or
other damage has occurred.
1. Make inspections after pipe between manholes and manhole locations
has been installed and approximately 2 feet of backfill is in place, and
again at completion of project.
2. If inspection indicates poor alignment, debris, displaced pipe, infiltration
or other defects correct such defects, and re-inspect. The Contractor shall
be responsible for coordinating installation standards and inspections by
local authorities having jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION 02740
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02740-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which wastewater disposal
system's materials and products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to the
Owner and DPW.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install piping beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment
indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing
upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other
installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint
as it is completed.
B. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings, where different size or
material of pipes and fittings are connected. Reduction of the size of piping in
the direction of flow is prohibited for gravity flow systems.
C. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow,at minimum slope as shown.
D. Extend sanitary sewer system piping to connect to building sanitary drains, of
sizes and in locations indicated.
3.3 PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR BURIED SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEMS
A. Grade trench bottom and excavations to provide a smooth, firm, stable, and rock-
free foundation,throughout the length of the pipe or structure.
B. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes
or structures are to be laid, and backfill with clean sand or screened gravel to
indicated level. Provide smooth crushed stone base for structures. Maintain
excavations in a stable condition, free of excess water.
C. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of pipe. Fill unevenness with tamped sand
backfill. Dig bell holes at each pipe joint to relieve the bells of all loads and to
ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the foundation.
3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
A. Join and install PVC pipe as follows:
B. Solvent cement joint pipe and fittings,joining with solvent cement in accordance
with ASTM D 2855 and ASTM F 402.
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02740-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2. Health Department Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of
Local regulations pertaining to sanitary sewer systems.
1.5 PERMITS
A. The Contractor is to obtain any road opening permits required for installation of
the sanitary sewer system. All fees associated with this permit shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation
instructions for sanitary sewer system materials and products.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for pipe,manholes and all appurtenances.
C. Inspections: The Contractor is responsible for informing the Engineer and local
authorities having jurisdiction in a timely manner relative to required inspections.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 PVC PIPE
A. PVC nonpressure pipe for gravity sewers shall conform to ASTM D3034 SDR 35
wall thickness.
1. Pipe shall be bell and spigot type, furnished in standard lengths of 12'6".
Bell end shall be an integral wall section with solid cross section rubber
ring, factory assembled. Spigot end shall be beveled to ensure proper
insertion. Spigot end shall be imprinted with an assembly stripe, to
which the bell end of the mated pipe will extend upon proper jointing of
the two pipes.
2. Rubber rings shall conform to ASTM 3212.
3. Pipe ends shall permit checking of the rings with a feeler gauge to ensure
their proper location in the coupling grooves.
4. PVC fittings shall be bell and spigot type, compatible with the pipe.
2.2 MANHOLES
A. General: Provide manholes of dimensions and capacity as indicated.
B. Construction: Pre-cast reinforced concrete 5000 psi @ 28 days reinforcing
ASTM 4-615 with bituminous coating covering all internal areas. Seal all joints
with neoprene gaskets. Structures to withstand HS20-44 loading.
C. Manholes: Provide minimum 36" diameter access covers except as otherwise
noted on plans. Provide manhole and cover to grade.
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02740-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 02740—SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The work includes labor, materials, equipment and services required for
completion of the work under this Section; all as shown on the drawings and as
specified herein.
B. Extent of sanitary sewer system work is shown on drawings,and by requirements
of this section.
C. Refer to Division 2, SECTION 02220 EARTHWORK for excavation and
backfill required for sanitary sewer system.
D. Coordinate with interior building sanitary and drainage piping.
E. Coordinate with other utility work.
F. Provide a complete system as shown in the Drawings.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02200—EARTHWORK
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of
wastewater disposal system products of types, materials, and sizes required,
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5
years.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of
National Standard Plumbing Code, Commonwealth of Massachusetts
Regulations and Local Regulations pertaining to selection and
installation of sanitary sewer system materials and products.
Aow
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02740-1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
D. Flush piping between manholes, if required by local authority,to remove
collected debris.
E. Inspection: Inspect piping to determine whether line displacement or other
damage has occurred. Make inspections after pipe between manholes and
manhole locations has been installed and prior to any backfill is in place, and
again at completion of project. If inspection indicates poor alignment, debris,
displaced pipe,infiltration,or other defects,correct such defects and re-inspect.
END OF SECTION 02720
OOW
STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 02720-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. Install piping beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment
indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing
upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and
C. Couplings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of
lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag
in line and pull past each joint as it is completed.
D. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, as indicated on the drawings.
3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
A. Join and install PVC pipe as follows:
1. Solvent cement joint pipe and fittings, joining with solvent cement in
accordance with ASTM D 2855 and ASTM F 402.
2. Pipe and gasketed fittings, joining with elastomeric seals in accordance
with ASTM D 3212.
3. Installation in accordance with ASTM D 2321
4. Place bell ends or groove end of concrete conduit facing upstream.
5. Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for
use of lubricants,cements, and other special installation requirements. ,
3.4 CATCH BASINS AND MANHOLES
A. Precast Concrete Catchbasins and Manholes: Place precast concrete sections as
shown on drawings. Set tops of frames and grates or covers flush with finish
surface.
1. Use epoxy bonding compound where manhole steps are mortared into
manhole walls.
2. Provide rubber joint gasket complying with ASTM C 443.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Perform testing of completed piping in accordance with local
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Cleaning: Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous
material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each
joint as it is completed.
C. Cover uncompleted structures to prevent debris from collecting in bottom of
structure, and provide barriers around structures to keep unauthorized persons
from accessing structure during construction.
STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 02720-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. Manhole Brick: ANSI/ASTM C 32, Grade MS.
C. Sewer Brick: ANSI/ASTM C 32, Grade SS.
D. Masonry Mortar: ANSI/ASTM C 270,Type M.
2.4 METAL ACCESSORIES
A. Catch Basin Frames and Grates: Gray cast iron,ANSI/ASTM A 48, Class 35 B.
1. Comply with requirements of FS RR-F-621 for type and style indicated.
2. Furnish covers with cast-in legend "DRAW' in 3-inch high letters on
roadway face.
3. Catch basin frames and grates to be LeBaron LF 245 or equal except as
indicated on the drawings.
B. Manhole Steps: Integrally cast into manhole sidewalls, material of type indicated
on drawings.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR BURIED STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
A. Grade trench bottom to provide a smooth, firm, stable, and rock-free foundation,
throughout the length of the pipe.
B. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes
or structures are to be laid, and backfill with structural fill or screened gravel to
indicated level.
C. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of pipe. Fill unevenness with tamped sand
backfill. Dig bell holes at each pipe joint to relieve the bells of all loads and to
ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the foundation. Back fill and
tamp by hand to the springline of the pipe.
3.2 INSTALLATION. GENERAL
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans and details) indicate the
general location and arrangement of the underground storm sewerage system.
Location and arrangement of system layout takes into account many design
considerations. Install the structures as indicated,to the extent practical.
STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 02720-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
D. Inspections: Inspection of the installed pipe system prior to backfill is required.
The Contractor is responsible for informing the Engineer in a timely manner
relative to required inspections.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for drainage pipe specialties.
C. Shop drawings for precast concrete storm drainage catch basins including frames
and covers.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Site Information: Perform site inspection, research public utility records, and
verify existing utility locations within scope of work. Contact "Dig Safe" before
any excavation work. Verify that storm sewerage system piping may be installed
in compliance with original design and referenced standards.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate with other utility work. ,
B. Coordinate with foundation and building construction.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. General: Provide pipe and pipe fitting materials compatible with each other.
B. PVC nonpressure pipe shall conform to ASTM D3034m SDR 35 wall thickness.
Both solid wall and perforated pipe required.
2.2 CONCRETE STRUCTURES
A. Concrete Base: Precast. Use concrete that will attain a 28-day compressive
strength of not less than 3000 psi.
B. Catch basins: Precast concrete, or unit masonry at the Contractor's option,
ANSI/ASTM C 478, sized as indicated, eccentric cone precast top or batter
blocks, or flat top as required.
2.3 MASONRY MATERIALS
A. Concrete Masonry Units: ANSUASTM C 139.
STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 02720-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 02720—STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
This Section includes storm drainage system piping and appurtenances.
A. The work includes labor, materials, equipment and services required for
completion of the work under this Section, all as shown on the drawings and as
specified herein.
B. Extent of storm drainage system work is shown on drawings.
C. Storm drainage system work includes,but is not limited to,the following:
ook'
1. Storm drainage conduits
2. Catch basins,Manholes, frames and grates
D. Comply with the requirements of Section 02200 for excavation and backfilling
required in connection with storm drainage system work.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02200—EARTHWORK
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: A firm specializing and experienced in storm drainage work for not
less than two years.
B. Comply with standards and requirements of City of Northampton,MA,the Mass.
Dept. of Public Works, and other agencies having jurisdiction.
C. Environmental Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Federal and
state environmental agency regulations and the City of Northampton Department
of Public Works requirements pertaining to storm drainage systems as applicable.
STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 02720-1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
G. The contractor shall be required to conduct test in accordance with NFPA 24 for all
underground piping associated with fire protection.
3.05 DISINFECTION
A. The Contractor shall disinfect the lines and tank carrying potable water. The work
shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the City DPW Standards.
Test results shall be sent to the Engineer and local DPW.
B. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment and materials necessary to do the work of
disinfection and shall perform the work in accordance with procedure outlined in the
latest edition of ANSI/AWWA C651 except as otherwise specified herein.
C. The dosage shall be such so as to produce a chlorine concentration of no less than 25
ppm(mg/1)after a contact period of not less than 24 hours.
D. After treatment, the pipeline shall be flushed with clean water until the residual
chlorine content does not exceed 1.0 ppm(mg/1).
E. After flushing samples shall be collected as per Town DPW standards.
F. During the disinfection period, care shall be exercised t prevent contamination of
water in existing mains.
G. The Contractor shall dispose of the water used in disinfecting and flushing in an
acceptable manner.
H. Any temporary connections required for disinfection shall be installed and
subsequently properly abandoned at the Contractor's expense.
END OF SECTION 02666
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 02666-10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
hydrants or blow-offs are not available at high points for releasing air, make
necessary excavations, do backfilling and make taps at such points. Plug
hole after completion of the test.
5. The section under test shall be maintained full of water for a period of 24
hours prior to the combined pressure and leakage test being applied.
6. The meter and gage shall be installed and shall be kept in use during the test
so that water entering water main under test will be measured and the
pressure in the water main indicated.
7. The pressure test shall be made at 1.5 times the normal working water
pressure(based on the elevation of the lowest point of the section under test),
but not less than 150 PSI. If the Contractor cannot achieve the specified
pressure and maintain it for the specified time, with no additional pumping,
the section shall be considered as having failed to pass the test.
8. Following a successful pressure test, or concurrently with test, make a
leakage test by metering the flow of water into the pipe while maintaining in
the water main and pressure equal to the specified test pressure. If the
average leakage during the period exceeds specified the rate of gallons per
hour,the section shall be considered as having failed the leakage test.
"** 9. If the section shall fail to pass the pressure test, the leakage test, or both,
locate, uncover, and repair or replace defective pipes, fittings, or joints,
without extension of time for completion of work. Additional tests and
repairs shall be made until the section passes the specified tests.
10. All joints within vaults shall have no visible leakage. Joints from which
water continues to run or squirt in an active manner will not be accepted.
11. Upon successful completion of the tests, plugs or caps installed for the
testing shall be removed.
12. If, in the judgment of the Engineer, it is impractical to follow the foregoing
procedure exactly for any reasons, modification in the procedure shall be
submitted for approval and be made as approved and accepted, but in any
event the Contractor shall be responsible for the tightness of the line within
the above leakage and pressure requirements.
E. Before submitting system for final approval of the authorities having jurisdiction,
submit to the Engineer a written statement that work has been completed in
accordance with the Contract Documents and signed by the Contractor's
Superintendent.
F. Promptly following satisfactory completion of leakage testing, a report fully
describing test procedure and listing test results shall be submitted to the Engineer
and to governmental agencies having jurisdiction. The report shall be signed by the
Contractor's superintendent.
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 02666-9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA ,
B. After the bolts have been inserted and all nuts have been made up fingertight,
diametrically opposite nuts shall be progressively and uniformly tightened all around
the joint, preferable by use of a torque wrench of the appropriate size and torque for
the bolts.
C. The correct torque as indicated by a torque wrench shall not exceed the sleeve
manufacturer's recommendations.
D. An approved tar coating shall be applied on the entire outer surface of such
couplings, including bolts, following installation.
3.04 TESTING
A. All portions of the water system installed shall be hydrostatically tested for leakage.
B. General Test Requirements
1. Piping shall be adequately restrained against movement before testing.
Pressure line shall have thrust blocks installed and the concrete shall have
attained full design strength before test pressure is applied to the line.
2. Piping system shall be flushed clean, and sediment, scale, dirt, and debris ,.
removed before piping is tested.
3. Adequate provision shall be made for carrying off flushing without causing
erosion or other damage.
4. Piping shall be tested before joints are concealed or made inaccessible.
5. Tests shall be made in the presence of an inspector of the authority having
jurisdiction and in accordance with the DPW Standards.
C. Notice of tests shall be made in writing to the Engineer and the DPW and Water
Department, and received by them at least five days before the date of test.
D. Hydrostatic and Leakage Tests
1. Testing shall be in accordance with AWWA Standard C600, Section 4, and
at test pressure indicated in the DPW Standards.
2. Pressure pipe shall be given combined hydrostatic and leakage tests in
sections of acceptable length as the Engineer shall direct.
3. Furnish and install suitable temporary testing plugs or caps; all necessary
pressure pumps, pipe connections, meters, gages, and other necessary
equipment; and all labor required.
4. Unless it has already been done,the section of pipe to be tested shall be filled
with water of approved quality, and all air shall be expelled from the pipe. If
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 02666-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
C. Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation, and shall be maintained free
from foreign matter during installation.
1. Where necessary, tight-fitting temporary wood bulkheads shall be employed
to close ends of pipeline at end of each day's work.
2. Entire length of pipe shall be thoroughly flushed clean following completion
of backfill.
D. In any pipe showing a distinct crack and in which it is believed there is no incipient
fracture beyond the limits of the visible crack, the cracked portions, if so approved,
may be cut off by and at the expense of the Contractor before the pipe is laid so that
the pipe used will be perfectly sound. The cut shall be made in the sound portion at a
point at least 12 in. from the visible limits of the crack.
1. Except as otherwise approved, all cutting shall be done with a machine
suitable for cutting ductile iron pipe. Hydraulic squeeze cutters are not
acceptable for cutting ductile iron pipe. Travel type cutters and guillotine or
rotary type abrasive saws may be used. All cut ends shall be examined for
possible cracs caused by cutting.
2. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that damage to the lining of
pipe or fittings will render them unfit for use; he shall use the utmost care in
low handling and installing lined and coated pipe and fittings to prevent damage.
Protective guards shall not be removed until the pipe is to be installed.
E. Concrete Thrust Blocks
1. Changes in direction, both vertical and horizontal shall be braced with
concrete thrust blocks.
2. Where pipe is capped for future connection, cap shall be braced with
concrete thrust blocks.
3. Concrete shall meet requirements of Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE
CONCRETE.
4. Thrust block sizing and installation shall be in accordance with DPW
Standards.
3.03 ASSEMBLING SLEEVE-TYPE COUPLINGS
A. Prior to the installation of sleeve-type couplings, the pipe ends shall be cleaned
thoroughly for a distance of 8 in. Soapy water may be used as a gasket lubricant. A
follower and gasket, in that order, shall be slipped over each pipe to a distance of
about 6 in. from the end, and the middle ring shall be placed on the already laid pipe
and until it is properly centered over the joint. The other pipe end shall be inserted
+q, into the middle ring and brought to proper position in relation to the pipe already laid.
!, The gaskets and followers shall then be pressed evenly and firmly into the middle
ring flares.
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 02666-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
11. The post indicator shall be manufactured for the intended dept of trench from
finished grade at the proposed installation locations.
12. Post indicator and valve shall be equal to Clow Model F-5760 and F-5720
respectively.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection
1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all
other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this
installation may properly commence.
2. Verify that water utilities may be installed in strict accordance with all
pertinent codes and regulations,the original design, the referenced standards,
and the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Discrepancies
1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Engineer.
2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies are fully resolved.
3.02 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Piping shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the
referenced DPW Standards. Where exact locating dimensions of piping are not
indicated on the Drawings, the Engineer's approval shall be obtained for proposed
locations.
B. Ductile iron pipe fittings shall be installed in accordance with the DPW Standards.
1. Bottom of trench excavation shall be kept dry and free of water during pipe
installation. Adequate measures including de-watering as required shall be
taken to prevent flotation of pipe in the trench.
2. Each pipe length shall be installed to form a close joint with the next
adjoining length and bring inverts to the required grade.
3. Each pipe length shall have a firm bearing along its entire length. No pipe or
fitting shall be permanently supported on saddles,blocking, or stones.
4. Where indicated,new system shall be connected to existing Municipal Water
Distribution System in accordance with the City Requirements.
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 02666-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2.04 POST INDICATOR VALVES AND BURIED VALVES CONTROLLING WATER
SUPPLIES TO BUILDING FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS.
A. Post indicator valves and buried valves controlling water supplies to sprinkler system
shall be installed where indicated shall be non-rising stem, mechanical joint gate
valves.
B. Valves shall also meet the following requirements:
1. Valve shall be constructed and tested to conform strictly to the latest edition
of the Specifications and test pressures of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
and Associated Factory Mutual Laboratories.
2. Valves shall also conform to the latest edition of the American Water Works
Association.
3. Valve shall be designed for 200 pounds per square inch working water
pressure and tested to 400 pounds per square inch hydrostatic shell test.
4. All valve parts shall be permanently lubricated.
5. End connections shall be mechanical joints. Ends shall have a clear water
way equal to full nominal diameter of the valve. The waterway shall be
smooth and shall have no depression or cavities in the seating area where
foreign material can lodge or collect.
6. Gate valves shall open right and/or in accordance with the Town Standards if
to be used without indicator post.
7. Valves used in conjunction with a UL/FM listed indicator post shall be
modified with a bonnet flange on which the indicator post bolts and comply
with the requirement of UL262.
8. The valve shall be epoxy coated in accordance with the City Water
Department Standards. Said coating shall be non-toxic, impart no taste to
water and shall conform to AWWA C-550,the latest revision.
9. Valves not conforming to all of the requirements of the City Standards shall
be submitted to the Water Department for approval prior to installation.
10. Indicator post shall be constructed to conform strictly to the latest edition of
the Specifications and test pressures of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.,
(UL789) and Associated Factory Mutual Laboratories and be compatible to
be installed with UL/FM valves for use in water lines that supply water
solely to building fire suppression systems. The Contractor shall supply and
install a lock for each post indicator installed. A single master key shall
operate all installed locks. The locks and key shall be in accordance with
requirements of the City Fire Department. The Contractor shall provide four
(4)master keys to be distributed by the Owner.
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 02666-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,NM ,
3. Outer surfaces of couplings including bolts and nuts shall be coated with an
approved tar coating upon installation.
2.02 VALVES AND VALVE BOXES
A. Gate valve shall be iron body, New York Style (Metropolitan Patter) conforming to
AWWA C500. Gate Valve shall have mechanical joint ends, interior epoxy coated,2
in. square operating nut. Valve shall open to right (clockwise). Gate valve shall be
designed to be bottle-tight for a minimum working pressure of 2000 lb.per sq. in.
B. Each valve shall be provided with a valve box. Box shall be 2 pieces slip-style cast
iron and shall be an adjustable telescoping,heavy pattern type.
1. Box shall be designed and constructed to prevent the direct transmission of
traffic loads to the piping or valve.
2. Upper section of box shall have a flange with sufficient bearing area to
prevent undue settlement. Lower section of box shall be designed to enclose
the valve operating nut and stuffing box,and rest on the backfill.
3. Boxes shall be adjustable by 6 in. vertically without reduction of the lap
between sections to less than 4 in.
4. Inside diameter of box shall be at least 5 '/a inch and length of box shall be as
required to suit finish ground elevation.
5. Box cover shall be close fitting and substantially dirt-tight. Top of cover
shall be flush with top of box rim. Cover shall have a word "WATER" cast
into top.
6. Box shall be equal to that as manufactured by the Tyler Corporation.
C. For valves installed with depth of cover substantially greater than that specified,
extensions, including centering spacers, shall be added to the operation nut assembly
to raise the operating nut to a depth below grade equal to that with the normal
required depth of cover.
2.03 FIRE HYDRANTS
A. Hydrant shall conform to AWA C502 and local governmental authorities having
jurisdiction. Hydrant shall be positive automatic drain type to prevent freezing, and
shall have one 4 '/Z inch pumper and two 2 'h inch hose connections, National
Standard Threads. Main valve opening shall be 5 '/o in. and valve shall open to left
(counterclockwise). Inlet connection shall be 6 in., mechanical joint. Operating nut
shall be pentagonal, 1 518 inches point to flat and open left (counterclockwise).
Hydrants shall be painted in accordance with the City specifications.
B. Hydrant shall be City Standard Model or Model K81A Guardian manufactured by
Kennedy Valve Co., and shall be approved by the City Water Department.
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 02666-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
used in the work.
3. Do not permit any water system component to be brought onto the job site
until it has been approved by the Engineer.
B. Record Drawings
1. During the course of installation, carefully shown in red line on a print of the
utility plan all changes made to the water system during installation.
2. Upon completion of the water system installation, these marked plans shall
be supplied to the Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE
A. Ductile iron pipe shall be furnished and installed in sizes as shown on the drawings
and in accordance with the latest ANSI Standards' Designations A21.50 (AWWA
C150)for"Ductile Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds of Sand-Lines Molds
for Water or Other Liquids." Unless otherwise indicated or specified, ductile iron
pipe shall be at least thickness Class 52.
1. DI pipe shall be push-on joint type except as otherwise indicated or specified.
2. CI or DI fittings shall conform to ASA/AWWA A21.10/C100 or
ANSUAWWA A21.10/CI10 respectfully, and shall be of a pressure
classification at least equal to that of the pipe with which they used.
3. Gaskets shall conform to ANSI/AWWA A21.11/C11.
4. Inside of pipe and fittings shall be given a cement lining 1/8 inch minimum
thickness on pipe 12 inches and smaller in accordance with ANSI/AWWA
A21.4/C104. The outside of the pipe and fittings shall be coated with a
standard bituminous coating conforming to ANSI/AWWA A21.6/C106.
5. Pipe for use with sleeve-type couplings shall be as specified above except
that the ends shall be plain(without bells or beads). The ends shall be cast or
machined at right angles to the axis.
B. Sleeve-type couplings shall be cast iron and shall be Dresser style.
1. To ensure correct fitting of pipe and couplings, sleeve-type couplings and
accessories shall be furnished by the supplier of the pipe and shall be of a
pressure rating at least equal to that of the pipeline in which they are to be
installed.
2. Couplings shall be provided with epoxy coated steel bolts.
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 02666-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA ,
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. City Requirements
1. The Contractor shall notify the City Board of Health and DPW sufficiently in
advance of connecting new or relocated water services to existing water
main. All work and materials shall be subject to approval of the City.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements with the
City and State personnel and paying all fees associated with the water system
installation and testing.
3. All water distribution materials and installation shall conform to the
requirements of the City Board of Health Standards. Should discrepancies
exist between the City Standards and this Specification, the City Standards
shall prevail. For materials or methods of installation not included in the
City Standards,but specified herein, the Contractor shall submit this material
or methodology to the City DPW for approval prior to purchase and/or
execution.
B. Inspection and Testing
1. Pipe and fittings shall be inspected and tested at the foundry as required by
the standard specifications to which the material is manufactured. The
Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer in duplicate sworn certificates of
such tests.
2. The Owner reserves the right to have any or all pipe, fittings and special
castings inspected and/or tested by an independent testing agency at either
the manufacturer's plant or elsewhere. Such inspection and tests shall be at
the Owner's expense.
3. Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be subjected to a careful inspection and a
hammer test just before being installed.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Material List
After the award of the Contract and before any water system materials are delivered
to the job site, submit to the Engineer, a complete list of materials proposed to be
furnished and installed.
1. Show manufacturer's name and catalog number for each item, furnish
complete catalog cuts and technical data, and furnish the manufacturer's
recommendations as to method of installation. Amok
2. Upon approval of the Engineer, the manufacturer's recommendations shall
become the basis for acceptance or rejection of actual methods of installation
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 02666-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 02666-WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
PARTl GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all
Sections within DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby
made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
1.02 WORK DESCRIPTION
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications shall consist of providing all labor,
materials and equipment necessary and required to install all of the water distribution
and service facilities in accordance with Contract D_ocuments. This work shall
include but not be limited to:
1. Installation of water distribution system consisting of excavation, piping,
valves and boxes, pipe fittings, thrust blocks, vaults and all necessary and
required accessory items and operations including sheeting, bracing,
pumping and coordination with interior plumbing and electrical contractors.
2. Connection of building water service lines to the water distribution system.
3. Testing and disinfection.
4. Installation of water lines within the Public R.O.W. and/or Easements,
including connections to existing water supply facilities.
5. Work performed under the Water Distribution System Scope of Services
shall be limited to work outside of, and up to a point of ten (10) feet outside
of the buildings(s)foundation wall as shown on the Drawings.
6. The Contractor shall pay for all costs and fees related to connecting water
system to existing services and shall file all applications, details, and
drawings,required by the local authority having jurisdiction.
1.03 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE
Earthwork.................................................................................................Section 02200
Paving and Curbing.................................................................................Section 02600
FireProtection..........................................................................................Section 15300
Plumbing..................................................................................................Section 15400
FireAlarm................................................................................................Section 16000
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 02666-1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. Striping patterns shall conform to the layout shown on the Drawings. Transverse
striping of handicap pathways shall be on 4 in. x 12 in. stripe to space ratio.
C. Strip width shall be the standard 4 inches except wheelchair symbols which shall be as
detailed in the current Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices. The wheelchair
symbols shall be painted in spaces shown on the drawings.
3.07 FINISH TOLERANCES
A. Bituminous Concrete Surface
Plus or minus 0.01 feet at any point from line grade shown on the Drawings.
3.08 REMEDIAL MEASURES
A. Upon direction of the Landscape Architect, cut out, and/or rework all surfaces and
subgrade areas which do not meet the requirements of this Section; perform all remedial
measures at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.09 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
A. Work shall be properly coordinated with the work of other trades. Other trades shall be wA,,
consulted in advance so that proper provisions may be made for installation of their
work and so that the work of this section may be properly finished and connected to the
work of other trades.
3.10 GUARANTEE
Contractor shall guarantee all workmanship for a period of one year from the date of final
acceptance.
END OF SECTION 02600
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING 02600-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2. The surface course shall conform to State Specifications for Top Course
Bituminous Concrete in accordance with the job-mix formula, and it shall be
constructed to a minimum thickness shown on the drawings after compaction. The
finished surface shall conform to proposed grades.
3. All joints at old pavement shall be sawed vertical butt joints which shall receive a
light coating of asphalt emulsion a short time before paving commences, as
directed by the Landscape Architect.
4. Existing areas shall not be disturbed by utility construction.
5. Construction methods shall conform to the Massachusetts Highway Department
Specifications, Section 460,Class I,Bituminous Concrete Pavement,Type-I.
6. Submission of the job-mix formula for the bituminous concrete surface course
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, and it shall be submitted to the
Landscape Architect for approval 10 days prior to the pavement construction.
7. Establishment of grades, grade control, and conformance to finished pavement
surface grade tolerances required shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in
accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. See below for finish
tolerances.
8. Roll the surface until a smooth and dense texture is obtained, free draining, and
free from any and all birdbaths.
3.05 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE CURB
A. Bituminous curb shall be extruded over paving. Paving shall receive a bituminous tack
coat over entire contact surface of curb and pavement immediately before curb is
extruded over it. Curb shall have a uniform surface texture,color,and profile. Bottom
edge shall meet bituminous paving to form a neat, uniform cove.
B. Where new bituminous curbing joins existing bituminous curbing,contact surface shall
receive a bituminous tack coat. Existing bituminous curbing shall be neatly trimmed to
provide a clean, straight end to abut the new curb against.
C. Portions of bituminous curb which become mixed with foreign material or are in any
way defective shall be removed and replaced with fresh mixture. Bituminous material
spilled outside finished pavement lines shall be immediately and completely removed.
Such material shall not be employed in work.
3.06 TRAFFIC STRIPING
A. Traffic paint materials,equipment,methods of placement, and precautions to be
observed as to weather,condition of surface,etc., shall conform to MHD Specifications
for traffic striping first class road work. Striping shall not begin until all asphalt
surfaces have cured for a minimum of 14 days.
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING 02600-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
3.03 PLACEMENT OF GRAVEL BASE COURSE
A. Preparation
1. After subgrade has been completed, as described in Section 02200 of these
Specifications, and has been approved by the Landscape Architect or Field
Engineer, roll the surface to a smooth and uniform texture free from lumps, rock
pockets, soft spots,and spongy areas.
B. Placement
1. Place the base course in strict accordance with the Standard Specifications.
2. Where the existing base course is unsuitable, the base shall be constructed of two
courses of gravel. The first course shall be not less than 1/2 the thickness of the
base required when thoroughly compacted. The second course shall complete the
thickness of base required. Compaction shall be done with a vibrator compactor.
C. Compaction
1. Compact the base course to a minimum degree of compaction of 95 percent at
optimum moisture content.
2. Roll the base course until entire surface is firm, dense,and free from rock pockets
and mud pads; do not slurry the base course.
3. Water the base course after compaction.
3.04 PLACEMENT OF BITUMINOUS CONCRETE SURFACING
A. Preparation
Bituminous concrete mixtures shall be laid only when surface is free of foreign matter
and when the weather is not foggy or rainy, and further these operations shall be carried
on only when the atmospheric temperature is not less than 40 degrees F in the shade.
B. Placement
Bituminous concrete surfaces shall be placed in two courses with minimum thicknesses
shown on the drawings. The two course placement of the new bituminous concrete
surfaces shall be as follows:
1. The binder course shall confirm to State Specifications for Binder Course
Bituminous Concrete in accordance with job-mix formula, and it shall be
constructed in a minimum thickness shown on the drawings after compaction.
The bottom course shall be parallel to the proposed grade of the finished
bituminous concrete surface.
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING 02600-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
Bituminous tack coat material shall conform to AASHTO M82.
2.05 TRAFFIC PAINT
Parking space pavement striping conform to Section M7.01.10 and M7.01.07 of the MHD
Specifications.
PART 3.00-EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection
1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other
trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation
may properly commence.
2. Verify that bituminous concrete pavement be installed in strict accordance with
the original design, all pertinent codes and regulation, and all pertinent portions
of the referenced standards.
B. Discrepancies
1. In the event of discrepancy,immediately notify the Landscape Architect.
2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Compacting Equipment
All equipment for compacting shall be steel-tired power rollers having a minimum
weight of 10 tons, except that hand held vibrator compactors may be used in areas not
accessible to rollers where specifically approved in advance by the Owner.
B. Paving_Equipment
All equipment for paving shall be spreading, self-propelled asphalt paving machine
capable of maintaining line, grade and minimum surface course thickness specified,
with laser grading sensors for tolerance accuracy.
"'`
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING 02600-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Bituminous Concrete Job Mix
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING
A: Protection
Use all means necessary to protect bituminous concrete pavement materials before,
during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other
trades.
B. Replacements
In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the
approval of the Landscape Architect at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Dust Control
1. Use all means necessary to prevent the spread of dust during performance of the
work of this Section.
2. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust being a nuisance to
the public,neighbors and concurrent performance of other work on the job site.
PART 2.00 -PRODUCTS
2.01 GRAVEL BASE
The gravel base course material shall consist of bankrun gravel conforming to the
requirements of Section 405, Subsection M1.03,Type B,of the State Specification.
2.02 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING
All courses of the bituminous concrete paving shall consist of Class I, Type I-1, conforming to
the requirements of Section 460, Subsection M3.11.00, of the State Specifications.
2.03 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE CURB
A. Bituminous concrete shall be Class I,conforming to applicable requirements of MHD
Specifications M3.11.03 Table"A"for"Dense Mix"
B. Curb shall be as detailed on the plans.
2.04 BITUMINOUS TACK COAT
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING 02600-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 02600-BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING
Part 1.00- GENERAL
1.01 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
Attention is directed to the requirements of the printed form of Contract and to Division 1,
General Requirements,of which this section is hereby made a part.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. Work by General Contractor
Bituminous concrete pavement and precast concrete curbing required for this work is
indicated on the drawings and includes,but is not necessarily limited to:
1. Parking lot pavement
2. Walkway pavement
3. Line painting
4. Bituminous concrete curbing
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere
Excavating,Filling&Grading............................................................Section 02200
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Workmen
1. Provide at least one person who shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in
the skills required, be completely familiar with the design and application of the
work described in this Section,be present at all times during progress of the work
of this Section,and direct all work performed under this Section.
2. For actual finishing of bituminous concrete surfaces and operation of the required
equipment, use only personnel thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills
required.
B. Codes and Reference Standards
In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with
referenced portions of Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges,
Massachusetts Highway Department (MHD).
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING 02600-1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
ew
5. Temporary hay bales should be placed around drainage structures as
necessary to prevent silt from entering the drainage system.
6. Soil stockpiles shall be covered or otherwise stabilized to prevent wind
or water erosion. Stockpiles that will remain for greater than 30 days
shall be vegetated with a fast growing ground cover or grass. Consult
with the Cooperative Extension Service and confirm acceptable
vegetation types and application rates with the Architect.
E. Measures for control of erosion must be adequate to assure that turbidity in
receiving waters used for public water supply or fishing will not be increased
more than 10 standard turbidity units (s.t.u.) unless limits have been established
for the particular water, or as otherwise required by the State or other controlling
body. In surface water used for other purposes, the turbidity must not exceed 25
s.t.u. unless otherwise permitted.
F. The location of hay bales and/or siltation fencing indicated in the Contract
Documents are intended to be a guide for the placement of siltation and erosion
control barriers and shall not relieve the Contractor from placing additional
barriers as directed by the Architect/Owner. No additional compensation will be
made for placing additional barriers.
G. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the hay bale barriers. Hay
bales which in the Architect's opinion are in disrepair and do not appear to be
acting as a siltation or erosion control barrier shall be replaced by the Contractor
at no additional cost to the Owner.
H. Construction dewatering can not be discharged directly or indirectly to a brook,
wetland,pond or other surface water without proper prior treatment and approval
by the Engineer.
I. All work must be conducted in compliance with any applicable State and Local
regulations regarding the protection of fresh water resource areas.
END OF SECTION 02274
EROSION CONTROL 02274-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide materials necessary for complete installation of erosion control measures
as detailed in the contract drawings.
1. Slope Stabilization Blanket: North American Green S150
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 PROVISIONS FOR EROSION CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall take sufficient precautions, as approved by the Architect
during construction to minimize the run-off of polluting substances such as; silt,
clay,fuels, oils,bitumens,calcium chloride, or other polluting materials,harmful
to: humans,fish, or other life, into resource areas or off site. Special precautions
shall be taken in the use of construction equipment to prevent operations that
promote erosion.
B. The Contractor shall perform earthwork operations and maintain the site in a
manner which minimizes the generation of dust and air pollution. Loaded trucks
leaving the site shall be covered to prevent dropping of materials on streets and
driveways. Maintain paved areas in a clean condition at all times. Sweep or
otherwise clean the pavement of mud, silt, and debris generated by construction
vehicles and operations.
C. Burning of combustible cleared and grubbed materials and debris will not be
permitted on the Owner's property.
D. As a minimum,the following shall apply:
1. The existing ground surface shall be disturbed as little as possible prior
to the start of construction.
2. Staked bales of hay fencing, shall be provided at points where runoff
from the work area leaves the site, or drains onto areas to be left
undisturbed, to reduce the sediment content of the water. Other methods
which reduce the sediment content to an equal or greater degree may be
used as approved or specified by the Architect and/or Conservation
Commission.
3. Drainage leaving the site shall flow to watercourses in such a manner to
prevent erosion.
4. Rough grading shall proceed in a way to allow fine grading and loaming
and seeding or mulching of cross country areas to take place as soon as
practicable.
EROSION CONTROL 02274-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 02274-EROSION CONTROL
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. PART 1 and DIVISION 1 of PART 2, as listed in the TABLE OF CONTENTS,
are hereby made part of this SECTION by reference thereto.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The work includes labor, materials, equipment and services required for
completion of the work under this Section, all as shown on the drawings and as
specified herein.
B. The work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the furnishing and
installation of hay bales and slope stabilization as indicated in the contract
drawings.
1. Removal of all materials needed for erosion control upon completion of
work and/or sufficient stabilization of new improvements.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02200-Earthwork.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating with both the Architect and the
City of Northampton for any necessary or requested inspections of methods
utilized for erosion control as specified and indicated on the contract drawings.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with the Conditions of Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for erosion control fabric.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Site information: Perform site inspection and review all reports and orders
pertaining to the placement of erosion control devices.
PART 2-PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS
EROSION CONTROL 02274-1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
3.20 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIAL
A. Removal to Designated Areas on Owner's Property: Transport acceptable excess
excavated material to designated soil storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile
soil or spread as directed by Engineer.
B. Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials, including unacceptable
excavated material, trash, and debris, and dispose of it legally dispose off Owner's
property.
END OF SECTION 02220
EARTHWORK 02220-19
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
materials may be discharged into on-site drainage ditches, ponded wetland
areas, and streams.
5. Ensure that the main site drainage system, which will carry the run-off from
the site, is installed as early as practicable, and place hay bales at culvert
inlets and around catch basin grates,to trap sediment.
6. Protect all trenching, beyond the building lines, by mulching in the same
manner specified herein for embankment slopes.
7. Maintain all areas, mulched under the work of this SECTION 02200, until
the finish grading work is commenced, at which time remove the mulch.
Final mulching of seeded and planted areas will be performed under the
respective SECTIONS responsible for performing the seeding and planting
work.
C. Keep the operations under the Contract clear and free of accumulations of snow as
required to carry out the work.
1. Treatment with water: Water shall be applied by tank trucks, fire hose, or
other method approved by the Engineer. Water will be applied at such times
and in the amount required to keep dust fully contained within the project
work limits.
3.18 MAINTENANCE
A. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion.
Keep free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified
tolerances.
C. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where compacted areas are disturbed by
subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape, and
compact to required density prior to further construction.
D. Settling: Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas during
general project warranty period, remove surface (pavement, lawn, or other finish),
add backfill material, compact, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance,
quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent work, and eliminate
evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
3.19 ALTERING AND RESTORING EXISTING PAVED AREAS
A. Wherever existing pavements, within or outside the limit of Contract lines, have
been excavated in the existing adjacent subgrade surfaces. Install new work to
match the existing conditions in accordance with governing authority. Notify the 00%.
proper municipal authorities prior to restoring surfaces.
EARTHWORK 02220-18
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
each different type of material encountered, and at intervals as
directed by the Engineer.
2. Footing Subgrade: For each strata of soil on which footings will be placed,
perform at least one test to verify required design bearing capacities.
Subsequent verification and approval of each footing subgrade may be based
on a visual comparison of each subgrade with related tested strata when
acceptable to Engineer.
3. Paved Areas and Building Slab Subgrade: Perform at least one field density
test of subgrade for every 2,000 sq. ft. of paved area or building slab, but in
no case fewer than three tests. In each compacted fill layer, perform one
field density test for every 2,000 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab or paved
area,but in no case fewer than three tests.
4. Foundation Wall Backfill: Perform at least two field density tests at
locations and elevations as directed.
5. If in opinion of Engineer, based on testing service reports and inspection,
subgrade or fills that have been placed are below specified density, perform
additional compaction and testing until specified density is obtained.
3.17 EROSION CONTROL
A. Provide erosion control methods in accordance with requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. During the clearing and grubbing operations performed hereunder, institute erosion
control measures,including,but not necessarily limited to,the following:
1. Schedule the delivery and placement of granular fill materials,obtained from
off-site sources,in a manner which will minimize the length of time such fill
materials would be stored on site and subject to erosion.
2. Limit new embankment slopes to three horizontal to one vertical, maximum.
Where embankments will be exposed to the elements for longer than 30
calendar days, furnish and apply hay mulch, in a uniform depth, and at a rate
of 2 to 3 tons of pay per acre, over the embankment areas. Avoid too heavy
an application of the mulch, and thin out thick spots in the covering.
Maintain the mulched areas on a regular basis, repairing any damage and
correcting any shifting in the mulch layer, due to wind, water, or any other
causes, until the finish grading operations are commenced, when the mulch
placed hereunder shall be removed.
3. Use mulch material comprised of long-fibered hay or straw, reasonably free
from noxious weeds and other undesirable material. Do not place mulch
material that is decayed, wet, or compacted; as to inhibit even and uniform
spreading. Do not use chopped hay, grass clippings, or other short-fibered
materials,unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
4. Furnish, place, and maintain erosion checks, comprised of siltation fencing
backed by tightly bound hay bales, as shown on the Drawings, at various
locations to intercept runoff of on-site stored soil materials before such
EARTHWORK 02220-17
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
inch width of shoulder simultaneous with the compaction and rolling of each layer of
gravel base course.
D. Placing: Place gravel base course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform
thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum
moisture content for compacting gravel base material during placement operations.
1. When a compacted subbase course is indicated to be 6 inches thick or less,
place material in a single layer. When indicated to be more than 6 inches
thick, place material in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6
inches or less than 3 inches in thickness when compacted.
3.15 BUILDING SLAB -STRUCTURAL FILL COURSE
A. General: Structural fill course consists of placement of specified fill material, in
layers of indicated thickness, over subgrade surface to support concrete building
slabs.
B. Placing: Place structural fill material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform
thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum
moisture content for compacting material during placement operations.
1. When a compacted structural fill course is indicated to be 6 inches thick or
less, place material in a single layer. When indicated to be more than 6
inches thick, place material in equal layers, except no single layer more than
6 inches or less than 3 inches in thickness when compacted.
3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Quality Control Testing During Construction: Allow testing service to inspect and
approve each subgrade and fill layer before further backfill or construction work is
performed.
1. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 (sand cone
method)or ASTM D 2167(rubber balloon method), as applicable.
a. Field density tests may also be performed by the nuclear method in
accordance with ASTM D 2922, providing that calibration curves
are periodically checked and adjusted to correlate to tests performed
using ASTM D 1556. In conjunction with each density calibration
check, check the calibration curves furnished with the moisture
gages in accordance with ASTM D 3017.
b. If field tests are performed using nuclear methods, make calibration awk
checks of both density and moisture gages at beginning of work, on
EARTHWORK 02220-16
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
a. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too
wet to permit compaction to specified density.
b. Stockpile or spread soil material that has been removed because it is
too wet to permit compaction. Assist drying by discing, harrowing,
or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory
value.
3.13 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including
adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances,
compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are indicated
or between such points and existing grades.
B. Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away
from structures and to prevent ponding. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface
changes and as follows:
1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more
than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade elevations.
2. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade, and cross-section,
with finish surface not more than 0.10 foot above or below required
subgrade elevation.
3. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade, and cross-
section, with finish surface not more than 1/2 inch above or below required
subgrade elevation.
C. Grading Surface of Fill under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids,
compacted as specified, and to the required elevation. Provide final grades within a
tolerance of 1/i inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge.
D. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and indicated
percentage of maximum or relative density for each area classification.
3.14 PAVEMENT AND GRAVEL BASE COURSE
A. General: Gravel Base course consists of placing gravel base material, in layers of
specified thickness,over subgrade surface to support a pavement binder course.
1. Refer to Division 2 Section 02513 for paving specifications.
B. Grade Control: During construction, maintain lines and grades including crown and
cross-slope of base course.
C. Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of gravel base course to prevent lateral
movement. Construct shoulders of acceptable soil materials, placed in such quantity
to compact to thickness of each subbase course layer. Compact and roll at least a 12-
EARTHWORK 02220-15
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
1. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under
"Compaction" for particular area classification, break up ground surface,
pulverize, moisture-condition to optimum moisture content, and compact to
required depth and percentage of maximum density.
2. Subgrade areas within the building footprint shall be proofrolled with at least
6 coverages of a vibratory plate compactor for bottoms of footing trench, and
at least four passes of a 10-ton vibratory roller operating at a frequency of
about 1,500 VPM for slab areas
B. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 12 inches in loose depth for
material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 6 inches in
loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
C. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum
moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry
density or relative dry density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or
fill material on surfaces that are muddy,frozen,or contain frost or ice.
D. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping, or conduit to
required elevations. Prevent wedging action of backfill against structures or
displacement of piping or conduit by carrying material uniformly around structure,
piping, or conduit to approximately same elevation in each lift.
E. Control soil and fill compaction,providing minimum percentage of density specified
for each area classification indicated below. Correct improperly compacted areas or
lifts as directed by Engineer if soil density tests indicate inadequate compaction.
1. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less
than the following percentages of maximum density, in accordance with
ASTM D 1557:
a. Under structures, building slabs and steps, and pavements, compact
top 12 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material
at 95 percent maximum density.
b. Under lawn or unpaved areas, compact top 6 inches of subgrade and
each layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent maximum density.
C. Under walkways, compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer
of backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum density.
d. Under Building, all structural fill placed shall be compacted to at
least 95% of the maximum dry density.
2. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture
conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of
subgrade or layer of soil material. Apply water in minimum quantity as
necessary to prevent free water from appearing on surface during or
subsequent to compaction operations.
EARTHWORK 02220-14
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
3. Under steps,use gravel base.
4. Under building slabs, use structural fill.
5. Use sand borrow for water main, force main, electric and telephone conduit
bedding.
6. Used screened gravel to mid pipe diameter on sanitary sewer gravity lines.
7. Use crushed stone under precast utility structures.
8. Use free draining granular fill in areas identified around and under leaching
trenches if unsuitable material is encountered.
9. Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within 18
inches of column or wall footings and that are carried below bottom of such
footings or that pass under wall footings. Place concrete to level of bottom
of adjacent footing.
a. Concrete is specified in Division 3.
b. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made
and Engineer authorizes backfilling. Use care in backfilling to avoid
damage or displacement of pipe systems.
10. Provide 4-inch-thick concrete base slab support for piping or conduit less
than 2'-6"below surface of roadways. After installation and testing of piping
or conduit, provide minimum 4-inch-thick encasement (sides and top) of
concrete prior to backfilling or placement of roadway subbase.
B. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the
following:
1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable,
dampproofing,waterproofing,and perimeter insulation.
2. Inspection,testing,approval, and recording locations of underground utilities
have been performed and recorded.
3. Removal of concrete form work.
4. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory
materials. Cut off temporary sheet piling driven below bottom of structures
and remove in manner to prevent settlement of the structure or utilities, or
leave in place if required.
5. Removal of trash and debris from excavation.
6. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally
supported walls.
3.12 PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION
A. Ground Surface Preparation: Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil
materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to
placement of fills. Plow strip,or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4
horizontal so that fill material will bond with existing surface.
EARTHWORK 02220-13
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
encountered, it shall be excavated a minimum 4-feet below finished grade.
If during the proof rolling process, the subgrade shows areas of loose zones
which exhibit weaving or excessive vertical subgrade reaction,the contractor
will excavate loose materials to depth directed and replace with structural
fill.
. 3.8 EXCAVATION FOR PAVEMENTS
A. Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross-sections, elevations and grades as
indicated.
3.9 EXCAVATION FOR PIPES AND CONDUITS
A. Excavate trenches to uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working
room and a minimum of 6 to 9 inches of clearance on both sides of pipe or conduit.
B. Excavate trenches and conduit to depth indicated or required to establish indicated
slope and invert elevations and to support bottom of pipe or conduit on undisturbed
soil. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of
pipe below frost line.
1. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 9 inches below required
elevation and backfill with a 9-inch layer of crushed stone or gravel base
prior to installation of pipe.
2. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in nominal size, and for flat-
bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, do not excavate beyond indicated
depths. Hand-excavate bottom cut to accurate elevations and support pipe or
conduit on undisturbed soil.
3. For pipes and equipment 6 inches or larger in nominal size, shape bottom of
trench to fit bottom of pipe for 90 degrees (bottom'/a of the circumference).
Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. At each pipe joint, dig bell holes
to relieve pipe bell of loads ensure continuous bearing of pipe barrel on
bearing surface.
3.10 COLD WEATHER PROTECTION
A. Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less
than 35 degrees Fahrenheit.
3.11 BACKFILL AND FILL
A. General: Place soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations, for each area
classification listed below,using materials specified in Part 2 of this Section.
1. Under grassed areas,use common fill. Aaqk�
2. Under walks and pavements, use gravel base with satisfactory excavated
material, or common fill below gravel base.
EARTHWORK 02220-12
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
e
cause any interference with the use of the same by the public. Under no
circumstances place concrete, place fill, or install appurtenances in excavations
containing free water.
E. Protect all excavated bearing surfaces from disturbance by placing a three-inch
thickness of crushed stone over the excavated bearing surface.
3.6 STORAGE OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS
A. Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill where directed. Place,
grade,and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.
1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not
store within drip line of trees indicated to remain.
2. Dispose of excess excavated soil material and materials not acceptable for
use as backfill or fill.
3.7 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus
0.10 foot, and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to
permit placing and removal of concrete form work, installation of services, and other
construction and for inspection.
1. Excavations for new slabs, foundations, footings, and foundations of major
site work items:
a. Excavate to specified elevations, grades and dimensions plus ample
space for construction operations and inspection of excavation,
footings and walls. Footings and foundations must rest on
undisturbed material, with no loosened or softened zones, and must
be free from standing water.
b. When excavations for footings have reached the prescribed depths,
notify the Architect, and request an inspection of the conditions.
Pouring of footings shall not be commenced until Architect's
approval of the excavation work has been received.
2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical
Structures: Conform to elevations and dimensions indicated within a
tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot; plus a sufficient distance to permit
placing and removal of concrete form work, installation of services, and
other construction and for inspection. Do not disturb bottom of excavations,
intended for bearing surface.
3. Excavation within proposed building footprint: All existing topsoil and fill
shall be removed within the footprint of the building. Where granular fill is
EARTHWORK 02220-11
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. General: Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of agencies having
jurisdiction.
B. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements
of agencies having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible
because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. Maintain sides and
slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling.
C. Provide shoring, sheeting and/or bracing at excavations, as required, to assure
complete safety against collapse of earth at side excavation.
D. Comply with local safety regulations or in the absence thereof, with the provisions of
the Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction of the Associated General
Contractors of America,Inc., as well as the safety regulations of OSHA.
E. Remove sheeting and shoring backfilling operations progress, taking all necessary
precautions to prevent collapse of excavation sides.
1. Provide permanent steel sheet piling or pressure-treated timber sheet piling
wherever subsequent removal of sheet piling might permit lateral movement
of soil under adjacent structures. Cut off tops a minimum of 2'-6"below
final grade and leave permanently in place.
3.5 DEWATERING
A. Upon entering the premises, assume responsibility for site and subsurface drainage
and maintain such drainage during the life of this Contract in a manner acceptable to the
Engineer,at all times protecting and maintaining the existing conditions in adjacent areas.
B. Prevent surface water and subsurface or groundwater from flowing into excavations
and from flooding project site and surrounding area.
C. Legally remove by pumping, draining or bailing all water which may accumulate or
be found on the site within the Contract limits, where excavation and grading are to
be done. Excavate and form all pump wells, sumps, dams, flumes or other necessary
works to keep excavations entirely clear of water. Newly-constructed and existing
concrete and masonry shall be protected from injury resulting from dewatering work
by the use of canvas, tarpaulins, or by such other sufficient method as the Engineer
may approve. Maintain at all times upon the work sufficient and satisfactory
pumping machinery, including standby equipment. Provide pump wells or well
points and underdrains as may be required, where needed to properly handle the
water. The final approved trimming excavation shall not be done until the Engineer
has approved the manner of dewatering. Maintain excavations free from water until
all backfilling operations and new construction has been completed.
D. Water from excavations shall be disposed of in such a manner as will not cause ,awk
injury to public health nor to public or private property, nor to existing work, not to
the work completed or in progress,nor to the surface of roads, walks, and streets, nor
EARTHWORK 02220-10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
f. For areas to be re-graded and for non-specified site items requiring
subgrades: As indicated on the Drawings.
g. Utility piping and utility conduits: To depth and widths indicated on
the drawings.
2. For footings and foundations: At bottom of lines of footings and foundation
walls plus ample space on each side of same for construction forms and
inspection.
3. For floor slabs in contact with earth: Twelve (12) inches below bottom of
slab,except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
4. In non-specified areas: To the lines indicated on the Drawings plus proper
side clearance for construction.
F. Include the excavation of earth and all other material to the depths, form and sizes as
shown on Drawings, and as specified hereunder for new slabs, foundations, steps,
walls, site improvements, loam areas, pavements, utilities, and other structures
necessary to the completion of the project.
G. Remove all unsuitable material encountered within the payment lines specified
hereunder. If unsuitable material is still present after the specified payment lines
have been reached, notify the Engineer immediately and request written disposition
of said material. Should the Engineer direct that unsuitable material be removed
beyond the payment lines, the Contract amount will be adjusted accordingly. The
following constitute unsuitable materials:
1. Topsoil and loam.
2. All peat, organic soil, or soil containing sod, roots, or any other material
subject to decomposition or decay.
3. All soft, spongy or compressible soil, including, but not limited to, silt and
loose fine sand.
4. All fills,buried building material, and other soil materials which do not meet
suitable bearing criteria and the requirements specified herein.
5. Cinders.
H. In general, machine excavation will be permitted down to final grade followed by
proof-rolling of the bearing surface(see Item 3.13).
I. If any part of the excavation is carried through error beyond the depth and
dimensions indicated on the Drawings or specified herein,the Contractor shall, at his
own expense, at the direction of the Engineer, extend reinforced concrete
foundation to proper bearing.
J. Keep excavation free of water at all times. Carry out all de-watering in a manner
that will not loosen the surrounding soil, as approved by the Engineer.
3.4 STABILITY OF EXCAVATION
EARTHWORK 02220-9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
excess of 10 feet in width and pits in excess of 30 feet in either length or
width are classified as open excavation.
3. Rock excavation in open excavations includes removal and disposal of
materials and obstructions encountered that cannot be dislodged and
excavated with modem, track-mounted, heavy- duty excavating equipment
without drilling, blasting, or ripping. Rock excavation equipment is defined
as Caterpillar Model No. .973 or equivalent track-mounted loader, rated at
not less than 210 HP flywheel power and developing minimum of 45,000-
pound breakout force(measured in accordance with SAE J732).
a. Typical of materials classified as rock are boulders 1 cu. yd. or more
in volume, solid rock, rock in ledges, and rock- hard cementious
aggregate deposits.
b. Intermittent drilling, blasting, or ripping performed to increase
production and not necessary to permit excavation of material
encountered will be classified as earth excavation.
C. Do not perform rock excavation work until material to be excavated has been cross-
sectioned and classified by Engineer. Such excavation will be paid on basis of
Contract Conditions relative to changes in work.
D. Rock payment lines are limited to the following:
1. Two feet outside of concrete work for which forms are required, except
footings.
2. One foot outside perimeter of footings.
3. In pipe trenches, 9 inches below invert elevation of pipe and 2 feet wider
than the inside diameter of pipe, but not less than 3 feet minimum trench
width.
4. Outside dimensions of concrete work where no forms are required.
5. Under slabs on grade, 6 inches below bottom of concrete slab.
E. Payment lines for earth excavation: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings,
excavation shall be carried to the following payment lines. If the Engineer
authorizes additional excavation, beyond the specified payment line in writing, the
Contract Price will be adjusted accordingly.
1. Subgrades for the site work shall be as follows, unless otherwise indicated
on the Drawings:
a. Areas designated to receive topsoil: 4 inches below finish grades.
b. Concrete pavements: 8 inches below bottom of slabs.
C. Bituminous concrete paved drives and parking areas: 15 inches
below finish grades.
d. Bituminous concrete paved walks: 10 inches below finish grades. ,
e. Curbs: 6 inches around all surfaces.
EARTHWORK 02220-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2.09 PEA GRAVEL
A. Pea gravel shall be clean naturally rounded stone. Stones shall be a minimum of
1/8"in diameter and a maximum of 3/a"in diameter. Not more than 3%by weight shall
pass the No. 8 sieve.
PART 3—EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work of the SECTION 02200 with the respective trades responsible
for installing interfacing work, to assure that the excavation, backfilling, and filling
work performed hereunder is acceptable to such trades for the installation of their
work.
3.2 DUST CONTROL
A. Employ all methods required to effectively control dust created by the work of this
SECTION 02200.
3.3 EXCAVATION
A. Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to subgrade elevations indicated,
regardless of character of materials and obstructions encountered.
B. Excavation Classifications: The following classifications of excavation will be made
when rock is encountered:
1. Earth Excavation includes excavation of pavements and other obstructions
visible on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items
indicated to be demolished and removed; together with earth and other
materials encountered that are not classified as rock or unauthorized
excavation.
2. Rock excavation for trenches and pits includes removal and disposal of
materials and obstructions encountered that cannot be excavated with a
track-mounted power excavator, equivalent to Caterpillar Model No. 215C
LC, and rated at not less than 115 HP flywheel power and 32,000-pound
drawbar pull and equipped with a short stick and a 42-inch wide, short tip
radius rock bucket rated at 0.81 cubic yard (heaped) capacity. Trenches in
EARTHWORK 02220-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2.06 SAND BORROW
A. Sand borrow shall consist of clean, inert, hard durable grains of quartz or other hard
durable rock,free from loam or clay, surface coatings and deleterious materials. The
allowable amount of material passing through a No. 200 sieve as determined by
ASTM-D422 shall not exceed 10 percent by weight. Maximum particle size shall be
3/8 inch.
2.07 FREE DRAINING GRANULAR FILL
A. Free draining granular fill material shall consist of hard,durable sand and gravel, and
shall be free from ice and snow,roots, sod, rubbish, and other deleterious or organic
matters. Free draining granular fill material shall drain at a percolation rate of 2
minutes/in. or less. It shall conform to the following gradation requirements:
Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight
2 in. 100
No.4 85-100
No. 100 0-10
No. 200 0-5
Not more than 90% shall be retained on No. 50 sieve. The uniformity coefficient of
the soil retained on the No. 4 sieve shall be no greater than six.
2.08 STRUCTURAL FILL
A. Structural Fill shall be free of frost, snow, debris, organic, and other deleterious
material, and be within 3 percent of its optimum moisture content for compaction.
Maximum particle size within 12-inches of bottom of slab grade is 3-inches.
Structural Fill shall conform to the following gradation requirements:
Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight
6 in. 100
3 in. 70-100
1.5 in. 50-90
Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight
0.75 in. 35-85
No. 10 15-70 ,
No. 40 10-50
No. 200 0-12
EARTHWORK 02220-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
t
A. Common fill shall be well graded, natural inorganic soil approved by the Engineer,
free of organic or other weak or compressible materials, or frozen materials, and of
stones larger than one-half the lift thickness. It shall be of such nature and character
that it can be compacted to the specified densities in a reasonable length of time. It
shall be free of highly plastic clay, of all materials subject to decay, decomposition,
or dissolution, and of cinders or other materials which will corrode piping or other
metal. It shall have a maximum dry density of at least 115 pounds per cubic foot
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Material from excavation on the Site
may be used as common fill if it meets the above requirements and as approved by
the Engineer. Excavated material from on-site to be re-used on-site will require
removal of all organic material and particles greater than 4 inches in largest
dimension with the exception of stones as described above.
2.03 SCREENED GRAVEL
A. Screened gravel shall consist of hard, durable, particles of proper size and gradation
and shall be free from sand, loam, clay, excess fines, and deleterious materials.
Screened gravel shall meet the requirements of ASTM C33, stone size No. 67, and
shall conform to the following gradation:
Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight
1 in. 100
3/a in. 90-100
3/8 in. 22-55
No.4 0-10
No. 8 0-5
2.04 GRAVEL BASE
A. Gravel base materials shall meet the requirements for gravel borrow M 1.03.0 Type
B of the Massachusetts Highway Department Standard Specifications for Highways
and Bridges.
2.05 CRUSHED STONE
A. All material to be placed where Specifications or Drawings call for crushed stone or
drainage fill. Material shall be clean crushed stone approved by the Engineer and
conforming to the following gradation:
Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight
1 in. 100
3/a in. 90-100
'h in. 10-50
3/8 in. 0-20
No. 4 0-5
EARTHWORK 02220-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement, as directed, will be paid
on basis of Conditions of the Contract relative to changes in work.
D. Subgrade: The undisturbed earth or the compacted soil layer immediately below
granular subbase,drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
E. Structure: Buildings, foundations, slabs, tanks, curbs, or other man-made stationary
features occurring above or below ground surface.
1.07 BENCH MARKS,LINES AND GRADES
A. Employ, within the Contract Price, a competent Surveyor, registered in
Massachusetts who shall perform the following work:
1. All lines and grade work not presently established at the site shall be laid out
in accordance with Drawings, and Specifications. Establish permanent 4"by
4" by 48" deep granite bench marks. Maintain all established bounds and
bench marks and replace as directed any which are destroyed or disturbed.
2. Establish all lines and grades for the work and verify all locations, property
lines, work lines, and other dimensioned points indicated on the Contract
Drawings for the existing site.
1.08 PERMITS AND CODES
A. Procure, and pay for, all permits and licenses required for the work of this SECTION
02200,prior to commencing the work.
B. Comply with all applicable codes, ordinances, rules, regulations and laws of all
local, municipal, and state authorities having jurisdiction over the work, without
additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. A statement indicating the source of each proposed import material shall be
submitted by the contractor. The statement shall indicate that the proposed import
does not include any contamination or hazardous material and the results of
analytical testing. If the source of import material is questionable or if the
preliminary analytical test results indicate the presence of contamination or
hazardous material, the Owner may require additional analytical testing at no cost to
the Owner prior to approval of proposed import materials.
2.02 COMMON FILL ,,,,k
EARTHWORK 02220-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
4. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities
indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies for shutoff of
services if lines are active.
5. Should there be any conflict between requirements specified in the Contract
Documents and those of the municipal authorities, the municipal
requirements shall govern.
C. Use of Explosives: Do not bring explosives onto site or use in work without prior
written permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of
this work and post with warning lights.
1. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from
damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and
other hazards created by earthwork operations.
3. Perform excavation by hand within drip line of large trees to remain. Protect
root systems from damage or dry out to the greatest extent possible.
Maintain moist condition for root system and cover exposed roots with
moistened burlap.
1.06 DEFINITIONS
A. Excavation consists of removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations
indicated and subsequent disposal of materials removed.
B. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade
elevations or dimensions without specific direction of Engineer. Unauthorized
excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Engineer, shall be at Contractor's
expense.
1. Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized
excavation by extending indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to
excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete
fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position, when acceptable to
Engineer.
2. In locations other than those above, backfill and compact unauthorized
excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classification,
unless otherwise directed by Engineer.
C. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations,
notify Engineer, who will make an inspection of conditions. If Engineer determines
that bearing materials at required subgrade elevations are unsuitable, continue
excavation until suitable bearing materials are encountered and replace excavated
material as directed by Engineer. The Contract Sum may be adjusted by an
appropriate Contract Modification.
EARTHWORK 02220-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with Massachusetts Highway Department Standard
Specifications for Highways and Bridges, 1995 with 1998 addendum, and local
governing regulations if more stringent than herein specified.
B. Testing and Inspection Service: Owner shall employ and pay for a qualified
independent geotechnical testing laboratory to perform soil testing and inspection
service during earthwork operations.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Site Information: Data in subsurface investigation reports was used for the basis of
the design and are available to the Contractor for information only. Conditions are
not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil
borings. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn
from this data by Contractor.
1. Contractor may perform additional test borings and other exploratory
operations, at the Contractor's option; however, no change in the Contract
Sum will be authorized for such additional exploration. .
B. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas of excavation work.
Locations shown on plans are approximate and must be verified by contractor. If
utilities are indicated to remain in place, provide adequate means of support and
protection during earthwork operations.
1. Conform to the requirements of the respective authorities having jurisdiction
over the existing utilities and notify the appropriate officials of such
authorities in advance of performing any work in the vicinity on active
utilities. Obtain written permission to perform the work prior to
commencing same. If, in the progress of excavation, any utility should
become damaged and result in any damage to public or private property,
restore to the original condition, at no additional cost to the Owner, anything
that has been damaged or disturbed.
2. Should any utility be encountered in the excavation work that is not
indicated on the Drawings, notify the Engineer in writing and request
disposition for same,before proceeding to perform any work on same.
3. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others, during occupied hours,except when permitted in writing by Engineer
and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided.
a. Provide minimum of 48-hour notice to Engineer, and receive written
notice to proceed before interrupting any utility. ftl, l
EARTHWORK 02220-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 02220-EARTHWORK
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The work includes labor, materials, equipment and services required for completion
of the work under this Section;all as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
B. This Section includes the following:
1. Preparing of subgrade for building slabs,walks, and pavements.
2. Drainage fill course for support of building slabs.
3. Excavating and backfilling of trenches outside of and within building lines.
4. Excavating and backfilling for underground mechanical and electrical
utilities and buried mechanical and electrical appurtenances.
C. Excavation and legal off-site disposal of unsuitable or excess materials.
D. Excavation and stockpiling of materials suitable for reuse in an on-site location
approved by the Engineer.
E. Dewatering and control of water for all work under this contract.
F. Dust, erosion, siltation and environmental controls.
G. Excavation for non-specified items for which excavation is required.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02720—STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM
B. Section 02740—SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
EARTHWORK 02220-1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding through
ground surface. All stumps roots and topsoil shall be removed in the vicinity
of utility trenches prior to backfilling.
2. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees indicated to
remain.
3. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory
soil material,unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
a. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches loose
depth, and thoroughly compact to a density equal to adjacent original
ground.
D. Removal of Improvements: Remove existing above-grade and below-grade
improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction.
1. Carefully cut and remove segments of existing paving and curbs in all areas
where excavation or grading work is to be performed hereunder, and in other
locations indicated on the Drawings. Legally dispose of all removed
pavement pieces off the site.
3.02 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS
A. Burning on Owner's Property: Burning is not permitted on Owner's property.
B. Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials, stumps, and unsuitable or
excess topsoil from Owner's property as directed by the Engineer. A suitable site for
disposal of excess material shall be determined prior to commencement of the work
by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 02110
SITE PREPARATION 02110-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
8. If pruning is required to allow construction or equipment to operate within
drip line of trees indicated to remain, such pruning shall only be performed
after authorization from the Engineer.
PART 2—PRODUCTS
NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SECTION
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 SITE CLEARING
A. Tree and Shrub Removals and Clearing:
1. Refer to the Drawings for locations of existing trees and shrubs,which are to
remain undisturbed. Cut and remove all other trees and shrubs, within the
Contract Limit Lines, not otherwise designated to remain. Strip and top
trees, prior to removal. Install guide cables to trunks, prior to felling, as
needed to control falling direction. Take all precautionary measures to
protect persons and property during the tree removal procedures. Dig, and
completely remove, tree stumps and shrub roots. Legally dispose of all
"* removed materials off the site.
2. Remove all debris and other miscellaneous materials from the ground
surfaces where excavation or regarding work is to be performed hereunder.
B. Topsoil: Topsoil is defined as friable clay loam surface soil found in a depth of not
less than 4 inches. Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps,
stones, and 2 inches in diameter, and without weeds, roots, and other objectionable
material.
1. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to prevent
intermingling with underlying subsoil or other objectionable material.
a. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping.
b. Where existing trees are indicated to remain, leave existing topsoil in
place within drip lines to prevent damage to root system, except
where proposed structures are indicated within the limits of the drip
lines.
2. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles at appropriate locations on site. Construct
storage piles to provide free drainage of surface water. Cover storage piles,
if required,to prevent wind erosion.
3. Dispose of unsuitable or excess topsoil in a manner as specified for disposal
of waste material.
C. Clearing and Grubbing: Clear site of trees, shrubs and other vegetation, except for
those indicated to remain.
SITE PREPARATION 02110-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
obstruct streets, driveways, walks or other occupied or used facilities without
permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protections necessary to prevent
damage to existing improvements indicated to remain in place.
1. Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on Owner's property.
2. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to
property owners.
C. Protection of Existing Trees and Vegetation: Protect existing trees and other vegetation
indicated to remain in place, against unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots,
skinning or bruising of bark, smothering of trees by stockpiling construction materials or
excavated materials within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of
vehicles within drip line. Provide temporary guards to protect trees and vegetation to be
left standing.
1. Prior to commencing the general work of this SECTION 02110 provide
protection for existing trees and shrubs indicated on the Drawings to remain
undisturbed. In case of any question regarding trees and/or shrubs to remain,
arrange a conference on the site,with the Engineer, to identify and mark such
items. Do not engage in clearing operations without a definitive
understanding the extent of existing conditions to be preserved.
2. Protect all existing trees and shrubs scheduled to remain with plywood
enclosures and haybales not less than 36 inches high, or other enclosures as
approved by the Engineer. Place fencing at least 36 inches out from the
trunks of trees. Erect protection items prior to commencing construction or
excavation work, and maintain same during the entire construction period,
removing the temporary protection only when so approved by the Engineer.
3. Exercise extreme care during the excavation operations to prevent damage to
the roots of trees and shrubs, which are to remain. When excavating or
grading within the branch spread to trees to remain, do so in a manner,which
will cause minimum damage to the root system, as approved by the Engineer.
When excavating trenches within the branch spread of trees to remain,
perform the excavation work by hand. Excavate utility trenches only when
the utility can be immediately installed therein, to minimize the open time.
Prune the injured roots cleanly and backfill as soon as possible.
4. Replace existing trees and shrubs designated to be saved, which have, in the
opinion of the Engineer, become damaged, with trees and/or shrubs of
similar sizes and species, and bear all costs involved therein and so incurred,
without cost to the Owner.
5. Do not use trees, which are to remain, for crane stays, guy anchors, or other
fastenings.
6. Do not permit vehicles to be parked in a manner, which may damage trees or
shrubs.
7. Do not stockpile soil materials around bases of trees or shrubs, which are to
remain. ,,MW#�
SITE PREPARATION 02110-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
SECTION 02110-SITE PREPARATION
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. PART 1 and DIVISION 1 of PART 2, as listed in the TABLE OF CONTENTS, are
hereby made part of this SECTION by reference thereto.
B. All work shall be co-ordinated with other trades as required by the Project Schedule.
1.02 SUMMARY OF WORK INCLUDED
A. The work includes labor, materials, equipment and services required for completion
of the work under this Section;all as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
B. This Section includes,but is not necessarily limited to,
1. Protection of existing trees.
2. Removal of trees and other vegetation.
3. Topsoil stripping.
4. Clearing and grubbing.
5. Removing above-grade improvements.
6. Removing below-grade improvements.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02200-EARTHWORK.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Contractor shall clear to the limits indicated on the drawings. Clearing units
shall be marked in the field,verified and approved by the Engineer.
B. Clearing beyond the limits indicated on the drawings may be required for
miscellaneous incidental work. Where needed, the Contractor shall request
authorization from the Engineer and local governing authorities and will not proceed
until approvals have been secured.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SECTION
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Conduct site clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads,
driveways, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or
SITE PREPARATION 02110-1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
E. Disconnection of Utilities
Before starting site operation, disconnect or arrange for disconnection of all utility
services designated to be removed or that require temporary discontinuance for the
duration of the work, as shown in the drawings,performing all such work in
accordance with the requirements of the utility company or agency involved.
F. Protection of Utilities
Preserve, in operating condition, all active utilities traversing the site and not
designated to be disconnected.
G. Perform demolition work in accordance with applicable rules,regulations,codes and
ordinances of local, State and Federal Authorities,and in accordance with the
requirements of Public Utility Corporations having jurisdiction over the work.
Obtain and pay for all necessary permits, licenses and certificates and give all notices
as required during the performance of the demolition work.
3.02 DEMOLITION
All items designated to be salvaged shall be carefully removed from the site so as not to
damage them. Damaged items shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no extra
charge to the Owner. The contractor shall take possession of all demolished materials not
scheduled for reuse and completely remove from site and legally dispose of same.
3.03 REMOVAL OF DEBRIS
Remove all debris from the site and leave the site in a neat and orderly condition to the
approval of the Architect.
3.04 SALVAGE OF ITEMS FOR REUSE
Any items that are designated for salvage and delivery to Owner of for salvage and re-use
shall be carefully removed as to not damage, scratch or otherwise mar the object in any way,
and then shall be stored by the Contractor until such time as the Contractor is ready for
installation of the item. Installation of salvaged items shall include footings or any other
necessary installation procedures required for the complete, safe use of the item installed.
END OF SECTION 02100
DEMOLITION,CLEARING& GRUBBING 02100-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Dust and Mud Control
Use all means necessary to prevent the spread of dust and mud during performance of
the work of this Section;thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent mud
and dust from being a nuisance to the site residents and the neighbors.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 OTHER MATERIALS
All materials, not specifically described,but required for proper completion of the work of
this Section shall be selected by the Contractor, subject to approval of the Architect.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Notification
Notify the Architect at least two full working days prior to commencing the work of ,.••k
this Section.
B. Site Inspection
Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the entire site and all objects
designated to be removed and to be preserved.
C. Clarification
1. The drawings do not purport to show all objects existing on the site.
2. Before commencing the work of this Section,verify with the Architect all
objects to be removed and all objects to be preserved.
D. Schedulins
1. Schedule all work in a careful manner with all necessary consideration for
the Owner. Before commencing any work, submit a schedule for review to
the Architect showing the commencement,the order and the completion
dates for the various parts of this work.
2. Avoid interference with use of, and passage to and from, adjacent buildings
and facilities.
3. Prior to any work performed on the site,the Contractor shall notify Dig Safe
at the following number, 1-800-322-4844.
DEMOLITION,CLEARING& GRUBBING 02100-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 02100-DEMOLITION,CLEARING& GRUBBING
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all
Sections within DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby
made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
1.02 WORK DESCRIPTION
A. Work by General Contractor
Demolition, clearing and grubbing required for this work includes,but is not
necessarily limited to removal and disposal,removal and delivery to the Owner, or
removal and reuse of the following:
1. Bituminous pavement
2. Fencing
3. Trees, shrubs,vegetation
4. Debris and rubble within project
5. Other items noted on the drawings
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere
Excavating, Filling and Grading .............................................................Section 02200
C. Definitions
The term"demolition, clearing and grubbing, "as used herein, includes the removal
of all existing objects(except for those objects designated to remain)down to the
existing ground level, including their underground root systems,plus such other work
as is described in this Section of these Specifications
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during demolition
operations and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the procedures involved and
who shall direct and coordinate the operation and ensure coordination with the
applicable utility agencies.
B. Codes and Standards
In addition to complying with all pertinent code and regulations, comply with the
requirements of those insurance carriers providing coverage for this work.
DEMOLITION,CLEARING& GRUBBING 02100-1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
C. Recyclable Materials (Non-Hazardous): The General Contractor shall note that any
demolition material deemed to be recyclable by the General Contractor may contain lead,
which could result in the recycling facility rejecting acceptance regardless of the TCLP
result. The General Contractor is hereby notified of this fact and shall bear all
responsibilities and costs associated with acceptance and/or rejection of such materials in a
C&D landfill,waste disposal facility and/or a recycling facility under their Base Bid.
D. Hazardous Waste/Resulated Materials: All materials which are determined to be
hazardous waste or regulated waste for lead shall be disposed of by the General Contractor
as specified herein. The General Contractor shall perform representative TCLP tests of
demolition debris to ensure the material is properly profiled for disposal. This shall also
include all testing required by the disposal or recycling facility. All costs associated with
TCLP testing to profile the waste material shall be borne by the General Contractor. If the
material is found to be hazardous waste or regulated waste, the General Contractor shall
provide appropriate drums/containers for use. The General Contractor shall properly
handle and transport all hazardous waste or regulated waste material into the
drums/containers provided. The General Contractor shall coordinate all hazardous waste
or regulated waste transfer and disposal procedures. The General Contractor shall
provide the Owner with all required documentation relating to the proper removal and
disposal of any hazardous or regulated waste that leaves the site.
E. The following materials are considered Hazardous Waste (Lead) if they are generated in •a%,,
a form by themselves and shall be disposed of as such:
a. Paint chip and paint chip debris
E. All other waste streams (i.e. demolition debris) shall be properly tested and profiled and
disposed of by the General Contractor as part of the Base Bid. No waste material shall
leave the site unless it has been properly identified and approved for such shipment by the
Owner.
G. The General Contractor shall be responsible for proper disposal of all materials outlined
herein. This also shall include all testing required to properly profile each material as well
as any testing required by the final disposal site facility. All costs associated with testing
and disposal of the material whether non-hazardous, hazardous or regulated waste material
shall be borne by the General Contractor. In addition, all costs associated with worker
protection or environmental protection requirements for such work shall be the
responsibility of the General Contractor.
END OF SECTION 02081
Awk
DISTURBANCE OF LEAD CONTAINING MATERIALS 02081 - 10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
3.4 AIR SAMPLING-CONTRACTOR
A. Personal Exposure Monitorins: The General Contractor shall perform personal exposure
sampling to monitor personal exposure levels to airborne lead. Samples shall be taken for
the duration of the work shift or for eight hours, whichever is greater. Personal samples
need not be taken every day after the first day if working conditions remain unchanged,
but must be taken every time there is a change in the removal operation, either in terms of
the location or the type of work. Sampling will be used to determine eight-hour
Time-Weighted-Averages (TWA). The General Contractor is responsible for personal
sampling as outlined in OSHA Standard 29 CFR 1926.62.
B. Frequency Air monitoring frequency will be established in accordance with the
requirements set forth in 29 CFR 1926.62.
3.5 CLEAN-UP PROCEDURES
A. When work is in progress, the work site shall be cleaned at end of each day's activities.
The building shall be secured to prevent entry by any person after termination of workday.
Durable equipment, such as power and hand tools, generators, and vehicles shall be
cleaned monthly.
B. Equipment shall be cleaned by HEPA vacuuming. Surfaces shall be maintained as free as
practicable of accumulations of lead containing dust and debris. Clean up of lead
containing dust and debris shall be accomplished with a HEPA vacuum or wet methods.
The debris shall be misted with water with an airless type sprayer and collected with a
mop or broom.
3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL
A. General:
All costs associated with proper disposal of the waste materials (whether hazardous,
non-hazardous or regulated) shall be borne by the General Contractor. All
materials, whether hazardous, non-hazardous or regulated shall be disposed of in
accordance with all laws, and the provisions of this Section and any or all other
applicable federal, state county or local regulations and guidelines. It shall be the
sole responsibility of the General Contractor to assure compliance with all laws and
regulations relating to disposal.
B. Non-Hazardous Materials: The General Contractor shall contact the regional EPA, State
and local authorities to determine disposal requirements for construction and demolition
debris that contains lead paint (non-hazardous). The General Contractor shall be
responsible for providing all dumpsters/containers required for collection and disposal of
such material as well as disposal in an approved landfill.
DISTURBANCE OF LEAD CONTAINING MATERIALS 02081 -9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. Si na e: Prior to the preparation for work which will disturb lead containing paint, the
General Contractor shall place warning signs immediately outside all entrances and exists
to the area, warning that lead work is being conducted in the vicinity. The signs shall be
at least 20"x 14" and read:
WARNING:
LEAD WORK AREA
POISON
NO SMOKING,EATING OR DRINKING
ALLOWED IN THE WORK AREA
The signs shall be in bold lettering with lettering not smaller than two inches tall. Should
personal exposure monitoring results indicate that exposures to lead are below the Action
Level,then the signs will not be required.
C. Access to Work Areas: It will be the General Contractor's responsibility to allow only
authorized personnel into the work area. Barrier tape shall be used to limit access to the
exterior work area. General Contractor shall maintain a bound logbook, in which any
person entering or leaving the lead work area must sign and enter the dates and times of
entry and departure. Should personal exposure results indicate the exposures to lead are
below the Action Level, then a logbook will not be required. The General Contractor or
competent person will not allow anyone access to the work area unless they have
successfully passed an approved training program, and have been fitted and wearing a
properly fitted respirator.
Dumpsters used to store hazardous waste shall be DOT approved, solid enclosed
containers and locked and secured at all times.
3.3 WORK PROCEDURES
A. General: These procedures detail generalities of component work procedures. Resulting
bundles of"containers" of removed components and/or debris shall be carefully handled
to reduce the potential of ripping, bursting or otherwise diminishing the integrity of the
bundle or "container". Care must be taken so that leaded materials are neither burned, nor
dusted, nor result in further exposure to workers, residents or observers. Paint chips shall
be contained either in the HEPA vacuum or in approved six-mil polyethylene disposal
bags.
DISTURBANCE OF LEAD CONTAINING MATERIALS 02081 -8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
4"
B. Personal Hygiene Practices; Where exposures to airborne lead above the OSHA PEL
occurs or may be expected to occur,the General Contractor shall enforce and follow good
personal hygiene practices. These practices shall be performed until personal exposure
sampling indicates that exposures are below the PEL at which time the General Contractor
has the option to continue or discontinue the use of personal hygiene facilities. These
practices shall I include but not be limited to the following:
1. No eating, drinking, smoking, or applying of cosmetics in work area. The General
Contractor will provide a clean space, separated from the work area, for these
activities.
2. Workers must wash upon leaving the work area. The General Contractor will
provide wash facilities. This wash facility will consist of, at least, running potable
water, towels, and a HEPA vacuum. Upon leaving the work area, each worker will
remove and dispose of work suit,wash and dry face and hands, and vacuum clothes.
3. Disposable clothing, such as TYVEK suits, and other personal protective equipment
(PPE) must be donned prior to entering work area. A clean room will be provided
for workers to put on suits and other personal protective equipment and to store their
street clothes. Disposable suits shall be used once,then properly discarded.
4. A lavatory facility must be provided and located adjacent to the work area. The
eating and drinking area, clean room, and the lavatory facility must be maintained in
a clean and orderly fashion at all times. The General Contractor will provide
portable lavatories when needed and disinfect them daily.
5. If air-monitoring data gathered by the General Contractor shows that employees'
exposure to airborne lead exceeds 50 ug/m3,the following conditions apply:
a. Showers must be provided. Shower water must pass through at least a
5.0 micron filter before returning to the public waste system.
b. Workers must shower upon leaving work area.
C. Three-stage decontamination unit must be established consisting of an
Equipment Room, Shower, and Clean Room in series.
3.2 WORK AREA SET UP
A. Site Safety: The General Contractor is responsible for all safety at the work site. This
includes, but is not limited to, electrical safety, mechanical (tool) safety, fire safety, and
personnel protective safety. Safety requirements are, for the most part, common sense and
sound business practice; however, the General Contractor is advised that federal, state,
and local regulations exist which govern safety on the work site. Therefore, in addition to
the following, the General Contractor is responsible for adhering to the most stringent
requirements in effect.
DISTURBANCE OF LEAD CONTAINING MATERIALS 02081 -7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
NOTE: Regulations by the above and other governing agencies in their most
current version are applicable throughout this project. Where there is a
conflict between this Specification and the cited federal, state or local
regulations or guidelines, the more restrictive or stringent requirements
shall prevail. This Section refers to many requirements found in these
references, but in no way is it intended to cite or reiterate all provisions
therein or elsewhere. It is the General Contractor's responsibility to
know, understand, and abide by all such regulations, guidelines and
common practices.
PART II-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. The General Contractor shall be responsible for providing all material and protective
equipment required for performance of the work. The General Contractor shall comply
with all local, state and federal regulations pertaining to the selection and use of materials
and equipment on this project. The General Contractor shall provide a submittal on all
materials and equipment to be used for review and approval by the Architect.
PART III-EXECUTION
3.1 WORKER PROTECTION
A. Initial Determination: The General Contractor shall determine,through personal exposure
monitoring on the job site or through relevant documentation from other similar jobs,
whether workers will be exposed to airborne lead at or above the OSHA Action Level and
Permissible Exposure Limit. If exposures at or above the action level are documented,
appropriate health and safety procedures identified herein shall be followed. If levels
below the action level are documented, the General Contractor shall exercise an
appropriate level of care to ensure that exposures above the action level do not occur.
Whenever there is a chance of equipment, process, control, personnel or a new task has
been initiated that may result in additional employees being exposed to lead at or at or
above the action level or may result in employees already exposed at or above the action
level being exposed above the PEL, the General Contractor shall conduct additional
monitoring.
Note: The General Contractor shall be responsible for performing a
negative exposure assessment on each trade subject to the OSHA
Regulation. The assessment shall take place during routine work
activities, which will simulate employees, actual exposure levels to lead.
All assessments shall take place over an 8-hour time period and shall
include all appropriate PPE and biological monitoring required as stated
herein and as required under 29 CFR 1926.62 Regulations.
DISTURBANCE OF LEAD CONTAINING MATERIALS 02081 -6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1.7 QUALITY CONTROL/ASSURANCE
A. Training Requirements: Workers who will have the potential of lead exposure shall have
proof of successfully completing a training course which covers the topics required by 29
CFR 1926.62. Contractors are also advised that training in other areas may be required by
OSHA and are responsible to ensure that all training requirements for appropriate trades
and procedures are met.
B. Specified Supervisor Qualifications: The General Contractor shall specify an on-site
Supervisor or Competent Person who is fully qualified in all aspects of safe work practices
and procedures with lead containing materials, and have (or will have) completed a
training course within the previous year prior to the commencement of lead related work.
The lead training course will cover all topics required by 29 CFR 1926.62 as well as
training in relevant federal, state and local regulatory requirements, procedures and
standards (including 454 CMR 22.00), supervisory techniques, and proper disposal
procedures.
C. Site Specific Written Compliance Program: The program will be evaluated to ensure the
elements required by 29 CFR 1926.62(e)(2)(ii) (A)-(I) are specific to the conditions at the
job site.
D. Respiratory Protection Program: The General Contractor must provide for review a
written respiratory protection program in accordance with 29 CFR 1920.103 if respiratory
protection is to be worn during this project.
E. Fit Test Records: If respiratory protection is to be worn as part of this project, records of
successful respirator fit testing performed by a qualified individual within the previous 12
months, for each employee to be used on this project with the employee's name and social
security number with each record.
F. Medical Surveillance: The General Contractor shall provide biological monitoring to
workers who have the potential of lead exposure. This monitoring shall be performed in
accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62. If workers are expected to exceed the action level for
more than 30 days in any consecutive 12 months the General Contractor shall institute a
medical surveillance program in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62. A laboratory
approved by OSHA shall conduct Blood lead level sampling and analysis.
1.8 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Work shall conform to the standards set by applicable federal, state and local laws,
regulations, ordinances, and guidelines in such form in which they exist at the time of the
work on the contract and as may be required by subsequent regulations.
B. In addition to any detailed requirements of the Specification, the General Contractor shall
at his own cost and expense comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations of
federal, state, regional and local authorities regarding handling and storing of lead waste
material.
DISTURBANCE OF LEAD CONTAINING MATERIALS 02081 -5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1.5 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Notifications/Approvals: The General Contractor shall make, in proper and timely fashion,
any necessary notifications to relevant Federal, State, and local authorities and shall obtain
and comply with the provisions of all permits or applications required by the work
specified, as well as make all required submittals required under those auspices. The
General Contractor shall indemnify the Owner, their representatives and agents from, and
pay for claims resulting from failure to adhere to these provisions. The costs for permits,
applications, and the like, are to be assumed by the General Contractor.
B. Fees,Permits and Licenses: The General Contractor shall pay licensing fees,royalties, and
other costs necessary for the use of any copyrighted or patented product, design,
invention, or processing the performance of the job specified in this Section. The General
Contractor shall be solely responsible for costs, damages or losses resulting from any
infringement of these patent rights or copyrights. The General Contractor shall hold the
Owner, Architect and Consultant harmless from any costs, damages, and losses resulting
from any infringement of these patent rights or copyrights. If the Specification requests
the use of any product, design, invention, or process that requires a licensing fee or royalty
fee for use in the performance of the job, the General Contractor shall be responsible for
the fee or royalty and shall disclose the existence of such rights.
C. General Contractor shall be responsible for costs for licensing requirements and
notification requirements and other fees related to the ability to perform the work in this
Section. The General Contractor shall be responsible for securing necessary permits for
work under this Section, including removal,materials usage, or any other permits required
to perform the specified work.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Pre-Construction Submittals: Prior to the commencement of the required work, the
General Contractor shall provide the following to the Architect for approval:
1. Copies of certifications,notifications and licenses (as applicable)
2. Written Respirator and Hazardous Communications Programs
3. Written Lead Compliance Program in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.62
4. A written description detailing the means and methods to achieve compliance with
the OSHA standard as well as the provisions outlined herein.
5. A written description detailing the means and methods for properly disposing of all
demolition debris in accordance with local, state and federal regulations.
B. Post-Construction Submittals: Final payment to the General Contractor shall not be made
unless the following items are submitted to the Architect for approval.
1. Original Copy of Waste Disposal Manifests acknowledging disposal of any
hazardous and non-hazardous waste material from the project showing delivery date, ,,,k
quantity, and appropriate signature of landfill's authorized representative.
2. Copy of Personal Air Sample Results
DISTURBANCE OF LEAD CONTAINING MATERIALS 02081 -4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
D. OSHA 29 CFR 1926.62 regulates activities that disturb the lead paint by the use of
manual techniques. Regulated activities include abrasive blasting, welding, and cutting,
burning on structures, manual scraping or sanding, and manual demolition of structures.
The work practices described in this Section are intended to adequately protect the
workers from exposure to lead containing paint (LCP), provide a safe workplace, and
protect the environment. However, it shall be the General Contractors responsibility to
comply with this Section as well as any other provisions/requirements outlined by OSHA
and other applicable regulations.
E. Materials and Equipment: The work of this Section, without limiting the generality
thereof, includes the furnishing of labor, materials, tools, equipment, services and
incidentals necessary to safely accomplish tasks which will disturb lead containing paint.
F. Approvals and Inspections: Temporary facilities, work procedures, equipment, materials,
services, and agreements must fully comply with EPA, OSHA, and 1`IIOSH
recommendations, standards and guidelines, as well as any other applicable federal, state,
and local regulations. Where there exists an overlap of these regulations and guidelines,
the most stringent shall apply.
G. Disposal: The General Contractor shall dispose of demolition debris and associated
materials in accordance with Part 3.6 of this Section.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Level: Action Level as defined by OSHA 29 CFR 1926.62 shall refer to employee
exposure, without regard to the use of respirators, to an airborne concentration of lead of
30 micrograms per cubic meter of air (30 ug/m3) calculated as an 8-hour time-weighted
average(TWA).
B. Competent Person: Competent Person shall refer to a person who is capable of identifying
existing and predictable lead hazards in the surroundings or working conditions and who
has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them.
C. HEPA Filter: HEPA Filter shall refer to a filter capable of filtering out monodispersive
particles of 0.3 microns or greater diameter from a body of air at 99.97 percent efficiency
or greater.
D. Lead Containing Paint (LCP): LCP shall refer to paint found to contain lead in any
concentration or paint assumed to contain lead as indicated in this Section.
D. Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL): PEL shall refer to employee exposure, without regard
to the use of respirators, to an airborne concentration of lead of 50 micrograms per cubic
meter of air(50 ug/m3)calculated as an 8 hour time-weighted average.
E. Contractor or Subcontractor: Refers to any trade or vendor who is working on the site.
DISTURBANCE OF LEAD CONTAINING MATERIALS 02081 -3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. The Architect has retained ATC Associates Inc., as its Environmental Consultant for
Project Design, Technical Advisement and Administration of the Contract. However,
all work shall be subject to final approval by the Architect and the Owner. The
General Contractor shall regard ATC's direction, as authoritative and binding as
provided herein, in matters outlined by this Section and the Contract Documents.
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The General Contractor and all Subcontractors who work on the project shall be made
aware that lead-containing paint may be present on architectural or structural components
that will be impacted by renovation activities on this project. Due to the age of the
building and previous painting history, the General Contractor shall assume all painted
surfaces to be lead containing and comply with this Section and OSHA Regulations
accordingly. However, lead abatement of these components shall not be required for
performance of the renovation work outlined therein.
Note: The building is not considered a residence, therefore, abatement of lead-
containing components will not be required as per Massachusetts
Department of Public Health (DPH) "Child Lead Poisoning and Prevention
Regulations. However, if the Contractor deems that removal of the lead
paint will be an appropriate "engineering control"for compliance with their
OSHA program, then such removal shall be performed at the Contractor's
own expense in accordance with applicable requirements. No additional
compensation shall be granted for any engineering control methods
employed by the Contractor for compliance with this Section, OSHA or other
applicable requirements.
B. The General Contractor may elect to perform testing to confirm the presence of lead
containing materials in the building at their own discretion. However, all costs associated
with such testing and compliance with this Section shall be borne by the General
Contractor.
C. The General Contractor and all subcontractor's shall be required to comply with all aspects
of OSHA 29 CFR 1926.62 "Lead in Construction Regulations" with regards to
disturbance of these materials when performing their work. It shall be the sole
responsibility of each General Contractor for compliance with OSHA including all costs
associated with,but not limited to:
• Development and implementation of a Lead Compliance Program.
• Development and implementation of a Respiratory Program.
• Development and implementation of a Medical Monitoring Program.
• Development and implementation of a Hazard Communication Program.
• Performance of any lead testing required on the project.
• Performance of any Negative Exposure Assessments required.
• Providing all medical examinations required.
• Providing all equipment required(Including appropriate PPE)
• Providing all engineering controls and associated work practices.
• Disposing of all demolition material in accordance with local, state and federal
regulations
DISTURBANCE OF LEAD CONTAINING MATERIALS 02081 -2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 02081 -DISTURBANCE OF LEAD-CONTAINING MATERIALS
PART I-GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Equality of material, article, assembly or system other than those named or described in
this Section shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of the CONTRACT
AND GENERAL CONDITIONS.
C. The General Contractor shall refer to other Sections of the Specifications for work,
which may impact the sequence, or the work of this Section. Examine all Drawings
and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements of related sections
affecting the work of this Section.
D. The General Contractor shall be made aware of the presence of other hazardous
materials at the site to be remediated under this Contract. The General Contractor is
hereby made aware of the presence of such materials and shall comply with all
applicable regulations regarding worker protection, environmental protection and
disposal of such materials that may be disturbed when performing the work of this
Section. No additional compensation or contract extension shall be granted for failure
to comply with this requirement.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. The following definitions shall be applicable to this Section:
"Site". Refers to the Lilly Library located in Florence, Massachusetts as described
by the Contract Documents and Architectural Drawings.
"Owner": Refers to the Trustees of the Lilly Library and their designated,
authorized personnel.
"Architect/Engineer". Refers to Caolo & Bieniek Associates, Inc. 521 East Street,
Chicopee,Massachusetts and their designated, authorized personnel.
"Consultant". Refers to ATC Associates, Inc., 73 William Franks Drive, West
Springfield,Massachusetts and their designated, authorized personnel.
"General Contractor". Refers to DCAM Certified Contractor who has been awarded
the overall contract for renovation work outlined by the Contract Documents. All
references to General Contractor shall include all Subcontractors who work on the
project as well.
DISTURBANCE OF LEAD CONTAINING MATERIALS 02081 - 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
A. The Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall be responsible for achieving acceptable
visual and final air clearance testing for ALL abatement areas as follows:
• Clearance inspection: ATC's Project Monitor shall inspect the work area and
surrounding areas for clearance using visual and physical methods, prior to
clearing the project for air monitoring clearance procedures.
• Post-abatement Clearance Air Monitoring: For each abatement areas, post
abatement clearance air samples will be taken when a visual inspection by
ATC's Project Monitor detects no visible debris, and surfaces are
encapsulated and dry.
• Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM) clearance testing will be performed to
confirm the completion of removal. All clearance testing shall be performed
in accordance with state of Massachusetts and EPA "Asbestos Hazard
Emergency Response Act" (AHERA) Regulations. The work areas shall be
considered complete if the following criteria is met:
1. Containment's cleared and samples analyzed by Phase
Contrast Microscopy (PCM): Maximum airborne fiber
concentration of <0.01 fibers per cubic centimeter for each
sample(minimum 5).
AWN
Note: Should results indicate a fiber concentration greater than the clearance
criteria stated above or if the visual inspection fails, the Asbestos
Abatement Contractor shall reclean the entire work at no additional cost
to Owner, utilizing the methods specified in this section. The Asbestos
Abatement Contractor shall pay for all additional testing and
inspections until the clearance level is achieved as per this Section. The
cost of additional testing and inspection shall be paid by the Asbestos
Abatement Contractor by subtracting the cost for analysis and
inspector's time from the General Contractor's total. This shall also
include resampling of any areas where air cassettes became overloaded
due to construction activities.
END OF SECTION 02080
Amok
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080- 16
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
C. OSHA/EPA labeling: Asbestos warning labels having permanent adhesive and
waterproof print, or being permanently printed on the container, shall be affixed to
the outside of all asbestos containers, and each inside bag, except that nonfriable
asbestos-containing waste that has not been and does not have a high probability of
becoming, crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder need not be labeled. Labels
will be conspicuous and legible and shall contain the following warning:
DANGER
CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS
AVOID CREATING DUST
CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD
The Asbestos Abatement Contractor is directed to properly label each waste bag in
accordance with the latest NESHAP standard, Section 61.150, with the following
information:
SITE OWNER'S NAME
SITE NAME
D. DOT labeling and marking: A DOT "class 9" shipping label and DOT mark shall be
applied to or be printed on each packaging of asbestos-containing materials; except
for nonfriable asbestos-containing materials that did not become crumbled,
pulverized, or reduced to powder; or a limited quantity of asbestos-containing
"* material which is not being transported by air.
E. EPA vehicle marking: Each vehicle transporting asbestos-containing waste shall be
marked with asbestos danger signs during loading and unloading of the waste, in
accordance with the NESHAP,40 CFR 61.150.
F. Asbestos waste shipment records: The Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall prepare
the waste shipment records. Completed waste shipment record(s) signed by the
Asbestos Abatement Contractor, all transporter(s), transferor(s), disposal and/or
conversion facility(s), shall be provided to the Owner within 30 days of the time at
which the asbestos-containing wastes are received at the disposal and/or conversion
facility(ies), which shall be no longer than 40 days after the waste was accepted by
the initial transporter. The Waste Shipment Record shall specify the designating
number of bags or cubic yard(s)of asbestos waste.
G. Depositing: Asbestos waste shall be deposited as soon as practical at a regulated
waste disposal site, except for EPA "Category I" nonfriable ACM that has not
become friable, nor will be or has been sanded, ground, cut, or abraded. Waste
disposal sites for asbestos materials will be in accordance with 40 CFR 61.25, Waste
Disposal Sites. The Contractor shall provide written evidence that the site is
approved for asbestos disposal by the EPA, State and local regulatory agencies.
3.04 QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080- 15
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
number of Negative Air Filtration Units (NAFU's) to meet the requirements of local,
state and federal regulations.
G. Removals: Removal of asbestos containing materials, unless specified otherwise,
will be performed using negative air filtration techniques, wet methods, attached
three stage decontamination chambers, the masking and sealing of openings, ducts
and vents, full two-layer plastic containment's and the encapsulation of post removal
surfaces. Removals will be as indicated and as specified herein, and will be
performed in a neat and workman like manner to the limits indicated or specified.
Asbestos will be consistently and thoroughly wetted with a fine spray of amended
water and will be carefully removed and immediately placed in approved and
properly labeled six mil polyethylene disposal bags. Asbestos residual materials will
be diligently scraped or brushed from surfaces. After brushing and scraping, surfaces
will be free of visible debris and fibers and surfaces will be HEPA vacuumed clean.
H. Visual Inspections: Work areas shall pass a visual inspection conducted by the Site
Supervisor responsible for the project and the Owner's Project Monitor (i.e.
Consultant). The criterion for this inspection will be the absence of visible debris in
accordance with ASTM standard E1368-90. A certificate of visual inspection will
be signed by the Project Monitor and the Site Supervisor after final inspection
clearance. The Contractor will be responsible for the costs of visual inspection and
testing required for any work which fails clearance air quality criteria.
I. Encapsulation: A bridging encapsulant/lockdown sealant will be applied to
remaining surfaces in direct contact with removal operations, polyethylene sheeting
and on any porous surfaces within the work site. The chosen encapsulant must be
compatible with the replacement materials and conform to the proper edition of
applicable fire and electrical standards.
J. Work Completion: Final air clearance testing shall be performed by the Project
Monitor for all areas.
3.03 DISPOSAL
A. Packaging: Prior to post-abatement inspection, asbestos- containing waste shall be
packaged in sealed double containers and removed from the work area to a specified
transportation vehicle or a designated holding area approved by the Owner. At the
end of each work day the Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall remove the debris
accumulated during that days work activities using procedures outlined in the
Specifications. The Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall provide a daily tally of all
bags removed.
B. Temporary Storage of Waste: An area for temporary storage of asbestos waste must
be approved by the Owner. Asbestos waste may only be stored in a restricted area
and must be in an enclosed container which is posted and secured whenever not in
use. Asbestos waste material shall be loaded into a waste transportation
vehicle/dumpster and hauled away as soon as there is a sufficient quantity available A"k,
for direct transportation to the approved disposal site.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080- 14
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
wall plastic necessitates seams, the seams in successive layers of
plastic sheet shall be staggered so as to reduce the potential for water
or asbestos to penetrate through the covering.
C. The two separate layers of six-mil polyethylene sheeting on walls
and floors shall constitute the primary and secondary containment
barriers, respectively. This containment, along with the
decontamination chamber, will constitute full containment, and will
isolate the contained worksite from surrounding areas except where
air must enter the worksite due to the use of exhaust equipment.
3. Mini-Containment:
a. Unless otherwise specified, floors and walls will be masked and
sealed with a minimum of one layer of six mil polyethylene sheeting
with a minimum overlap of 12 inches at seams and up walls. No
seams shall be located at the wall-to-floor joints.
b. Where it is necessary to mask and seal ceiling areas, a minimum of
one layer of six mil polyethylene sheeting will be used.
C. A single stage decontamination unit shall be erected at the entrance
to the mini-containment.
C. Personal Air Sampling: Daily personal and excursion sampling will be the
responsibility of the Contractor to check personal exposure levels versus respiratory
protection and to check work practices. At least 25%of the workers in each shift,but
not less than 2, shall be sampled. The Contractor is responsible for his own personal
sampling as outlined in OSHA Regulation 1926.1101. The Contractor shall post the
personal air sample results within 24 hours.
D. Remedial Cleaning: Remedial cleaning of horizontal surfaces, ledges, and equipment
will be required prior to masking and sealing operations of work areas as well as
cleaning of the Room 441 (Mechanical Room) as outlined by the Scope of Work.
Cleaning will be done using HEPA vacuums and wet methods. Determinations of
additional remedial cleaning will be made on the basis of hazard potential to workers
and the outside environment relating to setup and masking and sealing operations(as
deemed by the Consultant). Respiratory protection and protective clothing will be
required for the cleaning. Prior to remedial cleaning negative air filtration units and a
three stage decontamination shall be in place and running and all wall and ceiling
penetrations shall be sealed with fire retardant spray foam.
E. Decontamination Chambers: The Contractor shall construct a decontamination
chamber in accordance with local, state and federal regulations governing asbestos
abatement.
F. Negative Air Filtration: The Contractor shall establish negative pressure air filtration
low within the work areas. The Contractor shall install, operate,and maintain a sufficient
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080- 13
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. General: The following paragraphs detail the work requirements for the regulated
area. Workers shall wear tyvek suits and respiratory protection for all removals.
B. Masking and Sealing
1. Critical Barriers
a. Prior to any masking and sealing operations which will make up the
asbestos removal work area, windows, doors, openings, ducts, drains
and vents will be masked and sealed with a minimum of one layer of
six (6) mil polyethylene sheeting. Voids in the walls and ceilings
that are due to penetrations of conduits and pipes shall be sealed with
a fire retardant spray foam. Large opening to occupied areas,such as
open doorways, hallways, passageways and major openings shall be
sealed with permanent, solid construction materials and made air
tight in accordance with DLWD regulations 453 CMR 6.00.
b. In areas where drains or sump pumps are located,primary filters will
be placed in drain and openings sealed with 6 mil polyethylene
sheeting, in addition to floor masking and sealing requirements.
C. Any furniture, fixtures, or stored material that cannot be removed or
that must remain in the work area will be covered, masked and .k
sealed with a minimum of one layer of six (6) mil polyethylene
sheeting. If the surfaces of these materials are determined to be
contaminated with asbestos fibers, the Contractor shall remedial
clean them prior to masking and sealing.
d. Exposed electrical panels in work areas will be shut off when
possible, and masked and sealed with a minimum of two (2)layers of
six(6)mil polyethylene and duct tape.
2. Full Containment:
a. Unless otherwise specified, floors and walls will be masked and
sealed with two layers of six mil polyethylene sheeting with a
minimum overlap of two feet at seams and up walls. Where it is
necessary to mask and seal ceiling areas, a minimum of one layer of
six mil polyethylene sheeting will be used.
b. The floors shall be covered first and the flooring plastic shall extend
up on the walls. The walls shall then be covered with plastic from
ceiling to floor level, thus overlapping the floor plastic. The floor
shall then be covered with the second layer of plastic, the plastic
extended up the walls and the edges sealed to the wall plastic. The
walls shall then be covered with a second layer of plastic from
ceiling to floor level, thus overlapping the second layer of floor Awk
plastic. The bottom portion of the wall plastic shall thus be
sandwiched between the layers of the floor plastic. If the floor or
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080- 12
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
1.14 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Use of Owner provided facilities is specified in Division 1 and shall be coordinated
through the Owner.
PART II-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
All materials and equipment proposed to be used on this project shall be subject to the
acceptance of the Owner, Architect and Consultant. The Asbestos Abatement Contractor
shall comply with local, state and federal regulations pertaining to the selection and use of
materials and equipment on this project. The Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall provide a
submittal on all materials and equipment to be used for review and approval by the Architect
and Consultant prior to commencement of the work.
PART III-EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Critical Barriers: Prior to any masking and sealing operations which will make up
the asbestos removal work area, windows, doors, openings, ducts, drains and vents
will be masked and sealed with a minimum of one layer of six (6) mil polyethylene
sheeting_. Large opening to occupied areas, such as open doorways, hallways,
passageways and major openings shall be sealed with permanent, solid construction
materials and made air tight in accordance with DLWD regulations 453 CMR 6.00.
Voids in the walls and ceilings that are due to penetrations of conduits and pipes shall
be sealed with a fire retardant spray foam. Exposed electrical panels in work areas
will be shut off when possible, and masked and sealed with a minimum of two (2)
layers of six(6)mil polyethylene and duct tape.
B. Decontamination Chambers: It is the Asbestos Abatement Contractor's responsibility
to provide Decontamination Chambers consisting of an equipment room, shower and
clean room for personnel involved in asbestos removal. The Chamber shall be
masked and sealed with two layers of six mil polyethylene sheeting with flaps
between each room. Each of the three rooms will be of a sufficient size to
accommodate the Asbestos Abatement Contractor's contaminated personnel and
related equipment. The rooms will be framed, masked, sealed and attached and
sealed to the entry/exit ways of asbestos worksites. Adequate heat and light will be
safely provided. The Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall provide a minimum of
one water heater per work area decontamination chamber. Waste water will be
filtered by 20 micron and 5 micron filters in series prior to discharge.
3.02 ABATEMENT PROCEDURES
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080- 11
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
the requirements of the General Conditions, and no later than fifteen (15) working
days prior to planned commencement of proposed modification, for review and
approval.
B. Unless requests for modification or substitution are made in accordance with the
above instructions and the instruction of the General Conditions, supported by
sufficient proof of equality, Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall be required to
furnish the specifically named or designed items, methods or procedures designated
in this Section.
C. If the modification or substitution necessitates changes or additional work, same shall
be provided and the Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall assume the cost and the
entire responsibility thereto unless performed under the approved Change Order
Process.
D. The Owner and Architect's permission to make such substitution shall not relieve the
Asbestos Abatement Contractor from full responsibility for the work.
1.12 SITE SECURITY
A. The Asbestos Abatement Contractor is responsible for performing all work under this
contract without contaminating the building environment with asbestos fibers. This Aft*
includes interiors of duct work, outside containment locations, machinery and
equipment and any other release into unregulated spaces. The Asbestos Abatement
Contractor is responsible for making right and clean-up of any such contamination if
found to be present.
B. The Asbestos Abatement Contractor will be responsible for the security of the
abatement area, allowing only authorized personnel into the area, and securing
assigned entrances and exits with locked doorway's at the end of the work day. Signs
will be posted prior to asbestos removal as required in 29 CFR 1926.1101.
1.13 PROJECT MONITOR
A. The Architect (on behalf of the Owner) has retained ATC Associates, Inc., as their
Consultant for the technical advisement and project management during the Project.
In addition, ATC will perform project monitoring services during abatement
activities. The Contractor shall regard ATC's direction, as authoritative and binding
as provided herein, in matters outlined by this Section.
B. ATC's licensed Project Monitor, acting as the Owner's Representative, will perform
monitoring of Contractor work practices and performance, inspection of the
worksites, and air sampling and analysis for each phase of the asbestos removal
project. Quality control and testing criteria has been established in these
specifications, and will be strictly enforced. ATC's Project Monitor will review low*
matters relating to safety, interpretation of the specifications, and scheduling of work,
and will make decisions upon consultation with the Architect and Owner.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080- 10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
C. Secure all necessary permits for work under this Section, including hauling, removal,
and disposal, fire, and materials usage, or any other permits required to perform the
specified work.
1.09 CLEANING
A. Maintain the work site in a neat and orderly manner at all times, so as not to interrupt
or infringe upon the work of other trades. Perform all final cleaning of abatement
work areas as required by this Section and Massachusetts Regulations to the approval
of the Owner's Consultant. Upon completion of work in any given area, Asbestos
Abatement Contractor shall remove all material and equipment associated with the
work,not necessary to complete other phases of the work in that area.
B. Comply with all requirements for final clearance and release of a work area as
described in this Section and required by the Massachusetts Regulations prior to take
down of polyethylene and area clean-up.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Extend full cooperation to Owner in all matters involving the use of Owner's
facilities. At no time shall the Asbestos Abatement Contractor cause or allow to be
!* caused conditions, which may cause risk or hazard to the general public, or
conditions that might impair safe use of the facility.
B. Coordinate the work of this section with that of all other trades as directed by the
General Contractor and at the express consent of the Owner and Architect. Phasing
and scheduling of this project will be subject to the approval of the Owner and
Architect. The work of this Section shall be scheduled and performed so as not to
impede the progress of the project as a whole. Work shall not proceed in any area
without the express consent of the Owner and Architect. The Asbestos Abatement
Contractor shall be available within 24 hours notice for additional work if after
acceptance of the work it is found that full abatement was not achieved from the
initial work effort as determined by the Owner,Architect or Consultant.
C. Complete Asbestos activities in the phases of the final schedule agreed upon by
Owner and Architect.
1.11 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS OR METHODS
A. Owner and Architect approval is required for all modifications to methods,
procedures, and design, which may be proposed by the Asbestos Abatement
Contractor. It is the intent of these documents to allow the Asbestos Abatement
Contractor to present alternative methods to the abatement processes herein, for
review by Owner and Architect. Any such modifications or substitutions to methods,
procedures, or design shall comply with applicable regulations. Asbestos Abatement
Contractor shall submit the proposed modification or substitution in accordance with
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080-9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. In addition to the items required by other sections of the Project Manual, the
following submittals are required for final payment
1. Copy of Waste Shipment Records
2. Copy of Air Sample Results
3. Original Bound Log Book
1.07 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All work shall conform to the standards set by applicable Federal, State and local
laws, regulations, ordinances, and guidelines in such form in which they exist at the
time of the work on the contract, and as may be required by subsequent regulations.
In addition to any detailed requirements of the Specification,the Asbestos Abatement
Contractor shall at his own cost and expense comply with all laws, ordinances, rules
and regulations of Federal, State, Regional and Local Authorities regarding handling
and storing of asbestos waste material. This includes all applicable OSHA
regulations.
B. All regulations and other governing agencies in their most current version are
applicable throughout this project. Where there is a conflict between this
Specification and the cited State, Federal, or local regulations, the more restrictive or
stringent requirements shall prevail. This Section refers to many requirements found w. F
in these references, but in no way is it intended to cite or reiterate all provisions
therein or elsewhere. It is the Asbestos Abatement Contractor's responsibility to
know,understand, and abide by all such regulations and common practices.
1.08 FEES,PERMITS& LICENSES
A. The Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall pay all licensing fees, royalties, and other
costs necessary for the use of any copyrighted or patented product, design, invention,
or process in the performance of the work specified in this section. The Asbestos
Abatement Contractor shall be solely responsible for costs, damages, or losses
resulting from any infringement of these patent rights or copyrights. The Asbestos
Abatement Contractor shall hold the Owner, Consultant and Architect harmless from
any costs, damages, and losses resulting from any infringement of these patent rights
or copyrights. If the Contract Specification requests the use of any product, design,
invention, or process that requires a licensing, patent or royalty fee for use in the
performance of the job, the Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall be responsible for
the fee or royalty fee and shall disclose the existence of such rights.
B. Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall be responsible for costs for all licensing
requirements, where applicable and notification requirements and all other fees
related to the Asbestos Abatement Contractors ability to perform the work in this
Section.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
TABLE 1.0—(Continued)
SUMMARY OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS
LOCATION MATERIAL QUANTITY NOTES
Floor Tile/Linoleum Sheathing Includes Circulation Desk &
Main Floor Area &Mastic/Backing 340 SF Young Adult Section
Floor Tile/Linoleum Sheathing
Periodicals Room &Mastic/Backing 335 SF
Floor Tile/Linoleum Sheathing
Children's Room &Mastic/Backing 150 SF
Floor Tile/Linoleum Sheathing
Director's Office &Mastic/Backing 105
Old Fiction/Non-Fiction Floor Tile/Linoleum Sheathing
Room &Mastic/Backing 180 SF
Floor Tile/Linoleum Sheathing
Attic &Mastic/Backing 120 Stored Material
Attic Thick Bulletin Board 6 SF
White Exterior Window
Exterior Caulking 45 EA Original Caulking at Frame
1.05 ALTERNATES
Not Applicable
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. In addition to items required by other sections of the Project Manual, the following
submittals are required for review and approval by the Architect on/or before the Pre-
Construction Meeting:
1. Copy of Massachusetts DLWD Asbestos Abatement Contractor's License
2. Copies of certifications,notifications and all applicable licenses
3. Written Medical Surveillance Program including the Physicians' written
opinion for employees assigned to the project in accordance with OSHA 29
CFR 1926.1101(m).
4. Copy of Training Records and Current DLWD Licenses for Employees
assigned to project
5. Chain-Of-Command list of all personnel on-site and emergency contact
person(s)
6. Work plan which dictates all removal procedures to be implemented and
projected schedule of completion.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
TABLE 1.0
SUMMARY OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS
LILLY LIBRARY
3/25/05
LOCATION MATERIAL QUANTITY NOTES
Ground Floor Lobby Exterior Door Glazing 1 EA 8 Window Panes in Door
Includes Local History,
Technical Services,
Ground Floor (Main Reference & CDNideo
Rooms) 9" x 9" Floor Tile and Mastic 780 SF Areas
Staff Room 9"x 9" Floor Tile and Mastic 210 SF
Women's Room 9" x 9" Floor Tile and Mastic 45 SF
Men's Room 9" x 9" Floor Tile and Mastic 35 SF
Boiler Room Chimney/Duct Mud 2 SF
Include demolition of unit
under containment to access
Boiler Room Boiler Unit 1 EA all ACM.
Includes clean up of debris
Crawl Space Suspect ACM Debris 1,500 SF and dirt `
Stairs to Main Floor Linoleum and Mastic/Backing 10 SF
Main Floor Lobby Linoleum and Mastic/Backing 20 SF
Includes Circulation Desk&
Main Floor Area Linoleum and Mastic/Backing 45 SF Young Adult Section
Periodicals Room Linoleum and Mastic/Backing 65 SF
Children's Room Linoleum and Mastic/Backing 45 SF
Director's Office Linoleum and Mastic/Backing 45 SF
Old Fiction/Non-Fiction
Room Linoleum and Mastic/Backing 25 SF
Floor Tile/Linoleum Sheathing
Stairs to Main Floor &Mastic/Backing 15 SF
Floor Tile/Linoleum Sheathing
Main Floor Lobby &Mastic/Backing 30 SF
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
Abatement Contractor. All analytical results shall be reviewed and
approved by the Owner's Consultant. In addition, the Asbestos
Abatement Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with
proper collection and disposal of all material (whether hazardous or
non-hazardous) and a waste manifest/shipment record shall be provided
to the Owner.
9. The following requirements shall be applicable for abatement work within the
Crawlspace at the site:
• The entire area (i.e. horizontal surfaces,piping, etc.) shall be cleaned as
part of the work. Removal shall include all asbestos debris and
associated contaminated soil throughout the entire crawlspace. Removal
shall include two (2) inches in depth of soil within a three (3)foot radius
of any asbestos debris. All removed soil shall be disposed of as ACM.
10. The following Table 1.0 represents a summary of materials that require
abatement at the site. It shall be the Asbestos Abatement Contractor's
responsibility to perform all such abatement of those materials in accordance
with this Section as well as applicable local, state and federal regulations. No
additional compensation shall be granted to the Asbestos Abatement Contractor
for compliance with applicable laws when performing the abatement work at the
site. This shall include any regulatory requirements that mandate additional or
OW more restrictive containment and abatement procedures than what has been
presented herein. It shall be the Asbestos Abatement Contractor's responsibility
to comply with such regulations as well as any other additional requirements
outlined by this Section. Refer to the Drawings for room locations as referenced
by Table 1.0 and coordinate all work with the General Contractor.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
• Removal of existing floor tile, linoleum and associated mastic/backing
shall include all layers of such materials and associated mastic/backing
(including glue/levelastic, staining, etc) down to the existing concrete or
subfloor. This shall include any layers of plywood or other barriers
located between such materials as well as the associated tiles and
mastic/backing themselves. If the plywood or other barrier is stained
with mastic/backing or glue it shall be removed and disposed of as
asbestos waste. In addition, all staining present on the concrete shall
also be 100% removed. Removal shall also include all covebase and
mastic located in the room as well.
• The Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall remove all material by manual
and/or mechanical means. All cabinets, countertops, dividers, wall
partitions, carpet, etc. located within the room shall be removed by the
Asbestos Abatement Contractor in order to properly perform abatement
of all material.
• All damaged caused to the floor surface as a result of the abatement
shall be repaired by the General Contractor. In addition, if a chemical
removal agent is used to abate the mastic, the material shall be
compatible with new adhesives to be used for installation of the new
flooring material by the General Contractor. Coordination between the
Asbestos Abatement Contractor and General Contractor shall take place .•
with regards to this issue. The General Contractor shall be responsible
for all costs associated with repair or replacement of all new flooring
materials that fail due to incompatibility.
8. The following requirements shall be applicable for abatement of the boiler unit at
the site:
• The Scope of Work includes the removal and disposal of all asbestos-
containing materials located on the exterior and interior portions of the
boiler. Removal shall include, but is not limited to rope, packing
insulation, jacketing, gaskets, firebrick, soot/debris, piping, wall
parging, etc. The Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall be required to
demolish the boiler unit under containment to access all asbestos-
containing materials. All fiberglass and permeable items that result
from demolition activities shall be removed and disposed as asbestos
materials. All non permeable items (i.e. metal jacket, ribs, etc) may be
properly decontaminated and passed out of the area and disposed of as
non-asbestos waste at the approval of the Owner's Consultant.
• The Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall also be made aware that heavy
metals are present within the soot/debris located inside the boiler unit
and breaching. The Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall be responsible
for proper testing of such material to determine: (1) appropriate waste
disposal requirements; and (2) appropriate worker protection to be ..
employed during the work. All costs associated with the testing and
required PPE for handling this material shall be borne by the Asbestos
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
C. The following Scope of Work and Requirements shall be applicable for asbestos
abatement work at the Lilly Library. If a specific note for an abatement procedure or
requirement is not mentioned herein, the Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall perform
the removal of such material in accordance with local, state and federal regulations.
The Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall also refer to the Drawings and coordinate
with the General Contractor for locations of work to be performed.
1. All Asbestos Abatement work shall take place in accordance with the provisions
outlined herein as well as current local, state and federal regulations. In
particular, Massachusetts DL`JD and DEP Regulations regarding asbestos
removal and disposal shall be adhered to. If a removal method is not referenced
herein, the Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall perform the work in accordance
with applicable regulations.
2. The Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall coordinate with the General Contractor
as to the locations of areas to be abated in accordance with the Scope of Work
outlined herein and the Drawings.
3. The Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall be responsible for all demolition work
required to properly access all asbestos materials for abatement.
4. Coordination shall exist between the abatement under this Section and the
disconnection of existing electrical, plumbing or fire suppression equipment
within the building by the General Contractor.
5. All removal procedures shall take place under full containment and a three-stage
decontamination unit under negative pressure unless otherwise specified herein
or as approved by the Consultant.
6. With regards to the variance from requirements on polyethylene sheeting on
"impervious wall" surfaces,the Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall be required
to adhere to all requirements outlined by DLWD regulations governing work area
set-up for asbestos abatement. The Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall provide
a letter to the Owner stating that these provisions are being adhered to when
performing such work in which the Asbestos Abatement Contractor has deemed
such surfaces to be impervious. This letter shall be provided prior to
commencement of the work. This process shall be applicable for all work areas
deemed to contain impervious surfaces by the Asbestos Abatement Contractor.
In addition, the Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall take full responsibility
including all costs associated with approval and/or denial of such actions (i.e.
non use of polyethylene) if determined to be deficient by the Owner's Consultant
and/or a state or federal agency. If the variance is denied or discontinued by said
parties; the Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall proceed with installation of
polyethylene sheeting on such surfaces at no additional cost to the Owner.
7. The following requirements shall be applicable for abatement of all floor tile,
linoleum and associated masticibacking material at the site:
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. Qualifications of Asbestos Abatement Contractor
1. Asbestos Abatement Contractor performing the abatement work of this section
("Asbestos Abatement Contractor") shall be an Asbestos Abatement Contractor
licensed to perform asbestos operations in the State of Massachusetts. Asbestos
Abatement Contractor shall submit license number and proof of licensure.
2. The Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall also provide the project name, contact
person and phone number of three (3) projects which were successfully
completed of similar size and scope within the last two (2) years. Each project
shall have been completed in good standing and the work performed by the
Asbestos Abatement Contractor for each project resulted in no work
violations/citations, contract delays, contract extensions/disputes or litigation.
Failure to provide this information and/or meet the approval of these
qualifications by the Owner may result in rejection of the Asbestos Abatement
Contractor.
3. The Owner, Architect or Consultant shall also reserve the right to research and
utilized other information received from any other projects completed by the
Asbestos Abatement project not provided under 1.03 B (2) above, regardless of
the date completed, location or circumstances resulting from the outcome of their
work. The Owner shall reserve their right to reject the Asbestos Abatement ,00,
Contractor based upon this review, for any reason, if found to be in the best
interest of the Owner.
NOTE: The Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall not be
authorized to begin work until all credentials outlined
above are reviewed and approved by the Architect.
1.04 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work: This section details all areas where asbestos abatement work is to be performed
and lists areas requiring special protection during the abatement work. The Asbestos
Abatement Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, services, training, insurance,
and equipment as needed to complete removal of asbestos-containing and asbestos-
contaminated materials located as indicated below. The Asbestos Abatement
Contractor shall follow all Federal, State and local ordinances, regulations and rules
pertaining to asbestos, including its abatement, storage,transportation and disposal.
B. Quantity estimates have been provided for bidding purposes. However, it shall be the
Asbestos Abatement Contractor's responsibility to verify all quantity estimates in
preparation of their bids, including the location and conditions of all asbestos-
containing materials to be abated under this contract. No additional compensation
and/or contract time shall be granted to the Asbestos Abatement Contractor for failure
to perform this requirement and no compensation shall be granted for variations in the
quantities presented herein.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 02080-ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
PART I-GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Equality of material, article, assembly or system other than those named or described in
this Section shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of the CONTRACT
AND GENERAL CONDITIONS.
C. The Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall refer to other Sections of the Specifications
for work, which may impact the sequence, or the work of this Section. Examine all
Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements of related
sections affecting the work of this Section.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. The following definitions shall be applicable to this Section:
"Site": Refers to the Lilly Library located in Florence, Massachusetts as described
by the Contract Documents and Architectural Drawings.
"Owner": Refers to the Trustees of the Lilly Library and their designated,
authorized personnel.
"Architect/Engineer": Refers to Caolo & Bieniek Associates, Inc. 521 East Street,
Chicopee,Massachusetts and their designated, authorized personnel.
"Consultant': Refers to ATC Associates, Inc., 73 William Franks Drive, West
Springfield, Massachusetts and their designated, authorized personnel.
"General Contractor". Refers to DCAM Certified General Contractor who has been
awarded the overall contract for renovation work outlined by the Contract
Documents.
"Asbestos Abatement Contractor": Refers to the Contractor who is performing
asbestos abatement work as outlined by this Section.
1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS/QUALIFICATIONS
A. All Asbestos Abatement work referenced herein shall be performed by a
Massachusetts licensed Asbestos Abatement Contractor in accordance with
Massachusetts Department of Labor and Industry (DLWD) 453 CMR 6.0
Regulations.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent construction
by selective demolition operations.
B. Patching is specified in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
C. Where repairs to existing surfaces are required,patch to produce surfaces suitable for
new materials.
D. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls to remain with an
approved masonry patching material,applied according to manufacturer's printed
recommendations.
E. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining
construction to remain in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and
refinishing.
F. Patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space where demolished walls or
partitions extend one finished area into another. Provide a flush and even surface of
uniform color and appearance.
G. Closely match texture and finish of existing adjacent surface. Patch with durable
seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances.
H. Where patching smooth painted surfaces,extend final paint coat over entire unbroken
surface containing the patch after the surface has received primer and second coat.
I. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials,if
necessary,to achieve uniform color and appearance.
J. Inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation, where
feasible.
K. Patch,repair,or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface
of uniform appearance.
END OF SECTION 02070
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
0
3. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local
authorities having jurisdiction.
4. If unanticipated mechanical,electrical or structural elements which conflict with
intended function or design are encountered,investigate and measure both nature
and extent of the conflict. Submit report to Owner's Representative in written,
accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Owner's Representative
rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job
progress without delay.
D. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off,
disconnecting,removing,and sealing or capping utility services. Do not start selective
demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified
in writing.
3.03 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS:
A. Remove debris,rubbish and other materials resulting from demolition operations from
building site. Transport and legally dispose of materials off site.
1. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply
with applicable regulations,laws,and ordinances concerning removal,handling
and protection against exposure or environmental pollution.
2. Burning of removed materials is not permitted on project site.
3.04 POLLUTION CONTROLS
1. 1. Use water mist,temporary enclosures,and other suitable methods to limit
the spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental protection
regulations.
2. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous
or objectionable conditions, such as ice,flooding,and pollution.
3. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent
surfaces and areas.
4. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute,hoist,or other device
that will convey debris to grade level.
5. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust,dirt, and debris caused by
selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing
before start of selective demolition.
3.05 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
PART 2-PRODUCTS :
A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials.
1. Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces,
use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible.
2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing
materials.
B. MATERIALS OWNERSHIP:
1. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
otherwise indicated to remain the Owner's property,demolished materials shall
become the Contractors property and shall be removed from the site with further
disposition at the Contractor's option.
2. Historical items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to,
cornerstones and their contents,commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques,
and other items of interest or value to the Owner, which may be encountered
during selective demolition,remain the Owner's property. Carefully remove and
salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly
to the Owner.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION:
A. Prior to commencement of selective demolition work,inspect areas in which work will
be performed. Photograph existing conditions and equipment which could be
misconstrued as damage resulting from selective demolition work; file with Owner's
Representative prior to starting demolition or other work.
3.02 DEMOLITION:
A. Perform selective demolition work in a systematic manner. Use such methods as required
to complete work indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition schedule and
governing regulations.
1. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at
junctures with construction to remain using power-driven masonry saw or hand
tools; do not use power-driven impact tools.
2. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris
to avoid imposing excessive loads on supporting walls,floors or framing.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
1. Provide protective measures as required to provide free and safe passage of
personnel to and from the site.
2. Erect temporary covered passageways as required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. Provide interior and exterior shoring,bracing, or support to prevent movement,
settlement, or collapse of structure or element to be demolished, and adjacent
facilities or work to remain.
4. Remove protections at completion of work.
D. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work at
no cost to Owner.
E. Traffic: Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal in a manner to
ensure minimum interference with roads, streets,walks,and other adjacent occupied or
used facilities.
1. Do not close,block or otherwise obstruct streets,walks or other occupied or used
facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by
"* governing regulations.
F. Explosives: Use of explosives shall NOT be permitted.
G. Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain, keep in service, and
protect against damage during demolition operations.
1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities,except when
authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary
services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing
authorities.
H. Environmental Controls: Use water sprinkling,temporary enclosures,and other suitable
methods to control dust and dirt during all construction activities.Comply with governing
regulations pertaining to environmental protection.
1. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such
as ice,flooding, and pollution.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 -3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA 400%,
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, for information only, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Proposed dust-control measures.
C. Proposed noise-control measures.
D. Schedule of selective demolition activities indicating the following:
1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and
ending dates for each activity.
E. Inventory of items to be removed and salvaged.
F. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed as needed, of existing conditions of
adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage
caused by selective demolition operations.
G. Record drawings at Project closeout according to Division 1 Section "Closeout
Procedures."
1. Accurate As-built drawings indicating all changes implemented during
construction.
H. Landfill records indicating receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill
facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items
or structures to be demolished.
1. Conditions existing at time of commencement of contract will be maintained by
Owner insofar as practicable. However, variations within structure may occur
by Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of selective demolition
work.
B. Partial Demolition and Removal: Items indicated to be removed but of salvable value to
Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. Transport salvaged items
from site as they are removed.
1. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted.
C. Protections: Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection as required to 100%k,
protect personnel and general public from injury due to selective demolition work.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
SECTION 02070-SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and conditions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary General
Conditions and all Division 1 Sections,apply to the work of this section.
B. Refer to Sections 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING.
1.02 SUMMARY OF WORK
A. Extent of selective demolition work is indicated on drawings.
B. Types of Selective Demolition Work: Demolition requires the selective removal and
subsequent offsite disposal or reuse of the following:
1. Existing site elements, including: utilities, and related systems, landscaping,
paving&sidewalks.
2. Existing structural elements, concrete slabs, &masonry walls where shown to
be removed. Salvage existing masonry and roofing slate for cutting&patching
as required.
3. Ceiling grid, ceiling tile,blocking& suspension systems.
4. Light fixtures and other electrical equipment noted to be removed on electrical
drawings.
5. Ceramic, wood, concrete, VAT and VCT the floors. See Abatement
Specifications for removal of Hazardous Materials. General Contractor must
provide documentation of legal disposal.
6. Existing roofing materials and framing to be removed by the roofing contractor
as indicated on the drawings.
7. Existing window removal as part of the work of Alternate No. 1.
8. Existing plumbing fixtures,heating and other mechanical systems removal. See
Plumbing and Mechanical Drawings.
9. Removal of existing boiler room equipment.
10. All other existing material and equipment required to be removed for the
complete installation of the new requirements indicated in the contract
documents.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070- 1
c
F
O'Reilly, Talbot& Okun Associates, Inc. PROJECT Test Pit No. TP-3
293 Bridge Street,Suite 500 Description: Lilly Library Job No. J381-18-01
Springfield,Massachusetts. 01103 Location: Florence,MA, Date: Nov 5,2004
413 -788-6222
Engineer/Geologist: Michael Talbot Contractor: Town of Northampton Ground Elev 280 feet
Weather: Sunny 50 Backhoe: Ford 6750 Start: 0915 AM
Excavator: 1/4 yd bucket Finish: 935 AM
EXCAV. BOULDER
DEPTH SOIL DESCRIPTION EFFORT COUNT REMARKS
3"of Topsoil
Brown, coarse SAND and Gravel, hard subrounded gravel, E
-----------------
1"max,trace silt,dry
-----------------
...........
------------------ E
-----------------
Gray,medium to coarse SAND,trace gravel,trace silt,dry
-----------------
................. E
10 1
-----------------
-----------------
-----------------
REMARKS:
1. No groundwater encountered.
PLAN LEGEND EFFORT
E=Easy
M=Moderate
D=Difficult
Vol._
O'Reilly, Talbot& Okun Associates, Inc. PROJECT Test Pit No. TP-2
293 Bridge Street,Suite 500 Description: Lilly Library Job No. J381-18-01
Springfield,Massachusetts. 01103 Location: Florence,MA Date: Nov 5,2004
(413)-788-6222
Engineer/Geologist: Michael Talbot Contractor: Town of Northampton Ground Elev 279 feet
Weather: Sunny 50 Backhoe: Ford 6750 Start: 0845 AM
Excavator: 1/4 yd bucket Finish: 900 AM
EXCAV. BOULDER
DEPTH SOIL DESCRIPTION EFFORT COUNT REMARKS
3"of Topsoil
Yellow brown,fine to medium SAND,some silt,dry E
FILL
_ Gray brown, coarse SAND and Gravel, hard subrounded gravel,
V max,trace silt,dry
-----------------
5 E
.................
---------------
--
E
......10....... 1
-----------------
................
-----------------
-----------------
REMARKS:
1. No groundwater encountered.
PLAN LEGEND EFFORT
E=Easy
M=Moderate
D=Difficult
low Vol._
O'Reilly, Talbot& Okun Associates, Inc. PROJECT Test Pit No. TP-1
293 Bridge Street,Suite 500 Description: Lilly Library Job No. J381-18-01
Springfield,Massachusetts. 01103 Location: Florence,MA Date: Nov 5,2004
(413)-788-6222
Engineer/Geologist: Michael Talbot Contractor: Town of Northampton Ground Elev 281 feet
Weather: Sunny 50 Backhoe: Ford 6750 Start: 810 AM
Excavator: 1/4 yd bucket Finish: 835 AM
EXCAV. BOULDER
DEPTH SOIL DESCRIPTION EFFORT COUNT REMARKS
4"of Topsoil
-----------------
Gray,coarse SAND,trace fine gravel,trace_ (-)silt,dry E
FILL 1
Brown,medium to coarse SAND,little hard subrounded gravel,
1"max,trace silt,dry
-----------------
( 5 E
-----------------
-----------------
Gray brown,medium to coarse SAND,trace silt
E
10 2
-----------------
-----------------
-----------------
REMARKS:
1. Thin topsoil layer a approximately 2 feet.
2. No groundwater encountered.
PLAN LEGEND EFFORT
E=Easy
M=Moderate
D=Difficult
Vol._
am*tOe melt \
i
N lit
lit
log
•t
L �
lit
y
O"
0
9l TUmIAt 0 U S
CONCRETE'
" PARKfNG AREA �► �
A A
LIMITATIONS
1. The observations presented in this report were made under the conditions described herein.
The conclusions presented in this report were based solely upon the services described in the
report and not on scientific tasks or procedures beyond the scope of the project or the time
and budgetary constraints imposed by the client.The work described in this report was carried
out in accordance with the Statement of Terms and Conditions attached to our proposal.
2. The analysis and recommendations submitted in this report are based in part upon the data
obtained from widely spaced subsurface explorations. The nature and extent of variations
between these explorations may not become evident until construction. If variations then
appear evident,it maybe necessary to reevaluate the recommendations of this report.
3. The generalized soil profile described in the text is intended to convey trends in subsurface
conditions. The boundaries between strata are approximate and idealized and have been
developed by interpretations of widely spaced explorations and samples; actual soil transitions
are probably more erratic.For specific information,refer to the boring logs.
4. In the event that any changes in the nature, design or location of the proposed structures are
planned, the conclusions and recommendations contained in this report shall not be
considered valid unless the changes are reviewed and conclusions of this report modified or
verified in writing by O'Reilly,Talbot &Okun Associates Inc.It is recommended that we be
retained to provide a general review of final plans and specifications.
5. Our report was prepared for the exclusive benefit of our client. Reliance upon the report and
its conclusions is not made to third parties or future property owners.
Preliminary Subsurface Investigations
T Proposed Addition to Lilly Library
O'Reilly, Talbot & Okun -4 Northampton,Massachusetts
[ A S S O C I A T E S ] 1
PRELIMINARY DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS
The proposed building additions can be founded on normal spread footing foundations bearing
on the medium dense sand deposits encountered in the borings, provided they are densified
prior to footing construction. For preliminary design, we recommend that a maximum allow-
able bearing pressure of 4,000 pounds per square foot can be used for design. A high bearing
capacity may be appropriate,depending on the results of design phase explorations.
We recommend that exterior footings be embedded a minimum of 48 inches below the lowest
adjacent grade for frost protection. Conventional spread footings shall be at least 18 inches wide
for continuous footings and at least 24 inches wide for isolated footings. All other applicable
requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code should be followed.
We anticipate that settlements of footings and slabs from static loads bearing on the compacted
medium dense native sands should be small and largely elastic in nature. We anticipate that
maximum settlements under static loads should be less than 1/2 inch and should occur rela-
tively quickly after load application (during construction).
For preliminary design, we recommend that the granular soils present be considered Class S2
soils under Table 1612.4.1 for the Massachusetts State Building Code NSBC). Therefore, an
"S" factor of 1.2 should be used to compute lateral forces. Soil borings with standard penetra-
tion test data would be required to assess liquefaction potential.
The granular soils present appear to be favorable for pavement construction.
No groundwater was observed in the test pits at a maximum depth explored of 10 feet.
Addition measurements will be required, during design phase explorations, to determine design
groundwater levels for basement designs (if basements are included in the project).
If you have any questions,please do not hesitate to contact the undersigned.
Sincerely yours,
'Reilly,Talbot&Okun Associates,Inc.
Michael .Talbot,P.
Princip
Attachments: Site Sketch,Limitations,Test Pit Logs
F:v0300\381 Caolo Bieniek Assoc Inc\18 Lilly Library,Northampton\Letter Reportdoc
Page 2
EnvironrnentalSafetyHealth Geotechnica_
T
Reilly, Talbot & Okun 4 293 Bridge street
[ A S S O C I A T E S j l Suite 500
Springfield,MA 01103
J0381-18-01 Tel 413 789 6222
November 11,2004 Fax 413 788 8830
www.oto-env.com
Re: Preliminary Geotechnical Recommendations
Proposed Addition to Lilly Library
Northampton,Massachusetts
This report provides the results of our investigations and our preliminary geotechnical
recommendations for the proposed addition to the Lilly Library, located Meadow Street in the
Florence Section of Northampton, Massachusetts. Our services consisted of the full-time
observation of the test pits, review of the logs and preparation of this report. This report is
subject to the attached limitations.
SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATIONS
C
Subsurface investigations consisted of three backhoe test pits,TP-1 through TP-3. The test pits
were performed on November 5, 2004 by the City of Northampton Department of Public
Works.Test pit TP-1 was located at the south side of the existing library building. Test pits TP-
2 and TP-3 were located near the northwest and northeast corners of the library, respectively.
An engineer from O'Reilly, Talbot & Okun Associates, Inc. (OTO) observed and logged each
test pit. Test pit locations are shown on the attached sketch. Test pit logs are attached.
SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
Subsurface conditions were generally favorable for the proposed construction. They generally
consisted of a thin layer of topsoil over granular soils. In test pit TP-1 approximately two feet of
granular fill was present beneath the surface top soil layer and was in turn underlain by a second
thin (less than 2 inches thick) topsoil layer. The underlying soil layers in each of the test pits
consisted of a medium to coarse sand with varying amounts of gravel and generally trace
quantities of silt. The natural sand varied in color from brown to gray. In some zones, the sand
contained up to 50%gravel.
No groundwater was encountered in the test pits.
GEOTECHNICAL ISSUES
The significant geotechnical issues for the proposed construction addressed will be foundation
bearing capacity and settlement, earthquake considerations,pavement design and the placement
of fill beneath building pads. Based upon the conditions observed, it appears that subsurface
( soil conditions are favorable.
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 02010-SUBSURFACE SOIL INVESTIGATION
SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT
A. Subsurface information contained in this report is furnished by an independent
engineering testing service.
B. This data is for general information. Each Bidder shall review the data and examine
the site to ascertain the subsurface conditions likely to be encountered.
C. The Bidder shall be responsible for conclusions drawn from use of this data.
D. The Owner does not represent or warrant to the Bidder that this information is an
accurate indication of subsurface conditions. No claim for extra cost or extension of
time resulting from reliance on such information shall be allowed.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. This section consists of a subsurface investigation report providing geotechnical
recommendations for the proposed project performed by O'Reilly, Talbot & Okun
Associates, Inc., Geotechnical Engineers, as summarized in their report dated
November 11, 2004.
B. The geotechnical report is included for informational purposes only, without
warranty on the part of the Owner or Architect as to completeness or accuracy. The
report in conjunction with the requirements in Section 02220, constitute the contract
requirements for structural excavation and backfill.
C. The report is an attachment to this section, consisting of 7 pages total including 3
pages of narrative, 1 site plan with test pit locations noted and 3 pages of test pit logs.
SUBSURFACE SOIL INVESTIGATION 02010- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
condition.
3. Thoroughly clean floors. Remove temporary protections. Vacuum carpeted surfaces.
Leave concrete floors broom clean.
4. Clean surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication,
oil, grease and similar substances.
5. Remove marks,stains,fingerprints,and other soil from finished,painted,decorated,
and stained surfaces.
6. Clean fixtures and equipment. Clean light fixtures and lamps.
7. Clean plumbing fixtures to sanitary condition.
8. Clean and polish exposed finish hardware.
9. Vacuum dust ceilings,lighting fixtures,ceiling diffusers,and other wall and ceiling
items.
10. Clean windows, glass in doors, inside and out. Employ services of professional
window washer. Clean other transparent material.
G. Site Clean-Up:
1. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter and other
foreign substances.
2. Sweep paved areas broom clean;remove stains, spills and other foreign deposits.
3. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted,to a smooth even-textured surface.
4. Clean storm drain system, including inlets and catch basins, of silt, rubbish and
debris.
3.3 PEST CONTROL:
A. Engage an experienced exterminator to make a final inspection, and rid the Project of
rodents, insects and other pests.
3.4 REMOVAL OF PROTECTION:
A. Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work during
construction.
3.5 COMPLIANCE:
A. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and with safety standards for
cleaning.
B. Do not burn waste materials.
C. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's property.
D. Do not discharge volatile, harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems.
E. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner.
F. Where extra materials of value, remaining after completion of associated work, have
become the Owner's property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed.
END OF SECTION 01700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 -5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
a. Start-up.
b. Shutdown.
C. Emergency operations.
d. Noise and vibration adjustments.
e. Safety procedures.
f. Economy and efficiency adjustments.
g. Effective energy utilization.
3.2 FINAL CLEANING:
A. Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning.
B. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building
cleaning and maintenance program.
C. Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for Certification of
Substantial Completion.
E. Clean-up and repair:
1. Remove remaining temporary construction, excess material and equipment.
2. Remove waste, foreign matter, and debris resulting from construction, from the
building areas and the site.
3. Restore material,property and construction damaged by construction personnel and
equipment during performance of the Work.
4. In addition to removal of debris and cleaning included in other Sections, clean
exposed-to-view surfaces of the Work.
5. Clean and renovate permanent products and systems used to provide temporary
services and facilities during construction. This includes,but is not limited to:
a. Replacing air filters and cleaning the inside of ductwork and housings.
b. Replacing significantly worn parts and parts that have been subject to severe
operating conditions.
C. Replacing lamps in the lighting system that are burned out or noticeable
dimmed.
6. Remove temporary protection and labels which are not required to remain.
7. Replace damaged or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials.
8. For air handling units used during construction, clean permanent filters, replace
disposable filters. Clean ducts,blowers, and coils of units operated without filters.
F. Surface Cleaning:
1. Clean exposed hard-surfaced finishes to a condition free of dust, stain, film and ,,nk
similar detracting substances.
2. Clean and restore reflective surfaces, including mirrors, to their original reflective
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
tow
1.5 MAINTENANCE MANUALS:
A. Organize operating and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size.
1. Bind properly indexed data in individual heavy-duty 2-inch, 3-ring vinyl-covered
binders,with pocket folders for folded sheet information.
2. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder.
3. Include the following types of information:
a. Emergency instructions.
b. Spare parts list.
C. Copies of warranties.
d. Wiring diagrams.
e. Recommended"turn around"cycles.
f. Inspection procedures.
g. Shop drawings and product data.
h. Fixture lamping schedule.
PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES:
A. Operating and Maintenance Instructions:
1. Arrange for each installer of equipment that requires regular maintenance to meet
with the Owner's personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and
maintenance.
2. If installers are not experienced in procedures,provide instruction by manufacturer's
representatives. Include a detailed review of the following items:
a. Maintenance manuals.
b. Record documents.
C. Spare parts and materials.
d. Tools.
e. Lubricants.
f. Fuels.
g. Identification systems.
h. Control sequences.
i. Hazards.
j. Cleaning.
k. Warranties and bonds.
1. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments.
3. As part of instruction for operating equipment,demonstrate the following procedures:
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1. On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will either proceed with
inspection or advise the General Contractor of unfilled requirements.
2. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following
inspection,or advise the General Contractor of construction that must be completed
or corrected before the certificate will be issued.
3. The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work has
been substantially completed.
4. The Architect will invoice the Owner for services performed in inspections beyond
the original inspection and the first reinspection. The Owner will, in turn,pass this
cost on to the General Contractor and require a "deduct" Change Order due to the
Owner.
5. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final
acceptance.
1.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of completion,
submit the following. List exceptions in the request.
1. Final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously
submitted and accepted.
2. Certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required.
3. Updated final statement,accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum.
4. Certified copy of the Architect's final inspection list of items to be completed or
corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance, and that the list has been endorsed and dated by the Architect.
5. Final meter readings for utilities,a measured record of stored fuel,and similar data as
of the date of Substantial Completion, or when the Owner took possession of and
responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
6. Consent of surety to final payment.
7. Evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
B. Reinspection Procedure:
1. The Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of written notice from the General
Contractor that the Work,including inspection list items from earlier inspections,has
been completed, except items whose completion has been delayed because of
circumstances acceptable to the Architect.
2. Upon completion of reinspection, the Architect will prepare a certificate of final
acceptance, or advise the General Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of
obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance.
3. If necessary,reinspection will be repeated.
4. The Architect will invoice the Owner for services performed in inspections beyond
the original inspection and the first reinspection. The Owner will, in turn,pass this
cost on to the General Contractor and require a "deduct" Change Order due to the -0
Owner.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 -2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 01700-CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes:
1. General Procedures to be used in administering Substantial and Final Completion of
the Work.
1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION:
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List exceptions in the request.
1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows the date
Substantial Completion is claimed,show 100 percent completion for the portion of
the Work claimed as substantially complete. Include supporting documentation for
completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an
accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items,the
value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete.
3. Advise Owner of pending insurance change-over requirements.
4. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final
certifications and similar documents.
5. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and
access to services and utilities;include occupancy permits,operating certificates and
similar releases.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items.
7. Make final change-over of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. Advise
the Owner's personnel of change-over in security provisions.
8. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of the Owner's operating and
maintenance personnel.
9. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities from the site,along with
construction tools,mock-ups, and similar elements.
10. Complete final clean up requirements, including touch-up painting. Touch-up and
otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finished.
B. Inspection Procedures:
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
AMR
PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01631
Aw
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 01631 -4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS:
A. Conditions: The Contractor's substitution request will be received and considered by the
Architect when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied,as determined by the
Architect, otherwise requests will be returned without action except to record non-
compliance with these requirements.
1. Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required.
2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contract Documents.
3. The request is timely, fully documented and properly submitted.
4. The request is directly related to an "or equal" clause or similar language in the
Contract Documents.
5. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the
Contract Time.
a. The request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided
as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities
properly.
6. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval
by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved.
7. A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy
conservation or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting
responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear.
a. Additional responsibilities for the Owner may include additional compensation
to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other
construction by the Owner, General Contractor, or separate contractors, and
similar considerations.
8. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that
is compatible with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the
substitution will overcome the incompatibility.
9. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other
materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be
coordinated.
10. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required
by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed
substitution provides the required warranty.
B. The Contractor's submittal and Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings,Product Data or
Samples that relate to construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents
does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor does it constitute
approval.
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 01631 -3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate:
a. Product data,including Drawings and descriptions of products,fabrication and
installation procedures.
b. Samples,where applicable or requested.
C. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with
those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements such
assize,weight,durability,performance and visual effect.
d. Coordination information,including a list of changes or modifications needed
to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Owner and
separate Contractors,that will become necessary to accommodate the proposed
substitution.
e. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the General Contractor's
Construction Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the
substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall
Contract Time.
f. Cost information,including a proposal of the net change,if any in the Contract
Sum.
g. Certification by the Contractor that the substitution proposed is equal-to or
better in every significant respect to that required by the Contract Documents,
and that it will perform adequately in the application indicated.
h. Include the Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or extension of
time, that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the
substitution to perform adequately.
B. Architect's Action:
I. Within one week of receipt of the request for substitution,the Architect will request
additional information or documentation necessary for evaluation of the request.
2. Within 2 weeks of receipt of the request, or one week of receipt of the additional
information or documentation, whichever is later, the Architect will notify the
General Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitution.
3. If a decision on use of a proposed substitute cannot be made or obtained within the
time allocated,use the product specified by name.
4. Acceptance will be in the form of a Change Order.
1.5 REIMBURSEMENT OF ARCHITECT'S COSTS:
A. In the event substitutions are proposed to the Architect after the Contract has been awarded,
the Architect will record time used by the Architect and the Architect's consultants in
evaluating each such proposed substitution.
B. Whether or not the Architect approves a proposed substitution,the Architect will invoice the
Owner for time spent in evaluating the proposed substitution. The Owner will,in turn,pass
this cost on to the General Contractor and require a "deduct" Change Order due to the ,,,ft�l
Owner.
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 01631 -2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,NIA
SECTION 01631 -PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes:
1. Procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract.
1.3 DEFINITIONS:
A. Definitions used below are not intended to change or modify the meaning of other terms
used in the Contract Documents.
B. Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of
construction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award ofthe
Contract are considered requests for "substitutions". The following are not considered
substitutions:
1. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect.
2. Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract
Documents.
3. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and
orders issued by governing authorities.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Substitution Request Submittal:
I. Requests for substitution will be considered if received within 60 days after
commencement of the Work. Requests received more than 60 days after
commencement of the Work may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the
Architect.
2. Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests in
the form and in accordance with procedures required for Change Order proposals.
3. Identify the product,or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each
request. Include related Specification Section and Drawings numbers.
4. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 01631 - 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
tow Florence,MA
C. Fit materials tight to penetrations through wall and floor systems. Provide fire-stopping at
rated systems to meet ratings noted on Drawings.
1.10 INSTALLATION OF MATERIALS:
A. Inspect each product upon delivery and again immediately before installation. Do not
install damaged or defective products,materials,or equipment.
B. For each unit of work,examine substrate conditions before beginning installation. Correct
unsatisfactory conditions before work proceeds.
C. Mount individual units of work at industry-recognized mounting heights if not otherwise
indicated. Refer uncertainties to Architect for resolution.
D. Anchor work securely in place. Locate by measured line and level,organize for uniformity,
visual effect, operational efficiency, durability, and similar benefit to Owner's use, and
Architect's approval.
E. Provide all required accessories for the proper installation,use,and service of each part of
work.
F. Secure work in place with positive anchorage designed and sized to withstand stress
including vibration and racking.
G. Adjust and operate all items of equipment leaving them fully ready for use.
1.11 REPAIR AND RESTORATION:
A. Replace work which,because of construction activity,becomes unfit for use or unsightly.
B. Promptly replace material and equipment damaged in construction activity.
C. Restore finishes which are damaged, soiled, or otherwise made unsightly during
construction.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 -EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)
END OF SECTION 01620
INSTALLATION STANDARDS 01620-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
4. Fasteners for aluminum shall be stainless steel or aluminum.
5. Fasteners for ferrous metals shall be galvanized or stainless steel.
B. Fasteners on the exterior of a building, in cellars and crawl spaces,and other areas where
dampness and corrosion can reasonably be anticipated, shall be one of the types specified
above compatible with the materials involved.
1.6 PROTECTIVE FINISHES:
A. Before installation,apply protective finish to items which are to be concealed. For example,
paint corrodible mounting plates before installing parts over them.
B. Paint aluminum embedded in masonry with bituminous paint.
C. Coat concealed wood exposed to dampness with heavy coat of water repellant-toxic
fungicide.
D. Paint other concealed materials with same primer and finish specified for exposed surfaces.
If concealed materials are fully covered,primer alone is sufficient.
E. Concealed parts which are already corrosion protected need not be painted unless specified
otherwise.
1.7 BLOCKING AND BRACING:
A. Provide adequate blocking,bracing,nailers and fastenings to install the parts of the work
securely. Installed parts shall, in general, be able to withstand 2 '/2 times the maximum
anticipated load.
B. Provide blocking,bracing,nailers,and fastenings which will not be subject to deterioration
or weakening as the result of normal environmental conditions or ageing.
1.8 SUPPORTING BASES:
A. Check Drawings,equipment details,and specifications for the requirements for bases,pads,
and similar supporting structures.
B. Provide such supporting structures whether or not shown on Drawings.
1.9 CRACKS:
A. As part of the requirements for correction of work, repair cracks and other faults which
occur as a result of settlement and shrinkage.
B. Seal cracks and openings to make exterior of building weather tight.
INSTALLATION STANDARDS 01620-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 01620-INSTALLATION STANDARDS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes:
1. General provisions, standards, and tolerances which apply to the Work of this
Contract in the absence of stricter specified standards and tolerances.
1.3 LEVELING:
A. Place work in correct position and,unless specifically called for otherwise,build and install
parts of the work level,plumb,and square.
B. No part shall be out of plumb, level, square, or correct position so much as to impair its
function or the function of any part of the Project.
C. No part shall be out of plumb, level, square, or correct position so much as to impair the
aesthetic effect of the part or its effect on the Project as judged by the Architect.
1.4 JOINTS:
A. Make joints tight and neat. If such is impossible,apply moldings,sealant,or other closure
as directed by Architect.
B. Allow for expansion and contraction.
1.5 FASTENERS:
A. Under potentially damp conditions, provide galvanic insulation between different metals
which are not adjacent on the galvanic scale.
1. Fasteners for carpentry in potentially damp locations shall be stainless steel,
aluminum, or hot dip galvanized steel.
2. Fasteners for copper and brass in all locations and under all conditions shall be
copper or brass.
3. Fasteners for stainless steel shall be stainless steel.
INSTALLATION STANDARDS 01620- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other work.
C. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 01600
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2. Semiproprietary Specification Requirements: Where two or more products or
manufacturers are named,provide one of the products indicated. No substitutions
will be permitted.
3. Non-Proprietary Specifications: When the Specifications list products or
manufacturers that are available and may be incorporated in the Work, but do not
restrict the Contractor to use of these products only,the Contractor may propose any
available product that complies with Contract requirements. Comply with Section on
Product Substitutions to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
4. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or
assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or
trade name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and
otherwise complies with Contract requirements.
5. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance
with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these
requirements which are recommended by the manufacturer for the application
indicated.
a. General overall performance of a product is implied where the product is
specified for a specific application.
b. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product
literature, or by the manufacturer's certification of performance.
6. Compliance with Standards,Codes and Regulations: Where the Specifications only
require compliance with an imposed code, standard or regulation, select a product
that complies with the standards, codes or regulations specified.
7. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample,the
Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches
satisfactorily.
a. If a satisfactory match cannot be made with specified products, comply with
provisions of the Contract Documents concerning substitutions to select a
matching product in another product category.
8. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase "...as
selected from manufacturer's standard colors,patterns,textures..."or a similar phrase,
select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements.
The Architect will select the color,pattern and texture from the product line selected.
9. Allowances: Refer to individual Specification Sections and provisions in Division 1
for allowances that control product selection, and for procedures required for
processing such selections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS:
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products k
in the applications indicated.
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
construction spaces.
C. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are
flammable,hazardous,easily damaged,or sensitive to deterioration,theft and other losses.
D. Deliver products to the site in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other
packaging system,complete with labels and instructions for handling,storing,unpacking,
protecting and installing.
E. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents,and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
F. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of
quantity or counting of units.
G. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not endanger the
supporting construction.
H. Store products, subject to damage by the elements, above ground and under cover, in a
weathertight enclosure with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain
temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions.
elk PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION:
A. General Product Requirements:
1. Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,that are undamaged and,
unless otherwise indicated,unused at the time of installation.
2. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other
devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and
effect.
3. Standard Products: Where available,provide standard products of types that have
been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.
2.2 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES:
A. Product selection is governed by the Contract Documents and governing regulations,not by
previous Project experience.
B. Procedures governing product selection include the following:
1. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where only a single product or
manufacturer is named, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be
permitted.
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
Schedule and the Schedule of Submittals.
3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work,submit 3
copies of an initial product list schedule. Provide a written explanation for omissions
of data, and for known variations from Contract requirements.
4. Completed Schedule: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work,
submit 3 copies of the completed product list schedule. Provide a written explanation
for omissions of data, and for known variations from Contract requirements.
5. Architect's Action: The Architect will respond in writing to the General Contractor
within 2 weeks of receipt of the completed product list schedule. No response within
this time period constitutes no objection to listed manufacturers or products,but does
not constitute a waiver of the requirement that products comply with Contract
Documents.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible,provide products of the same kind,from
a single source.
B. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between
two or more products for use on the Project,the product selected shall be compatible with
products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
C. Nameplates:
1. Except for required labels and operating data,do not attach or imprint manufacturer's
or producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products which will
be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior.
2. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface or,where
required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface that is not
conspicuous.
3. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-
connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface
which is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the
following information and other essential operating data:
a. Name of product and manufacturer
b. Model and serial number
C. Capacity
d. Speed
e. Ratings
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver,store and handle products in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations,
using means and methods that will prevent damage,deterioration and loss,including theft.
B. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding of
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 01600-MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes:
1. Procedures governing the selection of products.
2. Procedures for delivery,storage and handling.
1.3 DEFINITIONS:
A. Definitions below are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in the
Contract Documents,such as"specialties","systems","structure","finishes","accessories",
and similar terms. Such terms such are self-explanatory and have well recognized meanings
in the construction industry.
B. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the
Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms
"material", "equipment", "system", and terms of similar intent.
C. "Named Products"are items identified by manufacturer's product name,including make or
model designation, indicated in the manufacturer's published product literature, that is
current as of the date of the Contract Documents.
D. "Materials"are products that are substantially shaped,cut,worked,mixed,finished,refined
or otherwise fabricated,processed,or installed to form a part of the Work.
E. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts,whether motorized or manually operated,
that requires service connections such as wiring or piping.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product List Schedule:
1. Prepare a schedule showing products specified in a tabular form acceptable to the
Architect. Include generic names of products required. Include the manufacturer's
name and proprietary product names for each item listed.
2. Coordinate the product list schedule with the General Contractor's Construction
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
3.30 TERMINATION AND REMOVAL:
A. Unless the Architect requests that it be maintained for a longer period of time,remove each
temporary service and facility promptly when the need for it has ended, or when it has been
replaced by the authorized use of a permanent facility, and no later than Substantial
Completion.
B. Complete, or if necessary restore, permanent work delayed or damaged because of
interference with the temporary service or facility.
C. Repair damaged work, clean exposed surfaces and replace work which cannot be
satisfactorily repaired.
D. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary services and facilities are and remain the
property of the Contractor,excepting that the Owner reserves the right to take possession of
the Project identification signs.
E. Remove temporary road construction which is not intended for or acceptable for integration
into permanent paving.
F. Where the area shown is intended for landscape development,remove soil and aggregate fill
that does not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil in the landscape area.
G. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petro-chemical compounds,
and other substances which might impair growth of plant materials or grass.
H. Repair or replace street paving,curbs and sidewalks at temporary entrances,as required by
the governing authority.
END OF SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500- 17
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
Amok
C. Provide a secure lockup where materials and equipment of substantial value and subject to
theft must be temporarily stored.
D. Time the release of materials and installation so that the opportunity for theft and vandalism
is minimized.
3.27 SITE ACCESS AND TRAFFIC CONTROL:
A. Provide temporary traffic control facilities at the junction of temporary roads with public
roads, including warning signs for public traffic and "STOP" signs for the access road
entrance onto public roads.
B. Comply with requirements and recommendations of local traffic authorities.
3.228 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION:
A. Provide general protection facilities, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction
activities, in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and that
minimize the possibility of contaminating the air,waterways and subsoil and that minimize
other undesirable effects which might result from the performance of work at the site.
B. Avoid the use of tools and equipment which produce harmful noise. .,M%
C. Restrict the use of noise making tools and equipment to hours of use that will minimize noise
complaints from persons or firms near the project site.
3.29 OPERATION OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES:
A. Maintain discipline in use of temporary services and facilities at the site.
B. Limit availability of facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse.
C. Operate and maintain temporary services and facilities in good operating condition
throughout the time of use and until removal is authorized.
D. Protect from damage by freezing temperatures and harsh weather conditions.
E. Maintain such facilities as temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, and
ventilation on a 24-hour day basis where required in performance of the Work and to avoid
damage to the Work or the facilities.
F. Prevent water-filled piping from freezing, by use of ground covers, with insulation, by
temporary heating, or by draining.
G. Maintain distinct markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation
operations.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500- 16
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
10 Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire exposure areas.
11 Provide supervision of welding operations,combustion type temporary heating units,
and similar sources of ignition for possible fires.
C. Where temporary water outlets are available, provide hoses of sufficient length to reach
construction areas. Hang hoses with notice to the effect that hoses are for fire protection
purposes and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable
nozzles.
D. Permanent Fire Protection:
12 At the earliest feasible date in each area of the Project, complete installation of the
permanent fire protection facility, including connected services, and place into
operation and use.
13 Instruct key personnel at the site on how to use facilities.
3.24 BARRICADES.WARNING SIGNS AND LIGHTS:
A. Comply with recognized standards and applicable code requirements for the erection of
substantial, structurally adequate barricades where needed to prevent accidents and losses.
B. Paint with appropriate colors,graphics and warning signs to inform personnel and the public
of the hazard being protected against.
C. Provide lighting where appropriate and needed, including flashing red lights where
appropriate.
3.25 ENCLOSURE FENCE:
A. When excavation begins, install a general enclosure fence with suitable lockable entrance
gates.
B. Locate as directed to accommodate construction operations,to keep public from construction
areas and to allow public access to areas used by Owner.
C. Relocate as directed as construction work progresses.
D. Install in a manner to obstruct entry to building site except by way of the entrance gates.
E. Provide open-mesh,6-0" high,chain-link fencing with posts set in a compacted mixture of
gravel and earth.
3.26 SECURITY ENCLOSURE AND LOCKUP:
A. Install substantial and durable temporary enclosure of areas of construction which are
partially completed. Existing perimeter fencing and gates may be repaired and used for
construction enclosure.
B. Provide locking entrances adequate to prevent unauthorized entry,vandalism, and theft.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500- 15
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
''"%,
8. Incidental Sheeting&Shoring.
9. Demolition Waste Chutes.
C. Provide miscellaneous services and facilities to meet O.S.H.A. standards of safety and to
comply with laws,rules and regulations having jurisdiction.
D. Cover surfaces of finished permanent facilities such as stairs and ramps with durable
protection and use them in lieu of temporary facilities as soon as practicable.
3.22 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
A. The General Contractor shall furnish and maintain all equipment such as temporary stairs,
ladders, ramps, scaffolds, runways, cutes, dumpsters, etc. as required for the proper
execution of the work,unless specifically included under the work of other trades.
B. All staging,exterior and interior,required to be over eight feet in height,shall be furnished
and erected by the General Contractor and maintained in safe condition by him without
charge to and for the use of all trades as needed by them for proper execution of their work,
except where specified to the contrary in any filed sub-bid section of the specifications.
3.23 SECURITY AND PROTECTION:
A. General: ,,MAN,
1. Provide a reasonably neat and uniform appearance in security and protection facilities
acceptable to the Architect and the Owner.
2. Except for using permanent fire protection as soon as available,do not change over
from use of temporary security and protection facilities to use of permanent facilities
until Substantial Completion.
B. Temporary Fire Protection:
3 Until fire protection needs may be fulfilled by permanent facilities, install and
maintain temporary fire protection facilities of the types needed to adequately protect
against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses.
4 Comply with the applicable recommendations of NFPA Standard 10 "Standard for
Portable Fire Extinguishers"and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction
Alterations and Demolition Operations".
5 Locate fire extinguishers where they are most convenient and effective for their
intended purposes,but provide not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near
each usable stairwell
6 Store combustible materials in containers in recognized fire-safe locations.
7 Develop and supervise an overall fire prevention and first-aid fire protection program
for personnel at the Project site. Review needs with the local fire department officials
and establish procedures to be followed.
8 Instruct personnel in methods and procedures to be followed, post warnings and
information and enforce strict discipline. ,,
9 Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire
protection facilities,stairways and other access routes for fighting fires.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500- 14
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
3.19 COLLECTION AND DISPOSAL OF WASTES:
A. Establish a system for daily collection and disposal of waste materials from construction areas
and elsewhere on the site.
B. Enforce requirements strictly. Do not hold collected materials at the site longer than 7 days.
C. Handle waste materials that are hazardous,dangerous,or unsanitary, separately from other
inert waste by appropriate containerizing.
D. Dispose of waste material in a lawful manner.
E. Do not bury or burn waste materials on the site.
F. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways.
G. Provide rodent proof containers conveniently located on each floor level to encourage
depositing of garbage and similar wastes by construction personnel.
H. Unless specified elsewhere,the General Contractor shall provide waste collection containers
in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations.
3.20 RODENT AND PEST CONTROL:
A. Early in the construction process before deep foundation work has been completed, retain
a recognized local exterminator or insect-and-pest control company to recommend practices
that will minimize attraction and harboring of rodents,roaches and other pests.
B. Employ control service to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals
so that the project will be relatively free of pests and their residues at Substantial
Completion.
C. Perform control operations in a lawful manner using environmentally safe materials.
3.21 CONSTRUCTION AIDS:
A. Design, construct, and maintain construction aids and miscellaneous general services and
facilities as needed to accommodate performance of the Work.
B. These facilities include,but are not limited to:
1. Temporary stairs and ladders.
2. Guardrails and barriers.
3. Walkways.
4. Scaffolding.
5. Platforms.
6. Swing Stages.
7. Ramps&Bridges.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 - 13
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
3.17 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND TEMPORARY SIGNS:
A. General:
1. Prepare project identification and other temporary signs of the size and with graphic
content required; install signs where indicated or as directed. Support on suitable
posts or framing of treated wood or steel
2. Maintain signs in a manner which will properly inform the public and persons seeking
entrance to the Project.
3. The Project identification sign and temporary signs as defined below shall be the only
signs installed on the site.
4. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics in a neat professional manner.
B. Project Identification Sign:
1. 8 foot by 8 foot painted plywood and 4 by 4 wood posts.
2. Sign shall contain name of Project, Owner, Mayor, Architect, Contractor,Library
Trustees (9 members) and Committee Members (9 members). Allow for 200
characters of misc. copy. Sign layout and copy shall be approved by the architect.
3. Paint with exhibit lettering to Architect's design and colors.
C. Temporary Signs: Prepare temporary signs for use on the site to give directional assistance
and information to construction personnel and visitors for such things as:
1. Access drives and parking.
2. Offices and first aid stations.
3. Emergency exits.
4. Fire protection facilities.
5. Hazardous elements of construction work.
D. Provide exterior lights and sign lights as necessary so that signs are clearly visible when
construction work is being performed.
3.18 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK:
A. Provide temporary protection for installed products. Control traffic in immediate area to
minimize possible damage.
B. Provide protective coverings at walls,projections,jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
C. Protect finished floors and stairs from pedestrian traffic, movement of heavy objects, and
material storage.
D. Prohibit traffic and storage on waterproofed and roofed surfaces,on lawn and on landscaped
areas.
Aak
E. Protect trees and plantings against vehicular traffic, stored material, chemically injurious
material,continuous running water and puddling, and dumping.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500- 12
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1. Install potable-water-supply wash facilities at locations convenient to construction
personnel involved in the handling of compounds and materials where wash-up is
necessary to maintain a healthy and sanitary condition.
2. Drain and dispose of drainage properly. Supply soap and other cleaning compounds
appropriate for each condition.
3. Where recommended or required by governing authorities or recognized standards,
provide shower baths,safety showers,eye-wash fountains and similar facilities for the
convenience, safety and sanitation of construction personnel.
D. Drinking Water Fixtures:
1. Provide drinking water fountains where and when piped potable water is reasonably
accessible from permanent or temporary lines.
2. Otherwise, provide containerized tap-dispenser bottled-water type drinking water
units,include the appropriate paper supply.
3.15 DEWATERING FACILITIES AND DRAINS:
A. Maintain the site,excavations and construction free of water.
B. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner which will not result in flooding the Project or
adjoining property,nor endanger either permanent work or temporary facilities.
C. Provide temporary drainage where the roofing or similar waterproof deck construction is
completed prior to the connection and operation of the permanent drainage system.
3.16 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES:
A. At the earliest practical time provide temporary enclosure of materials,equipment,work in
progress and completed portions of the Work for protection from exposure, weather, and
construction site activities.
1. Moisture(rain, snow,hail,etc.)or wind infiltration through temporary or permanent
enclosures shall be cleaned up within 24 hours of occurrence,and damaged materials,
equipment and furnishings replaced at Contractor's own cost.
B. Provide temporary enclosures where temporary heat is needed and the permanent building
enclosure is not yet completed, and there is no other adequate provision for containment of
temporary heat. Coordinate enclosures with ventilating and material drying or curing
requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects.
C. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings where required to separate work areas from Owner
occupied areas,to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas,and
to prevent damage to existing surfaces,fixtures, and equipment.
D. Construct enclosures with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing
surfaces. Use materials that have a maximum flame spread rating of 25,ASTM E-84. Paint
the enclosure surfaces which are exposed to view in Owner occupied areas.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500- 11
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
3. Administration and supervision.
4. Safety and protection activities.
C. To the fullest extent possible,locate temporary paving for storage areas and for temporary
parking, in the same locations as permanent facilities for similar use.
D. Coordinate development of temporary paved areas with grading and compaction of the
subgrade,installation and stabilization of the subbase and installation of the base and finish
courses of the permanent paving.
E. Delay installation of concrete and asphalt concrete paving in areas exposed to temporary use,
until immediately before Substantial Completion.
3.13 STORAGE AND FABRICATION SHEDS:
A. Install sheds,properly sized,furnished and equipped,to accommodate applicable work.
B. Sheds may be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces, whether within the building
construction area or elsewhere on the site.
C. Protect stored materials from excessive humidity and contact with the ground by providing
vapor retardant membrane and palletized storage or vapor retardant floor construction.
3.14 SANITARY FACILITIES:
A. General:
1. Sanitary facilities include temporary toilets,wash facilities and drinking water fixtures.
2. Comply with governing regulations including safety and health codes for the type,
number,location,operation and maintenance of fixtures and facilities;provide not less
than specified requirements. Install in locations that will best serve the Project's
needs.
3. Locate toilets and drinking water fixtures so that no one within the construction area
will need to walk more than 300 feet horizontally to each facility. '
4. Supply and maintain toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups and similar disposable
materials as appropriate for each facility.
5. Provide covered waste containers.
B. Toilets:
1. Provide single-occupant self-contained units of the chemical,aerated recirculation,or
combustion type,properly vented.
2. Units to be fully enclosed with a shell of glass fiber reinforced polyester or similar
non-absorbent material.
3. Locate and shield units for privacy.
C. Wash Facilities:
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500- 10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
�O '•
C. 5 four drawer letter size metal file cabinets,with metal hanging frame in each drawer,
cabinet fire rated and lockable each with three keys/fireproof.
d. One portable 30 inch hanging plan rack unit on casters with 12 sticks for 30-inch sheet
size, each stick with 3 tightening knobs.
e. 1 waste basket with plastic bag liners.
f. 4 individual coat hooks,locate as directed.
g. Plan table,minimum size 42 x 72 inch long,with sloped surface.
h. One swivel drafting stool with back, foot rest, fully adjustable on base with five
casters.
i. One folding table 120 inches long by 30 inches wide.
j. 12 metal folding chairs.
k. Full function large format copier, with automatic document feeder, double sided
copying,automatic sorter capable of sorting twenty copies,reduction and enlargement
feature,built-in stapler.
1. One combination water dispenser and refrigerator, with hot and cold spigots,one six
gallon bottle of spring water delivered as needed, continuous stock of flat bottom
cups.
m. Plain paper fax machine with operating manual and service agreement for term of
construction, with all supplies,parts and materials for duration of project.
n.
n. First class mercury thermometer, mounted outside of trailer in clear view from the
interior via a window.
o. One type ABC fire extinguisher,20 pound size,full charged and inspected.
p. One fully stocked first aid kit with no items beyond expiration date, with supplies
regularly replenished and replaced before expiration dates.
3.12 TEMPORARY PAVING:
A. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paving to adequately support the indicated
loading and to withstand exposure to traffic during the construction period.
B. Extend temporary paving in and around the site construction area as necessary to
accommodate:
1. Parking.
2. Delivery and storage of materials.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500-9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
B. Select heating equipment known to be safe which will not have a harmful effect upon
completed work or work being installed.
C. Coordinate heating and ventilation to produce required ambient conditions and to minimize
the consumption of fuel.
D. Maintain temperature and humidity conditions as required for specific work. Where no
minimum is specified, maintain a minimum temperature of 45°F in permanently enclosed
portions of the building and areas where finished work has been installed.
E. Except where use of the permanent heating system is authorized, provide vented self-
contained LP gas or fuel oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control for temporary
heat.
F. Do not use gasoline-burning space heaters,open flame,or salamander type heating units.
3.11 FIELD OFFICES:
A. Provide standard prefabricated or mobile units, insulated and weathertight, with operable
windows and lockable entrances.
B. Provide temporary field office space of sufficient size to accommodate site office personnel,
the Owner's Project Representative,and a Conference area for project meetings. A"k
C. Provide a vented space heater,capable of maintaining a uniform indoor temperature of 68°F,
and an air-conditioning unit capable of maintaining a maximum indoor temperature of 72F.
D. Provide switch controlled fluorescent light fixtures capable of maintaining average
illumination of 20 foot-candles at desk height,and 110-120 volt duplex outlets spaced at 12'
intervals,with a minimum of one per wall in each room.
E. Furnish suitably with not less than a desk and 2 chairs,a 4-drawer file cabinet,plan table and
plan rack.
F. Equip the office with a drinking-water cooler.
G. Provide, as a part of the field office, or as a separate facility, a room of not less than 200
square feet for Project meetings,furnished with a conference table, 8 folding chairs and a
tackboard.
1. Office Equipment: Provide in good working condition and maintain throughout term
of construction.
a. Two metal desks with plastic laminate tops, 20 x 60 inches,pedestal style with two
drawer letter hanging file on one side and three drawer pedestal on one side, with
pencil drawer center.
b. Two office swivel chairs,fully adjustable with arms and five caster base.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
F. At each telephone location provide for access to emergency service,post a list of important
telephone numbers,including:
1. Local Police.
2. Fire Department.
3. Doctor.
4. Ambulance service.
5. Contractor s temporary office and home office.
3.8 SEWERS AND DRAINAGE:
A. Provide temporary connections to remove effluent that can be lawfully discharged into
available existing sewers.
B. If sewers and drainage facilities cannot be lawfully used for discharge of effluent,provide
containers to remove and dispose of effluent off the site in a lawful manner.
C. Connect temporary sewers as directed by governing authorities.
D. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition, ready for
maximum use. Following heavy usage,restore normal conditions promptly.
E. Filter out soil, debris, chemicals, oils and other contaminants that might clog sewers or
pollute waterways.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES:
A. Provide a reasonably neat and uniform appearance in temporary construction and support
facilities acceptable to the Architect and the Owner.
B. Locate field offices,storage and fabrication sheds and other support facilities for easy access.
Position offices so that windows allow the best possible view of construction activities.
C. Make the change-over to use of permanent services and facilities at the earliest feasible date
at each portion of the Work,in a manner to minimize interference with performance of the
Work.
D. Maintain temporary facilities as necessary until Substantial Completion. Immediately prior
to Substantial Completion remove these facilities.
E. Personnel remaining at the site beyond Substantial Completion will have use of certain
permanent facilities under restricted use conditions acceptable to the Owner.
3.10 TEMPORARY HEAT:
A. Provide temporary heat where indicated or as needed for performance of the Work,for curing
or drying and for protection of work from adverse effects of low temperatures or high
humidity.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
F. For power hand tools and task lighting, provide temporary 4-gang outlets spaced so that a
100 foot extension cord can reach each area of work.
3.6 TEMPORARY LIGHTING:
A. Provide local switching of temporary lighting, spaced to allow lighting to be turned off in
patterns to conserve energy and retain light suitable for work-in-progress, access traffic,
security check and project lock-up.
B. Provide not less than one 200-watt incandescent lamp per 1000 square feet of floor area,
uniformly distributed, for general construction lighting, or equivalent illumination of a
similar nature.
C. In corridors and similar traffic areas provide one 100-watt incandescent lamp every 50 feet.
In stairways and at ladder runs,provide one 100 watt incandescent lamp minimum,located
to illuminate each flight and landing.
D. Lighting levels in all areas shall meet or exceed standards required by O.S.H.A.
E. Install and operate temporary lighting that will adequately illuminate construction operations
and traffic areas and will meet security and protection requirements, without the necessity
of operating the entire system. lowk
3.7 TEMPORARY TELEPHONES:
A. Arrange for the local telephone company to install temporary service to the Project.
B. Service shall provide, as a minimum, emergency communications between all telephone
locations and an office manned during construction which has access to the emergency
services listed below.
C. Where an office has more than 2 occupants,install an additional telephone on a separate line
for each additional occupant or pair of occupants.
D. Install separate telephone and fax lines for Owner's field representative.
1. Provide a touch-tone phone dedicated for use by the Architect, Owner's
representative,the Architect's engineering consultants and other authorized agents of
the Owner.
a. Phones to be two lines each, with intercom,hands free speaker phone and 25
foot coiled cords connecting instrument's base and receiver. Instruments shall
be connected to wall mounted jacks with cords not less than 10 feet long.
b. Remaining phone line will be dedicated for fax and modem use.
E. Locate telephones so that the maximum distance to a telephone is 300 feet.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
ell
3.3 WATER SERVICE:
A. The Contractor shall provide all water necessary for the project and shall be responsible for
charges made for temporary facilities.
B. Contractor shall install distribution piping of sizes and pressures adequate for service during
the construction period and until permanent plumbing service is in use.
C. Exercise control over usage in the interest of conservation.
D. Sterilize temporary water piping prior to use.
3.4 TEMPORARY ELECTRIC POWER SERVICE:
A. Provide weatherproof, grounded temporary electric power service and distribution system
of sufficient size,capacity,and power characteristics to accommodate performance of work
during the construction period.
B. Include necessary meters, transformers, overload protected disconnects, automatic ground
fault interrupts,and main distribution switch gear.
C. Connect temporary service to the local electric power company main in the manner directed
by company officials. Contacting and coordinating the installation of the temporary service
shall be the responsibility of the contractor.
D. The Contractor shall pay charges for electricity used during the construction period.
E. Exercise control over power usage to conserve energy.
3.5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM:
A. Provide circuits of adequate size and proper characteristics for each use. In general run
wiring overhead, and rise vertically where wiring will be the least exposed to damage from
construction operations.
B. Provide rigid steel conduit or equivalent raceways for wiring which must be exposed on
grade,floors,decks or other areas of possible traffic damage.
C. Provide metal conduit, tubing or armored cable for protection of temporary power wiring
where exposed to possible damage during construction operations.
D. Where permitted by code,wiring of circuits not exceeding 110-120 Volt 20 Amp rating,and
wiring of lighting circuits may be non-metallic sheathed cable in areas where located
overhead and exposed for surveillance. Provide metal enclosures or boxes for wiring
devices.
E. Provide overload-protected disconnect switch for each temporary circuit and each temporary
lighting circuit,located at the power distribution center.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
4. Protective Coverings:
a. Provide waterproof, fire-resistant, UL labeled tarpaulin covers with flame-
spread rating of 15 or less.
b. For temporary enclosures provide translucent nylon reinforced laminated
polyethylene or polyvinyl chloride fire retardant tarpaulins to allow maximum
daylight.
5. Water: Provide drinkable water approved by local health authorities.
6. Open-Mesh Fencing: Provide 11 gage,galvanized 2 inch,chain link fabric fencing
6 feet high with galvanized barbed wire top strand and galvanized steel pipe posts, 1-
1/2 inch I.D. for line posts and 2-1/2 inch I.D.for comer posts.
E. Temporary Soil Erosion Control:
1. Mulches-hay,straw,fiber mats,netting,wood cellulose,corn or tobacco stalks,bark,
corn cobs, wood chips or other suitable material acceptable to the Architect and
reasonably clean and free of weeds and harmful materials.
2. Slope Drains - constructed of pipe, fiber mats, rubble, portland cement concrete,
bituminous concrete,plastic sheets or other material acceptable to the Architect and
adequate for erosion control.
3. Grass - Rye grass or other quick growing species suitable to the area and as a
temporary cover which will not compete with the grasses sown later for permanent
cover.
4. Fertilizer and soil conditioners - standard commercial grades acceptable to the
Architect.
5. Hay Bales-standard size bales of hay or straw,having no loose or decomposed baling
twine. Use 2 inch by 2 inch by 3 foot staking,pointed on one end to secure bales.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Locate temporary facilities to adequately serve the Project and to cause minimum interference
with performance of the Work.
B. Relocate,modify and extend temporary facilities to accommodate Work as it progresses.
3.2 UTILITY USE CHARGES:
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for charges made for temporary facilities.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
C. Equipment:
1. Water hoses: Provide 3/a inch heavy-duty abrasion-resistant hoses with a pressure
rating greater than the maximum pressure of the water distribution system. Provide
adjustable shut-off nozzles at hose discharge.
2. Electrical Service: Comply with applicable NEMA, NECA and UL standards and
governing regulations for materials and layout of temporary electric service including
requirements in Division 16 Sections.
3. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps, with guard
cages, of wattage indicated or required for adequate illumination. Provide exterior
fixtures where exposed to the weather or moisture.
4. Heating Units: Provide temporary heating units that have been tested and labeled by
UL,FM or other recognized trade association for the type of fuel being used.
5. First Aid Supplies: Comply with governing regulations.
6. Fire Extinguishers:
a. Provide hand-carried, portable UL-rated, class "ABC" dry chemical
extinguishers, or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA recommended
classes for the conditions of exposure.
b. Comply with NFPA 10 and 241 for classification,extinguishing agent and size
required by location and class of fire exposure.
D. Materials:
1. Lumber and Plywood:
a. Comply with requirements of Carpentry Section.
b. For job-built temporary offices,shops and sheds within the construction area,
provide UL labeled, fire treated lumber and plywood for framing, sheathing
and siding. Comply with NFPA 241.
C. For signs and directory boards,provide exterior type,Grade B-B High Density
Concrete Form Overlay Plywood conforming to PS-1, of sizes and thickness
indicated.
d. For vision barriers,provide exterior type,minimum 3/8 inch thick plywood.
e. For safety barriers and similar uses,provide minimum 5/8 inch thick exterior
plywood.
2. Roofing Materials: Provide UL Class"A" standard weight asphalt shingles complying
with ASTM D 3018, or UL Class "C"mineral surfaced roll roofing complying with
ASTM D 249 on roofs of job-built temporary offices, shops and sheds.
3. Paint: Comply with requirements of Section on Painting.
a. For job-built temporary offices,shops, sheds,barriers,fences and other exposed
lumber and plywood, provide exterior grade acrylic-latex emulsion over
exterior primer.
b. For sign panels and applying graphics, provide exterior grade alkyd gloss
enamel over exterior primer for painting panels and for lettering.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
2. Hold periodic meetings with representatives of various trades employed at the job site
to ensure that employees understand and comply with laws, regulations, and
standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Temporary Utilities: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings and similar
procedures performed on temporary utilities.
B. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Submit a schedule indicating implementation
and termination of each temporary utility within 15 days of the date established for
commencement of the Work.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Maintain, expand as required and modify temporary services and facilities as needed
throughout the progress of the work.
B. Operate temporary services and facilities in a safe and efficient manner. Do not overload
temporary services or facilities,and do not permit them to interfere with the progress of the
Work.
C. Keep temporary facilities clean and neat in appearance. Do not allow unsanitary conditions,
public nuisances or hazardous conditions to develop or persist on the site.
D. At the earliest feasible time,and when acceptable to the Owner and Architect,change over
from the use of temporary utility service to the use of the permanent service, to enable
removal of the temporary utility and to eliminate possible interference with completion of
the Work.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:
A. Provide materials and equipment that are recognized as being suitable for the intended use
by compliance with appropriate standards and applicable codes.
B. Where local utility company provides only a portion of the temporary utility, provide the
remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with the utility
company's recommendations.
AA%,,
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 -2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 01500-TEMPORARY FACILITIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. The Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes:
1. Utilities and facilities required during construction.
2. Provisions for safety and security during construction.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND SAFETY:
A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of
authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to:
1. Building Codes, including local requirements for permits,testing and inspection.
2. Health and safety regulations.
3. Utility company regulations.
4. Police and Fire Department rules and recommendations.
5. Rescue Squad recommendations.
6. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
B. Standards: Comply with:
1. NFPA Code 241,Building Construction and Demolition Operations.
2. ANSI-A10 Series standards for Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition.
3. NECA National Joint Guideline NJG-6 Temporary Job Utilities and Services.
4. Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act.
5. Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction of the Association of General
Contractors of America.
C. Inspections:
1. Inspect and test each service before placing temporary utilities in use.
2. Arrange for required inspections and tests by governing authorities. Obtain required
certifications and permits.
D. Promotion of Safety:
1. Designate a representative at the job site to be responsible for the promotion of safety
and prevention of accidents,and the enforcement of applicable laws,regulations and
standards pertaining to safety and accident prevention.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION:
A. Upon completion of inspection,testing,sample-taking and similar services,repair damaged
work and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate resulting imperfections, including
flaws in visual qualities of finishes.
B. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching.
C. Protect exposed work resulting from quality control activities,and protect repaired work.
END OF SECTION 01400
look
Atwk
QUALITY CONTROL 01400-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
construction to accommodate inspections and tests.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling inspections,tests,taking of samples and
similar activities.
D. The Contractor shall bear costs of removing and replacing work to accommodate scheduled
inspections and tests.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Engage inspection and test service agencies, including independent testing laboratories,
which are prequalified as complying with"Recommended Requirements for Independent
Laboratory Qualification"by the American Council of Independent Laboratories,and which
are recognized in the industry as specialists in the types of service required.
B. Each independent inspecting and testing agency shall have State authorization to operate in
State in which Project is located.
1.9 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit to Architect 3 copies of certified written report of each inspection,test or similar
service.
B. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority,when the
authority so directs.
C. Each report shall include the following data as appropriate with additional data furnished as
directed or as standard for services involved.
1. Name of testing agency or test laboratory.
2. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
3. Names of individuals making the inspection or test.
4. Designation of the work and test method.
5. Complete inspection or test data.
6. Test results.
7. Interpretations of test results.
8. Notation of significant ambient conditions at the time of sample-taking and testing.
9. Comments or professional opinion as to whether inspected or tested work complies
with requirements of the Contract Documents.
10. Recommendations on retesting, if applicable.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 -EXECUTION
QUALITY CONTROL 01400-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. These control services include those specified to be performed by an independent agency
and not by the Contractor. Costs for these services shall be included in the Contract Sum.
C. The Contractor shall employ and pay an independent agency to perform specified quality
control services.
D. The Owner will engage and pay for the services of an independent agency to perform
inspections and tests specified as the Owner's responsibility.
1.5 RETESTING:
A. The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of required inspections, tests or
similar services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance with Contract
Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was the Contractor's
responsibility.
B. Cost of retesting construction revised or replaced by the Contractor is the Contractor's
responsibility,where required tests were performed on original construction.
1.6 ASSOCIATED SERVICES:
A. The Contractor shall cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests and
similar services and shall provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested.
B. Notify the testing agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of
personnel.
C. Auxiliary services required include but are not limited to:
1. Providing access to the Work and furnishing the incidental labor and facilities
necessary to facilitate inspections and tests.
2. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing
or assisting the agency in taking samples.
3. Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples,and delivery of samples to
testing laboratories.
4. Providing the testing agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for
material mixes that require control by the testing agency.
5. Security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project site.
1.7 COORDINATION:
A. The Contractor shall coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required
inspection and test services with a minimum of delay.
B. The Contractor shall coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing
QUALITY CONTROL 01400-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
low
SECTION 01400-OUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Administrative and procedural requirements for quality control services.
B. The requirements of this Section apply to customized fabrication and installation
procedures,not to the production of standard products.
1.3 REQUIREMENTS:
A. Inspection and testing services are intended to verify compliance with the requirements of
the Contract Documents.
B. Quality control services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with
requirements of the Contract Documents. Requirements for the Contractor to provide
quality control services are not limited by the provisions of this Section.
C. Quality control services include inspections and tests and related actions including reports,
performed by independent agencies and governing authorities,as well as by the Contractor.
They do not include Contract interpretations and decisions rendered by the Architect.
D. Specific quality control requirements for an individual unit of work is specified in the
Section of the Specifications that includes that element of the Work. These requirements,
including inspections and tests,cover both production of standard products,and fabrication
of customized work. These requirements also cover quality control of the installation
procedures.
E. Inspections,tests and related actions specified are not intended to limit the Contractor's own
quality control procedures which facilitate overall compliance with requirements of the
Contract Documents.
1.4 RESPONSIBILITIES:
A. The Contractor shall provide inspections,tests and similar quality control services,specified
in individual Specification Sections and required by governing authorities, except where
they are specifically indicated to be the Owner's responsibility,or are provided by another
identified entity.
QUALITY CONTROL 01400- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
F. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take twelve (12)color photographs after date
of Substantial Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. Architect will di-
rect photographer for desired vantage points.
END OF SECTION 01320
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320- 11
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at
Project site,whether or not related directly to the Work,prepare and submit a special report.
List chain of events,persons participating,response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of
results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these
events are known or predictable.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to re-
flect actual construction progress and activities.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions
have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report
of each such meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including,but not
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity dura-
tions.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. 'mow,'
3.2 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
oPhotographer: Engage a qualified commercial photographer to take construction photographs. Pro-
vide 3 sets of prints: one each for Owner,Architect and Field Office.
B. Photographic Film: Medium-format,2-1/4 by 2-3/4 inches(60 by 70 mm).
C. Date Stamp: Unless otherwise indicated, date and time stamp each photograph as it is being
taken so stamp is integral to photograph.
D. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take six (6) color photographs
of Project site, as directed by Architect. Show existing conditions.
E. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take six (6) color photographs at approximately 3
month intervals on dates to be determined by the Architect. Photographer shall select van-
tage points to best show status of construction and progress since last photographs were
taken.
1. Field Office Prints: Retain one set of prints of periodic photographs in field office at
Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify photographs the same as for
those submitted to Architect.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320- 10
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1. List of subcontractors at Project site.
2. List of separate contractors at Project site.
3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
4. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions.
5. Accidents.
6. Meetings and significant decisions.
7. Unusual events (refer to special reports).
8. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
9. Meter readings and similar recordings.
10. Emergency procedures.
11. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
12. Change Orders received and implemented.
13. Construction Change Directives received.
14. Services connected and disconnected.
15. Equipment or system tests and startups.
16. Partial Completions and occupancies.
17. Substantial Completions authorized.
B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals,prepare a comprehensive list of materials
delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previ-
ously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on
and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Pro-
ject site.
C. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field condi-
tions and the Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Submit with a request for in-
formation. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recom-
mendations for changing the Contract Documents.
2.6 SPECIAL REPORTS
A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Dis-
tribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work.
Using the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable
critical paths.
1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relation-
ship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for
the following activities:
a. Preparation and processing of submittals.
b. Purchase of materials.
C. Delivery.
d. Fabrication.
e. Installation.
2. Processing: Process data to produce output data or a computer-drawn, time-scaled
network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as nec-
essary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.
3. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; lo-
cate paths with most float near the edges.
a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the
critical path.
E. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated re-
ports showing the following:
1. Identification of activities that have changed.
2. Changes in early and late start dates.
3. Changes in early and late finish dates.
4. Changes in activity durations in workdays.
5. Changes in the critical path.
6. Changes in total float or slack time.
7. Changes in the Contract Time.
2.5 REPORTS
A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following in- 101ft*,
formation concerning events at Project site:
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
d. Completion of electrical installation.
e. Substantial Completion.
E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its
submission,prepare a time-impact analysis to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change
on the overall project schedule.
F. Computer Software: Prepare schedules using a program that has been developed specifi-
cally to manage construction schedules.
2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule
within 14 days of date established for commencement of the Work.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first work-
day of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities
for first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work
and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.
2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE(CPM SCHEDULE)
A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON(activity-on-node)format.
B. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days .of date established for
commencement of the Work. Outline significant construction activities for the first 60 days
of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash re-
quirement prediction based on indicated activities.
C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a CPM network analysis
diagram.
I. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be ac-
cepted for use no later than 30 days after date established for commencement of the
Work.
2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including
subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM
schedule information.
3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting
progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.
4. Use"one workday" as the unit of time.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each prin-
cipal element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 30 days,unless spe-
cifically allowed by Architect.
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items
and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in
schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, ap-
provals,purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Divi-
sion 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review
times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.
4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 7 days for startup and testing.
5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Sub-
stantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures neces-
sary for certification of Substantial Completion.
D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents
and as follows in schedule,and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.
2. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a. Coordination with existing construction.
b. Limitations of continued occupancies.
C. Uninterruptible services.
d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
e. Use of premises restrictions.
f. Environmental control
3. Area Separations: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of
the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be se-
quenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:
a. Structural completion.
b. Permanent space enclosure.
C. Completion of mechanical installation.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcon-
tracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required sched-
ules and reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties
involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and sched-
ule them in proper sequence.
C. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer and provide auxiliary services requested,
including access to Project site and use of temporary facilities including temporary lighting.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates re-
quired by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering,
manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.
1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values,
and Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary bar-chart schedule. Include
submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to
maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead
time for manufacture or fabrication.
a. At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary Construction
Schedule,instead of tabulating them separately.
3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contrac-
tor's Construction Schedule.
2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning &
Scheduling."
B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to
date of Final Completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that
shows an early completion date,unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
Amok
I. Special Reports: Submit four copies at time of unusual event.
J. Request For Information (R.F.I.) and Change Order Proposal Logs: Update weekly for dis-
tribution at Job Meetings.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and
reporting.
B. Photographer Qualifications: An individual of established reputation who has been regu-
larly engaged as a professional photographer for not less than three years.
C. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements
in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and pro-
cedures related to the Preliminary Construction Schedule and Contractor's Construction
Schedule, including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports.
2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule.
3. Discuss constraints, including work stages,and interim milestones.
4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products.
5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts.
6. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.
7. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting
agencies.
8. Review time required for completion and startup procedures.
9. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule.
10. Review submittal requirements and procedures.
11. Review procedures for updating schedule.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of con-
struction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to dem-
onstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
B. Submittals Schedule: Submit 3 copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a
tabular format:
1. Scheduled date for first submittal.
2. Specification Section number and title.
3. Submittal category(action or informational).
4. Name of subcontractor.
5. Description of the Work covered.
6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
C. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit four printed copies; one a single sheet of re-
"° producible media, and one a print.
D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit four printed copies of initial schedule, one a
reproducible print and one a blue- or black-line print, large enough to show entire schedule
for entire construction period.
E. Construction Photographs: Submit two prints of each photographic view within seven days
of taking photographs. Provide four (4) sets of six (6) photos each at approximately 3
month intervals. Dates to be established by Architect.
1. Format: 8-by-10-inch (203-by-254-mm) smooth-surface matte prints on single-
weight commercial-grade stock, enclosed back to back in clear plastic sleeves that are
punched for standard 3-ring binder.
2. Identification: On back of each print, provide an applied label or rubber-stamped
impression with the following information:
a. Name of Project.
b. Date photograph was taken.
F. Daily Construction Reports: Submit four copies at weekly intervals.
G. Material Location Reports: Submit four copies at monthly intervals.
H. Field Condition Reports: Submit four copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
5. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and in-
spections.
6. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic negatives as
Project Record Documents at Project closeout.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, moni-
toring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction sched-
ule consume time and resources.
1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the
planned early start and finish times.
2. Predecessor activity is an activity that must be completed before a given activity can
be started.
B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction
project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations
determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
C. Critical Path: The longest continuous chain of activities through the network schedule that
establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
D. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
E. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is
a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet
schedule milestones and Contract completion date.
2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affect-
ing the early start of the following activity.
3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without ad-
versely affecting the planned Project completion date.
F. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities
for greater detail.
G. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construc-
tion element.
H. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.
I. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and
activity relationships.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 01320-CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the pro-
gress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Safety Plan.
2. Preliminary Construction Schedule.
3. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
4. Submittals Schedule and Log.
5. Daily construction reports.
6. Material location reports.,
7. Field condition reports.
8. Special reports.
9. Construction photographs.
10. R.F.I.Logs and Change Order Proposal Logs.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section"Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values.
2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and dis-
tributing meeting and conference minutes.
3. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.
4. Division I Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting construction pho-
tographs.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 SUBMITTAL ACTION:
A. Proceed with execution of the Work,documented by applicable submittals,using only shop
drawings,product data and samples indicating Architect's action.
END OF SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS 01300-9
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. Certifications: Where other Sections of the Specifications require certification that a product,
material,or installation complies with specified requirements,submit a notarized certification
from the manufacturer certifying compliance with specified requirements.
1. Signature: Certification shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer or other
individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of the company.
C. Inspection and Test Reports: Requiremerits for submittal of inspection and test reports from
independent testing agencies are specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Control."
1.11 ARCHITECT'S ACTION:
A. Except for submittals for the record or information,where action and return is required,the
Architect will review each submittal,mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly.
1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility.
B. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform,action stamp. The
Architect will mark the stamp appropriately to indicate the action taken, as follows:
1. No Exceptions: When the Architect marks a submittal "No Exceptions," the Work
covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the
Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance. -took,
2. Amend As Noted: When the Architect marks a submittal "Amend As Noted," the
Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations on the
submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that
compliance.
3. Resubmit: When the Architect marks a submittal"Resubmit,"the Work covered by the
submittal may proceed, except in those portions of the Work designated to be
resubmitted. Revise or prepare a new submittal,responding to the notations. Resubmit
without delay.
4. Rejected: When the Architect marks a submittal"Rejected,"do not proceed with Work
covered by the submittal,including purchasing,fabrication,delivery,or other activity.
Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the notations;resubmit without delay.
Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark.
a. Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "Rejected" at the Project
Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress.
C. Unsolicited Submittals: The Architect will not review, and will not return unsolicited
submittals to the General Contractor.
D. If resubmittal of Submittals is required due to substitution by the Contractor of materials or
equipment not equal to the specified product,or if multiple reviews of submittals are required
as a result of previous corrections or comments not being implemented in the resubmittal,the
Architect will directly bill the Contractor and receive payment for additional services of the
Architect for review of these materials prior to their release, in accordance with
Supplementary Conditions paragraph 4.2.2.1. Billing for the third and any additional ,
reviews of the same submittal shall be at a cost of$75.00 per hour.
SUBMITTALS 01300-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2. Submit Samples for review of size,kind,color,pattern,and texture. Submit Samples
for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and a comparison of these
characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and
installed.
a. Where variation in color,pattern,texture,or other characteristic is inherent in the
material or product represented, submit at least 3 multiple units that show
approximate limits of the variations.
b. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate
workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections,
operation, and similar construction characteristics.
C. Refer to other Sections for Samples to be returned to the Contractor for
incorporation in the Work. Such Samples must be undamaged at time of use.
On the transmittal, indicate special requests regarding disposition of Sample
submittals.
d. Samples not incorporated into the Work,or otherwise designated as the Owner's
property,are the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site
prior to Substantial Completion.
3. Preliminary Submittals(for initial selection of finishes): Submit a full set of choices
where. Samples are submitted for selection of color, pattern, texture, or similar
characteristics from a range of standard choices.
a. The Architect will review and return preliminary submittals with the Architect's
notation,indicating selection and other action.
4. Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details,workmanship,fabrication
techniques, connections, operation, and similar characteristics, submit 1 set. The
Architect will return that set marked with the action taken.
5. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project Site, for quality comparisons
throughout the course of construction.
a. Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction associated
with each set.
B. Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to others as required for
performance of the Work.
C. Field Samples(Mockups): Field samples are full-size examples erected on-site to illustrate
finishes, coatings,or finish materials and to establish the Project standard.
1. Comply with submittal requirements. Process transmittal/submittal coversheet forms
to provide a record of activity.
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit quality-control submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturer's
instructions, manufacturer's field reports, and other quality-control submittals as required
under other Sections of the Specifications.
SUBMITTALS 01300-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
7. Submittal: Submit one correctable,translucent, reproducible print and five blue- or
black-line prints for the Architect's review. The Architect will return the reproducible
print marked with action taken.
a. Changes to quantities of required submittals will be determined by the Architect
at the Pre-Construction meeting.
1.8 PRODUCT DATA:
A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system.
Product Data includes printed information,such as manufacturer's installation instructions,
catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring
diagrams, and performance curves.
1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data
includes information on several products that are not required,mark copies to indicate
the applicable information. Include the following information:
a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations.
b. Compliance with trade association standards.
C. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
d. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement.
f. Notation of coordination requirements.
2. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract
Documents has been confirmed.
3. Submittals: Submit 6 originals of each required submittal. The Architect will return
one original marked with action taken.
a. Changes to quantities of required submittals will be determined by the Architect
at the Pre-Construction meeting.
4. Distribution: Furnish copies of the Architect's reviewed final submittal to others
required for performance of construction activities.
1.9 SAMPLES:
A. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically
identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of
manufactured or fabricated components,cuts or containers of materials,color range sets,and
swatches showing color,texture, and pattern.
1. Mount or display Samples in a manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated.
Prepare Samples to match the Architect's sample. Include the following:
a. Specification Section number and reference.
b. Generic description of the Sample.
C. Sample source.
d. Product name or name of the manufacturer.
e. Compliance with recognized standards.
f. Availability and delivery time.
SUBMITTALS 01300-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1.6 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE:
A. Within two weeks of a notice to proceed,or award of the Contract for General Construction,
prepare and submit a complete schedule of submittals.
1. Coordinate Submittal Schedule with the list of subcontracts, Schedule of Values,and
the list of products as well as the General Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Arrange the schedule in the same sequence as the technical specification section.
Provide the following information:
a. Related Section number.
b. Scheduled date for the first submittal.
C. Submittal category(Shop Drawings,Product Data,or Samples).
d. Name of the contractor.
e. Description of the part of the Work covered.
f. Scheduled date for resubmittal.
g. Scheduled date for the Architect's final release or approval.
B. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal,print and distribute copies to the
Architect. Maintain copies in the Project meeting room and field office.
1. When revisions are made,resubmit to the Architect.
C. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
meeting.
1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS:
A. Submit newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale. Do not reproduce Contract
Documents as the basis of Shop Drawings.
1. Prepare standard information with specific reference to the Project. Submit only pages
or sheets pertinent to the Project. Mark each copy with applicable choices if options
are available.
B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams,schedules,
patterns,templates and similar Drawings. Include the following Project specific information:
1. Dimensions.
2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number.
3. Compliance with specified standards.
4. Notation of coordination requirements.
5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
6. Sheet Size: Except for templates,patterns and similar full-size Drawings,submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.
SUBMITTALS 01300-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
copy of the transmittal/submittal coversheet to the Architect for tracking purposes.
4. Transmittal/Submittal Coversheet: Use the sample coversheet at the end of this Section
for transmittal of submittals.
a. On each coversheet,each reviewer shall stamp"Received"and indicate the date
received, in the box provided.
5. The Architect will not accept submittals received from sources other than the General
Contractor.
1.5 GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE:
A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar-chart-type, General
Contractor's construction schedule. Bar-chart construction schedule shall be in addition to
other scheduling means that may be selected by the General Contractor for his own purposes.
Submit within 30 days after the date established for"Commencement of the Work."
1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a
continuous vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same
breakdown of units of the Work as indicated in the "Schedule of Values."
2. Prepare the schedule on a sheet,or series of sheets,of sufficient width to show data for
the entire construction period.
3. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties ,..
involved. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities;
include minor elements involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in
proper sequence.
4. Coordinate the General Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of
Values, list of subcontracts, Submittal Schedule,progress reports,payment requests,
and other schedules.
5. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion.
Indicate Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Architect's
procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
B. Phasing: On the schedule,show how requirements for phased completion to permit Work by
separate Contractors and partial occupancy by the Owner affect the sequence of Work.
C. Area Separations: Provide a separate time bar to identify each major construction area for
each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each element in an area must be sequenced
or integrated with other activities.
D. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal,print and distribute copies to the
Architect and Owner. Maintain copies in the Project meeting room and temporary field
office.
1. When revisions are made,redistribute to the same parties,and maintain copies in the
Project meeting room and temporary field office.
E. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule to coincide with the time period included with each
Application for Payment. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment.
SUBMITTALS 01300-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for
identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or
title block.
1. Provide space on the label or beside the title block on Shop Drawings to record the
following:
a. General Contractor's review and approval markings, and the action taken.
b. Engineer's review and approval markings,and the action taken.
C. Architect's review and approval markings,and the action taken.
2. Reviewers shall stamp submittals with a"Received"stamp,indicating the date received
by each respective reviewer,and as follows:
a. Shop Drawings: Stamp each individual drawing or sheet.
b. Product Data: Stamp front cover of bound literature.
3. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action
taken.
a. Project name.
b. Date.
"*
C. Name and address of the Architect.
d. Name and address of the General Contractor.
e. Name and address of the contractor.
f. Name and address of the supplier.
g. Name of the manufacturer.
h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
i. Drawing number and detail references,as appropriate.
4. Highlight,encircle,or"cloud" deviations,comments and/or questions which conflict
with the Contract Documents. Annotate with reviewer's initials.
5. Collate multiple sheets or copies into sets.
C. Submittal Transmittal: Transmit each submittal attached to a completed transmittal/submittal
coversheet. The Architect will review submittals only if accompanied by a
transmittal/submittal coversheet.
1. Number each submittal consecutively. Resubmittals shall retain the original submittal
number followed by a letter.
a. Example: #06A is a resubmittal of#06.
2. On the transmittal/submittal coversheet,record relevant information and requests for
data. On the form, or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document
requirements, including variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification
that information complies with Contract Document requirements.
3. For submittals requiring review by the Architect's consultants or engineers, forward
submittals directly to the respective consultants or engineers. Send a corresponding
SUBMITTALS 01300-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
look
1.3 DEFINITIONS:
A. Coordination Drawings show the relationship and integration of different construction
elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in the space
provided or to function as intended.
1. Preparation of Coordination Drawings is specified in Division 1 Section
"Coordination" and may include components previously shown in detail on Shop
Drawings or Product Data.
B. Field samples are full-size physical examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes,coatings,or
finish materials. Field samples are used to establish the standard by which the Work will be
judged.
C. Mockups are full-size assemblies for review of construction, coordination, testing, or
operation;they are not Samples.
1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of IOWA
construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of
related construction activities to avoid delay. Transmit submittals independently from other
Project correspondence.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work
so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until all related submittals are received. The
General Contractor will be notified if the Architect has determined to withhold
action.
3. Processing: To avoid the need to delay installation as a result of the time required to
process submittals, allow sufficient time for submittal review, including time for
resubmittals.
a. Allow an average of 2 weeks for initial review. Allow additional time if the
Architect must delay processing to permit coordination with subsequent
submittals.
b. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial
submittal.
C. Allow an average of 2 weeks for reprocessing each submittal.
d. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit
submittals to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit ,awk
processing.
SUBMITTALS 01300-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 01300-SUBMITTALS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions aid other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for
performance of the Work, including the following:
1. General Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Submittal schedule.
3. Shop Drawings.
4. Product Data.
5. Samples.
6. Quality assurance submittals.
B. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division 1 Sections and other Contract Documents
for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include,but are not limited
to,the following:
1. Permits.
2. Applications for Payment.
3. Cost Correlation Schedule. Refer to Division 1 Section"Applications for Payment"for
cost reporting and payment procedures.
4. Performance and payment bonds.
5. Insurance certificates.
6. List of contractors.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section"Applications for Payment"specifies requirements for submittal of
the Schedule of Values.
2. Division 1 Section "Project Coordination" specifies requirements governing
preparation and submittal of required Coordination Drawings.
3. Division 1 Section "Project Meetings" specifies requirements for submittal and
distribution of meeting and conference minutes.
4. Division 1 Section "Project Documentation" specifies requirements for submittal of
periodic construction photographs.
5. Division 1 Section"Quality Control"specifies requirements for submittal of inspection
and test reports.
6. Division 1 Section"Contract Closeout"specifies requirements for submittal of Project
Record Documents and warranties at project closeout.
SUBMITTALS 01300- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1.5 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES:
A. If specified or if required for proper execution of the Work,the General Contractor shall
arrange a conference before starting the work of an individual Section.
B. The General Contractor shall require attendance of those directly affecting,or affected by,
work of the Section.
C. Such conference shall include review of the conditions affecting the work to be performed,
the preparation and installation procedures, and the coordination with related work.
PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01200
PROJECT MEETINGS 01200-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 01200-PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes:
1. General administrative and procedural requirements for Project meetings and
conferences.
1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCES:
A. Architect will administer preconstruction conference for execution of Owner-Contractor
"* Agreement and exchange of preliminary submittals.
B. Architect will administer site mobilization conferences at Project site for clarification of
Owner and Contractor responsibilities in use of site and buildings, and for review of
administrative procedures.
1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS:
A. The Architect shall schedule and administer regular prof ect meetings,called meetings. The
Contractor shall schedule and administer preinstallation conferences.
B. Project meetings shall be held at least once every two weeks for the project.
C. The General Contractor shall make physical arrangements for conferences and meetings.
The Architect shall prepare agenda with copies for participants,preside at meetings,record
minutes,and distribute copies within three days to participants,the Architect and Owner,
and to others affected by decisions made.
D. Attendance: The Architect's representative,the General Contractor,major contractors and
suppliers. The Owner and Architect will attend as appropriate to agenda,as they elect,or as
requested in advance by General Contractor.
E. Suggested Agenda: Review ofprogress of the Work,the status of the progress schedule and
required adjustments, delivery schedules, submittals, maintenance of quality standards,
*. pending changes and substitutions, and other items affecting progress of the Work.
PROJECT MEETINGS 01200- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01090
Amok
REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090-8
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
TCA Tile Council of America
P.O. Box 326
Princeton,NJ 08542 (609)921-7050
UL Underwriters Laboratories
333 Pfingsten Road
Northbrook,IL 60062 (312)272-8800
1.6 FEDERAL GOVERNMENT AGENCIES:
A. The following acronyms or abbreviations indicate names of standard or specification
producing agencies of the federal government.
B. Names and addresses are subject to change and are believed to be,but are not assured to be,
accurate and up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CS Commercial Standard
(U.S.Department of Commerce)
Government Printing Office
Washington,DC 20402 (202)783-3238
4
DOC Department of Commerce
14th Street and Constitution Avenue,NW
Washington,DC 20230 (202)482-2000
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
401 M Street, SW
Washington,DC 20460 (202)382-2090
FS Federal Specification(from GSA)
Specifications Unit(WFSIS)
7th and D Streets, SW
Washington,DC 20407 (202)708-9205
GSA General Services Administration
F Street and 18th Street,NW
Washington,DC 20405 (202)708-5082
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(U.S.Department of Labor)
200 Constitution Avenue,NW
Washington,DC 20210 (202)219-6091
PS Product Standard ofNBS
** (U.S.Department of Commerce)
Government Printing Office
Washington,DC 20402 (202)783-3238
REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090-7
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
N.F.P.A. National Forest Products Association
(See AFPA. Now known as the
American Wood Council of the
American Forest and Paper Association)
NPCA National Paint and Coatings Association
1500 Rhode Island Avenue,NW
Washington,DC 20005 (202)462-6272
NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association
10255 West Higgins Road, Suite 600
Rosemont, IL 60018-5607 (708)299-9070
NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association
3166 Des Plaines Avenue, Suite 132
Des Plaines,IL 60018 (708)635-7744
NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association
(Formerly NWMA)
1400 E. Touhy Avenue,#G54(708)299-5200
Des Plaines, IL 60018 (800)223-2301
RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute
966 Hungerford Drive, Suite 12-B
Rockville,MD 20805 (301)340-8580
SDI Steel Deck Institute
P.O.Box 9506
Canton, OH 44711 (216)493-7886
S.D.I. Steel Door Institute
30200 Detroit Road
Cleveland, OH 44145 (216)899-0010
SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association
401 North Michigan Avenue
Chicago, IL 60611 (312)644-6610
SJI Steel Joist Institute
1205 48th Street North, Suite A
Myrtle Beach, SC 29577 (803)449-0487
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors National Association
4201 Lafayette Center Drive
Chantilly,VA 22021 (703)803-2980
REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090-6
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association
White Lakes Professional Building
3310 SW Harrison Street
Topeka,KS 66611-2279 (913)266-7013
FM Factory Mutual Research Organization
1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike
P.O.Box 9102
Norwood,MA 02062 (617)762-4300
GA Gypsum Association
810 First Street,NE, Suite 510
Washington,DC 20002(202)289-5440
IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council
c/o ETL Testing Laboratories,Inc.
P.O. Box 2040
Route 11,Industrial Park
Cortland,NY 13045 (607)753-6711
NAAMM National Association of Architectural
Metal Manufacturers
600 S.Federal Street, Suite 400
Chicago, IL 60605 (312)922-6222
NBHA National Builders Hardware Association
(Now DHI)
NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association
2302 Horse Pen Road
Herndon,VA 22071-3406 (703)713-1900
NEC National Electric Code(from NFPA)
NECA National Electrical Contractors Association
3 Bethesda Metro Center, Suite 1100
Bethesda,MD 20814 (301)657-3110
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
2101 L Street,NW, Suite 300
Washington,DC 20037 (202)457-8400
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
One Batterymarch Park
P.O. Box 9101
OOW Quincy,MA 02269-9101 (617)770-3000
REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,NM
ANSI American National Standards Institute
11 West 42nd Street, 13th Floor
New York,NY 10036 (212)642-4900
APA American Plywood Association
P.O.Box 11700
Tacoma,WA 98411 (206)565-6600
ASHRAE American Society of Heating,Refrigerating
and Air Conditioning Engineers
1791 Tullie Circle,NE
Atlanta, GA 30329 (404)636-8400
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
1916 Race Street
Philadelphia,PA 19103-1187 (215)299-5400
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
P.O. Box 1550
13924 Braddock Road, Suite 100
Centerville,VA 22020 (703)222-1100
AWPA American Wood Preservers'Association
P.O.Box 286
Woodstock,MD 21163-0286 (410)465-3169
AWS American Welding Society
550 Le Jeune Road,NW
P.O. Box 351040
Miami,FL 33135 (305)443-9353
BIA Brick Institute of America
11490 Commerce Park Drive
Reston,VA 22091 (703)620-0010
CRI Carpet and Rug Institute
P.O. Box 2048
Dalton, GA 30722 (706)278-3176
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
933 Plum Grove Road
Schaumburg, IL 60173 (708)517-1200
DHI Door and Hardware Institute
14170 Newbrook Drive
Chantilly, VA 22102-2223 (703)222-2010
REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
to"' Florence,MA
1. In every instance the quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the
minimum to be provided or performed.
2. The actual installation may comply exactly, within specified tolerances, with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed that minimum within
reasonable limits.
E. Copies of Standards:
1. Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be familiar with
industry standards applicable to that entity's construction activity.
2. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.
3. Where copies of standards are needed for performance of a required construction
activity,the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source.
1.5 ABBREVIATIONS AND NAMES:
A. The following acronyms or abbreviations where referenced in Contract Documents are
defined to mean the associated names.
B. Names and addresses are subject to change and are believed to be,but are not assured to be,
accurate and up to date as of date of Contract Documents.
AAMA American Architectural Manufacturer's Association
1540 East Dundee Road, Suite 310
Palatine,IL 60067 (708)202-1350
AASHTO American Association of State Highway
and Transportation Officials
444 North Capitol Street, Suite 249
Washington,D.C. 20001 (202) 624-5800
ACI American Concrete Institute
P.O. Box 19150
Detroit, MI 48219 (313) 532-2600
ACIL American Council of Independent Laboratories
1629 K Street,NW
Washington,D.C. 20006 (202) 887-5872
AIA American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue,NW
Washington,DC 20006 (202)626-7300
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
One East Wacker Drive, Suite 3100
Chicago,IL 60601-2001 (312)670-2400
REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
H. Installer:
1. An "Installer" is the Contractor or an entity engaged by the Contractor,either as an
employee, subcontractor, or sub-subcontractor, for performance of a particular
construction activity, including installation, erection, application, and similar
operations.
2. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to
perform.
3. The term "experienced", when used with the term "Installer" means having a
minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project, being
familiar with the precautions required,and having complied with requirements of the
authority having jurisdiction.
I. Project Site:
1. Is the space available to the Contractor for performance of construction activities,
either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other construction
activities as part of the Project.
2. The extent of the Project Site is shown on the Drawings.
J. Testing Laboratories: A "testing laboratory" is an independent entity engaged to perform
specific inspections or tests,either at the Project Site or elsewhere,and to report on and, if
required,to interpret results of those inspections or tests.
1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS:
A. Applicability of Standards:
1. Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements,
applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound
or copied directly into the Contract Documents.
2. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Where the date of issue of a referenced standard is not specified,comply
with the standard in effect as of date of the Contract Documents.
C. Conflicting Requirements:
1. Where compliance with two or more standards is specified, and they establish
different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels,
comply with the most stringent requirement unless the Contract Documents indicate
otherwise.
2. Before proceeding with work, confer with the Architect for a decision on
requirements that are different but apparently equal, and those requirements that
leave it unclear as to which is more stringent. ,,,k
D. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels:
REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
SECTION 01090-REFERENCE STANDARDS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. The Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes:
1. Certain definitions and explanations of.general application in the Contract
Documents.
2. Applicability of Standards.
3. Listing of Standards and Testing Organizations and governing agencies.
1.3 DEFINITIONS:
A. Basic Contract definitions are included in the General Conditions of the Contract.
B. Terms such as"directed","requested","authorized","selected","approved","required",and
"permitted" mean "directed by the Architect", and similar phrases. However,no implied
meaning shall be interpreted to extend the Architect's responsibility into the Contractor's
area of construction supervision.
C. The term "approved", where used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the
Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the duties and
responsibilities of the Architect as stated in General and Supplementary Conditions. Such
approval shall not release the Contractor from responsibility to fulfill Contract requirements
unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
D. The term "Regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by
authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the
construction industry that control performance of the Work,whether lawfully imposed by
authorities having jurisdiction or not.
E. The term "furnish" is used to mean "supply and deliver to the Project Site, ready for
unloading,unpacking, assembly, installation,and similar operations."
F. The term "install" is used to describe operations at project site including the actual
"unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to
dimension,finishing, curing,protecting, cleaning, and similar operations."
G. The term"provide"means"to furnish and install,complete and ready for the intended use."
REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. Completely remove paint,mortar, oils,putty and items of similar nature.
C. Thoroughly clean piping,conduit and similar features before painting or other finishing is
applied.
D. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
END OF SECTION 01045
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
B. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of
other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore
surfaces to their original condition.
C. Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements to be retained or
adjoining construction. Where possible review proposed procedures with the original
installer; comply with the original installer's recommendations.
1. In general, where cutting is required, use hand or small power tools designed for
sawing or grinding,not hammering and chopping.
2. Cut holes and slots neatly to size required with minimum disturbance of adjacent
surfaces.
3. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
4. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces,cut or drill from the exposed or finished
side into concealed surfaces.
5. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine such as a carborundum
saw or diamond core drill.
6. Comply with requirements of applicable Sections of Division 2 where cutting and
patching requires excavating and backfilling.
7. Bypass utility services such as pipe or conduit, before cutting, where services are
shown or required to be removed,relocated or abandoned.
8. Cut-off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap,valve or plug and
seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other
foreign matter after bypassing and cutting.
D. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified
tolerances.
1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the
installation.
2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained
adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and
refinishing.
3. Where removal of walls or partitions extends one finished area into another,patch
and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space to provide an even surface of
uniform color and appearance.
4. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if
necessary to achieve uniform color and appearance.
5. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over
entire unbroken surface containing the patch, after the patched area has received
primer and second coat.
6. Patch,repair or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even plane surface
of uniform appearance.
3.4 CLEANING:
A. Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed or used as ,,v%k
access.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1. Remove and replace Work cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Use materials that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available
or cannot be used where exposed surfaces are involved,use materials that match existing
adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect.
B. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Before cutting existing surfaces, examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions
under which cutting and patching is to be performed.
B. Take corrective action before proceeding, if unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are
encountered.
3.2 PREPARATION:
A. Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B. Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
C. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
D. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining
areas.
E. Take all precautions necessary to avoid cutting existing pipe,conduit or ductwork serving
the building,but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to
bypass them.
3.3 PERFORMANCE:
; * A. Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
C. Approval by the Architect to proceed with cutting and patching does not waive the
Architect's right to later require complete removal and replacement of a part of the Work
found to be unsatisfactory.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would reduce their load-carrying
capacity or load-deflection ratio.
1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the
following structural elements:
a. Foundation construction
b. Bearing and retaining walls
C. Structural concrete
d. Structural steel
e. Lintels
f. Structural decking
g. Miscellaneous structural metals
h. Exterior curtain wall construction
i. Equipment supports
j. Piping, ductwork,vessels and equipment
k. Structural systems of special construction
B. Do not cut and patch operating elements or safety related components in a manner that
would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or result in increased
maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety.
1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the
following operating elements or safety related systems:
a. Shoring,bracing and sheeting
b. Primary operational systems and equipment
C. Air or smoke barriers
d. Water,moisture,or vapor barriers
e. Membranes and flashings
f. Fire protection systems
g. Noise and vibration control elements and systems
h. Control systems
i. Communication systems
j. Conveying systems
k. Electrical wiring systems
1. Special construction specified by Division 13 Sections
C. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces, in a
manner that would, in the Architect's opinion,reduce the building's aesthetic qualities, or
result in visual evidence of cutting and patching.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 01045- CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes:
1. Administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching. All cutting and
patching shall be performed by the General Contractor unless specified elsewhere.
1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS:
A. Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and
patching of individual parts of the Work.
B. Mechanical and electrical installations are included in the requirements of this Section.
Refer to Division 15 and Division 16 Sections for other requirements and limitations
applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Where approval of procedures for cutting and patching is required before proceeding,
submit a proposal describing procedures well in advance of the time cutting and patching
will be performed and request approval to proceed.
1. Describe the extent of cutting and patching required and how it is to be performed;
indicate why it cannot be avoided.
2. Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to existing construction; include
changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in the
building's appearance and other significant visual elements.
3. List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform Work.
4. Indicate dates when cutting and patching is to be performed.
5. List utilities that will be disturbed or affected,including those that will be relocated
and those that will be temporarily out-of-service. Indicate how long service will be
disrupted.
B. Where cutting and patching involves addition of reinforcement to structural elements,
submit details and engineering calculations to show how reinforcement is integrated with
the original structure.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
prevent interruption of Owner's equipment and furniture delivery: to allow Owner complete
and easy access to building for delivery, installation and storage of Owner's property.
C. No building,utility,or protection service shall be disrupted without the prior knowledge and
consent of the Owner.
D. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with the work to be performed by others for the
effective, satisfactory and timely completion of the Work.
E. Work is to be done between 7 a.m.and 6 p.m.,Monday through Friday. Work required at
any other time is to be arranged in advance and approved by the Owner.
1.5 FIELD RECORD DOCUMENTS:
A. Maintain a set of Construction Documents separate from those used for construction.
Clearly identify it as the Record Set and keep it current.
B. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been accurately noted
in the Record Set.
C. Field Record Drawings:
1. Maintain a complete set of prints of Contract Drawings in the Record Set.
2. Record on the Drawings information on construction-in-place which varies from
Contract Document data. Include work covered by supplemental contracts,change
orders,addenda, supplemental drawings and other bona fide sources.
3. Carefully locate hidden and underground utilities,as they are uncovered or installed,
record location dimensions from permanent structures.
4. For project closeout,provide an electronic file in CD format of the approved Record
Drawings.
D. Field Record Specifications:
1. Mark the Record Set of Specifications and Addenda with data which varies from that
specified.
2. Record the manufacturer,trade name,catalog number,and supplier of each product
and item of equipment actually installed.
3. Record changes made by Change Order or Field Order.
4. Record other data not originally specified.
E. Field Record Shop Drawings: Maintain as part of record documents for the Work. Legibly
annotate to record changes made after review.
1.6 OWNER'S RECORD DOCUMENTS:
A. Owner's Drawings:
PROJECT COORDINATION 01040-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
SECTION 01040-PROJECT COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes:
1. General administrative and supervisory requirements for Project coordination.
2. Maintenance of field records.
3. General installation provisions.
4. Cleaning and protection.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES:
A. Administrative activities include, but are not limited to: preparation of schedules,
installation and removal of temporary facilities, delivery and processing of submittals,
progress meetings,Project close-out activities.
B. Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other
construction activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of the Work.
C. Coordinate work of the various Sections of Specifications to assure efficient and orderly
sequence of installation of construction elements with provisions for accommodating items
to be installed later.
D. Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy,water, and materials.
E. Upon notice to proceed with the Work, submit to Architect a list of principal staff
assignments, including the superintendent and other personnel in attendance at the site.
Identify individuals, their duties and responsibilities; list their addresses and telephone
numbers.
1.4 COORDINATION WITH OWNER:
A. Before starting the Work, schedule a meeting with Owner, General Contractor,Architect
and others as necessary to review phasing of the Work.
B. Plan and coordinate construction activity with Owner to minimize inconvenience and to
PROJECT COORDINATION 01040- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
2. Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the change
on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the
effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and Contract Time.
3. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs along with the
total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
4. Indicate applicable taxes,delivery charges, equipment rental,and amounts of trade
discounts.
5. Comply with requirements of Section on Product Substitutions if the proposed
change requires the substitution of a product or system for the one specified.
C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G-709 for Change Order Proposal Requests.
1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE:
A. When the Owner and General Contractor are not in total agreement on the terms of a
Change Order Proposal Request,the Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive
on AIA Form G-714, instructing the General Contractor to proceed with the change for
subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1. The Construction Change Directive will contain a complete description of the change
in the Work and designate the method to be followed to determine change in the
Contract Sum or Contract Time.
B. The General Contractor shall maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work
required by the Construction Change Directive.
1. After completion of the change, submit an itemized account and supporting data
necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES:
A. Upon the Owner's approval of a Change Order Proposal Request,the Architect will issue a
Change Order for signatures of the Owner and General Contractor on AIA Form G 701,as
provided in the Conditions of the Contract.
PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01035
AWk
MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01035-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 01035-MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary .
Conditions and other Division 1 Sections,apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes:
1. Administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing changes and
adjustments in the Work.
1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK:
A. Supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work,not involving adjustment
in Contract Sum or Contract Time, will be issued by the Architect on AIA Form G-710,
Architect's Supplemental Instructions.
1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL REQUESTS:
A. Owner-Initiated:
1. A request for a proposed change in the Work,requiring adjustment in Contract Sum
or Contract Time,will be issued by the Architect with a detailed description of the
proposed change and supplemental drawings and specifications if necessary.
2. Proposal requests issued by the Architect are for information only. Do not consider
them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
3. Unless otherwise indicated in the request,within 10 days of receipt of the proposal
request the General Contractor shall submit an estimate of costs necessary to execute
the proposed change for the Architect's review.
a. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs, along
with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish
survey data to substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes,delivery charges,equipment rental,and amounts of
trade discounts.
C. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work will
have on the Contract Time.
d. No costs shall be assessed by the contractor for preparation of the proposal.
B. General Contractor-Initiated:
1. The General Contractor may propose a change when latent or other unforeseen
conditions require modifications to the Contract by submitting a proposal request to
the Architect.
MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01035- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL:
A. Include as part of each alternate,miscellaneous devices,accessory objects and similar items
incidental to or required for a complete installation of the alternate.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ADD ALTERNATES:
Alternate No. 1: Masonry restoration to include cleaning and
repointing of existing brick and granite as
indicated in Section 04500, Masonry
Restoration.
Base Bid: Not to include the work of
Section 04500, Masonry Restoration.
Add
Alternate No. 2: New aluminum replacement windows in the
existing library building.
Base Bid: Windows in the existing library
to remain.
Add
END OF SECTION 01030
ALTERNATES 01030-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 01030 -ALTERNATES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes:
1. Schedule of alternates.
2. Procedure for administering alternates.
1.3 USE OF ALTERNATES:
A. Proposed dollar amounts for each alternate shall be as included in the Contractor's proposal
for the Work.
B. Alternates will be used at the option of the Owner.
C. The cost of each alternate the Owner elects to include in the Work shall be added to or, as
the case may be,deducted from the Base Bid Sum.
D. In accepting an alternate, the Owner will accept corresponding changes in the amount of
construction to be completed and in the materials and methods used as included in these
Documents.
1.4 STATUS OF ALTERNATES:
A. Immediately following award of Contract, prepare and distribute to each party involved,
notification of the status of each alternate.
B. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted,rejected or deferred for consideration at a
later date.
C. Include as applicable a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates.
1.5 COORDINATION:
A. Coordinate related work and modify or adjust adjacent work as required to ensure that work
affected by each accepted alternate is complete and fully integrated into the Project.
e
ALTERNATES 01030-1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01027
low
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027-5
MEN
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
7. Submittal schedule(preliminary if not final)
8. List of Contractor's staff assignments
9. List of Contractor's principal consultants
10. Copies of building permits
11. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of
the Work
12. Initial progress report
13. Report of pre-construction meeting
14. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies
15. Performance and payment bonds, if required
16. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance,if required
17. Initial settlement survey and damage report,if required
J. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate
of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment. This application shall
reflect any Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner
occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
1. Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with submittal of
this application include:
a. Occupancy permits and similar approvals
b. Warranties(guaranties)and maintenance agreements
C. Test/adjust/balance records
d. Maintenance instructions
e. Meter readings
f. Start-up performance reports
g. Change-over information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation and
maintenance
h. Final cleaning
i. Application for reduction of retainage, and consent of surety
j. Advice on shifting insurance coverages
k. Final progress photographs
1. List of incomplete Work,recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of
Substantial Completion
m. Release of Liens documentation
K. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals which shall precede or
coincide with submittal of the final payment Application for Payment include the following:
1. Completion of contract closeout requirements
2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion
3. Assurance that unsettled claims will be settled
4. Assurance that Work not complete and accepted will be completed without undue
delay
5. Transmittal of required project construction records to Owner
6. Certified property survey
7. Proof that taxes, fees and similar obligations have been paid
8. Removal of temporary facilities and services
9. Removal of surplus materials,rubbish and similar elements 1411,
10. Change door locks to Owner's access
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence, MA
the period indicated in the Agreement.
D. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G-702 and Continuation Sheets G-703 as
the form for Application for Payment.
E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form, including notarization and
execution by person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Owner. Incomplete
applications will be returned without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and General Contractor's
Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions have been made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior
to the last day of the construction period covered by the application.
F. Transmittal: Submit 3 executed copies of each Application to the Architect by means
ensuring receipt within 24 hours.
1. One copy shall be complete,including waivers of lien and similar attachments,when
required.
2. Transmit with a transmittal form listing attachments, and recording appropriate
information related to the application in a manner acceptable to the Architect.
G. Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of
mechanics lien from every entity who may lawfully be entitled to file a mechanics lien
arising out of the Contract,and related to the Work covered by the payment.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested,prior to deduction for
retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
3. The Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must
submit waivers.
4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms and executed in a manner acceptable
to Owner.
H. Letter of Certification: With each Application for Payment, submit a letter stating:
1. That the Work and material applied for payment is in full compliance with the
Contract Documents and approved Shop Drawings.
2. The Work applied for is complete and correct.
I. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or
coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of contractors and installers.
2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators
3. Schedule of values
4. General Contractor's construction schedule(preliminary if not final)
5. Schedule of principal products
6. Schedule of unit prices
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA look
d. Contractor's name and address
e. Date of submittal
2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in a tabular form with separate columns to indicate
the following for each item listed:
a. Generic name
b. Related specification section
C. Name of contractor or installer
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator
e. Name of supplier
f. Change Orders(numbers)that have affected value
g. Dollar value
h. Percentage of Contract Sum to the nearest one-hundredth percent,adjusted to
total 100 percent
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Break principal
subcontract amounts down into several line items.
4. Round amounts off to the nearest whole dollar;the total shall equal the Contract Sum.
C. For each part of the Work where an Application for Payment may include products
purchased or fabricated and stored,but not yet installed,provide a separate line item on the
Schedule of Values for the initial cost of the product, for each subsequent stage of
completion,and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
D. Margins of Cost: Show line items for indirect costs,and margins on actual costs,only to the
extent that such items will be listed individually in Applications for Payment.
1. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete
including its total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit margin.
2. At the General Contractor's option,temporary facilities and other major cost items
that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown as separate line items in
the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense.
E. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values when Change Orders or
Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.
1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT:
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments
as certified by the Architect and paid by the Owner.
B. The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion, and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
C. Payment Application Times: Each progress payment date shall be as indicated in the
Agreement. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 01027-APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes:
1. Administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's Applications
for Payment.
1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES:
A. Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the General
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative
schedules and forms,including:
a. General Contractor's construction schedule
b. Application for payment form
C. List of contractors and installers
d. Schedule of allowances
e. Schedule of alternates
f. List of products
g. List of principal suppliers and fabricators
h. Schedule of submittals
2. Submit the Schedule of Values to the Architect at the earliest feasible date,but in any
event not later than 7 days before the date scheduled for submittal of the initial
Application for Payment.
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual Table of Contents as a guide to establish the
format for the Schedule of Values.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of
Values:
a. Project name and location
b. Name of the Architect
C. Project number
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027- 1
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
does not interfere with completion of the Work.
E. Placing of equipment and partial occupancy by Owner shall not constitute acceptance of the
total Work.
F. A Certificate of Substantial Completion will be executed for each specific portion of the
Work to be occupied prior to full Owner occupancy. Contractor shall comply with
applicable requirements for Contract closeout for each phase.
G. The Contractor shall obtain a Certificate for Partial Occupancy, from the local building
authority,for each area occupied by the Owner,prior to Substantial Completion of the Work.
H. Prior to partial occupancy by Owner, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully
operational in areas to be occupied. Required inspections and tests shall have been
successfully completed.
I. Upon occupancy, the Owner will be responsible for operation and maintenance of
mechanical and electrical systems in occupied portions of the building.
END OF SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
A. The Owner shall have right of access to the site during construction.
B. During progress of construction the Owner may grant permission to others to use the
premises for installation of material and equipment. The Contractor shall cooperate with the
suppliers and installers of such work.
C. Owner may take occupancy of areas of the Work when they are substantially completed.
D. 'Use of the premises shall not be construed as approval or acceptance by the Owner of any
part of the Work.
E. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner in arranging space for receiving,uncrating,
and storing furnishings and equipment for use in the completed work.
1.7 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES:
A. Limit use of the premises to construction activities in the areas indicated. Allow for Owner
occupancy and public use.
B. Confine operations to areas within contract limit lines. Do not disturb portions of the site
beyond areas indicated for construction operations unless authorized.
C. Keep driveways, walks and entrances clear and available to the Owner and the Owner's
employees at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
D. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and
equipment on site.
E. Do not disturb portions of the site beyond areas in which construction operations are
indicated.Provide site watering as needed to control dust and dirt.All dust and debris must
be contained within the perimeter site fence at all times during construction.
F. Coordinate with the Northampton Conservation Commission for site environmental
restrictions.
1.8 OWNER OCCUPANCY:
A. The Owner may access the site and portions of the completed building during the
construction period.
B. Contractor shall coordinate work with the Owner during construction operations to minimize
conflicts and facilitate Owner usage and needs.
C. The Contractor shall perform the Work so as not to interfere with the Owner's operations.
D. The Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas
of the building,prior to Substantial Completion of the Work provided that such occupancy
SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
""
SECTION 01010 -SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions,and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes:
1. Description of Project and the Work.
2. Use of premises.
1.3 PROJECT DESCRIPTION:
A. The Project consists of the following work:
1. Renovation of an existing two story 4,200 s.f. masonry library building,construction
of a new two story 5,300 s.f. steel framed addition and related sitework.
1.4 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK:
A. The Lilly Library project consists of the construction of a two story addition, site
development,landscaping and other site improvements.
1.5 WORK SEQUENCE:
A. Construct Work as required to provide the least possible interference with activities of the
Owner's personnel and surrounding neighbors.
1. Coordinate construction scheduling and operations with the Owner.
2. Work may be conducted on week days,starting at 8:00 AM and ending at 4:30 PM.
3. Work after"normal"working hours shall be permitted only if approved in advance
by the Owner. See the"Settlement Agreement"attached to Section 01000A,Special
Supplementary Conditions,for additional requirements related to the work day.
1.6 OWNER USE OF PREMISES:
SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 1
h. The parties further agree that the breach of any of the provisions of this
Agreement by any party shall constitute sufficient and adequate threat of
immediate and irreparable harm(it being agreed to by all parties that there is no
adequate remedy at law) sufficient to invoke the injunctive powers of the Land
Court and/or the Superior Court, arid any party aggrieved by any alleged breach
of this Agreement may apply to the Land Court Department of the Trial Court or
to the Superior Court Department of the Trial Court pursuant to this Agreement
for appropriate injunctive relief, and for such further relief as the Court may
deem just and equitable.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have hereunto set their hands and seals this
day of 917G11T, 2005.
The Plaintiffs,
Susan Bourque, Christine M. Shelton,
Margaret Lloyd, John Bollard and
Pamela Pomeroy,
By t it attorney
Jo H.Fitz-Gibbon
GREEN,MILES, LIPTON &FITZ-GIBBON
77 Pleasant Street, P. 0. Box 210
Northampton,MA 01061-0210
Telephone: (413) 586-8218
Facsimile No. (413) 584-6278
BBO#: 168570
The f dant, The Trustees of Lilly Library,
B ' attorney,
Patrick Melnik
110 King Street
Northampton,MA 01060
Telephone: (413) 584-6750
Facsimile No.: (413) 584-6789
BBO#: 342440
d. The Trustees have retained the services of a professional landscape architect,
duly registered and/or licensed within the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, to
advise the parties on appropriate landscaping on the westerly side of the Lilly
Library premises so as to adequately shield and protect the Plaintiffs and other
properties on the westerly side of the Lilly Library from noise, light, views, and
to otherwise adequately protect the privacy of the Plaintiffs and other properties
on the westerly side of the Lilly Library. The parties have agreed on the
selection of the.landscape architect, and her recommendations as to reasonable
protective measures to be employed by Lilly shall be adhered to by Lilly if not
otherwise agreed to by the parties between themselves. The initial
recommendations of the Landscape Architect are attached to this agreement.
e. Exterior and framing construction of the Lilly Library addition shall be
performed between the hours of 8 a.m. and 4:30 p.m.,Monday through Friday,
unless extended hours are.required due to a reasonable construction necessity.
During the summer months (specifically July and August) construction may
begin no earlier than 7 a.m. if required by the General Contractor due to heat
related conditions,but in all events the work day will not exceed 8.5 hours, and
in no event shall work continue past 4:30 p.m. on any given day. There shall be
no exterior or framing work done on the site on Saturdays and Sundays,but
interior wiring,painting,plumbing and other non noise producing finishing
work may be done during these times if required by Subcontractors performing
such work. Any work performed on a Saturday or Sunday, however, shall be
performed inside the building, and there shall be no outside cutting or
assembling of materials or other work done outside of the building on a
Saturday or Sunday. Neighbors will be notified in advance of any change from
the Monday to Friday 8 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. schedule and the reason for the change
before any work is done outside this schedule. Any reasonable objection to a
change of the work schedule made by any neighbor shall be communicated to
Robert Mahar,the Chair of the Lilly Library Building Committee,who will then
require all contractors to abide by the original 8 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. schedule until
the elimination of the reason for any such reasonable objection.
f. The Trustees shall appoint Robert Mahar, Chair of the Lilly Library Building
Committee, to act as an liaison between the Plaintiffs and the contractor during
the construction phase. Mr. Mahar will arrange a periodic schedule of meetings
with the Plaintiffs and the contractor to address any ongoing concerns of the
Plaintiffs, and, in addition, will make himself available, by telephone, on an as-
needed basis to address the Plaintiffs' concerns.
g. The Plaintiffs agree to dismiss this action, with prejudice, upon the signing of
this contract. Nevertheless, this contract shall be binding on the Trustees of
Lilly Library and shall be specifically enforceable by way of action for damages
or specific performance if Lilly does not comply with its terms. The parties
herein agree that the Land Court Department of the Trial Court, or the Superior
Court Department of the Trial Court, shall have jurisdiction over any disputes
arising out of the construction and/or application of this Settlement Agreement.
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
F. The RFI process shall not be used to submit a product substitution,Change Order proposal,
or any other modification procedure.
G. An RFI log shall be maintained by the General Contractor and updated weekly.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS: �.,.
A. Comply with a product manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to extent printed
information is more detailed or stringent than requirements contained directly in Contract
Documents.
B. Where installation of work is required to be in conformance with the product manufacturer's
directions or specifications,provide and distribute copies of applicable data as requested by
the Architect.
C. Inspect substrate conditions for each unit of work before beginning installation. Correct
unsatisfactory conditions before work proceeds.
D. Coordinate space requirements for mechanical and electrical work which are indicated
diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow the routing shown for pipes,ducts,and conduits as
closely as practicable. Make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently
to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.
E. In finished areas, except where specifically shown otherwise, conceal pipes, ducts, and
wiring. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish materials as directed by
Architect.
F. Execute cutting and patching to integrate elements of the Work. Uncover ill-timed,
defective, and non-conforming work. Provide openings for penetrations through existing
surfaces.
G. Provide samples for testing.
H. Seal penetrations through floors,walls, and gypsum board and plaster ceilings.
I. Verify that elements of interrelated operating equipment are compatible.
3.2 MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION:
A. General:
PROJECT COORDINATION 01040-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1. On completion of Project,transfer data from the Field Record Drawings to a fresh set
of prints which will be provided by Owner. Submit prints to Architect for review.
2. Contractor shall be responsible for accuracy and completeness of submitted record
prints to the General Contractor. Architect will review for legibility and clearness of
presentation.
3. Deliver one set of mylar reproducible prints and an electronic file on CD of the
Owner's Record Drawings, along with the reviewed record set,which will become
part of Owner's record of the Project.
B. Owner's Specifications and Shop Drawings:
1. Submit to Architect for review for legibility and clearness of presentation.
2. Contractor shall be responsible for completeness and accuracy.
3. Deliver reviewed documents which will become part of Owner's record of Project.
1.7 FIELD ENGINEERING:
A. Contractor shall be responsible for all measurements of the Work and shall verify all
dimensions and site conditions.
B. Establish grades,lines and levels by use of recognized engineering survey practices.
C. Locate and protect control and reference points as established by a Professional Engineer
hired by the Contractor.
1.8 REQUEST(S)FOR INFORMATION("RFI's"):
A. General Contractor shall submit requests for Contract Document interpretations,
coordination clarifications, and additional document information on a "Request for
Information" form.
B. General Contractor shall receive Requests for Information(RFI's)directly from Contractors.
General Contractor shall number all RFI's based on a tracking system approved by the
Architect. General Contractor shall forward RFI's to the Architect for review.
C. Transmit each RFI sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities
to avoid delay. Allow reasonable and sufficient time for Architect's adequate review and
response of RFI's. Delays in the Work resulting from failure to promptly forward RFI's to
the Architect shall not be considered as cause for extension of the Project completion date.
D. Verbal requests for interpretation, clarifications or additional information will not be
accepted by the Architect. All requests shall be documented on the RFI form.
E. Following the Architect's response to each RFI's,General Contractor shall distribute copies
of response to those concerned with and affected by the RFI response. Instruct recipients to
promptly report any inability to comply with provisions in the RFI response.
PROJECT COORDINATION 01040-3
WHEREAS, the Plaintiffs, as abutters to the property, have concerns about the
construction of the addition to the Library, and its impact upon their homes; and
WHEREAS, all parties agree that renovations are needed to the Lilly Library in order to
make it handicapped accessible and to improve the facility for Library patrons; and
WHEREAS, all parties wish to resolve their differences and this lawsuit in order to
achieve the goal of renovating the Lilly Library in a mutually satisfactory fashion;
NOW THEREFORE, the parties to the above-entitled action,through their respective
attorneys agree as follows:
1. Construction of the addition to the Lilly Library may proceed subject to the following
conditions:
a. The Defendant Trustees of Lilly Library shall locate the two air conditioning
pumps and/or compressors for both the Library and the addition as depicted in
the plan attached hereto as Exhibit"A". In addition, the Trustees will provide
seismic roof curbs with restrained spring isolators for vibration isolation and
seismic restraint, and take such other measures as are reasonably necessary to
muffle sound emanating from said air conditioning units.
b. The Trustees of the Lilly Library shall cause opaque or obscuring glass film to
be installed on the bottom half of all windows on the westerly side of the
addition on both the second and first floor, including,but not limited to that
portion of the addition containing the stairwell.
C. The Trustees of the Lilly Library will take all,reasonable measures to protect a
14 inch maple tree located on the property of Susan Bourque, and will construct
a fence or some other suitable protective device around the tree in order to
protect it. Such protective measures shall be determined by the Landscape
Architect and adhered to by Lilly. The Plaintiff, Susan Bourque, agrees to grant
whatever licenses or other permission are necessary for the Trustees to enter on
her property, to the extent necessary to install such fence or other protective
device.
COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS
Department of the Land Court
Hampshire, ss Misc. Case No. 306995
SUSAN C. BOURQUE, CHRISTINE SHELTON, )
MARGARET LLOYD, JOHN BOLLARD and )
PAMELA POMEROY, )
Plaintiffs )
VS. )
PAUL VOSS, FRANCIS JOHNSON, )
GEORGE KOHOUT,KEITH WILSON, )
PAUL DIEMAND,DAVID WILENSKY, and )
JENNIFER DIERINGER,AS THEY ARE )
MEMBERS OF THE NORTHAMPTON )
PLANNING BOARD, THE TRUSTEES )
OF LILLY LIBRARY and THE CITY OF )
NORTHAMPTON, )
Defendants )
SETTLEMENT AGREEMENT
WHEREAS, the Plaintiffs in the above-entitled action have filed a Complaint pursuant to
General Laws Chapter 40A, §17 challenging the actions of the Northampton Planning Board
and the City of Northampton in granting site plan approval and a special permit to reduce
parking requirements to the Trustees of Lilly Library, all in connection with the construction of
an addition to said Lilly Library; and
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1.19 DAMAGE
A. Destruction, damage, staining of any existing structures and or site will be repaired
and replaced by this contractor at no cost to the Owner.
1.20 COMPLETION DATE
A. The project shall be completed within twelve (12) months from the date of the
awarding of the contract. Liquidated damages shall include $500.00 per calendar
day for every day the project is not completed in the specified time due to the
performance of the contractor.
1.21 PERMIT FEES
A. All fees for this project not waived by the City of Northampton are the responsibility
of the General Contractor.Fees The City has agreed to waive include:
1. The fee for a Building Permit.
2. All fees from the Northampton D.P.W.
1.22 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
!0" A. The Owner will engage and pay for the services of an independent testing agency to
perform field quality control tests and inspections(i.e. soils, concrete, and steel
testing)which are not specifically indicated as the Contractor's responsibility.
1.24 TAXES
A. All new materials and equipment shall be tax exempt. The owner shall provide a tax
exempt number when a contract is signed.
END OF SECTION 01000
SPECIAL SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01000A-5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA look
A. All Contract Documents shall govern in any subcontract made for any part or parts
of the construction.
1.14 CONTRACT DOCUMENT CONFLICTS AND OMISSIONS
A. It is understood that work not indicated on a part of the Drawings, but reasonably
implied to be similar to that shown at corresponding places on other drawings, is to
be incorporated into the work.
B. Any conflicts on the drawings or in the specifications should be brought to the
attention of the Architect, by the Contractor, so an addendum can be issued prior to
bidding. If any such conflict is not addressed, by addendum, the Contractor will be
responsible for the costlier of the items in question. All question regarding the
contract documents must be sent to the architect in written form.
1.15 CUTTING AND PATCHING (By General Contractor)
A. Unless specified elsewhere, the Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of
that work that may be required to make its several parts come together properly and
fit to work, including mechanical and electrical, as shown or reasonably implied by
the Drawings and Specifications, or as the Architect may direct. All selective
demolition work, unless otherwise specified, shall be the responsibility of the
General Contractor.
B. The cost of defective or ill-timed work shall be borne by the party responsible as
determined by the Architect.
1.16 VERIFYING MEASUREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall verify all measurements and be responsible for any mistakes he
may make and their result. If the Contractor discovers any discrepancy in figures on
the Drawings, he shall report them to the Architect before proceeding with any work
affected by the discrepancy, and shall be held responsible for results should he fail to
make such report.
1.17 WORK SCHEDULE
A. Prior to construction, the Contractor, Owner,and Architect shall outline construction
procedures to allow the owner all necessary access to the site.
1.18 SITE INSPECTION
A. The bidder shall visit the site and inform himself by visual inspection, observation
and inquiry into the actual surface physical condition, climate, variations in rainfall,
precipitation, temperature, water supply access, facilities for transportation, storage
of material, availability of labor, and other conditions for carrying out the work.
Each bidder shall make his own interpretation and reach his own conclusions as to
SPECIAL SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01000A-4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
ell- Florence,MA
D. The material as specified is to be used unless written approval by the architect is
given allowing substitution.
E. No products or manufacturers will be pre-approved. All product reviews and
installation methods will be done during the shop drawing process only.
F. In addition to work outlined to be within the scope of work on the drawings or in the
specifications, the Contractor shall include the cost of restoring any items that were
damaged or removed as a result of such work. All restoration work shall be
performed in accordance with sections of these specifications where applicable.
G. Unless otherwise stated in the agreement between the owner&contractor,the owner
will retain five percent (5%) of the amount due to the contractor on all progress
payments until Substantial Completion.
1.09 STAGING
A. All staging, exterior and interior, required to be over eight(8) feet in height, shall be
furnished and erected by the General Contractor and maintained in safe condition by
him without charge to and for the use of all trades as needed by them for proper
execution of their work, except where specified to the contrary in any other Section
of the Specifications.
B. All necessary hoisting equipment and machinery shall be installed, operated and
maintained in safe condition by the General Contractor.
1.10 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY--See Insurance&Bonding Requirements
1.11 SEQUENCE OF WORK
A. The Contractor must coordinate the work schedule with the Owner and the Architect
in charge and make every effort to comply with the schedule. The General
Contractor will prepare a schedule of all work to be done and provide a monthly up-
date that indicates impacts on the progress of the work.
1.12 DEFINITION OF PARTIES
A. Wherever the word"Owner"is used herein,it refers to the Lilly Library Association.
B. Wherever the work "Architects" is used herein, it refers to Caolo & Bieniek
Associates,Inc.,521 East Street,Chicopee,MA 01020.
C. Wherever the word "Contractor" is used herein, it refers to the Contractor or
Contractors for any part or parts of the work covered by these Specifications and the
accompanying Drawings.
1.13 SCOPE OF ALL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
SPECIAL SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01000A-3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
E. The contractor shall provide&maintain all previsions to continue construction in all
weather conditions. This includes temporary heat, snow removal rain protection etc.
1.05 PERFORMANCE
A. Submission of a bid by Contractor shall be accepted as prima facia evidence that he
has examined the Specifications and Drawings and has satisfied himself as to the
nature and location of the work and all other matters which can in any way affect the
work or cost thereof under this Contract. Any failure of the Contractor to acquaint
himself with all available information, including a physical survey of the site of the
proposed work will not relieve him from successfully performing all the work
required to be done for a complete,finished job.
B. The above outline of principal features of the work in no way limits he responsibility
of the Contractor to perform all work and furnish all plant, labor and materials
required by the Specifications and Plans referred to herein.
1.06 REFERENCES
A. Where references are made in the contract documents to the Publications and
Standards issued by the Association of Societies, the intent shall be understood to
specify the current edition of such Publications or Standards (including tentative
revisions) in effect on the date of the contract advertisement not withstanding any
reference to a particular date.
1.07 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. The Owner will provide the Contractor a minimum of two (2) sets of black or blue
line on white drawings to maintain and submit record drawings; one set of which
shall be maintained at the site and on which shall, at all times, be accurately, clearly
and completely shown, the actual installations. At the completion of the contract,
the Contractor shall submit the recorded drawings to the Architect who shall verify
the record drawings in time to be used for the final inspection. The contractor shall
be responsible for providing an electronic file on CD format and one printed copy of
the record drawings and specifications.
1.08 GENERAL REOUIREMENTS
A. No consideration shall be granted, nor claim allowed, for alleged misunderstanding
of Specifications and/or Drawings, nor for unfamiliarity with the conditions under
which work is to be performed.
B. The Contractor will be responsible to the Architect.
C. A written order by the architect must be received by the Contractor before he/she is
permitted to make any changes or do any additional work on this job. Any work
done or changes made without written order will be the Contractor's responsibility.
SPECIAL SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01000A-2
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 01000A—SPECIAL SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS/SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
A. Attention is directed to the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction of
these Specifications, which are hereby made part of this Section of the
Specifications.
1.02 LOCATION
A. 19 Meadow Street,Florence,MA
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall supply all labor, equipment, materials, temporary storage,
facilities, tools, cutting and patching, and other appliances necessary for the work in
this section and as required to properly complete the project in accordance with these
contract documents and good construction practice. Generally,the work includes:
1. Renovation of an existing two story 4,200 s.f. masonry library building,
construction of a new two story 5,300 s.f. steel framed addition and related
sitework.
2. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that The Trustees of Lilly
Library and the abutters of the library site have entered into a legal
agreement that may have impacts on construction activities. The four (4)
page agreement is attached at the end of this Specification Section and the
Contractor is responsible for compliance with same.
1.04 SECURITY &MAINTENANCE OF SITE
A. Provision of security, maintenance and protection for the site and construction is the
responsibility of the General Contract,until such time that the facility or portions of
said facility are accepted for use by the Owner.
B. The General Contractor shall maintain the site in a clean and orderly condition
throughout the project. Trash and construction debris is to be removed from the site
in a timely fashion. The contractor shall provide all temporary protection and means
to prevent the disruption of the daily working environment. Protection against dust,
dirt, debris, noise shall be provided. A minimum of two days notice shall be
provided for any work that will disrupt the hospital or areas of due to construction
activities.
C. Materials not required for this project are not to be stored on site.
D. Weeds, grass and other vegetation shall be maintained and kept cut by the General
Contractor.
SPECIAL SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01000A- 1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
To demonstrate every possible measure, the Contractor will furnish AMWt
(a) the name of each firm solicited for quotations on each
Subcontract, the price quoted by each, and whether or not the firm
solicited was a minority;
(b) the reason for not Subcontracting with a minority firm when
applicable;
(c) evidence showing efforts by the Contractor to supplement its own
and SOMBA lists of minority business sources by contacting the Small
Business Administration, trade organizations, the Services
Administration (US Government) , minority contractors' organizations,
community organizations and other likely sources of names of additional
minority or woman-owned business firms capable of performing the Work;
and
(d) evidence showing other efforts to comply with this Article 17.
The City may then determine that no such substitute minority
Contractors exist.
17.6 Hearings and Appeals
17.6.1 The Awarding Authority shall not impose any sanctions
under Paragraph 17.5 unless the Contractor, SOMBA and any interested
party shall have been given an opportunity to present testimony at an
administrative conference held by the Department, and the Department
determines in its sole discretion that the sanctions are justified by
the supporting circumstances presented at the Administration
Conference.
17.6.2 A Contractor shall have the right to request the City
to suspend any or all sanctions imposed under Paragraph 17.5 upon
showing that he/she is in compliance with this Article 17.
Avkk
PurcflQ. Rev. 4/87
If an MBE listed on the Schedule has its certified status revoked, the
Contractor shall consider his/her compliance with this Article 17
terminated and must proceed as outlined in the following paragraph.
17.4.7 Any bidder or Contractor must provide information as
its is necessary in the judgement of the City or SOMBA to ascertain
compliance with the terms of this Article 17.
17.4.8 If the Contractor desires to comply with this Article
17, but for reasons beyond his/her control cannot do so in accordance
with the Participation Schedule, the Contractor must submit to -the City
the reason for his/her inability to comply and proposed revisions to
the Participation Schedule stating how conditions of this Article 17
are to be met.
17.4.9 Failure to comply with any provisions of Article 17
shall constitute a substantial violation and breach the Owner-
Contractor agreement.
17.5 Sanctions
17.5.1 If the Contractor fails to comply with the terms of
these conditions, the City may
(a) suspend any payment for the Work that should
have been but was not performed by an MBE
pursuant to the Participation Schedule; or
(b) require specific performance of the
Contractor's obligation under this Article 17 by
requiring the Contractor to contract with an MBE
selected by the Contractor and agreed to by the
City for any Work remaining, at no additional
cost to the owner.
17.5.2 To the extent that the Contractor has not complied
with the terms of these conditions, the City may withhold from any
periodic payment monies equivalent to the product of the percentage of
completion times the MBE dollar amount, minus the amount already paid
to MBE's for Work performed under the contract, minus any payments
already withheld.
17.5.3 In addition to the remedies provided under 17.5.1 and
17.5.2 the City may suspend or terminate this contract in whole or in
part, or may call upon the Contractors' surety to perform all terms and
conditions in the contract.
17.5.4 In any proceedings involving the imposition of
sanctions, the City may not impose sanctions if it finds that the
Contractor has taken every possible measure to comply with this Article
17, and that good cause exist for some other justifiable reason for
waiving this Article in whole or in part.
Purch. Rev. 4/87 61
the following amounts: (1) that proportion of *"
the joint venture's item 1 price equal to the MBE
participation in the joint venture, or (2) 25% of
the Amount of Participation.
(d) Whenever a joint venture with an MBE
participant files a bid or sub-bid, and requests
a credit as an MBE, that bid must be accompanied
by the joint venture agreement for that joint
venture.
17 .4 Compliance
17.4.1 If the Participation Schedule is materially
incomplete, the City may consider the bid informal as to substance and
reject the bid. If the schedule is incomplete in other respects, the
City may consider the bid informal as to form and may waive the
informalities upon the satisfactory completion of the required
information by the bidder and the minority Contractor as applicable.
17.4.2 If the Awarding Authority finds that the amount of
MBE participation submitted by the bidder on his/her schedule does not
meet the 5% goal, it will reject the bidder's proposal and find such
bidder ineligible for award of this contract.
17.4.3 A General bidder shall not change the MBE's listed
in his/her Schedule or make any other such MBE substitutions without
the written approval of the City as to certification and notification
to SOMBA.
17.4.4 Prior to and as a condition of signing the Owner-
Contractor Agreement, the Contractor shall furnish the City and SOMBA
with signed copies of Subcontracts and approved purchase orders
executed between him/her and each of the MBE's listed on the
Participation Schedule. If a listed MBE Contractor fails to obtain a
performance or payment bond when requested by the bidder to do so, said
failure shall not entitle the bidder to avoid the requirements of this
Article 17.
17.4.5 The Contractor shall not terminate any sub-contract
for, nor perform with his/her own organization, nor assign to any other
contractor or Subcontractor, work designated to an MBE on the
Participation Schedule without the written approval of the City and
notification to SOMBA. Such approval shall be withheld until the
Contractor demonstrates that the Participation Amount is still met for
any substituted MBE, provided however,that compliance with this
paragraph shall not limit the terms of M.G.L. Chapter 149, Section 44F.
17.4.6 Any changes or substitutions of the officers or
stockholders in an MBE that reduces the minority or woman ownership or
control to less than the requisite percentage will result in the
automatic revocation of that MBE's or WBE's certified status.
PurcH. Rev. 4/87
17.2.2 Subcontractors are encouraged, but not required to
Subcontract portions of their work to MBE's. Participation forms,
available with the bidding documents, shall be used to list those MBE's
with whom they wish to sub-subcontract and the dollar amount of those
proposed sub-subcontracts.
17.2.3 Material suppliers will be considered for compliance
under paragraphs 17.2.1 and 17.2.2.
17.3 Determination of MBE Status
17.3.1 Any Contractor, Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor
may apply to SOMBA for MBE status. Applications must be made on the
application form prepared by SOMBA and available from SOMBA.
Applicants can be certified only by SOMBA, and certification as a
"Minority Business" by other agencies does not fulfill the requirements
of this Article 17.
17.3.2 SOMBA will be responsible for preparing, publishing,
and updating a list of certified minority-owned contracting and
Subcontracting businesses. The list that is most current at the time
the Work is advertised shall govern, and bidders are expected to use it
as a reference source in meeting the requirements of this Article 17.
17.3.3 Submission of an application to SOMBA does not
constitute certification by SOMBA. SOMBA requires a minimum of thirty
(30) days from the receipt of a completed application to make its
decision regarding the certification of an MBE applicant.
17.3.4 Joint Ventures
(a) In the case of a joint venture between an
MBE and a non-certified business, the joint
venture shall be certified by SOMBA if the
certified MBE shall have at least 51% control
over the management and receipt of profits of the
project bid upon.
(b) In the case of a joint venture between an
MBE and a non-certified business in which the MBE
does not exercise more than 51% control over
management and profits, the joint venture shall
be entitled to a credit as an MBE for that
proportion of the joint venture's contract equal
to the MBE participation in the joint venture,
except in the case of (c) below.
(c) Whenever a bid is filed by a joint venture
with an MBE participant in the joint venture that
does not exercise more than 51% control over
management and profits, that joint venture shall
be entitled to credit as an MBE for the lesser of
Purch. Rev. 4/87 59
(e) Asian (persons having origins in any of the
original peoples of the Far East, Southeast Asia,
the Indian Subcontinent or the Pacific Islands,
for example-China, Japan, Korea, the Phillipine
Islands, Samoa) ; or
(f) Cape Verdean (persons having origins in any
of the original peoples of Cape Verde Islands who
are of Black African origin) .
17.1.2 "SOMBA" means the State Office of Minority Business
Assistance, 100 Cambridge Street, Room 1300, Boston, Massachusetts
02202.
17.1.3 "Department" means the Department of Community
Affairs as defined in the Supplementary Conditions.
17.1.4 "Minority Business Enterprise" (MBE) means a
business organization, certified by SOMBA, which can demonstrate that:
(a) minority persons beneficially own and
control at least 51% of the business:
(b) minority persons have dominant control in
the management and operation of the business;
(c) minority persons have made a substantial
investment in the business; and
(d) the business is an on-going concern, not
created solely for the purpose of taking
advantage of set-aside programs.
17.1.5 "Amount of Participation" means the actual dollar
amount to be paid to MBE's for Work performed on this Contract in
accordance with this program.
17.2 Conditions: All Contractors, Subcontractors, Sub-
subcontractors, and the like agree to be bound by the commitments and
obligations outlined in the sections below, as applicable.
17.2.1 The apparent low general bidder must submit a Letter
of Intent within five days of the bid opening, as required by the
Instructions to Bidders. All Bidders must submit a MBE Participation
Schedule with their bids. This schedule shall list those MBE's with
whom the Contractor intends to directly subcontract, and also any MBE's
listed by filed sub-bidders. Said schedule shall state the amount to
be paid each MBE.
The amount of participation of MBE's listed in this schedule must total
at least 5%. MBE's listed on this schedule must be on the SOMBA list
of approved MBE's at the time of the receipt of bids. AR,
Purdy& Rev. 4/87
in compliance with these regulations he may request the Department in
consultation with the City, to suspend the sanctions conditionally,
pending a final determination by the Department as to whether the
Contractor is in compliance. After receiving a final report, the
Department shall either lift the sanctions or reimpose them.
16. .7. Certification
16. .7. .1. The Contractor's Certification Form must be signed
by all successful low bidders prior to award by the City.
16. .7. .2. The Contractor receiving the award of the contract
shall be required to obtain from each of its Subcontractors filed or
nonfiled and submit to the City prior to the performance of any Work
under said Subcontract, a certification by said Subcontractor,
regardless of tier, that it will comply with the minority manpower
ratio and specific affirmative action steps. The form for this
certificate shall be as shown under the "Form of Subcontract", in the
"Contract Forms" section of this document.
16. .7. .3. In order to ensure that the said Subcontractors'
certification becomes a part of all Subcontracts under the prime
contract, no Subcontract shall be executed until an authorized
representative of the City administering this project has determined,
in writing, that the said certification has been incorporated in such
Subcontract, regardless of tier. Any Subcontract executed without such
written approval shall be void.
17. ARTICLE 17
NORTHAMPTON MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PROGRAM
17.1 Definitions: For purposes of this program, the following
definitions shall prevail:
17.1.1 "Minority" means a person who is a citizen or
permanent resident of the United States and who is either
(a) Black (persons having origins in any of the
Black racial groups of Africa. )
(b) Hispanic (persons of Mexican, Puerto Rican,
Cuban, Central or South American origin) ;
(c) Native American (persons having origins in
any of the original peoples of North America, and
who are recognized as native Americans by a
tribal organization) ;
(d) Eskimo & Aleut (persons having origins in
any of the original peoples of Northern Canada,
Greenland, Alaska, and Eastern Siberia) ;
Purch. Rev. 4/87 57
16. .6. .2. Whenever the City's EEO Officer, the MCAD, the
Department or the Liaison Committee believes the Contractor may not be
operating in compliance with the terms of these requirements, the
Department shall conduct an investigation, and may confer with the
parties, to determine if such Contractor is operating in compliance
with the terms of this section. No investigation by the Department
shall be initiated without prior notice to the Contractor. If the
Department finds the Contractor not in compliance, it shall make a
preliminary report on non-compliance, and notify such Contractor in
writing of such steps as will in the judgement of the Department bring
such Contractor into compliance. A copy of such report shall be sent
to the Department's Affirmative Action Officer. In the event that such
Contractor fails or refuses to fully perform such steps, the Department
shall make a report of non-compliance to the Department which will then
conduct an investigation and should it find such Contractor to be in
non-compliance, it will recommend, in a final report, the imposition of
one or more of the sanctions listed below. If, however, the Department
believes the Contractor has taken or is taking every possible measure
to achieve compliance, it shall not make a final report of non-
compliance. Within fourteen days of a final report the Department
shall after due notice and an opportunity to be heard, move to impose
one or more the following sanctions to attain full and effective
compliance:
a. For each week that the Contractor fails or refuses to
comply, the Department may recover from the Contractor,
1/100 of 1% of the contract award price or $1000 whichever
sum is greater, in the nature of liquidated damages or if a
Subcontractor is in non-compliance, the Department may
recover from the Contractor, 1/10 of 1% of the Subcontract
price, or $400 whichever sum is greater, in the nature of
liquidated damages, to be assessed by the Contractor as a
back charge against the subcontractor for each week that
such party fails or refuses to comply.
b. The suspension of any payment or part thereof due under the
contract until such time as the Contractor is able to
demonstrate his compliance with the terms of the contract;
C. The termination or cancellation of the Contract, in whole or
in part, unless the Contractor is able to demonstrate within
a specified time his compliance with the terms of the
Contract;
d. The denial to the Contractor of the right to participate in
any future contracts awarded by the Department for a period
of up to three years.
16. .6. .3. If at any time after the imposition of one or more
of the above sanctions a Contractor is able to demonstrate that he is A0
PurcE�6. Rev. 4/87
construction industry, where such referrals are need to meet minority
hiring requirements. The Contractor shall keep accurate records of
such requests for referrals.
16. .3. .3. Records of employment referral orders, prepared
by the Contractor, shall be made available to the City and to the
Liaison Committee on request.
16. .3. .4. The Commission, or designee of the City, and a
designee of the Liaison Committee shall each have right of access to
the construction site.
16. .4. Work Force Tables
16. .4. .1. Ouarterly Protected Work Force: The Contractor
shall prepare projected work force tables on a quarterly basis. These
shall be broken down into projections by week of workers required in
each trade. Updated copies shall be furnished to the City's EEO
Officer and the Liaison Committee, one week in advance of the
commencement of work and of each quarter thereafter. Quarters shall
begin on January 1, April 1, July 1 and October 1. No work shall begin
until projected work force tables are received by the City's EEO
Officer.
16. .4. .2. Weekly Actual Work Force Table: The Contractor
shall prepare a report due after each week of activity, reflecting the
actual working hours of all personnel identified as minority or non-
minority. It shall be received by the City and the Liaison Committee
no later than Friday following the week reported.
16. .5. Liaison Committee
16. .5. .1. The Contractor (or his agent, if any, designated
by him as the on-site Equal Employment Opportunity Officer) shall
recognize the Liaison Committee as an affirmative action body, and
shall establish a continuing working relationship with the Liaison
Committee, consulting with the Liaison Committee on all matters related
to minority recruitment, referral, employment and training.
16. .6. Compliance - Information Reports and Sanctions
16. .6. .1. The Contractor will provide all information and
reports required by the City or the Department on instructions issued
by either of them and will permit access to its facilities and any
books, records, accounts and other sources of information which may be
determined by the City or the Department to affect the employment of
personnel. This provision shall apply only to information pertinent to
the Commonwealth's affirmative action contract requirements. Where
information required is in the exclusive possession of another who
fails or refuses to furnish this information, the Contractor shall so
certify to the City or the Department as appropriate and shall set
forth what efforts he has made to obtain the information.
Purch. Rev. 4/87 55
undertake in good faith affirmative action measures designed to
eliminate any discriminatory barriers in the terms and conditions of
employment of the grounds of race, color, religious creed, national
origin, age, handicap, or sex, and to eliminate and remedy any effects
of such discrimination in the past. Such affirmative action shall
entail positive and aggressive measures to ensure equal opportunity in
the areas of hiring, upgrading, demotion or transfer, recruitment,
layoff or termination, rate of compensation, and in-service or
apprenticeship training programs. This affirmative action shall
include all action required to guarantee equal employment opportunity
for all persons, regardless of race, color, religious creed, national
origin, age or sex. A purpose of this provision is to ensure to the
fullest extent possible an adequate supply of skilled tradesmen on this
public construction project.
16. .2. .3. For Work under this Contract a Contractor will not
discriminate on grounds of race, color, religious creed, national
origin, age or sex in employment practices, in the selection or
retention of Subcontractors, or in the procurement of materials and
rentals of equipment.
16. .2. .4. If a Contractor shall use any Subcontractor on any
work under this contract, he shall take affirmative action to negotiate
with qualified minority Subcontractors. This affirmative action shall
cover both pre-bid and post-bid periods. It shall include notification
to the State Office for Minority Business Assistance (SOMBA) or its w�
designees, while bids are in preparation, of all products, Work, or
services for which the Contractor intends to negotiate bids.
16. .2. .5. In solicitations either by competitive bidding or
negotiation made by a Contractor either for Work under a Subcontractor
or for the procurement of materials or equipment, each potential
Subcontractor or supplier shall be notified in writing of the
Contractor' s obligations under this Contract relative to
nondiscrimination and affirmative action.
16. .3. Minority Goal
16. .3. .1. As part of his obligation of remedial action under
the foregoing section, the Contractor shall maintain on this project a
percent ratio of minority employee man-hours in each job category not
less than Five (5) percent. Such job categories shall include but not
be limited to bricklayers, carpenters, cement masons, electricians,
ironworkers, operating engineers, and those "classes of Work"
enumerated in Section 44C of Chapter 149 of the Massachusetts General
Laws.
16. .3. .2. Referrals: In the hiring of minority journeymen,
apprentices, trainees and advanced trainees, the Contractor shall rely
on referrals from a multiemployer affirmative action program approved
by the Department or The Commission; three agencies designated by the
Liaison Committee: and traditional referral methods utilized by the
Pur&g. Rev. 4/87
Fair Practices, amending and Revising Executive Orders No. 116 and 117;
Executive Order No. 237 pertaining to minority and women business
development; Executive Order No. 246 pertaining to the handicapped and
all regulations promulgated pursuant thereto. The aforementioned law,
Executive Orders, and regulations are incorporated herein by reference
and made a part of this Contract.
16. ARTICLE 16
NORTHAMPTON CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM
16. .1. Definitions: For purposes of this program, the following
additional definitions shall prevail:
16. .1. .1. "Minority" refers to Asian-Americans, Blacks,
Spanish Surnamed Americans, North American Indians, and Cape Verdeans.
16. .1. .2. "Commission" or "MCAD" refers to the Massachusetts
Commission Against Discrimination.
16. .1. .3. "Contractor" refers to the Contractor and all
Subcontractors, Filed, and Unfiled.
16. .1. .4. "Liaison Committee" refers to a body established
for the life of this Contract at the discretion of the Commission,
composed of one representative each from the agency or agencies
administering this project, the Commission, and such other
representatives as may be designated by the Commission in conjunction
with the administering agency or agencies.
16. .1. .5. "E.E.O. Officer" refers to Equal Employment
Opportunity Officer, those person designated by the Contractor, the
City, or any other agency or party having jurisdiction in this
contract, that serve in a capacity to implement this Article.
16. .2. Conditions: During the performance of this Contract, the
Contractor for himself, his assignees, and successors in interest,
agrees as follows:
16. .2. .1. For Work under this Contract, a Contractor shall
not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment
because of race, color, religious creed, national origin, age,
handicap, or sex. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be
limited to, the following: employment upgrading, demotion or transfer;
recruitment advertising; recruitment layoff; termination; rates of pay
or other forms of compensation; conditions or privileges of employment;
and selection for apprenticeship. The Contractor shall post in
conspicuous places, available for employees and applicants for
employment, notices to be provided by the Commission setting forth the
provisions of the Fair Employment Practices Law of the Commonwealth.
16. .2. .2. For Work under this Contract, a Contractor shall
Purch. Rev. 4/87 53
shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid
balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The
amount to be paid to the Contractor or to the Owner, as the case may
be, shall be certified by the Designer, upon application, in the manner
provided in Paragraph 9.4, and this obligation for payment shall
survive the termination of the Contract.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
PART 2 - ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS
Articles set forth under Part 2 of this section are additional
conditions not covered in the A.I.A. General Conditions.
15. ARTICLE 15
LABOR REQUIREMENTS OF THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS
15. .1. Labor Laws
15. .1. .1. The Contractor and the Subcontractors shall
conform to applicable provisions of M.G.L. Chapter 149, as amended.
15. .1. .2. No laborer, workman, mechanic, foreman or
inspector working in the employment of the Contractor, Subcontractor or
other person doing or contracting to do the whole or part of the Work -look
contemplated by this Contract, shall be required or permitted to work
any more than eight hours in any one day, or more than 48 hours in any
one week, or more than six days in any one week, except in cases of
emergency.
15. .1. .3. Every employee on the Work shall lodge, board, and
trade where and with whom he elects, and the Contractor and any
Subcontractor shall not directly or indirectly require, as a condition
of employment in said Work, that an employee lodge, board, or trade at
a particular place or with a particular person.
15. .1. .4. The Contractor and each Subcontractor shall give
preference in employment of mechanics, apprentices, teamsters,
chauffeurs and laborers, first to citizens of the Commonwealth who have
been residents of the Commonwealth for at least six months at the
commencement of their employment and who are veterans as defined in
clause 43 of Section 7 of Chapter 4 of the General Laws, and who are
qualified to perform the Work to which the employment relates; and
secondly, to citizens of the Commonwealth generally, and if they cannot
be obtained in sufficient numbers, then to citizens of the United
States.
15. .2. Executive Orders
15. .2. .1. The Contractor shall comply with the provisions
of M.G.L. Chapter 151B; Executive Order No. 227, Governor's Code of A"k,,
PurcK. Rev. 4/87
warranty shall be held to constitute a failure of the Subcontractor to
fully complete his Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
13. .4. .3. The Contractor's obligation to correct Work as set
forth in Paragraph 13.2 is in addition to, and not in substitution of,
such guarantees or warranties as may be required in the various
Sections of the Specifications.
14. ARTICLE 14
TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT
14. .1. Termination By the Contractor
14. .1. .1. If the Work is stopped for a period of 30 days
under any order of any court or other public Authority having
jurisdiction or as a result of an act of government, such as a
declaration of a national emergency make materials unavailable, through
no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, or their
Designers or employees, or any other person performing any of the Work
under a contract with the Contractor, then the Contractor may, upon
seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and Designer,
terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for all Work
executed and for any proven loss sustained upon any materials,
equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, including
reasonable profit and damages.
14. .2. Termination By The Owner
14. .2. .1. If the Contractor is adjudged a bankrupt, or if
he makes a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors, or if
a receiver is appointed on account of his insolvency, or if he
persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails, except in cases for which
extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled
workmen or proper materials, or if he fails to make prompt payment to
Subcontractors or for materials or labor, or persistently disregards
laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority
having jurisdiction, or otherwise is guilty of a substantial violation
of a provision of the Contract Documents, then the Owner, upon
certification by the Designer that sufficient cause exists to justify
such action may, without prejudice to any right or remedy and after
giving the Contractor and his surety, if any, seven days' written
notice, terminate the employment of the Contractor and take possession
of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, construction
equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor and may finish
the Work by whatever method he may deem expedient. In such case the
Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until
the Work is finished.
14. .2. .2. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds
the costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the
Designer's additional services made necessary thereby, such excess
Purch. Rev. 4/87 51
time fixed by written notice from the Designer, the Owner may remove it
and may store the materials or equipment at the expense of the
Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the cost of such removal
and storage within ten days thereafter, the Owner may upon ten
additional days' written notice sell such Work at auction or at private
sale and shall account for the net proceeds thereof, after deducting
all the costs that should have been borne by the Contractor, including
compensation for the Designer's additional services made necessary
thereby. If such proceeds of sale do not cover all costs which the
Contractor should have borne, the difference shall be charged to the
Contractor and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. If the
payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to
cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the
Owner.
13. .2. .6. The Contractor shall bear the cost of making good
all work of the Owner or separate contractors destroyed or damaged by
such correction or removal.
13. .2. .7. Nothing contained in this Paragraph 13.2 shall be
construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to any other
obligation which the Contractor might have under the Contract
Documents, including Paragraph 4.5 hereof. The establishment of the
time period of one year after the Date of Substantial Completion or
such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms
of any warranty required by the Contract Documents relates only to the ,ow*"
specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no
relationship to the time within which his obligation to comply with the
Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within
which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's
liability with respect to his obligations other than specifically to
correct the Work.
13. .3. Acceptance of Defective or Non-Conforming Work
13. .3. .1. If the Owner prefers to accept defective or
nonconforming Work, he may do so instead of requiring its removal and
correction, in which case a Change Order will be issued to reflect a
reduction in the Contract Sum where appropriate and equitable. Such
adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been
made.
13. .4. Special Guarantees And Warranties
13. .4 . .1. All guarantees and warranties required in the
various Sections of the Specifications which originate with a
Subcontractor or manufacturer must be delivered to the Designer before
final payment to the Contractor may be made for the amount of that
subtrade or for the phase of Work to which the guarantee or warranty
relates.
13. .4. .2. The failure to deliver a required guarantee or A"k,
Purd�0. Rev. 4/87
13. .1. .1. If any portion of the Work should be covered
contrary to the request of the Designer or to requirements specifically
expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by
the Designer, be uncovered for his observation and shall be replaced at
the Contractor's expense.
13. .1. .2. If any other portion of the Work has been covered
which the Designer has not specifically requested to observe prior to
being covered, the Designer may request to see such Work and it shall
be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work be found in accordance
with the Contract Documents, the cost of uncovering and replacement
shall, by appropriate Change Order, be charged to the Owner. If such
Work be found not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the
Contractor shall pay such costs unless it be found that this condition
was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor as provided in Article
6, in which event the Owner shall be responsible for the payment of
such costs.
13. .2. Correction of Work
13. .2. .1. The Contractor shall promptly correct all Work
rejected by the Designer as defective or as failing to conform to the
Contract Documents whether observed before or after Substantial
Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. The
Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such rejected Work,
including compensation for the Designer's additional services made
necessary thereby.
13. .2. .2. If, within one year after the Date of Substantial
Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or within one year
after acceptance by the Owner of designated equipment or within such
longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of
any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any
of the Work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the
Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after
receipt of a written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner
has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such
condition. This obligation shall survive termination of the Contract.
The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the
condition.
13. .2. .3. The Contractor shall remove from the site all
portions of the Work which are defective or non-conforming and which
have not been corrected under Subparagraphs 4.5.1, 13.2.1 and 13.2.2,
unless removal is waived by the Owner.
13. .2. .4. If the Contractor fails to correct defective or
nonconforming Work as provided in Subparagraphs 4.5.1, 13.2.1 and
13.2.2, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Paragraph 3.4.
13. .2. .5. If the Contractor does not proceed with the
correction of such defective or non-conforming Work within a reasonable
Purch. Rev. 4/87 49
conditions. A request for such an adjustment shall be in writing and
shall be delivered by the party making such claim to the other party as
soon as possible after such conditions are discovered. Upon receipt of
such a claim from the Contractor, or upon its own initiative, the City
shall make an investigation of such physical conditions, and, if they
differ substantially or materially from those indicated in the Contract
Documents or from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized
as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract
Documents and are of such a nature as to cause an increase or decrease
in the cost of the Work, the contracting Authority shall make an
equitable adjustment in the Contract Price and the Contract shall be
modified in writing accordingly.
12. .3. Claims for Additional Cost
12. .3. .1. If the Contractor wishes to make a claim for an
increase in the Contract Sum, he shall give the Designer written notice
thereof within twenty days after the occurrence of the event giving
rise to such claim. This notice shall be given by the Contractor
before proceeding to execute the Work, except in an emergency
endangering life or property in which case the Contractor shall proceed
in accordance with Paragraph 10.3. No such claim shall be valid unless
so made. If the Owner and the Contractor cannot agree on the amount of
the adjustment in the Contract Sum, it shall be determined by the
Designer. Any change in the Contract Sum resulting from such claim
shall be authorized by Change Order.
12. .3. .2. If the Contractor claims that additional cost is
involved because of, but not limited to, (1) any written interpretation
pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.8, (2) any order by the Owner to stop the
Work pursuant to Paragraph 3.3 where the Contractor was not at fault,
(3) any written order for a minor change in the Work issued pursuant to
Paragraph 12.4, or (4) failure of payment by the Owner pursuant to
Paragraph 9.7, the Contractor shall make such claims as provided in
Subparagraph 12.3.1, except as set forth in Subparagraph 3.3.2 of the
Supplementary Conditions.
12. .4. Minor Changes in the Work
12. .4. .1. The Designer will have authority to order minor
changes in the Work not involving an adjustment in the Contract Sum or
an extension of the Contract Time and not consistent with the intent of
the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written
order, and shall be binding on the Owner and the Contractor. The
Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly.
13. ARTICLE 13
UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
13. .1. Uncovering of Work
PurdtB. Rev. 4/87
including foremen:
3. Rental value at fair market rental rates of equipment and
machinery employed directly on the Work (hand tools and
minor equipment excluded) :
4. A percentage amount of 25% of item 2 above to cover
Workman's Compensation, F.I.C.A. , and unemployment
contributions.
For Work performed by the Contractor with his own forces there shall be
added a percentage fee for the Contractor equal to 15% of the total of
Items 1,2,3 hereinabove.
For Work performed by a filed or non-filed Subcontractor there shall be
added a percentage fee for the Subcontractor equal to 15% of the total
of Items 1,2,3 hereinabove. To this total amount of the
Subcontractor's price there may be added an additional percentage fee
of 10% for the Contractor.
The percentage fee shall be compensation to cover the cost of
supervision, layout, overhead, bonds, profit, and all other expenses
which are not included in the cost of the Work as defined above.
Pending final determination of cost to the Owner, payments on account
shall be made on the Designer's Certificate for Payment. The amount of
credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for any deletion or
change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum will be the
amount of the actual net cost as confirmed by the Designer. When both
additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are
involved in any one change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall
be figured on the basis of the net increase, if any, with respect to
that change.
12. .1. .5. If unit prices are stated in the Contract
Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if the quantities originally
contemplated are so changed in a proposed Change Order that application
of the agreed unit prices to the quantities of Work proposed will cause
substantial inequity to the Owner or the Contractor, the applicable
unit prices shall be equitably adjusted.
12. .2. Concealed Conditions
12. .2. .1. Pursuant to Section 39N of Chapter 30 of the Laws,
the following shall apply to differing concealed conditions:
If, during the progress of the Work, the Contractor or the City
discovers that the actual subsurface or latent physical conditions
encountered at the site differ substantially or materially from those
shown on the plans or indicated in the Contract Documents either the
Contractor or the City may request an equitable adjustment in the
Contract Price applying to Work affected by the differing site
Purch. Rev. 4/87 47
12. ARTICLE 12
CHANGES IN THE WORK
12. .1. Change Orders
12. . 1. .1. A Change Order is a written order to the
Contractor signed by the Owner and the Designer, issued after execution
of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work or an adjustment in
the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. The Contract Sum and the
Contract ' Time may be changed only by Change Order. A Change Order
signed by the Contractor indicates his agreement therewith, including
the adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. All Change
Orders must be countersigned by the Administrator in accordance with
Paragraph 3.1 as supplemented.
12. .1. .2. The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may
order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract
consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum
and the Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. All such changes in
the Work shall be authorized by Change Order, and shall be performed
under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents.
12. .1. .3. The cost or credit to the Owner resulting from a
change in the Work shall be determined in one or more of the following
ways: �.
.1 by mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and
supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit
evaluation;
.2 by unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or
subsequently agreed upon;
.3 by cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the
parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage
fee, or
.4 by the method provided in Subparagraph 12.1.4.
12. .1. .4. If none of the methods set forth in Clauses
12.1.3.1, 12.1.3.2 or 12.1.3.3 is agreed upon, the Contractor, provided
he receives a written order signed by the Owner, shall promptly proceed
with the Work involved. The cost of such Work shall then be determined
by the Designer on the basis of the reasonable expenditures and savings
of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in
the case of an increase in the Contract Sum, a reasonable allowance for
overhead and profit. In such case, and also under Clauses 12.1.3.3 and
12.1.3.4 above, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as
the Designer may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with
appropriate supporting data for inclusion in a Change Order.
1. Cost of materials entering permanently in the Work,
including cost of delivery:
2. Cost of labor at the rates found elsewhere in this document """k.
Purctf. Rev. 4/87
Designers and employees, for damages caused by fire or other perils to
the extent covered by insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph
11.3 or any other property insurance applicable to the Work, except
such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance held by
the Owner as trustee. The foregoing waiver afforded the Designer, his
Designers and employees shall not extend to the liability imposed by
Subparagraph 4.18.3. The Owner or the Contractor, as appropriate,
shall require of the Designer, separate contractors, Subcontractors and
Sub-subcontractors by appropriate agreements, written where legally
required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of all other
parties enumerated in this Subparagraph 11.3.6.
11. .3. .7. If required in writing by any party in interest,
the Owner as trustee shall, upon the occurrence of an insured loss,
give bond for the proper performance of his duties. He shall deposit
in a separate account any money so received, and he shall distribute it
in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach,
or in accordance with an award by arbitration in which case the
procedure shall be as provided in Paragraph 7.9. If after such loss no
other special agreement is made, replacement of damaged work shall be
covered by an appropriate Change Order.
11. .3. .8. The Owner as trustee shall have power to adjust
and settle any loss with the insurers unless one the of parties in
interest shall object in writing within five days after the occurrence
of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power, and if such objection be
made, arbitrators shall be chosen as provided in Paragraph 7.9. The
Owner as trustee shall, in that case, make settlement with the insurers
in accordance with the directions of such arbitrators. If distribution
of the insurance proceeds by arbitration is required, the arbitrators
will direct such distribution.
11. .3. .9. If the Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use
a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion
thereof, such occupancy or use shall not commence prior to a time
mutually agreed to by the Owner and Contractor and to which the
insurance company or companies providing the property insurance have
consented by endorsement to the policy or policies. This insurance
shall not be cancelled or lapsed on account of such partial occupancy
or use. Consent of the Contractor and of the insurance company or
companies to such occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld.
11. .4. Loss of Use Insurance
11. .4. .1. The Owner, at his option, may purchase and
maintain such insurance as will insure him against loss of use of his
property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner
waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of
his property, including consequential losses due to fire or other
hazards however caused, to the extent covered by insurance under this
F Paragraph 11.4.
Purch. Rev. 4/87 45
will notify the Owner by registered mail at least 30 days in advance of "
any cancellation, change, or expiration of the policies.
11. .2. Owner's Liability Insurance
11. .2. .1. The Owner shall be named as an additional insured
on the Contractor's Liability Insurance Policies.
11. .3. Property Insurance
11. .3. .1. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain
property insurance upon the entire Work at the site to the full
insurable value thereof. This insurance shall be taken out in a
company or companies against which the Owner has no reasonable
objection and shall include the interests of the Owner, the Contractor,
Subcontractors and Sub Subcontractors and shall insure against the
perils of fire and extended coverage and shall include "all risks"
insurance for physical loss or damage including, without duplication,
theft, vandalism and malicious mischief. The insurance shall also
cover portions of the Work stored off the site or in transit which are
included in an Application for Payment under Subparagraph 9.3.2. If
this insurance is written with stipulated amounts deductible, the Owner
shall not be responsible for any difference between the payments made
by the insurance carrier and the claim.
11. .3. .2. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain such
boiler and machinery insurance as may be required by the Contract
Documents or by law. This insurance shall include the interests of the
Owner, the Contract, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work.
11. .3. .3. Any loss insured under Subparagraph 11.3.1 is to
be adjusted with the Owner and made payable to the Owner as trustee for
the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the
requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Subparagraph
11.3.8. The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor a just share of
any insurance moneys received by the Contractor, and by appropriate
agreement, written where legally required for validity, shall required
each Subcontractor to make payments to his Sub-subcontractors in
similar manner.
11. .3. .4. The Contractor shall file the original and one
certified copy of all policies with the Owner before exposure to loss
may occur. If the Owner is damaged by the failure of the Contractor to
maintain such insurance and to so notify the Owner, then the Contractor
shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto.
11. .3. .5. (intentionally deleted)
11. .3. . 6. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against
(1) each other and the Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, Designers
and employees each of the other, and (2) the Designer and separate
contractors, if any, and their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, "
Pure. Rev. 4/87
R of injury to or destruction of tangible property,
including loss of use resulting therefrom; and
.6 claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any
person or property damage arising out of the ownership,
maintenance or use of any motor vehicle.
11. .1. .2. The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1
shall be taken out in a company or companies authorized to do such
business in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts and satisfactory to the
Owner and Department and shall be written for not less than any limits
of liability specified herein below, or required by law, whichever is
greater.
1. Workmen's Compensation and other benefits as required under Chapter
152 of the Laws, as amended, and Section 34A of Chapter 149 of the
General Laws.
2. Employer's liability with a limit of at least $300, 000 each
accident.
3. Comprehensive Public Liability including Contractor's Liability as
applicable to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 4.18;
Elevators (if any on the Work) : Completed Operations and Products
Liability: all on the occurrence basis with Personal Injury coverage
and Broad Form Property Damage. Remove the XCU exclusions relating to
' Explosion, Collapse, and Underground Property Damage. Completed
Operations Liability shall be kept in force for at least two years
after the date of final completion.
Personal Injury and Accidental Death
Each person $300,000
$1, 000,000
Property Damage
Each Occurrence $300,000
Aggregate per 12 months $1, 000,000
Property a
Dmage
Each Person $100, 000
11. .1. .3. The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1
shall include contractual liability insurance applicable to the
Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 4.18.
11. .1. .4. Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner
shall be submitted to the Owner simultaneously with the execution of
the Contract. Certificates shall indicate that Contractual Liability
coverage is in force, as well as deletions of the XCU exclusions.
These Certificates shall contain a provision that the insurance company
Purch. Rev. 4/87 43
for whose acts any of them may be liable and for which the Contractor A
is responsible under Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 except damage or
loss attributable to the acts or omissions of the Owner or Designer or
anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone
for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to
the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations
of the Contractor are in addition to his obligations under Paragraph
4.18.
10. .2. .6. The Contractor shall designate a responsible
member of his organization at the sit6 whose duty shall be the
prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's
superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing
to the Owner and the Designer.
10. .2. .7. The Contractor shall not load or permit any part
of the Work to be loaded so as to endanger its safety.
10. .3. Emergencies
10. .3. .1. In any emergency affecting the safety of persons
or property, the Contractor shall act, at his discretion, to prevent
threatened damage, injury or loss. Any additional compensation or
extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of emergency
work shall be determined as provided in Article 12 for Changes in the
Work.
11. ARTICLE 11
INSURANCE
11. .1. Contractor's Liability Insurance
11. .1. .1. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain such
insurance as will protect him from claims set forth below which may
arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the
Contract, whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor
or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by
anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:
.1 claims under workers' or workmen's compensation, disability
benefit and other similar employee benefit acts;
.2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational
sickness or disease, or death of his employees;
.3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or
disease, or death of any person other than his
employees;
.4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury
liability coverage which are sustained (1) by any person as a
result of an offense directly or indirectly related t o the
employment of such person by the Contractor, o r ( 2 ) by any
other person;
.5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because 10%41.
PurcK. Rev. 4/87
9. .9. .5. The acceptance of final payment shall constitute
a waiver of all claims by the Contractor except those previously made
in writing and identified by the Contractor as unsettled at the time of
the final Application for Payment.
10. ARTICLE 10
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10. .1. Safety Precautions and Programs
10. .1. .1. The Contractor shall be responsible for
initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and
programs in connection with the Work.
10. .2. Safety of Persons and Property
10. .2. .1. The Contractor shall take all reasonable
precautions for the safety of, and shall provide all reasonable
protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to:
.1 all employees on the Work and all other persons who may be
affected thereby;
.2 all the Work and all materials and equipment to be incorporated
therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under the care,
custody or control of the Contractor or any of his Subcontractors
"* or Sub-subcontractors; and
.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including
trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and
utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in
the course of construction.
10. .2. .2. The Contractor shall give all notices and comply
with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful
orders of any public authority bearing on the safety of persons or
property or their protection from damage, injury or loss.
10. .2. .3. The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as
required by existing conditions and progress of the Work, all
reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting
danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety
regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent utilities.
10. .2. .4. When the use or storage of explosives or other
hazardous materials or equipment is necessary for the execution of the
Work, the Contractor shall exercise the utmost care and shall carry on
such activities under the supervision of properly qualified personnel.
10. .2. .5. The Contractor shall promptly remedy all damage
or loss (other than damage or loss insured under Paragraph 11.3) to any
property referred to in Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole
or in part by the Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Sub-subcontractor,
or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone
Purch. Rev. 4/87 41
Payment will constitute a further representation that the conditions
precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment as set
forth in Subparagraph 9.9.2 have been fulfilled. Final payment shall
be made in accordance with section 39K of Chapter 30, quoted in
Subparagraph 9.5.6 hereinabove, which Section takes precedence over any
contradictory provisions of Paragraph 9. 9.
9. . 9. .2. Neither the final payment nor the remaining
retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to
the Designer (1) an affidavit that all payrolls, bills for materials
and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which
the Owner or his property might in any way be responsible, have been
paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) consent of surety, if any, to final
payment and (3) , if required by the Owner, other data establishing
payment or satisfaction of all such obligations, such as receipts,
releases and waivers of liens arising out of the Contract, to the
extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If any
Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the
Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to
indemnify him against any such lien. If any such lien remains
unsatisfied after all payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to
the Owner all moneys that the latter may be compelled to pay in
discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys'
fees. The affidavit and consent of surety shall be submitted on AIA
forms G706 "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims" and
G707 "Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment".
9. . 9. .3. If, after Substantial Completion of the Work,
final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the
Contractor or by the issuance of Change Orders affecting final
completion, and the Designer so confirms, the Owner shall, upon
application by the Contractor and certification by the Designer, and
without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for
that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the
remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less
than the retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds
have been furnished as provided in Paragraph 7.5, the written consent
of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the
Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor
to the Designer prior to certification of such payment. Such payment
shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment,
except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
9. . 9. .4 . The making of final payment shall constitute a
waiver of all claims by the Owner except those arising from:
.1 unsettled liens,
.2 faulty or defective Work appearing after Substantial
Completion,
.3 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the
Contract Documents, or
.4 terms of any special warranties required by the Contract
Documents. ANVA
Pur40. Rev. 4/87
provisions of said Section 39K shall govern payments pursuant to
periodic estimates on which the City has made changes. The Designer
shall mark the date of receipt on the estimate.
9. .7. Failure of Payment
9. .7. .1. If the Owner fails to make payments as set forth
in Section 39K of Chapter 30, the Contractor shall be compensated as
set forth in said Section.
9. .8. Substantial Completion
9. .8. .1. When the Contractor considers that the Work, or
a designated portion thereof which is acceptable to the Owner, is
substantially complete as defined in Subparagraph 8.1.3, the Contractor
shall prepare for submission to the Designer a list of items to be
completed or corrected. The failure to include any items on such list
does not alter the responsibility of the _ Contractor to complete all
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. When the Designer on
the basis of an inspection determines that the Work or designated
portion therefor is substantially complete, he will then prepare a
Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the Date of
Substantial Completion, shall state the responsibilities of the Owner
and the Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage
to the Work, and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the
Contractor shall complete the items listed therein. Warranties
required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the Date of
Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless
otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. The
Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner
and the Contractor for their written acceptance of the responsibilities
assigned to them in such Certificate.
9. .8. .2. Upon substantial Completion of the Work or
designated portion thereof and upon application by the Contractor and
certification by the Designer, the Owner shall make payment, reflecting
adjustment in retainage, if any, for such Work or portion thereof, as
provided in the Contract Documents.
9. .9. Final Completion and Final Payment
9. .9. .1. Upon receipt of written notice that the work is
ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final
Application for Payment, the Designer will promptly make such
inspection and, when he finds the Work acceptable under the Contract
Documents and the Contract fully performed, he will promptly issue a
final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of his
knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of his observations
and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with the
terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire
balance found to be due the Contractor, and noted in said final
Certificate, is due and payable. The Designer's final Certificate for
Purch. Rev. 4/87 39
after the first day of the month following that for which the
Subcontractor performed or furnished the labor and materials for which
the Subcontractor seeks payment shall be valid even if delivered or
mailed prior to the time payment was due on a periodic estimate from
the Contractor. Thereafter the City shall proceed as provided in
subparagraph (e) , (f) , (g) , and (h) .
9. .5. .8. Pursuant to section 39F of Chapter 30 of the Laws,
the term "Subcontractor" as used in preceding Subparagraph 9.5.7 shall
mean a person who files a sub-bid and receives a Subcontract as a
result of that filed sub-bid or who is approved by the City in writing
as a person performing labor or both performing labor and furnishing
materials pursuant to a contract with the Contractor.
9. .6. Payments Withheld
9. . 6. .1. The Designer may decline to certify payment and
may withhold his Certificate in whole or in part, to the extent
necessary reasonably to protect the Owner, if in his opinion he is
unable to make representations to the Owner as provided in Subparagraph
9.4.2. If the Designer is unable to make representations to the Owner
as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.2 and to certify payment in the amount
of the Application, he will notify the Contractor as provided in
Subparagraph 9.4.1. If the Contractor and the Designer cannot agree on
a revised amount, the Designer will promptly issue a Certificate for
Payment for the amount for which he is able to make such
representations to the Owner. Subject to the provisions of
Subparagraph 9.6.3 herein below, the Designer may also decline to
certify payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or
subsequent observations, he may nullify the whole or any part of any
Certificate for Payment previously issued to such extent as may be
necessary in his opinion to protect the Owner from loss because of:
.1 defective Work not remedied
.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating
probable filing of such claims,
.3 failure of the contractor to make payments properly to
Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment,
.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for
the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum,
.5 damage to the Owner or another contractor,
. 6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed
within the Contract Time, or
.7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with
the Contract Documents.
9. .6. .2. When the above grounds in Subparagraph 9. 6.1 are
removed, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them.
9. . 6. .3. The City may make changes in any periodic estimate
submitted by the Contractor in accordance with Section 39K of Chapter
30 of the General Laws, and the payment due on said periodic estimate
shall be computed in accordance with the changes so made. The -404,
PurcH. Rev. 4/87
event prior to the 70th day after substantial completion of the
Subcontract Work, the City shall make direct payment to the
Subcontractor of the balance due under the Subcontract including any
amount due for extra labor and materials furnished to the Contractor,
less any amount (i) retained by the City as the estimated cost of
completing the incomplete or unsatisfactory items of Work, (ii)
specified in any court proceedings barring such payment, or (iii)
disputed by the Contractor in the sworn reply; provided, that the City
shall not deduct from a direct payment any amount as provided in part
(iii) if the reply is not sworn to, or for which the sworn reply does
not contain the detailed breakdown required by subparagraph (d) .
The City shall make further direct payments to the Subcontractor
forthwith after the removal of the basis for deductions from direct
payments made as provided in part (i) and (ii) of this subparagraph.
(f) The City shall forthwith deposit the amount deducted from a direct
payment as provided in part (iii) of subparagraph (e) in an interest-
bearing joint account in the names of the Contractor and the
Subcontractor in a bank in Massachusetts selected by the City or agreed
upon by the contractor and the Subcontractor and shall notify the
Contractor and the Subcontractor of the date of the deposit and the
bank receiving the deposit. The bank shall pay the amount in the
account, including accrued interest, as provided in an agreement
between the Contractor and the Subcontractor or as determined by decree
of a court of competent jurisdiction.
(g) All direct payments and all deductions from demands for direct
payments deposited in an interest-bearing account or accounts in a bank
pursuant to subparagraph (f) shall be made out of amounts payable to
the general Contractor at the time of receipt of a demand for direct
payment from a Subcontractor and out of amounts which later become
payable to the Contractor and in order of receipt of such demands from
Subcontractors. All direct payments shall discharge the obligation of
the City to the Contractor to the extent of such payment.
(h) The City shall deduct from payments to the Contractor amounts
which, together with the deposits in interest-bearing accounts pursuant
to subparagraph (f) , are sufficient to satisfy all unpaid balances of
demands for direct payment received from Subcontractors. All such
amounts shall be earmarked for such direct payments, and the
Subcontractors shall have a right to such deductions prior to any
claims against such amounts by creditors of the Contractor.
(i) If the Subcontractor does not receive payment as provided in
subparagraph (a) or if the Contractor does not submit a periodic
estimate for the value of the labor and materials performed or
furnished by the Subcontractor and the Subcontractor does not receive
payment for same when due less the deductions provided for in
subparagraph (a) , the Subcontractor may demand direct payment by
following the procedure in subparagraph (d) and the Contractor may file
a sworn reply as provided in that same subparagraph. A demand made
Purch. Rev. 4/87 37
periodic estimate, the Contractor shall pay to each Subcontractor the
amount paid for the labor performed and the materials furnished by the
Subcontractor, less any amount specified in any court proceedings
barring such payment and also less any amount claimed due from the
Subcontractor by the Contractor.
(b) Not later than the 65th day after each Subcontractor substantially
completes his Work in accordance with the plans and specifications, the
entire balance due under the subcontract less amounts retained by the
City as the estimated costs of completing the incomplete and
unsatisfactory items of Work, shall be due the Subcontractor; and the
City shall pay that amount to the Contractor. The Contractor shall
forthwith pay to the Subcontractor the full amount received from the
City less any amount specified in any court proceedings barring such
payment and also less any amount claimed due from the Subcontractor by
the Contractor. -
(c) Each payment made by the City to the Contractor pursuant to
subparagraphs (a) and (b) of this paragraph for the labor performed and
the materials furnished by a subcontractor shall be made to the
Contractor for the account of that Subcontractor; and the City shall
take reasonable steps to compel the Contractor to make each such
payment to each such Subcontractor. If the City has received a demand
for direct payment from a Subcontractor for any amount which has
already been included in a payment to the Contractor or which is to be
included in a payment to the Contractor for payment to the
Subcontractor as provided in subparagraphs (a) and (b) , the City shall
act upon the demand as provided in this section.
(d) If, within 70 days after the Subcontractor has substantially
completed the Subcontract Work, the Subcontractor has not received from
the Contractor the balance due under the Subcontract including any
amount due for extra labor and materials furnished to the Contractor,
less any amount retained by the City as the estimated costs of
completing the incomplete and unsatisfactory items of Work, the
Subcontractor may demand direct payment of that balance from the City.
The demand shall be by a sworn statement delivered to or sent by
certified mail to the City, and a copy be valid even if delivered or
mailed prior to the seventieth day after the Subcontractor has
substantially completed the Subcontract Work. Within ten days after
the Subcontractor has delivered or so mailed a copy to the Contractor,
the Contractor may reply to the demand. The reply shall be by a sworn
statement delivered to or sent by certified mail to the City and a copy
shall be delivered to or sent by certified mail to the Subcontractor at
the same time. The reply shall contain a detailed breakdown of the
balance due under the Subcontract including any amount due for extra
labor and materials furnished to the Contractor and of the amount due
for extra labor and materials furnished to the Contractor and of the
amount due for each claim made by the Contractor against the
Subcontractor.
(e) Within 15 days after receipt of the demand by the City, but in no ANN*,
Purdfi. Rev. 4/87
Payment the Owner shall make payment to the Contractor in accordance
with Section 39K of Chapter 30 of the General Laws which provides as
follows:
Within 15 days after receipt from the Contractor, at the place
designated by the awarding authority if such a place is so designated,
of a periodic estimate requesting payment of the amount due for the
preceding month, the City will make a periodic payment to the
Contractor for the Work performed during the preceding month and for
the materials not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably
stored at the site (or at some location agreed upon in writing) to
which the Contractor has title or to which a subcontractor has title
and has authorized the Contractor to transfer title to the awarding
Authority, less (1) a retention based on its estimate of the fair value
of its claims against the Contractor and less (2) a retention for
direct payments to Subcontractors based on demands for same in
accordance with the provisions of Section 39 F. and less (3) a
retention not exceeding five percent (5%) of the approved amount of the
periodic payment. After the receipt of a periodic estimate requesting
final payment and within 65 days after (a) the Contractor fully
completes the Work or substantially completes the work so that the
value of the work remaining to be done is, in the estimate of the City,
less than one percent (1%) of the original Contract price, or (b) the
Contractor substantially completes the Work and the City takes
possession for occupancy, whichever occurs first, the City shall pay
the Contractor the entire balance due on the Contract less, (1) a
retention based on its estimate of the fair value of its claims against
the Contractor and of the cost of completing the incomplete and
unsatisfactory items of Work less (2) a retention for direct payments
to Subcontractors based on demands for same in accordance with the
provisions of Section 39 F, or based on the record of payments by the
Contractor to the Subcontractors under this Contract if such record of
payment indicates that the Contractor has not paid Subcontractors as
provided in Section 39 F. If the City fails to make payment as herein
provided, there shall be added to each such payment daily interest at
the rate of three percentage points above the rediscount rate than
charged by the Federal Reserve Bank of Boston commencing on the first
day after said payment is due and continuing until the payment is
delivered or mailed to the Contractor; provided, that no interest shall
be due, in any event, on the amount due on a periodic estimate for
final payment until fifteen days after receipt of such a periodic
estimate form the Contractor, at the place designated by the City if
such a place is so designated. . The Contractor agrees to pay to each
Subcontractor a portion of any such interest paid in accordance with
the amount due each Subcontractor.
9. .5. .7. The Contractor shall make payments to filed
Subcontractors and to other Subcontractors as defined in following
Subparagraph 9.5.8 in accordance with Section 39F of Chapter 30 of the
General Laws which provides as follows:
AVW
(a) Forthwith after the Contractor receives payment on account of a
Purch. Rev. 4/87 35
constitute a representation by the Designer to the Owner, based on his
observations at the site as provided in Sub-paragraph 2.2.3 and the
data comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work has
progressed to the point indicated; that, to the best of his knowledge,
information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with
the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work for
conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to
the results of any subsequent tests required by or performed under the
Contract Documents, to minor deviations from the Contract Documents,
correctable prior to completion, and to any specific qualifications
stated in his Certificate) ; and that the contractor is entitled to
payment in the amount certified. However, by issuing a Certificate for
Payment, the Designer shall not thereby; be deemed to represent that he
has made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the
quality or quantity of the Work or that he has reviewed the
construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or
that he has made any examination to ascertain how or for what purpose
the Contractor has used the moneys previously paid on account of the
Contract Sum.
9. .5. Progress Payments
9. .5. .1. After the Designer has issued a Certificate for
Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time
provided in the Contract Documents.
9. .5. .2. The Contractor shall promptly pay each
Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the
amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's Work,
the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting the
percentage actually retained, if any, from payments to the Contractor
on account of such Subcontractor's Work. The Contractor shall, by an
appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each
Subcontractor to make payments to his Sub-subcontractors in similar
manner.
9. .5. .3. The Designer may, on request and at his
discretion, furnish to any Subcontractor, if practicable, information
regarding the percentages of completion or the amounts applied for by
the Contractor and the action taken thereon by the Designer on account
of Work done by such Subcontractor.
9. .5. .4. Neither the Owner nor the Designer shall have any
obligation to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys to any
Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law.
9. .5. .5. No Certificate for a progress payment, nor any
progress payment, nor any partial or entire use or occupancy of the
Project by the Owner, shall constitute an acceptance of any Work not in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
9. .5. .6. After the Designer has issued a Certificate for
Purc374. Rev. 4/87
hand or by registered or certified mail with return receipt an itemized
Application for Payment, supported by such data substantiating the
Contractor's right to payment as the Designer may require, and
reflecting retainage as provided in Paragraph 9.5 as supplemented.
Such Application for Payment shall be submitted on a form supplied by
the Designer. The form shall show separately:
(1) The value of Labor and materials incorporated in the Work.
(2) The value, kind, and quantity of each item of material or
equipment not incorporated in the -Work but delivered and suitably
stored at some other location agreed upon in writing.
(3) The value, kind, and quantity of each item of material or
equipment not incorporated in the Work but suitably stored at some
other location agreed upon in writing.
(4) All Change Orders approved up to the date of the Application for
Payment.
9. .3. .2. (intentionally deleted)
9. .3. .3. (intentionally deleted)
9. .3. .4. In no event may materials or equipment be deemed
Aoftl delivered and suitably stored at the site (or at some other location
agreed upon in writing) , unless the following requirements are met:
(1) The materials or equipment are ready for an actually scheduled for
prompt use, as so-called stockpiling is expressly forbidden, except as
otherwise specified or permitted by the Designer.
(2) The materials or equipment meet the requirements of the Contract
Documents and required submittals have been approved by the Designer.
(3) The Contractor can and will adequately protect the materials or
equipment until they are incorporated in the Work.
(4) The Contractor will pay storage charges and related expenses if
materials or equipment are stored at some other location agreed upon in
writing.
9. .4. Certificates For Payment
9. .4. .1. The Designer will, within seven days after the
receipts of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue a
Certificate for Payment to the Owner, with a copy to the Contractor,
for such amount as the Designer determines is properly due, or notify
the Contractor in writing his reasons for withholding a Certificate as
provided in Subparagraph 9.6.1.
9. .4. .2. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will
Purch. Rev. 4/87 33
reasonable. '
8. .3. .4. This Paragraph 8.3 does not exclude the recovery
of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the
Contract Documents.
8. .3. .5. The Contractor and the Surety of the Contractor's
performance bond shall be jointly and severally liable for, and shall
pay to the Owner the expenses for inspection of Work performed after
the time stipulated in the Owner-Contractor Agreement for Substantial
Completion. Such inspection costs shall include fees paid to the
Designer as extra services at the rate stipulated in the Contract for
Designerural Services between the Owner and the Designer, the costs of
the Project Representative at the current salary rate and any other
direct expenses due to inspection. In no case, however, shall the
total amount of inspection costs exceed an aggregate total computed at
the rate of two hundred dollars per day. The Owner may retain from
monies otherwise due the Contractor whatever sums accrue to the Owner
pursuant to this provision. The Contractor shall not be liable for
inspection costs for delay in performance as provided hereunder for any
period for which an extension of the Contract Time has been granted
pursuant to the provisions of Subparagraph 8.3.1.
9. ARTICLE 9
PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9. . 1. Contract Sum
9. .1. .1. The Contract Sum is stated in the Owner-Contract
Agreement and, including authorized adjustments thereto, is the total
amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for the performance of
the Work under the Contract Documents.
9. .2. Schedule of Values
9. .2. .1. Before the first Application for Payment, the
Contractor shall submit to the Designer a schedule of values allocated
to the various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and
supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Designer may
require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Designer, shall be
used only as a basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment.
9. .2. .2. The Schedule of Values shall contain a separate
item for each Section of these Specifications broken down in such form
as the Designer may require. Each item in the schedule of values shall
include its proper share of overhead and profit.
9. .3. Application for Payment
9. .3. .1. Once each month, on a date established at the
beginning of the Work, the Contractor shall deliver to the Designer by Agw*
PurcH. Rev. 4/87
authorized adjustments thereto.
8. .1. .2. The date of commencement of the Work is the date
established in a notice to proceed. If there is no notice to proceed,
it shall be the date of the Owner-Contractor Agreement or such other
date as may be established therein.
8. .1. .3. The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or
designated portion thereof is the Date certified by the Designer when
construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract
Documents, so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated
portion thereof for the use for which it is intended.
8. .1. .4. The term day as used in the Contract Documents
shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically designated.
8. .2. Progress and Completion
8. .2. .1. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents
are of the essence of the Contract.
8. .2. .2. The Contractor shall begin the Work on the date
of commencement as defined in Subparagraph 8.1.2. He shall carry the
Work forward expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve
Substantial Completion within the Contract Time.
8. .3. Delays and Extension of Time
8. .3. .1. If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the
progress of the Work by any act or neglect of the Owner or the
Designer, or by any employee of either, or by any separate contractor
employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor
disputes, fire unusual delay in transportation, adverse weather
conditions not reasonably anticipatable, unavoidable casualties, or any
causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by delay authorized by the
Owner pending appeal to and decision by the Administrator", or by any
other cause which the Designer determines may justify the delay, then
the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable
time as the Designer may determine.
8. .3. .2. Any claim for extension of time shall be made in
writing to the Designer not more than twenty days after the
commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be waived. In the case
of a continuing delay only one claim is necessary. The Contractor
shall provide an estimate of the probable effect of such delay on the
progress of the Work.
8. .3. .3. If no agreement is made stating the dates upon
which interpretations as provided in Subparagraph 2.2.8 shall be
furnished, then no claim for delay shall be allowed on account of
failure to furnish such interpretations until fifteen days after
written request is made for them, and not then unless such claim is
Purch. Rev. 4/87 31
examined:
(b) express an opinion as to whether management's statement of
internal accounting controls is consistent with management's evaluation
of the system of internal accounting controls; and
(c) express an opinion as to whether the statement is reasonable with
respect to transactions and assets of material amounts in the context
of the firm's overall financial picture.
7'. .10. .5. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner annually
during the term of the Contract a financial statement prepared by an
independent CPA. This statement shall be based on an audit of the
firm's records in accordance with the requirements of M.G.L. Chapter
30, Section 39R (a) (5) . The financial statement shall be accompanied
by an accountant's report in accordance with the requirements of M.G.L.
Chapter 30, Section 39R (a) (6) stating:
1. the scope of the audit made by the CPA and
2. the CPA's opinion of the financial statement as a whole and
exceptions and qualifications to that opinion or
3. The CPA's statement, with reasons, that an overall opinion cannot
be expressed.
The accountant's report shall include a signed statement by the
responsible corporate officer attesting that all material facts were
disclosed to the CPA and that the financial statement is a true and
complete statement of financial condition.
7. .10. .6. Changes in the method of record keeping which
materially affect any of the statements required by Subparagraph 7.10.3
through 7.10.5 shall be reported to the Owner. State the change, the
reason for it, and the date of the change. Include a statement from
the CPA approving or commenting on the change in conformance with
M.G.L. Chapter 30, Section 39R (b) (3) .
7. .10. .7. Subparagraph 7.10.3 through 7.10. 6 shall apply
only to filed subcontractors and general contractors whose contracts
exceed $100, 000.
8. ARTICLE 8
TIME
8. .1. Definitions
8. .1. .1. Unless otherwise provided, the Contract Time is
the period of time allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial
Completion of the Work as defined in Subparagraph 8.1.3. , including AM%
Purc'-'W. Rev. 4/87
subparagraph shall be available at the sole option of the contractor.
The hearing officer shall issue a decision no later than sixty days
following the conclusion of any hearing conducted pursuant to this
subparagraph. The hearing officer's decision shall be final and
conclusive, and shall not be set aside except in cases of fraud.
7. .9. .3. The Contractor shall proceed with the disputed
Work as directed by the Designer. Notice must be given to the Project
Representative by the Contractor's superintendent every day that
disputed Work is to be performed. Accurate records of the nature and
extent of the disputed Work and of the time spent and equipment used on
the disputed Work shall be maintained by the superintendent and
verified daily by the Project Representative.
7. .10. Record Keeping and Management Controls
7. .10. .1. The Contractor shall make and- retain for at least
six years after final payment records which reflect the transactions
and dispositions of the firm in accordance with the requirements of
M.G.L. Chapter 30, Section 39R (b) .
7. .10. .2. These records and the subcontractor's records
pertaining to this Contract shall be available for examination by the
Owner, Department, Division of Capital Planning and Operations, and
Inspector General for six years after final payment.
7. .10. .3. Prior to execution of the Contract the Contractor
shall submit a statement of management on internal accounting controls
to the Owner in conformance with M.G.L. Chapter 30, Section 39R (c) .
The system of controls must reasonably assure that:
(a) transactions are executed in accordance with management's general
and specific authorization:
(b) the transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation
of financial statements in conformity with generally accepted
accounting principles and to maintain accountability for asset:
(c) access to assets is permitted only in accordance with management's
authorization: and
(d) the recorded accountability for assets is compared with existing
assets at reasonable intervals and appropriate action was taken with
respect to any difference.
7. .10. .4 . The statement of management on internal accounting
controls must have been reviewed by an independent certified public
accountant (CPA) , and that CPA shall file a statement with the Owner in
conformance with the requirements of M.G.L. Chapter 30, Section 39R
(c) . The CPA's statements must:
(a) state that the internal accounting controls statement was
Purch. Rev. 4/87 29
delay, suspend, or curtail performance under that contract as a result '' ►
of any dispute subject to this section. Any disputed order, decision,
or action by the agency or its authorized representative shall be fully
performed or complied with pending resolution of the dispute.
(b) Within thirty days of submission of the dispute to the chief
executive official of the state agency or his/her designee, s/he shall
issue a written decision stating the reasons therefor, and shall notify
the parties of their right of appeal under this section. If the
official or his/her designee is unable to issue a decision within
thirty days, s/he shall notify ' the parties to the dispute in writing of
the reasons why a decision cannot be issued within thirty days and of
the date by which the decision shall issue. Failure to issue a
decision within the thirty-day period of within the additional time
period specified in such written notice shall be deemed to constitute
a denial of the claim and shall authorize resort to the appeal
procedure described below. The decision of the chief executive
official or his/her designee shall be final and conclusive unless an
appeal is taken as provided below.
(c) Within twenty-one calendar days of the receipt of a written
decision or of the failure to issue a decision as stated in the
preceding subparagraph, any aggrieved party may file a notice of claim
for an adjudicatory hearing with the division of hearing officers or if
the amount in controversy exceeds ten thousand dollars in lieu of
appealing the decision of the chief executive official, the aggrieved ,M#*
party may file an action directly in a court of competent jurisdiction
and shall serve copies thereof upon all other parties in the form and
manner prescribed by the rules governing the conduct of adjudicatory
proceedings of the division of hearing officers. The appeal shall be
referred to a hearing officer experienced in construction law and shall
be prosecuted in accordance with the formal rules of procedure for the
conduct of adjudicatory hearings of the division of hearing officers,
except as provided below. The hearing officer shall issue a final
decision as expeditiously as possible, but in no event more than one
hundred and twenty calendar days after conclusion of the adjudicatory
hearings, unless the decision is delayed by a request for extension of
time for filing post-hearing briefs or other submissions assented to by
all parties. Whenever, because an extension of time has been granted,
the hearing officer is unable to issue a decision within one hundred
and twenty days, s/he shall notify all parties of the reasons for the
delay and the date when the decision will issue. Failure to issue a
decision with in the one hundred and twenty-day period or within the
additional period specified in such written notice shall give the
petitioner the right to pursue any legal remedies available to him/her
without further delay.
(d) When the amount in dispute is less then ten thousand dollars, a
contractor who is party to the dispute may elect to submit the appeal
to a hearing officer experienced in construction law for expedited
hearing in accordance with the informal rules of practice and procedure
of the division of hearing officers. An expedited hearing under this A
PurcH. Rev. 4/87
Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs thereof, including
compensation for the Designer's additional services made necessary by
such failure; otherwise the Owner shall bear such costs, and an
appropriate Change Order shall be issued.
7. .7. .3. Required certificates of inspection, testing or
approval shall be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered by
him to the Designer.
7. .7. .4. If the Designer is to observe the inspections,
tests or approvals required by the Contract Documents, he will do so
promptly and, where practicable, at the source of supply.
7. .8. Interest
7. .8. .1. Payments due and unpaid under the Contract
Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate
as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at
the legal rate prevailing at the place of the Project.
7. .9. Disputes
7. .9. .1. Claims, disputes, and other matters in question
between the Contractor and the Owner arising out of, or relating to,
the Contract Documents or the breach thereof, except as provided in
A#"bl Subparagraph 2.2.11 with respect to the Designer's decisions on matters
relating to artistic effect, and except for claims which have been
waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as provided by
Subparagraph 9.9.4 and 9.9.5. shall be decided by the Designer subject
to the right of appeal to the Administrator. If the Designer fails to
render a decision within thirty calendar days after receiving written
notice of claim, either party may request a written decision from the
Administrator.
7. .9. .2. Appeal of an Designer's decision must be made
directly to the Department by certified mail (copy to the Designer and
Owner) within twenty-one calendar days after the date on which the
party making the appeal receives the Designer's written decision.
Failure to appeal within this period will result in the Designer's
decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and the Contractor.
Appeal procedures shall be in conformance with M.G.L. Chapter 30,
Section 39Q which provides as follows:
(a) Dispute regarding changes in and interpretations of the terms or
scope of the Contract and denials of or failures to act upon claims for
payment for extra work or materials shall be resolved according to the
following procedures, which shall constitute the exclusive method for
resolving such disputes. written notice of the matter in dispute shall
be submitted promptly by the claimant to the chief executive official
of the state agency which awarded the contract or his/her designee. No
person or business entity having a contract with a state agency shall
Purch. Rev. 4/87 27
or entity or to an officer of the corporation for whom it was intended, "" ►
or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last
business address known to him who gives the notice.
7 . .4 . Claims For Damages
7. .4. .1. Should either party to the Contract suffer injury
or damage to person or property because of any act or omission of the
other party or of any of his employees, Designers or others for whose
acts he is legally liable, claim shall be made in writing to such other
party within a reasonable time after the first observance of such
injury or damage.
7. .5. Performance Bond and Labor And Material Payment Bond
7. .5. .1. The Owner shall have the right to require the
Contractor to furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the
Contract and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder if and
as required in the Bidding Documents or in the Contract Documents.
7. .6. Rights And Remedies
7. .6. .1. The duties and obligations imposed by the Contract
Documents and the rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in
addition to and not a limitation of any duties, obligations, rights and
remedies otherwise imposed or available by law.
7. . 6. .2. No action or failure to act by the Owner, Designer
or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of any right or duty afforded
any of them under the Contract, nor shall any such action or failure to
act constitute an approval of or acquiescence in any breach thereunder,
except as may be specifically agreed in writing.
7. .7. Tests
7. .7. .1. If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances,
rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having
jurisdiction require any portion of the Work to be inspected, tested,
or approved, the Contractor shall give the Designer timely notice of
its readiness so the Designer may observe such inspection, testing or
approval. The Contractor shall bear all costs of such inspections,
tests or approvals conducted by public authorities. Unless otherwise
provided, the Owner shall bear all costs of other inspections, tests or
approvals.
7. .7. .2. If the Designer determines that any Work requires
special inspection, testing or approval which Subparagraph 7.7.1 does
not include, he will, upon written authorization from the Owner,
instruct the Contractor to order such special inspection, testing or
approval, and the Contractor shall give notice as provided in
Subparagraph 7.7.1. If such special inspection or testing reveals a
failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract A
Purc26. Rev. 4/87
6. .2. .5. Should the Contractor wrongfully cause damage to
the work or property of any separate contractor, the Contractor shall
upon due notice promptly attempt to settle with such other contractor
by agreement, or otherwise to resolve the dispute. If such separate
contractor sues the Owner on account of any damage alleged to have been
caused by the Contractor, the Owner shall notify the Contractor who
shall defend such proceedings at the Owner's expense, and if any
judgment or award against the Owner arises therefrom the Contractor
shall pay or satisfy it and shall reimburse the Owner for all
attorney's fees and court which the Owner has incurred.
6. .2. .6. Should the Contractor sustain damage through an
act or omission of a subcontractor of any such separate contractor, the
Contractor shall have no claim against the Owner for such damage.
6. .2. .7. The settlement of any claim set forth in the
preceding subparagraphs 6.2.5 and 6.2.6 shall in no case be a cause for
delays in the Work.
6. .3. Owner's Right to Clean Up
6. .3. .1. If a dispute arises between the Contractor and
separate contractors as to their responsibility for cleaning up as
required by Paragraph 4.15, the Owner may clean up and charge the cost
thereof to the contractors responsible therefor as the Designer shall
determine to be just.
7. ARTICLE 7
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
7 . .1. Governing Law
7. .1. .1. The Contract shall be governed by the law of the
place where the Project is located.
7. .2. Successors and Assigns
7. .2. .1. The Owner and the Contractor each binds himself,
his partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the
other party hereto and to the partners, successors, assigns and legal
representatives of such other party in respect to all covenants,
agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.
Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract or sublet it as
a whole without the written consent of the other, nor shall the
Contractor assign any moneys due or to become due to him hereunder,
without the previous written consent of the Owner.
7. .3. Written Notice
7. .3. .1. Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly
served if delivered in person to the individual or member of the firm
Purch. Rev. 4/87 25
Subcontract in accordance with M.G.L. Chapter 149, Section 44F.
6. ARTICLE 6
WORK BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTOR
6. .1. Owner's Right to Perform Work and To Award Separate
Contracts
6. .1. .1. The Owner reserves the right to perform work
related to the Project with his own forces, and to award separate
contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other
work on the site under these or similar Conditions of the Contract. If
the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because
of such action by the Owner, he shall make such claim as provided
elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
6. .1. .2. When separate contracts are awarded for different
portions of the Project or other work on the site, the term Contractor
in the contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who
executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement.
6. .1. .3. The Owner will provide for the coordination of the
work of his own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of
the Contractor, who shall cooperate therewith as provided in Paragraph
6.2.
6. .2. Mutual Responsibility
6. .2. .1. The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate
contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of
their materials, and equipment and the execution of their work, and
shall connect and coordinate his Work with theirs as required by the
Contract Documents.
6. .2. .2. If any part of the Contractor's Work depends for
proper execution or results upon the work of the Owner or any separate
contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with the Work,
promptly report to the Designer any apparent discrepancies or defects
in such other work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution
and results, Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute
an acceptance of the Owner's or separate contractor's work as fit and
proper to receive his Work, except as to defects which may subsequently
become apparent in such work by others.
6. .2. .3. Any costs cause by defective or ill-timed work
shall be borne by the party responsible therefor.
6. .2. .4. Should the Contractor wrongfully cause damage to
the work or property of the Owner, or to other work on the site, the
contractor shall promptly remedy such damage as provided in
Subparagraph 10.2.5. A"k,
PurcN. Rev. 4/87
5. .2. .3. If the Owner or the Designer has reasonable
objection to any such proposed person or entity, the Contractor shall
submit a substitute to whom the Owner or the Designer has no reasonable
objection, and the Contract Sum shall be increased or decreased by the
difference in cost occasioned by such substitution and an appropriate
Change Order shall be issued; however, no increase in the Contract Sum
shall be allowed for any such substitution unless the Contractor has
acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required by
Subparagraph 5.2.1.
5. .2. .4. The Contractor shall make no substitution for any
Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or
Designer makes reasonable objection to such substitution.
5. .2. .5. Paragraphs 5.2.1. through 5.2.4 apply to any sub-
trade included in Item 1 of the Form for General Bid.
5. .2. .6. The award of subcontracts for any sub-trade
included in Item 2 of the Form for General Bid shall be in accordance
with Chapter 149, Sections 44A to 44H, M.G.L.
5. .3. Subcontractural Relations
5. .3. .1. By an appropriate agreement, written where legally
required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor,
, "*• to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be
bound to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract Documents, and to
assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities
which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and
the Designer. Said agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of
the Owner and the Designer under the Contract Documents with respect to
the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that the
subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow
to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the
Contractor-Subcontractor agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies
and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by these
Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor
shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with
his Subsubcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each
proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the Subcontract,
copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be
bound by this Paragraph 5.3, and identify to the Subcontractor any
terms and conditions of the . proposed Subcontract which may be at
variance with the Contract Documents. Each Subcontractor shall
similarly make copies of such documents available to his Sub-
subcontractors.
5. .3. .2. Paragraph 5.3.1 applies to Subcontractors for sub-
trades included in Item 1 of the Form for General Bid.
5. .3. .3. The Contractor and each Subcontractor for a sub-
trade listed in Item 2 of the form for General Bid shall execute a
Purch. Rev. 4/87 23
or specifications, or (2) the giving of or the failure to give "AMI'k,
directions or instructions by the Designer, his Designers or employees
provided such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of the
injury or damage.
4. .19. The procedures, forms, and practices which will be
employed on this project are generally described in a publication
entitled "Construction Handbook - A Guide for State-Aided Housing
Development and Modernization, " written by the Department and available
through the Department, and will be explained at a pre-construction
conference.
5. ARTICLE 5
SUBCONTRACTORS
5. .1. Definition
5. .1. .1. A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a
direct contract with the Contractor to perform any of the Work at the
site. The term Subcontractor is referred to throughout the Contract
Documents as if singular in number and masculine in gender and means a
Subcontractor or his authorized representative. The term Subcontractor
does not include any separate contractor or his subcontractors.
5. .1. .2. A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has
a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform any of
the Work at the site. The term Sub-subcontractor is referred to
throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and
masculine in gender and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized
representative thereof.
5. .2. Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts For
Portions of the Work
5. .2. .1. Unless otherwise required by the Contract
Documents or the Bidding Documents, the Contractor, as soon as
practicable after the award of the Contract, shall furnish to the Owner
and the Designer in writing the names of the persons or entities
(including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated
to a special design) proposed for each of the principal portions of the
Work. The Designer will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing
stating whether or not the Owner or the Designer, after due
investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or
entity. Failure of the Owner or Designer to reply promptly shall
constitute notice of no reasonable objection.
5. .2. .2. The Contractor shall not contract with any such
proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or the Designer has made
reasonable objection under the provisions of Subparagraph 5.2.1. The
Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom he has
a reasonable objection.
Purim. Rev. 4/87
4. .16. .2. Any such communications shall be in writing,
addressed to the City and be considered given (1) if delivered to the
office of the Designer: or (2) if in a sealed, postage prepaid
envelope, addressed to the City c/o the Designer, deposited in the
United State mail: or (3) if delivered prepaid to telegraph office for
transmission to the Designer's office.
4. .17. Royalties and Patents
4. .17. .1. The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license
fees. He • shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any
patent rights and shall save the Owner harmless from loss on account
thereof, except that the Owner shall be responsible for all such loss
when a particular design, process or the product of a particular
manufacturer or manufacturers is specified, but if the Contractor has
reason to believe that the design, process or product specified is an
infringement of a patent, he shall be responsible for such loss unless
he promptly gives such information to the Designer.
4. .18. Indemnification
4. .18. .1. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the
Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Designer
and their Designers and employees from and against all claims, damages,
losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees,
arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided
that any such claim, damage, loss or expense (1) is attributable to
bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or
destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) including
the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (2) is caused in whole or in
part by any negligent act or omission of the Contractor, any
Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or
anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether
or not it is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such
obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or otherwise
reduce any other right or obligation of indemnity which would otherwise
exist as to any party or person described in this Paragraph 4.18.
4. .18. .2. In any and all claims against the Owner or the
Designer or any of their Designers or employees by any employee of the
Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed
by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the
indemnification obligation under this Paragraph 4.18 shall not be
limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages,
compensation or benefits payable by or or for the Contractor or any
Subcontractor under worker's or workmen's compensation acts, disability
benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.
4. .18. .3. The obligations of the Contractor under this
Paragraph 4.18 shall not extend to the liability of the Designer, his
Designers or employees arising out of (1) the preparation or approval
of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, change orders, designs
Purch. Rev. 4/87 21
4. .12. .7. The Contractor shall direct specific attention,
in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples, to
revisions other than those requested by the Designer on previous
submittals.
4. .12. .8. No portion of the Work requiring submission of a
Shop Drawing, Product Data or Sample shall be commenced until the
submittal has been approved by the Designer as provided in Subparagraph
2.2.14. All such portions of the Work shall be in accordance with
approved submittals.
4. .13. Use of Site
4. .13. .1. The Contractor shall confine operations at the
site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract
Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with any
materials or equipment.
4. .14. Cutting and Patching of Work
4. .14. .1. The Contractor shall be responsible for all
cutting, fitting or patching that may be required to complete the Work
or to make its several parts fit together properly.
4. .14 . .2. The Contractor shall not damage or endanger any
portion of the Work or the work of the Owner or any separate
contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering any work, or by
excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter the work
of the Owner or any separate contractor except with the written consent
of the Owner and of such separate contractor. The Contractor shall not
unreasonably withhold from the Owner or any separate contractor his
consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work.
4. .15. Cleaning Up
4. .15. .1. The Contractor at all times shall keep the
premises free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by
his operations. At the completion of the Work he shall remove all his
waste materials and rubbish from and about the Project as well as all
his tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials.
4. .15. .2. If the Contractor fails to clean up at the
completion of the Work, the Owner may do so as provided in Paragraph
3.4 and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor.
4. .16. Communications
4. .16. .1. The Contractor shall forward all communications
to the Owner through the Designer except however a request for an
appeal or notification of Work under protest must be sent to the
Administrator, copy to Owner and Designer, by certified mail, return
receipt requested.
PurcH. Rev. 4/87
the Contractor's field office and be brought up to date each month to
show the actual progress of the Work.
4. .11. Documents and Samples at the Site
4. .11. .1. The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the
Owner one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change
Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to
record all changes made during construction, and approved Shop
Drawings, Product Data and Samples. These shall be available to the
Designer and shall be delivered to him for the Owner upon completion of
the Work.
4. .12. Shop Drawings Product Data and Samples
4. .12. .1. Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules
and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or any
Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or Distributor to illustrate some
portion of the Work.
4. .12. .2. Product Data are illustrations, standard
schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and
other information furnished by the contractor to illustrate a material,
product or system for some portion of the Work.
4. .12. .3. Samples are physical examples which illustrate
materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which
the Work will be judged.
4. .12. .4. The Contractor shall review, approve and submit,
with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in
the Work or in the work of the Owner or any separate contractor, all
Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples required by the Contract
Documents.
4 . .12. .5. By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product
Data and Samples, the Contractor represents that he has determined and
verified all materials, field measurements and field construction
criteria related thereto, or will do so, and that he has checked and
coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the
requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents.
4. .12. .6. The Contractor shall not be relieved of
responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the Contract
Documents by the Designer's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data or
Samples under Subparagraph 2.2.14 unless the Contractor has
specifically informed the Designer in writing of such deviation at the
time of submission and the Designer has given written approval to the
specific deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved from
responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings, Product
Data or Samples by the Designer's approval thereof.
Purch. Rev. 4/87 19
inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion of the As
Work, which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and
which are legally required at the time the bids are received.
4. .7. .2. The Contractor shall give all notices and comply
with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any
public authority bearing on the performance of the Work.
4. .7. .3. It is not the responsibility of the Contractor to
make certain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with
applicable laws, statutes, building codes and regulations. If the
Contractor observes that any of the Contract Documents are at variance
therewith in any respect, he shall promptly notify the Designer in
writing, and any necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate
Modification.
4. .7. .4. If the Contractor performs any Work knowing it to
be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and
without such notice to the Designer, he shall assume full
responsibility therefor and shall bear all costs attributable thereto.
4. .8. Allowances (intentionally deleted)
4. . 9. Superintendent
4. . 9. .1. The Contractor shall employ a competent
superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at
the Project site during the progress of the Work. The superintendent
shall represent the Contractor and all communications given to the
superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.
Important communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other
communications shall be so
confirmed on written request in each case.
4. .10. Progress Schedule
4. .10. .1. The Contractor, immediately after being awarded
the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Designer's
information an estimated progress schedule for the Work. The progress
schedule shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required
by the Contract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and
practicable execution of the Work.
4. .10. .2. The progress schedule shall show by bar graph or
critical path method, as acceptable to the Designer, in sufficient
detail, clearly the interrelationships between the various construction
operations and the percentage of completion and the dollar value on the
first day of each month for the Work in each Section of the
Specifications and also for the entire work. The graph shall also show
the date that the Work in each Section commenced.
4. .10. .3. A copy of the progress schedule shall be kept in ..
Purdlih Rev. 4/87
Upon receipt of such written notice, the Designer shall investigate
whether the item in question shall be considered equal to the item
named or described in the Contract Documents. Upon conclusion of the
investigation, the Designer shall, in writing, promptly advise the
Contractor that the item in question is, or is not, considered the
equal of the item named or described as aforesaid, and that said item
may, or may not, be furnished on the Work accordingly. Such notice
must have the concurrence of the Department to be valid.
In no case may an item be furnished on the Work other than the item
named or described, unless the Designer shall -consider the item equal
to the item so named or described, as provided by law.
4. .4. .4 . The equality of items offered as "equal" to the
items named or described shall be proved to the satisfaction of the
Designer at the expense of the Contractor or Subcontractor submitting
the substitution.
4. .4. .5. The Contractor or Subcontractor, as the case may
be, shall assume full responsibility for the prior performance of any
item submitted as "equal" to the specific or specifics named and assume
the costs of any changes in his own Work or in the Work of other trades
which may be due to such substitution.
4. .5. Warranty
4. .5. .1. The Contractor warrants to the Owner and the
Designer that all materials and equipment furnished under this Contract
will be new unless otherwise specified, and that all Work will be of
good quality, free from faults and defects and in conformance with the
Contract Documents. All Work not conforming to these requirements,
including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be
considered defective. If required by the Designer, the Contractor
shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of
materials and equipment. This warranty is not limited by the
provisions of Paragraph 13.2.
4. .6. Taxes
4. .6. .1. The Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use
and other similar taxes for the Work or portions thereof provided by
the Contractor which are legally enacted at the time bids are received,
whether or not yet effective.
4. .6. .2. The Owner is exempt from payment of the
Commonwealth of Massachusetts Sales Tax.
4. .7. Permits Fees and Notices
4. .7. .1. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit
and for all other permits and governmental fees, licenses and
Purch. Rev. 4/87 17
Sundays, or Massachusetts holidays he shall allow ample time to enable
satisfactory arrangements to be made for inspecting work in progress
and shall bear all cost with respect thereto. The Owner shall bill the
Contractor directly for such costs.
Work done outside of regular working hours without the consent or
knowledge of the Designer shall be subject to additional inspection and
testing directed by the Designer. The cost of this testing shall be
paid by the Contractor whether the Work is found to be acceptable or
not.
4. .4. Labor and Materials
4. .4. .1. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor,
materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery,
water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and
services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work,
whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be
incorporated in the Work.
4. .4. .2. The Contractor shall at all times enforce strict
discipline and good order among his employees and shall not employ on
the Work any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the task assigned to
him.
4. .4. .3. Except where otherwise specifically provided to the
contrary, the words "or equal" are hereby inserted immediately
following the naming or describing of each article, assembly, system,
or any component part thereof, in any of the Contract Documents.
In accordance with Section 39M of Chapter 30 of the General Laws "an
item shall be considered equal to the item so named or described if (1)
it is at least equal in quality, durability, appearance, strength, and
design, (2) it will perform at least equally the function imposed by
the general design for the public work being contracted for or the
material being purchased, and (3) it conforms substantially, even with
deviations, to the detailed requirements for the item in the said
specifications" .
However, the Contractor and the Subcontractors are required to submit
to the Designer for consideration as to its equality, a written notice
containing the name and full particulars pertaining to any items other
than the specific or specifics named or described in the Contract
Documents. Such submittal shall in no event be made later than 120
calendar days prior to the incorporation of the item into the Work,
except in any case in which (1) the period of time specified in the
Contract Documents for Substantial completion of the Work is less than
120 calendar days form the time of execution of the Contract. The
aforesaid written notice shall be submitted to the Designer immediately
following the execution of the Contract.
A%
Purd1f. Rev. 4/87
Documents as if singular in number and masculine in gender. The term
Contractor means the Contractor or his authorized representative.
4 . .2. Review of Contract Documents
4. .2. .1. The Contractor shall carefully study and compare
the Contract Documents and shall at once report to the Designer any
error, inconsistency or omission he may discover. The Contractor shall
not be liable to the Owner or the Designer for any damage resulting
from any such errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract
Documents. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work at any
time without Contract Documents or, where required, approved Shop
Drawings, Product Data or Samples for such portion of the Work.
4. .2. .2. The Contractor shall compare all grades, lines,
levels, and dimensions shown on the Drawings with actual site
conditions, and before commencing work he shall promptly report to, and
await for the reply from the Designer, any inconsistencies he may
discover. The Designer shall reply within five working days.
4. .3. Supervision and Construction Procedures
4. .3. .1. The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work,
using his best skill and attention. To this end, he shall employ a
superintendent who shall be on the site all times work is in progress.
He shall be solely responsible for all construction means, methods,
techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions
of the Work under the Contract.
4 . .3. .2. The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner
for the acts and omissions of his employees, Subcontractors and their
Designers and employees, and other persons performing any of the Work
under a contract with the Contractor.
4. .3. .3. The Contractor shall not be relieved from his
obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents either by the activities or duties of the Designer in his
administration of the Contract, or by inspections, tests or approvals
required or performed under Paragraph 7.7 by persons other than the
Contractor.
4. .3. .4. The Contractor, at his own expense, shall do all
engineering required for establishing grades, lines, levels,
dimensions, layouts, and reference points for all trades; shall be
responsible for maintaining bench marks and other survey marks; and
shall replace as directed any bench marks or survey marks which have
been disturbed or destroyed.
4 . .3. .5. Unless otherwise required under the Contract
Documents, or directed in writing by the Designer, all Work shall be
done during regular working hours. However, if the Contractor desires
to carry on the Work outside of regular working hours or Saturdays,
Purch. Rev. 4/87 15
as the Work in connection therewith is substantially completed,
provided such occupancy and use do not unduly interfere with the
Contractor's operations.
3. .5. .2. The Designer will, prior to any such occupancy and
use, give written notice to the Contractor, indicating the areas
intended to be occupied and used, and the intended commencement date of
such occupancy and use. Occupancy and use shall not commence prior to
a time mutually agreed to by the Owner and the Contractor.
3. .5. .3. ' Upon receipt of such notice of intent, the
Contractor shall promptly secure and submit to the Designer endorsement
from the insurance carrier and written consent from the surety,
permitting occupancy and use of the Work, or any designated portion
thereof, by the Owner prior to Substantial Completion of the entire
Project. The Contractor shall be permitted to cancel his building risk
insurance for building occupied by the Owner.
3. .5. .4. Partial occupancy by the Owner shall not constitute
an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents nor
relieve the Contractor from the obligation of performing any Work
required by the Contract but not completed at the time of occupancy.
Before such occupancy, the Designer will give the Contractor a list of
items to be completed prior to Final Completion occurring in the areas
to be occupied.
3. .5. .5. The Contractor shall be relieved of all maintenance
costs of the portion of the Project occupied under this agreement.
3. .5. .6. The Contractor shall not be responsible for wear
and tear or damage resulting solely from such occupancy.
3. .5. .7. The Contract Sum will be adjusted by mutually
acceptable arrangements between the Owner and the Contractor with
respect to heat, electricity, and water furnished by the Contractor to
the portion of the Work so occupied.
3. .5. .8. When any portion of the building is in condition
to receive fittings, appliances, furniture or other property furnished,
or furnished and installed, by the Owner under separate contracts, the
Contractor shall allow the Owner to bring such items into the building
and shall provide all reasonable facilities and protection therefor.
4. ARTICLE 4
CONTRACTOR
4. . 1. Definition
4. .1. .1. The "Contractor" sometimes referred to as the
"General Contractor", is the person or entity identified as such in the
Owner-Contractor Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract
PurdM. Rev. 4/87
3. .3. .2. Pursuant to Chapter 30 of the General Laws, the
following provisions (a) and (b) of Section 39 0 are included herein in
their entirety:
(a) The Awarding Authority may order the General Contractor in
writing to suspend, delay, or interrupt all or any part of the Work for
such period of time as it may determine to be appropriate for the
convenience of the Awarding Authority; provided, however, that if there
is a suspension, delay or interruption for fifteen days or more due to
a failure of the Awarding Authority to act within the time specified in
this contract, the Awarding Authority shall make an adjustment in the
Contract price for any increase in the cost of performance of this
Contract, but shall not include any profit to the General Contractor on
such increase; and provided further, that the Awarding Authority shall
not make any adjustment in the Contract Price under this provision for
any suspension, delays, interruption or failure to act to the extent
that such is due to any cause for which this Contract provides for an
equitable adjustment of the Contract Price under any other provisions.
(b) The general contractor must submit the amount of a claim
under provision (a) to the awarding authority in writing as soon as
practicable after the end of the suspension, delay, interruption or
failure to act and, in any event, not later than the date of final
payment under this contract and, except for costs due to a suspension
order, the awarding authority shall not approve any costs in the claim
incurred more than twenty days before the general contractor notified
the awarding authority in writing of the act or failure to act involved
in the claim.
3. .4. Owner's Right To Carry Out the Work
3. .4. .1. If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out
the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within
seven days after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence
and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and
promptness, the Owner may, after seven days following receipt by the
Contractor of an additional written notice and without prejudice to any
other remedy he may have, make good such deficiencies. In such case an
appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from the payments
then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such
deficiencies, including compensation for the Designer's additional
services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such
action by the Owner and the amount charged to the Contractor are both
subject to the prior approval of the Designer. If the payments then or
thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount,
the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.
3. .5. Partial Occupancy
3. .5. .1. Prior to the date of Substantial Completion of the
entire Project stipulated in the agreement, the Owner shall have the
right, from time to time, to occupy and use any portion of the Project
Purch. Rev. 4/87 13
3. .2. .5. The Owner will furnish to the Contractor, free of
charge, all copies of Contract Documents reasonably necessary for the
execution of the Work, including one set for record purposes. In
addition, the Owner, through the Designer, will furnish to the
Contractor a reproducible transparency and one black line print of
details and clarification drawings issued after the Contract has been
awarded. The Contractor, at his own expense, shall provide and
distribute such number of prints of these transparencies as required
for his own and his Subcontractors' use.
3. .2. .6. The Owner shall 'forward all instructions to the
Contractor through the Designer. Communications shall be in writing
and be considered given if delivered at the office of the Contractor;
or if in a sealed, postage-prepaid envelope addressed to the
Contractor's office and deposited in the United States mail; or if
delivered prepaid to a telegraph office for transmission to the
Contractor's office.
3. .2. .7. The foregoing are in addition to other duties and
responsibilities of the Owner enumerated herein and especially those in
respect to Work by Owner or by Separate Contractors, Payments and
Completion, and insurance in Articles 6, 9 and 11 respectively.
3. .2. .8. Pursuant to Chapter 30 of the General Laws, the
following Section 39 P is included herein in its entirety.
Every contract subject to Section 39 M of this Chapter or Section 44 A AMIN
of Chapter 149 which requires the City, any official, its Designer or
engineer to make a decision on interpretation of the specifications,
approval of equipment, material or any other approval, or progress of
the work, shall require that the decision be made promptly and, in any
event, no later than thirty days after the written submission for
decision: but if such decision requires extended investigation and
study, the awarding authority, the official, Designer or engineer
shall, within thirty days after the receipt of the submission, give the
party making the submission written notice of the reasons why the
decision cannot be made within the thirty-day period and the date by
which the decision will be made.
3. .3. Owner's Right To Stop The Work
3. .3. .1. If the Contractor fails to correct defective Work
as required by Paragraph 13.2 or persistently fails to carry out the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner, by a written
order signed personally or by an Designer specifically so empowered by
the Owner in writing, may order the Contractor to stop the Work, or any
portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated;
however, this right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise
to any duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the
benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the
extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3.
low.
Purd12. Rev. 4/87
(1) Approval, substitutions, and final selection of Sub- Bidders
pursuant to M.G.L. Section 44F of Chapter 149.
(2) Change Orders, whether or not they affect a change in the
Contract Sum or in the Contract Time.
(3) Written orders, notices, and approvals given by the Owner
pursuant to the Contract Documents or pursuant to any Laws applicable
to this Contract.
(4) Stop Work order.
(5) Certificate of Substantial Completion.
(6) Final payment.
(7) Termination of Contract.
3. .1. .8. In any instance needing clarification as to whose
signature is required, the Contractor shall seek clarification in
writing from the Designer.
3. .1. .9. Work undertaken by the Contractor or a
Subcontractor at the Owner's or any other person's order without the
Administrator's countersignature prior to the start of such work shall
be considered unauthorized work shall not be considered cause for any
extra payment on account of the Contract, and the Contractor or
Subcontractor shall be responsible for performing, at their own expense
any corrective measures required by the Administrator.
3. .2. Information and Services Required of the Owner
3. .2. .1. The Owner shall, at the request of the Contractor,
at the time of execution of the Owner-Contractor Agreement, furnish to
the Contractor reasonable evidence that he has made financial
arrangements to fulfill his obligations under the Contract. Unless
such reasonable evidence is furnished, the Contractor is not required
to execute the Owner-Contractor Agreement or to commence the Work.
3. .2. .2. The Owner shall furnish all surveys describing the
physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for
the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site.
3. .2. .3. Except as provided in Subparagraph 4.7.1, the Owner
shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments
and charges required for the construction, use or occupancy of
permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities.
3. .2. .4. Information or services under the Owner's control
shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness to avoid
delay in the orderly progress of the Work.
Purch. Rev. 4/87 11
2. .2. .19. In case of the termination of the employment of
the Designer, the Owner shall appoint an Designer whose status under
the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Designer.
3. ARTICLE 3
OWNER
3. .1. Definition
3. .1. .1. The term "Owner", sometimes also referred to as the
"Awarding Authority" or "Authority" means the City of Northampton
identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement, a public body, politic
and corporate, organized and existing under the laws of the
Commonwealth of Massachusetts. No member of the City shall in any way,
directly or indirectly be personally liable under any of the provisions
of this Contract.
3. .1. .2. The term "Administrator" means the Designer as
defined in Article 2.0.
3. .1. .3. The term "Construction Advisor" means the Designer
as defined in Article 2.0.
""ok
3. .1. .4. The City and its authorized representatives and
Designers shall at all times have access to, and be permitted to
observe and review all Work, materials, payrolls, records of personnel,
conditions of employment, invoices of materials, and other relevant
data and records.
3. .1. .5. All communications, except for protests or
disputes, of the Contractor to the Department and its representatives
and Designers must be forwarded through the Designer. They shall be in
writing, addressed to the Department and be considered given if
delivered to the office of Designer either by hand or if in a sealed,
postage prepaid envelope, addressed to the Department c/o the Designer:
or if delivered prepaid to a telegraph office for transmission to the
Designer's office.
3. . 1. . 6. Items requiring the Administrator's
countersignature as per sub-paragraph 3.1.7 shall be valid only with
the signature of the Administrator or with the signature of those
designated to act in his/her stead. The Construction Advisor's
signature is not sufficient on items requiring the Administrator's
signature.
3. . 1 . .7 . Items requiring the Administrator' s
countersignature to be valid shall include but not be limited to the
following:
Purdt0. Rev. 4/87
Contract Documents.
2. .2. .12. The Designer's decision shall be subject to the
Contractor's right of appeal to the Administrator, as set forth in
Subparagraph 7.9.
2. .2. .13. The Designer will have authority to reject Work
which does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever, in his
opinion, he considers it necessary or advisable for the implementation
of the intent of the Contract Documents, he will have authority to
require special inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with
Subparagraph 7.7.2 whether or not such Work be then fabricated,
installed or completed. However, neither the Designer's authority to
act under this Subparagraph 2.2.13, nor any decision made by him in
good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority, shall
give rise to any duty or responsibility of the Designer to the
Contractor, any Subcontractor, any of their Designers or employees, or
any other person performing any of the Work.
2. .2. .14. The Designer will review and approve or take other
appropriate action upon Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings,
Product Data and Samples, but only for conformance with the design
concept of the Work and with the information given in the Contract
Documents. Such action shall be taken with reasonable promptness so as
to cause no delay. The Designer's approval of a specific item shall
not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component.
2. .2. .15. The Designer will prepare Change Orders in
accordance with Article 12, and will have authority to order minor
changes in the Work as provided in Subparagraph 12.4.1.
2. .2. .16. The Designer will conduct inspections to determine
the dates of Substantial Completion and final completion, will receive
and forward to the Owner for the Owner's review written warranties and
related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the
Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon
compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 9.9.
2. .2. .17. If the Owner and Designer agree, the Designer will
provide one or more Project Representatives to assist the Designer in
carrying out his responsibilities at the site. The duties,
responsibilities and limitations of authority of any such Project
Representative shall be as explained by the Designer at a pre-
construction meeting.
2. .2. .18. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of
authority of the Designer as the Owner's representative during
construction as set forth in the Contract Documents will not be
00„ modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, the
Contractor and the Designer.
Purch. Rev. 4/87 9
quantity of the Work. On the basis of his on-site observations as an
Designer, he will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the work,
and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies
in the Work of the Contractor.
2. .2. .4. The Designer will not be responsible for and will
not have control or charge of construction means, methods, techniques,
sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in
connection with the Work, and he will not be responsible for the
Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents. The Designer will not be responsible for or have
control or charge over the acts or omissions of the Contractor,
Subcontractors, or any of their Designers or employees, or any other
persons performing any of the Work.
2. .2. .5. The Designer shall at all times have access to the
Work wherever it is in preparation and progress. The Contractor shall
provide facilities for such access so the Designer may perform his
functions under the Contract Documents.
2. .2. .6. Based on the Designers observations and an
evaluation of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Designer
will determine the amounts owing to the Contractor and will issue
Certificates for Payment in such amounts, as provided in Paragraph 9.4.
2. .2. .7. The Designer will be the interpreter of the
requirements of the Contract Documents and the judge of the performance
thereunder by both the Owner and Contractor.
2. .2. .8. The Designer will render interpretations necessary
for the proper execution or progress of the Work, with reasonable
promptness and within thirty (30) days of request for interpretation,
in accordance with Subparagraph 3.2.8. Either party to the Contract
may make written request to the Designer for such interpretations.
2. .2. . 9. Claims, disputes and other matters in question
between the Contractor and the Owner relating to the execution or
progress of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents
shall be referred initially to the Designer for decision which will
render in writing within thirty (30) days.
2. .2. .10. All interpretations and decisions of the Designer
shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from
the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of
drawings. In his capacity as interpreter and judge, he will endeavor
to secure faithful performance by both the Owner and the Contractor,
will not show partiality to either, and will not be liable for the
result of any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such
capacity.
2. .2. .11. The Designer's decisions in matters relating to
artistic effect will be final if consistent with the intent of the
Purdh. Rev. 4/87
shall mean "approved by (acceptable or satisfactory to) the Designer".
(5) Necessary, responsible, proper, correct, and similar
words shall mean "necessary (reasonable, proper, or correct) in the
judgment of the Designer."
1. .2. .8. Words in the singular shall also mean and include
the plural, wherever the context so indicates, and words in the plural
shall mean the singular, wherever the context so indicates.
1. .3. Ownership and Use of Documents
1. .3. .1. All Drawings, Specifications and copies thereof
furnished by the Designer are and shall remain the property of the
City. They are to be used only with respect to his project and are not
to be used any other project. With the exception of one contract set
for each party to the Contract, such documents are to be returned or
suitably accounted for to the City on request at the completion of the
Work. Submission or distribution to meet official regulatory
requirements or for other purposes in connection with the Project is
not to be construed as publication in derogation of the City's rights.
2. ARTICLE 2
' Designer
2. .1. Definition
2. .1. .1. The duly authorized representative of the Owner
that is responsible for the satisfactory completion of the project.
2. .2. Administration of the Contract
2. .2. .1. The Designer will provide administration of the
Contract as hereinafter described.
2. .2. .2. The Designer will be the Owner's representative
during construction and until final payment is due. The Designer will
advise and consult with the Owner. The Owner's instructions to the
Contractor shall be forwarded through the Designer. The Designer will
have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent
provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified by
written instrument in accordance with Subparagraph 2.2.18.
2. .2. .3. The Designer will visit the site at intervals
appropriate to the stage of construction to familiarize himself
generally with the progress and quality of the Work and to determine
in general if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract
Documents. However, the Designer will not be required to make
exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or
Purch. Rev. 4/87 7
represents that he has visited the site, familiarized himself with the
local conditions under which the work is to be performed, and
correlated his observations with the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1. .2. .3. The intent of the Contract Documents is to include
all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the
Work. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required
by any one shall be as binding as if required by all. Work not covered
in the Contract Documents will not be required unless it is consistent
therewith and is reasonably inferable therefrom as being necessary to
produce the intended results. Words and abbreviations which have well-
known technical or trade meanings are used in the Contract Documents in
accordance with such recognized meanings. In case of inconsistent
requirements in the Contract Documents the requirements for the greater
quantity or higher quality shall take precedence and shall be the
Contract requirement.
1. .2. .4. The organization of the specifications into
divisions, sections and articles, and the arrangement of Drawings shall
not control the Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or
in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade.
1. .2. .5. Where used in conjunction with the Designer's or
Engineer's response to submittals, requests, applications, inquiries,
reports and claims by the Contractor, the meaning of the term
"approved" will be held to the limitations of the Designer's
responsibilities and duties as specified in the General and
Supplementary Conditions. In no case will "approval" by the Designer
be interpreted as an assurance to the Contractor that the requirements
of the Contract Documents have been fulfilled.
1. .2. .6. Where reference is made to standards or trade
association publications, it shall mean to refer to the latest edition
and revision thereof, if any, in effect on the date of the contract
Documents.
1. .2. .7. Except as otherwise defined in context, the
following words, terms, and phrases shall mean as follows:
(1) "as shown, " "as indicated, " "as detailed, " or "as noted" shall
mean "as shown (indicated, etc. ) on drawings or any other diagrammatic
or written reference on the Drawings."
(2) "Provide" shall mean "furnish and install, complete and ready for
intended use. "
(3) "Directed, " "required, " "permitted, " "ordered, " "designed, "
"prescribed, " and similar words shall mean the "direction (requirement,
permission, order, designation, or prescription) of the Designer."
(4) "Approved, " "acceptable, " "satisfactory, " and similar words "
Purch. Rev. 4/87 6
1 ARTICLE 1
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1. .1. Definitions
1. .1. .1. The Contract Documents
The Contract documents consist of the Owner-Contractor
Agreement, Advertisement, Bidding Documents, Contract Forms, Conditions
of the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, and all addenda issued prior
to and all Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A
Modification is (1) a written amendment to the contract signed by both
parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a written interpretation issued by the
Designer pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.8, or (4) a written order for a
minor change in the work issued by the Designer pursuant to Paragraph
12.4.
1. .1. .2. The Contract
The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction.
This Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between
the parties hereto and supersedes all prior negotiations,
representations, or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract
may be amended or modified only by a Modification as defined in
Subparagraph 1.1.1. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to
create any contractual relationship of any kind between the Designer
and the Contractor, but the Designer shall be entitled to performance
of obligations intended for his benefit, and to enforcement thereof.
Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any
contractual relationship between the Owner or the Designer and any
Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor.
1. .1. .3. The Work
The Work comprises the completed construction required by the
Contract Documents and includes all labor necessary to produce such
construction, and all materials and equipment incorporated or to be
incorporated in such construction.
1. .1. .4. The Proiect
The project is the total construction of which the Work
performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part.
1. .2. Execution Correlation and Intent
1. .2. .1. The Contract Documents shall be signed in not less
than triplicate by the Owner and Contractor. If either the Owner or
the Contractor or both do not sign the Conditions of the Contract,
Drawings, Specifications, or any of the other Contract Documents, the
Designer shall identify such Documents.
1. .2. .2. By executing the Contract, the Contractor
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY REQUIREMENTS -00%,
16.1. Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
16.2. Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
16.3. Minority Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
16.4 . Work Force Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
16.5. Liaison Committee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
16.6. Compliance - Information, Reports and Sanctions . . . . . 55
16.7. Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
17. ARTICLE 17
MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE
REQUIREMENTS
17.1. Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
17.2. Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
17.3. Determination of MBE Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
17.4. Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
17.5. Sanctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
17.6. Hearings and Appeals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
9.5. Progress Payments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
9. 6. Payments Withheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
9.7. Failure of Payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
9.8. Substantial Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
9.9. Final Completion and Final Payment . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
10. ARTICLE 10
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10.1. Safety Precautions and -Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
10.2. Safety of Persons and Property . . . . • • • • • • • • • • 39
10.3. Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
11. ARTICLE 11
INSURANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
11.1. Contractor's Liability Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
11.2. Owner's Liability Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
11.3. Property Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
11.4. Loss of Use Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
12. ARTICLE 12
CHANGES IN THE WORK . . . . . . . . . . . 44
12.1. Change Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
12.2. Concealed Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
12.3. Claims for Additional Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
12.4. Minor Changes in the Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
13. ARTICLE 13
UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
13.1. Uncovering of Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
13.2. Correction of Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
13.3. Acceptance of Defective or Non-Conforming Work . . . . . . 49
13.4. Special Guarantees And Warranties . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
14. ARTICLE 14
TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT
14.1. Termination By the Contractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
14 .2. Termination By The Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
15. ARTICLE 15
LABOR REQUIREMENTS OF THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS
15.1. Labor Laws 51
15.2. Executive Orders 52
16. ARTICLE 16
4.17. Royalties and Patents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
4.18. Indemnification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5. ARTICLE 5
SUBCONTRACTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.1. Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.2. Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts For
Portions of the Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.3. Subcontractural Relations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
6. ARTICLE 6
WORK BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTOR
6.1. Owner's Right to Perform Work and To Award Separate
Contracts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
6.2. Mutual Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
6.3. Owner's Right to Clean Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
7. ARTICLE 7
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
7.1. Governing Law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
7.2. Successors and Assigns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
7.3. Written Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
7.4. Claims For Damages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
7.5. Performance Bond and Labor And Material Payment Bond
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
7.6. Rights And Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
7.7. Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
7.8. Interest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
7.9. Disputes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
7.10. Record Keeping and Management Controls . . . . . . . . . . 26
8• ARTICLE 8
TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
8.1. Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
8.2. Progress and Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
8.3. Delays and Extension of Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
9. ARTICLE 9
PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9.1. Contract Sum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
9.2. Schedule of Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
9.3. Application for Payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
9.4. Certificates For Payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Table of Contents
1. ARTICLE 1
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1.1. Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1.1. The Contract Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1.2. The Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1.3. The Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1.4. The Proi ect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2. Execution. Correlation and Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.3. Ownership and Use of Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2. ARTICLE 2
Designer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1. Definition . . . 3
2.2. Administration of the Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3. ARTICLE 3
++ OWNER
3.1. Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.2. Information and Services Required of the Owner . . . . . . 7
3.3. Owner's Right To Stop The Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.4. Owner's Right To Carry Out the Work . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.5. Partial Occupancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4. ARTICLE 4
CONTRACTOR
4.1. Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.2. Review of Contract Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.3. Supervision and Construction Procedures . . . . . . . . . . 12
4 .4. Labor and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.5. Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4.6. Taxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4 .7. Permits. Fees and Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4 .8. Allowances (intentionally deleted) . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.9. Superintendent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4 .10. Progress Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.11. Documents and Samples at the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.12. Shop Drawings Product Data and Samples . . . . . . . . . 16
4.13. Use of Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.14. Cutting and Patching of Work . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.15. Cleaning Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . 17
4.16. Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
I. To appoint or recruit an executive official of the company or agency as Equal
Opportunity Officer to coordinate the implementation of this Section 3 plan.
J. To list on Table A, information related to subcontracts awarded for the three
year period preceding date of this bid submission.
K. To list on Table B, all projected workforce needs for all phases of this project
by occupation,trade, skill level and number of positions.
As officers and representatives of
(Name of Contractor)
We the undersigned have read and fully agree to this Affirmative Action Plan, and
become a party to the full implementation of this program.
Signature
Title Date
Signature
Title Date
CONTRACTOR
Section 3 Plan Format
agrees to implement the following specific
affirmative action steps directed at increasing the utilization of lower income residents
and businesses within the City of Northampton.
A. To ascertain from the locality's CDBG program official the exact boundaries
of the Section 3 covered project area and where advantageous, seek the
assistance of local officials in preparing and implementing the affirmative
action plan.
B. To attempt to recruit from within the city the necessary number of lower
income residents through: Local advertising media, signs placed at the
proposed site for the project, and community organizations and public or
private institutions operating within or serving the project area such as
Service Employment and Redevelopment (SER), Opportunities
Industrialization Center (OIC), Urban League, Concentrated Employment
Program, Hometown Plan, or the U.S. Employment Service.
C. To maintain a list of all lower income area residents who have applied wither
on their own or on referral from any source, and to employ such persons, if
otherwise eligible and if a vacancy exists.
*D. To insert this Section 3 plan in all bid documents, and to require all bidders
on subcontracts to submit a Section 3 affirmative action plan including
utilization goals and the specific steps planned to accomplish these goals.
*E. To insure that subcontracts which are typically let on a negotiated rather than
a bid basis in areas other than Section 3 covered project areas, are also let on
a negotiated basis, whenever feasible, when let in a Section 3 covered project
area.
F. To formally contact unions, subcontractors and trade associations to secure
their cooperation for this program.
G. To insure that all appropriate project area business concerns are notified of
pending subcontractual opportunities.
H. To maintain records, including copies of correspondence, memoranda, etc.,
which document that all of the above affirmative action steps have been
taken.
*Loans, grants, contracts and subsidies for less than $10,000 will be exempt.
AOW COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT BLOCK GRANT PROGRAM
CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATION REGARDING SECTION THREE AND
SEGREGATED FACILITIES
Name of Prime Contractor Project Name I Title
The undersigned hereby certifies that:
1. Federal Section 3 provisions are included in the Contract.
2. A written Section Three Plan shall be prepared and submitted as part of this
project if the value of the work exceeds $10,000.
3. No segregated facilities shall be allowed or maintained.
Name and Title:
Please print or type
Signature:
,,,, Date:
0001*1 1 ,IE ON (OWAY LE7EMB
AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PLAN
1. Company Policy statement,which sets forth the Chief Executive Officer's attitude on equal
employment opportunity.
2. Company's Equal Employment Officer:
Name:
Position/Title:
Business Address:
3. Current extent of minority group and female employment in the company:
Group Job Classification No. of Individuals
4. Describe the Company's advertising, recruitment efforts and systematic contacts with
minority group members being sought from all recruitment resources.
5. Based on the preceding factors what numerical target for hiring minority persons and
females can be met and on what timetable.
6. What is your total workforce currently employed?
7. What is your anticipated workforce for this project? How many persons will be minority
group members or females?
9. Additional comments.
Date: Company:
Authorized Signature:
Address:
a - - nio�wim�n
NON-DISCRIMINATION AND AFFIRMATIVE ACTION CERTIFICATION
The Contractor agrees to comply with all applicable Federal and State statutes, rules and regulations prohibiting
discrimination in employment, including but not limited to,the Americans with Disabilities Act 42 USC 12101, 28 CFR
Part 356,or as amended; 29 USC S.791 et.seq.; Executive Orders 227,237,246; MGL C 151 B; and MGL C.272 S.
92A, S98 et.seq.,federal Executive Order 11246 (30 FR 12319-25); and any and all amendments to these provisions.
Pursuant to Executive Orders 227 and 246 ,the Contractor is required to take affirmative actions designed to eliminate
the patterns and practices of discrimination including providing written notice of its commitment to non-discrimination to
any labor association with which it has an employment agreement,and to certified minority and women-owned
businesses and organizations or businesses owned by individuals with disabilities.
Name of CDBG Funded Project:Renovations and Addition to Lilly Library
1. Bidder has participated in previous contract or subcontract subject to the Equal Opportunity Clause:
Yes No
2. Compliance reports were required to be filed in connection with such contract or subcontract:
Yes No
3. Bidder has filed all required compliance reports due under applicable instructions, including Monthly Employment
Utilization Reports:
Yes No
4. Have you ever been or are you being considered for sanction due to violation of Executive Order 11246, as
amended?
Yes No
Name and Address of Contractor(print or type):
Name and Title of Signer(print or type):
(Signature of Authorized Representative)
Date:
COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT BLOCK GRANT
PROGRAM
FEDERAL LABOR STANDARDS CERTIFICATION
The Contractor herby acknowledges that the following Federal Labor Standards apply and that he/
she will comply with these same Federal Labor Standards, laws and requirements in undertaking
work on the Project.
Name of CDBG Funded Project: Renovations and Addition to Lilly Library
1. The Davis-Bacon Act; requires the payment of prevailing wage rates (which are
determined by the U.S. Department of Labor)to all laborers and mechanics on Federal
construction projects in excess of$2,000.
2. The Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act; requires time and one-half pay for
overtime (O/T) hours (over 40 in any workweek)worked on the covered project.
3. The Copeland Act(Anti-Kickback Act); makes it a crime for anyone to require any laborer
or mechanic(employed on a Federal or Federally-assisted project)to kickback any part of
their wages. The Copeland Act also requires every employer(contractors and
subcontractors)to submit weekly-certified payroll reports (CPRs).
Project Name:
Contactor:
Address:
Federal ID#:
Signature &Date:
NOWNIONNOMMMW
CITY OF NORTHAMPTON
FEDERAL COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT BLOCK GRANT (CDBG)
PROGRAM
FEDERAL PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS
■ A pre construction conference shall be held with the prime
contractor to review the federal Davis Bacon law and related Acts
■ All persons working on a federally funded construction project
must be classified within the appropriate federal wage decision;
the only exception is for projects with a contract value less than
two thousand dollars ($ 2,000.00)
■ Submission of weekly payroll reports and the statement of
OOW compliance from the person supervising the payment of
employees
• The base rate is the minimum rate that must be paid to the
employee pursuant to their classification
• The fringe rate represents the cost for sick time, vacation, health
care, dental, retirement, etc. The fringe rate does not include
employer payments for contributions required by federal, state or
local law. If an employer is not paying the full fringe rate the
balance is paid directly to the employee as part of the hourly
wage rate
■ Employee workforce interviews shall be performed during the
course of work to ensure compliance with prevailing wages
■ Submission of a Section Three Plan and Affirmative Action Plan
on Company Letterhead shall be required of the successful
bidders and sub bidders
FEDERAL COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT BLOCK GRANT
PROGRAM
WAIS Document Retrieval Page 12 of 12
Wage and Hour Division
U.S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20210
2. ) If the answer to the question in 1. ) is yes, then an
interested party (those affected by the action) can request
review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator
(See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7) . Write to:
Wage and Hour Administrator
U.S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20210
The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the
interested party's position and by any information (wage
payment data, project description, area practice material,
etc. ) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue.
3 . ) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an
interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative
Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board) . Write to:
Administrative Review Board
U.S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20210
4. ) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final.
END OF GENERAL DECISION
^o"%k
http://frwebgate.access.gpo.gov/cgi-bin/getdoc.cgi?dbname=Davis-Bacon&docid=MA20030003 5/10/2005
WAIS Document Retrieval Page 11 of 12
Group 7: Trailers for earth moving equipment (double hookup)
FOOTNOTES:
A. PAID HOLIDAYS: New Year's Day, Washington's Birthday,
Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Patriot's Day,
Columbus Day, Veteran's Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas
Day
B. PAID VACATION: Employees with 4 months to 1 year of
service receive 1/2 day's pay per month; 1 week vacation
for 1 - 5 years of service; 2 weeks vacation for 5 - 10
years of service; and 3 weeks vacation for more than 10
years of service
----------------------------------------------------------------
WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing
operation to which welding is incidental.
Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within
the scope of the classifications listed may be added after
award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses
(29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii) ) .
----------------------------------------------------------------
In the listing above, the "SU" designation means that rates
listed under the identifier do not reflect collectively
bargained wage and fringe benefit rates. Other designations
indicate unions whose rates have been determined to be
prevailing.
----------------------------------------------------------------
WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS
1. ) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can
be:
• an existing published wage determination
• a survey underlying a wage determination
• a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on
a wage determination matter
• a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling
On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests
for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour
Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted
because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the
Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial
contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2. )
and 3. ) should be followed.
With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal
process described here, initial contact should be with the
Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to:
Branch of Construction Wage Determinations
http://frwebgate.access.gpo.gov/cgi-bin/getdoc.cgi?dbname=Davis-Bacon&docid=MA20030003 5/10/2005
III
WAIS Document Retrieval Page 10 of 12
Plumber and Steamfitter. . . . . . . .$ 26.80 15.20
----------------------------------------------------------------
ROOF0248-001 09/01/2004
All tear-off and/or removal (of any types of roofing) , and all
spudding, sweeping, vacuuming and/or cleanup of any and all
areas of any type where a roof is to be relaid.
Rates Fringes
Roofers:
Compostion Roofers & Damp
Waterproffers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 22.75 11.77
Slate, Tile and Precast
Concrete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 23 .53 11.77
----------------------------------------------------------------
* SFMA0676-002 04/01/2005
Rates Fringes
Sprinkler Fitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 32.70 15.45
----------------------------------------------------------------
SHEE0063-001 07/01/2004
Rates Fringes
Sheet metal worker. . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 27.37 13.42
----------------------------------------------------------------
TEAM0379-001 12/01/2004
Rates Fringes
Truck drivers:
Group 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 26.13 10.16+A+B
Group 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 26.30 10.16+A+B
Group 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 26.37 10.16+A+B
Group 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 26.49 10.16+A+B
Group 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 26.59 10.16+A+B
Group 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 26.88 10.16+A+B
Group 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 27.17 10.16+A+B
POWER TRUCKS $.25 DIFFERENTIAL BY AXLE
TUNNEL WORK (UNDERGROUND ONLY) $.40 DIFFERENTIAL BY AXLE
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS (IN HOT ZONE ONLY) $2.00 PREMIUM
TRUCK DRIVERS CLASSIFICATIONS
Group 1: Station wagons; panel trucks; and pickup trucks
Group 2: Two axle equipment; & forklift operator
Group 3: Three axle equipment and tireman
Group 4: Four and Five Axle equipment
Group 5: Specialized earth moving equipment under 35 tons
other than conventional type trucks; low bed; vachual;
mechanics, paving restoration equipment
Group 6: Specialized earth moving equipment over 35 tons
http://frwebgate.access.gpo.gov/cgi-bin/getdoc.cgi?dbname=Davis-Bacon&docid=MA20030003 5/10/2005
WAIS Document Retrieval Page 9 of 12
----------------------------------------------------------------
MARB0097-001 12/01/1998
Rates Fringes
Marble Finisher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 14.95
----------------------------------------------------------------
PAIN0011-008 06/01/2004
Rates Fringes
Glazier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 29.48 9.00+A
FOOTNOTE:
A. PAID HOLIDAY: LABOR DAY (provided employee has worked any
part of the week prior to Labor Day and any part of the
week after Labaor Day
----------------------------------------------------------------
PAIN0035-007 01/01/2005
Rates Fringes
Painters:
NEW CONSTRUCTION:
Brush, Taper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 21.38 12.61
Spray, Sandblast. . . . . . . . . . .$ 21.88 12.61
REPAINT:
Brush, Taper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 18.70 12.61
------Spray, Sandblast. . . . . . . . . . .$-19.70- 61
-----------12 -------
PLUM0004-003 09/01/2004
FRANKLIN (Orange)
Rates Fringes
Plumber and Steamfitter. . . . . . . .$ 32.04 13 .48
----------------------------------------------------------------
PLUM0104-001 02/01/2005
BERKSHIRE (Becket, Otis, Sandisfield) ; FRANKLIN (Except Monroe,
Orange, Towe, and the Western part of Charlemont) ; HAMPDEN;
HAMPSHIRE
Rates Fringes
Plumbers and Pipefitters. . . . . . .$ 28.76 15.20+A
FOOTNOTE:
A. Two paid holidays, Independence Day and Labor Day,
provided the employee has been employed seven days prior to
the holiday by the same employer
----------------------------------------------------------------
* PLUM0151-001 02/01/2005
BERKSHIRE (Except Otis, Becket, Sandisfield) ; FRANKLIN (Monroe,
Towe and the Western part of Charlemont)
Rates Fringes
http://frwebgate.access.gpo.gov/cgi-bin/getdoc.cgi?dbname=Davis-Bacon&docid=MA20030003 5/10/2005
WAIS Document Retrieval Page 8 of 12
Group 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 17.10 10.65
Group 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 17.60 10.65
_
LABORERS CLASSIFICATIONS
Group 1: Laborers, carpenter tenders, wrecking laborers
Group 2: Asphalt rakers, carbide core driller operators,
chain saw operators, pipelayers, jackhammer and paving
breaker operators, Barco type jumping tampers, laser beam
operators, concrete pump operators; mason tenders,
motorized mortar mixers, ride-on motorized buggy operators,
wagon drill operators, fence & beam rail erectors
Group 3: Pre-cast floor and roof plank erectors, asbestos
removal laborers, haz-mat laborers, sign erectors
Group 4: Air track operators, block pavers, rammers and curb
setters, hydraulic and similar self-powered drills
Group 5: Powdermen and blasters
Group 6: Mason Tenders
Group 7: Operation of Lull (minimum 8 hrs per day)
----------------------------------------------------------------
LAB00596-001 12/06/2004
HAMPDEN COUNTY, HAMPSHIRE COUNTY (WITH THE EXCEPTION OF
CHESTERFIELD, CUMMINNGTON, GOSHEN, MIDDLEFIELD, PLAINFIELD, AND
WORTHINGTON) FRANKLIN COUNTY (WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ASHFIELD,
BUCKLAND, CHARLEMONT, HAULY, HEATH, ORANGE,ROWE AND WARWICK)
Rates Fringes
Laborers:
GROUP 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 19.35 9.90
GROUP 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 19.60 9.90
GROUP 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 20.10 9.90
GROUP 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 20.10 9.90
GROUP 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 20.35 9.90
LABORERS CLASSIFICATIONS
GROUP 1: Laborers, carpenter tenders, wrecking laborers
GROUP 2: Asphalt rakers, carbide core driller operators,
chain saw operators, pipelayers, jackhammer and paving
breaker operators, Barco type jumping tampers, laser beam
operators, concrete pump operators, mason tenders,
motorized mortar mixers, ride-on motorized buggy operators,
wagon drill operators
GROUP 3: precast floor and roof plank erectors, sign
erectors, asbestos removal laborers, haz-mat laborers
GROUP 4: Air track operators, block pavers, rammers and curb
setters, hydraulic and similar self-powered drills
GROUP 5: Powderman and blaster
http://frwebgate.access.gpo.gov/cgi-bin/getdoc.cgi?dbname=Davis-Bacon&docid=MA20030003 5/10/2005
WAIS Document Retrieval Page 7 of 12
Cummington, Goshen, Middlefield, Plainfield, and Worthington)
FRANKLIN COUNTY (with the exception of Ashfield, Buckland,
Charlemont, Hauley, Heath, Orange, Rowe, and Warwick)
Rates Fringes
Plasterer tender. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 19.35 9.90
----------------------------------------------------------------
LAB00022-002 12/01/2004
FRANKLIN (Orange, Warwick)
Rates Fringes
Laborers:
GROUP 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 21.90 11.35
GROUP 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 23 .10 11.35
GROUP 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 22.65 11.35
GROUP 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 22.90 11.35
GROUP 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 22 .65 11.35
GROUP 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 23.90 11.35
LABORERS CLASSIFICATIONS
GROUP 1: Laborers; carpenter tenders; cement finisher
tenders, plasterer tenders
GROUP 2: Asphalt raker; fence and guard rail erector; laser
beam operator; mason tenmder; pipelayer; pneumatic drill
operator; pneumatic tool operator; wagon drill operatorm
jackhammer operator, pavement breaker, carbide core
drilling machine, chain saw operator, barco type jumping
tampers, concrete pump, motorized mortar miner, ride-on
motorized buggy
GROUP 3 : Air track operator; block paver; rammer; curb
setter, hydraulic and similar self-powered drills
GROUP 4: Blaster; powderman
GROUP 5: Precast floor and roof, plank erector
GROUP 6: Asbestos Abatement, Toxic and Hazardous waste
laborers
----------------------------------------------------------------
LAB00473-001 12/01/2004
BERKSHIRE COUNTY, FRANKLIN COUNTY, (THE TOWNS OF ASHFIELD,
BUCKLAND, CHARLEMONT, HAWLEY, HEATH, AND ROWE ONLY) HAMPSHIRE
COUNTY (THE TOWNS OF CHESTERFIELD, CUMMINGTON, GOSHEN,
MIDDLEFIELD, PLAINFIELD, AND WORTHINGTON ONLY)
Rates Fringes
Laborers:
Group 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 16.60 10.65
Group 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 16.85 10.65
Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 17.35 10.65
Group 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 17.35 10.65
Group 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 17.60 10.65
http://frwebgate.access.gpo.gov/cgi-bin/getdoc.cgi?dbname=Davis-Bacon&docid=MA20030003 5/10/2005
WAIS Document Retrieval Page 6 of 12
Group 15: Boom lengths over 350 ft including jib
FOOTNOTE FOR POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS:
A. Paid Holidays: New year's Day, Washington's Birthday,
Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Columbus Day,
Veterans Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day
----------------------------------------------------------------
IRON0012-004 05/01/2002
BERKSHIRE (Remainder of County)
Rates Fringes
Ironworkers:
Commercial projects valued
at $800,00 or less and/or
industrial projects valued
at $100, 000 or less, to
exclude demolition work
(complete razing of
structures) . Also
excludes pre-engineered
metal buildings and the
erection and installation
of structural steel of any
nature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 15.57 10.69
Sheeter, Bucker-up. . . . . . . . . .$ 21.275 13.04
Sheeter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 21.40 13 .04
Structural, Ornamental,
Reinforcing, Fence
Erector, Machinery Mover,
Rigger, Rodman, Stone
Derrickman. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 21.15 13.04
----------------------------------------------------------------
IRON0357-001 12/29/2003
BERKSHIRE (Becket, East Otis, Hinsdale, Lee, Monterey, New
Marlboro, North Otis, Otis, Peru, Sandisfield, Savoy,
Sheffield, Washington, Windsor) ; FRANKLIN; HAMPDEN; HAMPSHIRE
Rates Fringes
Ironworker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 28.34 12.99
----------------------------------------------------------------
LAB00014-004 11/01/2004
BERKSHIRE COUNTY
FRANKLIN COUNTY (the towns of Ashfield, Buckland, Charlemont,
Hawley, Heath, and Rowe only) HAMPSHIRE COUNTY (the towns of
Chesterfield, Cummington, Goshen, Middlefield, Plainfield, and
Worthington only)
Rates Fringes
Plasterer tender. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 16.60 10.65
----------------------------------------------------------------
LAB00014-005 12/06/2004
HAMPDEN COUNTY
HAMPSHIRE COUNTY (with the exception of Chesterfield,
http://frwebgate.access.gpo.gov/cgi-bin/getdoc.cgi?dbname=Davis-Bacon&docid=MA20030003 5/10/2005
WAIS Document Retrieval Page 5 of 12
Group 2: Rotary drill with mounted compressor; compressor
house (3 to 6 compressors) ; rock and earth boring machines
(excluding McCarthy and similar drills) ; graders; front end
loaders 4 cu yds to 5 1/2 cu yds) ; two drum hoists; high
fork lifts with capacity of 15 ft and over; scraper 21 yds
and over (struck load) ; sonic hammer console; road planer;
cal tracks; ballast regulators; rail anchor machines;
switch tampers, asphalt paver
Group 3 : Combination backhoe/loader up to 3/4 cu yd;
bulldozers; push cats; scrapers up to 21 cu yd (struck
load, self propelled or tractor drawn) ; tireman; front end
loaders up to 4 yds; asphalt paver; well drill drillers;
mechanics; welder; pumperete machines; concrete pumps and
similar type pumps; engineer or fireman on high pressure
boiler (on job) ; self-loading batch plant; well point
operator including installing; electric pumps used in well
point system; pumps, 12 inches and over (total discharge) ;
compressor, one or two 900 cu ft and over; engineers in
charge of powered grease truck; all automatic elevators,
permanent or temporary, operated manually or remote control
(does not include elevators operating from conventional
hoist 1,2, or 3 drum) ; grout pumps; boom truck; hydraulic
cranes, under 10 ton
Group 4: Asphalt rollers; self-powered rollers and
compactors; tractor without blade drawing sheepsfoot
roller; rubber tire roller; vibratory roller or other type
of compactors including machines for pulverizing and
aerating soil
Group 5: Single drum hoist; power pavement breakers;
concrete pavement finishing machines; two bag mixers with
skip; McCarthy and similar drills; batch plants (not self
loading) ; bulk cement plants; self-propelled material
spreaders; A-frame trucks; fork lifts up to 15 ft; three or
more 10 KW light plants; 30 KW or more generators
Group 6: Compressors (one or two) 315 cu ft to 900 cu ft;
pumps 4 inches to 12 inches (total discharge)
Group 7 : Compressors up to 315 cu ft; small mixers; pumps up
to 4 inches; power heaters except when 3 or more heaters
are used on one job; oiler; conveyor
Group 8: Truck crane crews
Group 9: Oiler
Group 10: Master mechanic
Group 11: Boom lengths over 150 ft including jib
Group 12: Boom lengths over 200 ft including jib
Group 13 : Boom lengths over 250 ft including jib
Group 14: Boom lengths over 300 ft including jib
http://frwebgate.access.gpo.gov/cgi-bin/getdoc.cgi?dbname=Davis-Bacon&docid=MA20030003 5/10/2005
WAIS Document Retrieval Page 4 of 12
ELEV0041-001 01/01/2005
Rates Fringes
Elevator Mechanic. . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 36.335 12.015+a
FOOTNOTE:
a. Vacation pay credit:
Employer contributes 8% of basic hourly rate for 5
years or more of service, and 6% of basic hourly rate for 6
months to 5 years of service.
Paid Holidays:
New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor
Day, Veterans' Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after
Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day.
Six paid holidays, providing employee has worked 5
consecutive days before and the working day after the
Holiday: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day,
Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day.
----------------------------------------------------------------
ENGI0098-001 12/01/2003
Rates Fringes
Power equipment operators:
(BUILDING & RESIDENTIAL)
Group 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 26.13 8.90+A
Group 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 25.87 8.90+A
Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 25.67 8.90+A
Group 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 25.18 8.90+A
Group 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 22.96 8.90+A
Group 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 22.02 8.90+A
Group 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 20.38 8.90+A
Group 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 27.03 8.90+A
Group 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 21.67 8.90+A
Group 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 27.37 8.90+A
Group 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 27.13 8.90+A
Group 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 28.63 8.90+A
Group 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 29.63 8.90+A
Group 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 30.63 8.90+A
Group 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 32.13 8.90+A
HAZARDOUS WASTE PREMIUM $2.00
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS CLASSIFICATIONS
Group 1: Shovels; cranes including all tower, climbing and
bridge cranes; hydraulic cranes 10 ton capacity or more;
draglines; derricks; elevators with Chicago boom; backhoes;
gradalls; elevating graders; pile driving rigs; concrete
road paavers; all three-drum hoisting and trenching
machines; belt- type loaders; front end loaders 5 1/2 cu
yds or over; dual drum paver; automatic grader (i.e.
C.M.I. ) ; combination backhoe/loader 3/4 cu yd hoe or over;
jet engine dryer; tree shredder; post hole digger; post .�
hole hammer; post extractor; truck mounted concrete pump
with boom; roto-mill; Grader; Horizontal Drilling Machine;
John Henry Rock Drill and similar equipment
http://frwebgate.access.gpo.gov/cgi-bin/getdoc.cgi?dbname=Davis-Bacon&docid=MA20030003 5/10/2005
WAIS Document Retrieval Page 3 of 12
Carpenter/Lather/Drywall
Applicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 24.00 12.65
----------------------------------------------------------------
CARP0108-011 10/06/2003
BERKSHIRE COUNTY
Rates Fringes
Carpenter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 22.69 11.82
----------------------------------------------------------------
CARP1121-001 10/01/2004
Rates Fringes
Millwright. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 27.93 17.37
----------------------------------------------------------------
* CARP2168-003 04/01/2005
Rates Fringes
Soft Floor Layer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 29.28 16.99
----------------------------------------------------------------
ELEC0007-002 01/01/2005
HAMPDEN (Except Chester & Holyoke) ; HAMPSHIRE (Belchertown,
Ware)
Rates Fringes
Electrician. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 29.86 10.30
----------------------------------------------------------------
ELEC0007-003 01/01/2005
BERKSHIRE; FRANKLIN; HAMPDEN (Chester, Holyoke) ; HAMPSHIRE
(Except Belchertown, Ware)
Rates Fringes
Electrician. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 29.86 10.30
----------------------------------------------------------------
ELEC0007-006 01/01/2004
Rates Fringes
Teledata System Installer. . . . . .$ 19.49 8.74
----------------------------------------------------------------
ELEC0042-003 08/31/2003
Rates Fringes
Line Construction:
Heavy Equipment Operator. . . .$ 25.34 8.20+7.5%
Lineman, Cable Splicer and
Dynamite Man. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 31.65 9.70+6.25%
Material Man, Tractor
Trailer Driver, Equipment
Operator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 23.93 8.20+7.5%
----------------------------------------------------------------
http://frwebgate.access.gpo.gov/cgi-bin/getdoc.cgi?dbname=Davis-Bacon&docid=MA20030003 5/10/2005
WAIS Document Retrieval Page 2 of 12
Rates Fringes
Boilermaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 30.225 34.08%+7.71
----------------------------------------------------------------
BRMA0001-001 03/07/2005
SPRINGFIELD/PITTSFIELD CHAPTER FRANKLIN, HAMPDEN, and
HAMPSHIRE COUNTIES
Rates Fringes
Bricklayer
BRICKLAYERS; CEMENT
MASONS; PLASTERERS; STONE
MASONS; MARBLE, TILE &
TERRAZZO WORKERS. . . . . . . . . . . .$ 28.22 14.85
----------------------------------------------------------------
BRMA0001-003 03/07/2005
SPRINGFIELD/PITTSFIELD
BERKSHIRE
Rates Fringes
Bricklayer
BRICKLAYERS; CEMENT
MASONS; PLASTERERS; STONE
MASONS; MARBLE, TILE &
TERRAZZO WORKERS. . . . . . . . . . . .$ 28.22 14.85
----------------------------------------------------------------
CARP0056-014 08/01/2004
FRANKLIN, HAMPDEN AND HAMPSHIRE
Rates Fringes
Piledriverman. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 27.43 17.38
----------------------------------------------------------------
CARP0056-015 08/01/2004
BERKSHIRE
Rates Fringes
Piledriverman. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 27.43 17.38
----------------------------------------------------------------
* CARP0107-009 04/01/2005
Franklin County (Erving, Orange, North Orange and Warwick)
Rates Fringes
Carpenter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$ 25.84 17.83
----------------------------------------------------------------
CARP0108-005 10/04/2004
HAMPDEN; HAMPSHIRE AND FRANKLIN (Remainder)
Rates Fringes
http://frwebgate.access.gpo.gov/cgi-bin/getdoc.cgi?dbname=Davis-Bacon&docid=MA20030003 5/10/2005
WAIS Document Retrieval Page 1 of 12
GENERAL DECISION: MA20030003 04/15/2005 MA3
Date: April 15, 2005
General Decision Number: MA20030003 04/15/2005
Superseded General Decision Number: MA020003
State: Massachusetts
Construction Types: Building
Counties: Berkshire, Franklin, Hampden and Hampshire Counties
in Massachusetts.
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS Does not include residential
construction consisting of single family homes and apartments
up to and including 4 stories)
Modification Number Publication Date
0 06/13/2003
1 03/19/2004
2 08/13/2004
3 08/20/2004
4 09/10/2004
5 11/05/2004
6 11/12/2004
7 01/21/2005
8 02/18/2005
9 04/01/2005
10 04/15/2005
ASBE0043-001 09/01/2002
Rates Fringes
Asbestos Workers/Insulator
Includes the application
of all insulating
materials, protective
coverings, coatings and
finishes to all types of
mechanical systems. . . . . . . . . .$ 25.41 11.90
----------------------------------------------------------------
ASBE0201-002 07/01/2002
Rates Fringes
Hazardous Material Handler
Includes preparation,
wetting, stripping,
removal scrapping,
vacuuming, bagging and
disposing of all
insulation materials,
whether they contain
asbestos or not, from
mechanical systems. . . . . . . . . .$ 16.75 8.25
----------------------------------------------------------------
BOIL0029-001 10/01/2004
http://frwebgate.access.gpo.gov/cgi-bin/getdoc.egi?dbname=Davis-Bacon&docid=MA20030003 5/10/2005
WEEKLY PAYROLL REPORT FORM
Company Name: ❑ Prime Contractor
Project Name: ❑ Subcontractor
List Prime Contractor:
Awarding Auth.:
Work Week Ending: Employer Signature:
Final Report Print Name&Title:
❑
(A) (B) Employer Contributions (F) (G)
Employee Name& Work Classification Hours Worked [B+C+D+EJ [A*F]
Hourly Hourly Weekly
Address S M T W T F S Tot. Base (C) (D) (E) Total Wage Total
Hrs. Wage Health Supp. (prev.wage) Amount
& Pension Unemp.
Welfare
NOTE: Every contractor and subcontractor is required to submit a copy of their weekly payroll records to the awarding authority.
WEEKLY PAYROLL RECORDS REPORT
& STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE
In accordance with Massachusetts General Law c. 149, §27B, a true and accurate record
must be kept of all persons employed on the public works project for which the enclosed rates
have been provided. A Payroll Form has been printed on the reverse of this page and includes all
the information required to be kept by law. Every contractor or subcontractor is required to keep
these records and preserve them for a period of three years from the date of completion of the
contract.
In addition, every- contractor and subcontractor is required to submit a copy of their
weekly payroll records to the awarding authority. This is required to be done on a weekly basis.
Once collected, the awarding authority is also required to preserve those records for three years.'
In addition, each such contractor, subcontractor, or public body shall furnish to the
awarding authority directly, within fifteen days after completion of its portion of the work, a
statement, executed by the contractor, subcontractor or public body who supervises the payment-
of wages, in the following form:
STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE
2200
I,
(Name of signatory party) (Title)
do hereby state that I pay or supervise the payment of the persons employed by
on the
(Contractor,subcontractor or public body) (Building or project)
and that all mechanics and apprentices,teamsters, chauffeurs and laborers employed on
said project have been paid in accordance with wages determined under the provisions of
sections twenty-six and twenty-seven of chapter one hundred and forty nine of the
General Laws.
Signature
Title
DIVISION OF OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY,399 WASHINGTON STREET,5TH FLOOR,BOSTON,MA.02108
THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS
DEPARTMENTS OF LABOR AND WORKFORCE DEVELOPMENT
., DIVISION OF OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY
PREVAILING WAGE PROGRAM
W_
www.mass.gov/dos/pw
MITT ROMNEY ROBERT J. PREZIOS O
Commissioner
Governor
KERRY HEALEY
Lieutenant Govemor
JANE C.EDMONDS
Director,DWD
The Massachusetts Prevailing Wage Law
M.G.L. c. 149, §§26-27
NOTICE TO AWARDING AUTHORITIES
➢ The enclosed wage schedule applies only to the specific'project listed at:the top of the schedule,and
these rates will remain in effect for the duration of the project.
➢ You should request an updated wage schedule from the Division of Occupational Safety if you have not
opened bids or selected a contractor within 90 days of the date of issuance of the enclosed wage
schedule.
➢ The wage schedule shall be incorporated in any advertisement or call for bids for the project for which
it has been issued.
Once a contractor has been selected by the awarding authority, the wage schedule shall be made a part
of the contract for that project.
NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
➢ The enclosed wage schedule must be posted in a conspicuous place at the work site during the life of
the.project.
➢ The wages listed on the enclosed wage schedule must be paid to employees on public works projects
regardless of whether they are employed by the prime contractor, a filed sub-bidder, or any sub-
contractor.
➢ The enclosed wage schedule applies to all phases of the project, including the final clean-up.
Contractors whose only role is to perform final clean-up must pay their employees according to this
wage schedule.
➢ All apprentices must be registered with the Massachusetts Division of Apprenticeship Training (DAT)
in order to be paid at the lower apprentice rates. If a worker is not registered with DAT, they must be
paid the"total rate" listed on the wage schedule regardless of experience or skill level. For Hither
information,please call (617) 626-5409, or write to DAT, 19 Staniford Street, Floor 1,P.O. Box
146759, Boston,MA 02114.
399 Washington Street • 5`h Floor • Boston,Massachusetts 02108 • Tel: 617-727-3492 • Fax: 617-727-0726
COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS
Division of Occupational Safety
Minimum wage rates for apprentices employed on public works projects are listed below as a percentage of
the pre-determined hourly wage rate established by the Commissioner under the provisions of the
Massachusetts General Laws,Chapter 149,Sections 26 through 27D,as ammended
All apprentices must be registered with the Division of Apprentice Training in accordance with M.G.L.Chapter
23,Sections 11 E-11 L
City/Town: NORTHAMPTON All steps are 6 months(1000 Hours)unless otherwise specified"
ROOFER(REROOFING) 1:1 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95
Steps are 600 hrs.
SHEET METAL WORKER 1:3 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90
SIGN ERECTOR 1:1 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90
Steps are 4 mos.
SPRINKLER FITTER 1:1 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85.
TELECOMMUNICATION 1:1 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85
TECHNICIAN
Ratios are expressed in allowable number of apprentices to journeymen or fraction thereof.
Multiple ratios are listed in comment field.
The job site ratio of 2 apprentices for every 3 journeymen is allowed as follows: 1 journeyman may
supervise not more than 1 apprentice;2 to 3 journeymen may supervise not more than 2 apprentices;4 to 6
journeymen may supervise not more than 4 apprentices;7 to 9 journeymen may supervise not more than 6
apprentices;10 to 12 journeymen may supervise not more than 8 apprentices; 13 to 15 journeymen may
supervise not more than 10 apprentices;etc. Not more than 50%of the apprentices on a job site may have
standing as a 1 st year apprentice. All other apprentices must have 2nd,3rd,4th,or 5th year standing.
Issue Date: 5/12/2005 Rate Sheet: NORTHAMPTON Job ID: 96181
COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS
Division of occupational Safety
Minimum wage rates for apprentices employed on public works projects are listed below as a percentage of
the pre-determined hourly wage rate established by the Commissioner under the provisions of the
Massachusetts General Laws,Chapter 149,Sections 26 through 27D,as ammended
All apprentices must be registered with the Division of Apprentice Training in accordance with M.G.L.Chapter
23,Sections 11 E-11 L
City/Town: NORTHAMPTON All steps are 6 months(1000 Hours)unless otherwise specked"
Classification Ratio' 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ASBESTOS INSULATOR(Pipes& 1:4 50 60 70 80
Tanks) Steps are 1 year
BOILERMAKER 1:5 65 65 70 75 80 85 90 95
BRICK/PLASTER/CEMENT MASON 1:5 50 60 70 80 90 95
CARPENTER " 50 55 60 70 80 85 90 95
—1:1-5,2:6-8,3:9-11 Steps are 6 mos(600 hrs.)
ELECTRICIAN 2:3"' 50 55 60 65 70 75
Steps 1-2 are 1000 hrs;Steps 3-6 are 1500 hrs.
ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTOR 1:1 50 55 65 70 80
Steps 1-2 are 6 mos.;Steps 3-5 are 1 year
FLOORCOVERER 1:1 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85
Steps are 950 hrs.
GLAZIER 1:1 50 56.3 62.5 68.8 75 81.3 88 94
low
HOIST/PORT. ENG. 1:5 60 70 80 90
Steps 1-2 are 1000 hrs.;Steps 3-4 are 2000 hrs.
IRONWORKER 50 60 65 75 85 95
Structural 1:6;Ornamental 1:4
LABORER 1:5 60 70 80 90
MILLWRIGHT 1:5 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85
PAINTER 1:1 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 90
Steps are 750 hrs.
PILE DRIVER 1:3 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95
PLUMBER/PIPEFITTER 1:5 45 50 60 70 80
Steps are 2000 hrs.
ROOFER 1:3 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95
Steps are 600 hrs.
' Ratios are expressed in allowable number of apprentices to journeymen or fraction thereof.
Multiple ratios are listed in comment field.
The job site ratio of 2 apprentices for every 3 journeymen is allowed as follows: 1 journeyman may
supervise not more than 1 apprentice;2 to 3 journeymen may supervise not more than 2 apprentices;4 to 6
journeymen may supervise not more than 4 apprentices;7 to 9 journeymen may supervise not more than 6
apprentices;10 to 12 journeymen may supervise not more than 8 apprentices;13 to 15 journeymen may
supervise not more than 10 apprentices;etc. Not more than 50%of the apprentices on a job site may have
standing as a 1 st year apprentice. All other apprentices must have 2nd,3rd,4th,or 5th year standing.
Issue Date: 5/12/2005 Rate Sheet: NORTHAMPTON Job ID: 96181
THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS ,
DEPARTMENT OF LABOR �, y
DIVISION OF OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY � � , ''► r"'t��`
Prevailing Wage Rates
MITT RONMY As determined by the Commissioner under the provisions of the
Goveoor Massachusetts General Laws,Chapter 149,Sections 26 to 27H
KERRY HEALEY ROBERT J.PREZIOSO
LL Govenor
Commissimer
Awarding Authority: TOWN OF NORTHAMPTON
Contract Number: 200449 City/Town: NORTHAMPTON
Description Of Work: LILLY LIBRARY RENOVATION&ADDITION WORKS
Job Location: 19 MEADOW ST.,FLORENCE
Classification Effective Dates and Total Rates
ADZEMAN 12/1/2003 $34.150
BACKHOE/LOADER/HAMMER OPERATOR 12/1/2003 $34.650
BURNERS 12/1/2003 $34.400
CONCRETE CUTTER/SAWYER 17/1/2003 $34.650
JACKHAMMER OPERATOR 12/1/2003 $34.400
LABORER:HAZARDOUS WASTEIASBESTOS REMOVER 12/1/2003 $36.150
WRECKING LABORER 1211/2003 $34.150
This wage schedule must be posted at the work site in accordance with M.G.L.ch. 149,sec.27
Failure of the employer to pay"prevailing wage rates,"which are the minimum wage rates listed above,on public works
projects is a violation of M.G.L.ch. 149,sec.27B. Employees not receiving such rates should report the violation to the
Office of Fair Labor and Business Practices,100 Cambridge Street,Boston,MA 02108; Tel: (617)727-3465.
Issue Date: 5/12/2005 Rate Sheet: DEMO Job ID: 96182 Page: I
THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS
DEPARTMENT OF LABOR —�
e> �,
DIVISION OF OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY 4
Prevailing Wage Rates
Mrrr ROMNEY As determined by the Commissioner under the provisions of the
Govmor Massachusetts General Laws,Chapter 149,Sections 26 to 27H
KERRY HEALEY ROBERT I PREZIOSO
LL Cove= cmnmiaticm
Awarding Authority: TOWN OF NORTHAMPTON
Contract Number: 200449 City/Town: NORTHAMPTON
Description Of Work: LILLY LIBRARY RENOVATION&ADDITION WORKS
Job Location: 19 MEADOW ST.,FLORENCE
Classification Effective Dates and Total Rates
If 30%or more of surfaces to be painted are new construction,NEW paint rate shall be used.
"The Residential Wood Frame Carpenter classification applies only to the construction of new,wood frame residences that do not exceed four
stories including the basement.
This wage schedule must be posted at the work site in accordance with M.G.L. ch. 149,sec.27
Failure of the employer to pay"prevailing wage rates,"which are the minimum wage rates listed above,on public works
projects is a violation of M.G.L.ch.149,sec.27B. Employees not receiving such rates should report the violation to the
Office of Fair Labor and Business Practices,100 Cambridge Street,Boston,MA 02108; Tel: (617)727-3465.
Issue Date: 5/12/2005 Rate Sheet: NORTHAMPTON Job ID: 96181 Page: 6
THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS
---� DEPARTMENT OF LABORS-,--�
DIVISION OF OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY
Prevailing Wage Rates � .
MITT ROMNEY As determined by the Commissioner under the provisions of the
Go„ma Massachusetts General Laws,Chapter 149,Sections 26 to 27H
KERRY HEALEY ROBERT J.PREZIOSO
Lt Govmor Comm s 6mc
Awarding Authority: TOWN OF NORTHAMPTON
Contract Number: 200449 City/Town: NORTHAMPTON
Description Of Work: LILLY LIBRARY RENOVATION&ADDITION WORKS
Job Location: 19 MEADOW ST.,FLORENCE
Classification Effective Dates and Total Rates
SPECIALIZED EARTHMOVING EQUIP<35 TONS 12/112004 $36.020 6/1/2005 $36.520 8/1/2005 $36.920 12/112005 $37.620
6/1/2006 $38.120 8/1/2006 $38.520 12/1/2006 $39.220 6/1/2007 $39.720
811/2007 $40.750 12/1/2007 $40.920 6/1/2008 $41.420 8/1/2008 $41.920
12/1/2008 $42.620
SPECIALIZED EARTH MOVING EQUIP>35 TONS 12/1/2004 $36.310 6/1/2005 $36110 8/1/2005 $37210 12/1/2005 $37.910
6/1/2006 $38.410 8/12006 $38.810 12/1/2006 $39.510 6/1/2007 $40.010
8/12007 $40.510 12/12007 $41.210 6/12008 $41.710 8/12008 $42.210
12/12008 $42.910
SPRINKLER FITTER 5/12005 $45.200
TELECOMMUNICATIONTECHNICIAN 6/12004 $28.600 6/12005 $29.370 1/12006 $29.880
TERRAZZO FINISHERS 3/72005 $35.480 9/52005 $36.930 3/62006 $38.430 9/42006 $39.930
3/52007 $41.330
TEST BORING DRILLER 12/1/2004 $37.650 6/12005 $38.800 12/12005 $39.900 6/12006 $41.050
12/1/2006 $42.150 6/12007 $43.300 12/12007 $44.400 5/312008 $44.900
TEST BORING DRILLER HELPER 12/1/2004 $36.370 6112005 $37.520 12/12005 $38.620 6/12006 $39.770
12/1/2006 $40.870 6/12007 $42.020 12/12007 $43.120 5/312008 $43.620
TEST BORING LABORER 12/1/2004 $36.250 6112005 $37.400 12/12005 $38.500 6/12006 $39.650
12/12006 $40.750 6/12007 $41.900 12/12007 $43.000 5/312008 $43.500
TRACTORS 12/12004 $35.080 6/12005 $36.080 12/12005 $37.080
TRAILERS FOR EARTH MOVING EQUIPMENT 12/1/2004 $36.600 6/12005 $37.100 8/12005 $37.500 12/1/2005 $38.200
6/12006 $38.700 8/12006 $39.100 12/12006 $39.800 6/12007 $40.300
8/12007 $40.800 12/12007 $41.500 6/12008 $42.000 8/12008 $42.500
12/112008 $43.200
TUNNEL WORK(COMP.AIR HAZ.WASTE) 12/12004 $49.130 6/12005 $50.530 12/12005 $51.780 6/12006 $53.180
12/12006 $54.430 6/12007 $55.830 12/12007 $57.580
TUNNEL WORK(COMPRESSED AIR) 12/1/2004 $47.130 6/12005 $48.530 12/12005 $49.780 6/12006 $51.180
12/1/2006 .$52.430 6/12007 $53.830 12/12007 $55.580
TUNNEL WORK(FREE AIRHAZ.WASTE) 1211/2004 $41.200 6/12005 $42.600 12/12005 $43.850 6/12006 $45.250
12/1/2006 $46.500 6/12007 $47.900 12/12007 $49.650
TUNNEL WORK(FREE AIR) 12/1/2004 $39.200 6/12005 $40.600 12/1/2005 $41.850 6/12006 $43.250
12/12006 $44.500 6/12007 $45.900 12/12007 $47.650
VAC-HAUL 12/1/2004 $36.020 6/12005 $36.520 8/12005 $36.920 12/1/2005 $37.620
6/12006 $38.120 8/12006 $38.520 12112006 $39.220 6/1/2007 $39.720
8/12007 $40.220 12/12007 $40.920 6/12008 $41.420 8/12008 $41.920
12/1/2008 $42.620
WAGON DRILL OPERATOR 12/6/2004 $29.200 6/6/2005 $30.200 12/5/2005 $31.200 6/52006 $32.200
12/4/2006 $33.440
WAGON DRILL OPERATOR(HEAVY&HIGHWAY) 12/1/2004 $29.630 6/12005 $30.780 12/12005 $31.460 611/2006 $32.610
12/1/2006 $33.290 6/12007 $34.440 12/12007 $35.120 5/312008 $35.620
WATER METER INSTALLER 2/12005 $43.460 8/12005 $44.460 2112006 $45.710
This wage schedule must be posted at the work site in accordance with M.G.L.ch.149,sec.27
Failure of the employer to pay"prevailing wage rates,"which are the minimum wage rates listed above,on public works
projects is a violation of M.G.L.ch. 149,sec.27B. Employees not receiving such rates should report the violation to the
Office of Fair Labor and Business Practices,100 Cambridge Street,Boston,MA 02108;Tel:(617)727-3465.
Issue Date: 5/12/2005 Rate Sheet: NORTHAMPTON Job ID: 96181 Page: 5
THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS
DEPARTMENT OF LABOR �� r
DIVISION OF OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY
;LQ
Prevailing Wage Rates .
MITT ROMNEY As determined by the Commissioner under the provisions of the
Goveoor Massachusetts General Laws,Chapter 149,Sections 26 to 27H
KERRY HEALEY ROBERT J.PREZIOSO
Lt Govenor Cammisdawr
Awarding Authority: TOWN OF NORTHAMPTON
Contract Number: 200449 City/Town: NORTHAMPTON
Description Of Work: LILLY LIBRARY RENOVATION&ADDITION WORKS
Job Location: 19 MEADOW ST.,FLORENCE
Classification Effective Dates and Total Rates
PAINTER(SPRAY OR SANDBLAST,REPAINT) 1/12005 $31.760 7/12005 $32.760 1/12006 $33.760
PAINTER(TRAFFIC MARKINGS) 12/1/2004 $29.380 6/12005 $30.530 12112005 $31.210 6/12006 $32.360
12/12006 $33.040 6112007 $34.190 12/12007 $34.870 5/312008 $35.370
PAINTER/TAPER(BRUSH,NEW)• 1/12005 $33.440 7112005 $34.440 1/12006 $35.440
PAINTER/TAPER(BRUSH,REPAINT) 1/12005 $30.760 7/12005 $31.760 1/12006 $32.760
PANEL&PICKUP TRUCKS DRIVER 12/12004 $35.560 6/12005 $36.060 8112005 $36.460 12/12005 $37.160
6/12006 $37.660 8/12006 $38.060 12/12006 $38.760 6/12007 $39.260
8/12007 $39.760 12/12007 $40.460 6/12008 $40.960 8/12008 $41.460
12/12008 $42.160
PIER AND DOCK CONSTRUCTOR(UNDERPINNING 8/12004 $42.450
AND DECK)
PILE DRIVER 8/12004 $42.450
PIPELAYER 12/62004 $29.200 6/62005 $30.200 12/52005 $31.200 6/52006 $32.200
12/4/2006 $33.440
PIPELAYER(HEAVY&HIGHWAY) 12/1/2004 $29.630 6/12005 $30.780 12/12005 $31.460 6/12006 $32.610 ,,
12/1/2006 $33.290 6/12007 $34.440 12/12007 $35.120 5/312008 $35.620
PLUMBER&PIPEFITTER 2/1/2005 $43.460 8/12005 $44.460 2/12006 $45.710
PNEUMATIC CONTROLS(TEMP.) 2/12005 $43.460 8/12005 $44.460 2/12006 $45.710
PNEUMATIC DRILL/TOOL OPERATOR(NAVY& 12/12004 $29.630 6/12005 $30.780 12/12005 $31.460 6/12006 $32.610
HIGHWAY) 12/1/2006 $33.290 6/12007 $34.440 12112007 $35.120 5/312008 $35.620
POWDERMAN&BLASTER 12/6/2004 $29.950 6/62005 $30.950 12152005 $31.950 6/52006 $32.950
12/4/2006 $34.190
POWDERMAN&BLASTER(HEAVY&HIGHWAY) 12/1/2004 $30.380 6/12005 $31.530 12/12005 $32.210 6/12006 $33.360
12/12006 $34.040 6/12007 $35.190 12/12007 $35.870 5/312008 $36.370
POWER SHOVEUrREE SHREADER 12/1/2004 $36.030 6/12005 $37.030 12112005 $38.030
PUMP OPERATOR(CONCRETE) 12/112004 $36.030 6/12005 $37.030 12/12005 $38.030
PUMP OPERATOR(DEWATERING,OTHER) 12/1/2004 $35.570 6/12005 $36.570 12/12005 $37.570
READY-MIX CONCRETE DRIVER 5/12005 $26.770
RESIDENTIAL WOOD FRAME CARPENTER'* 4/1/2005 $30.920
RIDE-ON MOTORIZED BUGGY OPERATOR 12/62004 $29.200 6/6/2005 $30.200 12/52005 $31.200 6/52006 $32.200
12/4/2006 $33.440
ROLLER OPERATOR 12/1/2004 $35.080 6/12005 $36.080 12/12005 $37.080
ROOFER(Inc.Roofer Waterproofng&Roofer Damproofg) 9/12004 $34.420 7/12005 $35.870 9/12005 $36.420
SELF-POWERED ROLLERS AND COMPACTORS 12/12004 $35.080 6/12005 $36.080 12/12005 $37.080
(TAMPERS)
SELF-PROPELLED POWER BROOM 12/1/2004 $32.860 6/12005 $33.860 12/12005 $34.860
SHEETMETAL WORKER 1/12005 $39.850
SIGN ERECTOR 6/12004 $27.500 6/12005 $29.070
SLATE/TILE/PRECASTCONCRETE ROOFER 9/12004 $35.200 7/12005 $36.650 9/12005 $37.200
This wage schedule must be posted at the work site in accordance with M.G.L.ch.149,sec.27
Failure of the employer to pay"prevailing wage rates," which are the minimum wage rates listed above,on public works
projects is a violation of M.G.L.ch. 149,sec.27B. Employees not receiving such rates should report the violation to the
Office of Fair Labor and Business Practices,100 Cambridge Street,Boston,MA 02108;Tel: (617)727-3465.
Issue Date: 5/12/2005 Rate Sheet: NORTHAMPTON Job ID: 96181 Page: 4
THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS
--� DEPARTMENT OF LABOR r
+,4,i�r �t4 DIVISION OF OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY �.. �r Ott
Prevailing Wage Rates
MITT ROMNIEY As determined by the Commissioner under the provisions of the
Go„ma Massachusetts General Laws,Chapter 149,Sections 26 to 27H
KERRY HEALEY ROBERT J.Commisimer SO
aaima
LL Govemor
Awarding Authority: TOWN OF NORTHAMPTON
Contract Number: 200449 City/Town: NORTHAMPTON
Description Of Work: LILLY LIBRARY RENOVATION&ADDITION WORKS
Job Location: 19 MEADOW ST.,FLORENCE
Classification Effective Dates and Total Rates
HYDRAULIC DRILLS(HEAVY&HIGHWAY) 12/1/2004 $30.130 6/1/2005 $31.280 12/1/2005 $31.960 6/1/2006 $33.110
12/1/2006 $33.790 6/1/2007 $34.940 12/1/2007 $35.620 5/31/2008 $36.120
INSULATOR(PIPES&TANKS) 9/1/2004 $41.280 9/1/2005 $43.280
IRONWORKER/WELDER 7/6/2004 $40.790
JACKHAMMER&PAVING BREAKER OPERATOR 12/6/2004 $29.200 6/6/2005 $30.200 12/5/2005 $31.200 6/5/2006 $32.200
12/4/2006 $33.440
LABORER 12/6/2004 $28.950 6/6/2005 $29.950 12/5/2005 $30.950 6/5/2006 $31.950
12/4/2006 $33.190
LABORER(HEAVY&HIGHWAY) 12/1/2004 $29.380 6/1/2005 $30.530 12/1/2005 $31.210 6/1/2006 $32.360
12/1/2006 $33.040 6/1/2007 $34.190 12/1/2007 $34.870 5/31/2008 $35.370
LABORER:CARPENTER TENDER 12/6/2004 $28.950 6/6/2005 $29.950 12/5/2005 $30.950 6/5/2006 $31.950
12/4/2006 $33.190
LABORER:CEMENT FINISHER TENDER 12/6/2004 $29.200 6/6/2005 $30.200 12/5/2005 $31.200 6/5/2006 $32.200
tow 12/4/2006 $33.440
LABORER:HAZARDOUS WASTE/ASBESTOS REMOVER 12/1/2003 $36.150
LABORER:MASON TENDER 12/6/2004 $29.200 6/6/2005 $30.200 12/512005 $31.200 6/52006 $32.200
12/4/2006 $33.440
LABORER:MASON TENDER(HEAVY&HIGHWAY) 12/1/2004 $29.630 6/12005 $30.780 12/12005 $31.460 6/12006 $32.610
12/1/2006 $33.290 6/12007 $34.440 12/12007 $35.120 5/312008 $35.620
LABORER:MULTI-TRADE TENDER 12/62004 $28.950 6/62005 $29.950 12/52005 $30.950 6/52006 $31.950
12/4/2006 $33.190
LABORER:TREE REMOVER 12/6/2004 $28.950 6/62005 $29.950 12/52005 $30.950 6/52006 $31.950
12/42006 $33.190
LASER BEAM OPERATOR 12/62004 $29.200 6/62005 $30.200 12/5/2005 $31.200 6/52006 $32.200
12/4/2006 $33.440
LASER BEAM OPERATOR(HEAVY&HIGHWAY) 12/12004 $29.630 6/12005 $30.780 12/12005 $31.460 6/12006 $32.610
12/1/2006 $33.290 6/12007 $34.440 12/12007 $35.120 5/312008 $35.620
MARBLE&TILE FINISFERS 3/72005 $35.480 9/52005 $36.930 3/62006 $38.430 9/42006 $39.930
3/52007 $41.330
MARBLE MASONS,TILELAYERS&TERRAZZO MECH 3172005 $42.400 9/5/2005 $43.850 3/62006 $45.350 9/4/2006 $46.850
3/52007 $48.250
MECH.SWEEPER OPERATOR(NON-CONSTRUCTION) 7/12004 $24.570 7/12005 $25.070 7112006 $25.570
MECHANIC/WELDERBOOM TRUCK 12/1/2004 $35.570 6/12005 $36.570 12/1/2005 $37.570
MILLWRIGHT 4/12005 $45.700 10/12005 $46.550 4/12006 $47.550
MORTAR MIXER 12/612004 $29.200 6/62005 $30.200 12/52005 $31.200 6/52006 $32.200
12/4/2006 $33.440
OILER 12/12004 $33.220 6/12005 $34.220 12/12005 $35.220
OTHER POWER DRIVEN EQUIPMENT-CLASS VI 12/1/2004 $30.280 6/12005 $31.280 12/12005 $32.280
PAINTER(BRIDGES/TANKS) 1/12005 $51.770 7/12005 $53.270 1112006 $54.770
PAINTER(SPRAY OR SANDBLAST,NEW)• 1112005 $34.440 7/1/2005 $35.440 1112006 $36.440
This wage schedule must be posted at the work site in accordance with M.G.L.ch.149,sec.27
Failure of the employer to pay"prevailing wage rates,"which are the minimum wage rates listed above,on public works
projects is a violation of M.G.L.ch.149,sec.27B. Employees not receiving such rates should report the violation to the
Office of Fair Labor and Business Practices,100 Cambridge Street,Boston,MA 02108;Tel: (617)727-3465.
Issue Date: 5/12/2005 Rate Sheet: NORTHAMPTON Job ID: 96181 Page: 3
le THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS ,
_ DEPARTMENT OF LABOR
DIVISION OF OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY �1�'�
Prevailing Wage Rates loo
MITT ROMNEY As determined by the Commissioner under the provisions of the
Gwamor Massachusetts General Laws,Chapter 149,Sections 26 to 27H
KERRY HEALEY ROBERT I PREZIOSO
LL Govmor Caomiaaiam
Awarding Authority: TOWN OF NORTHAMPTON
Contract Number: 200449 City/Town: NORTHAMPTON
Description Of Work: LILLY LIBRARY RENOVATION&ADDITION WORKS
Job Location: 19 MEADOW ST.,FLORENCE
Classification Effective Dates and Total Rates
CARBIDE CORE DRILL OPERATOR 12/6/2004 $29.200 6/6/2005 $30.200 1215/2005 $31.200 6/5/2006 $32.200
12/4/2006 $33.440
CARPENTER 10/4/2004 $36.550
CEMENT MASONRY/PLASTERING 3/7/2005 $42.400 9/5/2005 $43.850 3/62006 545.350 9/4/2006 $46.850
3/52007 $48.250
CHAIN SAW OPERATOR 12/6/2004 $29.200 6/62005 $30.200 12/52005 $31.200 6/5/2006 $32.200
12/42006 $33.440
COMPRESSOR OPERATOR 12/1/2004 $35.570 6/12005 $36.570 12/12005 $37.570
CRANE/BACKHOFJFRONT-END LOADER OPERATOR 12/12004 $36.030 6/12005 $37.030 12/12005 $38.030
DELEADER(BRIDGE) 1/12005 $51.770 7/12005 $53.270 1/12006 $54.770
DIVER 8/12004 $55.340 8/12005 $57.650 8/12006 $59.960 8/12007 $62.270
DIVER TENDER 8/12004 $44.370 8/12005 $46.020 8/12006 $47.670 8/12007 $49.320
DIVER TENDER(EFFLUENT) 8/12004 $58.090 8/12005 $59.740 8/12006 $61.390 8/12007 $63.040
DIVER/SLURRY(EFFLUR4 ) 8/12004 $74.540 8/12005 $76.190 8/12006 $77.840 8/12007 $79.490
ELECTRICIAN 1/12005 $39.660
ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTOR 1/12005 $47.970 1112006 $50.940 1/12007 $53.910
ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTOR HELPER 1/12005 $38.080 1/12006 $41.050 1/12007 $44.020
FENCE&GUARD RAILERECTOR(HEAVY& 12/12004 $29.630 6/12005 $30.780 12/12005 $31.460 6/12006 $32.610
HIGHWAY) 12/12006 $33.290 6/12007 $34.440 12/12007 $35.120 5/312008 $35.620
FIELD ENG-PARTY CHEF(BLDG,SITE,HVY CONST) 6/1/1999 $30.230
FIELD ENG-CHIEF OF SURVEY(BLDG,SITE,HVY 6/1/1999 $31.230
CONST)
FIELD ENG-INST./RODPERSON(BLDG,SITE,HVY 6/1/1999 $27.740
CONST)
FIRE ALARM INSTALLER 1/12005 $39.660
FIRE ALARM REPAIR/MAINTENANCE 6/12004 $28.600 6/12005 $29.370 1/12006 $29.880
FIREMAN 12/12004 $35.570 6/12005 $36.570 12/12005 $37.570
FLAGGER&SIGNALER(NAVY&HIGHWAY) 12/1/2004 $25.330 6/12005 $26.480 12/12005 $27.160 6/12006 $28.310
12/1/2006 $28.990 6/12007 $30.140 12/1/2007 $30.820 5/312008 $31.320
FLOORCOVERER 4/12005 $46.900
FORK LIFT 12/1/2004 $35.770 611/2005 $36.770 12/12005 $37.770
GENERATORS/LIGHTING B.ANTS 12/12004 $32.860 6/12005 $33.860 12/12005 $34.860
GLAZIER(GLASS PLAN,/AIR BARRIER/INTERIOR 6/12004 $38.130
SYSTEMS)
GRADERtFRENCHINGMACHINE/DERRICK 12/112004 $36.030 6/12005 $37.030 12/12005 $38.030
HVAC(DUCTWORK) 1/12005 $39.850
HVAC(ELECTRICALCONTROLS) 1/1/2005 $39.660
HVAC(PIPE) 2/12005 $43.460 8112005 $44.460 2/12006 $45.710
HVAC(TESTING AND BALANCING-AIR) 1/12005 $39.850
HVAC(TESTING AND BALANCING-WATER) 2/12005 $43.460 8/12005 $44.460 2/12006 $45.710
This wage schedule must be posted at the work site in accordance with M.G.L.ch.149,sec.27 '
Failure of the employer to pay "prevailing wage rates,"which are the minimum wage rates listed above,on public works
projects is a violation of M.G.L.ch. 149,sec.27B. Employees not receiving such rates should report the violation to the
Office of Fair Labor and Business Practices,100 Cambridge Street,Boston,MA 02108; Tel: (617)727-3465.
Issue Date: 5/12/2005 Rate Sheet: NORTHAMPTON Job ID: 96181 Page: 2
THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS
DEPARTMENT OF LABOR
lip. DIVISION OF OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY
Prevailing Wage Rates ',
MITT As As determined by the Commissioner under the provisions of the
clove" Massachusetts General Laws,Chapter 149,Sections 26 to 27H
KERRY HEALEY ROBERT J.PREZIOSO
Lt men« CoMMISU'Ma
qr
Awarding Authority: TOWN OF NORTHAMPTON fsy��
Contract Number: 200449 City/Town: NORTHAMPTON MAY 13( i
Description Of Work: LILLY LIBRARY RENOVATION&ADDITION WORKS
Job Location: 19 MEADOW ST.,FLORENCE
• CAOLO&BIENIEIC ASSOC:INC.
Classification Effective Dates and Total Rates
(2 AXLE)DRIVER-EQUIPMENT 12/1/2004 $35.730 6/1/2005 $36.230 8/12005 $36.630 12/1/2005 $37.330
6/1/2006 $37.830 8/1/2006 $38.230 12/12006 $38.930 611/2007 $39.430
8/12007 $39.930 12/12007 $40.630 6/12008 $41.130 8/12008 $41.630
12/1/2008 542.330
(3 AXLE)DRIVER-EQUIPMENT 12/1/2004 $35.800 6/12005 $36.300 8112005 $36.700 12/12005 $37.400
6/1/2006 $37.900 8/12006 $38.300 12/12006 $39.000 6/12007 S39.500
8/12007 $40.000 12/1/2007 $40.700 6/12008 $41.200 8/12008 $41.700
12/1/2008 $42.400
(4&5 AXLE)DRIVER-EQUIPMENT 12/12004 $35.920 6112005 $36.420 8/12005 $36.820 12/12005 $37.520
6/12006 $38.020 8/12006 $38.420 12112006 539.120 6112007 $39.620
8/12007 540.120 12/12007 540.820 6/12008 $41.320 8/12008 541.820
12/12008 $42.520
AIR TRACK OPERATOR 12/612004 $29.700 6/62005 $30.700 12/52005 $31.700 6/52006 $32.700
12/4/2006 $33.940
AIR TRACK OPERATOR(HEAVY&HIGHWAY) 12/4/2004 $30.130 6/12005 $31.280 12/12005 $31.960 6/12006 $33.110
12/1/2006 $33.790 6/12007 534.940 12/12007 $35.620 5/312008 $36.120
ASBESTOS WORKER(PIPES&TANKS) 6/12004 $29.250
ASPHALT RAKER 12/6/2004 $29.200 6/62005 $30.200 12/52005 $31.200 6/52006 $32.200
12/4/2006 $33.440
ASPHALT RAKER(HEAVY&HIGHWAY) 12/1/2004 $29.630 6/12005 $30.780 12/12005 $31.460 6/1/2006 $32.610
12/1/2006 $33.290 6112007 $34.440 12/12007 $35.120 5/312008 $35.620
AUTOMATIC GRADER-EXCAVATOR(RECLAIMER) 12/12004 $36.060 6/12005 $37.030 12/12005 $38.030
BARCO-TYPE JUMPING TAMPER 12/62004 $29.200 6/62005 $30.200 12/52005 $31.200 6/52006 $32.200
12/4/2006 $33.440
BATCH/CEMENT PLANT-ON SITE 12/12004 $35.570 6/12005 $36.570 12/12005 $37.570
BLOCK PAVER,RAMMER/CURB SETTER 12/62004 $29.700 6/62005 $30.700 12/52005 $31.700 6/52006 $32.700
12/4/2006 $33.940
BLOCK PAVER,RAMMER/CURB SETTER(NAVY& 12/12004 $30.130 6/12005 $31.280 12112005 $31.960 6/12006 $33.110
HIGHWAY) 12/1/2006 $33.790 6/12007 $34.940 12/12007 $35.620 5/312008 $36.120
BOILERMAKER 10/12004 $47.170 10/12005 $48.170
BRICK/STONE/ARTIFICIAL MASONRY(INCL. 3/72005 $42.400 9/52005 $43.850 3/62006 $45.350 9/42006 546.850
MASONRY WATERPROOFING) 3/52007 $48.250
BULLDOZER/SCRAPER 1211/2004 $35.570 6/12005 $36.570 12/12005 $37.570
CAISSON&UNDERPINNING BOTTOM MAN 12/1/2004 $37.200 6/12005 $38.350 12/12005 $39.450 6/12006 $40.600
12/12006 $41.700 6/12007 $42.850 12/12007 $43.950 5/312008 $44.450
CAISSON&UNDERPINNING LABORER 12/1/2004 $36.250 6/12005 $37.400 12/12005 $38.500 6/12006 $39.650
12/12006 540.750 6/1/2007 $41.900 12/12007 $43.000 5/312008 $43.500
CAISSON&UNDERPINNING TOP MAN 12/12004 $36.250 6/1/2005 $37.400 12/1/2005 $38.500 6/1/2006 $39.650
12/12006 $40.750 6/1/2007 $41.900 12/12007 $43.000 5/312008 $43.500
This wage schedule must be posted at the work site in accordance with M.G.L.ch.149,sec.27
Failure of the employer to pay"prevailing wage rates,"which are the minimum wage rates listed above,on public works
projects is a violation of M.G.L.ch. 149,sec.27B. Employees not receiving such rates should report the violation to the
Office of Fair Labor and Business Practices,100 Cambridge Street,Boston,MA 02108; Tel: (617)727-3465.
Issue Date: 5/12/2005 Rate Sheet: NORTHAMPTON Job ID: 96181 Page: 1
QUARTERLY PROJECTED WORK FORCE TABLE
Name of Contractor:
Address:
Telephone:
Trades Utilized:
Estimate of Total Hours to Complete Work:
Total Contract Dollar Value:
Name of Project:
Quarter: Begin: End:
Projected Total Hours of all Projected Total of all
Week Ending Personnel Minority Hours Trades Used This Week
Note: A revised table must be submitted if any changes on projections occur.
Prepared by:
Statement of Compliance
2005
(Name of signatory parry) (Title)
do hereby state:
That I pay or supervise the payment of the persons employed by
(Contractors, subcontractor of public body)
on the
(Building of Project)
and that all mechanics and apprentices, teamsters, chauffeurs and laborers employed on
said project have been paid in accordance with wages determined under the provisions of
Sections twenty-six (26) and twenty-seven (27) of Chapter one hundred and forty-nine
(149)of the General Laws.
Signature
Title
(Signed under penalties of perjury as provided for
under Section 27B of Chapter 149, General Laws.)
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and Surety have hereto set their hands and seals
this day of ,
PRINCIPAL SURETY
(Name&Seal) (Attorney in Fact) (Seal)
(Title)
Attest: Attest:
The rate for this bond is % for the first$ and % for the
next$
The total premium for this bond is $
PAYMENT BOND PAGE 2 OF 2
CITY OF NORTHAMPTON
PAYMENT BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That we, as
Principal, an individual, a partnership, a corporation organized under the laws of the
Commonwealth of Massachusetts, having a usual place of business at
, and
as Surety, which company is authorized
to transact the business of suretyship in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts and has a usual
place of business in Massachusetts, are held and firmly bound unto the Town of
Northampton, as Obligee, in the sum of dollars
($ ), lawful money of the United States of America, for payment of which,
well and truly to be made, we hereby,jointly and severally,bind ourselves and each of us our
heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assignees by these present.
WHEREAS,the said Principal has made a contract with the Obligee,bearing the date of
, 20_for the construction of
in the City of
Northampton a copy of which agreement is attached hereto and by reference made a part
hereof.
NOW,the conditions of this obligation are such that if the Principal and all Subcontractors
under said contract shall pay for all labor performed or furnished and for all materials used or
employed in said contract and in any and all duly authorized modifications, alterations,
extensions of time, changes or additions to said contract that may hereafter be made,notice
to the Surety of such modifications, alterations, extensions of time, changes or additions
being hereby waived,the foregoing to include any other purposes or items set out in, and to
be subject to ,provisions of M.G.L. c.30 §39A, and M.G.L. c.149 §29, as amended, then this
obligation shall become null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and virtue.
PAYMENT BOND PAGE 1 OF 2
CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE PRINCIPAL
(PERFORMANCE BOND)
certify that I am the
of the corporation named as
Principal in the within Bond; that
who signed the said Bond on behalf of the Principal was then
of said corporation; that I know his signature and his
signature is genuine; and that said Bond was duly signed, sealed and attested for and in
behalf of said corporation by authority of its governing body.
(Signature)
(Date)
CORPORATE SEAL
FORM OF PERFORMANCE BOND PAGE 3 OF 3
IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the Principal and Surety have hereto set their hands and seals
this day of ,
PRINCIPAL SURETY
(Name&Seal) (Attorney in Fact) (Seal)
(Title)
Attest: Attest:
The rate for this bond is % for the first$ and % for the
next $
The total premium for this bond is $
AORk
FORM OF PERFORMANCE BOND PAGE 2 OF 3
CITY OF NORTHAMPTON
FORM OF PERFORMANCE BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That we, as
Principal, an individual, a partnership, a corporation organized under the laws of the
Commonwealth of Massachusetts, having a usual place of business, and
as Surety, which company is authorized
to transact the business of suretyship in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts and has a usual
place of business in Massachusetts, are held and firmly bound unto the Town of
Northampton, as Obligee, in the sum of dollars
($ ), lawful money of the United States of America, for payment of which,
well and truly to be made, we hereby,jointly and severally,bind ourselves and each of us our
heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assignees by these present.
WHEREAS, the said Principal has by means of a written proposal, accepted by the City of
Northampton on the day of ,20_, entered into a
contract with the said Obligee, a copy of which agreement is attached hereto and by
low reference made a part hereof;
NOW, the condition of this obligation is such that if the Principal and all Subcontractors
under said contract shall well and truly keep and perform all the undertakings, covenants,
agreement, terms and conditions of said contract on its part to be kept and performed during
the original term of such contract and any extensions thereof that may be granted by the
Obligee, with or without notice to the Surety, and during the life and any guarantee required
under the contract, and shall also well and truly keep and perform all the undertakings,
covenants, agreements, terms and conditions of any and all duly authorized modifications,
alterations, changes or additions to said contract that may hereafter be made, notice to the
Surety of such modifications, alterations, changes or additions being hereby waived, then this
obligation shall become null and void; otherwise, it shall remain in full force and virtue.
IN THE EVENT, that the contract is abandoned by the Principal, or in the event that the
Obligee, under the provisions of Article 8 of the General Conditions of said contract
terminates the employment of the Principal or the authority of the Principal to continue the
work, said Surety hereby further agrees that said Surety shall, if requested in writing by the
Obligee,take such action as is necessary to complete said contract.
FORM OF PERFORMANCE BOND PAGE I OF 3
The City of Northampton is not bound by this contract until approved by the Mayor of
Northampton.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Owner caused these presents to be signed in
quadruplicate and approved by Mary Clare Higgins its Mayor and the said Contractor
has caused these presents to be signed in quadruplicate and its official seal to be hereto
affixed by its officer or agent thereunto duly authorized (by the attached corporate
resolution). This instrument shall take effect as a sealed instrument.
CONTRACTOR:
COMPANY NAME
it's
AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE
DATE
TITLE
CITY OF NORTHAMPTON:
BY: LILLY LIBRARY TRUSTEES
AGENCY NAME
signatures
Date
City Auditor, approved as to appropriation.
Date
City Solicitor, approved as to form.
Date
Mayor Mary Clare Higgins
CITY OF NORTHAMPTON
MASSACHUSETTS
CONTRACT NUMBER:
BUDGET CODE:
VENDOR NUMBER:
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
FOR
LILLY LIBRARY RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
THIS AGREEMENT, executed this day of
20 by and between:
hereinafter called "Contractor" and the City of Northampton, a municipal corporation in the
County of Hampshire, Commonwealth of Massachusetts, party of the second part hereinafter
calf "Owner".
WITNESSETH, that for the consideration hereinafter mentioned, the Owner and the
Contractor shall agree to the terms and conditions contained in this contract, enumerated as
follows: The Owner-Contractor Agreement, Advertisement, Bidding Documents, Contract
Forms, Insurance Requirements, Specifications, and all addenda issued prior to and all
Modifications issued after execution of the Contract.
THE OWNER shall pay the Contractor for the performance of this contract in the sum of,
dollars in accordance with the terms
of this contract.
This contract shall not be altered in any particular without the consent of all parties to this
contract. All alterations to this contract must be in writing and authorized as such by the
Mayor and a Majority vote of the Board, Agency, or Committee signing this contract.
In the event the Contractor is a corporation a certificate that the person executing this
contract is duly authorized to sign, must accompany this contract.
Final payment on this contract shall release and discharge the Owner from any and all claims
against the Owner on account of any work performed hereunder, or any alteration hereto.
This contract shall be deemed to be a Massachusetts contract and it's interpretation and
construction shall be governed by the laws of Massachusetts and the Charter and Ordinances
hook of the Owner.
CONTRACT FORMS
Tax and Reporting Compliance Certification
Pursuant to M.G.L. Chapter 62C, Section 49A, I certify under the penalties of perjury
that I have, to my best knowledge and belief, complied with the law of the
Commonwealth relating to taxes, reporting of employees and contractors, and
withholding and remitting child support.
Social Security Number or Signature of Individual or
Federal Identification Number. Corporate Name
by:
Corporate Officer
(if applicable)
Certificate by Corporation to Sign Contract
At a duly authorized meeting of the Board of Directors of the
held on
(Name of Corporation) (Date)
At which all the Directors were present or waived notice, it was voted that,
(Name) (Officer)
of this company, be and he hereby is authorized to execute contracts and bonds in the
name and behalf of said company, and affix its Corporate Seal thereto, and such
execution of any contract or obligation in this company's name on its behalf by such
under seal of the company, shall be valid and binding
(Officer)
upon this company,
A TRUE COPY,
ATTEST:
(Clerk)
'POW
PLACE OF BUSINESS
DATE OF THIS CONTRACT
I hereby certify that I am the clerk of
that
is the duly elected of said company, and the
above vote has not been amended or rescinded and remains in full force and effect as of
the date of this contract.
(Clerk) (Corporate Seal)
Letter of Intent
To be completed by MBE and submitted by the Contractor
Project Number:
Project Description:
To:
(Name of Contractor)
1. My company intends to perform work in connection with the above project as:
_an individual
^a partnership
_a corporation
_a joint venture with
_other(explain)
2. My company has been certified by SOMBA which has current notice of its
minority ownership, control and management.
3. My company understands that if you are awarded the contract referenced above,
you intend to enter into an agreement with my company to perform the activity
described below for the price indicated.
MBE PARTICIPATION WILL BE (specific description of activity):
Total Amount
MBE Company Name
Address
Telephone
Signature of MBE Authorized Agent
Date
Must be submitted with your bid.
MBE Participation Schedule
Project Number:
Project Description:
The Contractor must indicate the MBE it intends to use in the contract,as follows:
Name&Address of MBE Nature of Participation Dollar Value of
Participation
1.
2.
3,
Total MBE Commitment
Contractor Company Name
Address
Signature, Contractor Authorized Agent
This form must be completed and submitted with your bid.
K Foreign Corporation Certification
AFFIDAVIT OF COMPLIANCE
Form AF-4A 1/78
EXECUTIVE OFFICE FOR
ADMINISTRATION AND FINANCE
The Commonwealth of Massachusetts
MASSACHUSETTS BUSINESS CORPORATION
NON-PROFIT CORPORATION
FOREIGN (non-Massachusetts) Corporation
1, ,President Clerk of
whose principal office is
(Name of Corporation)
located
do hereby certify that the above named Corporation has filed with the State Secretary all
certificates and annual reports required by Chapter 156B, Section 109 (Business
Corporation), by Chapter 181, Section 4 (Foreign Corporation), or by Chapter 180,
Section 26A (non-profit Corporation) of the Massachusetts General Laws.
SIGNED UNDER THE PENALTIES OF PERJURY THIS day of
20
Signature of responsible Corporate Officer
elll-
Subcontractors' Certification
Name of Project : LILLY LIBRARY RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Prior to the award of any subcontract, regardless of tier, the prospective subcontractor
must execute and submit to the Prime Contractor the following certification, which will
be deemed a part of the resulting subcontract:
SUBCONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION
certifies that:
(Company Name)
1. it intends to use the following listed construction trades in the work under the
subcontract
ek
and
2. will comply with the minority manpower ratio and specific affirmative action
steps contained herein; and
3. will obtain from each of the subcontractors prior to the award of any subcontract
under this contract the subcontractor certification required by these bid
conditions.
(Signature of authorized representative of subcontractor)
-AV
Attest:
By:
Affix Corporate Seal
Attest:
By:
Affix Corporate Seal
(Power of Attorney for person signing for surety company must be attached to bond.)
CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE PRINCIPAL
I, certify that I am the
of the corporation named as Principal in the within bound;
that who signed the said bond on behalf of the
Principal was then of said corporation; that I know his
signature thereto is genuine; and that said bond was duly signed, sealed, and attested to, for,
and in behalf of said corporation by authority of its governing body.
(Corporate Seal)
BID BOND PAGE 2 OF 2
BID BOND (SUB-BIDDER)
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS,that we the undersigned,
(Insert full name and address of Contractor)
as PRINCIPAL, and
(Insert full name and address of Surety)
as SURETY
are held and firmly bound unto The City of Northampton, as Obligee in the penal sum of
FIVE PERCENT of the attached bid, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be
made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns,jointly
and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that whereas the Principal has
submitted the attached bid, dated 20 , for
(Insert full name,address and description of project)
NOW THEREFORE, if the Principal shall not withdraw said bid within thirty (30) days,
Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays excluded, after the said opening, and shall within the
period specified therefore enter into a written Contract with The City of Northampton in
accordance with the bid as accepted, and give bond with good and sufficient surety or
sureties, as may be required, for the faithful performance and proper fulfillment of such
contract; or in the event of the withdrawal of said bid within the period specified, or the
failure to enter into such Contract and give such bond within the time specified, if the
Principal shall pay the Authority the difference between the amount specified in said bid and
the amount for work which The City of Northampton may procure the required work up to
the amount of this bond, then the above obligation shall be void and of no effect, otherwise to
remain in full force and virtue.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above-bound parties have executed this instrument under
their several seals this day of , 20 _ the name and
corporation seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed
by its undersigned representative,pursuant to authority of its governing body.
BID BOND PAGE 1 OF 2
'fie
Date
(Name of Sub-bidder)
By
(Title and Name of Person Signing Bid)
(Business Address)
(City and State)
FORM FOR SUB-BID PAGE 4 OF 4
The undersigned further agrees to be bound to the general contractor by the terms of
the hereinbefore described plans, specifications, including all general conditions stated
therein, and addenda, and to assume toward him all the obligations and responsibilities that
he, by those documents, assumes toward the owner.
The undersigned offers the following information as evidence of his qualifications to
perform the work as bid upon according to all the requirements of the plans and
specifications:--
1. Have been in business under present business name years.
2. Ever failed to complete any work awarded?
3. List one or more recent buildings with names of the general contractor and
architect on which you served as a sub-contractor for work of similar
character as required for the above-named building.
Building Architect General Contractor Amount of Contract
(a)
(b)
(c)
4. Bank reference
The undersigned hereby certifies that he is able to furnish labor that can work in
harmony with all other elements of labor employed or to be employed on the work and that
he will comply fully with all laws and regulations applicable to awards of subcontracts
subject to section forty-four F.
The undersigned further certifies under penalties of perjury that this sub-bid is in all
respects bona fide, fair and made without collusion or fraud with any other person. As used
in this subsection the word "person" shall mean any natural person, joint venture,
partnership, corporation or other business or legal entity. The undersigned further certifies
under penalty of perjury that the said undersigned is not presently debarred from doing
public construction work in the commonwealth under the provisions of section twenty-nine F
of chapter twenty-nine, or any other applicable debarment provisions of any other chapter of
the General Laws or any rule or regulation promulgated thereunder.
FORM FOR SUB-BID PAGE 3 OF 4
�)May only be used by the following general bidders:
(To exclude general bidders, insert "X" in one box only and fill in blank following
that box. Do not answer E. if no general bidders are excluded.)
The undersigned agrees that if he is selected as a sub-bidder, he will, within five days,
Saturday, Sundays and legal holidays excluded, after presentation of a subcontract by the
General Bidder selected as the General Contractor, execute with such general bidder a
subcontract in accordance with the terms of this sub-bid, and contingent upon the execution
of the general Contract and, if requested to do so in the general bid by general bidder, who
shall pay the premiums therefore, or if prequalification is required pursuant to Section 44D
3/4, furnish a performance and payment bond of a surety company qualified to do business
under the laws of the Commonwealth and satisfactory to the awarding authority, in the full
sum of the subcontract price.
The names of all persons, firms and corporations furnishing to the undersigned labor
or labor and materials for the class or classes or part thereof of work for which the provisions
of the section of the specifications for this sub-trade require a listing in this paragraph,
including the undersigned if customarily furnished by persons on his own payroll and in the
absence of a contrary provision in the specifications, the name of each such class of work or
part thereto and the bid price for such class of work or part thereof are:
Name Class of Work Bid price
[Do not give bid price for any class or part thereof furnished by undersigned.]
The undersigned agrees that the above list of bids to the undersigned represents bona
fide bids based on the hereinbefore described plans, specifications and addenda and that, if
the undersigned is awarded the contract, they will be used for the work indicated at the
amounts stated, if satisfactory to the awarding authority.
FORM FOR SUB-BID PAGE 2 OF 4
FORM FOR SUB-BID
TO: All General Bidders Except Those Excluded:
A. The undersigned proposes to furnish all labor and materials required for completing,
in accordance with the hereinafter described Plans, Specifications, and Addenda, all
work specified in Section No. of the specifications and in any plans
specified in such Section, prepared by Caolo & Bieniek Associates, Inc., 521 East
Street, Chicopee, Massachusetts 01020-4161 for the Renovations and Expansion of
the Lilly Library, in Florence,Massachusetts for the contract sum of
Dollars
B. Alternates:
Alternate No. 1: Masonry restoration to include cleaning
and repointing of existing brick and
granite as indicated in Section 04500,
Masonry Restoration.
Base Bid: Not to include the work of
Section 04500, Masonry Restoration.
Add
Alternate No. 2: New aluminum replacement windows in
the existing library building.
Base Bid: Windows in the existing
library to remain.
Add
C. Unit Prices:
Not Applicable
D. This sub-bid includes Addenda numbered
E. This sub-bid:
L_) May be used by any general bidder except:
Aow
FORM FOR SUB-BID PAGE 1 OF 4
BID PACKAGE FOR SUB-BID
PART 5 - SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL
List all supervisory personnel, such as project managers and superintendents, who will be assigned to
the project if your firm is awarded the contract. Attach the resume of each person listed below.
NAME TITLE OR FUNCTION
PART 6 - CHANGES IN BUSINESS ORGANIZATION OR FINANCIAL CONDITION
Have there been any changes in your firm's business organization, financial condition or bonding
capacity since the date your current Certificate of Eligibility was issued? ❑ Yes ❑ No
If YES, attach a separate page providing complete details.
Division of Capital Asset Management Page 9 of 9
Form CQ 3-Revised August,2000
A. Have any judicial proceedings (other than criminal proceedings) been brought or 1:1 El
concluded adversely against your firm or a principal or officer of your firm relating
to the procurement or performance of any construction contract, including actions
to obtain payment brought by subcontractors, suppliers or others?
B. Have any criminal proceedings been brought or concluded adversely against your E
firm or a principal or officer of your firm relating to any of the following offenses:
graft, embezzlement, forgery, bribery, falsification or destruction of records, receipt
of stolen property or environmental offenses?
C. Have any judicial or administrative proceedings been brought or concluded
adversely against your firm or a principal or officer of your firm relating to a
violation of state or federal antitrust laws arising out of the submission of bids or
proposals?
D. Have any judicial or administrative proceedings been brought or concluded ❑ ❑
adversely against your firm or a principal or officer of your firm relating to a
violation of state or federal laws regulating campaign contributions?
E. Have any judicial or administrative proceedings been brought or concluded El R
adversely against your firm or a principal or officer of your firm relating to a
violation of chapter 268A of the Massachusetts General Laws?
F. Have any judicial or administrative proceedings been brought or concluded ❑ ❑
adversely against your firm or a principal or officer of your firm relating to a
violation of any state or federal law regulating revailin wages?
G. Have any judicial or administrative proceedings been brought or concluded F—I ❑
adversely against your firm or a principal or officer of your firm relating to a
violation of any state or federal law regulating hours of labor, minimum wages,
overtime pay, equal pay, child labor or worker's compensation?
H. Have any judicial or administrative proceedings been brought or concluded
adversely against your firm or a principal or officer of your firm relating to a
violation of any state or federal law prohibiting discrimination in employment?
I. Have any judicial or administrative proceedings been brought or concluded ❑ El
adversely against your firm or a principal or officer of your firm relating to a claim of
repeated or aggravated violation of any state or federal law regulating labor
relations or occupational health or safety?
J. Have any proceedings been brought by any state or federal agency to debar or F—I ❑
suspend your firm or any principal or officer of your firm from public contracting?
K. Has your firm been fined by OSHA or any other state or federal agency for ❑
violations of any laws or regulations related to occupational health or safety?
Division of Capital Asset Management Page 8 of 9
Form CQ 3-Revised August,2000
PART 3 - PROJECT PERFORMANCE
Please answer the following questions. Information is to cover the period from the date your current
Certificate of Eligibility was issued to the bid date.
If you answer YES to any question, on a separate page provide a complete explanation.
Include all details [project name(s) and location(s), names of all parties involved, relevant
dates, etc.].
YES NO
A. Has your firm been terminated on any contract prior to completing its work? ❑ ❑
B. Has your firm failed or refused either to perform or complete any of its work under ❑ ❑
any contract prior to substantial completion?
C. Has your firm failed or refused to complete any punchlist work under any contract? ❑ ❑
D. Has your surety taken over or been asked to complete any of your work under any ❑ ❑
contract?
E. Has your surety made payment to a materials supplier or other party under your ❑ ❑
payment bond on any contract?
F. Has any subcontractor filed a demand for direct payment with an awarding ❑ ❑
authority on a public project for.any of your contracts?
G. Have any of your subcontractors or suppliers filed litigation to enforce a ❑ ❑
mechanic's lien against property in connection with work performed or materials
supplied under any of your contracts?
H. Have there been any deaths of employee or others occurring in connection with ❑ ❑
any of your projects?
I. Has any employee or other person suffered an injury resulting in complete disability ❑
in excess of thirty working days in connection with any of your projects?
PART 4 - LEGAL PROCEEDINGS
Please answer the following questions. Information is to cover the period from the date your current
Certificate of Eligibility was issued to the bid date.
The term "Administrative Proceeding' as used in this Update Statement includes (i) any action or
proceeding brought by a governmental agency, department or officer to enforce any law, regulation,
code or other legal requirement, except for those brought in state or federal courts, and (ii) any action
taken by a governmental agency, department or officer imposing penalties, fines or other sanctions for
failure to comply with any such legal requirement.
If you answer YES to any question, on a separate page provide a complete explanation of each
proceeding and any judgement or decision. Include all details (name of court or administrative
agency, title of case or proceeding, case number, date action was commenced, date
judgement or decision was entered, fines or penalties imposed, etc.).
YES NO
Division of Capital Asset Management Page 7 of 9
Form CQ 3-Revised August, 2000
PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING REFERENCE INFORMATION FOR EACH INCOMPLETE PROJECT LISTED ON THE
PREVIOUS PAGE.
PROJECT TITLE COMPANY NAME CONTACT PERSON TELEPHONE
OWNER
DESIGNER
GC
OWNER
DESIGNER
GC
OWNER
DESIGNER
GC
OWNER
DESIGNER
GC
OWNER
DESIGNER
GC
OWNER
DESIGNER
GC
Is your company or any individual who owns, manages or controls your company affiliated with any owner, designer or general
contractor named above either through a business or family relationship? ❑ YES ❑ NO
Are any of the contact persons named above affiliated with your company or any individual who owns, manages or control your
company, either through a business or family relationship? [] YES ❑ NO
If you have answered YES to either question, explain.
Division of Capital Asset Management Page 6 of 9
Form CQ 3-Revised August, 2000
PART 2 -CURRENTLY HELD CONTRACTS
LIST ALL PUBLIC AND PRIVATE BUILDING AND NON-BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS YOUR FIRM HAS UNDER
CONTRACT ON THIS DATE REGARDLESS OF WHEN OR WHETHER THE WORK COMMENCED.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PROJECT TITLE & WORK START ON CONTRACT % NOT $VALUE OF NO. OF ANNUALIZED
LOCATION CATEGORY AND END SCHEDULE PRICE COMPLET WORK NOT YEARS VALUE OF
DATES (yes/no) E COMPLETE REMAINING INCOMPLETE
(col. 5 x.col.6) (see note WORK
below (col. 7+col. 8)
ANNUALIZED VALUE OF ALL INCOMPLETE CONTRACT WORK (Total of Column 9) $
Column 8 - If less than one year is left in the project schedule,write 1.
- If more than 12 months are left in the project schedule, divide the number of months left
in the project schedule by 12 (calculate to three decimal places).
Division of Capital Asset Management Page 5 of 9
Form CQ 3-Revised August,2000
PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING REFERENCE INFORMATION FOR EACH COMPLETED PROJECT LISTED ON THE
PREVIOUS PAGE.
PROJECT TITLE COMPANY NAME CONTACT PERSON TELEPHONE
OWNER
DESIGNER
GC
OWNER
DESIGNER
GC
OWNER
DESIGNER
GC
OWNER
DESIGNER
GC
OWNER
DESIGNER
GC
OWNER
DESIGNER
GC
Is your company or any individual who owns, manages or controls your company affiliated with any owner, designer or general
contractor named above, either through a business or family relationship? ❑ YES ❑ NO
Are any of the contact persons named above affiliated with your company or any individual who owns, manages or control your
company, either through a business or family relationship? ❑ YES [:] NO
If you have answered YES to either question, explain.
Division of Capital Asset Management Page 4 of 9
Form CQ 3-Revised August,2000
PART 1 - COMPLETED PROJECTS
LIST ALL PUBLIC AND PRIVATE BUILDING PROJECTS YOUR FIRM HAS COMPLETED SINCE THE DATE YOUR
CURRENT CERTIFICATE OF ELIGIBILITY WAS ISSUED (NOT EXTENDED).
PROJECT TITLE & LOCATION WORK CONTRACT PRICE START DATE DATE
CATEGORY COMPLETED
Attach additional sheets if necessary
* If your firm has been terminated from a project prior to completion of the work or has failed or refused to complete its work under
any contract, full details and an explanation must be provided. See Part 3 of this Update Statement.
Division of Capital Asset Management Page 3 of 9
Form CQ 3-Revised August,2000
INSTRUCTIONS
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS determine whether the low bidder is within its Aggregate
Work Limit:
• You must give complete and accurate answers to all
questions and provide all of the information requested. Step 1 Review Update Statement Question#2 to
MAKING A MATERIALLY FALSE STATEMENT IN THIS make sure that all requested information is
UPDATE STATEMENT IS GROUNDS FOR provided and that the bidder has accurately
REJECTING YOUR BID AND FOR DEBARRING YOU calculated and totaled the annualized value of
FROM ALL PUBLIC CONTRACTING. all incomplete work on its currently held
• Information is to cover the period from the date your contracts(column 9).
most recent annual Certificate of Eligibility was issued
(not extended)to the date of the bid. Step 2 Determine the annual dollar value of the work
• You must use this official form of Update Statement. to be performed on your project.This is done
Copies of this form may be obtained from the awarding as follows:
authority and from the Asset Management Web Site: (i) If the project is to be completed in less
www.state.ma.us/cam/.
• If additional space is needed, please copy the than months,the annual dollar value of
appropriate page of this Update Statement and attach it the work k is equal to the full amount of the
bid.
as an additional sheet.
• See the section entitled"Bidding Limits"in the (ii)If the project will take more than 12 months
Instructions to Awarding Authorities for important to complete,calculate the number of years
information concerning your bidding limits. given to complete the project by dividing
the total number of months in the project
INSTRUCTIONS TO AWARDING AUTHORITIES schedule 12(calculate to 3 decimal
places),then divide the amount of the bid
by the calculated number of years to find
Determination of Bidder Qualifications the annual dollar value of the work.
• It is the awarding authority's responsibility to determine Step 3 Add the annualized value of all of the bidder's
who is the lowest eligible and responsible bidder.You incomplete contract work(the total of column 9
must consider all of the information in the low bidder's on page 5) to the annual dollar value of the
Update Statement in making this determination. work to be performed on your project.The
Remember: this information was not available to the total may not exceed the bidder's
Division of Capital Asset Management at the time of Aggregate Work Limit.
certification.
• The bidder's performance on the projected listed in Parts
1 and 2 must be part of your review. Contact the project
references. Correction of Errors and Omissions in Update
• AWARDING AUTHORITIES ARE STRONGLY Statements
ENCOURAGED TO REVIEW THE LOW BIDDER'S
ENTIRE CERTIFICATION FILE AT THE DIVISION OF Matters of Form: An awarding authority shall not reject a
CAPITAL ASSET MANAGEMENT.Telephone(617) contractor's bid because there are mistakes or omissions of
727-9320 for an appointment. form in the Update Statement submitted with the bid,
• If you determine that the bidder does not demonstrably provided the contractor promptly corrects those mistakes or
possess the skill,ability, and integrity necessary to omissions upon request of the awarding authority. [810 CMR
perform the work on your project,you must reject the 4.09(1)].
bid.
Correction of Other Defects: An awarding authority may, in
its discretion,give a contractor notice of defects,other than
Bidding Limits mistakes or omissions of form, in the contractor's Update
Statement,and an opportunity to correct such defects,
Single Proiect Limit: The total amount of the bid, including all provided the correction of such defects is not prejudicial to
alternates, may not exceed the bidder's Single Project Limit. fair competition.An awarding authority may reject a corrected
Update Statement if it contains unfavorable information about
Aggregate Work Limit: The annual value of the work to be the contractor that was omitted from the Update Statement
performed on the contract for which the bid is submitted, filed with the contractor's bid. [810 CMR 4.09(2)].
when added to the annual cost to complete the bidder's other
currently held contracts, may not exceed the bidder's
Aggregate Work Limit. Use the following procedure to
Division of Capital Asset Management Page 2 of 9
Form CQ3—Revised August, 2000
SPECIAL • TO AWARDING AUTHORITY
BIDDERS' UPDATE STATEMENTS NOT : RECORDS
ARE NOT OPEN TO PUBLIC INSPECTION '
Commonwealth of Massachusetts
Division of Capital Asset Management
UPDATE STATEMENT
TO ALL BIDDERS AND AWARDING AUTHORITIES
A COMPLETED AND SIGNED UPDATE STATEMENT MUST BE SUBMITTED
WITH EVERY BID FOR A CONTRACT SUBJECT TO M.G.L. C.149, §44A. ANY
BID SUBMITTED WITHOUT AN APPROPRIATE UPDATE STATEMENT IS
INVALID AND MUST BE REJECTED.
BIDDER'S AFFIDAVIT
I swear under the pains and penalties of perjury that I am duly authorized by the bidder
named below to sign and submit this Update Statement on behalf of the bidder named below,
that I have read this Update Statement, and that all of the information provided by the bidder
in this Update Statement is true, accurate, and complete as of the bid date.
Bid Date Print Name of Bidder
Project Number(or Business Address
name if no number)
Awarding Authority Telephone Number
SIGNATUREb
Bidder's Authorized Representative
Division of Capital Asset Management Page 1 of 9
Form CQ3—Revised August, 2000
Tax and Reporting Compliance Certification
Pursuant to M.G.L. Chapter 62C, Section 49A,, I certify under the penalties of perjury
that I have, to my best knowledge and belief, complied with the law of the
Commonwealth relating to taxes, reporting of employees and contractors, and
withholding and remitting child support.
Social Security Number or Signature of Individual or
Federal Identification Number Corporate Name
by:
Corporate Officer
""' (if applicable)
Certificate by Corporation to Sign Contract
At a duly authorized meeting of the Board of Directors of the
held on
(Name of Corporation) (Date)
At which all the Directors were present or waived notice, it was voted that,
(Name) (Officer)
of this company, be and he hereby is authorized to execute contracts and bonds in the
name and behalf of said company, and affix its Corporate Seal thereto, and such
execution of any contract or obligation in this company's name on its behalf by such
under seal of the company, shall be valid and binding
(Officer)
upon this company,
A TRUE COPY,
ATTEST:
(Clerk)
PLACE OF BUSINESS
DATE OF THIS CONTRACT
I hereby certify that I am the clerk of
that
is the duly elected of said company, and the
above vote has not been amended or rescinded and remains in full force and effect as of
the date of this contract.
(Clerk) (Corporate Seal)
Letter of Intent
To be completed by MBE and submitted by the Contractor
Project Number:
Project Description:
To:
(Name of Contractor)
1. My company intends to perform work in connection with the above project as:
_an individual
_a partnership
`a corporation
—a joint venture with
other(explain)
2. My company has been certified by SOMBA which has current notice of its
minority ownership, control and management.
3. My company understands that if you are awarded the contract referenced above,
you intend to enter into an agreement with my company to perform the activity
described below for the price indicated.
MBE PARTICIPATION WILL BE(specific description of activity):
Total Amount
MBE Company Name
Address
Telephone
Signature of MBE Authorized Agent
Date
Must be submitted with your bid.
MBE Participation Schedule
Project Number:
Project Description:
The Contractor must indicate the MBE it intends to use in the contract,as follows:
Name&Address of MBE Nature of Participation Dollar Value of
Partici on
1.
2.
3,
Total MBE Commitment
Contractor Company Name
Address
Signature, Contractor Authorized Agent
This form must be completed and submitted with your bid.
Foreign Corporation Certification
AFFIDAVIT OF COMPLIANCE
Form AF-4A 1/78
EXECUTIVE OFFICE FOR
ADMINISTRATION AND FINANCE
The Commonwealth of Massachusetts
MASSACHUSETTS BUSINESS CORPORATION
NON-PROFIT CORPORATION
FOREIGN(non-Massachusetts)Corporation
President Clerk of
whose principal office is
(Name of Corporation)
located
do hereby certify that the above named Corporation has filed with the State Secretary all
certificates and annual reports required by Chapter 156B, Section 109 (Business
Corporation), by Chapter 181, Section 4 (Foreign Corporation), or by Chapter 180,
Section.26A(non-profit Corporation) of the Massachusetts General Laws.
SIGNED UNDER THE PENALTIES OF PERJURY THIS day of
20
Signature of responsible Corporate Officer
' Contractors' Certification
Name of Project : LILLY LIBRARY RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
A contractor will not be eligible for award of a contract unless such contractor has
submitted the following certification, which is deemed a part of the resulting contract;
CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION
certifies that:
(Company Name)
1. it intends to use the following listed construction trades in the work under the
contract
and
2. will comply with the minority manpower ratio and specific affirmative action
steps contained herein; and
3. will obtain from each of its subcontractors and submit to the contracting or
administering agency prior to the award of any subcontract under this contract the
subcontractor certification required by these bid conditions.
(Signature of authorized representative of contractor)
Attest:
By:
Affix Corporate Seal
Attest:
By:
Affix Corporate Seal
(Power of Attorney for person signing for surety company must be attached to bond.)
CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE PRINCIPAL
I, , certify that I am the
Secretary of the corporation named
as Principal in the within bound; that , who signed the said
bond on behalf of the Principal was then of said
corporation; that I know his signature thereto is genuine; and that said bond was duly
signed, sealed, and attested to, for, and in behalf of said corporation by authority of its
governing body.
(Corporate Seal)
Awk
BID BOND PAGE 2 OF 2
BID BOND (GENERAL BIDDER)
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we the undersigned,
(Insert full name and address of Contractor)
as PRINCIPAL, and
(Insert full name and address of Surety)
as SURETY
are held and firmly bound unto The City of Northampton, as Obligee in the penal sum of
FIVE PERCENT of the attached bid, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be
made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns,jointly
and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that whereas the Principal has
submitted the attached bid, dated 20 , for
(Insert full name,address and description of project)
NOW THEREFORE, if the Principal shall not withdraw said bid within thirty (30) days,
Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays excluded, after the said opening, and shall within the
period specified therefore enter into a written Contract with The City of Northampton in
accordance with the bid as accepted, and give bond with good and sufficient surety or
sureties, as may be required, for the faithful performance and proper fulfillment of such
contract; or in the event of the withdrawal of said bid within the period specified, or the
failure to enter into such Contract and give such bond within the time specified, if the
Principal shall pay the Authority the difference between the amount specified in said bid and
the amount for work which The City of Northampton may procure the required work up to
the amount of this bond,then the above obligation shall be void and of no effect, otherwise to
remain in full force and virtue.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above-bound parties have executed this instrument under
their several seals this day of , 20 _ the name and
corporation seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed
by its undersigned representative, pursuant to authority of its governing body.
BID BOND PAGE 1 OF 2
OTHER FORM OF BUSINESS ORGANIZATION:
THE BIDDER WILL GIVE BELOW: The name and address of the surety company
who will sign the bonds.
GENERAL BID FORM PAGE 5 OF 5
If a Foreign Corporation (incorporated or organized under laws other than the laws of the
Commonwealth of Massachusetts), is the corporation registered with the Secretary of State
of Massachusetts.
Yes No
If the bidder is selected for the work referred to above, it is required under M.G.L., c. 30,
Section 39-L to furnish to the Awarding Authority a Certificate of the Secretary of State
stating that the corporation has complied with M.G.L., c. 181, Sections 3 and 5, and the date
of such compliance.
IF A PARTNERSHIP: (Name all Partners)
Name of Partner:
Residence Address:
Name of Partner:
Residence Address: 'A wk
Name of Partner:
Residence Address:
IF AN INDIVIDUAL
Name:
Residence:
If an individual doing business under a firm name:
Name of Firm:
Name of Individual:
Business Address:
Residence:
GENERAL BID FORM PAGE 4 OF 5
awarding authority and each in the sum of the contract price, the premiums for which are to
be paid by the general contractor and are included in the contract price.
The undersigned hereby certifies that he is able to furnish labor that can work in
harmony with all other elements of labor employed or to be employed on the work and that
he will comply fully with all laws and regulations applicable to awards made subject to
section forty-four A.
The undersigned further certifies under the penalties of perjury that this bid is in all
respects bona fide, fair and made without collusion or fraud with any other person. As used
in this subsection the word "person" shall mean any natural person,joint venture,
partnership, corporation or other business or legal entity. The undersigned further certifies
under penalty of perjury that the said undersigned is not presently debarred from doing
public construction work in the commonwealth under the provisions of section twenty-nine F
of chapter twenty-nine, or any other applicable debarment provisions of any other chapter of
the General Laws or any rule or regulation promulgated thereunder.
Date
,, (Name of General Bidder)
By
(Name of Person Signing Bid and Title)
(Business Address)
(City and State)
NOTE: If the Bidder is a Corporation, indicate state of incorporation; if a Partnership,
give full names and addresses of all partners, and if an individual, give residential address if
different from business address. Use the spaces on the following pages:
IF A CORPORATION:
State of Incorporation
President:
A0111" Treasurer:
Secretary:
GENERAL BID FORM PAGE 3 OF 5
Item 2. Sub-bids as follows:--
SECTION SUBTRADE NAME OF SUB-BIDDER AMOUNT BONDS REQUIRED
Yes or No
04200 Unit Masonry
04500 Masonry Restoration
05500 Metal Fabrications
07311 Asphalt Shingles
07533 Single Ply Membrane
07620 Sheet Metal Flashing
08520 Aluminum Windows
08410 Alum. Storefronts
08800 Glazing
09511 Acoustical Ceilings
09680 Carpet
09900 Painting
15300 Fire Protection
15400 Plumbing
15600 HVAC
1600-0 Electrical
Total of Item 2 $
The undersigned agrees that each of the above named sub-bidders will be used for the
work indicated at the amount stated, unless a substitution is made. The undersigned further
agrees to pay the premiums for the performance and payment bonds furnished by sub-bidders
as requested herein and that all of the cost of all such premiums is included in the amount set
forth in Item 1 of this bid.
The undersigned agrees that if he is selected as general contractor, he will promptly
confer with the awarding authority on the question of sub-bidders; and that the awarding
authority may substitute for any sub-bid listed above a sub-bid filed with the awarding
authority by another sub-bidder for the sub-trade against whose standing and ability the
undersigned makes no objection; and that the undersigned will use all such finally selected
sub-bidders at the amounts named in their respective sub-bids and be in every way as
responsible for them and their work as if they had been originally named in this general bid,
the total contract price being adjusted to conform thereto.
The undersigned agrees that, if he is selected as general contractor, he will within five
days, Saturdays, Sundays and legal holidays excluded, after presentation thereof by the
awarding authority, execute a contract in accordance with the terms of this bid and furnish a
performance bond and also a labor and materials or payment bond, each of a surety company
qualified to do business under the laws of the commonwealth and satisfactory to the
GENERAL BID FORM PAGE 2 OF 5
FORM FOR GENERAL BID
CITY OF NORTHAMPTON,MA
To the Awarding Authority:
A. The undersigned proposes to furnish all labor and materials required for the
Renovations and Expansion of the Lilly Library, in Florence, Massachusetts, in accordance
with the accompanying plans and specifications prepared by Caolo & Bieniek Associates,
Inc., 521 East Street, Chicopee, MA 01020 for the contract price specified below, subject to
additions and deductions according to the terms of the specifications.
B. This bid includes addenda numbered
D. The proposed contract price is
Dollars ($ )
E. Alternates:
Alternate No. 1: Masonry restoration to include cleaning
and repointing of existing brick and
granite as indicated in Section 04500,
Masonry Restoration.
Base Bid: Not to include the work of
Section 04500, MasopM Restoration.
Add
Alternate No. 2: New aluminum replacement windows in
the existing library building.
Base Bid: Windows in the existing
library to remain.
Add
F. Unit Prices:
Not Applicable
G. The subdivision of the proposed contract price is as follows:
Item 1. The work of the general contractor, being all work other than that
covered by Item 2. $
GENERAL BID FORM PAGE 1 OF 5
BID PACKAGE FOR GENERAL BID
XI. ACCESS TO RECORDS
A. This contract requires that the City of Northampton, the Federal Grantor Agency, the
Comptroller General of the United States or any of their duly authorized representatives, shall have
access to any bonds,documents,papers, and records of the contractor which are directly pertinent to a
specific grant program for the purpose of making audit,examination,excerpts and transcriptions.
XII. GENERAL BID
A. Every general bid submitted shall be submitted on a form furnished by the awarding authority
and containing the following provisions.
B. By submitting a bid, the bidder agrees and warrants that he has examined the site and the
specifications and drawings, and where the specifications and drawings require in any of the work a
given result to be produced, that the specifications and drawings are adequate and the required result
can be produced under the specifications and drawings. No claim for any extra or any alleged
damage due to delay will be allowed because of alleged impossibilities in the production of the results
specified or because of inadequate or improper plans and specifications, and whenever a result is
required, the successful bidder shall furnish any and all extras and make any changes needed to
produce,to the satisfaction of the awarding authority,the required result.
XIII. GENERAL
A. General bids shall be for the complete work as specified, and the general contractor shall be
selected on the basis of such general bids. Every general bid which is not accompanied by a bid
deposit as prescribed, or which is on a form not completely filled in, or which is incomplete,
conditional or obscure, or which contains any addition not called for, shall be invalid; and the
awarding authority shall reject every such general bid. No such general bid shall be rejected because
of the failure to submit prices for, or information relating to, any item or items for which no specific
space is provided in the general bid form furnished by the awarding authority, but his sentence shall
not be applicable to any failure to furnish prices or information required by this section to be
furnished in the above "Form of Proposal - General Bid". General bids shall be publicly opened and
read by the awarding authority forthwith and after the time limit for the filing thereof.
XIV. TIME OF COMPLETION
A. The total time for completion of the project covered by this contract shall be twelve (12)
months after award of contract.
INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS PAGE 4 of 4
B. Bidders are cautioned that, while telegraphic modifications of bids may be received as
provided above, such modifications, if not explicit and if in any sense subject to misinterpretation,
shall make the bid so modified or amended subject to rejection. Telegraphic modifications must be
confirmed in writing immediately.
C. Erasures or other changes in the Bid must be explained or noted over the signature.
VII. REJECTION OF BIDS
A. In inviting bids,the awarding authority shall reserve the right to reject any of all such general
bids and waive minor informalities, if it be in the public interest to do so.
VIII. WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
A. Any bid may be withdrawn by written or telegraphic request dispatched by a general bidder
in time for delivery in the normal course of business prior to the hours fixed respectively for the
opening of general bids. Prior to such hours, telegraphic withdrawal of bids must be confirmed over
the signature of the bidders by written notice deposited in the United States mail.
IX. INTERPRETATIONS
A. No oral interpretations will be made to any bidder as to the meaning of the drawings and
specifications. Every request for such an interpretation shall be made in writing by a general bidder
designated and addressed and forwarded to CAOLO AND BIENIEK ASSOCIATES, INC., 521 East
Street,Chicopee,Massachusetts 01020.
No inquiry received within ten days of the date fixed for opening of general bids will be given
consideration. Every interpretation made to a bidder will be in the form of an addendum to the
specification which, if issued, may be sent as promptly as is practicable to all persons to whom the
drawings and specifications have been issued. All such addenda shall become a part of the contract
documents. Failure of the awarding authority to send, or of any bidder to receive, any such
interpretation shall not relieve any bidder from any obligation under his bid as submitted. In the
event that there is a discrepancy between the prices written in words and written in figures,the prices
written in words shall govern.
X. EXAMINATION OF SITE,DRAWINGS,ETC.
A. Each bidder shall visit the site of the proposed work and fully acquaint himself with
circumstances and conditions relating to the entire project as they exist so that he may fully
understand the facilities, difficulties and restrictions attending the execution of the work under his
contract. Bidders shall also thoroughly examine and be familiar with the drawings and the
specifications. The failure or omission of any bidder to receive or examine any form, instrument or
ew document, or to visit the site and acquaint himself with conditions there existing shall in no way
relieve any bidder from any obligation with respect to his bid.
INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS PAGE 3 of 4
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
1. During handling and installation of products at the Project site,clean and protect the
work in progress,as well as the adjoining work,as part of a continuing maintenance
program.
2. Apply protective covering on installed work,where required to ensure freedom from
damage or deterioration,up to Substantial Completion and acceptance of the Work.
3. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging
effects.
B. Through reasonable control and protection methods,supervise performance of the Work to
ensure that no work, completed or in progress, will be subjected to harmful, dangerous,
damaging or otherwise injurious exposure during the construction period.
C. Clean each element of work at time of installation. Provide sufficient maintenance and
protection during ensuing construction to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration.
D. After painting operations begin in an area, do cleaning only with commercial vacuum
cleaning equipment. Do not use brooms.
E. Remove and legally dispose of all rubbish,debris,and damaged material off the site at least
once per week or as directed by the Architect.
F. Do not allow trash and combustible materials to accumulate in the Building or on the site.
END OF SECTION 01040
PROJECT COORDINATION 01040-5
III. BID SECURITY(SECTION 30-B)
A. Every General Bid shall be accompanied by a bid bond of a responsible bonding company,
cash, or a certified check on, or a treasurer's or cashier's check, issued by a responsible bank or trust
company, payable to the City of Northampton, the amount of such security shall be not less than
FIVE (5%)percent of the value of the proposed work.
IV. GENERAL CONTRACTOR
B. If however, a successful bidder fails to execute the offered contract and to deliver the
required bonds and other documents described elsewhere herein or to start the work within the
prescribed time limit, the bidder will be required, at the option of the Owner, to forfeit his bid deposit
to the Owner as liquidated damages. But the Owner may return the deposit if failure to comply with
the above requirements was due to the bidder's death or total physical disability.
C. All bid deposits of General Bidders, except those of responsible and eligible General Bidders,
shall be returned within fifteen days, Saturdays, Sundays and legal holidays excluded, after the
opening of the general bids. The bid deposits of the three lowest responsible and eligible General
Bidders shall be returned upon the execution and delivery of the general contract or, if no award is
made, upon the expiration of the time prescribed for making an award; except that, if any General
Bidder fails to perform his agreement to execute a contract and furnish performance bond and also a
labor and material or payment bond as stated in his general bid, his bid deposit shall become and be
the property of the City of Northampton to which it is payable, as liquidated damages; provided that,
the amount of the bid deposit, which becomes the property of the City of Northampton shall not, in
any event, exceed the difference between his bid price and the bid price of the next lowest responsible
and eligible bidder; and provided further that, in case of death, disability, bona fide clerical or
mechanical error of a substantial nature, or other unforseen circumstances affecting the General
Bidder,his bid deposit shall be returned to him.
V. BID FORMS
A. The awarding authority shall furnish to every person applying thereforth a form for general
bid and a form for sub-bid (when required). These forms will be available at the office of the
Architect, Caolo&Bieniek Associates,Inc., 521 East Street,Chicopee,MA 01020.
VI. BIDDING PROCEDURE
A. Bid documents submitted by all bidders to the Owner shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope
and clearly labeled with the words "Bid Documents" and the project name, firm, name of bidder, and
the title and number of the section of the specification being bid. The proposal must be signed. Post
marks will not be considered. Bids must be in the Purchasing Department before date and time
specified for the bid opening. Unless specifically authorized, telegraphic bids WILL NOT BE
CONSIDERED, but modification by telegraphy of bids already submitted will be considered if
received prior to the hour set for opening; provided that written confirmation of such modification
over the signature of the bidder is placed in the mail and postmarked prior to the time set for the bid
opening.
INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS PAGE 2 of 4
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
I. BID PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
All bids shall be prepared on the forms furnished with the documents;Form for General Bid or Form
for Sub-bid, as applicable.
Fill in all blanks on the bid forms by typewriter or manually, in ink. No interlineations, alterations or
erasures shall be included in any submitted bid form. Where so required, dollar amounts shall be
expressed in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy between the two, the written amount
shall govern.
Each bid shall be sealed in an envelope with the following legibly marked on one side of the
envelope:
GENERAL BID: #
NAME OF PROJECT
TIME AND DATE OF OPENING
The Contractor awarded contracts shall comply with all requirements of the Affirmative Action,
Section 3 Plan and MBE/WBE Compliance Programs as illustrated in the Table of Contents.
" All contractorsibidders and all subcontractors/sub bidders shall comply with the provisions of
executive order 11246 Equal Employment Opportunity,as amended, Section 3 Plan requirements,
federal labor standards including Davis Bacon and Related Acts,Federal Contract Work Hours and
Safety Standards Act and the Copeland Act. This project is subject to both state and federal
prevailing wage rates,the higher of the two rates must be paid"
II. AWARD OF CONTRACT(SECTION 39-M)
A. Contract shall be awarded to the lowest responsible and responsive General Bidder on the
basis of competitive bids. The award of the contract shall be made within sixty days, Saturdays,
Sundays and legal holidays excluded, after the opening of the general bids therefore. If the General
Bidder selected as the General Contractor fails to perform his agreement to execute a contract in
accordance with the terms of his general bid and furnish a performance bond and also a labor and
materials or payment bond as stated in his general bid in accordance with Section Thirty, and award
shall be made to the next lowest responsible and eligible general bidder. The sixty day time limit
shall not be applicable to a second or subsequent award made after the expiration of the time limit
with the consent of said next lowest responsible and eligible General Bidder, and made because the
original award made within the time limit was invalid, or because the General Bidder failed to
execute the general contract or to provide a performance bond and labor and materials or payment
bond.
B. Except as otherwise provided, the words "lowest responsible and responsive bidder" shall
mean the bidder whose bid is lowest of those bidders possessing the skill, ability and integrity
necessary for the faithful performance of the work and who shall certify that he is able to furnish
"* labor that can work in harmony with all other elements of labor employed or to be employed on the
work. Essential information in regard to such qualification shall be submitted in such form as may be
requested by the awarding authority.
INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS PAGE 1 of 4
PROPOSAL FORM
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
This document contains the following forms,which must be completed in their entirety:
A. For General Bidders
1. General Bid Form
2. Bid Bond
3. Contractor's Certification
4. Foreign Corporation Certificate
5. MBE Participation Schedule
6. Letter of Intent
7. Certificate by Corporation to Sign Contract
8. Tax and Reporting Compliance Certification
9. DCAM Update Statement(Revised August 2000)
B. For Sub Bidders
1. Sub-Bid Form
2. Bid Bond
3. Subcontractor's Certification
4. Foreign Corporation Certificate
5. MBE Participation Schedule
6. Letter of Intent
7. Certificate by Corporation to Sign Contract
8. Tax and Reporting Compliance Certification
THESE DOCUMENTS MUST BE COMPLETED AND RETURNED, AS SPECIFIED, IN A
SEALED ENVELOPE TO THE AUDITOR'S OFFICE, CITY HALL, 210 MAIN STREET,
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS 01060, ATTN: BOB MAHAR, NO LATER THAN 2:00
P.M. ON JUNE 7, 2005 FOR FILED SUB-BIDDERS AND 2:00 P.M. ON JUNE 21, 2005 FOR
GENERAL BIDDERS.
PROPOSAL FORM PAGE 1 OF 1
BIDDING DOCUMENTS
Awk
Every bid shall be accompanied by a proposal guarantee in the form of lawful money, a Bid
Bond, or a certified check on, or a treasurer's or cashier's check issued by a responsible bank
or trust company having offices in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts. The proposal
guarantee shall be in the amount of five percent (5%) of the amount of the bid. Checks and
bid bonds shall be payable to the Trustees of Lilly Library.
Specifications and proposal forms may be secured at the office of the Architect, Caolo &
Bieniek Associates, Inc., 521 East Street, Chicopee, MA 01020 oil May 24,2005, after 12:00
noon. A Two Hundred Twenty Five ($225.00) Dollar plan deposit, (certified check, bank
check or money order) is required and is refundable on return of documents in good
condition within 30 days of the receipt of General Bids. Checks must be made payable to
Caolo &Bieniek Associates, Inc.
Bidders requesting documents to be mailed to them shall include a separate non-refundable
check for Seventy Five ($75.00) Dollars per set payable to Caolo & Bieniek Associates to
cover $50.00 shipping and $25.00 handling costs. Any bidder requesting the use of their
own shipping account will still be subject to the handling cost of$25.00. Sets cannot be sent
to any Post Office box number, but must be sent to a street number.
A Site Visit and Pre-Bid Conference will be conducted on June 1, 2005 at 11:00 a.m. at the
site on 19 Meadow Street, Florence, MA for the benefit of the interested contractors. AMIN
A Performance and Payment Bond in the full amount of the Contract will be required of the
successful bidder. Attorney-in-fact who signs Bid Bonds or Payment Bonds and
Performance Bonds must file with each Bond a certified and effective dated copy of their
power of attorney. This project is subject to both state and federal prevailing wage rates,the
higher of the two rates must be paid. All contractors/bidders and all subcontractors/sub
bidders shall comply with the provisions of executive order 11246 Equal Employment
Opportunity, as amended, Section 3 Plan requirements, federal labor standards including
Davis Bacon and Related Acts, Federal Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act and
the Copeland Act. No proposal may be withdrawn within 30 days, Saturdays, Sundays and
legal holidays excluded, after the actual date of the opening of bids.
The Awarding Authority reserves the right to waive any informality in or to reject any or all
proposals or to accept any proposal which in their opinion, is in their best interest of the City
of Northampton, Massachusetts, whether or not such proposal is the lowest bid.
Robert Mahar
The Trustees of Lilly Library
INVITATION TO BID PAGE 2 OF 2
INVITATION TO BID
Sealed proposals for Renovations and Expansion of the Lilly Library, 19 Meadow Street,
Florence, MA will be received by the Northampton Auditor's Office, City Hall, 210 Main
Street,Northampton,MA 01060,Attn: Robert Mahar.
Filed Sub-Bids in the following categories:
04200 -Unit Masonry including
04500 -Masonry Restoration and Repair
05500 -Metal Fabrications
07311 -Asphalt Shingles including
07533 - Single Ply Membrane Roofing and
07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim
08520 -Aluminum Windows including
08410 -Aluminum Storefront Systems and
08800 - Glazing
09511 -Acoustical Ceilings
09680 - Carpet
09900 -Painting
15300 -Fire Protection
15400 -Plumbing
15600 -HVAC
16000 -Electrical
will be received until 2:00 p.m. on June 7, 2005, at which time they will be publicly opened
and read aloud. Late postmarks will not be accepted. All proposals must be submitted in a
sealed envelope bearing the Bid Number, Bid Title, Date and Time of Bid Opening and the
Bidders Name and Address.
General bids will be received until 2:00 p.m. on June 21, 2005, at which time they will be
publicly opened and read aloud. Late postmarks will not be accepted. All proposals must be
submitted in a sealed envelope bearing the Bid Number, Bid Title, Date and Time of Bid
Opening and the Bidders Name and Address.
Estimated project cost is $2,300,000.00.
In accordance with Section 44D of Chapter 149 of the General Laws of Massachusetts as
amended by Section 46 of Chapter 484, prospective bidders must submit to the Owner, with
their bid, a Certificate of Eligibility issued by the Division of Capital Asset Management
(DCAM), showing that the Contractor has been approved to bid on projects of the size and
nature as advertised herein. Prospective bidders must also submit with their bid an update
statement summarizing his record for the period between the latest DCAM certificate and the
date of his bid. The form of update statement is bound in the Contract Documents.
INVITATION TO BID PAGE 1 OF 2
ADVERTISEMENT
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS
E-1 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES
E-2 ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLANS
E-3 POWER&SIGNAL FLOOR PLANS
SE-1 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN
END OF INDEX TO DRAWINGS
INDEX TO DRAWINGS Page 3 of 3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA ..
ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS(continued)
A600 ENLARGED PLANS AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
A601 ENLARGED PLANS &INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
A602 MILLWORK DETAILS
A700 REFLECTED CEILING PLANS(1/8"=1'-0")
A701 REFLECTED CEILING PLANS,DETAILS &FURNITURE PLANS
A800 ELEVATORS& STAIRS(1/4"=1'0")
A801 ENLARGED ELEVATOR PLANS, SECTIONS & DETAILS
A802 STAIR SECTIONS &DETAILS
STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS
S L 1 FOUNDATION PLAN, SECOND FLOOR&ROOF FRAMING PLAN
S1.2 TYPICAL FOUNDATION DETAILS
S1.3 FOUNDATION, SECOND FLOOR AND ROOF FRAMING SECTIONS
S 1.4 FOUNDATION, SECOND FLOOR AND ROOF FRAMING SECTIONS
S2.1 TYPICAL DETAILS AND GENERAL NOTES
S3.1 BRACING DETAILS
S4.1 COLUMN SCHEDULE
PLUMBING DRAWINGS
P-1 PLUMBING PLANS &DETAILS
FIRE PROTECTION DRAWINGS
FP 1 FIRE PROTECTION DRAWINGS
HVAC DRAWINGS
M-1 HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN
M-2 HVAC NEW WORK PLAN
M-3 HVAC SCHEDULES
INDEX TO DRAWINGS Page 2 of 3
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
INDEX TO DRAWINGS
TITLE SHEET
SITE DRAWINGS
Cl SITE COVER SHEET
C2 LEGEND&GENERAL NOTES
C3 SITE LAYOUT PLAN
C4 GRADING SURFACE,DRAINAGE&LANDSCAPING PLAN
C5 SITE UTILITIES PLAN
C6 SITE DETAILS
C7 SITE DETAILS
C8 SITE DETAILS
El EXISTING CONDITIONS PLAN
ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS
D100 DEMOLITION PLAN(1/8"=V-0")
D100 FIRST AND SECOND DEMOTLANS
A100 FLOOR/ROOF PLANS(1/8"=1'-0")
A101 FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR PLANS
A102 ROOF,ATTIC CRAWL SPACE PLAN
A103 ROOF DETAILS
A200 SCHEDULES
A201 FINISH SCHEDULE,PLAN&TOILET ROOM DETAILS
A202 DOOR SCHEDULE&ELEVATIONS
A203 WINDOW ELEVATIONS/DTLS. &WALL TYPES
A204 DOOR&INTERIOR WINDOW FRAME DETAILS
A400 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS(1/8"=1'-0")
A401 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS
A500 BUILDING AND WALL SECTIONS
A501 BUILDING SECTIONS(1/8"=P-0")& STAIR DTLS.
A502 WALL SECTIONS (3/4"=V-0")
A503 WALL SECTIONS (3/4"= V-0")
INDEX TO DRAWINGS Page 1 of 3
R 00W,
TECBMCAL SPECIFICATIONS(continued):
*** =FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED
No. of Pages
DIVISION 12-FURNISHINGS
12690-Floor Mats........................................................................................................2
DIVISION 13- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION-Not Applicable
DIVISION 14-CONVEYING SYSTEMS
***14212-Hydraulic Elevator............................................................................................ 19
DIVISION 15-MECHANCIAL SYSTEMS
***15300-Fire Protection.................................................................................................. 14
*** 15400-Plumbing.........................................................................................................26
*** 15600-Heating,Ventilating and Air Conditioning........................................................ 94
DIVISION 16-ELECTRICAL
***16000-Electrical.........................................................................................................47
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 5 OF 5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS(continued):
*** =FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED
No. of Pages
DIVISION 7- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07210-Building Insulation..............................................................................................5
07270-Firestopping.........................................................................................................9
***07311 -Asphalt Shingles..................................................................................................7
07466-Fiber Cement Siding............................................................................................5
***07533 - Single Ply Membrane Roofing...........................................................................23
***07620-Sheet Metal Flashing&Trim..............................................................................8
07920-Joint Sealants..................................................................................................... 12
DIVISION 8-DOORS &WINDOWS
08110-Steel Doors&Frames..........................................................................................8
08211 -Flush Wood Doors...............................................................................................7
08305-Access Doors.......................................................................................................4
***08410-Aluminum Storefront Systems........................................................................... 11
***08520-Aluminum Windows.......................................................................................... 11
08710-Finish Hardware................................................................................................. 16
08715 -Automatic Door Operator....................................................................................7
***08800-Glazing............................................................................................................... 12
DIVISION 9-FINISHES
09255 - Gypsum Board Assemblies................................................................................ 14
09310 Ceramic Tile...................................................................................................... 13
***09511 -Acoustical Panel Ceilings.................................................................................. 11
09651 -Resilient Tile Flooring.........................................................................................6
09653-Resilient Wall Base and Accessories...................................................................5
***09680-Carpet...................................................................................................................9
09720-Wall Covering......................................................................................................3
***09900-Painting.............................................................................................................. 11
DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES
10200-Louvers ................................................................................................................5
10425-Signs.....................................................................................................................5
10520-Fire-Protection Specialties...................................................................................5
10801 -Toilet and Bath Accessories................................................................................5
DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT-Not Applicable
TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 4 OF 5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (continued):
*** =FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED
No. of Pages
DIVISION 2- SITE WORK
02010- Sub-Surface Soil Investigation............................•...........................................•••.8
02070-Selective Demolition........................................................................................... 6
02080-Asbestos Abatement.......................................................................................... 16
02081 -Disturbance of Lead Containing Materials........................................................ 10
02100-Demolition,Clearing&Grubbing ......••3
..............................................................
02110-Site Preparation....................................................................................................4
02200-Earthwork........................................................................................................... 19
02274-Erosion Control....................................................................................................3
02600-Bituminous Concrete Paving...............................................................................6
02666-Water Distribution System................................................................................. 10
02720- Storm Drainage System.......................................................................................5
02740- Sanitary Sewer System........................................................................................4
02930-Lawns...................................................................................................................8
02955 -Trees and Shrubs................................................................................................ 10
DIVISION 3- CONCRETE
03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete .....................................................................................20
DIVISION 4- MASONRY
***04200-Unit Masonry......................................................................................................24
***04500-Masonry Restoration and Repair........................................................................ 10
DIVISION 5 -METALS
05120-Structural Steel................................................................................................... 10
05210-Steel Joists ...........................................................................................................5
05310-Steel Deck............................................................................................................6
05410-Stud Shear Connectors........................................................................................ 3
***05500-Metal Fabrications .. 17
...........................................................................................
DIVISION 6-WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100-Rough Carpentry................................................................................................. 6
06402-Interior Architectural Woodwork ...11
TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 3 OF 5
CONTRACT FORMS
ConstructionContract......................................................................................................................2
PerformanceBond...........................................................................................................................3
PaymentBond..................................................................................................................................2
Statementof Compliance................................................................................................................. 1
Quarterly Projected Workforce Table............................................................................................. 1
PrevailingWage Rates................................................................................................................... 12
FederalWage Rates....................................................................................................................... 12
FEDERAL COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT BLOCK GRANT PROGRAM
Prevailing Wage Rate Requirements............................................................................................... 1
LaborsStandards Certification........................................................................................................ 1
Non-Discrimination and Affirmative Action Certification............................................................. 1
AffirmativeAction Plan.................................................................................................................. 1
Contractor Certification Regarding Section Three and Segregated Facilities................................ 1
ContractorSection 3 Plan Format...................................................................................................2
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
General Conditions of Contract.....................................................................................................62
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS:
*** =FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS No. of Pages
01000A-Special Supplementary Conditions...................................................................5
SettlementAgreement.......................................................................................4
01010-Summary of Work................................................................................................3
01027-Applications for Payment....................................................................................5
01030-Alternates.............................................................................................................2
01035-Modification Procedures......................................................................................2
01040-Project Coordination............................................................................................5
01045 -Cutting and Patching............................................................................................5
01090-Reference Standards ............................................................................................8
01200-Project Meetings..................................................................................................2
01300-Submittals............................................................................................................9
01320-Construction Progress Documentation.............................................................. 11
01400-Quality Control....................................................................................................4
01500-Temporary Facilities.......................................................................................... 17
01600-Materials and Equipment.....................................................................................5
01620-Installation Standards...........................................................................................3
01631 -Product Substitutions...........................................................................................4
01700-Contract Closeout ...............................................................................................5
TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 2 OF 5
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Pages
TableOf Contents............................................................................................................................5
Indexto Drawings............................................................................................................................3
ADVERTISEMENT
InvitationTo Bid.............................................................................................................................2
BIDDING DOCUMENTS
ProposalForm.................................................................................................................................. 1
Instructionsto Bidders.....................................................................................................................4
BID PACKAGE FOR GENERAL BID
Formfor General Bid ......................................................................................................................5
BidBond...........................................................................................................................................2
Contractor's Certification................................................................................................................ 1
Foreign Corporation Certificate...................................................................................................... 1
MBEParticipation Schedule........................................................................................................... 1
Letterof Intent................................................................................................................................. 1
Certificate by Corporation to Sign Contract.................................................................................... 1
Tax and Reporting Compliance Certification.................................................................................. 1
DCAM Update Statement(Revised August 2000)..........................................................................9
BID PACKAGE FOR SUB-BID
Formfor Sub-Bid.............................................................................................................................4
BidBond..........................................................................................................................................2
Subcontractor's Certification .......................................................................................................... 1
Foreign Corporation Certificate...................................................................................................... 1
MBE Participation Schedule........................................................................................................... 1
Letterof Intent................................................................................................................................. 1
Certificate by Corporation to Sign Contract.................................................................................... 1
Tax and Reporting Compliance Certification.................................................................................. 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 OF 5
IF AN INDIVIDUAL
Name:
Residence:
If an individual doing business under a firm name:
Name of Firm:
Name of Individual:
Business Address:
Residence:
OTHER FORM OF BUSINESS ORGANIZATION:
THE BIDDER WILL GIVE BELOW: The name and address of the surety company
who will sign the bonds.
GENERAL BID FORM PAGE 5 OF 5
NOTE: If the Bidder is a Corporation, indicate state of incorporation; if a Partnership,
give full names and addresses of all partners, and if an individual, give residential address if
different from business address. Use the spaces on the following pages:
IF A CORPORATION:
State of Incorporation
President:
Treasurer:
Secretary:
If a Foreign Corporation (incorporated or organized under laws other than the laws of the
Commonwealth of Massachusetts), is the corporation registered with the Secretary of State of
Massachusetts.
Yes No
If the bidder is selected for the work referred to above, it is required under M.G.L., c. 30,
Section 39-L to furnish to the Awarding Authority a Certificate of the Secretary of State
stating that the corporation has complied with M.G.L., c. 181, Sections 3 and 5, and the date
of such compliance.
IF A PARTNERSHIP: (Name all Partners)
Name of Partner:
Residence Address:
Name of Partner:
Residence Address:
Name of Partner:
Residence Address:
GENERAL BID FORM PAGE 4 OF 5
performance bond and also a labor and materials or payment bond, each of a surety company
qualified to do business under the laws of the commonwealth and satisfactory to the awarding
authority and each in the sum of the contract price, the premiums for which are to be paid by
the general contractor and are included in the contract price.
The undersigned hereby certifies that he is able to furnish labor that can work in
harmony with all other elements of labor employed or to be employed on the work and that he
will comply fully with all laws and regulations applicable to awards made subject to section
forty-four A.
The undersigned further certifies under the penalties of perjury that this bid is in all
respects bona fide, fair and made without collusion or fraud with any other person. As used in
this subsection the word "person" shall mean any natural person, joint venture, partnership,
corporation or other business or legal entity. The undersigned further certifies under penalty
of perjury that the said undersigned is not presently debarred from doing public construction
work in the commonwealth under the provisions of section twenty-nine F of chapter twenty-
nine, or any other applicable debarment provisions of any other chapter of the General Laws
or any rule or regulation promulgated thereunder.
Date
(Name of General Bidder)
By
(Name of Person Signing Bid and Title)
(Business Address)
(City and State)
GENERAL BID FORM PAGE 3 OF 5
Item 2. Sub-bids as follows:--
SECTION SUBTRADE NAME OF SUB-BIDDER AMOUNT BONDS REQUIRED
Yes or No
04200 Unit Masonry
05500 Metal Fabrications
07311 Asphalt Shingles
07533 Single Ply Membrane
07620 Sheet Metal Flashing
08410 Alum. Storefronts
08520 Aluminum Windows
08800 Glazing
09511 Acoustical Ceilings
09680 Carpet
09720 Wallcovering
09900 Painting
14212 Hydraulic Elevator
15300 Fire Protection
15400 Plumbing
15600 HVAC
16000 Electrical
Total of Item 2 $
The undersigned agrees that each of the above named sub-bidders will be used for the
work indicated at the amount stated, unless a substitution is made. The undersigned further
agrees to pay the premiums for the performance and payment bonds furnished by sub-bidders
as requested herein and that all of the cost of all such premiums is included in the amount set
forth in Item 1 of this bid.
The undersigned agrees that if he is selected as general contractor, he will promptly
confer with the awarding authority on the question of sub-bidders; and that the awarding
authority may substitute for any sub-bid listed above a sub-bid filed with the awarding
authority by another sub-bidder for the sub-trade against whose standing and ability the
undersigned makes no objection; and that the undersigned will use all such finally selected
sub-bidders at the amounts named in their respective sub-bids and be in every way as
responsible for them and their work as if they had been originally named in this general bid,
the total contract price being adjusted to conform thereto.
The undersigned agrees that, if he is selected as general contractor, he will within five
days, Saturdays, Sundays and legal holidays excluded, after presentation thereof by the
awarding authority, execute a contract in accordance with the terms of this bid and furnish a
GENERAL BID FORM PAGE 2 OF 5
FORM FOR GENERAL BID
CITY OF NORTHAMPTON,MA
To the Awarding Authority:
A. The undersigned proposes to furnish all labor and materials required for the
Renovations and Expansion of the Lilly Library, in Florence, Massachusetts, in accordance
with the accompanying plans and specifications prepared by Caolo&Bieniek Associates, Inc.,
521 East Street, Chicopee, MA 01020 for the contract price specified below, subject to
additions and deductions according to the terms of the specifications.
B. This bid includes addenda numbered
D. The proposed contract price is
Dollars($ )
E. Alternates:
Alternate No. 1: Masonry restoration to include cleaning
and repointing of existing brick and
granite as indicated in Section 04500,
Masonry Restoration.
Base Bid: Not to include the work of
Section 04500, Masonry Restoration.
Add
Alternate No. 2: New aluminum replacement windows in
the existing library building.
Base Bid: Windows in the existing
library to remain.
Add
F. Unit Prices:
Not Applicable
G. The subdivision of the proposed contract price is as follows:
Item 1. The work of the general contractor, being all work other than that
covered by Item 2. $
GENERAL BID FORM PAGE 1 OF 5
I
I
6" METAL STUDS
@ 16"O.C.
(COORD. W/ARCH.)
a
1 112"METAL
CONT. P.T.WOOD DECK
BLOCKING (TYP.
BETWEEN DECK
FLUTES BELOW
BOTTOM TRACK)
T.O.S. EL. _
306-5 1/2"
2x6 @ 16"O.C. W14 BEAM
STUD WALL 1/2"0 THRU BOLT 16KCS JOIST
@ 2'-0"O.C.
SECTION 19
SCALE 3/4"= 1'-0" S •.�
TO REPLACE SECTION 19 ON S1.4
OF CONTRACT DRAWINGS
scale: AS SHOWN Johnson& Seaman
date: 06.14.2005 Engineering,Inc.
SK-S2 drwn: LAC Lilly Library Mechanical and Structural Engineering
chkd: RAJ 19 Meadow Street
30 Faith Avenue,Auburn,Massachusetts 01501
Florence,Massachusetts Phone (508)832-3535 Fax (509)832-3393
5 6 Q4'-O" 12
4'-0" 17'-0"' 16-0" 10'-0" 7'-01'
21
S1.4
VER ICAL V TIC
BRA E
A, RR17 W1 0x22 BRACE
EO o:.. o W
506 > > > o o° �ao�+�o VERTICAL
�i BRACE
26 RBS N1 6x2 R616 W1 4x26
t/2") o '-s z" (3os-e z)co ; 1 1/?"22 TYP B
N �-- — ME AL RO F DECK
o S D. DIAGONAL (TY1 1. LIN SS OT EI
AG AL 'S 4- 1 KCS3 Q SP B IDGIN NO ED)
RJZ
W1 x12
rn v 3- 16 3 m
N
N N STD DIAG NAL O N EQ. S CED 20
BRIDGING -J L4x4x3 8 RJ S1.4
CENTER JOIS
Q M BELOW MANS RD
NAL N �O 0 U ANGLE FRAM
\ N "k N (Q
° L4x4x3/8
�° M R3 JOIST XT.
RB4 16x2 306-0" 1 V 16 14x26
06'-0")
fV
E i A 22 DETAIL ON S2.1)
8x 1.
1' Z 23 19
J
S1.4 S1.4
0
C8x11.5 �' �1, SEE PARTIAL RO F
FRAMING DETAIL
61t::::��ONS2,1
1"0 TIE RODS
DETAIL ON S2.1)
0
PARTIAL ROOF FRAMING PLAN
SCALE 1/8"= 1'-0"
REF: S1.1
scale: AS SHOWN PLAN VIEW-SHORING _(��(� Johnson &Seaman
date: 06.14.2005 t:J l5 Engineering,Inc.
SK-S1 drwn: LAC Lilly Library Mechanical and Structural Engineering
chkd: RAJ 19 Meadow Street
30 Fatth Avenue,Auburn,Massachusetts 01501
Florence,Massachusetts Phone (508)832.3535 Fax (508)932-3393
Ex
w
m wt"S'
W0RK1 LOW REGEPTION �b
GOUNTER ,6WI _
m EX15TING COLUMN W NEW
OAK WOODWORK 5URROUND
2"6R 9HET W/
GOVE DASHED LINE INDICATE5 CABINET
GIRGULATION BELOW COUNTERTOP
104 3'-u'
BOOK BIN N.I.G. DASHED LINE INDICATES FADE
OF 4.5TUD WALL BELOW
i-
PA55 TWX DOOR 2'6ROMET HIM COVER
° WORK SCREENS
a -
A
5-2' 2'-0'
.� Ab04
0
GIRGUL'6'TION P12-5K
114 r
LILLY LIBRARY CIRCULATION DESK ADDENDUM NO. 3
19 MEADOW ST. PLAN
FLORENCE SK A-4
MA 01060 rt CAOLO & SIENIEK ASSOCIATES, INC.
DATE: .1 5 i y ARCHITECTURES PLANNINGOINTERIOR DESIGN
521 East Street Chicopee, Massachusetts 01020-4161
SCALE: 1/4" — 1-011 (413)594-2800 Fax(413)594-2900 info@CSAarchitects.net
INN Ill I
OAK BOARD
OAK BASE SEE p DWG
OAK BOARD N BANDING A202 APROX AREA OF REVF"
COMPUTER SCREEN
APPLIED MOLDING PANELS RAM LgKU W YV.
BROSI I TRIM 06263 EDGE
Y OAK PLYWOOD FACE
COMf'IJIER 5CREEN
'v rrv.
4' q' 4'
rn. I 4'
Ll I
I L]I
ql m
io
5 EG.PANELS 9CEPED
ELEVATION B PATRON 51DE ACE5981 E WATER ACE59BI F ca TER
APROX AREA OF REVISION
COMPUTER SCREEN
OPEN FOR BOOK DROP
KBR05W TRIM 08263
PLAM.COUNTER W/WD.
EDGE
4
4- 4' 4. APROX AREA OF REYISiON
10'
60HM R SCREEN.
BASE TO BE WED AND MELN.
T-2' FASTENED TO PLAS.LAM.T0P
ELEVAT N A P=TRON DE 4•
PLA5 LAML Ca vu ON
PLn+ooD BAf.K1P
COUNTER/ RECEPTION ELEVATION J
6 64ALG, 9/6••r-0' W7.ED5E5ttP.
m
b• 293 OLZI(M AS REOT)
APPLIED MOLDING 5V%O
45263
C SECTION RECEPTION COUNTER
LILLY LIBRARY COMPUTER SCREENS ADDENDUM NO. 3
19 MEADOW ST. DETAIL
FLORENCE A-3
MA 01060 CAOLO & BIENIEK ASSOCIATES, INC. SK
ARCHITECTUREOPLANNIN09INTERIOR DESIGN
DATE: 14.0 521 East Street Chicopee, Massachusetts 01020-4161
SCALE: NTS 12 (413)594-2800 Fax(413)594-2900 info @CBAarchitects.net
Item No. 7 Drawing No.A203
Modify: The interior sills at details 1,2, 3 and 4 to match the sill profile shown on
Drawing A202,wood casing Section I.
Item No. 8 Drawing No. A601
Add the following note to clarify finishing of new and existing woodwork:
All woodwork in the existing library scheduled to remain shall be field finished: painted at
the first floor and stained at the second floor by the painting subcontractor. Woodwork in
the addition shall be shop finished: painted poplar at the first floor and stained oak at the
second floor. In the addition new wood base shall be installed after the wall mounted
shelving is in place. In the existing library the wood base shall be removed and the walls
patched where wall mounted shelving is to be installed.
END OF ADDENDUM#3
Lilly Library
Renovations and Expansion
Addendum#3 Page 6
Item No. 2 Specification Section 06402-Architectural Woodwork
Paragraph 2.2 H
Delete: The reference to solid surface counters.
Item No. 3 Specification Section 06402-Architectural Woodwork
Paragraph 2.9 F
Delete: The requirement for paste wood filler.
Item No. 4 Specification Section 08710-Finish Hardware
Make the following changes:
- Change the lever design for all Von-Duprin exit devices from 06 to 07
- Delete the power operators from this section. Power operators at entry doors are
provided under Section 08715 -Automatic Door Operators.
- Add exit alarm Sargent 94-550-9V to Hardware Set No. 11
- Provide Hardware Set No. I for Door No. 208
- Provide Hardware Set No. 14 for Door No. 108
DRAWING ITEMS:
Item No. 5 Drawing No. A101 -Second Floor Plan
Add the note: Staff lockers in Room No. 210 shall be as manufactured by Hollman Inc.
of Irving, Texas or equal. Provide wood lockers 72" high with hanging
rod and shelf in quantity indicated on drawings. Lockers shall have
concealed hinges, keyed locks,plastic laminate finish with flush doors and
required fillers and trim.
Item No. 6 Drawing No. A202
Change: The Door Schedule on Door No. 210 to indicate that a new SCW door to
match Type F is required to fit the existing wood frame.
Add the following note to wood casing Section H:
Column Capitals shall be installed in ten (10) locations total corresponding to Details 3
and 6 on Drawing Al01 and on the two columns at the circulation Desk.
Add: On Door Schedule and Elevations add a 2 square foot louver to Door No.
205 Data Room and provide 1"under cuts at all toilet room doors.
Delete: On Door Schedule at Door No. 119 the note (No. 9) referencing a fixed
door and change the door width to 3'-6". The door will be an operable
door with a new frame and threshold.
Lilly Library
Renovations and Expansion
Addendum#3 Page 5
15400-Plumbing
Alternate Alternate
Name&Address Base bid #1 42 Remarks
Adams Plumbing&Heating 65,117
P.O.Box 126
Adams,MA 01220
Edward F. Corcoran Plumbing 79,100
&Heating
5 Rose Place
Springfield,MA 01104
T.J. Conway Co. 81,900
26 Progress Avenue
Springfield,MA 01104
15600- HVAC
Alternate Attemate
Name&Address Base bid #1 42 Remarks
T.J. Conway Co. 238,600
26 Progress Avenue
Springfield,MA 01104
Adams Plumbing&Heating 267,000
P.O.Box 126
Adams,MA 01220
L.N.King Plumbing,Heating 269,850
&Air Conditioning
1120 Southampton Road
Westfield,MA 01085
16000- Electrical
Alternate Alternate
Name&Address Base bid #1 #2 Remarks
Icon West Corp. 179,000
F.O.Box 178
South Hadley,MA 01075
M.L. Schmitt,Inc. 228,500
371 Taylor Street
Springfield,MA 01101
SPECIFICATIONITEMS:
Item No. 2 Form for General Bid
Delete: Form bound in Specification
Insert: Form for General Bid(5 pages)attached to this Addendum.
Lilly Library
Renovations and Expansion
Addendum#3 Page 4
09511-Acoustical Ceflings
Alternate Alternate
Name&Address Base bid #1 #2 Remarks
Johnson Acoustics,Inc. 19,300
31 Pearson Way, Suite 1
West Springfield,MA 01089
09680- Carpet
Alternate Alternate
Name&Address Base bid #1 #2 Remarks
Ayotte&King for Tile 29,766
165 Trilby Avenue
Chicopee,MA 01020
Capital Carpets&Flooring 31,957
12 Walnut Hill
Woburn,MA 01801
Berkshire Carpet Inc. 61,666
441 Curran Hwy.
North Adams,MA 01247
09720-Wallcoverin & 09900- Painting
Alternate Alternate
Name&Address Base bid #1 #2 Remarks
Fox Painting Co.,Inc. 73,020
P.O.Box 630
Arlington,MA 02476
Northeast Painting Associates 78,000
881 North King Street
Northampton,MA 01060
14212 -Hydraulic Elevator
Alternate Alternate
Name&Address Base bid #1 #2 Remarks
Bay State Elevator Co. 53,200
P.O.Box 910
Agawam,MA 01001
15300 -Fire Protection
Alternate Alternate
Name&Address Base bid #1 #2 Remarks
Allied Fire Protection,Inc. 85,785
11 East Fisk Avenue
Springfield,MA 01107
Adams Plumbing&Heating 95,450
P.O.Box 126
Adams,MA 01220
Lilly Library
Renovations and Expansion
Addendum#3 Page 3
05500-Metal Fabrications
Alternate Alternate
Name&Address Base bid #1 #2 Remarks
Ralph's Blacksmith Shop 34,800
36 Smith Street
Northampton,MA 01060
North Shore Steel Co. 48,200
P.O.Box 330
Lynn,MA 01905
REJECTED:
Accufab Ironworks 31,100 Addendums not
P.O.Box 328 acknowledged
Goshen,MA 01032
07311 -Asphalt Shingles including 07533- Single Ply Membrane& 07620- Sheet Metal
Flashing
Attemate Alternate
Name&Address Base bid #1 #2 Remarks
J.D.Rivet&Co.,Inc. 53,750
P.O.Box 51068
Indian Orchard,MA 01151
Titan Roofing 56,500
70 Orange Street
Chicopee,MA 01013
Greenwood Industries,Inc. 64,244
P.O.Box 2800
Worcester,MA 01613
Rockwell Roofing,Inc. 85,600
44 Pond Street
Leominster,MA 01453
08410-Aluminum Storefronts including 08520-Aluminum Windows & 08800- Glazing
Attemate Alternate
Name&Address Base bid 91 #2 Remarks
R&R Window Contractors 79,460 33,711
One Arthur Street
Easthampton,MA 01027
A&A Window Products,Inc. 81,510 30,250
P.O.Box 218
Malden,MA 02148
Chandler Architectural 82,165 41,337
Products
255 Interstate Drive
West Springfield,MA 01089
Lilly Library
Renovations and Expansion
Addendum#3 Page 2
CURTIS A.EDGIN,A.I.A.,N.C.A.R.B,
JAMES M.HANIFAN,A.I.A.,N.C.A.R.B,
KENNETH R.JODRIE
VITO CAOLO,A.I.A.,N.C.A.R.B.
CAOLO & BIENIEK ASSOCIATES , INC.
ARCHITECTURE • P L A N N I N G • I N T E R I O R D E S I G N
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
Addendum No.3 June 16,2005
This addendum is issued for the purpose of amending the requirements of the contract documents and is
hereby made a part of the contract drawings and specifications to the same extent as though it were fully
incorporated therein.
This addendum consists of six (6) pages of text inclusive of this page, four (4) SK-drawings and a new
General Bid Form(5 pages),for a total of fifteen(15)pages.
GENERAL ITEMS:
Item No. 1 The filed sub-bid results are listed below for use by the General Contractors.
04200-Unit Masonry
Altemate Alternate
Name&Address Base bid #1 92 Remarks
Kronenberger&Sons 0.00 31,000 Restricted to
Restoration,Inc. Kronenberger&
80 East Main Street Son only
Middletown,CT 06457
Sullivan&Narey Const. Co. 48,826 51,214
25 Washington Avenue
Holyoke,MA 01040
Aquadro&Cerntti 50,000 14,021 Restricted to
P.O.Box 656 Aquadro&Cerruti
Northam n MA 01060 only
D.A. Sullivan&Sons 59,897 14,994 Restricted to D.A.
82-84 North Street Sullivan&Sons
Northampton,MA 01060 only
Champlain Masonry Inc. 78,056 13,750
P.O.Box 2695
Pittsfield,MA 01202
521 East Street•Chicopee,Massachusetts 01020-4161 • (413)594-2800 Fax(413)594-2900•info @cbaarchitects.net
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATION AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
SECTION 09720-WALLCOVERING
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.00 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Drawings and conditions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary General
Conditions and all Division 1 Sections,apply to the work of this section.
B. Time,manner,and requirements for submitting filed sub-bids:
1. Sub-bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall be
filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at a time and place as
stipulated in the"NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS".
The following shall appear on the upper left hand corner of the envelope.
NAME OF SUB-BIDDER:
NAME OF PROJECT:
SUB-BID FOR SECTION: 09720-WALLCOVERING
2. Each sub-bid submitted for work under this Section shall be on forms furnished
by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the
General Laws, as amended. Sub bid forms may be obtained at the office of the
Architect-Engineer or may be obtained by written request.
3. Sub-bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a BID
BOND or CASH or CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURER'S or CASHIER'S
CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company payable to the Lilly
Library Association in the amount of 5 percent of the bid. A sub-bid
accompanied by any other form of bid deposit than those specified will be
rejected.
C. Sub-Sub-Bid Requirements: (NONE REQUIRED UNDER THIS SECTION).
D. Work included under this Filed Sub Bid is indicated in:
1. Section 09900-Painting
WALLCOVERING 09720
Item No. 12 Drawing No. C-5
Add the following notes:
1. All underground conduit shall be schedule 40 PVC.
2. The conduit for electrical shown at the north side of the site shall be installed as
shown on Drawing SE-1.
3. The exterior concrete pad at the new main entry shall be as shown on
Drawing A-101 (approximately 150 S.F.).
4. The contractor will not be responsible for utility installation co
sts• The following
work will be done by the utility company and paid for by the Owner.
a. Electric service - installation of the new utility pole and pole mounted
transformer.
b. Gas service - installation of the new gas line up to and including the
meter.
C. Water service - installation of new water line up to and including the
meter.
d. Sanitary-installation of new service to within 10' of the building.
Item No. 13 Drawing No. D-100
Add the following notes:
1. New venting openings with louvers are required in three locations sized as noted
on Drawing A-102.
under Alternate No. 2 shall be by the General
2. Removal of existing windows
Contractor.
Item No. 14 Drawing SE-1 &Elsewhere in other drawings and/or specification:
Disregard Payment to Mass Electric Company,the charges for the Electric Service
Upgrade. Library shall pay all charges involved in this electric service upgrade to Mass
Electric Company.
Item No. 15 Drawing E-3:
First Floor Plan—Power&Signal
Provide 120V power to Book Theft System as per System Manufacturer's requirement.
END OF ADDENDUM#2
Lilly Library
Renovations and Expansion Page 3
Addendum#2
6. Paint interior trim not furnished under Section 06402 -Architectural Woodwork.
All Architectural Woodwork shall be shop finished with touch-up by the installer.
7. Paint all new steel doors and paint wood doors not furnished with factory finish.
8. Paint all exposed interior CMU with latex based block filler and 2 coats of semi-
glass acrylic-latex interior enamel.
9. Paint exposed ceiling structure in Room Nos. 107, 108, 109.
10. Paint exterior fiber cement siding with two coats of 100%acrylic latex paint.
Item No. 5 Specification Section 14212-Hydraulic Elevator
Paragraph 2.02-Description of Equipment
Change: D.' Capacity to 21001bs.
DRAWING ITEMS:
Item No. 6 Drawing No.A-101 -First Floor Plan
In Room No. 109 the"chase above"note shall require a%"exterior plywood construction
to protect wall mounted electrical devices from water piping above.
Item No. 7 Drawing No. A-101
Add the note: The General Contractor shall provide 4" concrete housekeeping pads for
the water heater and expansion tank in Room No. 108.
Item No. 8 Drawing No. A-103-Detail 1:
Change: the note referencing 30#felt underlayment to read 15#felt underlayment.
Item No. 9 Drawing No. A-103-Detail 12:
Delete: the reference to an"emergency generator".
Item No. 10 Drawing No.A-201 -Room Finish Schedule
Delete: the S.A.T. from Room Nos. 107, 108 and 109 and provide a painted finish at the
exposed structure.
Item No. 11 Drawing No.A-202-Door and Frame Schedule
Change: the notes on Door No. 116 to indicate that it is an aluminum storefront
system(FR-7).
Lilly Library
Renovations and Expansion
Addendum#2 Page 2
CURTIS A.EDGIN,A.I.A..N.C.A.R.B.
JAMES M.HANIFAN,A.I.A.,N.C.A.R.B.
KENNETH R.JODRIE
VITO CAOIO,A.I.A.,N.C.A.R.B.
CAOLO & BIENIEK ASSOCIATES , INC.
A R C H I T E C T U R E • P L A N N I N G • I N T E R I OR D E S I G N
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
Addendum No. 2 June 7,2005
This addendum is issued for the purpose of amending the requirements of the contract documents and is
hereby made a part of the contract drawings and specifications to the same extent as though it were fully
incorporated therein.
This addendum consists of three(3)pages of text inclusive of this page and one(1)attachment. For a total
of four(4)pages.
SPECIFICATION ITEMS:
Item No. 1 Specification Section 07466-Fiber Cement Siding
PART 3-EXECUTION
Add the following:
L. All fiber cement board products shall receive pruner paint coating in the factory.
Item No. 2 Specification Section 07533
Paragraph 2.04
Delete: the reference to Dens-Deck.
Item No. 3 Specification Section 09720- Wall Covering
Shall be included in the Filed Sub-Bid for 09900 - Painting. See attached sheet to be
inserted at the beginning of Section 09720.
Item No. 4 Specification Section 09900-Paid
Paragraph 1.02- Work To Be Performed
Add the following:
5. Paint all exterior railings new and existing and new pipe bollards. Paint all
interior steel railings.
521 East Street Chicopee,Massachusetts 01020-4161 • (413)594-2800•Fax(413) 594-2900 info@cbaarchitects.net
4'SD
4"W. UP
- a
2-S.
. ,.5.:
6ASEMENTLEVEL =-=
SD-
4-R.L. UP-�
2 1/2-S. 1
4"S. 4"SD ❑
4"SD
4"S. ❑
2"S. UP B
6"SD
4"S. 6"SD 2"S.
FLCO T FFLCO
2'S.
LEAVING INV.=278'-3"
NEW 6" STORM DRAIN LEAVING
BUILDING, EXTEND TO 10' OUT
SIDE FOUNDATION WALL, BY
MBING SUB—CONTRACTOR.
CO TION BY GENERAL
ONTRA
ADDED STORM DRAIN PIPING & PIPE SIZE
BASEMENT FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN
ROBT W. HALL
Consulting Engineers, Inc. LILLY LIBRARY
MEADOW AGA AM,TMAE01 01T 19 MEADOW STREET
(413) 789-0960 ADDENDUM#1
FLORENCE, MASSACHUSETTS
083-4122
DRAWN BY: MG DATE: 06/01/05 SK-P3
ACTOR. ; 2°CW 1 1/2"CW `
NON-FICTION
H ZI I 4`
i 4" R.L_ UP
— ——— 4" R.L. U P\
2 1/ °V
---- — ----- -- ------ ------- — ----
5TAFF/BREAK I .L. DN.
2io i
All
F.D. "A" I 1 1/2'1/. DN
GAS DN �� b
GAS
I 1/2"HW, 1"CW
U DN. °o
lob 4°W. DN., 2'V UP
P3 �
CW, 1 V-2„�----- -
/2,
� - �� REFERENCE
T 1 --- 205
I
5T IRS ELEV. LOBBY
� 1/2"CW, 1 1/2"S. DN
�� DN 2 7 206 i 1 1 12'V. DN. 2'V. UP
4" R. . UP---- P5
1/1/2'V.CUP/DN DN.
ADDED FLOOR DRAIN-TOILET ROOM 209
CTION LOWER
t 14„�R—� ROO f
UP� I
I
L__
J
0 4” TO R.D.
4"V. DN 4"R.L. DN.
LOWER ROOF PLAN-ADDED ROOF DRAIN
LA SECOND FLOOR PLAN & LONER ROOF
ROBT W. HALL
Consulting Engineers, Inc. LILLY LIBRARY
MEADOW STREET EXT. 19 MEADOW STREET
AGAWAM, MA 01001 ADDENDUM#1
C413> 789-0960 RENCE, MASSACHUSETTS
083-4122 MG DATE: 06/01/05 SK-P1
PAINTED ALL EXISTING RAILING
TO MATCHNEW RAIL5
REMOVE EXI5TI%RAIL
INSTALL NEW PAINTED
DECORATIVE GUARD AND
HANDRAIL
2'-0'
RE5ET GRANITE TREADS AND
REMORTAR 5TEP5 TO MATCH
NEW RI5ER H6T. MATCH EX15.TREAD WIDTH
r.oF.LANDING r.
E0F.V. CURB
ELEV.=286b6' EL =281.85'
NEW STAIR5 TO —
EXISTING GRANITE POST TO
REMAIN.
CONCRETE STAIRS PLAN
4GALM
NEW DECORATIVE 6AURO
AND HAND RAIL PAINTED
TOP OF LADING
NOTE:SLOPE OF ELEV.:21506'
RAILING TO MATCH
THAT OF STEPS 2'-0'
4 — EXISTING GRANITE TREADS
AND RISERS TO BE RESET
4 s
TYF. d IUI I II AND REMORrAR
.1111E
I
° o 00 �
4 oo° °�8 p 111= 2,$•I.D.6LAV.SLEEVE
TOP OF W LURE m o°° I I_ W H16H OENISTY GROUT
NE
_ illl
ELEV.=28185' oo: o IF 11111 I °o O CONCRETE FOOTING,9000 P51
Sod° ° 0 0 — =IIIII III
oo III_N 111=oo p — SUBGRADE v OR coMpAGTEv
.r _
op 0 111 IIIII 4>0 0 0 °0 1111=
=11111 0 ¶(j — 8-MIH COMPACTED 6RAVEL BASE
.0 o° 1� 1111=IIIII-III -IIIII
IIIII
00 C�
All 5'BAR,12'O.G.
I. 8' 10' 8' S'BARS CONTINIJIM
NOTES:I.ALL REINFORCING BARS TO HAVE MAN.2'COVER
Z GONGRETE STAIRS 94ALI!, NTS
LILLY LIBRARY WORK RM. CEILING ADDENDUM NO. 1
19 MEADOW ST. & LIGHTING LAYOUT TT FLORENCE �( A-2 MA 01060 rt CAOLO & BIENIEK ASSOCIATES, INC. K
ARCHITECTURE*PLANNINGSINTERIDR DESIGN
�QQATE�: 1• 521 East Street Chicopee, Massachusetts 01020-4161
SCALE. 1 011 - 11-011 (413)594-2800 Fax(413)594-2900 info @CBAarchitects.net
E
11 W
I -
ONE
q'-6" 105
W RK R .
I 1O I
I
I
I
SAT I
I Os
QIL
® I
4
WORK ROOM PLAN
1/8" = 1'-0"
LILLY LIBRARY WORK RM. CEILING ADDENDUM NO. 1
19 MEADOW ST. & LIGHTING LAYOUT
FLORENCE A-1
MA 01060 CAOLO & BIENIEK ASSOCIATES, INC.
I C[:� ARCHITECTURE@ PLAN N IN G@I NTERI D R DESIGN
DATE: 5.31.05 521 East Street Chicopee, Massachusetts 01020-4161
SCALE: 1/8" = 11-011 (413)594-2800 Fax(413)594-2900 info@CBAarchitects.net
Item No. 14 Drawing No. A802
Add the note: At the new stair and elevator lobbies there shall be a continuous wood
base from First Floor to Second Floor to match the new base as shown in
Profile A on Drawing No.A202.
Item No. 15 Plumbing Sketch
Added floor drain in toilet room 209, second floor. Refer to plumbing sketches, SK-PI &
SK-P2 attached to this Addendum.
Item No. 16 Plumbing Sketch
Added roof drain to lower roof on building, increased storm drain from 5" to 6" storm
drain leaving building. Refer to plumbing sketches, SK-P1, SK-P2 and SK-P3 attached to
this Addendum.
Item No. 17 Drawing E-I
Lighting Fixture Schedule:
(e) Add type"W",fixture to be Lithonia type`PVC 2 17 Al2 120 GEB".
Item No. 18 Drawing E-2
Janitor's Room 212 on second floor:
1'x4' Light fixture shown in that room shall be type"E".
Item No. 19 Drawing E-3
Partial First Floor Plan:
(a) Replace"Drawing C-4 with Drawing C-5"in a note reading"To Utility Pole on Church
Street, see Drawing C-4 for location".
(b) Add a note: Provide 14"& 1-2"conduit risers up the Utility Pole as directed by Verizon
&CATV respectively,CWMARS' 4"conduit shall be stubbed up 6"above grade at the
base of pole and capped rain tight.
First Floor Plan Power&Signal:
(a) Provide 120V dedicated branch circuit to Automatic Door operator and all manufacturer
furnished accessories and devices like push button,actuators,motors,transformers etc. at
Doors 116& 117 in new vestibule. Branch circuit shall be derived from Panel ACP,
provide 1P-20A C.B. in Panel required for this purpose.
(b) Provide switch to operate Auto Projector Screen and wire to the screen.
END OF ADDENDUM#1
Lilly Library
Renovations and Expansion
Addendum#1 Page 5
(5) Recessed Door Contacts Sentrol 10
(6) Motion Detector—Wall MX934I
(7) Motion Detector—Ceiling MX938I
(8) Local Sounders Wave2
Control / Communicator shall be Addressable with integral Digital Communicator
programmable for Customer provided Central Station Monitoring.
All Door Contacts and Motion Sensors are to be individually identified as a point
(address)except dual doors,which can be addressed as one.
Cabling shall be 4c/20 to Motion Detectors and Keypad, (4c shall be cabled to 2 wire
Multiplex Motions for future compatibility). Provide wiring in conduit when running on
exposed walls/ceiling and where required by code. Provide necessary wiring as per
manufacturer's requirement to all devices and equipment to make the system work as per
manufacturer's instruction.
Device cabling can be looped and/or T-Tapped.
Provide 120V power(3 #12 in %"conduit)to main central control panel from Panel LP 1.
Reporting to central monitoring agency shall be as required by Library, verify.
Provide necessary wiring to equipment.
DRAWING ITEMS:
Item No. 1 I Drawing No. A202-Door and Frame Schedule
Make the following changes: All SCW (Solid Core Wood) doors shall be Oak with
transparent finish applied at the factory with touch-up in
the field by the installer.
Item No. 12 Drawing No. A203, Details 3 and 4
Add the note: Replace existing sills at the second floor windows and finish to match
existing. All existing window casings and trim shall be refinished in place
as noted. No finish work (exterior or interior) is required at the existing
wood sashes.
Item No. 13 Drawing No. A401 -.West Elevation
Provide a horizontal divider mullion on the C type fixed windows in the stairwell as shown
on Drawing No.A203.
Lilly Library
Renovations and Expansion
Addendum#1 Page 4
`Waste Material:All rubbish created by the Electrical Contractor shall be removed by
the electrical contractor from all working areas and dumped into General
contractor supplied dumpster on site".
(c) Page— 13:
(1) Section 1.25 D:
Replace the sentence with:
"Approximately 10%of the existing Fluorescent Light Fixtures that are to be removed
are equipped with PCB Ballasts and Mercury in Lamps, electrical coritractor is
responsible in removing those ballasts and lamps by acquiring services of EPA certified
agency that has an extensive experience in removing Hazardous material.All removed
ballasts shall be packed as approved by EPA and hand them to general contractor
for disposal.
(d) Page-19:
(1) Section 2.12 A line 4:
Replace 70"High with 78"High.
2. Provide new Security System containing:
(a) Door contacts as per following:
(1). Five on first floor,one at each Door 102, 107, 108, 117,and 119.
(2). Two on second floor,at double door 201.
(b) Motion Sensors One each in following areas:
(1) First Floor:
Fiction, Stairwell,Work Room,Non Fiction,and Main new Vestibule, Program
Room.
(c) Key pad located in new front Vestibule.
(d) Central Main Control Panel located in Boiler Room.
(E) Security System shall have following equipment:
(1) Addressable Control/Communicator DS7400XI
(2) Alpha Keypad DS7447
(3) Addressable Input Module DS7457
(4) 48-Hour Battery Backup
Lilly Library
Renovations and Expansion
Addendum#1 Page 3
limited basis for removals and installations. Such access will be
coordinated with the General Contractor to avoid interference
with construction activities.
Item No. 6 Specification Section 01040, Project Coordination:
Paragraph 1.4- Coordination With Owner, Sub Paragraph E
Change: the work hours to read 8:00 A.M. to 4:30 P.M. and as spelled out in the
Settlement Agreement attached to Section 01000A - Special
Supplementary Conditions.
Item No. 7 Specification Section 01500, Temporary Facilities:
Paragraph 3.25-Enclosure Fence
Add the following: F. The site enclosure fence shall follow the "limit of work"
line as shown on Drawing C-5 within the property boundaries.
The fence shall provide isolation of two (2) existing trees to the
drip edge of their canopies - the 14" Maple on Susan Bourque's
property and the 40"Beech in the parking lot.
Item No. 8 Specification Section 05500,Metal Fabrications
Paragraph 1.02-Summary of Work, Sub Paragraph A
Delete: Item 9-Metal Pan Stairs
Item No. 9 Specification Section 15400, Plumbing
Paragraph 1.8- Tools, Scaffolding, ETC.
All scaffolding over 8 feet shall be provided by the General Contractor.
Item No. 10 Specification Section 16000, Electrical
1. Make the following changes:
(a) Page—6:
(1) Section 1.4 A 4 line 3: replace 15500 with 15600.
(2) Section 1.5 C 1 should read"State of Massachusetts 2005 Electric Code".
(3) Section 1.5 C 4 should read"Requirements of Town of Northampton".
(b) Page—8:
(1) Section 1.8 A:
Add a line"Any scaffolding over 8 feet shall be by General Contractor".
Section 1.8 B:
Replace the sentence with:
Lilly Library
Renovations and Expansion
Addendum#1 Page 2
Y
CURTIS A.EDGIN,A.I.A.,N.C.A.R.B.
JAMES M.HANIFAN,A.I.A.,N.C.A.R.B,
KENNETH R.JODRIE
VITO CAOLO,A.I.A.,N.C.A.R.B.
CAOLO & BIENIEK ASSOCIATES , INC.
A R C H I T E C T U R E • P L A N N I N G • I N T E R I O R D E S I G N
LILLY LIBRARY
RENOVATIONS AND EXPANSION
Florence,MA
Addendum No. 1 June 3,2005
This addendum is issued for the purpose of amending the requirements of the contract documents and is
hereby made a part of the contract drawings and specifications to the same extent as though it were fully
incorporated therein.
This addendum consists of five (5) pages of text inclusive of this page and five (5) Sketches for a total of
ten(10)pages.
GENERAL ITEMS:
Item No. 1 The date for Filed Sub-bids has been extended to June 14, 2005.
Item No. 2 BID SECURITY-All Bid Security payments shall be made payable to The Lilly Library
Association.
SPECIFICATION ITEMS:
Item No. 3 Conditions of the Contract, Article 2:Designer
Paragraph 2.1 -Definition
Add the following: Wherever the word "Designer" is used in the General Conditions of
the contract it means "The Architect" as later defined in the specific
bid proposals.
Item No. 4 Conditions of the Contract, Article 3: Owner
Modify: the definition of the Owner to indicate that The Lilly Library
Association and the City of Northampton are co-owners of the project
with the City's share equal to a$500,000 appropriation.
Item No. 5 Specification Section 01010, Summary of Work
Paragraph 1.8-Owner Occupancy
Add the following: J. The Library will be closed during construction. The
Owner reserves the right to access the site and building on a
521 East Street Chicopee, Massachusetts 01020-4161 • (413)594-2800•Fax(413) 594-2900•info @cbaarchitects.net
�k
t
}
i
7